JP2019213719A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving a player's interest in a game.SOLUTION: In a state in which a second game state advantageous to a player is set by game state setting means, a game state can be made more advantageous when operation means is operated with a second operation content in which a game ball is easily launched by launching means at a launching interval longer than a first launching interval than when the operation means is operated with a first operation content in which a game ball is easily launched by the launching means at the first launching interval at least while a preset specific condition is established. Thereby, the player's interest in the game can be improved.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 263

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, execute a hit game when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball in a starting winning port is a hit. Among such gaming machines, there are those in which a plurality of states having different degrees of advantage for the player can be set, and a game aiming at a hit game is performed in various states, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game. is there.

JP 2001-038007 A

  However, further improvement of interest is required.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 includes operating means operable by a player, and launching means capable of firing a game ball in accordance with the operation performed on the operating means. A plurality of game modes including at least a first game state disadvantageous to the player and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state, based on the establishment of the predetermined setting condition. Game state setting means capable of setting one game state from among the states, wherein the gaming machine is in the second game state while at least a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. A game ball is more likely to be fired at a firing interval longer than the first firing interval, rather than operating the operating means with a first operation content in which a game ball is easily fired at a first firing interval by the firing means. Second operation In which person in the case of operating the operating means in volume is configured to easily be advantageous.

  According to a second aspect of the present invention, there is provided the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein predetermined discrimination information is based on a ball-in means capable of entering a game ball and a game ball having entered the ball-in means. Determination information obtaining means capable of obtaining the information, a determination means for performing a determination based on the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means, and a specific determination in which a determination result of the determination means is predetermined. Bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the result, wherein the gaming machine performs the first operation content while the specific condition is satisfied. Until the operation using the second operation content is performed until the determination using all of the determination information obtained in the second game state is completed, the case where the operation means is operated with the second operation content is compared with the case where the operation means is operated. Number of discrimination by the discriminating means in Is configured tends to be many.

  According to a third aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the second aspect, based on the second ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, and a game ball entering the second ball entry means. A second discrimination information acquisition unit capable of acquiring discrimination information, and the discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition unit, up to a predetermined number of information, until the discrimination unit uses the discrimination information. A storage unit capable of storing, wherein the determination unit is configured to perform a determination using the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining unit, and to be obtained by the second determination information obtaining unit. And a second discriminating means for performing discrimination using the discrimination information, wherein the discrimination by the first discriminating means is a more advantageous discrimination result than the discrimination by the second discriminating means. It is easy to be configured Wherein the gaming machine operates the operation means with the second operation content, rather than operating the operation means with the first operation content, while the specific condition is satisfied. It is configured such that the number of determinations by the first determination unit until the determination using all the determination information acquired in the second game state is completed is likely to increase.

  According to a fourth aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the third aspect, the determination by the second determination unit is performed prior to the determination by the first determination unit. is there.

  According to a fifth aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the third or fourth aspect, the gaming state setting means performs the first predetermined number of times without executing the privilege game in the second gaming state. The first game state is set based on the end of the judgment by the first judgment means, and the game state setting means sets the second game state without executing the privilege game in the second game state. The first game state is set based on the completion of the second number of discriminations by the second discrimination means that is greater than one.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the game machine includes: an operating means operable by the player; and a firing means capable of firing a game ball in accordance with the operation content of the operating means, Based on the establishment of the predetermined setting condition, one of a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state disadvantageous to the player and a second gaming state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. Game state setting means capable of setting a game state of the game machine, wherein the gaming machine uses the firing means by the firing means while at least a predetermined condition is satisfied in the second game state. A second operation in which a game ball is easily fired at a firing interval longer than the first firing interval, compared to operating the operating means with a first operation content in which a game ball is easily fired at a first firing interval. The contents of the operation means In which better in the case of operation it is configured to be liable to be advantageous.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine of the first aspect, in addition to the ball entry means capable of entering a game ball and the game ball entering the ball entry means, Discriminating information acquiring means capable of acquiring predetermined discriminating information based on the discriminating information, discriminating means for performing discrimination based on the discriminating information acquired by the discriminating information acquiring means, A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the result of the determined specific determination, wherein the gaming machine is configured to execute the special game while the specific condition is satisfied. The discrimination using all of the discrimination information acquired in the second game state is better when the operation means is operated with the second operation content than when the operation means is operated with the first operation content. Said judgment until the end of Determination count means is constituted easily increases.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the second aspect, the second ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, and the game ball entering the second ball entry means A second discrimination information acquisition unit capable of acquiring the discrimination information based on the determination performed, and determining the discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition unit with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit. Storage means that can be stored until used in the determination of the first determination means, wherein the determination means performs a determination using the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means, the second determination And a second determining means for performing a determination using the determination information obtained by the information obtaining means. The determination by the first determining means is made by the determination by the second determining means. Also gives a favorable judgment result The gaming machine is configured such that, while the specific condition is satisfied, the operating means is operated with the second operation content rather than operating the operating means with the first operation content. Is operated, the number of determinations by the first determination means is more likely to be increased until the determination using all the determination information acquired in the second game state is completed. It is.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine of the third aspect, the determination of the second determination unit is performed with higher priority than the determination of the first determination unit. It is configured.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the fifth aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the third or fourth aspect, the gaming state setting means determines in advance that the privilege game is not executed in the second gaming state. The first game state is set based on the completion of the first number of determinations made by the first determination means, and the game state setting means sets the privilege game in the second game state. The first game state is set based on the fact that the determination by the second determination means has been completed a second number of times greater than the first number without being executed.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation unit. It is the operation | movement figure which looked at the operation unit from the back side. (A) is a schematic view of the closed state of the operating unit as viewed from above, and (b) is a schematic view of the opened state of the operating unit as viewed from above. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in a 1st embodiment, and (b) is a display mode of a 3rd symbol display device in a 1st embodiment which is displayed. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example. (A) And (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the time of entering a time-saving state displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A) And (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the time saving state displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode in a case where the small hit A is won during the time saving state displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A) And (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode in a case where the small hit B was won during the time saving state displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the contents of the situation display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in a 1st embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that emphasizes right-handing among small hitting A gaming screens displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing (b). It is a figure showing an example when a ball wins after a) was displayed. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display screen that emphasizes right-handing among small hitting B gaming screens displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing ((a)). It is a figure showing an example when a ball wins after a) was displayed. It is a figure showing the outline of various counters in a 1st embodiment. FIG. 2A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a ROM in the main control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2B is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM in the main control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first random number table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a special symbol 1 random number table in the first embodiment. FIG. 3C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special symbol 2 random number table in the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first hit type selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special figure 1 big hit type selection table in the first embodiment. FIG. 3C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 big hit type selection table in the first embodiment, and FIG. 4D is a schematic diagram showing the time saving in the first embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the addition table typically. It is the model which showed typically the content of the small hit type selection table in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a fluctuation pattern table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal fluctuation pattern table in the first embodiment. FIG. It is the model which showed typically the content of the variation pattern table for time saving in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an open scenario table in the first embodiment. FIG. 3A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a ROM in the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 3B is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM in the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment. is there. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the state display selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the final state display selection table in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. It is the model which showed typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(f) is the timing chart which showed the flow of the small hit game at the time of the small hit A win in the first embodiment. (A)-(f) is a timing chart showing the flow of the small hit game at the time of the small hit B win in the first embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining a power-on image. (A) is an explanatory view explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram explaining the back surface B. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a display data table according to the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table according to the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a drawing list according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change start processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting start setting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting time saving update process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving frequency update process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V entrance passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows winning information related processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit related process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the big hit end performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving update process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit related update process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a V interruption process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a stop type command process. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing an error command process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a hit-related command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a jackpot start command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the round number command process. (A) is a flowchart showing a jackpot end command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit start command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a small hit end command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing a V entrance passage command process. (A) is a flowchart showing a V effect command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing an instruction command process. It is a flow chart which shows production related command processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 1st embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the time of the end of the big hit displayed on the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a third symbol display device in the second embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of entering the time-saving state displayed. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a left-handed game is started during the time saving state displayed on the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the second embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the time of starting a right-handed game during the time saving state displayed on the third symbol display device in the embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the display mode regarding the right-handed game in the time saving state displayed on the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed the time-saving game content in the time-saving state in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM in the main control device according to the second embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM in the main control device in the second embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first random number 2 table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 2 table in the second embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special symbol 2 random number 2 table in the second embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first hit type selection 2 table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a content of a special figure 1 big hit type selection 2 table in the second embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 big hit type selection 2 table in the second embodiment, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the second embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time saving provision 2 table in a form. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern 2 table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time reduction fluctuation pattern 2 table in the second embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a small hit type selection table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the special figure 1 small hit type selection 2 table in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically, (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the special figure 2 small hitting type selection 2 table in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM in the audio ramp control device according to the second embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM in the audio ramp control device in the second embodiment. is there. It is the figure which showed typically the prescribed | regulated content of the hold | maintenance display selection table set in ROM in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving frequency update process 2 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows start winning processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows winning information related processing 2 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a game state setting process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game content determination processing performed. It is a flowchart which shows the hold | maintenance display setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows variable display setting processing 2 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the various counter update processing 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode in the time saving state displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in a 3rd embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the end of the time saving state displayed on the third symbol display device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a third symbol display device in the third embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a time saving state displayed by. (A) And (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode in the time saving state displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example showing the number of times of saving in the time saving state displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a block diagram showing composition of ROM in a main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 3 table in the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 3 table in the third embodiment. And (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 3 table in the third embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a small hit type selection 3 table set in the ROM of the main control device according to the third embodiment, and (b) is a main control according to the third embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time saving provision 3 table set in ROM of the apparatus. It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the opening scenario 3 table set to ROM in the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM in the audio ramp control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM in the audio ramp control device in the third embodiment. is there. It is the model which showed typically the content of the time reduction | restoration period discrimination table set in ROM in the audio lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process 3 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit control processing 3 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows production setting processing 3 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time-saving remaining-period determination process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows fixed change discrimination processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode displayed on a 3rd symbol display device when time saving A is set as a time saving state in a 4th embodiment, and (b) is a 4th embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device when a time saving B is set as a time saving state in FIG. (A) And (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display aspect of the time reduction correction effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM in a main control device according to the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM in the main control device according to the fourth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first random number 4 table in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 4 table in the fourth embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection four table in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is the contents of the special figure one big hit type selection four table in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 14C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 big hit type selection 4 table in the fourth embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern 4 table in 4th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern table for normal use in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern table for time saving A in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the variation pattern table for time reduction B in the fourth embodiment. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit type selection 4 table in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM in the audio ramp control device according to the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM in the audio ramp control device in the fourth embodiment. is there. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judgment processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the game state update processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change stop processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit judging processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation | variation process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation | change pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change stop processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 departure stop process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 4 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit control processing 4 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows production setting processing 4 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows display time savings number correction processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 4th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of 1st Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode in the time saving state displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the production modification of each embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display mode in the time saving state displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the production modification of each embodiment. (B) is a figure explaining the flow of the production in the modification of production. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. (A) is an enlarged front view in which the upper part of the game board in the fifth embodiment is enlarged. (A) is an enlarged front view showing that the electric accessory provided on the game board according to the fifth embodiment is in an open state, and (b) is an electric motor provided on the game board according to the fifth embodiment. It is a front enlarged view which shows that an accessory is in a closed state. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device when the big hit game is started in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a big hit game in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the display mode displayed by the 3rd symbol display device which can be displayed inside. It is a schematic diagram which showed the time-saving game content in the time-saving state in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a fluctuation pattern 5 table in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a time-saving simultaneous fluctuation pattern table in the fifth embodiment. FIG. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM in an audio ramp control device according to a fifth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows main processing 5 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 5th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 5 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the signal input process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 5 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows production update processing 5 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 5th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 6th Embodiment. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board in 6th Embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed typically the opening pattern of the electric accessory in 6th Embodiment. It is a transition diagram showing a destination of a game state transition in the sixth embodiment. It is a block diagram showing composition of RAM in a main control unit in a 6th embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a selection table for special figure 1 set in a ROM in a main control device according to the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a main control device according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special figure 2 selection table set in a ROM in the system. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 6 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing 6 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an ending process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the sixth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is a top view of a V winning device. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the opening pattern of the small hit in 7th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the time saving state of a 7th embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a 3rd symbol display device when a small hit is won during a time saving state in a 7th embodiment, and (b) is a figure in a 7th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode of the 3rd symbol display device when a small hit is won after the end of the time saving state. (A) is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a ROM in a main control device according to a seventh embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM in the main control device according to the seventh embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special symbol 1 random number table in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the seventh embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the specification content of the random number table for 2nd in 7th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the specified contents of a first hit type selection table in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the specified contents of a direct hit table in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 17C is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents of a V-hit table according to the seventh embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a time savings grant table in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the prescribed contents of a time saving variation pattern table in the seventh embodiment. FIG. It is the model which showed typically the mode transition method in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 7 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit start setting processing 7 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows normal symbol change processing 7 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process 7 performed by the MPU in the main control unit in the seventh embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit control processing 7 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows winning information related processing 7 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit related process 7 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start command process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode displayed on a 3rd symbol display device in a time saving state of an 8th embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode displayed by a 3rd symbol display device at the time of end of a time saving state of an 8th embodiment, and (b) is a figure after an end of a time saving state in an 8th embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of winning a small hit with the holding ball of a 2nd special symbol. (A) is a diagram showing a temporal change of the effect mode when a start winning prize corresponding to a small hit is detected within 5 seconds from the start of the fluctuation in the last fluctuation display in the time saving state of the eighth embodiment, FIG. 17B is a diagram showing a temporal change of the presentation mode when a start winning prize corresponding to a small hit is detected after 5 seconds from the start of the fluctuation in the last fluctuation display in the time saving state of the eighth embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM in a main control device according to the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special symbol 1 random number table according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 18C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special symbol 2 random number table in the eighth embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the specified contents of a first hit type selection table in the eighth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the specified contents of the special direct hit table in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 13C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special 2 direct hit table in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 14D is a schematic diagram showing the V hit table in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the time savings grant table in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the prescribed contents of the per-figure type selection table in the eighth embodiment. FIG. It is the model which showed typically the mode transition method of the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing composition of RAM in an audio ramp control device in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 8 performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the number-of-times-savings update process 8 performed by the MPU in the main control unit in the eighth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows normal symbol change processing 8 performed by MPU in the main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows main processing 8 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows production update processing 8 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in an 8th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 8 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows winning information related processing 8 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in an 8th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stop command process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving update process 8 performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the eighth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows production setting processing 8 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in an 8th embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the switching pattern of the switching valve provided in the distribution apparatus in 9th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the prescribed content of the time saving provision table in 9th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the mode transition method of the pachinko machine in 9th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting processing 9 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit control processing 9 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 10th Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode which shows that the degree of expectation that a probability change state is set is high in a 10th embodiment, and (b) shows a probability change state in a 10th embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode indicating that a set degree of expectation is low. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM in the main control device according to the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM in the main control device according to the tenth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first random number table in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the contents of a first type selection table in the tenth embodiment. It is a block diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a special one hit table in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the specified contents of the special two hit table in the tenth embodiment. FIG. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a fluctuation pattern table in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal table in the tenth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the time saving table in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the prescribed contents of the limit reaching table in the tenth embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a time savings grant table in the tenth embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the regulation content of the fluctuation pattern scenario table in 10th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the mode transition method of the pachinko machine in 10th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM in an audio ramp control device in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM in the audio ramp control device in the tenth embodiment. is there. It is a mimetic diagram showing typically regulation contents of a back mode lottery table in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing 10 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 10 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judgment processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows game state update processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change execution processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change stop processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit judgment processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change in-execution processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change stop processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit control processing 10 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows variable display setting processing 10 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows production setting processing 10 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 10th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of 10th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal table in a modification of the tenth embodiment. (B) is a specification of a limit arrival table in a modification of the tenth embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the prescribed | regulated content of the time saving provision table in the modification of 10th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the regulation content of the fluctuation pattern scenario table in the modification of 10th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 11th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed on a 3rd symbol display apparatus in the 7th time saving time among the time saving states of 11th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode displayed on a 3rd symbol display device at the 8th time saving time in the time saving state of 11th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed on a 3rd symbol display apparatus in the 10th time saving time among the time saving states of 11th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display aspect displayed on a 3rd symbol display device when the special figure 2 reservation number or more is acquired in the time saving state of 11th Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode displayed on a 3rd symbol display device when a small hit is won without special figure 2 reservation in the time saving state of the eleventh embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the prescribed contents of the time reduction grant table in the eleventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the regulation content of the normal use fluctuation pattern table in 11th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the regulation content of the variation pattern table for time saving in 11th Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing composition of RAM in a voice lamp control device in an eleventh embodiment. (A)-(e) is the figure which showed typically the flow of the expectation degree change of the special figure 2 reserved ball number in the time saving state of 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 11 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows winning information related processing 11 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in an eleventh embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 2 prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in an eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process during the period before completion | finish performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end process 11 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start command processing 11 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows stop command processing 11 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in an 11th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows production setting processing 11 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in an eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 4 to 7 are schematic diagrams schematically showing the structure of a V winning device 650 provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 8 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having ball entrances 63, 64, 640, etc., into which a large number of nails and balls can enter, is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 9) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached. The contents of the many entrances provided in the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes to the front side and opens the upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 9) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the Super Reach effect. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of big hit, predetermined reach or the like, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as stage lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lamps 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach stage. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (launch strength), and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  Specifically, a ball fired at a firing intensity of 90% to 100% always passes through the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80, and a ball fired at a firing intensity of 40% to 50% always variably displays. Most of the spheres fired at a firing intensity of 50% to 60% are configured to pass through the left area of the device unit 80, and mostly pass through the left area of the variable display device unit 80, and a part is variably displayed. It passes through the area on the right side of the device unit 80. In addition, the ball fired at a firing intensity of 70% to 90% mostly passes through the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80, and a part of the ball passes through the area on the left side of the variable display unit 80. Have been.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of ball guide nails (not shown), a windmill, rails 61 and 62, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the first variable winning device 65, the V winning device 650, a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled. The peripheral portion is attached to the back surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first opening 64, the second opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the V winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. And is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the band-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member connecting the rails (a winning opening and the like are provided and fired). (The area where the ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 9) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37a and 37b each including a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided on the upper right side (the upper right side in FIG. 2) of the game area in front view. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are used for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are configured to be properly used depending on whether the ball has won the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. . Specifically, when the ball has won the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37a is activated. On the other hand, when the ball has won the second ball entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37b is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in time reduction or normal operation by a lighting state, indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is fluctuating by a lighting state, or indicate a stop symbol by LEDs. Is a symbol corresponding to a time-saving jackpot (a jackpot in which the time-saving state is set as a gaming state after the jackpot game) or a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot (a jackpot in which the normal state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot game is ended) The presence or absence of a ball is indicated by a lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state, and the number of rounds during a big hit and an error are displayed by a 7-segment display device. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to a prize winning at the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 15 rounds, and the time-saving state is given after the end of the jackpot. There are prepared a 5R time-saving jackpot (5R time-saving jackpot) to which a time-saving state is given, and a 5R ordinary jackpot (5R time-saving no jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 5R and the time-saving state is not given after the end of the jackpot.

  In addition, in some cases where it is determined that the hit is not a jackpot as described above as a result of the jackpot lottery, the privilege given to the player is smaller than the jackpot described above (for example, the V winning device 650 is opened only for one round). A privilege to make small hits is available. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit (whether or not it is a small hit) as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but also indicate if the result is a big hit. A symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown.

  Here, “15R time-saving jackpot” means a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the time-saving state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and “5R time-saving jackpot” means that the maximum number of rounds is after 5 rounds of jackpot. It is a jackpot that shifts to a time reduction state. The “5R normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the normal state without shifting to the time saving state after the five rounds of jackpots.

  In other words, with the present pachinko machine 10, as a jackpot game provided when a special symbol jackpot is won, a player can be given the most bonuses, "15R hourly jackpots", and the next most awards can be given. It is configured to provide any one of the following “5R hourly jackpot” and “5R regular jackpot”, which is the least privilege given to the player among the jackpot games. As a result, the game is performed while expecting that the jackpot game to which the largest number of awards will be provided will be provided among the jackpot games in which the benefits that can be provided are different even when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. Can be made.

  In the present embodiment, the bonus given to the player according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game (the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the jackpot game) and the content of the game state set after the jackpot game ends. The size is defined, but the size is not limited to this, and the size of the privilege given to the player may be defined using conditions other than the above conditions, or different benefits may be provided without defining the size of the benefit. The content of the jackpot game may be different so as to be performed.

  In addition, the “time reduction state” is a game in which a ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640 although the probability of the jackpot is the same as in the normal state as an added value (privilege) given to the player after the end of the jackpot. State. In order to make the ball easily enter the second entrance 640, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second symbol is shorter than that in the normal state, and the lottery result of the second symbol is a hit. The operation mode of the electric accessory 640a to be operated in such a case is set so that the period in which the ball easily enters the second entrance 640 is longer than in the normal state. It should be noted that other configurations may be used to set a game state in which a ball easily enters the second entrance 640, a part of the above-described setting contents may be used, or the above-described contents may be used. In addition to the above, a configuration may be adopted in which the winning probability of the second symbol is set higher than in the normal state.

  Further, as will be described later in detail, in the present embodiment, as a condition for terminating the "time saving state", the number of times of change (total number of times of change) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the first predetermined number of times (100 times). Either (the first end condition), or if the number of wins for the small hit in the special symbol lottery reaches the second predetermined number (for example, once) (the second end condition), When the game is established, the game state is shifted from the time saving state to the normal state. In this way, a plurality of end conditions for shifting the gaming state from the time saving state to the normal state are prepared, and when any one of the plurality of end conditions is satisfied, the state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state. By doing so, it is possible to set a plurality of timings at which the time saving state ends, and it is possible to make the player play the game while pounding on how long the time saving state advantageous to the player than the normal state continues it can.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of small hit types (for example, small hits A to small hits C) are prepared as small hits that can be won in the special symbol lottery, and a second type for each small hit type is provided. The number of times the end condition is satisfied is set differently. With this configuration, it is difficult to predict whether or not the time-saving state will be completed only by the number of small hits that have been won during the time-saving state. A game can be played.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a specific area is provided in the V winning device 650 opened during the small hit game, and the ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game (the special discharge channel 650e2 as the specific area). (See FIG. 6) when the V switch 650e3 provided in the... Detects a ball. In addition, although the details will be described later, the degree of expectation (V winning expectation) that the ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game is different depending on the small hit type of the winning small hit. Then, the number of times that the second end condition set for each small hitting type is satisfied (the number of small hittings) is set so that the small hitting type in which the small hitting game having a high V winning expectation degree is executed is smaller. Make up.

  With this configuration, it is possible to associate a V winning award expectation for obtaining two kinds of wins when a small hit is won during a time-saving game with an anxiety that the time-saving state may end, A player can be motivated to play a game.

  In the present embodiment, the first predetermined number (100 times) is set as an end condition (first end condition) as described above with respect to the number of times the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) changes. However, other end conditions may be set for the number of times the special symbol changes, for example, when the number of changes of only the first special symbol becomes a third predetermined number (for example, 50). Alternatively, the end condition of the time saving state may be satisfied when the number of changes of only the second special symbol reaches a fourth predetermined number (for example, 80). Further, only some of the above-mentioned many termination conditions may be used, or each of them may be appropriately combined.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which ten balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by a prize (starting prize) of a ball entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 as a trigger, while synchronizing with the fluctuation display on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) for performing a variation display of the third symbol, and the passage of a sphere to a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 as a trigger. There is provided a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs for variably displaying two symbols. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a large liquid crystal display having a size of 15 inches, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 9). One symbol row is displayed (see FIG. 10). Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols). These third symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, whereas the The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37a and 37b is performed.

  That is, the third symbol display device 81 variably displays the third symbol (corresponding to the period (dynamic display period) in which the first symbol is variably displayed (variable display) on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b ( The third symbol is specially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in correspondence with the timing at which the first symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the special symbol lottery result on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. It is stopped and displayed in a display mode according to the symbol lottery result.

  That is, the determination by the determination means is performed based on the determination conditions (the winning of the ball to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640) being established (a special symbol lottery is executed), and a predetermined symbol is determined. After the identification information (third symbol) is dynamically displayed (variable display) until the dynamic display period elapses, in a display mode (combination of symbols) indicating the determination result (lottery result of the special symbol) by the determination means. , The identification information (third symbol) is stopped and displayed. Thereby, the player can grasp the lottery result of the special symbol by grasping the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  It should be noted that the third symbol stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only needs to be in a display mode in accordance with the lottery result of the special symbol. A display mode corresponding to the result (only the result) or a display mode corresponding to the details of the lottery result of the special symbol (for example, the type of the winning jackpot) may be used. In addition, when there are three types of lottery results (for example, a big hit, a small hit, and a miss) as the special symbol lottery results, the special symbol lottery results are the three types of lotteries described above as the third symbol display mode. A display mode indicating that the result is one of two specific types (for example, a big hit or a small hit) may be used.

  Further, instead of the display device used in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like, or the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with a plurality of display devices.

  The second symbol display device 83 displays a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67. Are displayed alternately for a predetermined period of time (dynamic display). In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the winning lottery results in a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is moved. It is configured to be activated (projected) for a predetermined time. Although the details will be described later, the ball can enter the second entrance 640 by changing the electric accessory 640a to the operating state.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter in the time reduction state than in the normal game state. Accordingly, during the time reduction state, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the normal state. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given many opportunities to activate the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640. Therefore, during the time saving state, a state in which a ball can easily enter the second entrance 640 can be achieved.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the player wins the second symbol (normal symbol) during the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is more likely to be elected than when the player wins the second symbol (normal symbol) during the normal state. The operation period (the period during which the electric accessory 640a is protruded and the ball easily enters the second entrance 640) is configured to be long. This makes it possible for the ball to easily enter the second entrance 640 during the time saving state.

  In addition, the configuration for making the ball easily enter the second ball entrance 640 during the time saving state is not limited to the above-described content. For example, the hitting probability of the second symbol is increased for one hit. A configuration may be used in which the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a are increased. In addition, when the operation time of the electric accessory 640a is changed so that the time saving state is such that a ball can easily enter the second entrance 640, the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set regardless of the gaming state. It may be constant. On the other hand, when the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set shorter during the time reduction than during the normal time, the winning probability may be constant irrespective of the game state, or the electric winning for one hit may be performed. The opening time and the number of times the object 640a is opened may be constant regardless of the game state.

  Further, in the case where the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is changed according to the set game state and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a are changed, the variable display of the second symbol is started. The variable display time of the second symbol is determined in accordance with the game state set at a certain point in time, the variable display of the second symbol is stopped, and the timing (second symbol of the second symbol) indicating the winning is displayed. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be determined according to the gaming state set in the winning game, that is, at the timing of operating the electric accessory 640a. With such a configuration, for example, when the second symbol whose fluctuation is started during the time saving state is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating a hit during the normal state, the electric accessory 640a corresponding to the normal state during the normal state is displayed. It can be operated in an operation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately associate the set gaming state with the operation pattern of the electric accessory to be executed.

  The relationship between the game state, the variation time of the second symbol, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a may be other than the above-described contents. For example, the change start timing of the second symbol and the operation of the electric accessory 640a may be defined. If it is determined that the time reduction state is set as the game state at any one of the start timings, the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is an operation pattern advantageous to the player (executed during the time reduction state). (Operation pattern) may be set.

  The normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board 13 on the right side in the lower area of the variable display unit 80 as shown in FIG. 2, and among the balls fired on the game board, A part (almost) of a sphere flowing down the right side of the board is configured to be able to pass. When the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation. If the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variation display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result is out. If there is, the symbol “x” is displayed as the symbol for stopping the variable display.

  In this embodiment, the ball does not have a function of retaining that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. In the case where the player has the function of performing the game, for example, the game is held up to a total of four times, and the second symbol holding display means for indicating the number of held balls can be visually recognized by the player (for example, the third symbol display device 81). Part).

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device. This may be performed using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. If the ball has a function of holding the ball passing through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the number of holdings is not limited to four, but three or less, or five or more. (For example, 8 times). Moreover, the number of assembling of the normal symbol start ports (through gates) 67 is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol retaining lamp may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 9), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the first entrance 64 is a game in which the ball flows down the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called left-handed game), and the right entrance of the variable display device unit 80 A nail is planted on the game board 13 so that the ball can easily enter than a game in which the ball flows down (a so-called right-handed game). Therefore, when a game state (normal state) in which a ball is unlikely to enter the second entrance 640 is set, a left-handed game is executed in order to allow the ball to enter the first entrance 64. You.

  On the other hand, a second entrance 640 into which a ball can enter is disposed on the right side of the first entrance 64 in a front view. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 9), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37b.

  The first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are each one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance port 64 and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second entrance port 640 are the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance port 640 are different from each other, for example, the first entry number. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the ball opening 64 may be set to three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 may be set to five.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, a switch (first entrance switch, second entrance switch) for detecting a ball serving as a special symbol lottery trigger (big hit lottery trigger) is provided in the entrance. Although it is configured to be able to acquire a prize ball while acquiring a lottery opportunity of a special symbol, other configurations may be used. For example, an area (gate) through which a ball can pass is provided, and the area (gate) is provided. When a switch (detection means) for detecting a passing ball detects the passage of the ball, a special symbol lottery opportunity may be obtained. In this case, at least a part of the ball that has passed through the area (gate) that can be a chance to win a special symbol lottery can be entered, and when the ball is entered, a predetermined number (for example, five) of prize balls are paid out. It is good to provide a ball entrance. With this configuration, the number of times the special symbol lottery opportunity is obtained and the number of times the prize ball is obtained can be made different, so that various game characteristics can be provided.

  The second entrance 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a can be changed between a protruding state (permissible state) protruding from the game board 13 to the near side (a front side in the viewpoint of FIG. 2) and a retracted state (regulated state) evacuated to the game board 13 side. Normally (when the winning is not achieved at the second symbol), the electric accessory 640a is in the retracted state (restricted state), and the ball is difficult to enter the second entrance 640. It has become. On the other hand, as a result of the fluctuation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the ordinary symbol starter (through gate) 67, a symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device, When a winning is achieved in the two symbol lottery, the electric accessory 640a is in a protruding state (permissible state), and the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640.

  Here, the ball flow to the second ball entrance 640 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the variable display device unit 80 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area of the game board 13, and the game area is located on the left side (left-handed area) of the variable display device unit 80. It is divided into the right side (right-handed area), and the player can adjust the operation amount of the operation handle 51 so that the destination of the shot ball can be divided into a right-handed area or a left-handed area. It is composed. Hereinafter, a game in which a player operates the operation handle 51 to shoot a ball to a left-hit area of the game area is referred to as a left-hit game, and a game in which a ball is shot to a right-hit area is referred to as a right-hit game.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the second entrance 640, the motorized accessory 640 a attached to the second entrance 640, and a lottery trigger for determining whether to operate the electric accessory 640 a. A normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is disposed in the right-handed area, and when the time-saving state is set as the gaming state, a right-handed game is performed.

  A nail is planted below the variable display device unit 80 so that the ball fired by the left-handed game does not enter the second ball entrance 640, and the second incoming ball is provided during the left-handed game. It is configured such that a ball does not enter the mouth 640. With such a configuration, in a left-handed game, a game in which a ball enters the first entrance 64 to change the first special symbol is performed, and in a right-handed game, the second special symbol is changed. For this reason, a game in which a ball enters the second entrance 640 can be performed, and different playability can be appropriately provided depending on the game method.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, in the right-handed area, a V winning device 650 whose upper surface is inclined downward in the lower left direction (the lower left direction in front view of FIG. 2). Each mechanism is arranged so that the ball that has flowed down the upper surface of the V winning device 650 normally passes through the symbol starting port (through gate) 67 and flows down toward the electric accessory 640a.

  Then, when the electric accessory 640a is located in the retracted state, the ball flows down to the variable winning device 65 after passing through the electric accessory 640a in the standby state. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is located in the protruding state, the sphere that has reached the electric accessory 640a flows downward and to the lower right (to the lower right in the front view of FIG. 2). When the ball that has reached the right end of the motorized accessory 640a enters the second ball entrance 640 and the electric accessory 640a is changed to the retracted state before reaching the right end of the motorized accessory 640a, the electric It is configured to enter the general winning opening 63 arranged below the accessory 640a.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a transparent cover member 655 so as to cover the electric accessory 640a, the second entrance 640, and the general winning opening 63 described above. The surface of the cover member 655 is subjected to cut processing for irregularly reflecting incident light. By providing the cover member 655, the player can visually recognize the inside of the cover member 655 by various light emitted from the light emitting means (such as an LED) provided on the pachinko machine 10 and the third symbol display device 81 during the game. It can be difficult. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the act of performing a right-handed game while aiming at the operation timing of the electric accessory 640a.

  In addition, in a state where the game is not performed (a state in which the power of the gaming machine is turned off), the incident light to the cover member is suppressed, so that the inside of the cover member 655 can be easily visually recognized, and the pachinko machine is provided. The machine 10 can be easily maintained. Note that, in the case where the configuration in which the internal visibility is changed using the cover member 655 is used, the light emitting unit that emits light for decoration can be used as described above to share the light emitting unit. Although the number of components constituting the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, a light emitting unit for making the inside of the cover member 655 difficult to see may be provided exclusively.

  In addition, the inside of the cover member 655 may be made difficult to visually recognize for a predetermined period including a period during which the operation of the electric accessory 640a is performed. For example, when it is determined that the operation of the electric accessory 640a is performed (that is, Controlling the light-emitting means so that a character (for example, "open") notifying that the electric accessory 640a operates on the surface of the cover member 655 is displayed when a win is made by a normal symbol lottery) The displayed characters may be configured to make the inside of the cover member 655 difficult to see. This makes it possible for the player to grasp that the electric accessory 640a operates, and to make it difficult to grasp the detailed operation timing.

  Here, the configuration of the right-handed area of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 3, among the balls fired by the right-handed game, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 flows down toward the area where the electric accessory 640a is provided. More specifically, the electric accessory 640a has a length of 50 mm, and is formed of a plate-like member on which an upper surface can flow a sphere, and a lower right direction (a lower right direction in a front view of FIG. 3). The game board 13 is disposed so as to be inclined downward toward. Then, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 flows down to an area a (see FIG. 3) corresponding to a range of 20 mm from the left end of the electric accessory 640a.

  The ball that has reached the area a passes through the electric accessory 640a and flows down to the variable winning device 65 when the electric accessory 640a is located in the retracted state. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is located at the protruding position, the ball flows down with the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a directed to the right end position. When the electric accessory 640a is changed to the retracted state with the ball reaching the area b (an area corresponding to 20 mm to 40 mm from the left end of the electric accessory 640a), the electric accessory is provided below the electric accessory 640a. The ball is configured to flow down toward the general winning opening 63. Finally, when the ball reaches the area c (the area corresponding to 20 mm from the right end of the electric accessory 640a), the ball is configured to enter the second entrance 640.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 45, in the present embodiment, the period during which the electric accessory 640a operates continuously in the gaming state is configured to be different, and the normal state is set as the gaming state. When the electric accessory 640a operates in the state in which the electric accessory 640a is in the retracted state, the electric accessory 640a is in the retracted state until the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 640a positioned in the protruding state reaches the area b (see FIG. 3). In the state where the time reduction state is set, the electric accessory 640a is in the projecting position for a period sufficient for the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 640a to reach the area c (see FIG. 3). It is configured to be located at.

  Specifically, the operation period of the electric accessory 640a (the period in which the electric accessory 640a is continuously in the protruding state) is configured to be 2 seconds during the time reduction state and 0.2 seconds during the normal state. The electric accessory 640a is configured such that the flow-down period for the ball to flow down the region shown in FIG. 3 (the range from the region a to the region c) is longer than 0.2 seconds and shorter than 2 seconds. (In the present embodiment, 0.8 seconds). With such a configuration, even when the right-handed game is performed during the normal state, the ball is normally won at the winning of the symbol, and the ball flows down the upper surface of the operating electric accessory 640a, Since the operation of the electric accessory 640a ends before the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a reaches the second entrance 640, it is ensured that the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the normal state. Can be prevented.

  In addition, during the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is operated for a period longer than the period (0.4 seconds) in which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second entrance 640. In addition, the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a in the guidance state (projecting state) can easily reach the second entrance 640 and the lottery of the second special symbol can be easily executed.

  Further, during the time-saving state, for example, a ball that arrives at the electric accessory 640a 1.5 seconds after the electric accessory 640a is activated flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and is electrically driven at the timing when the ball reaches the area b. The operation of the accessory 640a ends (two seconds have elapsed since the operation of the electric accessory 640a). As shown in FIG. 3, such balls enter the general winning opening 63 disposed below the electric accessory 640a, and ten balls are paid out as prize balls. As described above, when a right-handed game is performed during the time-saving state, a different ball entrance (the second ball entrance 640) differs depending on the operation timing of the electric accessory 640a and the arrival timing of the ball at the electric accessory 640a. Alternatively, by configuring such that the ball can be guided to the general winning opening 63), it is possible to cause the player to continuously perform a right-handed game during the time reduction state.

  As will be described in detail later, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to execute a lottery of a second special symbol (special figure 2) based on the entry of a ball into the second entrance 640 (trigger). However, since there is no means for holding and storing the entry of the ball into the second entrance 640 (means for holding and holding the right to execute the lottery in the special drawing 2), the special symbol is changed. Even if a ball enters the second entrance 640 while the game is being played, only the privilege of paying out the prize balls (five) according to the entry is provided to the player.

  As described above, the number of prize balls according to the ball entering the general winning opening 63 is ten, and the number of prize balls according to the ball entering the second entrance 640 is five. Therefore, in a state where the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be executed, the player enters the ball into the second entrance 640 rather than enters the general winning opening 63. (That is, lottery of special figure 2 and five prize balls), and in a state where the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) cannot be executed (special symbol is changing). If so, it is configured such that entering the ball into the general winning opening 63 rather than the second entrance 640 can give a privilege (ie, 10 prize balls) advantageous to the player.

  This allows the player to change the entrance (the entrance through which many benefits can be obtained) in which the player desires to enter the ball in accordance with the situation of the game (whether or not special symbols have changed). The player can enjoy a right-handed game in the state. In addition, in order to make the ball enter both the second entrance 640 and the general winning opening 63 during one operation of the electric accessory 640a, it is necessary to continuously execute the right-handed game. Therefore, the operation of the game can be enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, the operation period of the electric accessory 640a during the time saving state is sufficiently longer than the period (0.8 seconds) in which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second entrance 640. A long period (2 seconds) is set, and when the electric accessory 640a operates, the ball is surely made to enter the second entrance 640. However, for example, during a time reduction state, The operation period of the electric accessory 640a is slightly longer (for example, 0.9 second) than the period (0.8 seconds) in which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second entrance 640. Second). With this configuration, after the ball is passed through the through gate 67 during the time saving state, the launch of the ball is stopped, and after confirming that the electric accessory 640a has been operated, the launch of the ball is started again ( Since the so-called stop hit) can be suppressed, the right-handed game can be continuously performed during the time saving state, and the operation of the game can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. As described above with reference to FIG. 3, the ball fired by the right-handed game first reaches the V winning device 650. Next, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described. The V winning device 650 is configured to be variable between an open state in which the ball can win and a closed state in which it is difficult to win. When the lottery result of the second special symbol is “small hit”, the V winning device is achieved. The opening / closing door 650f1 of the device 650 is operated to change to an open state where a ball can be won at a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a.

  In addition, although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 25, in some of the special jackpots (jackpots of the jackpot type of jackpot D) that have been won, the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V prize device 650 will be described in the above. It is configured to operate in the same manner as when the "small hit" is won. This makes it difficult to determine whether the special symbol “big hit” or “small hit” has been won when the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 operates.

  Here, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. First, as shown in FIG. 3, when the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is in the closed state in which the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is closed, the upper surface of the closed door 650f1 is closed. The ball that has reached the V winning device 650 while the V winning device 650 is in the closed state flows down on the opening / closing door 650f1 toward the lower left side (the lower left side in front view of FIG. 3). , To the through gate 67. On the other hand, when the V prize device 650 is in the open state (that is, during the small hitting game), the ball wins inside the V prize device 650.

  In the present embodiment, the opening period of the V winning device 650 during the small hit game is configured to be 0.1 second × 12 times (see FIG. 25), and the opening / closing door is opened at the timing when the V winning device 650 opens. The ball flowing down on 650f1 wins the V prize device 650. The ball that has won the V-prize device 650 is configured to flow down the first restricting member 651 or the second restricting member 652 while being aligned toward the detection port 650a1 (see FIG. 6A). I have. With this configuration, even if a ball flowing on the opening / closing door 650f1 wins a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V-winning device 650 from any position of the opening / closing door 650f1, the ball is smoothly moved. Can flow down.

  In the present embodiment, the period during which the open / close door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is continuously opened is set to 0.1 second. However, during the open period of the open / close door 650f1, the open / close door 650f1 flows down. Any other period may be set as long as the ball in which the ball is present can enter the V-prize device 650. In the present embodiment, the number of times of opening and closing the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 in one small hitting game is set to 12, but any other number may be set.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the period from the time when the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened once in the small hitting game to the time when the opening / closing door 650f1 is next opened (opening interval period) is set to 5 Five seconds are set after the tenth and tenth opening operations, and 0.5 seconds are set at other timings. This is to make it easier for the V prize device 650 to win a ball during the period in which the small hit game is being played. Specifically, when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected a ball at the time when the fifth opening operation is completed during the small hitting game, during the opening interval after the fifth opening operation is completed. In addition, a game guidance display for prompting the player to emphasize right-handed games is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, even when a right-handed game is started by grasping the game guidance display displayed on the third symbol display device 81, an interval period between opening times so that a ball can enter the V-prize device 650 even when the right-handed game is started. Is set longer than usual. Similar control processing is also performed when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected a ball when the tenth opening operation during the small hitting game is completed.

  With this configuration, it is possible to make it easier for a player who is not playing an appropriate game during the small hitting game (a player who is not playing a right-handed game) to execute an appropriate game. In this way, during a specific game (small hitting game) in which a plurality of opening operations are executed, when the interval period between some openings is set longer than the other, and it is determined that an appropriate game is not performed, By making it possible to display a game guidance display for prompting appropriate game content, a player who is playing an incorrect game can play a game with peace of mind.

  In this embodiment, after the fifth and tenth opening operations during the small hitting game, a longer special opening interval period is set. By providing a plurality of times for displaying the game guidance display to the player during one small hitting game in this manner, it is possible to make the player more appropriately play a game. In the case where the timing for displaying the game guidance display is provided a plurality of times, the notification timing of at least the second transition may be set to a timing at which a player who normally plays the game cannot reach. That is, as will be described later in detail, in the present embodiment, by performing a right-handed game continuously during the small hitting game, at least one ball is inserted in one opening operation of the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650. Since it is configured to be able to play a ball, if a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is being performed, the winning number (10 pieces) serving as a termination condition of the small hitting game during the tenth opening operation is set. Reaching, the small hit game will be terminated.

  That is, the opening interval period executed after the tenth opening operation during the small hit game is a timing that cannot be reached when a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is performed. Therefore, by setting the timing for displaying the game guidance display using this timing, an unnecessary long special opening interval period is provided for a player who is playing a normal game (continuous right-handed game). It is not executed, and the small hit game can be executed smoothly.

  In the case where the first special opening interval period is set to the timing to reach even after performing a normal game (continuous right-handed game) (after the end of the fifth opening operation) as in the present embodiment, Timing at which the first special opening interval period starts (fifth opening operation end timing), or timing at which a predetermined period has elapsed since the first special opening interval period started (fifth opening operation) It is determined whether or not the V switch 650e3 detects the ball at a timing (elapsed time required for the ball that has entered the ball to be ejected from the V winning device 650), and that the V switch 650e3 detects the ball. When it is determined, a notification effect for notifying that is displayed during the first special opening interval, and the V switch 650e3 detects the ball. If the Most is determined, it may be configured to display the game information display as described above. As a result, the special opening interval period set during the small hit game can be used effectively according to the game content.

  Further, during the second special opening interval, the game guidance display may be displayed even when the V switch 650e3 has already detected a ball. Thereby, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which the small hitting game is ended without causing the V winning device 650 to win a predetermined number (10) of balls during the small hitting game.

  Next, the structure of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 4, the V winning device 650 is combined with the opening forming member 650b protruding from the front side of the game board 13 and on the back side of the opening forming member 650b to form the V winning device 650. A base member 650c for screwing to the game board 13, and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 650c for lighting the LEDs from the back side of the base member 650c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 The disposed LED substrate 650d, a back cover body 650e for holding the LED substrate 650d with the base member 650c, and a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a formed on the opening forming member 650b. An opening / closing unit 650f having an opening / closing door 650f1 and a flow path cover body combined with a back side of a back cover body 650e to form a flow path 50g, a switching member 650h that protrudes into the flow path formed by the back cover body 650e and the flow path cover body 650g and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 650i locked with the switching member 650h, A back cover body 650j disposed on the back side of the road cover body 650g, a flow path solenoid 650k fixed to the back side of the back cover body 650j and operating the link member 650i, and the flow path solenoid 650k are mounted on the back side. And a fixing cover body 650m for covering with a screw to the rear cover body 650j.

  FIG. 5 is a sectional view of the V winning device 650. FIG. 5C is a top view of the V winning device 650, and FIG. 5B is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650 taken along line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 5B, the V winning device 650 has a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a that is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, so that a game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 5B. A bottom surface inclined downward and to the left is formed. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 650a1 is guided to a distribution channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 650e shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 5 (b), the opening of the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is an opening through which a game ball can enter by an opening / closing door 650f1 constituted by a shutter mechanism which can come and go from the gaming board 13 side. The state is changed to a closed state in which the ball cannot be entered (ball entry is difficult). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 650f1, so that the game ball can roll on the upper part of the opening / closing door. In the open state, the opening / closing door 650f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the base member 650c (the interior of the game board 13) to be retracted from the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a.

  With such a configuration, during the time saving game, during the big hit game, and during the small hit game, it is possible to continuously make a right-handed game, thereby reducing the trouble of changing the game method according to the game state. be able to. Therefore, the game can be performed more easily.

  In addition, in the open state of the opening / closing door 650f1, a surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the V winning device 650, so that the game ball can be efficiently placed in the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. Can be done. Therefore, the time required for the small hit game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 5A is a sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5A, the magnetic sensor 650c1 having the detection port 650a1 is fixed to the base member 650c such that the detection port 650a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel of the back cover body 650e.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6, a configuration will be described in which game balls guided to the distribution channels of the back cover body 650e are distributed to a normal discharge channel 650e1 and a special discharge channel 650e2, which will be described later.

  FIG. 6A is a rear view of the back cover body 650e showing a state in which the switching member 650h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge channel 650e2. As shown in FIG. 6A, the switching member 650h has a locking hole 650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 650i is inserted, and a guiding piece 650h2 for guiding a game ball, and the flow path cover body 650g. Is rotatably supported from the rear side. Here, the flow path cover 650g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 650h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 650h is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back side of the flow path cover 650g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as possible.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 650h2 disposed diagonally below left and guided to the special discharge channel 650e2. You. The game ball that has passed through the special discharge channel 650e2 is detected by the V switch 650e3, which is a magnetic sensor provided in the special discharge channel 650e2 and that can detect the passage of the game ball, and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. Is done.

  Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the big hit game is set after the small hit game by passing the game ball through the V switch 650e3 during the small hit game. That is, the V switch 650e3 is configured as a trigger for starting a big hit game. In addition, the switching member 650h is a flow path (special discharge flow path 650e2) through which the ball that has won the V prize device 650 during the small hit can pass through the V switch 650e3, or a flow that is difficult (difficult) to pass through the V switch 650e3. The path (normal discharge flow path 650e1) is for communication with any one of the paths, and by setting the flow path solenoid 650k to ON, the sphere that has won the V prize device 650 flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2. (See FIG. 6B).

  In the pachinko machine 10 used in the present embodiment, the flow path solenoid 650k is set to off during a normal game, so that the ball that has won the V prize device 650 flows down the normal discharge flow path 650e1. It is composed. Then, when the small hit is won, the flow path solenoid 650k is set to ON in accordance with the contents specified in the open scenario table 202g described later with reference to FIG. 25, and the ball winning the V winning device 650 is specially discharged. The flow path 650e2 is configured to be able to flow down. In this way, when the flow path solenoid 650k is set to off, the pachinko machine 10 maintains the state for a long time, that is, the ball that has won the V prize device 650 flows down the normal discharge flow path 650e1. By providing a state in which the switching member 650h is maintained (see FIG. 6A), the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  As described above, since the game state set after the small hit game is changed by the flow-down route of the game ball that has won the V prize device 650 during the small hit game, the interest of the player is improved even during the small hit game. be able to. The time required to pass from the opening of the V winning device 650 (specific winning opening) to the entrance of the special discharge channel 650e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h) is at least 1 second. It is composed of With such a configuration, even if the opening / closing door 650f1 is detected to be opened even though the small hit has not been won, even if the ball flowing route is switched by the switching member 650h, the ball is reliably discharged. The situation of flowing down the special discharge flow path 650e2 can be suppressed.

  At the end of the normal discharge channel 650e1, a discharge confirmation switch 650e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of a sphere is provided. Thus, it can be determined whether or not all the game balls that have entered the V winning device 650 have been ejected, based on the sum of the ejection confirmation switch 650e4 and the V switch 650e3. The end timing of the small hitting game (the condition for ending the small hitting game (when a predetermined number (10) of prizes are won in the V prize device 650, or when the opening scenario of the V prize device 650 is completed) is satisfied) If the gaming balls that have entered the V-prize device 650 have not been exhausted at the timing when the small-hit ending period executed after the small-prize ending period has elapsed), it is determined that there is an abnormality inside the V-prize device 650, and It may be configured to notify an abnormality or stop the game so that the jackpot game or the normal game is not started. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the game progresses in a state where an abnormality has occurred in a part of the pachinko machine 10 and an occurrence of a secondary abnormality can be suppressed.

  As described above, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 is detected by the magnetic sensor 650c1, and based on the detected game ball, a prize ball (one ball winning in this embodiment) is given as a privilege to the player. 10 prize balls) can be paid out. In addition, by using the detected game ball to determine whether or not to pass the V switch 650e3, it is possible to determine whether or not the big hit game is executed after the small hit game ends. Can be. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a special prize port (specific area) for giving the jackpot game separately from the V prize device 650, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit game in which the period and timing for setting the flow path solenoid 650k to ON are different according to the small hit type (small hit A to small hit C) set when the small hit is won. Is configured to be executed. With this configuration, the degree of expectation (V winning expectation) of the ball passing through the V switch 650e3 during the small hit game varies depending on the content of the small hit game executed when the small hit is won. be able to. Therefore, the player can not only win the small hit but also perform the game while expecting the small hit game having a high V winning expectation to be executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 7, the structure of the lower surface of the ball flow of the opening / closing door 650f1 that opens and closes the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 will be described. FIG. 7A is a schematic plan view illustrating a state where the opening / closing door 650f1 closes the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 7A, the opening / closing door 650f1 of the present embodiment moves the ball reaching the upper surface of the V winning device 650 along the inclination of the upper surface of the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 2). 650 is configured to flow down from the right upper surface 650y1 to the left upper surface 650y2 through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1, and flow out toward the variable winning device 65.

  A first delay member 650fa, a second delay member 650fb, and a third delay member 650fc are provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1 as delay members for delaying the flow of the ball. Is configured to have a flow-down period of 0.6 seconds. This falling period (0.6 seconds) is longer than the interval (closed period (0.5 seconds)) when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 is opened a plurality of times by the small hit game. It is configured to be long. With this configuration, the ball flowing down on the opening / closing door 650f1 is configured to reliably win when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened by the small hit game.

  When the small hit game is executed in the state shown in FIG. 7A and the opening / closing door 650f1 is changed to the open state, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 7B. FIG. 7B is a schematic view of a state where the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 is open when viewed from above. As shown in FIG. 7B, when the opening / closing door 650f1 is opened, the opening / closing door 650f1 moves so as to be evacuated to the inside of the game board 13, and the ball flowing down the right upper surface 650y1 becomes the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened so that a winning is possible. Further, the ball flowing down on the opening / closing door 650f1 also wins a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a when the opening / closing door 650f1 is located at the retreat position.

  In addition, the V winning device 650 is provided with a second ball for smoothing the ball flow after the winning, regardless of the position where the ball flowing down on the opening / closing door 650f1 wins the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. A first regulating member 651 and a second regulating member 652 are provided (see FIG. 2), and a ball that has won a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a upstream of the upper surface of the open / close door 650f1 is the first regulating member 651, After being aligned in a line via the two regulating members 652, it is configured to flow down to the detection port 650a1, which is the passage width of one ball. By providing the first restriction member 651 and the second restriction member 652 in this manner, even if the detection port 650a1 is provided at a position below the first restriction member, a ball that vigorously wins from the opening / closing door 650f1 is directly detected by the detection port 650a1. Can be prevented, so that the ball detection switch 650c1 provided in the detection port 650a1 can be prevented from breaking down. In addition, a flow path (a flow path flowing down on the first and second regulating members 651 and 652) for aligning the spheres until the spheres pass through the detection port 650a1 having a passage width of one sphere is secured. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a ball is clogged in the V winning device 650 and hinders the game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the present embodiment operates in the bonus game (small hit game) given when the judgment result of the judgment means (the result of the special symbol lottery) is a predetermined judgment result (small hit). The falling period (0.6 seconds) required for the ball to flow down the variable member (opening / closing door 650f1) is longer than the interval period (0.5 seconds) between opening of the variable member (opening / closing door 650f1). With such a configuration, the ball flowing down on the variable member during the opening interval (timing when the opening / closing door 650f1 is in the closed state) during the small hit game is reliably made to win the V prize device 650 at the next opening timing. be able to.

  In addition, a small number of balls (10 pieces) can be won during the small hitting game by simply causing the V prize device 650 to win only the ball flowing down on the variable member during the small hitting game. Since the number of open operations (12 times) in the winning game is set to be greater than the number of winning conditions for the small hit game (10), even if one open period (0.1 second) is set short. , A sufficient number of winnings can be secured. In addition, by setting one open period to be long, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which an excessive number of balls are made to win the V winning device 650 during the small hit game.

  As shown in FIG. 8, on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 9). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 9). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37a, 37b, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower edge of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 49) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the first frame button 22, the second frame button 23, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other devices 228 include various drive motors for operating a drive for performance provided in the pachinko machine 10.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 inputs from the first frame button 22 and the second frame button 23 (hereinafter, referred to as the frame button 22 when both the first frame button 22 and the second frame button 23 are shown). When the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the display control device is configured to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or to change the effect at the time of super reach. Instruct 114. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In addition, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, an accessory driving command is transmitted to the other device 228 in order to drive an unillustrated production accessory, and the operation corresponding to the operation content on the frame button 22 is performed. A voice output command for outputting a voice to the voice output device 226 is set, and a lamp output command for causing the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22 is set. May be configured.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 can produce a variation effect of the third symbol. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 8). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (FIG. 49).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 8) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 10A and 10B are schematic diagrams schematically showing display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a 15-inch size liquid crystal display. The display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, so that, for example, three symbol columns of left, middle, and right are formed. Is displayed. As shown in FIG. 10 (a), the third symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 imitates a number from “0” to “9”. Each is composed of different types of main symbols. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, “777”), and the variable display is performed. Is configured to generate a jackpot after the game is over. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for indicating a result of the lottery of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

  Specifically, in the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 for left, middle, and right are displayed. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbols are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity for each symbol row Z1 to Z3.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line L1. If the third symbol is stopped on the activated line with a combination of big hit symbols (in the first embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols), the big hit video is displayed as a big hit.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol column, and each symbol The number of symbols in the column can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are not limited to the above. For example, a symbol in which an image such as a figure or a character is combined with a numeral may be configured as the third symbol. Further, the area in which the third symbol is variably displayed may be configured to be variable. For example, when a specific effect is performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol is displayed. Is reduced, or the variable display area is moved to a position (for example, a corner of the display screen) where the player has difficulty in visually recognizing, so that it is difficult for the player to determine whether the third symbol is fluctuating. You may make it. In addition, during the period in which the special symbol is changing, the change of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and may be changed again.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the change of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the change of the second special symbol are the same (to the extent that it is difficult for the player to discriminate). (Including the difference of the third symbol), but the display mode and the display area of the third symbol may be changed so as to correspond to the type of the special symbol that is changing.

  Next, the content actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 10B, a small display area Dm2 is formed at the upper left of the main display area Dm in a front view. In this small display area Dm2, a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is fired (game direction) is displayed (see FIG. 11A). That is, in the present embodiment, the small display area Dm2 is used as the guidance display area. With such a configuration, the player can easily grasp to which region of the game board 13 the ball should be fired simply by visually recognizing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display region. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine which is easy for the player to understand.

  Although the detailed description is omitted, the present pachinko machine 10 uses the voice guidance using the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 when the guidance display mode displayed in the small display area Dm2 is variable. Is configured to be executed. Here, as the voice guidance using the voice output device 226, a voice indicating the display content displayed in the small display area Dm2, such as a voice indicating “right-handed”, is output.

  Further, as the light emission guidance using the lamp display device 227, for example, in the case of guiding “right-handed”, a plurality of LEDs (not shown) used as light emission means are sequentially lit from left to right. The light emission is controlled. With this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize to which area of the game board 13 the ball should be fired by visually recognizing the lighting pattern of the light emitting means provided on the game board 13. In addition, the switching of the direction in which the ball is fired (game direction) to the player can be notified to the player not only by the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 but also by voice guidance and light emission guidance. Therefore, the player can be immediately notified that the game direction has been switched.

  A small display area Dm1 is formed at the upper right of the main display area Dm in front view. The small display area Dm1 is configured to be able to easily display the variable display of the third symbol. Here, the case where the variable display is executed in the small display area Dm1 means that, for example, in the main display area Dm, a display effect such as an effect in which a predetermined character performs an action or an effect in which the user presses the frame button 22 is executed. If you have. During the execution of the display effect, by displaying the effect in the larger main display area Dm, a more intuitive effect can be provided. In addition, during the execution of the display effect, the variation display of the third symbol is simply displayed in the small display area Dm1, so that it is easy for the player to continue the variation display of the third symbol. Can be understood.

  Although the details will be described later, the small display area Dm1 includes a special figure 1 variable display area Dm1a in which a third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed, and a small display area Dm1a corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. It is formed from a special figure 2 variable display area Dm1b on which three symbols are displayed (see FIG. 11A). Thereby, even when the display effect is being executed in the main display area Dm, it is possible for the player to easily understand which special symbol corresponding to the third symbol is fluctuating. . In this pachinko machine 10, the special figure 1 variable display area Dm1a and the special figure 2 variable display area Dm1b are formed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A display area may be provided to display only the special symbol during the variable display among the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  A small display area Dm3 is formed at the lower right of the main display area Dm in front view. Although the details will be described later, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a specific gaming state (hour saving state), the small display area Dm3 indicates a state (state) for indicating whether or not the hour saving state ends. ) This is an area where the display mode Dm3a (see FIG. 11A) is displayed. Thus, the situation (state) display mode Dm3a displayed in the small display area Dm3 allows the player to play a game while predicting the timing at which the time saving state ends.

  Further, a sub display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. As shown in FIG. 10 (b), a reserved symbol consisting of a black circle is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. As described above, if a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball is entered is suspended up to four times. The same number of held symbols as the number of held balls is displayed on the sub-display area Ds. In the first embodiment, since the maximum value of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is four and the reserved ball of the second special symbol cannot be secured, the secondary display region Ds Displays a maximum of four reserved symbols corresponding to the first special symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the display pattern of the reserved symbols is changed in accordance with the number of reserved balls, but the method of displaying the number of reserved balls is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of reserved balls is displayed by a number. Further, the size of the number of reserved balls may be visually notified to the player by changing the character mode in accordance with the increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in addition to the above, the game result suggestion mode for suggesting a game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player and the contents of the effect display executed in the main display area Dm are described. The effect explanation mode for explaining, the frame button-related display mode for indicating the timing of operating the frame button 22 and the operation result, and the hit-related information display mode for displaying information about the big hit game are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. The main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds are set such that the ratio of the display area differs depending on the content displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to the departure, and there is a reserved ball, after the stop display for one second (after the symbol confirmation period has elapsed), the lottery based on the reserved ball is performed. The corresponding variable display is started. If there are a plurality of holding balls, a lottery is executed based on the holding ball corresponding to the oldest entry in time. As described above, after the lottery result corresponding to one special symbol is stopped and displayed, the stop display state is continued for a predetermined period, and then the next special symbol change is started. This makes it easier for the player to understand that the change of the new special symbol has started. In the present embodiment, the above-described symbol determination period is always provided after the symbol change time has elapsed, but a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the departure of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for one second in a state where the reserved ball does not exist, the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed is continued thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or until a new ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. When a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game was not executed is displayed. In spite of the fact that the player has continuously fired the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), there is rarely a situation in which neither the first entrance 64 nor the second entrance 640 has an incoming ball. In many cases where the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the pachinko machine 10 does not play the game at all because the player has quit the game. caused by.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. I do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on whether or not the demonstration effect is displayed. On the other hand, if a new ball enters either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the new entrance A corresponding variable display of the third symbol is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 10B, the first display area Ds <b> 1 of the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and the ball inserted into the first ball entrance 64. Of the balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed are formed as a reserved display area for displaying reserved symbols. In the first display area Ds1, the first holding symbol Dsb, the second holding symbol Dsb, the second holding symbol Dsb, and the winning information acquired when the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 are stored. A reserved symbol Dsc, a third reserved symbol Dsd, and a fourth reserved symbol Dse are displayed. Then, the pending symbol corresponding to the variation currently being executed is displayed at the center position of the sub display area Ds as the symbol Dsa being executed.

  When the display of the pending symbol displayed in the first display area Ds1 is finished and the next variation is started, the pending symbol corresponding to the next variation (the front of FIG. 10B) The first reserved symbol (Dsb) displayed on the rightmost side is erased, and the remaining reserved symbols (Dsc to Dse) are shifted rightward and displayed. Then, the deleted first reserved symbol Dsb is displayed as the symbol Dsa being executed. With this, it is possible to notify the player which variable display corresponds to the variable display being executed, so that, for example, the display mode of the reserved symbol can be changed and the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol can be changed. In the case of performing an effect that increases the degree of expectation that the lottery is a big hit (so-called pre-reading effect), the player easily recognizes that the variable display corresponding to the reserved symbol whose display mode has been changed by the pre-reading effect is being executed. Can be recognized.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the direction in which each reserved symbol (first reserved symbol Dsb to second reserved symbol Dse) displayed in the first display area Ds1 moves (shifts) when a new special symbol change is started. Since the running symbol Dsa is configured to be displayed (rightward from the viewpoint of FIG. 10B), the holding symbol (first holding symbol Dsb to second holding symbol Dse) and the running symbol Dsa are played. Since the player can comprehend in a series of arrangements, it is possible for the player to easily comprehend which pending symbol the variable display in execution corresponds to the variable display.

  In the present embodiment, only up to four balls can be held up to the first ball entrance 64, but the upper limit value of the number of held balls is not limited to four, but three or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times). Further, it may be configured such that the number of balls entering the second entrance 640 can be held up to a predetermined number as an upper limit, or the upper limit of the number of retained balls for entering the first entrance 64 and the second entry. The upper limit of the number of reserved balls for entering the ball entrance 640 may be different from the upper limit of the number of retained balls for entering the first entrance 64, and the upper limit of the number of retained balls for entering the second entrance 640. May be larger or smaller than the upper limit of the number of reserved balls. In addition, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the sub display area Ds, the number of reserved balls is changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls ( For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of reserved balls, the maximum number of which is reserved, and displaying the number of reserved balls according to the number of the reserved lamps in the lighting state.

  A second display area Ds2 is formed on the right side of the sub display area Ds, and an effect explanation for supplementing the contents of the effect (display effect) executed in the main display area Dm is displayed (FIG. 11 ( b)). Thus, a plurality of information displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, that is, the variation display information of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol, the variation display of the special symbol currently being executed Display effect information for indicating the degree of expectation that the lottery result corresponding to is a specific lottery result (big hit), effect description information supplementing the contents of the display effect information, and hold symbol information indicating the number of special symbols held for storage By displaying the running symbol information indicating the running symbol in a predetermined section (area), various pieces of information displayed at the same time can be notified to the player in an easily understandable manner.

  Next, the effect contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning), the first special symbol or the second special symbol (the first special symbol (first Symbol) is executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

  Note that the 3rd symbol is displayed in common with the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol. Further, the second special symbol which is more likely to be a lottery result more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol is configured to be displayed in a variable manner prior to the first special symbol, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner. It is configured such that two special symbols are not simultaneously displayed in a variable manner.

  However, in the first embodiment, since the second special symbol is set so as not to be able to secure the reserved ball, it is practically special that the reserved ball of the first special symbol is sequentially digested. The change of the symbol is executed. For example, at the timing when the change of the new special symbol is started, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are both changeable, that is, the first special symbol is changed. If the timing of starting a new change corresponding to the reserved ball of the special symbol coincides with the timing of the ball entering the second entrance 640 (start winning), the change of the second special symbol is changed. It is configured to be executed with priority.

  As a result, an opportunity to receive a lottery advantageous to the player (an opportunity to execute the second special symbol lottery) is lost due to the execution of a more disadvantageous lottery (the first special symbol lottery). Can be reliably prevented.

  As the display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, an effect indicating whether or not various contents that can be realized based on the lottery of the special symbol is established is executed. Specifically, it is a jackpot winning suggestion effect that indicates whether or not a jackpot was won by a special symbol lottery, or a part of a case where the jackpot was not won by a special symbol lottery (was won), The gaming state is advantageous to the player based on a small hit winning suggestion effect that indicates whether or not a small hit that gives the player a bonus (for example, payout of a prize ball) smaller than the big hit or a lottery result of a special symbol. The game state transition suggestion effect to indicate that the game state shifts to the time reduction state, and when the time reduction state is set as the game state, the time reduction state ends according to the special symbol lottery result or the special symbol fluctuation display. For example, an effect of suggesting the end of a time-saving state to suggest that the task is to be performed is performed.

  In addition, the effects that suggest the lottery result of the special symbol (eg, a jackpot winning suggestion effect, a small jackpot winning suggestion effect, etc.) are displayed in the third symbol display device 81 after the third symbol is variably displayed and then stopped. An effect using a period (dynamic display period) until the lottery result is notified by the combination is executed. For example, a stop display indicating that the third symbol has won a big hit during the dynamic display period. Among the modes (for example, the combination of “777”), a reach display mode in which only some of the combinations are stopped and displayed (for example, only two of the three third symbols are stopped and displayed at “77”, (The display mode with the remaining third symbol being changed) is displayed, and then the story is displayed in the main display region Dm while the third symbol showing the reach display mode is displayed in the small display region Dm1. Holding Run the director, to perform the production to be stopped and displayed a third pattern if the story is completed correctly in the "777".

  In the example described above, the reach display mode is a state in which a part of the combination of the third symbols is stopped and displayed in a mode that matches the combination indicating that the lottery result is a win (big hit). May be displayed as a reach display mode. For example, some of the third symbols may be displayed in a dedicated display mode for indicating the reach state, or some of the third symbols may be combined. May be displayed in a special display mode for indicating the reach state instead of the combination indicating that the jackpot has been won. In this way, the configuration in which the player can grasp that the reach state has been established by confirming a part of the stop display mode of the third symbol allows the player to win the jackpot. It is possible to gradually increase the sense of expectation for the effect, and enhance the effect of the production.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to set a continuous effect executed over a plurality of special symbol variations as an effect indicating the lottery result of the special symbol. This continuous production is performed when a prize information command for indicating various counter values (lottery results) acquired when the ball enters the first entrance 64 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. The lottery result of the special symbol variation corresponding to the command is displayed in the period until the variation display corresponding to the special symbol variation is executed (variation display corresponding to the special symbol variation executed before the target special symbol variation) This is an effect for suggesting to the player by using the period during which is executed.

  In this way, by suggesting the lottery result of the target special symbol using the fluctuation period of the special symbol executed before the target special symbol, a longer-term effect for the player is provided. Can be provided to enhance the production effect. In addition, since it is possible to execute a continuous effect without highlighting the result of the lottery of the special symbol (for example, a miss) every time, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's willingness to play decreases. it can.

  Further, in the first embodiment, in addition to the effect for suggesting whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, the gaming state is shifted according to the number of special symbol lotteries (the number of fluctuations). It is also configured to execute a suggestion effect (a time reduction state end suggestion effect). The time saving state end suggestion effect is an effect that is continuously executed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the time saving state, and includes a special symbol lottery count (the number of times the special symbol change is executed) and a special symbol. This is an effect for suggesting the possibility that the time-saving state will end according to the number of times that the lottery result has become a specific lottery result (for example, a small win).

  Here, the effect contents of the effect of suggesting the end of the time saving state described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has an electric accessory 640 a attached to the second entrance 640, and the second input port 640 a is provided in accordance with the operation state (variable state) of the electric accessory 640 a. It is configured such that a state in which the ball does not easily enter the ball opening 640 (first state) and a state in which the ball easily enters (second state) are set. Furthermore, a lottery of the second special symbol is executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, and when a small hit is won, a small hit game for opening the V winning device 650 is executed. You. The V winning device 650 has a special discharge channel 650e2 as a specific area through which the ball winning the V winning device 650 can pass, and a V switch that the ball has passed (flowed down) through the special discharging channel 650e2. When 650e3 is detected, a big hit (two hits) is set. The time-saving state set as the gaming state is advantageous to a player who easily moves (varies) the electric accessory 640a to the second state (a state where a ball easily enters the second entrance 640). Since the game state is set, a right-handed game in which a ball enters the second entrance 640 is performed during the time saving state.

  As described above, the time-saving state advantageous to the player is configured to end when an end condition (time-saving end condition) is satisfied. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a special symbol lottery is won, when a special symbol change based on the special symbol lottery is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), the special symbol lottery is executed. Accordingly, the time saving state is terminated (the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state) when any of the conditions in the case of winning a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) is achieved.

  In this way, by making it possible to set a plurality of time saving end conditions, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how long the time saving state advantageous to the player continues. On the other hand, the presence / absence of the time-saving end condition and the time-saving information (for example, information indicating the number of small hits won during the time-saving state) updated toward the satisfaction of the time-saving end condition are not suggested to the player (notification). Otherwise, there is a problem that the time-saving state advantageous to the player ends suddenly and the player is dissatisfied.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, during the time reduction state, whether or not the time reduction end condition is satisfied or the time reduction information updated toward the satisfaction of the time reduction end condition (for example, information indicating the number of small hits won during the time reduction state) ) Is suggested (notified) to the player as a time-saving state end suggesting effect, so that the player can perform a game while predicting a period in which the time-saving state is continuously set. I have. Thus, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the time saving state advantageous to the player is suddenly ended and the player is dissatisfied.

  In addition, the above-mentioned time-saving end conditions include a time-saving end condition that is advantageous to the player (a time-saving end condition that is satisfied by winning a jackpot) and other disadvantageous time-saving end conditions. In the time-saving state end suggestion effect that is executed during the time-saving state, the time-saving end condition is simply satisfied or not, and the time-saving information updated toward the establishment of the time-saving end condition (for example, the number of small hits that are won during the time-saving state) Rather than performing an effect based on the information), it is determined whether or not the time-saving end condition that is satisfied or the time-saving end condition that is easy to be satisfied is advantageous to the player, and an effect based on the determination result is performed. It is configured to run.

  With this configuration, it is possible not only to make the player predict whether the time at which the time saving state ends is approaching, but also to predict whether or not an advantageous time saving ending condition for the player is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to give an interest to the effect to be executed (the effect of suggesting the end of the time saving state), and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to execute a plurality of types of small hit games when a small hit is won in a special symbol lottery, and according to the executed small hit game ( (According to the set small hit type), the degree of expectation that two kinds of hits are set during the small hit game is different. Then, among the above-mentioned time-saving end conditions, the time-saving end conditions that are established based on winning a predetermined number of small hits in the special symbol lottery are the number of times (time-saving end conditions Is established).

  With such a configuration, when the time saving end condition is established by the special symbol small hit winning, the time saving end condition that is established this time is advantageous to the player. A time-saving state end effect that indicates whether the time-saving end condition has been established due to the fact that the game has been performed, or a time-saving end condition that is disadvantageous to the player (the time-saving end condition that has been established by setting two types of small hits that are difficult to hit). Can be suggested (notified) to the player. Therefore, even if the time saving end condition is satisfied by winning the small hit, the player can watch the effect executed in the time saving state end suggesting effect.

  In addition, the number of times set for each of the above-mentioned small hit types (the number of times that the time-saving termination condition is set for each small hit type) is set to a different number according to the degree of expectation per two types of each small hit type. It is configured as follows. More specifically, the small hit type with a high degree of expectation per type (for example, small hit A) is shorter in the number of winning times than the small type with a low expectation per type (for example, small hit C). It is configured so that the condition is satisfied.

  By configuring in this manner, for example, immediately after the time saving state is set, in the effect of suggesting the end of the time saving state, the time saving state ends based on the small hit winning of the special symbol, or until immediately before the time saving state ends When an effect indicating that the time saving information has been updated is executed, it is possible to make the player predict that the small hit that has been won this time is a small hit with a high degree of expectation per two types. That is, it is possible to make the player predict various game results based on the effect content of the effect of suggesting the end of the time saving state and the period during which the time saving state is continued, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In this embodiment, as the time-saving end conditions advantageous to the player, a time-saving end condition that is satisfied when a big hit is won as described above, and a small hit type that is easy to hit two of the small hit games are set. The time-saving end condition that is established in the case is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. Among the plurality of time-saving end conditions, when the time-saving end condition is satisfied, the player is shorter than when the other time-saving end conditions are satisfied. What is necessary is just to be advantageous. For example, when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times) and the time saving end condition is satisfied, a special state in which the special symbol lottery executed thereafter is advantageous to the player is set. In a gaming machine having a function, the time-saving end condition that is advantageous to the player may be the time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100).

  Specifically, for example, a special symbol high probability state that is easy to win a special symbol jackpot, or a special symbol low probability state that is more difficult to win a jackpot than it is set, and a normal symbol is won. By setting either the normal symbol high-probability state that is easy to perform or the normal symbol low-probability state that is less likely to be won per hit, the normal state (special symbol low-probability state, normal Symbol low-probability state), probable state (special symbol high-probability state, normal symbol high-probability state), time-saving state (special symbol low-probability state, normal symbol high-probability state), and latent state (special symbol high-probability state) , A normal symbol low-probability state), and a configuration is such that at least the latent state is more advantageous to the player than the probable state as the degree of advantage of the player in each game state.

  Then, in the state in which the probable change state is set, only when the number of times of the change of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100) and the time saving end condition is satisfied, the normal symbol high probability state to the normal symbol low probability state By shifting to, the latent state is set. With this configuration, the jackpot is won in the state where the probability change state is set, and the jackpot is set in the state where the probability change state is set, rather than a game state other than the latent state is set after the end of the jackpot. When the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100) without winning, the time saving end condition is satisfied, and providing a latent state is more advantageous for the player. Can be.

  In the above-described example, the condition for setting the latent state that is advantageous to the player as the game state is satisfied when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number in the state where the probable state is set. By setting only when the time reduction end condition is satisfied, the time reduction end condition that is satisfied when the number of times of the change of the special symbol reaches the predetermined number is set as the time reduction end condition advantageous to the player. In addition to the configuration of the above-described example, a configuration may be added in which a latent state is set at a very small portion (for example, 1%) when a special symbol jackpot is won in a state where the probable change state is set.

  With this, in the state where the probability change state is set, even when the special symbol jackpot is won or when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number, the latent probability state that is advantageous to the player can be set. In this case, however, the time-saving end condition in which the latent state is easily set is the time-saving end condition that is more advantageous for the player.

  With reference to FIGS. 11 to 15, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 during the effect of suggesting the end of the time saving state in the present embodiment will be specifically described. FIG. 11A is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents in a case where a jackpot is won by lottery of a special symbol and a time saving state is set after the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 11A, when the time reduction state is set, the character “Pull in rush” is displayed in the main display area Dm, indicating that the time reduction state has been set. This “pounding rush” is an effect that is executed in response to the period in which the time reduction state is set, and is a notification mode for indicating to the player that the current game state is the time reduction state.

  Then, in the small display area (guidance display area) Dm2, the character "Right-handed" is displayed to guide a game to be executed during the time reduction state, and it is notified that the right-handed game is performed during the time reduction state. . During the pounding, the third symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm1, and in the center of the main display area Dm, a character 801 imitating a boy (see FIG. 12A) is displayed in a treasure chest 802 (FIG. 12A). (See Reference). Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. In the small display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, a status (state) display mode Dm3a for indicating whether or not the time-saving state ends is displayed. The status (state) display mode Dm3a is based on whether or not the special symbol lottery corresponding to the currently executed special symbol variation has won a jackpot, and based on the currently executed special symbol variation, the time-saving state is displayed. Various display modes (see FIG. 15) can be changed in accordance with a result of determination as to whether or not to end, or whether or not information on a condition for ending the time-saving state based on the currently executed special symbol change has been updated. It is configured to be.

  In FIG. 11A, a display mode “display mode 1” (see FIG. 15) indicating that the currently executed special symbol change has not been won in the big hit or the small hit is displayed. Note that the display screen shown in FIG. 11A shows a case where the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot, and in a state where the change of the first special symbol already held and stored at the time of winning the jackpot is executed. Therefore, a third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed in the special symbol 1 variable display region Dm1a of the small display region Dm2, and a pending symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed as a running symbol Dsa. The display mode “circle” is displayed.

  Here, a display screen in a case where a reserved symbol for winning a jackpot exists in the first special symbol (reserved symbol) already reserved and stored at the time of winning the jackpot will be described with reference to FIG. . FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents in a case where a time-saving state is set after a jackpot and there is a reserved symbol that has won the jackpot. In FIG. 11B, the winning information corresponding to the first reserved symbol Dsb includes winning information for winning a big hit, and the small display area Dm3 indicates a special symbol (symbol winning) display mode “ The “display mode 3” (see FIG. 15) is displayed as the status display mode Dm3b.

  Then, in the second display area Ds2, the characters "Please expect" indicating the contents of the situation display mode Dm3b are displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 11B, the jackpot is won immediately after the time saving state is set (after the special figure 1 change is executed three times after the time saving state is set), so that the above-described time saving state is set. The setting is made such that the jackpot is won while the display screen shown in FIG. 11B is maintained without executing the pounding rush executed during the game. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress that the pounding rush is executed only for a short period of time.

  In this case, in the main display area Dm, a display screen (an effect start screen in a time-saving state) that is different from normal (see FIG. 11 (a)), such as “Pull throat rush?”, Is displayed. The display screen shown in FIG. 11B may be configured to be displayed, for example, also when the normal state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. Thereby, when the display mode of “pounding rush rush!” Shown in FIG. 11A is displayed after the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to reliably notify the player that the time saving state has been set. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. In addition, when the display mode of “pounding rush rush?” Shown in FIG. 11 (b) is displayed after the jackpot game ends, the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends, or the jackpot is won in the hold. It is possible to notify the player of any of the above, and to give the player a sense of expectation.

  In addition, in addition to the above-described configuration, a determination means for determining whether or not there is winning information for winning a jackpot is provided in a reserved symbol present after the end of the jackpot game, and there is winning information for winning a jackpot by the determining means. If it is determined, the same display mode (for example, "Large Chance" characters) may be displayed regardless of the game state (normal state or time saving state) set after the end of the big hit game. . Further, the jackpot information determined by the determination means described above is analyzed, a game state set after the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the analyzed jackpot information (pre-read jackpot information) is determined, and the jackpot is determined based on the determination result. The display mode after the end of the game may be set.

  In this case, for example, when it is determined that the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game corresponding to the pre-reading jackpot information, the display mode after the end of the jackpot game is the character “Pounding rush in!” Is displayed, and when it is determined that the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the pre-read jackpot information, the display mode after the end of the jackpot game is “Pounding rush? (That is, a display mode that does not notify that the user has entered the time-saving state).

  With this configuration, if the winning symbol that wins the jackpot is included in the holding symbol present after the end of the current jackpot game, the holding symbol is not the game state set after the end of the current jackpot game. Can be set based on the game state set after the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot (the next jackpot) included in the game. Therefore, for example, a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player is set after the current jackpot game, and the jackpot that was included in the hold symbol during that time-saving state is won. When the disadvantageous normal state is set, a display mode that does not notify the player that the time saving state has been set is displayed, so that the time saving state advantageous to the player ends in a short period of time. It is possible to suppress a decrease in willingness to play.

  Here, the display mode of the status display mode displayed in the small display area Dm3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram for explaining the type of the status (state) display mode Dm3a displayed in the small display area Dm3. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, nine types of status display modes are configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm3, and the lottery results of the special symbols that are changing (big hits win, small hits win) ) Or the status display mode is set according to the content (special winning number, special symbol change frequency) updated by the special symbol fluctuating with respect to the time saving end condition in which the time saving state ends when the condition is satisfied. It is displayed in the display area Dm3.

  Thus, by grasping the situation display mode displayed in the small display area Dm3, it is possible to make the player predict how the time reduction state will progress due to the special symbol change being executed, so that it is easy to understand. Games can be offered.

  The situation display mode displayed in the small display area Dm3 will be specifically described. “Display mode 1 (first display mode)” is displayed as a “white circle” (see FIG. 11A). ) Display mode. In the "display mode 1", the condition (for example, the number of special symbol changes or the number of small hits) of the condition for ending the time-saving state and the condition for ending the time-saving state without winning the jackpot is up to a predetermined stage. This is a display mode that is set when not updated. When this "display mode 1" is displayed, it can be confirmed that the time saving game (time saving state) does not end with the current special symbol change, and the player can expect the next and subsequent special symbol changes with ease. .

  Next, “display mode 2 (second display mode)” is a display mode displayed with “black circles”. This “display mode 2” is a display mode that indicates that a small win has been won, and is set when the conditions for ending the time-saving state and the conditions for ending the time-saving state have not been updated to a predetermined stage. . Here, as described above, the present embodiment is configured such that a big hit (two kinds) is set at the opportunity of the small hit game, and the content of the small hit game to be executed (the small hit of the won small hit) The degree of expectation (the probability that the V-switch 650e3 detects a ball during the small hit game) differs according to the type of the hit.

  This “display mode 2” is for notifying the player that the small hit has been won, but not for notifying the small hit type of the small hit that has been won. The game is played while expecting that the small hit type is a small hit type (for example, small hit A) in which it is easy to set two hits. In addition, since the player plays the game while feeling the possibility that the end condition of the time saving state is updated (updated in the range of the stage before reaching the predetermined stage) by winning the small hit, the player is nervous. A game can be played.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the plurality of small hit types are a small hit type (small hit A) in which two types are easily set, and a small hit type in which two types are harder to be set than the small hit A. (Small jackpot B, small jackpot C) are set, and as the end condition of the time saving state (hour saving end condition) that can be established based on the small jackpot winning, the smaller the number of wins is set for the small jackpot type in which the two types are easily set. It is configured to be. In other words, for each of the plurality of small hit types, the time reduction termination condition is configured to be set differently according to the degree of advantage to the player. It is configured to be easily established.

  Therefore, for example, when “display mode 2” is displayed immediately after the time reduction state is set, it is predicted that one of all the small hit types has been won, and a predetermined period has elapsed since the time reduction state was set. If the “display mode 2” is displayed later (after the small win has already been won a plurality of times during the time reduction state), the small hit that is set to a large number of wins as the time reduction end condition, that is, the two types of wins, It can be predicted that the small hit type that is hard to be set has won the set small hit. As described above, the lottery result of the current special symbol can be predicted in detail based on the type of the display mode displayed in the small display area Dm3 and the elapsed time of the time saving state. Can be provided.

  "Display mode 3 (third display mode)" is a display mode displayed by "sun mark using white circle" (see FIG. 11B). This "display mode 3" is a display mode that indicates that a special symbol big hit (symbol hit) has been won. Thereby, when a jackpot (big hit game) is set by a plurality of triggers as in the present embodiment, it is possible to inform the player of the trigger at which the big hit (big hit game) is set in an easily understandable manner.

  "Display mode 4 (fourth display mode)" is a display mode displayed as "character of chance in a white circle" (see FIG. 14A). In the “display mode 4”, the condition of winning the small hit B or the small hit C (that is, the small hit having a low degree of expectation per two types) as the small hit type, and the conditions for ending the time saving state and the time saving state are set. This is a display mode set when the condition for ending is updated to a predetermined stage.

  “Display mode 5 (fifth display mode)” is a display mode displayed as “the character of the last chance in a white circle” (see FIG. 13A). This “display mode 5” is a display mode set when the condition of winning the small hit and ending the time saving state is satisfied. By displaying the “display mode 5”, the player is notified that the time reduction condition has ended.

  With this configuration, the time saving state ends unless the two types of wins are obtained in the small hit game corresponding to the small hit that has been won this time. This is a step before the small hit game is executed. (Before the special symbol indicating that the small hit has been won is displayed before the stop is displayed), the player can be notified, and the small hit game is more eagerly performed on the player than usual. Can be made.

  “Display mode 6 (sixth display mode)” is a display mode displayed as “a character with a large pinch in a white circle” (see FIG. 14B). This "display mode 6" is a display mode set when the small hit C with the lowest expected degree of two hits as the small hit type is won and the condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied. The “display mode 6” is for indicating to the player that the time saving state is ended by winning the small hit (small hit C). In this way, by suggesting to the player that the special symbol change of this time is the time change again during the time-saving state, the time-saving state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, ends suddenly, and the player It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an embarrassment situation.

  The “display mode 7 (seventh display mode)” is a display mode displayed as “a character in a white circle with intense heat”. This "display mode 7" is a display mode set when the win for the small hit A with the highest expectation of two wins among the small hit types and the condition for ending the time saving state are satisfied.

  In the first embodiment, “one time” is set for the small hit A having the highest degree of expectation per two types as the time saving end condition (winning number end condition) that can be satisfied when the small hit is won. In the description of the “display mode 7”, it is described that the setting is made when the condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of small hit types may be set. Among them, a display mode for indicating only that the small hit A having the highest degree of expectation per two kinds has been won may be used.

  “Display mode 8 (eighth display mode)” is a display mode displayed as “the character ending in a white circle”. This "display mode 8" is set when the time-saving termination condition (variation frequency termination condition) that is satisfied when the number of times of the change of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times without winning the big hit and the small hit is set. It is a display mode. By displaying the “display mode 8”, the timing at which the time saving state ends can be reliably notified to the player.

  In the first embodiment, when the winning number end condition and the change number end condition are satisfied by the same special symbol change (lottery) as a condition for ending the time saving state, the change number end condition is satisfied. It is configured to determine. That is, in the special symbol variation in which the variation number ending condition is satisfied, when the small hit A is won, the “display mode 8” is displayed in the small display area Dm3.

  With this configuration, the player can be notified that the time saving state has ended, and then can be notified that the small hit has been won. Can be provided.

  The “display mode 9 (ninth display mode)” is a display mode displayed as “characters in white circles?”. This “display mode 9” is a display mode set without being concerned with the result of the special symbol lottery and the update information of the time saving state. This “display mode 9” is a display mode set by a predetermined lottery regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery or the progress of the time saving state. In this way, by enabling a display mode in which the player cannot be informed of the game state or the game state at all, every time a special symbol change is performed on the player, There is no need to provide information (update information).

  In the first embodiment, the display mode 9 is displayed to make it difficult for the player to understand (make it difficult to understand) the game content during the time saving state. In addition to the above, a configuration may be provided in which a determination unit that determines whether to display the display modes 1 to 9 in the small display area Dm3 is provided, and the display content is determined based on the determination result.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 12, a description will be given of the content of the pounding rush executed by the third symbol display device during the time saving state. FIG. 12A is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the content of a thrilling rush effect performed during a period in which the time-saving state is set as the gaming state, and a small hitting A is set as the small hitting type. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the effect content displayed while the 2nd special symbol which has won the small hit is changing.

  As shown in FIG. 12A, in the small display area Dm1, a third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is variably displayed in the special symbol 2 variable display region Dm1b, and the second special symbol ( A "triangle mark" indicating special figure 2) is displayed. In this state, after all the first special symbols (special figure 1) stored and stored in the time-saving state shown in FIG. 11A have been digested (in a state where there is no special pattern to be newly held and stored). This is a state in which the variation of the second special symbol is started due to (trigger) that a ball fired by the right-hitting game has entered the second entrance 640.

  Although details will be described later, the present embodiment is configured so that the time saving end condition (winning number end condition) is satisfied when one win is made in the small hit in which the small hit A is set. In the second display area Ds2, "display mode 5" is displayed as the status (state) display mode Dm3a indicating that the small hit has been won and the time saving end condition has been satisfied. "Discover treasure chest" is displayed.

  When the fluctuation time (dynamic display period) of the second special symbol elapses and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the small hit, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displays FIG. Is displayed. FIG. 12B is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents when the second special symbol during the variable display in FIG. 12A is stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 12B, the special symbol 2 variable display area Dm1b of the small display area Dm1 is stopped and displayed in the combination "341" for indicating the lottery result (small hit) of the second special symbol. Then, the treasure box 802 is enlarged and displayed in the main display area Dm, and the characters "(the contents of the treasure box) are displayed" in the second display area Ds2 to guide the development of the effect in the future.

  The treasure box 802 is used to show the game result of the small hit game executed immediately after, and an effect of opening or failing to open the treasure box 802 according to the result of the small hit game is executed. You. In addition, the content of the effect performed according to the result of the small hit game will be described later with reference to FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 13 (a), a description will be given of the effect contents in the case where two kinds of wins are obtained during the small hit game in which the small hit A is set. FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents when two types of wins are obtained (V wins) in the small hit game in which the small hit A executed during the time saving state is set. . As shown in FIG. 13 (a), when a V prize is made during the small hit game (when the ball that has won the V prize device 650 flows down the special discharge channel 650e2 and the V switch 650e3 detects the ball). , An effect of successfully opening the treasure box 802 is executed, and a V display 803 indicating that a jackpot game is set is displayed. Then, in the second display area Ds2, the character "big hit" indicating that the big hit (two hits) has been obtained is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the two kinds of wins cannot be obtained during the small hit game in which the small hit A is set, the display screen shown in FIG. 13B is displayed. FIG. 13 (b) schematically shows the display contents when two types of wins are not obtained (the V prize is not won) in the small hit game in which the small hit A executed during the time saving state is set. It is a schematic diagram. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the small hit A is won once in the set small hit, the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied, so that the small hit A is a small hit game. If the V prize cannot be won, the time saving state ends and the normal state is set.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 13 (b), when the small win game of the small win A cannot win V, the failure display mode 803 in which the treasure chest 802 has exploded is displayed, and the time saving state is displayed in the second display area Ds2. "Sorry, the end of the rush" is displayed to indicate that the game is finished. After this screen is displayed, the character “left” is displayed in the small display area Dm2 as game guidance according to the normal state, and a screen corresponding to the normal state is displayed.

  Next, a description will be given, with reference to FIG. 14A, of an effect in a case where a small hit is set in the small hit B during the time saving state. FIG. 14A is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents when a small win in which the small win B is set is first won in the time saving state. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 21D, in the present embodiment, “three wins in small hits in which small hit B is set” can be set as one of the time saving end conditions in which the time saving state ends. It is composed. Here, when the small hit is set for the first time in the time saving state and the small hit B is set, as shown in FIG. 14A, the display mode 4 is displayed in the small display area Dm3, and the main display area is displayed. A treasure chest 804 is displayed in Dm.

  This treasure box 804 has a display mode different from that of the treasure box 802 shown in FIG. 12B, and is configured to be able to suggest to the player the expectation degree per two kinds in the small win that has been won this time. Specifically, it is configured such that a prize of a luxurious display mode (treasure box 802) is more easily displayed when a small win (small win A) having a high degree of expectation per two kinds is won. Thereby, it is possible to make the player predict the degree of expectation per two kinds by the display mode of the situation (state) display mode Dm3a displayed in the small display area Dm3 and the display mode of the treasure box displayed in the main display area Dm. it can.

  In the small hit game executed after the display screen of FIG. 14A is displayed (small hit game corresponding to the small hit B), when a V prize is won, an effect display screen similar to that of FIG. 13A is displayed. It is displayed (the only difference is that the display mode of the opened treasure box is changed to the treasure box 804). On the other hand, if no V prize is won, an effect display screen indicating that the contents of the opened treasure box 804 is empty is displayed. Then, the display screen shown in FIG. 12A is displayed, and the effect that the boy 801 searches for the treasure box again is executed.

  Next, a description will be given, with reference to FIG. 14 (b), of an effect in a case where a small hit is set in the small hit C during the time saving state. FIG. 14B is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents in a case where five small wins are set in the small hit C during the time saving state. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 21D, in the present embodiment, “5 wins in small hits in which small hit C is set” can be set as one of the time saving end conditions at which the time saving state ends. It is composed. Here, in the case of winning five times in the small hit in which the small hit C is set during the time saving state, the display mode 6 is displayed in the small display area Dm3 as shown in FIG. A treasure box 805 is displayed in the area Dm.

  The display mode of the treasure box 805 is different from that of the above-described treasure boxes 802 and 804b, and is configured to be able to indicate to the player the expected degree per two kinds in the small win that has been won this time. Specifically, it is configured such that the treasure box (treasure box 805) having a poor display mode is more easily displayed when the small hit (small hit C) having the lowest expected degree per two kinds is won. Thereby, it is possible to make the player predict the degree of expectation per two kinds by the display mode of the situation (state) display mode Dm3a displayed in the small display area Dm3 and the display mode of the treasure box displayed in the main display area Dm. it can.

  That is, when the display screen shown in FIG. 14B is displayed, it is highly likely that the time-saving termination condition is satisfied because the small hit (small hit C) having the lowest expectation per two kinds is won. Therefore, in the small hitting game to be executed thereafter, the player plays the game while praying for the V prize.

  As described above, the present embodiment is configured to be able to set a plurality of time-saving end conditions that can be satisfied based on a special symbol lottery (variation) executed during the time-saving state. It is possible to execute an effect (display of the status (state) display mode Dm3a) that allows the player to grasp the status of the time reduction state based on whether or not the time reduction end condition is satisfied and the update status until the time reduction end condition is satisfied. Therefore, even when a plurality of time saving end conditions are set, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the time saving state is suddenly ended and the player is confused.

  Next, display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the small hit game in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 16A shows a display screen displayed when the right to win two types has not been obtained at the time when a predetermined period has elapsed since the small hit game in which the small hit type A is set as the small hit type. FIG. 16 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a case where a small hit game in which a small hit A is set as a small hit type is executed and a right per two kinds is acquired after a predetermined period elapses. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed in FIG. FIG. 17 (a) shows a case where the right to win two types has not been acquired at the time when a predetermined period has elapsed since the small hit game in which the small hit B or C is set as the small hit type. FIG. 17 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a displayed display screen, and FIG. 17 (b) shows two types of small hits after a predetermined period elapses after a small hit game in which a small hit B or C is set as a small hit type. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the right is acquired.

  In the first embodiment, a small hitting game in which the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened 12 times during the small hitting game is executed, and at the fifth or tenth opening timing, When the V switch 650e3 does not detect a ball, an instruction command is output (see S1609 in FIG. 54). When it is determined that the instruction command has been received, the third symbol display device 81 displays an emphasis guidance display mode (see FIG. 16 (a)) that emphasizes and guides the V winning device 650 to win a ball. Set a display instruction command to cause the display.

  Then, when the V switch 650e3 detects a ball in a state in which the emphasized guidance display mode is displayed, as shown in FIG. 16B, a display achievement for displaying the achievement display mode for blessing the player. Set the command. That is, in the present embodiment, if the small hitting game is executed and the opening operation of the V winning device 650 is executed, the ball is surely won to the V winning device 650 by performing the right-handed game. In addition, the ball that has won the V prize device 650 during the small hit game flows down to the special discharge channel 650e2 provided with the V switch 650e3. In spite of this configuration, if the V switch 650e3 determines that the ball has not been detected at the fifth opening timing of the opening / closing door 650f1, the third symbol is displayed when the small hitting game is started. The left-handed game is executed without noticing the right-handed guidance in the guidance display area Dm2 (see FIG. 10B) of the display device 81. Alternatively, the game may be stopped.

  In such a case, by changing the display for guiding right-handing displayed in the guidance display area Dm2 to a more emphasized display, it is possible to make it easier for the player to perform a right-handed game. Further, as a timing for displaying the emphasized guidance display mode (see FIG. 16A), when a right-handed game is performed after the emphasized guidance display mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the right-handed game is performed. The timing at which the shot ball reaches the V winning device 650 during the small hit game is set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player who has executed the right-handed game in accordance with the display of the emphasized guidance display mode Dy1 cannot cause the ball to flow down to the special discharge channel 650e2 during the small hit game.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the small hit type that has been won is configured such that the degree of expectation of the two kinds is different, and a small hit game (small hit A) with a high degree of expectation per two kinds is executed. And the case where the small hit game (small hit B, C) having a low expectation per two kinds is executed, the content of the effect display executed at the fifth or tenth opening timing is described. Different.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10 in First Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device 83, and display setting on third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and to set the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol big hit type are selected. , A stop type selection counter C3 used to select an outage stop type in a special symbol, and a small hit type counter C5 used to select a small hit type of a special symbol. And a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first hit random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 used for selecting a variation pattern. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 51). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to the entry into the first entrance 64 composed of four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas). Are the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small hit type counter C5, and the variation type counter CS1 in accordance with the timing of entering the first entrance 64. Are respectively stored.

  Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted to the special symbol reserved ball execution area, A special symbol change based on the stored various values is started. Although the present embodiment does not have a configuration for holding and storing a ball entering the second entrance 640 and a configuration for holding and storing that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, these configurations are not included. Also, as a predetermined number (for example, four) of reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas), a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area and a normal symbol reserved ball storage area may be provided.

  Subsequently, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 999 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 999). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 999, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 51).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the timing at which the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. Is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 or the special symbol reserved ball execution area. Then, the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. When it matches the value of the random number that is the jackpot set by 202a, the jackpot of the special symbol is determined.

  The first random number table 202a has two types of special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for the first special symbol and special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 for the second special symbol. Although the number of random numbers is the same, the number of small random numbers is set differently (see FIG. 20). In this way, by varying the number of random hits to be a small hit, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol make it possible to increase the degree of expectation for giving a bonus (big hit or small hit) to the player. It can be different. The special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 and the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first random number table 202a, and FIG. 20B is a diagram showing the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1. FIG. 20C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2. In the first random number table 202a, a random number value (determination value) determined to be a big hit and a random number value (determination value) determined to be a small hit are set in the first special symbol or the second special symbol lottery. It is a table.

  Specifically, when performing the lottery of the first special symbol, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 20B, in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, “0 to 4” among the values of the random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value, and the other values are other than the jackpot (ie, It is defined as a judgment value of “out of range”. Then, in the lottery of the first special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 is determined, and if the value is any one of “0 to 4”, it is determined that the big hit is made.

  When the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 20C, in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2, among the values of the random number counter C1, “0 to 4” is defined as the big hit determination value, and “5 to 989” is the small hit determination value. And “990 to 999” are defined as other (ie, out-of-range) determination values. Then, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 is determined, and if the value is any of “0 to 4”, it is determined to be a big hit, and the value is determined to be one of “5 to 989”. In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol 1 in the RAM 203 is set at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a. Further, in a state in which a lottery (change) of a special symbol can be executed (that is, in a state other than during the change of the special symbol and the big hit game and the small hit game), the ball is the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. Is stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203 at the timing of entering the ball.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol reserved ball execution area is not a random number determined to be a big hit or a small hit of the special symbol, That is, if it is a random number that is determined to be out of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol holding ball execution area is a random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 The display mode corresponding to the displayed stop symbol is that at the time of the special symbol big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol reserved ball execution area.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. In the first random number counter C1, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are drawn, there are five random numbers which are the big hits of the special symbol, and the random numbers "0 to 4" are as described above. Are stored in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 and the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 of the first random number table 202a. Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the total number of random numbers is 1,000, and the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 5, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1/200”.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. In the present embodiment, using the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2, the first hit type selection table 202b is referred to to determine the big hit type when the big hit is won. Here, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 21A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first hit type selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 21A, in the present embodiment, at the time of drawing the first special symbol (special figure 1), the special figure 1 big hit type used when determining the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2. There is a selection table 202b1 and a special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202b2 used when determining the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired at the time of drawing the second special symbol (special figure 2). . Thereby, the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special figure 1 is different from the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special figure 2, or each of a plurality of types of the jackpot is selected. To provide different game characteristics to the game using the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the game using the second special symbol (special figure 2). Can improve the interest of the game.

  Next, the special figure 1 big hit type selection table 202b1 used at the time of the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 big hit type selection table 202b1. As shown in FIG. 21B, in the first hit type counter C2, if the random value is any one of “0 to 9”, the big hit type becomes “big hit A”, and any of “10 to 49” The jackpot type in the case of the hit is "big hit B", and the hit type in the case of any of "50 to 99" is "the big hit C".

  “Big hit A” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds as a big hit game and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to a time reduction state (one time reduction). Since the number of rounds is large and the game state after the jackpot is set to a time saving state that is advantageous to the player, the “big hit A” is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 10 random numbers for which "big hit A" is selected. In this case, the rate at which "big hit A" is selected is 10%.

  “Big hit B” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 5 as a big hit game, and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the time reduction state (one time reduction). Although the number of rounds is smaller than the above "big hit A", since the game state after the big hit is set to a time saving state advantageous to the player, "big hit B" is a big hit type advantageous to the player. Of the 100 counter values (random number values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 40 random numbers for which "big hit B" is selected. In this case, the rate at which "big hit B" is selected is 40%.

  “Big hit C” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 5 as a big hit game, and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to a normal state (non-time saving state). Since the number of rounds is small and the normal state is set after the jackpot, the "jackpot C" is a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player. Of the 100 counter values (random number values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 50 random numbers from which the "big hit C" is selected. In this case, the rate at which "big hit C" is selected is 50%.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is selected at a rate of 10% of the case of winning the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and 90 5 rounds of jackpot games are selected at the rate of%. In addition, a jackpot in which the game state after the end of the jackpot game shifts to the time saving state at a rate of 50% is selected.

  Next, the special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202b2 used at the time of the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202b2. As shown in FIG. 21C, in the first hit type counter C2, if the random value is any one of “0 to 99”, the big hit type is “big hit D”. That is, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the "big hit D" which is the most advantageous for the player as the big hit type is always selected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21 (d), a description will be given of the time saving content for each jackpot type.

  In the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are used. Also, different jackpot types may be selected for the first special symbol and the second special symbol even if they are the same value of the first hit type counter C2. By configuring in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type that is executed with a larger number of rounds when a big hit is made with the second special symbol, the player with the second special symbol can be more successful It can be expected. Therefore, hitting in the high-probability gaming state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the game preference in the high-probability state can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly think that the player wants to shift to the high probability state, and the game can be performed for a longer time.

  In addition, the type of the jackpot type selected in the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the selection rate (distribution rate) of each jackpot type are the same, and the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type is set. You may comprise so that only a range may differ. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a fraudulent act of acquiring the value of the first hit type counter C2 aiming at a specific counter value from being executed in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In this embodiment, the stop type at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after reach occurs, it is different from the symbol that has reached reach as the final stop symbol. Two stop (rendering) patterns are selected: “reach out” (for example, in the range of 90 to 99) where the symbol stops and “complete out” (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where no reach occurs. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and when a ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is stored in the RAM 203. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. When the ball has entered the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into those for the normal state and those for the short time state, and the range of the random value set for each outage stop type is changed according to the table. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state or in a time-saving state more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

  For example, in the time saving state, a large hit range is likely to occur, so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary. It is easy to select “completely out of range” and “reach out of reach” is narrowed to 90 to 99, so that it is difficult to select “out of reach”. In addition, if the special symbol is in a low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entrance 64. The table for the low probability is selected, and “completely out of range” is hardly selected, and the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “out of reach” is widened to 80 to 99. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done.

  In this embodiment, in order to change the selection ratio of the stop type according to the game state, a stop type selection table (not shown) is provided for the normal state and for the time reduction state. A special table may be provided in correspondence with the game state. For example, as a game state, it is easy to win a special symbol hit (big hit) (it becomes easier to win than the normal state). In a gaming machine having a probability state and a probability change state, a stop type selection table for the probability change state may be provided.

  The small hit type counter C5 determines a small hit type and determines a display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a small hit, and has a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 0). 99), the values are sequentially added one by one, and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), the value returns to 0. The value of the small hit type counter C5 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol 1 in the RAM 203 is set at the timing when the ball enters the first entrance 64. When the ball is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a and a lottery (change) of the special symbol can be executed (that is, the special symbol is not changed and the big hit game and the small hit game are not being performed), the ball enters the first entrance 64. Alternatively, the ball is stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203 at the timing of entering the second entrance 640.

  The value of the small hit type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. When the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol is a small hit, a small hit type selection table 202f (see FIG. 22) for determining the type of the small hit to be executed is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. Is set.

  Here, the contents of the small hit type selection table 202f will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the small hit type selection table 202f. As shown in FIG. 22, the small hit type selection table 202f specifies that three types of the small hits A to C are selected as the small hit types of the second special symbol according to the value of the small hit type counter C5. ing. Specifically, when the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5 is "0", the small hit type is "small hit A (big hit A when passing V)", and any of "1 to 10" Is a small hit B (big hit B at the time of passing V), and a small hit type of any of "11 to 99" is "small hit C (the V passing) Jackpot A) ".

  Here, in each of the small hit types (small hit A to small hit C), when a ball passes through the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 in the small hit game, the game is executed after the small hit game ends. A jackpot game type is set. In the case of the small hit A, the big hit A (15R time-saving big hit) is set, and after the small hit A is executed, the big hit in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 15R open state is executed. One time-saving game (period from 100 changes in the special symbol or 1 change in the second special symbol to the stop display) is set. In the case of the small hit B, a big hit B (5R short hit big hit), a 5R short hit once big hit is set, and after the small hit B is executed, the big hit in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state is set. It is configured such that one time-saving game (period until the special symbol is changed 100 times or the second special symbol is changed once and stopped and displayed) is set as the time-saving state thereafter. ing. In the case of the small hit C, the big hit A (15R short jackpot) is set as in the case of the small hit A, and after the small hit C is executed, the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state. Is executed, but after the big hit game, the time saving state is not set, and the normal state is set.

  As described above, the content of the big hit game executed after the small hit game ends and the game state set after the big hit game can be made different depending on the selected small hit type. Specifically, the small hit A is most advantageous to the player because the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is large (15R) and a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player after the end of the big hit game is set. The small hit B is set as a small hit, and the small hit B has a smaller number of rounds executed in the big hit game (5R) and is set to be disadvantageous than the small hit A described above, but the time saving state is set after the big hit game. You. The small hit C is set as the most disadvantageous small hit for the player because the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is small (5R), and the time saving state is not set after the big hit game.

  In the present embodiment, as the end condition of the time saving state, the number of times of change of the second special symbol is one (first end condition) or the number of times of change of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is A total of 100 times (second end condition) are set. With this configuration, the jackpot is won in a state where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is one or more, and when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot, the first special symbol (special figure 1) is set after the end of the jackpot. Even if the fluctuation of ()) is executed, the time saving state does not end. In addition, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed, the above-described second end condition is satisfied and the time saving state can be ended. (Special symbol) can be reliably changed a predetermined number of times.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time out, long-time out, normal reach, super reach, and the like. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 51) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 23A) storing a random value for determining one symbol variation time from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided in.

  Here, the contents of the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the fluctuation pattern table 202d. As shown in FIG. 23A, the fluctuation pattern table 202d is used in a state where a normal state is set as a game state and a normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 used in a state where a time reduction state is set. A time-saving variation pattern table 202d2 is defined. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, since the data table used to select the variation pattern differs according to the game state, the variation pattern (variation time) selected according to the game state varies. be able to.

  FIG. 23B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal use variation pattern table 202d1 provided in the variation pattern table 202d. As shown in FIG. 23 (b), in the normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1, the symbol type, the lottery result, and the range of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are associated with the fluctuation pattern.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 23 (b), the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is “missing”, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 139”. Is defined in association with a variation time of 7 seconds, a variation time of 20 seconds is defined in a range of “140 to 149”, and a variation time of 20 seconds is defined in association with a range of “150 to 179”. Various types of normal reach with a time of 40 seconds are defined in association with each other, and a super reach a with a variation time of 80 seconds is defined in a range of “180 to 198”.

  In addition, the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "big hit", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 29". A super reach with a variation time of 80 seconds is associated with a range of “30 to 189”, and a special reach with a variation time of 140 seconds is associated with a range of “190 to 198”. Have been.

  Next, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the lottery result is “missing”, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 198”, that is, the variation time is in the entire range. If a long departure of 180 seconds is specified and the lottery result is “big hit or small hit”, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 198”, that is, the variation time is 180 seconds in the entire range. Long off is specified.

  In this manner, one of the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation time of 7 seconds to 180 seconds is set according to the result of the special symbol lottery, and a command indicating this fluctuation pattern is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. By doing so, a fluctuation effect corresponding to the fluctuation time is executed by the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, when a right-handed game is executed in a state where the normal state is set as the game state, the ball is not inserted into the second entrance 640. Therefore, during the normal state, the game in which the ball enters the first entrance 64, that is, the game for executing the lottery of the first special symbol is performed. The case where the lottery of the second special symbol is executed during the normal state configured as described above is a case where the player illegally enters the ball into the second entrance 640, and thus the normal state is performed. In the variation of the second special symbol in, a variation pattern having a long variation time is selected. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the second special symbol is randomly selected in a short period of time. If it is determined that the lottery (change) of the second special symbol has been executed during the normal state, the lottery of the second special symbol is illegally performed using the period (180 seconds) until the result of the lottery is displayed. The execution of (fluctuation) may be notified to the outside. Also, when the second special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is executed fraudulently, as a result of the illegally executed second special symbol lottery (fluctuation) result, an out-of-place lottery (fluctuation) result is compulsorily performed. It may be configured to create and display.

  As shown in FIG. 23 (b), the fluctuation pattern (variation time) selected in the normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 is 7 seconds when the symbol type is the special figure 1 and the lottery result is out of order (the selection ratio is It is stipulated that selection is facilitated in the order of about 70%), 40 seconds (selection ratio is approximately 15%), 80 seconds (selection ratio is approximately 10%), and 20 seconds (selection ratio is approximately 5%). . In addition, when the lottery result is a big hit, it is easy to select in order of 80 seconds (the selection ratio is about 80%), 40 seconds (the selection ratio is about 15%), and 140 seconds (the selection ratio is about 5%). Stipulated.

  As described above, the special symbol lottery result and the selected fluctuation pattern (variation time) are related, and the ratio of the fluctuation time (variation pattern) selected when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit and the special The ratio of the variation time (fluctuation pattern) selected when the lottery result of the symbol is out of order is configured to indicate the jackpot expectation degree when the specific variation time (fluctuation pattern) is selected. ing. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player predict whether or not a jackpot has been won based on the selected change time (change pattern).

  In this embodiment, the same variation pattern table is used irrespective of the type of the winning jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. Different types of variation pattern tables may be used depending on whether the type is the jackpot type or the jackpot type indicating other jackpots (jackpot B and jackpot C). In this case, for example, the fluctuation pattern table used when the big hit type indicating the other big hit is won is shorter than the fluctuation pattern table used when the big hit type indicating the big hit (big hit A) is won. It is preferable that the time fluctuation pattern is configured to be easily selected. This makes it possible to expect a game result that is more advantageous to the player as the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation pattern to be executed is longer, so that the player is interested in the fluctuation time of the special symbol. be able to.

  In addition, the fluctuation pattern table used when the normal jackpot type indicating the big hit is won is more easily selected as the fluctuation pattern table used when the big hit type indicating the big hit is won than the fluctuation pattern table used when the big hit type indicating the positive jackpot is selected. It is also possible to provide a game result that is surprising to the player when a jackpot is won with a short fluctuation time, even if a short fluctuation time is selected. , You can have expectations to the end.

  Next, the contents of the variation pattern table 202d2 for time saving provided in the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time-saving variation pattern table 202d2. As shown in FIG. 24, in the time-saving variation pattern table 202d2, the symbol type, the number of variations, the lottery result, and the range of the value of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with the variation pattern.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 24, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the number of times of change is 1 to 4 times, and the lottery result is “out”, the value of the change type counter CS1 is Is in the range of “0 to 198”, that is, the variation time is set to be short or longer than 2 seconds in the entire range, and when the lottery result is “big hit”, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 198”. A range, that is, a short hit of 2 seconds is defined in the entire range. When the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the number of fluctuations is 5 or more, and the lottery result is "out of range", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the entire range. If the fluctuation time is out of 20 seconds and the lottery result is "big hit", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the fluctuation time is 20 seconds in the entire range. Is stipulated. When the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the number of fluctuations is one or more, and the lottery result is "out", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, If the fluctuation time is within 30 seconds in the entire range and the lottery result is "small hit", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 160" and the fluctuation time is 10 seconds. Is defined, and a small / medium hit of 30 seconds is specified in the range of “161 to 198”. If the lottery result is “big hit”, a medium / big hit of 30 seconds is specified.

  Returning to FIG. 18, the description will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interruption process (see FIG. 37), and it is detected that the ball has passed the normal starting port (through gate) 67. And stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number which is a hit for the ordinary symbol is set by the second random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set to the second random number table 202c. Is determined to be a normal symbol (the second symbol) when the value of the random number matches the value of the random number set in the above. In the present embodiment, the probability of winning a normal symbol is always constant irrespective of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, but other configurations may be used.

  For example, the second hit random number table 202c is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period during which the normal symbol is in a normal state) and a high probability of a normal symbol being hit more than the low probability (a normal symbol is used). Two types of time-saving periods. In this case, the number of hit random numbers included in each is set to be different. Thus, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning can be changed between a low probability of a normal symbol and a high probability of a normal symbol.

  When the ball passes the normal starting port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained, and it is determined whether the current gaming state is the time reduction state. If the gaming state is the time reduction state, the second symbol display is performed. In the device 83, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for 3 seconds. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not the time saving state, the second symbol display device 83 executes the normal symbol change display for 30 seconds.

  If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning has been achieved, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 has been completed, the symbol is stopped (second symbol). The symbol “O” is lit. Then, it is determined whether the gaming state at the time when the second symbol is stopped (fixed display) is the time saving state, and the time when the second symbol is stopped (fixed display) is the time saving state, and If the change start time of the second symbol is also in the time saving state, the operation of the electric accessory 640a is controlled (long opening control) so that the second entrance 640 is opened “2 seconds × 2 times”. On the other hand, in other cases, the operation of the electric accessory 640a is controlled (short opening control) so that the second entrance 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. The opening time and number of the second entrance 640 may be set arbitrarily.

  As described above, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol and the operation content of the electric accessory 640a at the time of winning (the opening period and the number of times of opening of the second entrance 640) are varied depending on the set gaming state. When the game state at the start of the change of the normal symbol is the time saving state, the time of the change display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", compared to the case of the normal state, and further, If the lottery result of the second symbol that started to fluctuate during the period in which the time reduction state is set is a hit and the time when the electric accessory 640a starts operating is also in the time reduction state, otherwise Since the opening period of the second entrance 640 is very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 2 seconds × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640. State. Note that a table (not shown) that stores random values for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit based on the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202.

  In the present embodiment, according to the game state at the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) and the game state at the operation start timing of the electric accessory 640a executed based on the winning of the normal symbol, Although the variation time of the second symbol and the operation content of the electric accessory 640a are set to be different, other configurations may be used. For example, the variation of the normal symbol (second symbol) may be used. Between the start timing and the operation start timing of the electric accessory 640a, a discriminating means for discriminating that the time saving state is set is provided, and the fluctuation time of the second symbol is determined by using the discrimination result of the discriminating means. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the operation details of the electric accessory 640a are set.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to execute an operation (long opening) that is advantageous to the player as the operation of the electric accessory 640a, it is usually necessary to start the change of the symbol and the operation of the electric accessory 640a at the start of the operation. At any time, the time saving state must be set. With such a configuration, for example, when the second symbol that has started to change at the timing when the normal state is set is stopped and displayed with the identification information indicating a hit at the timing when the time saving state is set, or , Based on the lottery of one second symbol, such as a case where the second symbol that starts to change at the timing when the time reduction state is set is stopped and displayed with the identification information indicating a hit at the timing when the time reduction state is set. In the case where the variation of the second symbol executed and the operation of the electric accessory 640a straddle a plurality of game states, the operation control (long opening) of the electric accessory 640a which is advantageous to the player is executed. Can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent providing an excessively advantageous state to the player.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 52).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19A, the contents of the main controller 110 ROM 202 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 19A, in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as a part of fixed value data, a first random number table 202a, a first random type selection table 202b, a second random number table 202c, At least a fluctuation pattern table 202d, a time saving provision table 202e, a small hit type selection table 202f, and an open scenario table 202g are stored.

  In the fixed value data stored in the ROM 202, the first random number table 202, the first random type selection table 202b, the second random number table 202c, the variation pattern table 202d, and the small hit type selection table 202f are: Since the detailed contents have already been described, the description is omitted.

  The time-saving grant table 202e is a data table that is referred to when a plurality of time-saving termination conditions for terminating the time-saving state are set differently for each jackpot type of the jackpot that has been won. When the period is over (S1612 in FIG. 52: Yes), a different number of time savings (time saving end conditions) is set according to the type of big hit.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 21 (d), the contents specified in the time saving provision table 202e will be described. FIG. 21D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time saving table 202e. In the present embodiment, there are a jackpot type (jackpot A, B, D) in which the time-saving state is set after the jackpot ends, and a jackpot type (jackpot C) in which the time-saving state is not set (the normal state is set) after the jackpot ends. As shown in FIG. 21 (d), a plurality of time-saving termination conditions are defined corresponding to each jackpot type.

  In the present embodiment, the first time-saving end condition that is established according to the number of times the special symbol changes, the second time-saving end condition that is established according to the number of wins of the small win A in the special symbol lottery, and the special symbol lottery There are a third time reduction end condition that is satisfied according to the number of wins of the small win B, and a fourth time reduction end condition that is satisfied according to the number of wins of the small win C in the special symbol lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 21D, values set in various counters corresponding to each of the plurality of time reduction termination conditions are defined in the time reduction granting table 202e, and the values set as the first time reduction termination conditions described above are The value set as the second time saving end condition is set in the small time saving counter 203k, the value set as the second time saving end condition is set in the small hitting A counter 203m, the value set as the third time saving end condition is set in the small time saving B counter 203n, and the fourth time saving end is set. The value set as the condition is set in the small hit C counter 203p.

  Specifically, when the jackpot types are the jackpots A and B, “100” is set to the medium-hour saving counter 203k (first time-saving end condition), “1” is set to the small hitting A counter 203m, and It is stipulated that a value of “3” is set in the B counter 203n and a value of “5” is set in the small hit C counter 203p. In the case of the big hit D, the time saving medium-term counter 203k (first time saving time end condition) , The small hitting A counter 203m is set to "2", the small hitting B counter 203n is set to "10", and the small hitting C counter 203p is set to "50".

  As described above, in the present embodiment, if the jackpot type is the jackpot C, the time saving state is not set after the end of the jackpot game, so the jackpot C of the time saving grant table 202e is set for the various counters described above. Value is not specified. In this way, by differentiating the conditions for terminating the time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game for each of the winning jackpot types, even if it is notified in advance that the time-saving state will be set after the end of the jackpot game, a specific Since it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the time saving contents, it is possible to play the game with the motivation to play until the end (until the time saving state ends).

  In this embodiment, in addition to the time saving end state set using the time saving grant table 202e, the time saving state is configured to end when a special symbol jackpot is won. Since the time-saving termination conditions that are satisfied do not differ according to the set jackpot type, they are omitted from the time-saving giving table 202e, but are described above. The time saving termination condition) may also be configured to define a value in the time saving grant table 202e.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a configuration having the above-described first to fourth time-saving termination conditions is used as a plurality of time-saving termination conditions, but other conditions may be set as the time-saving termination conditions. For example, the time saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of times of the change of the first special symbol becomes a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), or when the number of times of change of the second special symbol becomes the predetermined number of times (for example, 80 times) A predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times the sum of the values of the small hit A counter 203m, the small hit B counter 203n, and the small hit C counter 203p), and the number of times the small prize is won and the V prize device is activated are calculated. May be set.

  Furthermore, the time reduction termination condition that is established by another factor may be set without being based on the number of times of the special symbol and the lottery result. When the number of actuations) reaches a predetermined number, or when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 50) enter a specific entrance (for example, a general winning opening 63). May be set in advance.

  As described above, a plurality of time-saving end conditions for terminating the time-saving state which is a gaming state advantageous to the player are set, and the time-saving state is ended when any of the time-saving end conditions is set. This makes it difficult for the player to know in advance how long the time saving state will continue, so that a monotonous game can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the control for terminating the time saving state when any one of the plurality of time saving terminating conditions is satisfied is used. The configuration may be such that the time saving end condition is satisfied when the conditions are satisfied (for example, two). In this case, a number-of-established-number determining means for determining the number of the time-saving termination conditions that have been satisfied, and a condition-arriving determining means for determining whether the number of satisfied cases determined by the number-of-established-number determining means has reached a predetermined number (for example, two); The time saving state may be terminated (the normal state is set) when the condition reaching determination means determines that the number of fulfillment has reached a predetermined number (for example, two).

  Further, there is provided a content discriminating means for discriminating the content of the time saving termination condition which is first established, and a predetermined number (for example, two) serving as a discrimination reference of the condition reaching discriminating means is varied based on the discrimination result of the content discriminating means. A determination reference number variable unit may be provided. With this, it is possible to set a time-saving state that is easy to end or a time-saving state that is difficult to end according to the type of the time-saving end condition that is first established, so that even after the time-saving state is set, the player is motivated. A game can be played.

  In addition to the contents described above, a predetermined period measuring unit that measures a predetermined period (for example, until the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 10 times) after the time saving state is set, and a measurement result of the predetermined period measuring unit. And a result discriminating means for discriminating. If the result discriminating means determines that the present time is within the predetermined period, the termination of the time-saving state is continued until the predetermined period elapses even if the above-described time-saving termination condition is satisfied. A time-saving termination delay means for delaying the time may be provided, or an end condition invalidating means for invalidating the time-saving termination condition established when the result is determined to be within a predetermined period by the result determination means may be provided. While the result determination means determines that the current time is within the predetermined period, it determines whether the time reduction termination condition is satisfied or not, and updates (subtracts) the values of various counters set corresponding to each time reduction termination condition. ) May not be executed.

  With this configuration, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation where the time-saving state ends immediately after the time-saving state is set, and it is possible to complicatedly set the end timing of the time-saving state. Also, as described above, in the case of using the process of terminating the time-saving state based on the establishment of the plurality of time-saving termination conditions, the plurality of time-saving termination conditions are set to the priority time-saving termination condition (for example, A time-saving ending condition that is satisfied when the number of times reaches 100 times) and a non-priority time-saving ending condition (for example, a time-saving ending condition that is satisfied when the number of small hits reaches three) are set in advance, and priority time saving is ended. It is preferable that the time-saving state is ended immediately when the condition is satisfied, and the time-saving state is ended when only a plurality of non-priority time-saving end conditions are satisfied. By providing the priority time-saving termination condition in this way, it is possible to prevent the time-saving state from being excessively provided to the player.

  The open scenario table 202g indicates the open pattern of the variable prize device 65 or the V prize device 650 in a hit game (big hit game, small hit game) executed when a big hit or a small hit is won by a special symbol lottery. This is a data table in which an open scenario in which various types of solenoids provided in each winning device are operated is stored as a scenario. The data is stored in a jackpot type set for a winning jackpot or a small jackpot set for a winning. The content of the release scenario is defined corresponding to the type of the small hit.

  Here, the contents of the release scenario table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the release scenario table 202g. Although the open scenario table 202g schematically shown in FIG. 25 collectively describes the period in which the same scenario is set, actually, the elapsed period from the time when each open scenario is set is described. Is provided so that the operation of the contents specified according to the measurement value of the measurement counter is executed in the currently set open scenario, but the detailed description thereof is as follows. Omitted.

  Here, the contents of the release scenario table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the release scenario table 202g. The open scenario table 202g includes a prize device (variable prize device 65) in which a ball can enter in a bonus game (big hit game, small hit game) executed when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit or a small hit. , V winning device 650) is defined in accordance with the winning type (big hit type, small hit type) according to the winning type (open scenario).

  As described above, the prize devices (variable prize device 65, V prize device 650) and open operation contents (open scenario) that are opened according to the winning result (big hit or small hit) and the hit type (big hit type or small hit type). ) Makes it possible to set the benefit game in multiple stages, so that even after winning a big hit or a small hit, the player can enjoy the type of hit that has been won. it can.

  In the opening scenario table 202g, a start interval period during the hit game (a period from the start of the hit game to the first opening operation of the prize device) corresponding to the winning type (big hit type, small hit type) that has been won. Opening operation mode of the winning device (the type of the winning device to be opened, the number of seconds of one opening operation (round game), the total number of opening operations (round number)), and the interval period between rounds (between round games) And the end interval period (the period from the end of all round games to the end of the winning game (the period until the start of a new special symbol change) )) And to switch the flow path so that the ball that has won the V prize device 650 flows down the normal discharge flow path 650e1 or the special discharge flow path 650e2. OFF switching operation modes of the channel solenoid 650k have been defined respectively.

  Specifically, the winning type corresponding to the big hit A is "2 seconds" as the start interval period, and "variable winning device 65" is "15 rounds" and one round as the opening operation mode of the winning device. An opening operation mode in which the game is continuously opened for "29 seconds" is defined as "1 second" as an interval period between rounds and "4 seconds" as an end interval period. Therefore, when the jackpot type is a jackpot of jackpot A, a jackpot game in which the variable prize device 65 is opened for 15 rounds is executed, and a jackpot game in which many prize balls are paid out to the player. . Further, when the jackpot type is the jackpot A, since the time-saving state is set, which is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player after the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot A gives the privilege that is most advantageous to the player. It is a jackpot.

  Next, corresponding to the jackpot types B and C, "2 seconds" is set as the start interval period, and "variable winning device 65" is set as "5 rounds" as one opening game mode of the winning device as one round game. In the opening operation mode of releasing “continuously 29 seconds”, “1 second” is defined as an interval period between rounds, and “4 seconds” is defined as an end interval period. Therefore, when the jackpot type wins the jackpots B and C, the jackpot game in which the variable prize device 65 is opened for five rounds is executed, and the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A to the player is executed. This is a jackpot game where about 1/3 of the prize balls are paid out. Also, when the jackpot type is the jackpot B, a time-saving state that is a gaming state advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is set, and in the case of the jackpot C, the time-saving state is not set after the jackpot game is ended. Because of the configuration, the jackpot B is a jackpot in which a privilege that is more disadvantageous than the jackpot A and more advantageous than the jackpot C is given.

  In response to the hit type of the jackpot D, “1 second” is set as the start interval period, “V prize device 650” is opened in the “first round” as the opening operation mode of the prize device, and “variable prize device 65” is opened. Is released in the "2nd to 15th rounds", and as one round game, the first round is released "12 times with an interval of 0.5 seconds between opening of 0.1 seconds opening" and 2nd opening. In the fifteenth round, the opening operation mode of “continuously opening for 29 seconds” is “10 seconds” after the first round as an inter-round interval period, and “1 second” in other cases, and “4 seconds” as the end interval period. Is stipulated.

  In other words, although the details will be described later, the start interval period of the jackpot D and the period until the second round is executed (the round game contents (opening / closing operation mode) of the first round, and the inter-round interval after the end of the first round) The content specified in (period) is configured to be the same as the content specified in the small hit game described later. With this configuration, it is determined whether the hit game being executed this time is a big hit game or a small hit game until the timing when the first round ends (if the small hit game is, the small hit game is ended). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp. As a result, it is possible to provide a surprising hit game to a player who has recognized that the small hit game has been executed by winning the small hit.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot D is a jackpot type that is always selected when the jackpot is won by the second special symbol, and is set so that almost all the small jackpots are won in the second special symbol lottery. (See FIG. 20C). Therefore, the time saving state is set as the gaming state, and during a period in which the change of the second special symbol is mainly performed, a certain win game is started after the change of the special symbol is stopped and displayed. In this case, in order to execute the winning game started from the same opening operation regardless of whether the jackpot has been won or the small jackpot, which of the jackpot (small jackpot or small jackpot) has been won by the player? Can be difficult to grasp.

  In addition, in the second special symbol lottery, the probability of winning a jackpot is set to be lower than the case of winning a small jackpot, and after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot D is completed. It is set so that the time saving state is given. Therefore, the player who wins the jackpot is not provided with a disadvantage that is more disadvantageous than when the player wins the small jackpot, so that a surprising game (a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot D) is provided to the player. Since the game can be made more advantageous, the player can be more excited.

  It should be noted that in the case where the big hit D is won and in the case where various small hits are won, the same effect mode is executed as the variable display (variable effect) displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and In order to make it difficult for the player to identify the lottery result by the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b showing the result of the special symbol lottery, the special symbol stop display timing and the special symbol lottery display are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Although the stop display timing of the third symbol is made different or the stop display timing of the special symbol is synchronized with the stop display timing of the third symbol, the display of the third symbol is not performed during the stop display timing or the period before and after the stop display timing. In order to make it more difficult for the player to identify than in periods other than the above, the display mode and display area are changed, and the third symbol display is performed at the special symbol stop display timing. May or switch on the main display of the symbol for demonstration that is displayed in the area Dm third effect for normal symbol made to correspond to the variable display of normal symbol from symbol of location 81.

  In addition, a prize device (V prize device 650) that opens when a win game is executed and the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are disposed separately, and a special symbol stop display timing (in any one of the victory devices). At the timing of notifying the player of the winning), the third symbol display device 81 performs an effect display for causing the player to pay attention to the V winning device 650, and the first symbol display device 37a, It is preferable that the display area of 37b be smaller than the display area of the third symbol display device 81 so that the first symbol is less visible than the third symbol. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the first symbol display device 37a, 37b to determine whether the result of the lottery of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit by the stop display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, and to continue the big hit during the hit game. Can be expected to win.

  Returning to FIG. 25, the description will be continued. The content defined in accordance with the hit type corresponding to the small hits A to C includes, in addition to the small hit game (one round game), the V hit switch 650e3 detects a ball during the small hit game, and the small hit game is performed. An opening scenario of a jackpot game (2 to 15 round games) that is continuously executed after the end is also defined. Thus, the small hit game content of the winning small hit type can be reliably associated with the big hit game content that can be executed after the small hit game ends, so that an appropriate game can be provided.

  Specifically, for the small hit A, the start interval period “1 second” is set as the small hit game, and the opening operation mode of the winning device “V winning device 650” is set to “1 round”. Round games "0.1 seconds open 12 times", open interval period "0.5 seconds (open interval 1) other than after the 5th and 10th open ends, 5th and 10th open ends Later, 5 seconds (opening interval 2) "is defined.

  Then, as a big hit game that can be executed after the small hit game ends, the “variable winning device 65” is opened in the “2nd to 15th rounds”, and one round game “continuously open for 29 seconds” is executed during the round interval period. After the end of the first round, “10 seconds” is set, otherwise “1 second” is specified, a start interval is “2 seconds”, and an end interval period is “8 seconds”.

  In addition, for the small hits B and C, the start interval period "1 second" is set as the small hit game, and the opening operation mode of the winning device "V winning device 650" is opened "one round" once. Round game "0.1 second release 12 times", interval time between opening "0.5 seconds after opening of 5th and 10th opening (interval 1 between opening), after 5th and 10th opening of opening 5 seconds (opening interval 2). "

  Then, as a big hit game that can be executed after the small hit game ends, the “variable prize device 65” is opened in the “2nd to 5th rounds”, and one round game “continuously open for 29 seconds” is executed during the round interval period. After the end of the first round, “10 seconds” is set, otherwise “1 second” is specified, a start interval is “2 seconds”, and an end interval period is “8 seconds”.

  That is, the big hit game that can be executed after the small hit game corresponding to the small hits B and C is set so that the number of round games is smaller than that of the big hit game corresponding to the small hit A described above. In addition, when the small hit type is the small hit B, a time-saving state that is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player after the corresponding big hit game is set, and in the case of the small hit C, after the corresponding big hit game ends. Since the time saving state is configured not to be set, the small hit B is smaller than the small hit A and is a small hit in which a privilege more advantageous than the small hit C is given.

  Returning to FIG. 18, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 18, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by the main process (see FIG. 51), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 50). It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When NMI is input to NMI, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 49) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  As shown in FIG. 19B, the RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b, a big hit start flag 203c, a big hit flag 203d, a small hit type storage area 203e, Small hit start flag 203f, small hit middle flag 203g, V passing big hit type storage area 203h, V flag 203i, V passing flag 203j, time saving counter 203k, small hit A counter 203m, small hit B counter 203n, small hit C counter 203p, a normal figure short fluctuation flag 203q, and a memory area 203z.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area), and each of these areas has a first entrance 64 Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired based on the fact that the ball has entered is stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired at the timing when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas. Of the vacant areas (the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area), the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the first special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are executed. It is shifted (moved) to an area, and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed based on each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

  Then, when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  Since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not have the function of holding the second special symbol, the ball enters the second entrance 640 in a state where a new special symbol can be changed (starting). When a prize is won, the values of the counters C1 to C3, C5, and CS1 are acquired at that timing, and the acquired data is stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area as it is.

  In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not have the function of holding the normal symbol (the second symbol), when the ball passes the normal starting port 67 in a state where a new normal symbol can be changed. At that time, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored as it is in the ordinary symbol holding ball execution area.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is a variable display of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the three symbols display device 81 (variable display) up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value becomes 4. One is added (see S704 in FIG. 43). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S207 in FIG. 38).

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of times N in which the variable display is held in the special symbol) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a special figure 1 reserved ball number command (S208 in FIG. 38, FIG. 43). See S705). The special figure 1 reserved ball count command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203b is changed.

  Each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is changed, the sound ramp control device 113 changes the value retained in the main control device 110 by the special figure 1 reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. It is possible to obtain the value of the number of retained balls displayed. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual changed display held ball held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number-of-holding balls command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls (holding symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The jackpot start flag 203c is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the jackpot game. When the fluctuation of the special symbol whose lottery result is determined to be a big hit stops, the big hit start flag 203c is set to ON (S216 in FIG. 38). If it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203c is ON and it is determined that it is the jackpot start timing, it is set to OFF (S1603 in FIG. 52). The jackpot start flag 203c is set to OFF in an initial state, and is configured to be backed up and to maintain a state immediately before the power is turned off when a power loss or the like occurs.

  The big hit flag 203d is a flag indicating that a big hit game is being played. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is the big hit is stopped (S216 in FIG. 38). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the jackpot end timing (when it is determined that the game of the number of rounds corresponding to the set jackpot type has ended), the game is set to off (S1620 in FIG. 52). The big hit flag 203d is a flag that is set to OFF in an initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure occurs is backed up to be held. It is configured to be.

  The small hit type storage area 203e is a storage area for temporarily storing the small hit type set for the winning small hit, and when it is determined that the small hit has been won (S307 in FIG. 39: Yes). ), And the acquired small hit type is temporarily stored (S311 in FIG. 39). Then, when the open number of the V winning device 650 reaches the predetermined number during the small hit game (S1707 in FIG. 53: Yes), it is determined that the V flag 203i is not set to ON (S1708 in FIG. 53; No). ), The stored small hit type is referred to (S1709 in FIG. 53), and an instruction command corresponding to the referred small hit type is set. Although detailed description is omitted, the information (information for indicating the small hit type) stored in the small hit type storage area 203e is configured to be cleared at the end of the small hit game.

  The small hit start flag 203f is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the small hit game. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is the small hit is stopped (S404 in FIG. 40). It is determined that the small hitting flag 203f is on, and if it is determined that it is the timing to start the small hitting game, it is set to off (S1703 in FIG. 53). The small hit start flag 203f is a flag that is set to OFF in an initial state such as a RAM clear state. It is configured to be.

  The small hitting flag 203g is a flag indicating that a small hitting game is being performed. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is the small hit is stopped (S404 in FIG. 40). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the timing of the end of the small hit (when it is determined that the game of the set number of rounds of the small hit has ended), it is set to OFF (S1720 in FIG. 53). The small hitting flag 203g is a flag that is set to OFF in an initial state such as RAM clearing. When a power failure or the like occurs, the state immediately before the power failure or the like is backed up and retained. It is configured to be.

  The V passing jackpot type storage area 203h stores data for determining the jackpot type set when the ball that has won the V prize device 650 is detected by the V switch 650e3 when the small hit game is being executed. This is a storage area to be stored. The V-pass jackpot type storage area 203h stores a data value corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the determined small hit type when the change of the special symbol whose determination result is the small hit stops (FIG. 40). S402). When the ball flows down the special discharge channel 650e2 in the V winning device 650 and the ball is detected by the V switch 650e3, the V flag corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the data value stored in the V passing jackpot type storage area 203h. 203i is set to ON. At the end of the small hitting game, the data value stored in the V-passing big hit type storage area 203h is cleared. This V-passage jackpot type storage area 203h is a flag that is set to OFF in an initial state such as RAM clear, and in the event of a power failure or the like, the state immediately before the occurrence of the power failure or the like is backed up. It is configured to be held by

  The V flag 203i corresponds to the type of the small hit game being executed when the ball flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2 in the V winning device 650 during the small hit game and the ball is detected by the V switch 650e3. The flag corresponding to the hit jackpot type is set to ON. At the end of the small hitting game, it is determined whether or not the V flag 203i is on (S1715 in FIG. 53), and if it is determined that the V flag 203i is on (S1715 in FIG. 53: Yes), it is set to on. The type of the jackpot to be executed is determined from the flag being set, and the start of the corresponding jackpot game is set (S1716 in FIG. 53). The V flag 203i is a flag that is set to OFF in an initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure or the like occurs, the state immediately before the power failure or the like occurs is backed up. It is configured as follows.

  The V passage flag 203j is a flag used to determine a state in which the V flag 203i is set to ON during the small hitting game, and is set to ON when the V flag 203i is set to ON. Is done. In the present embodiment, most of the balls that have won the V prize device 650 during the small hit game are configured to flow down the special discharge channel 650e2, and correspond to the ball that first wins the special discharge channel 650e2. It is set to ON in the V passage process (see FIG. 48) (S1207 in FIG. 48).

  Then, in the V passage processing (see FIG. 48), it is determined whether the V passage flag 203j is set to ON (S1201 in FIG. 48). ) And V passing processing (see FIG. 48) are skipped. Thus, even if the V switch 650e3 detects a plurality of balls during one small hitting game, only the V passage process corresponding to the ball detected first is executed. Therefore, the process executed during the small hit game can be simplified, and the V-pass command is transmitted to the voice ramp control device 113 a plurality of times, so that the V-pass management on the voice ramp control device 113 side is complicated. Can be suppressed.

  The time reduction medium counter 203k is a counter for measuring the number of times the special symbol changes until one of the time reduction end conditions set during the time reduction state is satisfied. In the big hit control process (S1504 in FIG. 52), the ending is performed. When it is determined that it is the end timing of the effect (the end timing of the jackpot) (S1612 in FIG. 52: Yes), the value (100) specified in the time savings table 202e is set (S1614 in FIG. 52). .

  Then, the value of the counter is referred to (S601 in FIG. 42) in the time saving number update process (S219 in FIG. 42) executed in the special symbol change process (S104 in FIG. 38), and if the counter value is larger than 0, If it is determined (S601: Yes in FIG. 42), the value of the counter is decremented by one. When it is determined that the value of the counter 203k during time saving after the subtraction is 0 (S604: Yes in FIG. 42), the normal state is set as the gaming state (S605 in FIG. 42) because the time saving end condition is satisfied. In the present embodiment, a plurality of time-saving termination conditions for terminating the time-saving state are set, and even if any of the time-saving termination conditions is satisfied (for example, the time-saving termination condition based on the number of wins per small hit). Is established), the counter value is set to 0 (reset) (S505 in FIG. 41). As described above, even when a time-saving termination condition other than the time-saving termination condition (first time-saving termination condition) referring to the value of the time-saving medium-time counter 203k among a plurality of time-saving termination conditions is satisfied, the time-saving medium-time counter 203k is not activated. Since the value is set to 0 (reset), it is possible to suppress a situation in which the process of subtracting the value of the counter 203k during the time saving is continued even though the time saving state ends. Also, no matter which of the plurality of time-saving termination conditions is satisfied, the value of various counters used to determine whether the time-saving termination condition is satisfied when terminating the time-saving state is set to an initial value (0). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the processing after the time-saving state is ended from becoming complicated.

  The small hit A counter 203m is a counter for measuring the number of wins of the small hit where the small hit A is set as the small hit type until one of the time saving end conditions set during the time saving state is satisfied, In the jackpot control process (S1504 in FIG. 52), when it is determined that the end timing of the ending effect (the jackpot end timing) is reached (S1612 in FIG. 52: Yes), the value specified in the time saving table 202e ( 1) is set (S1614 in FIG. 52).

  Then, in the small hit start setting process (S221 in FIG. 40) of the special symbol change process (S104 in FIG. 38), the small hit for the small hit which is currently won in the small hit time saving update process (S405 in FIG. 41) is executed. When it is determined that the type is the small hit A (S502 in FIG. 41: Yes), the value of the counter is decremented by one. When it is determined that the value of the small hitting A counter 203m after the subtraction is 0 (S504 in FIG. 41: Yes), the normal state is set as the gaming state (S507 in FIG. 41) because the time saving end condition is satisfied. . In the present embodiment, a plurality of time-saving end conditions for terminating the time-saving state are set, and even if any of the time-saving end conditions is satisfied (for example, the time-saving end condition based on the number of special symbol changes). Is established), the value of the counter is set to 0 (reset) (S606 in FIG. 42). As described above, even when a time-saving termination condition other than the time-saving termination condition (the second time-saving termination condition) referring to the value of the small-hit A counter 203m among the plurality of time-saving termination conditions is satisfied, the small-hit A counter Since the value of 203m is set to 0 (reset), it is possible to suppress a situation in which the process of subtracting the value of the small hitting A counter 203m is continued despite the end of the time saving state. Also, no matter which of the plurality of time-saving termination conditions is satisfied, the value of various counters used to determine whether the time-saving termination condition is satisfied when terminating the time-saving state is set to an initial value (0). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the processing after the time-saving state is ended from becoming complicated.

  The small hit B counter 203n is a counter for measuring the number of wins of the small hit in which the small hit B is set as the small hit type until one of the time saving end conditions set during the time saving state is satisfied, In the jackpot control process (S1504 in FIG. 52), when it is determined that the end timing of the ending effect (the end timing of the jackpot) is reached (S1612 in FIG. 52: Yes), the value specified in the time saving table 202e ( 3) is set (S1614 in FIG. 52).

  Then, in the small symbol start processing (S221 in FIG. 40) of the special symbol change processing (S104 in FIG. 38), the small jackpot of the small jackpot which is currently won in the small jackpot time saving update processing (S405 in FIG. 41) is executed. When it is determined that the type is the small hit B (S510 in FIG. 41: Yes), the value of the counter is decremented by one. When it is determined that the value of the small hit B counter 203n after the subtraction is 0 (S512 in FIG. 41: Yes), the normal state is set as the gaming state because the time saving end condition is satisfied (S507 in FIG. 41). . In the present embodiment, a plurality of time-saving end conditions for terminating the time-saving state are set, and even if any of the time-saving end conditions is satisfied (for example, the time-saving end condition based on the number of special symbol changes). Is established), the value of the counter is set to 0 (reset) (S606 in FIG. 42). As described above, even if a time-saving termination condition other than the time-saving termination condition (third time-saving termination condition) referring to the value of the small-hitting B counter 203n is satisfied among the plurality of time-saving termination conditions, the small-hitting B counter Since the value of 203n is set to 0 (reset), it is possible to suppress a situation in which the process of subtracting the value of the small hitting B counter 203n is continued despite the end of the time saving state. Also, no matter which of the plurality of time-saving termination conditions is satisfied, the value of various counters used to determine whether the time-saving termination condition is satisfied when terminating the time-saving state is set to an initial value (0). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the processing after the time-saving state is ended from becoming complicated.

  The small hit C counter 203p is a counter for measuring the number of wins of the small hit in which the small hit C is set as the small hit type until one of the time saving end conditions set during the time saving state is satisfied, In the jackpot control process (S1504 in FIG. 52), when it is determined that the end timing of the ending effect (the end timing of the jackpot) is reached (S1612 in FIG. 52: Yes), the value specified in the time saving table 202e ( 5) is set (S1614 in FIG. 52).

  Then, in the small symbol start processing (S221 in FIG. 40) of the special symbol change processing (S104 in FIG. 38), the small jackpot of the small jackpot which is currently won in the small jackpot time saving update processing (S405 in FIG. 41) is executed. When it is determined that the type is the small hit C (S510 in FIG. 41: No), the value of the counter is decremented by one. If it is determined that the value of the small hitting C counter 203p after the subtraction is 0 (S514 in FIG. 41: Yes), the normal state is set as the gaming state (S515 in FIG. 41) because the time saving end condition is satisfied. . In the present embodiment, a plurality of time-saving end conditions for terminating the time-saving state are set, and even if any of the time-saving end conditions is satisfied (for example, the time-saving end condition based on the number of special symbol changes). Is established), the value of the counter is set to 0 (reset) (S606 in FIG. 42). As described above, even if a time saving end condition other than the time saving end condition (the fourth time saving end condition) referring to the value of the small hit C counter 203p among the plurality of time saving end conditions is satisfied, the small hit C counter Since the value of 203p is set to 0 (reset), it is possible to suppress a situation in which the process of subtracting the value of the small hit C counter 203p is continued even though the time saving state has ended. Also, no matter which of the plurality of time-saving termination conditions is satisfied, the value of various counters used to determine whether the time-saving termination condition is satisfied when terminating the time-saving state is set to an initial value (0). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the processing after the time-saving state is ended from becoming complicated.

  The general symbol short variation flag 203q is a flag for indicating that the variation of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is a short variation (variation for 3 seconds), and is turned on to set the ordinary symbol (second symbol). (A symbol) is executed. The normal figure short fluctuation flag 203q determines that the timing of setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the normal symbol fluctuation processing (see S106 in FIG. 45) is during the time reduction state (during time reduction) (S909 in FIG. 45: Yes). When the variation time (short variation) of 3 seconds is set, it is set to ON (S911 in FIG. 45), and it is determined that the variation time of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) has elapsed (S913 in FIG. 45). It is referred to when the lottery result of the current ordinary symbol (second symbol) is determined to be a hit (S915 in FIG. 45: Yes) (S916 in FIG. 45).

  Here, when it is determined that the normal figure short fluctuation flag 203q is set to ON (S916 in FIG. 45: Yes), it is determined whether the present time is in the time reduction state (middle time reduction) (S918 in FIG. 45). ), When it is determined that the vehicle is in the time saving state (medium time saving) (S918: Yes in FIG. 45), an opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a (FIG. 45). 45, S919). It should be noted that the ordinary figure short variation flag 203q is set to off (S917 in FIG. 45) after it is determined in the ordinary symbol variation processing (S106 in FIG. 45) that it is set to on.

  As described above, the game state at the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) (when the fluctuation time is set) and the opening state of the electric accessory 640a after the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) elapses. Since it is configured such that the opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a only when both the gaming state and the time reduction state are set, the plurality of gaming states (the normal state) The change of the ordinary symbols (lottery) executed across the time-saving state can reliably prevent the electric accessory 640a from being opened long, and can provide a benefit (long of the electric accessory 640a) advantageous to the player. (Open) to the player can be suppressed from being excessively provided.

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, and the like are set (stored).

  Returning to FIG. 9, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A large opening solenoid for opening / closing the front opening, a V opening solenoid for opening / closing the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650, and a switching member 650h provided in the V winning device 650 are driven. MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these through an input / output port 205. A solenoid 209 including a flow path solenoid 650k and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory (other solenoid 209z) is connected to the MPU 201. I do.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 49) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 or the frame button 23, and changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the player operates the frame button 22; The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents at the time of super reach, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (a), the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 stores various data necessary for controlling the game, such as a variation pattern selection table 222a, a state display selection table 222b, a final state display selection table 222c. Programs and the like are stored.

  In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of variation pattern types (out of reach, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) are set as counter values for variation pattern selection (not shown). It should be noted that the counter for selecting a variation pattern means each time of updating (every time various counter updating processes (see S2111 in FIG. 55) executed at 1 millisecond intervals in the main process of the sound ramp control device 113). This is a counter composed of a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value and the value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299). In addition, the sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed change pattern based on the change pattern type indicated by the change pattern command received from the main control device 110, the result of the determination as to whether or not the change has occurred, and the acquired counter value for selection. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as variation time and variation pattern type. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variation display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early.

  The counter value for selecting the variation pattern may be updated by processing other than the various counter updating processing (see S2111 in FIG. 55) executed in the main processing of the audio ramp control device 113 described above. For example, in the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113, a period during which the repetitive processing is executed when 1 millisecond has not elapsed since the previous processing was executed (for example, the processing of S2114 in FIG. 55 is executed). A process of updating the value of the counter may be added during a period from the end of the process until the process of S2115 is performed. With this configuration, in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the sound lamp control device 113, 1 millisecond depends on the period spent for executing some processes (the processes in S2102 to S2112 in FIG. 55). The number of times the process of updating the value of the variation pattern selection counter during execution can be made indefinite (random). Therefore, based on the content of the display effect (the effect corresponding to the variation pattern selected using the variation pattern selection 222a) set by the audio lamp control device 113 and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, It is possible to prevent a player from grasping the rule for the control of the lamp control device 113.

  The state display selection table 222b displays the state of the state display displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the time saving state is set as the gaming state (see the state (state) display state Dm3a in FIG. 11). 6 is a data table used when selecting a. The state display selection table 222b is used when selecting a state display mode corresponding to a fluctuation display other than the fluctuation in which the time reduction state ends (the final fluctuation in the time reduction state) among the states in which the time reduction state is set. .

  The state display selection table 222b displays the jackpot expectation degree in the variation (the expectation degree of winning the special symbol jackpot lottery and the special symbol lottery winning small hit, and during the small hit (during the small hit game), 2 The degree of expectation that the seed hit is set, and the degree of update of the time saving state (whether the time saving end condition is satisfied or not, or various elements set as the time saving end condition (the number of times the special symbol changes, the number of small hits, etc.) ) Is selected so as to select a different state display mode on the basis of the update status). Therefore, by grasping the contents of the state (situation) display mode Dm3a displayed in the small display area Dm3 of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the player can grasp the situation of the currently set time saving state. be able to.

  Here, the contents specified in the state display selection table 222b will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the state display selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 27A, the status display selection table 222b includes a special symbol lottery result (result determination result) and a setting status of the time reduction lower limit flag 223k (determination result of whether or not the flag is set to ON). Various state display modes are defined in correspondence with the setting state of the quasi-end condition flag 223m (the determination result of whether or not the quasi-end condition flag is set to ON) and the value of the state effect counter 223o.

  Here, the various flags and counters referred to in the state display selection table 222b will be briefly described. And is set to ON when the time reduction state has elapsed for a predetermined period. The status display mode can be changed according to the setting status of each flag, that is, according to the progress status of the time saving state.

  The time-saving lower limit flag 223k is set to ON based on the number of times the special symbol has changed among the ending conditions for ending the time-saving state. That is, when the special symbol change is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times) after the time saving state is set, the display mode of the state (situation) display mode Dm3a can be set differently. Therefore, it can be suggested to the player that the end condition that can be satisfied by the execution of the special symbol change is approaching, and that the player can be tense and play the game during the time reduction state. it can. Further, various effects can be executed in the time saving state that is continuously set, so that the effect of the effects can be enhanced. In the present embodiment, when the number of special symbol changes executed during the time reduction state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 70 times), the time reduction lower limit flag 223k is set to ON, and the state (situation) display mode Dm3a In order to display various display modes to the player as the display mode of the state (situation) display mode Dm3a, for example, the number of special symbol changes executed during the time reduction state May be displayed in a different state (situation) display mode Dm3a between the odd-numbered and even-numbered times, or may be displayed for a predetermined period after the time saving state is set (for example, a period until the special symbol changes ten times). Only, a state (situation) display mode Dm3a different from the other periods may be set.

  The quasi-end condition flag 223m is turned on based on the number of wins of the small hit (the number of times the small win has been performed and the operation control is performed on the V winning device 650) among the end conditions for ending the time saving state. Is set to In other words, when a predetermined number of wins (for example, three times) are made in the small hits after the time saving state is set, the display mode of the state (situation) display mode Dm3a can be set differently. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player that an end condition that can be satisfied by winning a small hit is approaching, and it is possible to cause a sense of tension to play a game in a time-saving state. Further, various effects can be executed in the time saving state that is continuously set, so that the effect of the effects can be enhanced.

  The state effect counter 223o is a loop counter in which the value of “0 to 99” is periodically updated, and is executed at intervals of 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the sound ramp control device 113. Each time the counter update process (S2111 in FIG. 55) is executed, the value is updated by one.

  Next, the contents specified in the state display selection table 222b will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the state display selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 27A, the state display selection table 222b is an effect that is executed in accordance with the result of determination of the success / failure, the time reduction lower limit flag 223k, the quasi-end condition flag 223m, and the value of the state effect counter 223o. (See FIG. 15 for details of the specific display mode).

  Specifically, when the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit and the time-saving lower limit flag 223k and the quasi-end condition flag 223m are on, the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o falls within the range of “0 to 69”. The display mode “3” is defined, the status display mode “1” is defined in the range “70 to 79”, and the status display mode “9” is defined in the range “80 to 99”. When the time reduction lower limit flag 223k is on and the quasi-end condition flag 223m is off, the state display mode “3” is defined in the range of the obtained state effect counter 223o of “0 to 49”, and “ The status display mode “1” is defined in the range of 50 to 69, the status display mode “4” is defined in the range of “70 to 79”, and the status display mode “9” is defined in the range of “80 to 99”. Stipulated.

  Further, when the result of the hit determination is a big hit and the time-saving lower limit flag 223k is off and the quasi-end condition flag 223m is on, the value of the obtained state effect counter 223o is set in the range of “0 to 69”. The display mode "1" is defined, the status display mode "3" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", the status display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and the time reduction lower limit flag 223k and When the quasi-end condition flag 223m is off, the state display mode “3” is defined when the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is in the range “0 to 69”, and the state is displayed in the range “70 to 79”. The mode “1” is defined, and the status display mode “9” is defined in the range of “80 to 99”.

  In other words, when the result of the special symbol win / fail determination is a big hit, the state display selected according to the progress of the set time saving state (the setting of the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the quasi-end condition flag 223m). Embodiments can vary. Therefore, various state display modes can be displayed during the time reduction state, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

  In addition, a period in which both the time reduction lower limit flag 223k and the quasi-end condition flag 223m are set to OFF (the first half period of the time reduction state), and either the time reduction lower limit flag 223k or the quasi-end condition flag 223m is set to ON. Since the display mode that is easily selected as the state display mode can be made different from the period (middle period of the time reduction state), the state (situation) display mode Dm3a displayed in the third display area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81. , The progress of the time-saving state can be predicted.

  Further, when the time reduction lower limit flag 223k is set to ON and the quasi-end condition flag 223m is set to OFF and the acquired value of the state effect counter 223o is "70 to 79", the state display is performed. The configuration is such that the mode “4” is set. As described above with reference to FIG. 15, the state display mode “4” is a state display mode for suggesting that the player has won the small hit, but in the present embodiment, the result of the hit determination is a big hit. In some cases, that is, when the win / fail determination is not a small win (when the win / win determination result is more advantageous to the player than the small win win), the selection is made. As a result, it is possible to execute a surprising effect for the player, and it is possible to provide an effect that does not get tired early.

  Next, the result of the hit determination is the small hit A (small hit in which the small hit game in which the two hits are most likely to be executed among the plurality of small hit types), and the time-saving lower limit flag 223k and the quasi-end condition flag 223m are set. When it is ON, the state display mode “5” is defined in the range of the acquired state effect counter 223o of “0 to 79”, and the state display mode “9” is defined in the range of “80 to 99”. Is done. When the time reduction lower limit flag 223k is on and the quasi-end condition flag 223m is off, the state display mode "7" is defined in a range of the obtained state effect counter 223o of "0 to 49", and " The status display mode “5” is defined in the range of 50 to 69, the status display mode “7” is defined in the range of “70 to 79”, and the status display mode “9” is defined in the range of “80 to 99”. Stipulated.

  Next, when the result of the hit determination is small hit A, the time reduction lower limit flag 223k is off, and the quasi-end condition flag 223m is on, the value of the obtained state effect counter 223o is in the range of “0 to 69”. A state display mode "5" is defined, a state display mode "6" is defined in the range "70 to 79", and a state display mode "9" is defined in the range "80 to 99". When both the time reduction lower limit flag 223k and the quasi-end condition flag 223m are off, the state display mode “7” is defined in the range of the acquired state effect counter 223o of “0 to 79”, and “80 to 99”. ", The state display mode" 9 "is defined.

  Then, the result of the success / failure determination is the small hit B or C (small hit in which a small hit game that is difficult to hit among two or more small hit types is executed), and the time reduction lower limit flag 223k and the quasi-end condition flag 223m are set. When it is ON, the state display mode “5” is defined in the range of the acquired state effect counter 223o of “0 to 69”, and the state display mode “6” is defined in the range of “70 to 79”. The state display mode “9” is defined in the range of “80 to 99”. When the time reduction lower limit flag 223k is on and the quasi-end condition flag 223m is off, the state display mode “4” is defined in a range of the acquired state effect counter 223o of “0 to 69”, and “ The status display mode “2” is defined in the range of “70 to 79”, and the status display mode “9” is defined in the range of “80 to 99”.

  Further, when the result is the small hit B or C, and the time reduction lower limit flag 223k is off and the quasi-end condition flag 223m is on, the acquired value of the state effect counter 223o is "0 to 49". The state display mode “6” is defined in the range, the state display mode “5” is defined in the range “50-69”, the state display mode “6” is defined in the range “70-79”, and “80” is defined. The state display mode “9” is defined in the range of “−99”. When both the time reduction lower limit flag 223k and the quasi-end condition flag 223m are off, the state display mode “2” is defined in the range of the obtained state effect counter 223o of “0 to 49”, and “50 to 50”. The state display mode “4” is defined in the range “69”, the state display mode “4” is defined in the range “70-79”, and the state display mode “9” is defined in the range “80-99”. You.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, different state display modes are displayed according to the small hit type set for the winning small hit (in accordance with the degree of expectation per two types during the executed small hit game). Since the player knows the state display mode displayed during the time reduction state, the player can predict the timing at which the time reduction state ends, and also displays the fluctuation of the special symbol currently being executed (dynamic Display) (the special symbol lottery result) can also be predicted. Therefore, the player can be interested in the state display mode displayed during the time saving state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, when the small hit A is won and the time reduction lower limit flag 223k is turned off and the quasi-end condition flag 223m is set on, the acquired value of the state effect counter 223o is “70 to 79”. , The content of the status display selection table 222b is defined so that the status display mode “6” is selected. As shown in FIG. 15, the state display mode "6" is a state display mode in which the character "Large Pinch" is displayed to indicate that the time-saving state ends based on the small win. By displaying this state display mode “6” even when the small win A is exceptionally displayed, a surprising effect can be provided to the player, and the state display mode “6” is displayed. Since the possibility of winning two kinds in the small hitting game executed after is increased, the state display mode based on the winning of the small hitting B or the small hitting C having a low possibility of the two kinds is obtained. Even when "6" is displayed, the player can be continuously expected to win two types until the small hitting game ends.

  If the result of determination is out of order and the time reduction lower limit flag 223k and the quasi-end condition flag 223m are ON, the value of the obtained state effect counter 223o is set to the state display mode "1" in the range of "0 to 49". Is defined, a state display mode “4” is defined in a range of “50 to 69”, “3” is defined in a range of “70 to 79”, and a state display mode “9” is defined in a range of “80 to 99”. Is defined. When the time reduction lower limit flag 223k is on and the quasi-end condition flag 223m is off, the state display mode "1" is defined in a range of the acquired state effect counter 223o of "0 to 69". The status display mode “3” is defined in the range of “70 to 79”, and the status display mode “9” is defined in the range of “80 to 99”.

  Further, when the result of the determination is incorrect and the time reduction lower limit flag 223k is off and the quasi-end condition flag 223m is on, the acquired value of the state effect counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 69". “6” is specified, the state display mode “3” is specified in the range of “70 to 79”, and the state display mode “9” is specified in the range of “80 to 99”. When both the time reduction lower limit flag 223k and the quasi-end condition flag 223m are off, the state display mode “1” is defined in the range of the acquired state effect counter 223o of “0 to 79”, and “80” The state display mode “9” is defined in the range of “−99”.

  As described above, when the result of the winning / fail determination is out of order, that is, when a special symbol change in which the time-saving end condition is not satisfied based on the small hit winning or the big hit winning is executed, the quasi-end condition flag 223m is turned on. Is set, the state display mode is selected so as to make the player think that the time saving end condition has been satisfied as if the small hit has been won. Thereby, in a state where the quasi-end condition flag 223m is set to ON, that is, in a state where a predetermined number of small hit games are executed after the time saving state is set, the player is given a sense of danger while playing the game. Can be done.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the quasi-end condition flag 223m is set to ON, a state display mode that makes it seem that a small hit has been won compared to the case where the quasi-end condition flag 223m is set to OFF ( The state display mode “2, 4 to 7”) is configured to be easily selected. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the execution of an effect that artificially suggests that a small win has been won unnecessarily when the result of the win / fail determination is out of order. Specifically, in the state where the quasi-end condition flag 223m is set to ON, it is easy to select an effect mode (state display mode) that makes it seem that the time-saving end condition is satisfied when a small win is achieved. In the state where the quasi-end condition flag 223m is set to off, it is configured such that it is difficult to select an effect mode (state display mode) that makes it seem that the time-saving end condition is satisfied when a small hit is won. I have.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to set the display mode of the state display mode for a plurality of special symbol variations executed during the period in which the quasi-end condition flag 223m is set to ON in a series of flows. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable with the game executed during the time saving state, and to reduce the effect of the effect.

  In addition, the state display mode “9” is selected according to the value of the state effect counter 223o without being based on the result of determination of the success or failure or the setting states of various flags. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the progress of the current time saving state. Further, the configuration is such that the state display mode “3” is selected in a part of the case where the result of the determination is incorrect. Thereby, when the display mode of the status display mode “3” is displayed on the display screen on the third symbol display device 81, the lottery result of the special symbol being dynamically displayed is either a big hit or a miss. An effect suggesting that is performed.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the probability that the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of the range (other than the big hit and the small hit) is 1/100 (see FIG. 20 (c)), and the value of the state effect counter 223o. Is configured to display the status display mode "3" in a range of "70 to 79", that is, 1/10 of the counter value updated in the range of "0 to 99" ( When the second special symbol is selected, the state display mode "3" is selected based on the lottery result "missing" with a probability of 1/1000).

  Therefore, the state display mode "3" is displayed when most of the jackpots are won, but may be displayed when the player wins the jackpot. It is possible to play a game with a thrilling feeling (until the stop is displayed). In the present embodiment, a plurality of state display modes are provided so that the progress of the current time saving state (the number of remaining times until each time saving end condition is satisfied) and the result of the lottery of the special symbol can be predicted by the player. Although it is configured to be selected, the status display mode that can reliably notify the current progress status of the time saving state (the number remaining until each time saving end condition is satisfied) and the lottery result of the special symbol are selected. You may comprise so that it may be possible.

  In the present embodiment, based on the progress of the time-saving state (the setting state of the time-saving lower limit flag 223k and the quasi-end condition flag 223m) and the value of the state effect counter 223o, the state display mode is displayed for each of the success / failure determination results. Although the configuration is such that the selection is made differently, the configuration may be such that the state display mode is selected using other conditions. For example, operation means (for example, the frame button 22 ) Is provided with operation determining means for determining whether or not the player has performed a predetermined operation, and based on the determination result of the operation determining means, a state display mode is selected differently. May be. Further, in this case, when it is determined that the predetermined operation has been performed by the operation determining unit, the progress status of the current time saving state (the number of remaining times until each time saving end condition is satisfied) and the lottery result of the special symbol are determined. It is preferable that a state display mode that is clearly shown is easily selected. As a result, the player actively operates the operation means, and the player can actively participate in the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the state where the time saving state is set, every time the effect setting process is executed (every time when the variable display of the third symbol is set), the state display is made using the state display selection table 222b. Although it is configured to select the mode, for example, a storage unit that stores the status display mode set while the time saving state is continuously set is provided, and the content stored in the storage unit is A state display mode to be newly set (selected) may be determined based on the status display mode. With such a configuration, the state display mode is uniformly displayed during the time saving state, or the state display mode set randomly (selected based on the value of the state effect counter 223o) is biased to one side. In this case, the state display mode set during the remaining time-saving state can be intentionally biased toward one.

  In addition, the number of times the time reduction state is repeatedly set (the number of times the jackpot is won during the time reduction state (two types are set) and the time reduction state is set again after the jackpot game), and the prize balls acquired during the period. The state display mode selected according to the number may be configured to be different.

  Next, the contents of the final state display selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final state display selection table 222c. The final state display selection table 222c is a data table referred to for selecting a state display mode displayed in the third display area Ds3 during the time saving state, similarly to the above-described state display selection table 222b. The final state display selection table 222c is different from the above-mentioned state display selection table 222b in that the special symbol change in which the time saving state ends (when the number of changes in the special symbol becomes the number of changes satisfying the time saving end condition) Of the special symbol, or the special symbol when the number of small hits of the special symbol becomes the number of winnings that satisfies the time-saving ending condition). Things.

  This final state display selection table 222c is referred to when it is determined in the effect setting process (see FIG. 63) that will be described later that the fluctuation flag before time saving end 223n is ON (S2905 in FIG. 63: Yes) (FIG. 63). S2907). The contents defined in the final state display selection table 222c will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 27 (b). When the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the value of the obtained state effect counter 223o is set to " The status display mode “7” is defined in the range of “0 to 69”, the status display mode “3” is defined in the range of “70 to 89”, and the status display mode “8” in the range of “90 to 99”. Stipulated. In the case where the hit determination result is the small hit A, the state display mode “7” is defined in the range of the acquired state effect counter 223o of “0 to 69”, and the state display mode in the range of “70 to 89”. “5” is defined, and the state display mode “8” is defined in the range of “90 to 99”.

  Further, when the result of the hit determination is small hit B or C, the state display mode “6” is defined in the range of the obtained state effect counter 223o of “0 to 69”, and the range of “70 to 89”. , A state display mode “5” is defined, and a state display mode “8” is defined in a range of “90 to 99”. In the case where the result is incorrect, the state display mode “8” is defined in a range where the acquired value of the state effect counter 223o is “0 to 99”.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the state display mode displayed during the period in which the time reduction state is continuously set, and the case where the time reduction state ends (the final variation display of the special symbol in which the time reduction state ends) ) Is selected by referring to a different data table, which suggests that the time saving state is continued when the time saving state ends. It is possible to reliably prevent the state display mode from being displayed.

  Further, as described above, the status display mode “8” is configured to be displayed in a part of the case where the jackpot is won. This allows the player to be notified that the jackpot has been won after making the player think that the time-saving state has ended, so that the stop display of the third symbol can be used to notify the player of a surprising effect. .

  Note that, as described above, in the case of winning, the state display mode “8” is always displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player from having excessive expectations and giving a dissatisfaction with a later game result.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 26 (b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b, a change start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, an effect counter 223e, Game state storage area 223f, time reduction information update area 223g, provisional hit determination flag 223h, provisional time reduction information update area 223i, provisional time reduction end flag 223j, reduction in time reduction flag 223k, quasi-termination condition flag 223m, fluctuation flag before termination of time reduction 223n, state At least an effect counter 223o and other memory area 223z are provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. Based on the information stored in this winning information storage area 223a, the voice lamp control device 113 can discriminate the lottery result of the reserved ball before the start of the fluctuation. In the winning information storage area 223a, the winning information based on the winning information command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the winning information related processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (see S2301 in FIG. 57) is executed. The prize information command transmitted from the main control device 110, which is stored in order from the first area, is set when the pre-reading process (S707 in FIG. 44) of the main control device 110 is executed. An external output process (S1501 in FIG. 51) executed in the main process of 110 (see FIG. 51) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Each of the winning information stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is one by one every time the variable display setting process (see S2114 in FIG. 62) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. The shift is performed (the winning information stored in the second area is shifted to the first area) (see S2806 in FIG. 62). Thus, the sound lamp control device 113 can reliably grasp when the special symbol change corresponding to the winning information command transmitted from the main control device 110 is executed.

  In addition, since the winning information (the pre-reading information of the special symbol) transmitted by the winning information command can be shifted to the execution area (the area corresponding to the special symbol variation currently being executed), for example, the winning is achieved. Based on the reception of the information command, an effect using a period from the start timing of the next special symbol change to be executed to the timing until the end of the special symbol change corresponding to the winning information command (so-called continuous pre-reading). When performing the effect, the winning information corresponding to the winning information command can be held until the above-described continuous prefetching effect is completed.

  In the present embodiment, up to four pieces of winning information (information that can be obtained when a ball enters the first entrance 64) can be held and stored, so that the winning information storage area 223a has an execution area. In addition to the above, it is configured to have a first area to a fourth area. For example, prize information that can be obtained when a ball enters the second entrance 640 (prize information relating to the second special symbol) ) Is also configured to be able to hold up to four, in the winning information storage area 223a, in addition to the execution area, four areas for the first special symbol (hold information area) and four areas for the second special symbol are stored. It is sufficient to provide two areas (reserved information areas).

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110. ) Is a counter for counting up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable effect which is suspended in the main controller 110. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball count counter 203b stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the held ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b holds the reserved ball of the first special symbol. Manage numbers.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added due to the ball entering the first entrance 64, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main control device 110, When the number of reserved balls is decremented, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203b of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S2208 in FIG. 56). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203b.

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, and the stored special symbol 1 held ball number. In order to notify the value of the counter 223 b to the display control device 114, a display reservation ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 Image drawing is controlled so that several symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball numbers displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The information included in the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main controller may be the actual reserved ball count, that is, information indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203a, or the special symbol reserved ball count counter. Information indicating that the value of 203a has been added or subtracted by 1 may be used. When transmitting information indicating that the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a has been added or subtracted by 1 as the reserved ball number command, the information is included in the reserved ball number command received by the voice lamp control device 113. It is sufficient to provide a calculating means for calculating and managing the current number of reserved balls based on the information to be obtained.

  The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2202 in FIG. 56), and is turned off when variation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S2802 in FIG. 62). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is used in the command output process (S2102 in FIG. 55) of the main process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 221. , And transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2205 in FIG. 56), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2808 in FIG. 62). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the display stop type is set based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command (S2810 in FIG. 62).

  The effect counter 223e is a counter used for a lottery when determining the effect contents of various effects executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Although not shown, the sound lamp control device 113 Is updated each time the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 is executed. In the present embodiment, the effect counter 223e has a plurality of loop counters (for example, a counter that is repeatedly updated in a range of 0 to 99), and is configured so that the values of the respective counters are updated without synchronization. I have.

  Specifically, for example, a plurality of counters having different values updated each time the main process (see FIG. 56) is executed are provided, and the updated values of the respective counters are not synchronized. Further, another value may be calculated by calculating the value of each counter, and the calculated value may be used as a value used for a lottery when determining the effect content of various effects.

  The game state storage area 223f is an area for storing a game state corresponding to the state command when a state command related to the game state is received from the main control device 110. By referring to the information (game state) stored in the game state storage area 223f, the sound game controller 113 can identify the current game state.

  In the present embodiment, the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 stores data in the gaming state storage area 223f when power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, because data is deleted when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. The information indicating the current game state is also deleted. However, in this embodiment, since the state command is set in the start-up process (see FIG. 50) of the main control device 110 executed after the power is turned on (S1412 in FIG. 50), the game state storage area is immediately obtained after the power is restored. The information indicating the game state set before the power was turned off is stored in 223f. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the sound lamp control device 113 can always identify the gaming state. Also, when the game state is variably set in the main control device 110, a state command indicating the game state after the variable setting is set (S509 in FIG. 41, S607 in FIG. 42, S1616 in FIG. 52, etc.). .

  The time saving information update area 223g includes a time saving state end condition, a progress status with respect to each end condition (the number of times an event targeted by the end condition (for example, a change in a special symbol, a small hit, or a big hit) is executed). Is a data area for storing. The state (situation) display mode Dm3a displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is selected based on the information (end conditions and progress of the time saving state) stored in the time saving information update area 223a. The time saving information update area 223g is determined as the time saving related command including the time saving setting information from the main control device 110, that is, the end timing of the ending effect in the big hit control process (S1504 in FIG. 52) of the main control device 110 (FIG. In S1612 of S52, when the end condition of the time saving state is set (S1613 of FIG. 52), when the time saving setting information command set is received, the end condition for ending the current time saving state is set.

  Then, in the time saving update process (see S2216 in FIG. 60) of the sound ramp control device 113, update information for updating the time saving information (variation information for indicating that the special symbol variation has been executed, or a small hit is won). (S2604: Yes in FIG. 60, S2615: Yes in FIG. 60), the current time saving status is updated in accordance with the received update information. .

  The data area in the time saving information update area 223g will be specifically described. In the time saving information updating area 223g, each item (for example, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, The number of fluctuations of the symbol, the total number of fluctuations obtained by adding the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol, the number of wins for each small hit type (small hit A to C) (operation of the V winning device 600) ), And the number of small hits (the total number of wins obtained by adding the number of wins of each small hit type), etc.). Time saving setting information (the number of times that the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied) and update information of each item during the period in which the time saving state is continuously set (information indicating the actual number of times executed) are stored, respectively. Is It is configured to.

  In the present embodiment, using the information stored in the time saving information update area 223g, a termination condition that is more easily satisfied than other termination conditions is determined from a plurality of termination conditions, and each termination condition is satisfied. The remaining number of executions up to is determined. Furthermore, using the time saving setting information and the updating information stored in the time saving information updating area 223g, for example, the ratio of the value indicated by the updating information to the value indicating the end condition of each item included in the time saving setting information is calculated, The degree of time saving progress may be displayed as a numerical value (for example, percentage).

  Further, in the present embodiment, as the information stored in the time saving information update area 223g, update information (information indicating the number of times of execution (the number of times of change, the number of wins)) is stored. Alternatively, the remaining number of times until the condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied may be calculated, and information indicating the calculated remaining number of times may be stored in the time saving information update area 223g.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the time saving setting information and the update information are configured to be separately stored (stored). However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be configured to be directly updated. With this configuration, the capacity of the time saving information update area 223g can be reduced.

  The temporary hit determination flag 223h is a flag for indicating that the winning information (winning information stored and stored) before the special symbol lottery (variation) is executed includes the winning information for winning the big hit. When the flag is set to ON, it indicates that the prize information stored on hold includes prize information for winning a jackpot. The provisional hit determination flag 223h is determined by a prize information-related process executed when the prize information command acquired in the pre-reading process (S707 in FIG. 44) of the main control device 110 is received by the audio lamp control device 113 side. In S2210 in FIG. 57), when it is determined that the winning information of the winning information command received from the main control device 110 has hit information (S2305 in FIG. 57: Yes), it is set to ON (S2306 in FIG. 57). .

  Then, it is referred to in the prize information related processing (see FIG. 57) (S2303 in FIG. 57), and when it is determined that it is set to ON (S2303 in FIG. 57: Yes), various types of prize information commands received thereafter are received. The configuration is such that the determination process is skipped. Also, in the effect setting process (see S2804 in FIG. 63) executed in the variable display setting process (see S2114 in FIG. 62) (S2903 in FIG. 63), and when it is determined that it is set to ON, (S2903 in FIG. 63: Yes), the processing for setting the display status display command indicating the status display mode is skipped.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even if it is determined that the winning information of the winning information command received from the main control device 110 has the winning information in the big hit end processing (see FIG. 59) (S2504 in FIG. 59: Yes), The temporary hit determination flag 223h is set to ON (S2506 in FIG. 59).

  As described above, if the winning information included in the received winning information command or the winning information held and stored at the end of the jackpot includes the winning information for winning the jackpot, Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the winning information included in the newly received winning information command includes winning information for winning a jackpot, and whether or not the end condition of the currently set gaming state is satisfied. It is configured not to execute the determination. In other words, if it is determined that the time-saving state ends due to the jackpot, it is not necessary to determine whether the currently set time-saving state ends based on the winning information acquired thereafter. , The unnecessary processing is skipped. Therefore, the processing load of the processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the processing for determining the content of the winning information is performed when a new winning information command is received and when the big hit game is finished. For example, after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off due to a power failure or the like, in the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 50), each winning information stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is deleted. A return prize information command for indicating the prize information is set, and all the prize information is transmitted to the audio ramp control device 113. When the return prize information command described above is received on the audio ramp control device 113 side, the prize information described above is received. The processing for determining the contents of the information may be executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a new winning information command is received, or when the big hit game is completed, the processing for always determining the content of the winning information is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the content of the winning information may not be determined when a predetermined prohibition condition is satisfied. In this case, as the predetermined prohibition condition, for example, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of effect modes, and the effect mode prohibition condition that is satisfied when one of the effect modes is set, or a special symbol A plurality of special symbol changes are performed based on the hampering prohibition condition that is satisfied when a lottery result other than a jackpot (out) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 500 times), or a jackpot lottery result (win / fail judgment result) included in the winning information. , A continuous production prohibition condition that is satisfied while the continuous production is being executed, or a predetermined period after the continuous production is completed (for example, a special symbol is changed twice). It is preferable to set a multiple occurrence prohibition condition or the like that is satisfied during the period up to).

  With this configuration, it is possible to set a period in which an effect (so-called pre-reading effect) can be executed and a period in which the effect cannot be executed according to the content determined in advance based on the winning information. Even if the look-ahead effect is not executed for the person, the expectation of the jackpot can be maintained. When the above-described prohibition condition is satisfied, the frequency of determining the content of the winning information may be reduced, or when the prohibition condition is not satisfied, the content of the winning information is always determined. Instead of the determination, the frequency of determining the content of the winning information may be increased. Further, it is preferable that the player does not know whether or not the above-described prohibition condition is satisfied.

  The temporary time reduction information update area 223i is a data area for temporarily storing time reduction information (temporary time reduction information) updated in advance in accordance with the winning information included in the winning information command. In the present embodiment, the timing at which the time reduction state ends is determined in advance by referring to the temporary time reduction information stored in the temporary time reduction information update area 223i.

  The temporary time saving information update area 223i is used for the time saving related command including the time saving setting information from the main control device 110, that is, the big hit control process of the main control device 110 (S1504 in FIG. 52), similarly to the time saving information updating area 223g described above. It is determined that the ending effect has ended (S1612 in FIG. 52), and when a time-saving setting information command that is set when the ending condition of the time-saving state is set (S1613 in FIG. 52) is received (S2602 in FIG. 60). Yes), an end condition (time saving information) for ending the current time saving state is set (S2603 in FIG. 60). Then, in the winning information related processing (see S2210 in FIG. 57) of the sound lamp control device 113, the update information corresponding to the received winning information is stored (S2307 in FIG. 57). The provisional time reduction end flag 223j is a flag for indicating that the time reduction end condition has been established based on the provisional time reduction information stored in the provisional time reduction information update area 223i. This indicates that the time-saving termination condition has been established based on this. This provisional time reduction end flag 223j indicates that the updated information (provisional time reduction information) in the provisional time reduction information update area 223i satisfies the time reduction termination condition in the winning information-related processing (see S2210 in FIG. 57) of the audio ramp control device 113. If it is determined that there is, it is set to ON (S2309 in FIG. 57).

  Then, it is referred to in the prize information related processing (S2210 in FIG. 57) (S2304 in FIG. 57), and when it is determined that it is set to ON (S2304 in FIG. 57: Yes), the prize information command received thereafter is received. Is configured to skip various determination processes for.

  As described above, when the time saving end condition is satisfied by the winning information included in the received winning information command, the winning information included in the newly received winning information command after that is a big hit. It is configured not to determine whether or not winning information to be won is included, or to determine whether or not the currently set gaming state end condition is satisfied. In other words, if it is determined that the time-saving state ends due to the jackpot, it is not necessary to determine whether the currently set time-saving state ends based on the winning information acquired thereafter. , The unnecessary processing is skipped. Therefore, the processing load of the processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  The time reduction lower limit flag 223k is a flag for indicating that the number of times of change of the special symbol has reached a predetermined number with respect to an end condition that is satisfied based on the number of times of change of the special symbol, and is set to ON. This is to indicate that the number of times the special symbol has changed during the time saving state has reached a predetermined number. The time-saving lower limit flag 223k is used in the time-saving updating process (S2216 in FIG. 60) of the sound ramp control device 113 to change the number of times of the special symbol (the number of times the first special symbol A special symbol executed during the time saving state with respect to the end condition (the number of variations of the special symbol is 100) set corresponding to the number of variations and the number of variations of the second special symbol. Is determined to be on when it is determined that the number of times of the fluctuation exceeds a predetermined number (70 times) (the number of remaining working hours before the time saving state ends is less than 30 times) (S2608: Yes in FIG. 60). You. Then, it is referred to when the state display mode is selected using the state display selection table 222b in the effect setting process (see S2804 in FIG. 63) of the sound lamp control device 113 (S2906 in FIG. 63). Then, when it is determined that the number of remaining working hours is 0 (S2612 in FIG. 60: Yes), or in the small hit-related updating process (see FIG. 61) executed in the working hours updating process (see FIG. 60), If it is determined that the end condition has been satisfied (S2706 in FIG. 61: Yes), it is set to off (S2613 in FIG. 60, S2708 in FIG. 61).

  In this way, by providing a flag that is set to ON in accordance with the degree of progress until the time reduction end condition is satisfied, and by varying the effect mode according to the setting state of the flag, the player Thus, it is possible to predict the timing at which the time reduction end condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect of suggesting the end timing of the time saving state.

  In the first embodiment, the progress until the time saving end condition is satisfied is determined in two stages, but more stages may be provided. In this case, for example, a flag (counter) capable of identifying the state is provided every time the special symbol is changed 10 times in a state where the time saving state is set, and the effect mode is set according to the flag (counter). What is necessary is just to make it variable.

  The quasi-end condition flag 223m is a flag for indicating that the number of times the special symbol has changed reaches a predetermined number of times with respect to the end condition that is satisfied based on winning a small hit by a special symbol lottery. Is set to indicate that the number of times the special symbol has changed during the time saving state has reached a predetermined number. The quasi-end condition flag 223m is referred to in the small hit-related update process (see FIG. 61) executed in the time saving update process (see FIG. 60) (S2703 in FIG. 61), and the quasi-end condition flag 223m is off (see FIG. 61). If it is determined that the quasi-end condition has been satisfied (S2703 in FIG. 61: No), it is set to ON (S2705 in FIG. 61). Then, when it is determined that the termination condition is satisfied (S2706 in FIG. 61: Yes), it is turned off (S2707 in FIG. 61).

  The time-shortening end change flag 223n is a flag for indicating that the change before the time-saving state ends (the time-saving end condition is satisfied) is executed, and when set to ON, the time-saving state ends. This indicates that the immediately preceding variation is executed. Specifically, when the time period (the number of times of change) until the time reduction end condition set based on the number of times of the change of the special symbol is satisfied among the plurality of time-saving state end conditions becomes one, Set to on. By executing the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 62) in a state in which the fluctuation flag before time saving end 223n is set to ON, it becomes possible to determine the fluctuation as the final fluctuation in the time reduction state, An effect corresponding to the final fluctuation can be executed.

  The time-shortening end variation flag 223n is set to ON (S2610 in FIG. 60) when it is determined in the time-saving updating process (see FIG. 60) that the number of remaining working hours is one (S2610 in FIG. 60: Yes). ). Then, when it is determined that the number of remaining working hours is 0 (S2612 in FIG. 60: Yes), or in the small hit-related updating process (see FIG. 61) executed in the working hours updating process (see FIG. 60), If it is determined that the end condition has been satisfied (S2706 in FIG. 61: Yes), it is set to off (S2614 in FIG. 60, S2709 in FIG. 61). In addition, it is referred to in the effect setting processing (see FIG. 63) executed in the variable display setting processing (see FIG. 62) (S2905 in FIG. 63), and when it is determined that the setting is turned on (S2905 in FIG. 63). : Yes), the processing using the final state display selection table 222c to set the display state display command indicating the state display mode (the processing for the final fluctuation of the time saving state) is executed, and is not set to ON (OFF) Is set (No in S2905 in FIG. 63), the processing using the state display selection table 222b (processing for fluctuation other than the final fluctuation in the time saving state) is executed. .

  In the present embodiment, in order to determine that the change before the end of the time saving is completed (executed), the change flag 223n before the end of the time saving is set, but other than that, for example, A configuration is provided in which winning information of the second special symbol can be held and stored, and a prefetching process (see FIG. 44) is also executed for the winning information stored and held, and the result of the prefetching process is shown. It is configured to receive a prize command, and configured to determine in advance the prize information of the second special symbol to win a small hit based on the received prize command. Then, based on the result of the preliminary determination, when the fluctuation before the special symbol fluctuation in which the small hitting win that satisfies the condition for terminating the time reduction state is executed, the fluctuation flag before time reduction end 223n is turned on. May be added. Thereby, in a gaming machine having a plurality of time reduction end conditions, it is possible to reliably determine a special symbol change immediately before the time reduction end condition is satisfied.

  The state effect counter 223o is a counter used for various lotteries used when setting the effect form of various effects executed by the sound lamp control device 113. Although not shown, the state effect counter 223o of the sound lamp control device 113 It is updated by one each time the main process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 221 is executed. The state effect counter 223o is configured by the same loop counter as the effect counter 223e described above. Note that the detailed configuration is the same as that of the above-described effect counter 223e, and a description thereof will be omitted. The value of the state effect counter 223o is referred to when selecting a state display mode using the state display selection table 222b and the final state display selection table 222c (see FIG. 63).

  As described above, when a specific display mode is selected according to a specific regularity (whether the result of the determination as to whether or not each flag is set), the selection is performed based on a value that is randomly updated (the value of the state effect counter 223o). The display mode is further divided into more detailed display modes, so that the display modes are diversified, and the current game state is determined by the selected display mode (display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81). It is possible to prevent the player from easily recognizing the (time-saving state update status).

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 56) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out. The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Effect) and notice effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 8). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 49).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 8) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, a game flow of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a game flow of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 28, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, during the normal gaming state (during the normal state), as described above, the left hitting game is performed and the special 1 game aiming at the first entrance 64 is executed. Is done. Here, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won, the game state changes to a different game state after the end of the jackpot, depending on the type of the won jackpot.

  Specifically, if the jackpot type of the winning jackpot is the jackpot C (50% of the whole), the normal state is set again after the jackpot ends, and if the jackpot type is the jackpot A or the jackpot B, the jackpot ends. It is configured to shift to a time-saving game state (time-saving state) which is a game state more advantageous to the player than the normal state later.

  During the normal state, a ball is inserted into the second entrance 640 to perform a lottery of the second special symbol, and when a big hit is won, the normal state is set as a game state after the end of the big hit. Is configured. This is because, as described above with reference to FIG. 3, even if the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment performs a right-handed game during a normal state (during a normal game), the ball does not enter the second entrance 640. (It is difficult to perform), so that the act of executing the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state is regarded as an illegal act, and the player who has committed the illegal act is not allowed to perform an advantageous game. It is a measure for. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, it is configured such that the lottery (game) of the second special symbol can be performed more advantageously by the player than the lottery of the first special symbol during the time saving state. Therefore, there is a possibility that a lottery of the second special symbol may be performed by performing wrongdoing. Therefore, by performing the above-described countermeasures, it is possible to prevent the second special symbol from being drawn by fraud.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since there is no configuration for holding the winning information of the second special symbol (winning information acquired when the ball enters the second entrance 640), for example, The winning information of the second special symbol is held and stored during the state (while the electric accessory 640a is easily moved to the protruding position), and the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state is performed based on the held winning information. (Fluctuation) is not executed. This makes it possible to reliably prevent the lottery (change) of the second special symbol from being executed in a state where the normal state is set as the game state when a normal game is being played.

  When the time-saving game state (time-saving state) is set as the gaming state, the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640 by the opening operation (projection operation) of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640. As a result, a right-handed game is performed, and a special 2 game aiming at the second entrance 640 is executed.

  Here, when a small hit is won by lottery of the second special symbol, the V winning device 650 is opened as a small hit game, and the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 detects a ball (ball). (By passing through the specific area), the big hit game is started. In the present embodiment, when the big hit game is set (executed) via the small hit game, the time reduction state is set as the gaming state after the big hit game ends. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player who has won the jackpot via the small hit game from giving discomfort.

  In the present embodiment, the ball can pass through the specific area during the small hit game depending on the small hit type (small hit A to C) set when the small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol. It is configured to execute a small hit game having different characteristics (the possibility that the V switch 650e3 detects a ball).

  In addition, in the present embodiment, a special symbol (a first special symbol or a special symbol) is set as an end condition (time saving end condition) for ending a time-saving state that is a gaming state advantageous to the player (a gaming state more advantageous than the normal state). (2 special symbols) the number of times of change (number of lotteries) reaches the specified number of times of change (100 times). As a result, the number-of-operations termination condition (second time-saving termination condition) that is satisfied when the number of wins of the small win (the number of operations of the V winning device 650 operated based on the small win) reaches the specified number of operations. , Is set.

  Although details will be described later, the second time-saving end condition is further configured to be set according to the small hit type (small hit game to be executed) set when the small hit is won. I have.

  Then, in a state (situation) in which the time reduction state is set, before the first time reduction end condition or the second time reduction end condition described above is satisfied, the special symbol jackpot lottery is won (per kind). Win), or win a small hit by a special pattern lottery, and during the small hit game (small hit game according to the small hit type) according to the winning small hit, pass the ball to the specific area and win the big hit In the case of acquiring (winning two types), the time saving state is repeatedly set.

  On the other hand, in the state (situation) in which the time saving state is set, the first time saving end condition (the end condition according to the number of times of the special symbol change) or the second time saving condition before acquiring one or two types. When any of the time reduction end conditions (end conditions according to the small hit win (operation of the V winning device 650)) is satisfied, the gaming state is shifted (set) from the time reduction state to the normal state.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment configured as described above has a possibility of terminating the time reduction state when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery executed when the time reduction state is set ( Both the possibility that the second time-saving end condition is satisfied) and the possibility of winning two types can be provided to the player. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game (lottery of the second special symbol) executed during the time saving state, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, when a time-saving state is set and a jackpot is won by lottery of the first special symbol, the time-saving state is set as a gaming state after the end of the jackpot game. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, the normal state is set as the game state, that is, the state in which the left-handed game is being performed, and the number of balls to be retained (the number of stored memories) of the first special symbol is the upper limit. In the case of a number (4), a jackpot is won, and in the “first special symbol change (lottery) during the time saving state” which can be executed when the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is over, the jackpot is won. Also, it is possible to suppress providing a result that is disadvantageous to the player to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, a flow during the small hit game of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment will be described. 29 (a) to (f) are diagrams schematically showing the flow of various components during the small hit game. As shown in FIGS. 29A to 29F, when the small hit game is executed by the control process of the main control device 110, the small control game effect is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114. Is executed. Then, when t1 (1 second) elapses after the small hitting game is started, the V winning opening solenoid is driven according to a predetermined scenario (see FIG. 27). In addition, the flow path solenoid 650k is always set to OFF, and the ball that has won the V prize device 650 flows down to the special discharge flow path 650e2. The ball flowing down the special discharge flow path 650e2 is detected by a V winning switch (V switch) 650e3, and the V switch 650e3 is activated for 17 seconds (V effective period t5) from 1 second after the small hitting game is started. By detecting the ball, the big hit game is executed after the small hit game ends, and when the opening period t6 (2 seconds) elapses after the big hit game is started, the first round game is started and the specific winning opening 65 is opened. Be released.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to cause the V winning device 650 to win a ball during a small hitting game by simply executing a right-handed game normally, and to cause the V switch 650e3 to detect the ball. It is configured as follows. With such a configuration, even if the time-saving state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is completed by a single lottery of the second special symbol, the game can be played without any inconvenience. Can be done. In addition, since the time saving state is configured to end when the lottery of the second special symbol is performed once, for example, the type of the small hit won in the lottery of the second special symbol is identified, and the player is identified. In the case of winning a small hit (for example, a small hit of the small hit type C), which is disadvantageous to the game, the game aiming at the next second special symbol lottery is prevented without allowing the V winning device 650 to win the ball. can do.

<Electrical Configuration of Display Control Device According to First Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 31 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model with different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots and different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models with the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made into a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured so that a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value specified by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. After that, it takes a long time to output data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads out the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read out the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers a control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thereby, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Is output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and also reads and writes data to and from the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address conversion.

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND type flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for starting up the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. Note that the number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address designated by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code at the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled in the boot program are read from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified in reading the data of the first page. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time from reading to setting to the buffer RAM 234c. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled in the boot program is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a and stored using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization processing (see S4002 in FIG. 64) executed after the end of the boot processing by the boot program (see S4001 in FIG. 64) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out a control program from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as described above, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 36) to be described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c to be described later The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 66B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image when the image drawing process or the display process has not been completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power-on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 includes a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a, and the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  Further, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237. Therefore, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. A period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is kept overwritten without being overwritten during power-on. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data that should be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235. This area stores the corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image that displays the result of the lottery performed in the main control device 110 in a fluctuation effect when performed.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S4003 and S4004 in FIG. 64).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 shows the power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on and while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a first, and supplies the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (“O” and “X” are displayed on the third symbol display device 81).

  At this time, when the display control unit 114 receives the display change pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 based on the change pattern command from the main control unit 110 which is the change start instruction command, the display control unit 114 starts the process shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 32, on the display screen of the main image at power-on, the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol “○” is located at the lower right position toward the screen, and as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, a power-on variation image of an “X” symbol is alternately and repeatedly displayed during the variation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 are used to determine the lottery performed by the main control device 110. The result is determined, and if it is "special symbol jackpot", the image shown in FIG. 32 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped, and if it is "special symbol loss", FIG. Is displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thereby, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected at the first entrance ball 64, the power-on variable image area The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident at 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 32B and 32C are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is instructed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. If a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 31, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 33, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram illustrating four types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each of the back images. FIG. FIG. 33B shows a back surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage”, while FIG. 33B shows a back surface A corresponding to the “sand beach stage”.

  As shown in FIG. 33, as the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B, images longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image from left to right in the horizontal direction.

  The images prepared on each of the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are configured by an image corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and an image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then when the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smoothly displayed. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

  When the change of the back type is determined and the stage is changed to the “sand beach stage” or the “deep sea stage”, the MPU 231 sets the corresponding back image from the first position a to the position a ′ as the initial position of the display area. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as time passes, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 33 (a), the rear surface A corresponding to the sandy stage which is the initial stage has the entire area of the rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d are the rear surfaces of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the initial stage “sand beach stage” is displayed, so the image data of the back A corresponding to the “sand beach stage” displayed frequently is displayed. By making the entirety resident in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33B, the back surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage” has only a part of the back surface, that is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is resident. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the video RAM 235.

  Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. Must use a very large capacity RAM, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from position a to position a '(or the range from FIG. 33 (a) to FIG. 33 (b)). ), And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 33A and 33B) is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, if the stage change is determined by the lottery at the start of the change, the character ROM 234 may be stored on the back of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface B can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the rear surface B, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  On the back B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from the left to the right using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In the meantime, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled. Therefore, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 Using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored without delay. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  On the rear surface B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 31) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be displayed reliably.

  On the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the image corresponding to the image between the position b ′ and the position b. Data is stored redundantly. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that an image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so that the image between the positions a to c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 31, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols, which are numbered from “0” to “9” as the third symbol, are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the 3rd symbol display device 81 Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the entrance to the first entrance 64 has occurred, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads it into the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list (to be described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the frame buffers of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. Then, it is possible to read out the image of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image of one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame 20 milliseconds after completion of the drawing process for the image for one frame. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233j and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234. According to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. Display data tables corresponding to ending effects and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when the fluctuation effect is started, if the stop type of the fluctuation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuation effect is the jackpot A to D. In any case, the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  By notifying the short time period of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the short time period of the normal symbol. The longer the time-saving period of this ordinary symbol is, the more chances for the ball to pass through the ordinary entrance (through gate) 67, the more chances for the ordinary symbol to be drawn, and the more the ordinary symbol hits. More opportunities. Therefore, the chance of opening a motorized accessory as a jackpot of a normal symbol increases, so that the ball easily enters the second entrance 640 and the lottery of the special symbol is easily performed. Therefore, the longer the short time period of the displayed normal symbol, the stronger the expectation that a special symbol will be a big hit, and it can be given to the player, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased it can. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  In addition, the first entrance 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters, so that the electric accessory is usually opened as a jackpot of a symbol and the second entrance is opened. When it becomes easy to enter the ball opening 640, the prize balls increase. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which the number of balls is difficult to reduce even when playing a game, or in a state where the number of balls is not reduced, so that the player is in a state in which the number of balls is difficult to reduce, or the number of balls is reduced. You can get the expectation that you can get a special symbol jackpot without it. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can have the willingness to participate in the game continuously.

  In addition, in the ending effect, the player may make a special symbol in the lottery of the special symbol held by notifying that the lottery result of one of the lotteries of the special symbol held will be a big win of the special symbol. Therefore, the player can have a sense of expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that a game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, is prepared with 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and according to the type of the sprite, the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the translucency Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back type is to display either back A or B corresponding to the stage (one of “sand beach stage” or “deep sea stage”) selected by the player, or a back different from back A or B. Information for specifying whether to display an image is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed.

  The MPU 231 specifies the rear image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the rear surfaces A and B as the drawing target when the rear surface type specifies that either the rear surface A or B is displayed. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified as time elapses. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A and B, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Furthermore, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time after the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change starts until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, an offset from the stop symbol set in accordance with the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. As a result, the fluctuating effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by main controller 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 is displayed in the third symbol. It is possible to specify the third symbol to be easily displayed from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to each of the three symbols and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the 3rd symbol is being displayed at high speed, the 3rd symbol is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop effect of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the disconnection of the number continuity be able to.

  The “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 36) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the rendering content corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The contents of the image to be drawn are specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 36) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is imposed on the startup and execution of a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable presentation images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  In addition, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode in this way, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why the pachinko machine 10 can be created is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on user operations, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 35 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to be transferred corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 35).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 35, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 36) described later is created. At the same time, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 35, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, and therefore it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. A predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 32A to 32C on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. Is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 64) executed by the MPU 231 (see S4005 in FIG. 64). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. It is set to off (see S4305 in FIG. 66 (b)).

  This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S4301 in FIG. 66B), and When the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see S4308 in FIG. 66B) and the simple display setting process (FIG. 66) are performed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 66 (b) (S4309). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed in accordance with a command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 67 to 75) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 76 to 78) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S6301 in FIG. 79A), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 79 (b)) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 80) for transferring image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. Once selected, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, describing the contents of the image drawing instruction for is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 36) described below describing the drawing instruction content is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 66 (b) ), The pointer update process (see S6005 in FIG. 78) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 36), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 36, the back image used for the one-frame image and the third symbol (the symbol 1, ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball count design 1, reserved ball count design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 corresponds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of characters (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2,..., Error design).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 66 (b) Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by one (see S6007 of FIG. 76). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by an initial setting process (see S4002 in FIG. 64) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 231. Is In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233j when transferring image data of a sprite in which image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and transmits the sprite of the transfer target sprite. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S6513 in FIG. 80). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S6514 in FIG. 80). The image controller 237 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S6602 in FIG. 81).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233k, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 66B) is executed, it is performed (see S6602 of FIG. 81).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame 20 milliseconds after completion of the drawing process for the image for one frame. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Main Controller 110 in First Embodiment>
Next, control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value (999 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized. When the value reaches (999, 99, 99, 239, 99 in this embodiment, respectively), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, a start winning process is executed in accordance with a win (start winning) in the first entrance 64 (S105). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106). A through gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the ordinary symbol change process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. After the execution of the through gate passage process, a V entrance passage process associated with the ball entry into the V winning device 650 is executed (S108). Thereafter, a V-pass process is executed in accordance with the winning of the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3 of the V winning device 650 (S109). The details of the V entrance passage process and the V passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48.

  Next, a firing control process is executed (S110), and other processes that should be periodically executed are executed (S111), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol change process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and displays the change of the special symbol (first symbol) performed on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, and the third symbol. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed on the display device 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). The special symbol jackpot during the period includes a period in which the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81 display a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game). , The period (opening period) indicating the start of the jackpot game, the period during the jackpot game (round game period), the round game period ends, and then a lottery (change) of a new special symbol is started. Grace period (ending period).

  Here, in order to determine whether or not the present is a big hit, specifically, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 203d is set to ON. As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the big hit (the big hit flag 203d is set to ON) (S201: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the special symbol big hit, that is, if it is determined that the big hit flag 203d is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S201: No), the first symbol display device 37a, 37b is displayed. It is determined whether or not the display mode is changing (S202). If the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is not changing (S202: No), the game ball is sent to the second entrance 640. It is determined whether or not a ball has been entered (S203).

  If it is determined that the game ball has entered the second entrance 640 (S203: Yes), that is, if there is neither a special symbol jackpot nor a change in the special symbol, the ball enters the second entrance 640. When the ball has entered the ball, that is, when the fluctuation (lottery) start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small collision type counter C5. Are stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area (S204).

  Next, a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is executed (S210), and the process ends. The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S203 that the game ball has not entered the second entrance 640 (S203: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b (N1) Is acquired (S205). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is larger than 0 (S206). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is 0 (S206: No), the reserved ball of the first special symbol to start the fluctuation (lottery) at the present time is secured. Since there is no state, the present process for executing the special symbol change is ended.

  On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is not 0 (S206: Yes), that is, if the reserved ball of the first special symbol for starting the fluctuation (lottery) is secured. For example, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is subtracted (S207), and the reserved ball number command (special figure 1) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b changed by the calculation. The number of reserved balls command) is set (S208). After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the processing of S208, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S209). After that, the process of S210 described above is executed, and this process ends.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is changing (S202: Yes), whether the change time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it is (S211). The variation time of the variation display performed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S211: No), that is, if the current time is during the fluctuation period of the special symbol, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S211, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S211: Yes), the display mode (stop display) corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37a, 37b is set. (S212). The setting of the stop display is performed in advance by a special symbol change start process (S210) described later with reference to FIG. Although a detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, the stop display set in the processing of S212 is configured to be displayed on the first symbol display device for a predetermined period (0.5 seconds). By displaying the display pattern of the stop symbol (stop display) continuously for a predetermined period in this way, unlike the case where the changing symbol is displayed for a moment, the first symbol that is reliably stopped and displayed to the player is displayed. The contents of the design can be recognized.

  In the present embodiment, 0.5 seconds is set as the predetermined period (determination period) for displaying the stop state of the first symbol described above, but other configurations may be used. In the case of performing a blinking display in which the lighting state and the erasing state are repeated in order to indicate that it is fluctuating, it is longer than one lighting display period (for example, 0.2 seconds) when performing the blinking display. The period may be set as the fixed period described above. With this configuration, the player can easily determine whether the first symbol is fluctuating or is stopped (determined).

  After the processing of S212 is completed, when the special symbol change display being executed on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is started, the special symbol change start processing (see S210 in FIG. 39) is performed. It is determined whether the symbol lottery result (this determination result) is a special symbol jackpot (S213). When it is determined that the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S213: Yes), the specific winning opening (variable winning device) 65 is determined based on the jackpot type (the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won). Is set (S214), and then the start of a jackpot is set (S215). Next, the big hit start flag 203c and the big hit flag 203d are set to ON (S216), the time reduction counter 203k is set to 0 (S217), and the process shifts to S218. In the processing of S218, a stop command is set (S218), and this processing ends.

  That is, in the present embodiment, as described in the processing of S217, when the special symbol jackpot is won, the change of the special symbol ends (the fixed display of the first symbol ends), and then the jackpot is won. The time saving state is configured to end at the timing until the game is started. The timing for ending the time-saving state based on the winning of the special symbol jackpot may be a predetermined timing, and as in the above-described embodiment, the special symbol (first symbol) In addition to the time after the final display of the symbol, for example, the time reduction state may be ended at the timing of starting the change of the special symbol that has won the jackpot, or the time reduction may be performed at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the timing at which the final display is started). The state may be ended. In addition, the timing of starting the jackpot game corresponding to the winning jackpot or the time-saving state may be ended after a predetermined period from the start of the jackpot game (for example, a round game start timing when the variable winning device 65 is opened). Then, the time saving state may be ended at the timing when the big hit game is ended.

  Further, the end timing for ending the time-saving state based on the winning of the special symbol jackpot (timing for satisfying the time-saving ending condition that is satisfied when the special symbol jackpot is won) is determined from the plurality of timings described above. It may be configured so that only one is set in advance, or may be configured so that the time-saving state ends at different timings depending on the jackpot type of the winning jackpot.

  With this configuration, for example, when the time-saving state is ended at the change start timing of the special symbol, the time-saving state is ended for the player (for example, the number of times the special symbol changes It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the normal state has been set after reaching 100) or the time-saving state has been ended by winning a jackpot during the time-saving state. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to gaze at the contents of the effect display (variation display) of the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol change executed when the time saving state ends, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

  In addition, by setting the timing at which the time-saving ending condition is satisfied for each of the plurality of jackpot types (the timing of ending the time-saving state when a jackpot is won) to be different, a special symbol based on the timing of ending the time-saving state is set. It is possible to prevent a lottery result (determination result) from being grasped by the player. In addition, when the player identifies the timing at which the time saving state ends at a part of the timing at which the time saving ending condition set for each of the plurality of jackpot types is satisfied, the lottery result (determination result) of the special symbol of this time is displayed. A timing for notifying the player of the jackpot, that is, a jackpot-specific time-saving termination timing for terminating the time-saving state only when the time-saving termination condition that is established by winning the jackpot may be provided.

  With this configuration, it is possible to quickly know that a jackpot has been won by grasping the timing at which the time saving state ends, and to prolong the period of immersion in the sense of superiority. In addition, in order to achieve such an effect, the above-described time-saving termination timing dedicated to the jackpot is set in the first half of the fluctuation period from the execution of the special symbol change to the end of the special symbol change. It is good to configure.

  On the other hand, in the process of S213, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S213: No), a time saving number update process for updating the number of time savings is executed (S219), and thereafter, the current lottery result Is determined to be a small hit (S220). It should be noted that the detailed description of the time saving number update process (S219) described above will be described later with reference to FIG. 42. In this process, among the plurality of time saving end conditions set, the number of times the special symbol changes (the special symbol The process of updating the information on the change number termination condition that can be established based on the number of lotteries) is executed.

  In the process of S220, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit (S220: Yes), a small hit start setting process is executed (S221), the process of S218 described above is executed, and this process is executed. finish. On the other hand, in the process of S220, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S220: No), the small hit start setting process (S221) is skipped, the process of S218 is executed, and this process is executed. finish.

  As described above, in the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 38) of the present embodiment, the second special symbol variation process (priority) takes precedence over whether the lottery (variation) condition of the first special symbol is satisfied, and the second special symbol variation process is performed. It is configured to determine whether a special symbol lottery (fluctuation) condition is satisfied (the processing of S203 in FIG. 38). This is possible because the second special symbol, which is a special symbol that is advantageous to the player, does not have the holding storage means for holding and storing the winning information, and the time saving state is set as the gaming state. (Easy), and when the normal state is set, the second special symbol, which cannot be changed (difficult to change), is a special symbol that is more difficult to change (lottery) than the first special symbol. Because it is.

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, the lottery (fluctuation) condition of the first special symbol and the lottery (fluctuation) condition of the second special symbol coincide with each other (the timer interrupt processing of the main controller 110 (FIG. 37)). (Including an error of 2 milliseconds, which is the processing period of the second special symbol), the variation of the first special symbol is started in preference to the second special symbol in which the variation (lottery) is difficult to be executed. Then, the player will feel uncomfortable. Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol is more likely to win a lottery result that is advantageous to the player than the lottery (fluctuation) of the first special symbol (it is easier to win a small hit). ), The lottery (fluctuation) condition of the first special symbol and the lottery (fluctuation) condition of the second special symbol are simultaneous (timer interrupt processing of main controller 110 (see FIG. 37)). If the first special symbol is changed in priority to the second special symbol in which the change (lottery) is difficult to be executed when the first special symbol is changed (including the error of 2 milliseconds which is the processing period), it is more likely that There was a problem of giving discomfort.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when executing the process of starting the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the player has a high added value (the winning probability per small hit is the first special symbol). Higher than that, the lottery (fluctuation) is difficult to be actually executed), and the lottery (fluctuation) condition of the special symbol (the second special symbol in the present embodiment) is determined first (first). In addition, it is possible to suppress the above-described problem from occurring.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as a process for updating the number of times saved, after executing a process related to the number of changes end condition that is established in accordance with the number of times of the change of the special symbol (time-saving times update process (S219)), the small hits are won. Is configured to execute a process (small-hit start setting process (S221)) related to the winning number end condition that is established according to. With such a configuration, if a lottery result that satisfies the change number end condition and the winning number end condition is obtained in one special symbol change (lottery), the change number end condition is set first. Is satisfied, and the time-saving state ends based on the satisfaction of the change frequency end condition.

  In this manner, for a plurality of set time-saving end conditions, whether or not each time-saving end condition is satisfied is determined in a predetermined order. In the case where a lottery can be reached, the time reduction state can be regularly ended.

  In the above-described configuration, for example, when the condition for ending the number of times of change is satisfied, the time saving state is ended after the display of the special symbol (first symbol) is confirmed. By using the pachinko machine 10 configured to end the time-saving state after the end of the winning game, the end timing of the time-saving state can be made different depending on the time-saving end condition that is satisfied.

  Specifically, for example, when the small win B is won and the number-of-wins termination condition is solely satisfied, the time-saving state ends after the small win game corresponding to the small win B ends. On the other hand, when the small hit B is won in the special symbol lottery (change) in which the change number end condition is satisfied, the change number end condition is preferentially satisfied, and the small hit game corresponding to the small hit B is started. The time saving state ends before the completion, that is, after the special symbol (first symbol) indicating the lottery result (small hit B) of the special symbol is displayed.

  In the above-described example, in the state where the time reduction state is set as the gaming state, even if the time reduction state ends based on the lottery (fluctuation) of the special symbol that has won the small hit B, the time reduction end is established. Since the timing for ending the time-saving state (presence or absence of time-saving during the small hitting game) can be changed and set according to the conditions, the time-saving ending condition that satisfies the length of the period that is advantageous to the player can be set. Can be different. As a result, it is possible to set a time-saving end condition that is advantageous for the player and a time-saving end condition that is disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a new game property that expects that the time reduction termination condition is satisfied as much as possible, in addition to the game that expects that the time reduction termination condition is not satisfied.

  Note that, for the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, for example, even during a small hit game, a ball entry port (second port) that can enter (easily) enter when the electric accessory 640a performs an opening operation (long opening). The second ball entrance 640 is provided above the specific winning opening (V winning device 650) opened in the small hitting game so that the ball can be thrown into the ball entrance 640). It is preferable to configure so that a game in which a ball enters the ball entrance 640 is performed.

  Furthermore, the small hitting type in which the small hitting game is executed for a long period (for example, 60 seconds) in which the period of the small hitting game (the period in which the V winning device 650 is open (1.8S) and the period in which it is closed) is long. It is configured to be settable, and provided to the player when the player wins the V prize device 650, rather than the number of prize balls (for example, five) provided to the player when the player enters the second entrance. By configuring the number of prize balls (for example, three) to be smaller, the game result (the number of balls acquired by the game) can be greatly changed depending on the presence or absence of the time saving state during the small hit game. . In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, by providing the technique for changing the end timing of the time saving as described above, a more interesting game can be provided to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, a special symbol change start process (S210) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S210). This special symbol change start process (S210) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and is executed in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. On the basis of the values of the various counters stored in the area, a lottery (judgment / non-judgment) of "special symbol big hit", "special small hit" or "special symbol departure" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37a. , 37b and the third symbol display device 81 to determine an effect pattern (variable time) of the variable effect.

  In the special symbol change start process, first, the first random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, and small hit type stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Each value of the counter C5 is obtained (S301). Next, the lottery result based on the first random number table 202a (special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, special symbol 2 random number table 202a2) corresponding to the type of the acquired special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol). Is acquired (S302). Specifically, in the case of the lottery of the first special symbol based on the entry into the first entrance 64, the value of the first random number counter C1 and the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 22B) Is determined by comparing the random number value stored in the second winning symbol, and if it is a lottery of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, the value of the first random number counter C1 And the random number stored in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 (see FIG. 22 (c)) to determine a big hit or a small hit.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (S303). When it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S303: Yes), the big hit type is acquired based on the first hit type selection table 202b corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (S304). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained in the process of S301 is compared with the random number stored in the special figure 1 big hit type selection table 202b1 or the special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202b2. Among the four types of special symbol jackpots (jackpots A to D), it is determined what the jackpot type is (see FIG. 23 (b) or (c)).

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same discrimination value that is determined to be a big hit. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and different random numbers may be used. With this configuration, a random value determined to be out of the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, so that an illegal game aiming at the same random value is performed. Even if it is, it is possible to suppress the execution of the jackpot.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of random numbers determined to be a big hit is set to be the same in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used. The number of random numbers determined to be a jackpot may be set differently. Thus, by configuring, it is possible to make the jackpot probability different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher jackpot probability, the player Can give you the expectation of jackpot.

  Then, the display mode at the time of the big hit corresponding to the special symbol type (special symbol type) and the big hit type is set (S305). In the process of S305, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined big hit type (big hits A to D). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type on the third symbol display device 81, the big hit types (big hits A to D) are set as the stop types.

  Thereafter, a jackpot variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S306), and the process proceeds to S314. When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S306, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect on the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. Specifically, the acquired special symbol type, the lottery result, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 are compared with the normal variation pattern table 202d1 or the time reduction variation pattern table 202d2. Then, the variation time of the symbol variation is determined (FIG. 23 (b) or FIG. 24).

  In the process of S314, a variation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S306 is set (S314). Next, a stop type command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the process of S305 is set (S315). These fluctuation pattern command and stop type command are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and are output to the voice lamp control device in an external output process (S1501) of a main process (see FIG. 51) described later. It is transmitted to 113. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S315 is completed, the present process is completed, and the process returns to the special symbol changing process (see FIG. 38).

  On the other hand, if the lottery result is not a big hit in the process of S303 (S303: No), it is next determined whether or not the lottery result is a small hit (S307). When it is determined that the lottery result is the small hit (S307: Yes), the small hit type is acquired based on the small hit type selection table 202f (S308). More specifically, the value of the small hit type counter C5 acquired in the processing of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the small hit type selection table 202f, and the three types of special symbol small hits (small hits) are compared. A to C) are determined as to the small hit type (see FIG. 22).

  Next, the display mode at the time of the small hit corresponding to the small hit type is set (S309). Thereafter, a small hit change pattern is determined based on the value of the change type counter CS1 (S310). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the small hit symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S306, the acquired special symbol type, the lottery result, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, the normal variation pattern table 202d1 or the time reduction variation pattern table The variation time of the symbol variation is determined by comparing with 202d2 (FIG. 23 (b) or FIG. 24).

  Next, the small hit type acquired in the process of S308 is stored in the small hit type storage area 203e (S311), and thereafter, the processes of S314 and S315 described above are executed, and the process returns to the special symbol change process (see FIG. 38). . In the present embodiment, only the second special symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is won in the small hit, so it is necessary to refer to the special symbol type in S308 and S309. However, for example, in the case of winning the small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, the small hit type is acquired by referring to the special symbol type in the processing of S308 and S309. What is necessary is just to comprise so that a display mode may be set.

  In the processing of S314 and S315 in this case, the command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (see S310) set when the lottery result of the special symbol is determined to be a small hit and the stop type (see S309). Is set.

  If it is determined that the lottery result is not a small hit (S307: No), a display mode when the lottery is lost corresponding to the type of the special symbol is set (S312). Thereafter, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined based on the number of reserved balls (S313). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S306, the acquired special symbol type, the lottery result, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, the normal variation pattern table 202d1 or the time reduction variation pattern table The variation time of the symbol variation is determined by comparing with 202d2 (FIG. 23 (b) or FIG. 24). Next, the processes of S314 and S315 described above are executed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38).

  Next, the small hit start setting process (S221) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the small hit start setting process (S221). The small hit start setting process (S221) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and is a small hit type (small hits A to C). , A process of setting the start of the small hit game and updating the time saving information according to the winning small hit (update process for the winning number end condition) is executed.

  Here, when the small hitting game is started, the pachinko machine 10 changes the V winning device 650 to an open state in which the ball can win (easily), and the ball winning the V winning device 650 has the specific area (V). By passing the winning switch (V switch) 650e3), the big hit game is executed (set) after the small hit game ends.

  That is, the gaming state in which the small hitting game is executed is an advantageous state in which a ball can be won in the V winning device 650 (a prize ball can be obtained), and the big hitting game is executed compared to the normal gaming state. It is configured to be in an advantageous state where the likelihood is high. Although details will be described later, the present embodiment is configured so that different small hit games are executed corresponding to the small hit types (small hits A to C) set when the small hit is won. According to each small hit type, the possibility that the ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game is made different.

  With this configuration, it is possible to vary the possibility (expected degree) of executing (setting) the big hit game (per two kinds) depending on the small hit game to be executed. It is possible not only to determine whether or not to win, but also to be interested in the type of the small hit that has been won, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  When the small hit start setting process (S221) is executed, first, an open scenario corresponding to the small hit type is set (S401). After that, the big hit type corresponding to the small hit type is set in the V passing big hit type storage area 203h (S402). More specifically, based on the small hit type and the small hit type selection table 202f, the V passing big hit type (big hit game set (executed) when the ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game) is determined. I do. As described above, if the small hit type is A, it is determined that the big hit is A (15 rounds with a short jackpot), and if the small hit type is B, it is a big hit B (5 rounds with a short jackpot). If the small hit type is C, it is determined that the small hit is a big hit A (five round short hit big hit) (see FIG. 22). That is, in the present embodiment, the contents of the jackpot game of the jackpot (per two kinds) set (executed) when the ball passes through the specific area during the small jackpot game, and the jackpot (per kind) by the lottery of the special symbol ) Is set on a per-kind basis when winning two kinds (when a ball passes through a specific area) so that the same big-victory game is executed with the big-hit game executed when winning The big hit type (big hit A or B) is set according to the type of the executed small hit.

  In this way, when the two kinds of winnings are obtained, the big hit type is set, and the process of starting the big hit game based on the set big hit type is executed. The process related to the jackpot game can be shared between the case of winning and the case of winning, and the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  In addition, without being limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, a jackpot game that can be executed may be set only when one type is won or only when two types are won. A different big hit game process may be executed between the hit and the two types.

  Returning to FIG. 40, the description will be continued. After the process of S402 is completed, the start of the small hit is set based on the small hit type (S403), and the small hit start flag 203f and the small hit flag 203g are set to ON (S404). Thereafter, the small hitting time saving update process is executed (S405), and this process ends. The small hitting time saving update process (S405) is a process for updating time saving information corresponding to a winning number end condition, which is an end condition of a time saving state that can be satisfied when a small hit is won, and updates time saving information. And a process for shifting the gaming state from the time-saving state to the normal state when the winning number ending condition is satisfied. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 41. I do.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 41, the small hitting time saving update process (S405) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit time saving update process (S405). The small hitting time saving update process (S405) is a process executed in the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 40) of the special symbol change process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37). Yes, this is processing for updating the time saving information based on the winning small win and updating the gaming state from the time saving state to the normal state when the time saving end condition is satisfied.

  In the small hitting time saving update process (S405), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0 (S501). That is, it is determined whether or not the current time is in a time saving state. In the processing of S501, when it is determined that the value of the counter 203k during the time reduction is not larger than 0 (it is 0) (S501: No), it is a state in which the small win has been won in the game state other than the time reduction state. This processing is entirely skipped in order to update the time saving information, and the processing ends. In the present embodiment, since it is configured such that a small hit is not won except in a state where the time saving state is set (so that a lottery (change) of the second special symbol is not executed), S501 is performed. If it is determined that the time saving state is not set in the processing of (1), an error command for executing error notification (abnormality notification) may be set.

  On the other hand, in the process of S501, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203k is greater than 0, that is, the time reduction state is set (S501: Yes), next, the small hit that has been won this time It is determined whether the small hit type is "small hit A" (S502). Here, in the process of S502, the small hit type stored in the small hit type storage area 203e in the process of S311 of the special symbol change start process (refer to FIG. 39) is read and discriminated.

  In the process of S502, when it is determined that the current small hit type is “small hit A” (S502: Yes), the value of the small hit A counter 203m is subtracted by 1 (S503), and the small hit A after the subtraction is determined. It is determined whether or not the value of the counter 203m is 0 (S504). If it is determined that the value is 0 (S504: Yes), the time-saving ending condition (the number-of-winning-time ending condition corresponding to the small hit A) in the current small hit winning is determined. ) Is satisfied, the value of the medium-hour time counter 203k, which measures the period until the variation number ending condition is satisfied, is set to 0 (S505), and the small number of times that the various winning number ending conditions are measured is set. The respective values of the hit A counter 203m, the small hit B counter 203n, and the small hit C counter 203p are set to 0 (S506), and the normal state is set as the gaming state (S506). 07).

  By executing the processes of S505 to S507 described above, when one of the plurality of time-saving termination conditions is satisfied, the time period until another time-saving termination condition is satisfied is measured. Since the value of the counter can be set to a value indicating that the time saving end condition has been satisfied, the counter for updating the time saving information after the time saving end condition is satisfied (after the normal state is set as the gaming state). Processing (processing for updating the values of the small hit A counter 203m, the small hit B counter 203n, the small hit C counter 203p, and the time reduction counter 203k) can be reliably prevented from being executed. Therefore, execution of unnecessary processing can be suppressed, and the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, when any one of the plurality of time saving termination conditions is satisfied, the value of each counter for updating the time saving information corresponding to each of the plurality of time saving termination conditions is set to 0 ( Since it is only configured to set to the value of the time saving end condition), after the time saving state ends, it is necessary to determine which time saving end condition of the previous time saving state was satisfied and ended. However, for example, a storage unit capable of storing the time saving termination conditions that have been established may be provided so that the type of the time saving termination conditions that have been established in the past and the number of times the conditions have been established can be determined.

  With such a configuration, for example, the time reduction termination condition that is likely to be satisfied is determined based on the calculation result calculated from the design value and the actual number of times of completion, and based on the determined content, the condition is established for the player. It can be configured to suggest (notify) easy time-saving end conditions. Further, when one time-saving end condition is satisfied, the update status of the time-saving information corresponding to another time-saving end condition (for example, the small hitting A counter 203m, the small hitting B at the time when the value of the time-saving medium-time counter 203k becomes 0). Each of the counter 203n and the small hit C counter 203p) is configured to be storable, and the largest time-saving termination condition that is most difficult to be satisfied, that is, the largest value when one of the plurality of time-saving termination conditions is satisfied is satisfied. You may be comprised so that the time-saving termination condition which has the time-saving information of a value may be determined.

  When the processing of S507 is completed, next, a command for the number of remaining working hours corresponding to the value of each small hit counter subtracted is set (S508), and a state command indicating the current gaming state is set (S509). To end. Here, the commands set in S508 and S509 are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are included in an external output process (S1501) of a main process (see FIG. 51), which will be described later. It is transmitted to the control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 manages the time saving information based on the received remaining time saving number command, and sets a state display mode for suggesting (notifying) a time saving situation (a period until the time saving state ends). Further, the current game state is grasped based on the received state command.

  On the other hand, in the process of S504, when it is determined that the value of the small hitting A counter 203m is not 0 (S504: No), the time saving state is not ended by the current small hit winning, and thus S505 for ending the time saving state. Steps S507 to S507 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S508.

  Returning to the processing of S502 described above, the description will be continued. In the process of S502, if it is determined that the small hit type of the small hit which has been won this time is not “small hit A” (“small hit B” or “small hit C”) (S502: No), the next Next, it is determined whether the small hit type of the small hit that has been won this time is “small hit B” (S510), and if it is determined to be “small hit B” (S510: Yes), the small hit B counter 203n Is subtracted by 1 (S511), and thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the small hit B counter 203n is 0 (S512).

  In the process of S512, when it is determined that the value of the small hit B counter 203n is 0 (S512: Yes), the time saving end condition (the winning number end condition corresponding to the small hit B) is satisfied in the current small hit win. Since this is the case, the processing shifts to the processing of S505 described above, and processing for terminating the time saving state is executed.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S512, if it is determined that the value of the small hit B counter 203n is not 0 (is 1 or more) (S512: No), the time saving state is not ended by the current small hit winning, so the time saving state The processing of S505 to S507 for ending the processing is skipped, and the processing shifts to S508.

  In the process of S510, when it is determined that the small hit type of the small hit that has been won this time is not “small hit B”, that is, “small hit C” (S510: No), the value of the small hit C counter 223p is determined. Is subtracted by 1 (S513), and it is determined whether the value of the small hit C counter 223p after the subtraction is 0 (S514).

  In the processing of S514, when it is determined that the value of the small hit C counter 223p is 0 (S514: Yes), the time saving end condition (the winning number end condition corresponding to the small hit C) is satisfied in the current small hit win. Since this is the case, S515 to S517 for executing the same processing as S505 to S507 described above are executed, and the process proceeds to S508. On the other hand, in the process of S514, when it is determined that the value of the small hit C counter 203p is not 0 (is 1 or more) (S514: No), the time saving state is not ended by the current small hit winning, so the time saving The process of S515 to S517 for terminating the state is skipped, and the process proceeds to S508.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol winning in the small hit has elapsed, the value of the counter corresponding to the small hit winning is subtracted, and the time reduction end based on the small hit winning is completed. It is configured to determine whether a condition (winning number end condition) is satisfied. With this configuration, it is possible to end the time-saving state by the winning number end condition before the small hitting game is executed. Therefore, regardless of whether the time saving end condition of the variation count end condition or the winning count end condition is satisfied, it is possible to prevent a large difference in timing of terminating the time save state.

  Specifically, in the first embodiment, when the change number end condition, that is, the time saving end condition that is satisfied based on the change number of the special symbol is satisfied, the final display of the special symbol (first symbol) is performed. The time saving state is configured to end at the end timing, and the winning number end condition, that is, if the time saving ending condition that is established based on the number of winnings in small lottery winning in the special symbol lottery, a special symbol is established. It is configured such that the time saving state ends at the start setting timing of the small hitting game after the (first symbol) confirmation display.

  That is, no matter which time saving end condition is satisfied, the structure is such that the time saving state ends immediately after the change of the corresponding special symbol stops. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize which time-saving end condition is satisfied and the time-saving end condition set this time has ended. In order for the player to determine whether or not the time saving state has ended, for example, it is necessary to identify the length of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) and the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a. For example, by setting the time reduction state to end at the time of the small hitting start setting (immediately before the small hitting game is started) as in the present embodiment, the time saving state is set immediately after the small hitting game is started. This makes it difficult to determine whether or not the processing has been completed.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, substantially the same timing (a level at which the player is difficult to determine) is satisfied when any of the change number end condition and the winning number end condition among a plurality of time reduction end conditions is satisfied. Although the time saving state is configured to end with a concept including a time difference), other configurations may be used. For example, when the variation number end condition is satisfied, a special symbol (first symbol) is determined. The time saving state may be ended immediately after the display, and if the winning number ending condition is satisfied, the time saving state may be ended after the small hitting game executed after the display of the special symbol (first symbol) is confirmed. . With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the time period during which the small hitting game is being executed.

  Therefore, during the small hitting game, the player cannot determine whether or not the time-saving state has been ended by the current small hitting election, and until the small hitting game ends (whether or not two kinds of wins are obtained). Until the game result is notified), it is possible to make it difficult to know whether or not the time-saving state has ended. Furthermore, as in the present embodiment, in the pachinko machine 10 having a playability capable of acquiring two kinds of wins during the small hit game, the player is notified of whether or not the time-saving state has ended after the end of the small hit game. With this configuration, is this small hit game based on the small hit winning that ends the time saving state? Therefore, the small hit game executed during the time-saving state can always be motivated to aim at two kinds of hits.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the time saving update process (S219) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the time saving number update process (S219). This time saving number update process (S219) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), updates the time saving number, and changes the gaming state to the normal state. This is the process for setting to.

  In the time saving number update process (S219), first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203k is larger than 0, that is, whether the current time saving is being performed (S601). In the process of S601, when the value of the counter 203k during the working hours is not larger than 0 (it is 0), that is, when it is determined that the working hours are not working (S601: No), the process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction counter 203k is larger than 0, that is, if it is determined that the time reduction is being performed (S601: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203k is decremented by 1 (S602), and the process proceeds to S603. I do.

  In the processing of S603, a remaining time reduction command indicating the value of the during-hours counter 203k changed by the calculation (subtracted by 1) is set (S603). The command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S1501) of the main processing (see FIG. 51) described later. It is transmitted to 113.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the counter 203k during time reduction is 0 (S604). When it is determined that the value of the counter 203k during time saving is 0 (S604: Yes), the gaming state is set to the normal state (S605), the small hitting A counter 203m, the small hitting B counter 203n, and the small hitting C counter 203p. Is set to 0 (S606). Next, a state command indicating that the current gaming state is the normal state is set (S607), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S604, when it is determined that the value of the counter 203k during the time saving is not 0 (S604: No), the present process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, whether or not the time-saving termination condition (variation-number termination condition) that is satisfied based on the number of times of the change of the special symbol is determined by the time-saving times updating process (see FIG. 42). Whether or not the time saving end condition (winning number end condition) that is established based on the number of wins of the special symbol small hit win is determined by a small hit time saving update process (see FIG. 41). . In any of the processes, when any one of the plurality of time saving end conditions is satisfied, the value of various counters for indicating the update status of the time saving information corresponding to the other time saving end conditions is changed. All are configured to be set to a value (0) indicating a state in which the time saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, no matter which time saving end condition is satisfied, the processing content for ending the time saving state can be unified.

  In this embodiment, in order to indicate the update status of the time saving information corresponding to each time saving ending condition, a value indicating each time saving ending condition is set in various counters at the timing when the time saving state is set, and each time saving ending condition is set. When the time saving information corresponding to the condition is determined, the value of each counter is subtracted, and when the value obtained by the subtraction becomes 0, it is determined that the corresponding time saving ending condition is satisfied. In addition to the above, when the time saving state is set, the values of various counters are set to 0, and when the corresponding time saving information is determined, the counter value is incremented by 1 and the counter value after the addition is changed to the time saving termination condition. May be configured to end the time-saving state when it is determined to be a value indicating. In other words, means for determining whether or not the time-saving end condition is satisfied, and, when the time-saving state is set, the time-saving information (the number of times the special symbol has changed and the number of small wins) corresponding to the various time-saving end conditions is updated. And updating means.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, among the time-saving end conditions, as the winning number end condition, an end condition that is satisfied when the number of times of each small hit type reaches a predetermined number is used. It is also possible to set a winning number ending condition corresponding to the total number of times each of the small hit types is set, that is, the total number of the small hits won during the period in which the time saving state is continuously set. A winning number ending condition that is established when the sum of the number of times the winning B is set and the number of times the small winning C is set reaches a predetermined number may be set.

  In this case, the number of wins in which the winning number end condition corresponding to only the small hit B is satisfied (the number of finishing times of small hit B (for example, three)) and the number of winnings in which the winning number end condition corresponding to only the small hit C is satisfied ( With respect to the number of small hit C endings (for example, 5 times), it is needless to say that the total number of times described above is made smaller than the sum of the number of small hitting B endings and the number of small hitting C endings. It is preferable to set a smaller number than the large value (5 times in the case of this example) in the number of times of completion per C. As a result, it is not possible to predict the end timing of the time saving state for the small hit type set when the small hit is won during the time saving state unless the time saving situation is grasped in a complex manner. It is difficult for the player to know the end timing of the game.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start winning, winning) in the first winning opening (first winning opening) 64. Then, when it is determined that there is a prize, that is, when a ball is detected by a ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the first ball entrance 64 (S701: Yes), various random number counters are set. Is a process for acquiring the value and executing the holding process of the value.

  When the start winning process (FIG. 43, S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (start winning, winning) the first winning opening (first winning opening) 64 (S701). . Here, it is determined whether or not the state in which the ball is detected by the ball entry detection switch (not shown) provided in the first ball entry port 64 continues for three times of the timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed. Is determined to determine the winning (ball entry) of the ball to the first winning port (first ball entry port) 64. In this way, it is determined that a ball has won (entered) only when it is determined that the ball has been continuously detected for a predetermined period (a period (4 milliseconds) in which the timer interrupt process is executed three times). With this configuration, for example, even if a small amount of electricity generated by the flow of the sphere becomes noise and the sensor (ball entry detection switch) is turned on instantaneously (in a state where the passage of the sphere is detected), The process can be executed by distinguishing between an event generated by noise (momentary on) and an event generated by passing a ball (on for a predetermined period).

  When the control for determining that the ball has entered is used when the ball is continuously detected for a predetermined period, as described above, when the period for determining that the ball is detected is shorter than the predetermined period ( In addition to instantaneous detection due to noise), it is preferable to determine that an abnormality has occurred even when the upper limit period is longer than a predetermined period, and not to determine that a ball has won (entered). Thus, even if noise is generated for a long period of time due to an illegal operation, it is possible to suppress the erroneous operation of winning (entering) the ball.

  Then, when it is determined that the ball has won (entered) the first entrance 64 (S701: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b (the number N1 of variable display suspensions in the special symbol) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  In the processing of S703, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203b is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (3 or less) (S703: Yes), the special symbol The value (N1) of the 1 reserved ball counter 203b is incremented by 1 (S704), and the reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b changed by the calculation. Is set (S705).

  The reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in a later-described main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. In the external output process (S1501), it is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the pending ball number command in the processing of S705, the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37), Each value of the small hit type counter C5 is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S706). In the process of S706, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Then, in the process of S707, a prefetch process is executed (S707). Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no winning (ball entry) to the first winning port (ball entry port) 64 (S701: No), or when the first winning port (ball entry port) 64 is won (ball entry). Even if it is determined that there is a value (S701: Yes), if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is not less than 4 (is 4) (S703: No), S707 is performed. Shifts to the prefetching process.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the winning information of the first special symbol (right to execute a lottery) is configured to be able to be held and stored up to a predetermined number (4), and the winning information of the second special symbol is stored. Although it is configured not to be able to hold and store the winning information of the first special symbol and the winning information of the second special symbol, it is also possible to use a configuration in which the holding information can be held with a predetermined number as an upper limit. In this case, the processing described above with reference to FIG. 43 may be configured to be executed also for the winning information of the second special symbol (second winning opening (ball entrance) 640).

  Also, when using a configuration in which winning information can be held and stored in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the upper limit number of the winning information for each special symbol that can be held and stored is unified (for example, 4). Alternatively, a different value may be set as the upper limit number (for example, 4 for the first special symbol and 2 for the second special symbol). In addition, the upper limit number of holdable balls can be set with respect to a value obtained by adding the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (the number of reserved balls) and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (the number of reserved balls). May be.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a description will be given of the prefetching process (S707), which is one of the start winning processes (see S105 in FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S707).

  In the pre-reading process (S707 in FIG. 44), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning (ball entry) in the first winning port (ball entry port) 64 (S801). If it is determined that there is no new winning in the first entrance 64 (S801: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a new prize in the first winning opening (entrance opening) 64 (S801: Yes), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, the special figure 1 big hit type selection table 202b1, and the variation pattern table 202d The lottery result, the jackpot type, and the variation pattern are acquired in advance based on (normal variation pattern table 202d1 or time reduction variation pattern table 202d2) (S802).

  Next, the winning information command including the jackpot determination result, the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern acquired in the process of S802 is set (S803), and the process ends. The winning information command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in an external output process (S1501) of a main process (see FIG. 51) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 executes a winning information related process (see FIG. 57), which will be described later, and sets the display mode of various effects executed by the third symbol display device 81. A process for (temporarily) updating the progress of the time reduction state is performed in advance. Then, the winning information included in the winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the ordinary symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol variation process (S106). The normal symbol change process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and the second symbol change display and the change time, which are performed by the second symbol display device 83, are transmitted to the second entrance 640. This is processing for controlling the opening operation and the opening time of the accompanying electric accessory 640a.

  In the normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 45), first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is a normal symbol (second symbol) (S901). As the hit during the normal symbol (the second symbol), the control for opening / closing the electric accessory 640 a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is made on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of being included. As a result of the discrimination, when it is determined that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S901: Yes), a new normal symbol change (lottery) cannot be started (executed). This processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S901: No), then it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (normal symbol changing). When it is determined (S902), it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not fluctuating (ordinary symbol fluctuating) (S902: No), that is, the variation of the ordinary symbol even while the present is hitting the ordinary symbol If it is determined that there is no such state, that is, a state in which a new ordinary symbol change (lottery) can be started (executed), a second random number counter is stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area. Is determined (S903).

  In the process of S903, when it is determined that the second random number counter is not stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area, that is, when it is determined that there is no winning information of the ordinary symbol to be newly executed, (S903: No), this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second random number counter C4 is stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area (S903: Yes), the stored value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired (S904). .

  Then, based on the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the processing of S904 and the random number table 202c for a normal symbol (second), a lottery result of whether or not the symbol is a normal symbol is acquired (S905). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, Normally, it is determined that the design is out of place.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S905 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S906), and if it is determined that the lottery result is the hit of the ordinary symbol (S906: Yes), Is set (S907), and the process proceeds to S909. In the process of S907, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol of “」 ”is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S906 that the pattern is out of the ordinary pattern (S906: No), the display mode at the time of the out of pattern is set (S908), and the process proceeds to S909. In the process of S908, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol “x” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the process proceeds to S909.

  When the processing of S907 or S908 is completed, in the processing of S909, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state (S909). If it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state ( (S909: Yes), the variation time of the ordinary symbol in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S910), and then the ordinary symbol short variation flag 203q is set to ON (S911), and this processing ends. . On the other hand, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time reduction state (normal state) (S909: No), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds ( S912), and terminates this processing.

  The normal figure short fluctuation flag 202q set to ON in the processing of S911 is a configuration for temporarily storing whether or not the gaming state at the timing when the lottery of the ordinary symbols is executed is the time reduction state. Thus, the change of the symbol is normally stopped and displayed, and is referred to when setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. Thus, the opening operation content of the electric accessory 640a can be changed according to the game state between the timing of starting the change of the normal symbol (lottery) and the timing of the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a.

  In the present embodiment, the game state at the start (execution) timing of the change (lottery) of the ordinary symbol is configured to be temporarily stored using a dedicated flag, but other configurations may be used. For example, in the game state storage means capable of always storing the currently set game state, when it is determined that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is a hit, the gaming state when the lottery of the ordinary symbol is executed is displayed. You may comprise so that the storage area for temporarily storing may be provided. Further, a means for constantly storing the period in which the normal state is set is provided, and the period stored in the unit (the period in which the normal state is set) is compared with the timing at which the normal symbol lottery is performed. By doing so, the game state at the timing when the normal symbol lottery is performed may be determined. In other words, any configuration may be used as long as it has a storage unit capable of storing the currently set game state and a storage unit capable of storing at least the game state set at a predetermined timing in the past.

  On the other hand, in the process of S902, when it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S902: Yes), the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S913). Note that the fluctuation time here is a time set beforehand in the second symbol display device 83 by the processing of S910 or the processing of S911 before the fluctuation display is started.

  In the processing of S913, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S913: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S913, when it is determined that the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S913: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S914). In the process of S914, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S907, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lighting). Display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the ordinary symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S908, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to In addition, the period in which the second symbol is stopped and displayed is longer than the period in which one spot is turned on in the blinking display (alternate display of “」 ”and“ X ”) indicating that the second symbol is changing. (Determined and displayed). This allows the player to easily understand that the second symbol has been stopped and displayed.

  When the stop display is set by the process of S914, when the second symbol display update process (S1508 in FIG. 51) of the main process (see FIG. 51) is executed next, the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 is performed. The display is terminated, and the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S907 or S908.

  When the process of S914 is completed, next, when the variation display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, the lottery result (this time) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (FIG. 45, S106) It is determined whether or not the lottery result is a normal symbol hit (S915). When it is determined that the current lottery result is out of the ordinary symbol (S915: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a winning of a normal symbol (S915: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the ordinary figure short fluctuation flag 203q is set to ON (S916).

  In the process of S916, when it is determined that the ordinary figure short variation flag 203q is not set to ON (set to OFF), that is, the gaming state at the timing when the lottery (variation) of the current ordinary symbol is started is changed. If it is determined that it is in the normal state (S916: No), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S921), and the process proceeds to S920. I do.

  On the other hand, in the process of S916, when it is determined that the ordinary figure short variation flag 203q is set to ON, that is, it is determined that the gaming state at the time when the lottery (fluctuation) of the current ordinary symbol is started is the time reduction state. If it has been done (S916: Yes), the normal figure short fluctuation flag 203q is set to off (S917), and then it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the time reduction state (medium time reduction) (S918).

  In the process of S918, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the time saving state (S918: No), the gaming state at the timing when the lottery (fluctuation) of the current ordinary symbol is started is the normal state, and the current gaming state ( Since the timing of setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a) is in the normal state, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 1 second. (S921), and the process proceeds to S920.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the time saving state (S918: Yes), the timing at which the lottery (fluctuation) of the current ordinary symbol is started, and the current gaming state (opening operation of the electric accessory 640a). Are set to the time saving state, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to two seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to two (the electric accessory 640a). Is set (S919), and the process proceeds to S920.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the lottery (variation) of the ordinary symbol is executed and the timing at which the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a executed based on the winning of the ordinary symbol are set. Only when both are in the time saving state, the opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a.

  With this configuration, it is possible to strictly set the conditions for setting the opening operation that is advantageous to the player. For example, in the state where the normal state is set as the game state, the lottery of the normal symbol ( Even if the time reduction state is set until the fluctuation time (30 seconds) of the ordinary symbol is completed, long opening is set as the operation of the electric accessory 640a. There is nothing. Similarly, in the normal symbol fluctuation (lottery) executed in the state where the time saving state is set, a win is won, and the normal state is set as the gaming state until the fluctuation of the normal symbol stops. Also in this case, the long opening of the electric accessory 640a is not set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous privilege (long opening of the electric accessory 640a) for the player.

  Further, in the state where the normal state is set as the gaming state, the long-opening of the electric accessory 640a can be suppressed, so that a lottery of a special symbol (second special symbol) advantageous to the player is easily executed. The time period can be limited during working hours. In the present embodiment, the game state at the timing when the lottery (change) of the ordinary symbol is started and the timing when the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set are determined, and the game state set at each timing is determined. Although the above-described configuration is used as the configuration for setting the opening operation content of the electric accessory 640a based on the configuration, other configurations may be used.

  For example, the opening operation that is disadvantageous to the player only when the timing of starting the lottery (change) of the ordinary symbol and the timing of setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a are both disadvantageous to the player (S921 in FIG. 45). (Open operation set in step S919 in FIG. 45) may be set (open operation set in step S919 in FIG. 45). With this configuration, a privilege (long opening) that is advantageous to the player is provided even for a normal symbol change executed before and after the time saving state that is a gaming state advantageous to the player is set. Therefore, the time saving state can be made more advantageous for the player.

  As described above, while the time saving state is set as the gaming state, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol becomes very short from “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the case where the normal state is set, and further, Since the release period of the second winning opening 640 is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 → 2 seconds × 2 times”, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640. In addition, in this embodiment, when the big hit game is executed, the time saving state is configured to end, so that the normal state is set during the big hit game. On the other hand, when the small hitting game is executed, the time reduction state is set continuously unless the time reduction end condition is satisfied. During the winning game, the V winning device 650 is opened in the small winning game, and the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long time, and balls to a plurality of winning openings (V winning opening 650a, the second winning opening 640). This is a specific period during which it is easy to enter the ball.

  By using such a configuration, for example, instead of the configuration of the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2, an electric accessory 640 a and a second ball entrance 640 are provided in the information of the V winning device 650, and the small hitting game is performed. It is good to configure so that the ball enters the two winning ports (V winning device 650a, the second ball entry port 640), so that the number of prize balls obtainable during the small hit game can be increased. Thus, it is possible to give a more advantageous privilege to the player.

  Returning to FIG. 45, the description will be continued. In the processing of S920, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set (S920), and this processing ends. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S920, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1506) of the main process (see FIG. 51) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S921 or the processing of S919 are completed.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 37), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, the process is for acquiring the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 and storing the value in the execution area.

  In the through gate passage process (S107 in FIG. 46), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S1001). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes (S101). Note that the content of this detection is the same as the process of S701 of the above-described start winning process (see FIG. 43), and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, it is determined that the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S1001: Yes), and it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing the ordinary symbol (S1002). When it is determined that the display mode of the two-symbol display device 83 is normally changing (S1002: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1002, when it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not in a normal symbol variation (S1002: No), it is determined whether or not the current symbol is a normal symbol. S1003). As a result of the discrimination, when it is determined that the player is hitting a normal symbol (S1003: Yes), the present process is terminated. If it is determined that the normal symbol is not hit (S1003: No), it is the timing at which a new variation (execution) of the ordinary symbol can be selected by lottery, and thus the timing is updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt process (S101). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area (S1004). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the V entrance passage process (S108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the V entrance passage process (S108) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

  In the V entrance passage process (S108), first, it is determined whether or not the ball passage sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 is on (S1101). In the process of S1101, if it is determined that the ball passing sensor 650c1 is not turned on (S1101: No), the present process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1101 that the ball passage sensor 650c1 is on (S1101: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V winning opening 650a is being opened (S1102).

  In the processing of S1102, when it is determined that the opening period of the V winning opening 650a is being performed (S1102: Yes), a V entrance passage command is set (S1103), and this processing ends. The V-entrance passage command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V entrance passage command, the sound lamp control device 113 counts the spheres that have passed through the V entrance and transmits a command for executing an effect based on the passage of the V entrance to the display control device 114. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect during the small hit game based on the ball entering the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 28).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not during the opening period of the V winning opening 650a (S1102: No), it means that the ball has entered the V winning device 650 although it is not a small hit game, so an error command is issued. It is set (S1104). After that, the flow path solenoid 209a is set to ON (S1105), and this processing ends.

  Next, the V-pass process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the V passage processing (S109). This V passing process (S109) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

  In the V passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the V passage flag 203j is on (S1201). In the processing of S1201, if it is determined that the V passing flag 203j is ON (S1201: Yes), the processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1201 that the V passing flag 203j is not on (S1201: No), it is determined whether or not there is V passing (S1202). That is, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3 of the V winning device 650. In the process of S1202, when it is determined that there is no V passing (S1202: No), the process ends as it is.

  In the processing of S1202, when it is determined that there is V passing (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V passing effective period is in progress (S1203). If it is determined that it is during the V pass effective period (S1203: Yes), the V pass jackpot type value stored in the V pass jackpot type storage area 203h is acquired (S1204), and the acquired V pass jackpot type is acquired. Is set to ON (S1205). Then, a V-pass command is set (S1206).

  Next, the V passing flag 203j is set to ON (S1207). Thereafter, the counter 203k during time reduction is set to 0 (S1208), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1203 that the vehicle is not in the V passage validity period (S1203: No), an error command is set (S1209), and this processing ends. When the game ball passes through the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3 during the V passing effective period, it is considered that the ball has been illegally won to the V winning switch 650e3. In this case, by setting an error command in the process of S1209, an error is output and an illegal action can be detected.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing (S1301). I do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by MPU 201 in main control device 110 when power is applied to main control device 110. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up processing, first, an initial setting accompanying power-on is executed (S1401). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. (S1402). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1403).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 8) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1404). If it is turned on (S1404: Yes), the process proceeds to S1415. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1404: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1405), and if not, it is not stored (S1405: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the process also proceeds to S1415 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1405: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1406). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1407: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S1415 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S1515 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1415, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1415). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state where game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (S1416, S1417).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S1416, S1417) is executed. Similarly, the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1416, S1417) is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S1416, S1417), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1416), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1417). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1410.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1404: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S1405: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S1405: Yes), S1407: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1408). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S1409), and the process proceeds to S1410. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the processing of S1410, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the value of the counter 203k during working hours is read (S1411), and a status command based on the read value is set (S1412). Then, the flow path solenoid 209a is turned off (S1413). After that, an interrupt is permitted (S1414), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the main processing. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each of the processes in S1501 to S1508 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process in S1511 and S1512 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process (see FIG. 51), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), output data such as a command stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is output to the sub side. An external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1501). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 37) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. In addition, the special figure 1 pending ball number command set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 39) and the start winning process (see FIG. 43) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing (S1501), a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command (S1602), the number of rounds command (S1607), and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (S1504 in FIG. 52) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1611). In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1502). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed (S1502), the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1503). Then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot effect is performed. In addition, a jackpot control process for opening or closing the corresponding winning port (the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650) is executed (S1504). . In the jackpot control process (S1504), the winning port (the specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650) corresponding to each round of the jackpot state is opened, and the corresponding winning port ( The maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 has elapsed, or the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or V of the first variable winning device 65). It is determined whether a predetermined number of balls have won the V winning opening 650a) of the winning device 650. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed. The opening and closing of the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1504) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 51), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

  Next, when the special symbol is in the small winning state, the execution of various effects according to the small winning and the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening of the V winning device 650). The small hit control process for opening or closing 650a) is executed (S1505). In the small hit control process (S1505), the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario, and the corresponding winning opening ( The maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 has elapsed, or the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or V of the first variable winning device 65). It is determined whether a predetermined number of balls have won the V winning opening 650a) of the winning device 650. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed. In the present embodiment, the small hit control process (S1505) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 51), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is executed (S1506). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started when the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S920 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45). The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S919 or the processing of S921 in the normal symbol variation processing are ended.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b (see FIG. 2) is executed (S1507). In the first symbol display update process (S1507), when the variation pattern is set by the process of S306, S310 or S312 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39), the variation display according to the variation pattern is performed. The process starts with one symbol display device 37a, 37b. In the present embodiment, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the LED of the first symbol display device 37a, 37b is red until the fluctuation time elapses from the start of the fluctuation. Is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. Is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

  The main process (see FIG. 51) is executed every 4 msec. However, if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process (S1507), when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S306, S310, or S312 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39) ends, the first symbol variation is started. The variable display executed on the symbol display devices 37a and 37b (see FIG. 2) is ended, and the stopped symbols are displayed in the display mode set by the processing of S305, S309, or S311 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39). (1st symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1508). In the second symbol display updating process (S1508), when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S910 or the process of S911 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 45), the variation is performed by the second symbol display device 83. Start display. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. In the second symbol display updating process (S1508), when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S914 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 45), the second symbol display device 83 The variation display being executed is ended, and the stopped symbol (second symbol) is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S907 or the process of S908 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 45). Stop display (lit display).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1509). If power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1509: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1510). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1510: Yes), the process proceeds to S1501, and the processes from S1501 onward are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1510: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1511, S1512).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1511). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when each counter value reaches the maximum value (999, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1502 (S1512).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1501 to S1508 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time (S1511), the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter are updated. CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S1509, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1509: Yes), the power is turned off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 49 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S1513 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1513), and a power-off command indicating that power has been cut off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S1514). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1515), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1516), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the process of S1509 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to game state changes performed in S1501 to S1508, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1511 and S1512 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, the information of the occurrence of power interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S1501. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1501 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the stack pointer is not reset in the initialization process (S1401). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1501. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1504) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1504). The jackpot control process (S1504) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 51). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects corresponding to the jackpot and corresponding winning ports are performed. This is a process for opening or closing the (special winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650).

  In the jackpot control process (FIG. 52, S1504), first, it is determined whether it is the timing to start the special symbol jackpot (S1601). Specifically, the determination is made by analyzing the setting status of the big hit start flag 203c. This big hit start flag 203c is set to ON when the big hit start is set by the processing of S215 of the special symbol change processing (see FIG. 38) (S216). In the process of S1601, if it is determined that it is the jackpot start timing (if it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203c is ON) (S1601: Yes), an opening command is set (S1602), and then the jackpot start flag 203c is set to off (S1603), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1601, if it is determined that the timing is not the start timing of the special symbol jackpot (the jackpot start flag 203c is set to off) (S1601: No), then the present is the jackpot. It is determined (S1604). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 display a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. This includes a period during the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game, and corresponds to a period in which the big hit flag 203d is set to ON. In the process of S1604, when it is determined that the special symbol is not in the big hit (the big hit flag 203d is off) (S1604: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1604, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the big hit (the big hit flag 203d is set to ON) (S1604: Yes), various processes executed at a plurality of timings during the big hit Is performed (S1605 to S1612) to determine whether it is time to execute.

  In the process of S1604, when it is determined that the present is a big hit (S1604: Yes), it is determined whether the present is the start timing of a new round (S1605). In the processing of S1605, it is determined whether or not the current timing is the start timing of a new round based on the opening scenario set corresponding to the current big hit game. If it is determined in the processing of S1605 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1605: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V) is determined based on the opening scenario table 202g. The winning port 650a of the winning device 650 is opened (S1606), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1607). After the round number command is set, this process ends.

  The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used as an audio lamp in the external output processing (S1501) of the main processing (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it transmits a display round number command corresponding to the round number to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, the jackpot continues (for example, when the number of special symbol changes (lottery times) during the execution of the plurality of jackpot games is less than 50, or during the jackpot game). When the time-saving state is repeatedly executed (during a period in which the time-saving state is repeatedly set), the number of rounds of the jackpot game continuously executed on the sound lamp control device 113 side is accumulated and displayed. . That is, the sound ramp control device 113 sets a period (continuous chan period) for determining a period in which the jackpot is continuously executed based on the status command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. And when a new jackpot game is executed during the period set by the period setting means, the number of round games (round number) in the previously executed jackpot game is changed to the number of round games (round) of the new jackpot game. ), And a display round number command corresponding to the cumulative number of rounds accumulated by the round number accumulating means is transmitted to the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game is transmitted. And means for controlling the display of the accumulated number of rounds. Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize that the jackpot has continued for a long time, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1605 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1605: No), then the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V of the V winning device 650). It is determined whether the closing condition of the winning opening 650a) is satisfied (S1608). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650), or When a predetermined number of balls (for example, a total of 10 balls) are won in the winning device 65 or the V winning device 650, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the process of S1608, when it is determined that the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is satisfied (S1608: Yes), the corresponding winning is established. The mouth (the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed, and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is not satisfied (S1608: No), then, It is determined whether the present time is the start timing of the ending effect (S1610). The start timing of the ending effect is that the 15th round (final round game preset in the current jackpot game) is completed, the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed, and the waiting time (the present embodiment, the ball opening time) When 3 seconds have elapsed, it is determined as the start timing of the ending effect. The start timing of the ending effect and the end timing described later are also determined based on the opening scenario (see S214 in FIG. 38) set when the jackpot is won.

  In the process of S1610, when it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1610: Yes), the ending command is set (S1611), and the process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201 in the audio ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1610 that it is not the ending effect start timing (S1610: No), it is determined in the process of S1612 whether the ending effect is the end timing (S1612). In the process of S1612, when it is determined that the timing is not the end timing of the ending effect (S1612: No), the process ends.

  In the process of S1612, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1612: Yes), it is next determined whether the jackpot type being executed is the jackpot A to the jackpot D (S1613). In the process of S1613, the jackpot type stored in the storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the set jackpot type is read.

  Next, based on the read jackpot type, the corresponding time-saving termination condition is set using the time-saving giving table 202e (S1614). More specifically, if the jackpot type is a jackpot A (15R hourly jackpot) or a jackpot B (5R hourly jackpot), 100 is set in the hourly time counter 203k, 1 is set in the small hit A counter 203m, and the small hit B counter is set. 3 is set to 203n, and 5 is set to the small hit C counter p. When the jackpot type is the jackpot D (15R hourly jackpot), 100 is set in the hourly counter 203k, 2 is set in the small hit A counter 203m, 10 is set in the small hit B counter 203n, and 50 is set in the small hit C counter p. Are set respectively.

  When the jackpot type is the jackpot C (5R time-saving no-big-hit), the jackpot type is such that the time-saving state is not set after the end of the jackpot, so that the time-saving medium counter 203k, the small hit A counter 203m, the small hit B counter 203n, and the small hit The configuration is such that a value (time saving termination condition) is not set in each of the C counters p. After the above-described processing of S1614 is completed, a time-saving setting information command for indicating information corresponding to the values of various counters indicating the time-saving ending conditions set in the processing of S1614 is set (S1615).

  The time saving setting information command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used as a voice in the external output processing (S1501) of the main processing (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the time-saving setting information command, the sound ramp control device 113 sets the time-saving information indicating the time-saving ending condition of the current time-saving state in the time-saving information updating area 223g and the temporary time-saving information updating area 223i (see S2603 in FIG. 60). . Based on the time saving information set here and the update information of the time saving state updated based on the change of the special symbol (lottery), the remaining number of times of the time saving state (remaining condition) is determined, and based on the remaining number of times. Various effect modes are displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1615 is completed, next, a status command corresponding to the gaming state set after the big hit is set (S1616), the big hit end is set (S1617), and the big hit flag 203d is set to off (S1618). ), End this processing.

  As described above, the present embodiment is configured such that the time-saving state termination condition can be set differently according to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the case where the jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol is satisfied as the end condition (time saving end condition) of the time saving state, as compared with the case where the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol. It is configured to set a difficult time-saving end condition.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with an added value when the player wins one game instead of two games during a right-handed game while the time saving state is set.

  In the present embodiment, the same time-saving termination condition is set for the jackpot types (jackpot A and jackpot B) set when the jackpot is won by lottery of the first special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a time-saving termination condition that is more difficult to be established when the jackpot type is the jackpot A may be set. In addition, a part of the plurality of time saving termination conditions may be set so that the jackpot A is more easily established, and the others are set so that the jackpot B is more easily established.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 21D, in the present embodiment, as the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state, the number-of-times-of-variation termination condition regarding the number of times the special symbol changes (the end based on the value of the Condition) and a winning number end condition (an end condition based on the value of each small hit counter) relating to the number of wins of the small hit as a result of the special symbol lottery.

  In addition, as the winning number end condition, an end condition corresponding to a plurality of small hit types set at the time of the small hit winning is set. With this configuration, the small hitting game corresponding to which small hitting type is executed until the number of times of the change of the special symbol reaches the predetermined number of times (100 times), and how much more is left. Makes it difficult to understand whether the time-saving state ends.

  In the present embodiment, only the number of times of change of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is set to “100” as the change number end condition, but it differs according to the type of the big hit. A change frequency end condition may be set. In addition, a first special symbol variation measuring unit that measures only the number of variations of the first special symbol is provided as a variation number termination condition, and the condition is satisfied when the measurement result of the first special symbol variation measuring unit becomes a predetermined result. A second special symbol variation measuring means for measuring only the first special symbol variation ending condition and the number of variations of the second special symbol is provided, and is established when the measurement result of the second special symbol variation measuring device becomes a predetermined result. A second special symbol change end condition may be provided.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as the winning number end condition, an end condition based on the measurement result of the counter (small hit A counter 203m, small hit B counter 203n, small hit C counter 203p) corresponding to each small hit type is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to simply set a time-saving termination condition that is established based on a value obtained by simply summing up the number of wins of small hits, or a plurality (three or more) of small hit types. A means for summing up and counting the number of times a small hitting game in which a predetermined number (two) of small hitting types are set, and setting an end condition based on the measurement result of the means. You may.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the time saving end condition is set for all the small hit types that can be set at the time of the small hit winning. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even if it is done, the small hitting type Z may be set as the small hitting type where the time saving end condition cannot be satisfied. Accordingly, even if the player knows that the small hit has been won during the time saving state, it is difficult to determine whether the time saving state is approaching the end due to the current small hit.

  In addition, when the small hit type Z described above is provided, it is preferable to execute a small hit game having the same content as the small hit game for which the winning number termination condition is set. With this configuration, even if the game content of the small hit game executed during the time saving state is identified, it is difficult to determine whether the time saving state is nearing the end due to the current small hit game. .

  In this manner, by determining that the small hit has been won, or by determining the game content of the small hit game executed based on the winning of the small hit, that is, the game of the pachinko machine 10 By judging the contents, it is difficult to grasp the progress of the time-saving state (whether it is approaching the end), and the effect of suggesting (notifying) the progress of the time-saving state (whether it is approaching the end) Therefore, it is possible to give a strong interest to the player. In the present embodiment, the control contents of the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 will be described in detail in the control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 described later.

  Next, the small hit control process (S1505) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the small hit control process (S1505). The small hit control process (S1505) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 51), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the small hit state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the small hit and response. This is a process for opening or closing a winning port (V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650).

  In the small hit control process (FIG. 53, S1505), first, it is determined whether the small hit of the special symbol is started (S1701). Specifically, if the small hit start flag 203f is set to ON in the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 40) in S404, it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is started. In the processing of S1701, when the small hit of the special symbol is started (S1701: Yes), an opening command is set (S1702). Then, the small hit start flag 203f is set to off (S1703), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1701, when the small hit of the special symbol is not started (S1701: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a small hit (S1704). During the special symbol small hits, while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol small hits (including during the special symbol small hit game), Includes a special symbol during the predetermined time after the small hit game ends. The determination in S1704 is made by analyzing whether the small hitting flag 303g is set to ON. In the processing of S1704, when it is determined that the special symbol is not in the small hit (S1704: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1704 that the special symbol is being hit (S1704: Yes), the processing of S1705 is executed. In the process of S1705, it is determined whether it is the V winning opening opening timing (S1705). In the processing of S1705, when it is determined that it is the V winning opening opening timing (S1705: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario table 202g (S1705: Yes). In S1706, it is determined whether this time is the fifth or tenth opening timing (S1707).

  In the processing of S1707, if it is determined that this time is not the fifth or tenth opening timing (S1707: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1707 that this time is the fifth or tenth opening timing (S1707: Yes), then, in the processing of S1708, it is determined whether the V flag 203i is set to ON. (S1708) If it is determined that it is not on (it is off) (S1708: No), the small hit type stored in the small hit type storage area 203e is read (S1709), and then the read small hit is read. An instruction command corresponding to the type is set (S1710).

  The instruction command set in the process of S1710 includes, for example, a small hit (for example, small hit A) in which the ball easily passes through a specific area during the small hit game as the small hit type, and a ball specified during the small hit game. An instruction command for changing the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set according to the small hits (for example, the small hits B and C) that are difficult to pass through the area.

  Specifically, when the small hit A that easily hits two types during the small hit game is set as the small hit type, a display mode for forcibly executing a right-handed game by the player (FIG. 16 (a) is set, and thereafter, when the ball passes through the specific area, a display mode (see FIG. 16 (b)) indicating that two hits have been successfully obtained is displayed. ing. In this way, by providing different contents when the instruction command is set according to the degree of expectation for passing the ball through the specific area in the small hitting game to be executed, the player is provided with an effect that does not cause discomfort can do.

  Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. In the process of S1711, when it is determined that the current time is not the closing timing of the V winning opening 650a (S1711: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S1713). In the process of S1713, when it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1713: Yes), the ending command is set (S1714), and the process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201 in the audio ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1713 that it is not the ending effect start timing (S1713: No), it is determined in the process of S1715 whether the ending effect is the end timing (S1715). In the process of S1715, when it is determined that the timing is not the end timing of the ending effect (S1715: No), the process ends.

  In the processing of S1715, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1715: Yes), it is determined whether the V flag 203i is set to ON (S1716), and when it is determined that the V flag 203i is set to ON. (S1716: Yes), sets an open scenario based on the jackpot type corresponding to the contents of the V flag 203i (S1717), sets the jackpot start flag 203c and the jackpot medium flag 203d to ON (S1718), and sets the V flag 203i. It is set to off (S1719), the V passing flag 203j is set to off (S1720), the small hitting flag 203g is set to off (S171721), and this processing ends.

<Control processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 54 to 63, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 54, a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S2061). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the current startup processing is caused by a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”) (S2118 in FIG. 55). It is determined whether or not it is started during the execution of (S2061). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 55, when receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (S2115 in FIG. 55: Yes), the sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S2118. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S2062 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S2062: No), the current startup processing is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power-off processing in S2118 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2063).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2066. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data corruption in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2063: Yes), the process proceeds to S2064 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2063: No), the flow shifts to S2068.

  If the start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2063: Yes), and the flow shifts to S2064. On the other hand, this start-up process is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S2118 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the processing is started by the user, since the keyword of “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2063: No), and the flow shifts to S2068.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S2062: Yes), this startup processing is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S2118, the audio lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S2064, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the processing of S2064, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S2064). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2065: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S2066). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2065: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2067), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the lamp display device 227. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S2068, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2068). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off processing in S2118 is executed (see S2117 in FIG. 55). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S2118 is executed, the process starting at S2068 with the power-off flag turned on is the instantaneous start-up process. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S2118 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2068: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio ramp control device 113 (S2069), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2070). The permission is set (S2071), and the process proceeds to the main processing. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason that the process of step S2068 is performed with the power-off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of step S2068 is performed via steps S2064 to S2066. This is the case where the processing has been reached or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like and started. Therefore, in such a case (S2068: No), the process skips S2069, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S2070, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2070), and sets the interrupt permission. Then (S2071), and shifts to the main processing.

  It should be noted that the clearing process of S2069 is skipped in the case where the process proceeds from S2064 to the process of S2068 via the process of S2068, and all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S2064. When the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control unit 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, thereby saving the audio ramp control unit 113. Can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the start of the main process or the current process of S2101 (S2101). If not (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2113 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2112. In the processing of S2101, whether or not 1 ms has elapsed is determined mainly in S2102 to S2112, which is processing relating to display (production), whereas editing is not necessary in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , S2113, and the variable display setting process in S2114 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S2113 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S2114 in a short cycle, a command received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable effect without delay.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S2103 to S2112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2102). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the lamp display device 227 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S2104). . In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S2105 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S2105, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, settings such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen are performed, and the settings are displayed as commands. Sent to device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process for turning on a hold lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 number-of-holds ball counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S2107). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame buttons 22 and 23 (hereinafter, referred to as the frame button 22) operated by the player to enhance the effect of the production are performed. This is a process for setting to perform an effect corresponding to the case where the input of No. 22 is confirmed. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set to the display control device 114.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S2108), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S2109, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  After the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110), various counter update processes (S2111) are executed. The various counter updating process is a process for updating the values of a plurality of counters of the effect counter 223e provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113. That is, in the present embodiment, the value of each counter is updated every millisecond in the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113. Here, a method of updating a plurality of counters included in the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, when the effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set, the value of a plurality of counters is referred to. In such a configuration, for example, a configuration in which the values of all the counters are updated by 1 every time the various counter updating process (S2111) is executed, that is, if the updating method of each counter is unified, each counter is updated. Since the condition is synchronized, it becomes impossible to give a random effect to the effect mode to be set, so that the updated value of each counter is not synchronized.

  After finishing the various counter updating process (S2111), next, the effect updating process (S2112) is executed. The effect update process (S2112) is for performing a process for changing the contents of the effect currently being executed (variable display that has already been set) during the effect execution.

  After the effect update process (S2112), a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S2113). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the process proceeds to S2114. In the process of S2114, a variable display setting process is executed (S2114). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the variable display setting process (S2114) is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2115). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2115 (S2115: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S2117), and the power-off processing is executed (S2118). After the execution of the power-off processing, the power-off processing-in-progress flag is turned off (S2119), and thereafter, the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2115 (S2115: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2116), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2116: No), the process returns to S2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2116: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call a hall clerk or the like to request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, the command determination process (S2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S2113). This command determination process (S2113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process (S2113 in FIG. 56), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and analyzed. It is determined whether a variation pattern command has been received (S2201). When a variation pattern command is received (S2201: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2202), and a variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S2203). Other processing according to the command is executed (S2217), and the process returns to the main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 62) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S2201: No), it is next determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2204). When the stop type command is received (S2204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2205), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S2206). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 62) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S2204: No), then it is determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2207). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S2207: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110 (special) The number of times N1 of the variable display in the symbol is retained is extracted and stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2208). In the process of S2208, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b is set. After the end of the process of S2208, the above-described process of S2217 is executed, and the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning) or when a special symbol is drawn. Therefore, every time a start winning is detected or every time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is set to the special value of the main control device 110 by the processing of S2208. It can be adjusted to the value of the symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is shifted from the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start winning is detected. At the time of drawing a special symbol or a special symbol, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110. When the process of S2208 is executed, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control apparatus 114, the number of reserved balls according to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the processing of S2207, when the command of the number of pending balls has not been received (S2207: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2209). When it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S2209: Yes), a winning information related process is executed (S2210). Next, the process of S2117 is performed, and the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the contents of the winning information related processing (S2210) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the content of the winning information related processing (S2210). In the winning information-related processing (S2210), it is determined whether or not to execute a temporary winning effect based on the winning information (variation type) included in the winning information command received this time and the current game situation. Is executed.

  When the prize information related processing (S2210) is executed, first, the information stored in the gaming state storage area 223f provided in the RAM 223 is read (S2301). Then, it is determined whether the gaming state read in the processing of S2301 is during working hours (S2302). If it is determined that working hours are working (S2302: Yes), the temporary hit determination flag 223h is turned on. It is determined whether there is (S2303). In the process of S2303, if it is determined that the provisional contact determination flag 223h is not on (that is, it is off) (S2303: No), the process proceeds to S2304 and whether the provisional time reduction end flag 223j is on. Is determined (S2304). In the process of S2304, when it is determined that the provisional time reduction end flag 223j is not on (is off) (S2304: No), the process shifts to S2305 to hit the prize information received from the main control device 110 this time. It is determined whether there is information (S2305).

  On the other hand, in the process of S2303 described above, it is determined that the provisional contact determination flag 223h is ON (S2303: Yes), or when it is determined that the provisional time reduction end flag 223j is ON in the process of S2304 (S2304: Yes) skips the process of determining whether or not to execute the provisional hit effect, and proceeds to the process of S2311 described later.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the prize information-related processing (S2211), the provisional hit effect can be executed only when the read gaming state is during working hours. Therefore, the temporary hit effect can be executed only when the working hours are reduced, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, when the provisional hit determination flag 223h is ON, that is, when the provisional hit effect is already being executed, a new provisional hit effect is configured not to be set. Can be provided to the player until the end.

  Next, the processing for setting the provisional hit effect (S2305 to S2311) will be described. In the processing of S2305, it is determined whether or not the winning information received from the main control device 110 at this time has hit information (S2305). If it is determined that the received winning information is a win (S2305: Yes), the temporary hit determination flag 223h is set to ON (S2306), and the information in the temporary time reduction information update area 223i is updated (S2307). On the other hand, when it is determined that the received winning information is not the winning information (S2305: No), the process of S2306 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2307.

  Next, it is determined whether the information updated in the process of S2307 is a time saving end condition (S2308). If it is determined that the condition is the time reduction termination condition (S2308: Yes), the provisional time reduction termination flag 223j is set to ON (S2309). On the other hand, if it is determined that the condition is not the time reduction end condition (S2308: No), the process of S2309 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2310 described below. Next, a display prize information command corresponding to the information in the temporary time reduction information update area 223i is set (S2311), and the information of the received prize information command is stored in the corresponding prize information storage area 223a (S2311). To end. On the other hand, in the process of S2302, when it is determined that the read gaming state is not the time reduction (S2302: No), the display winning information command corresponding to the winning information received this time is set (S2312), and the above-described S2311 is executed. Is performed, and this process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2209, if no winning information command has been received (S2209: No), it is determined whether a hit-related command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2211). If a hit-related command is received (S22111: Yes), a hit-related process (S2212) is executed, the above-described process of S2217 is executed, and the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the content of the hit-related processing (S2212) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the content of the hit-related processing (S2212). The hit-related processing (S2212) is for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to a jackpot game or a small jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot or a small jackpot is won as a result of a special symbol lottery. The processing is performed, and processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 when a jackpot or small hit is won is executed.

  In the hit-related processing (S2212 in FIG. 58), first, it is determined whether the hit-related command received in the command determination processing (S2113) has received a big hit start command (S2401). If a jackpot start command is received (S2401: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S2402), the temporary hit determination flag 223h is set to off (S2403), and the process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect indicating the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2401 that the jackpot start command has not been received (S2401: No), it is determined whether a round number command has been received (S2404). If a round number command has been received (S2404: Yes), a display round number command is set based on the round number (S2405), and this processing ends. In the present embodiment, since the information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main control device 110 as the number of rounds command, the display round number command is set based on the received round number command. In order to reduce the amount of command data transmitted from the control device 110, if the main control device 110 is configured to transmit information indicating that a new round has been started as a round update command, the audio ramp control device When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of the 113, a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands is provided, and based on the value of the round number accumulation counter, the sound lamp control device 113 side executes the current round. Calculate the number and set the display round number command. Good.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2404, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S2404: No), it is determined whether a jackpot end command has been received (S2406). If a jackpot end command is received (S2406: Yes), a jackpot end command for display is set (S2407), and a jackpot end process (S2408) is executed. Details of the jackpot end processing (S2408) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2406, if it is determined that the big hit end command has not been received (S2406: No), it is determined whether a small hit start command has been received (S2409). If a small hit start command is received (S2409: Yes), a small hit start command for display is set (S2410), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the small hit start command has not been received (S2409: No), it is determined whether a small hit end command has been received (S2411). If the small hit end command is received (S2411: Yes), a small hit end command for display is set (S2412), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2411 that the small hit end command has not been received (S2411: No), it is determined whether a V entrance passage command has been received (S2413). When the V entrance passage command is received (S2413: Yes), the display V entrance passage command is set (S2414), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2413, when it is determined that the V entrance passage command has not been received (S2413: No), it is determined whether a V passage command has been received (S2415). If a V-pass command has been received (S2415: Yes), a display V-effect command for indicating an effect based on the entry of a ball into the V-switch 650e3 of the V winning device 650 is set (S2416), and the process ends. I do. On the other hand, in the process of S2415, when it is determined that the V-pass command has not been received (S2415: No), it is determined whether or not the instruction command has been received (S2417). If the instruction command has been received (S2417: Yes), the display instruction command is set (S2418), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the instruction command has not been received in the process of S2417 (S2417: No), the present process ends.

  In the present embodiment, a small hitting game in which the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened 12 times during the small hitting game is executed, and the V switch 650e3 is opened at the fifth or tenth opening timing. Is configured to output an instruction command when does not detect a ball (see S1609 in FIG. 54). When it is determined that the instruction command has been received, the third symbol display device 81 displays an emphasis guidance display mode (see FIG. 16 (a)) that emphasizes and guides the V winning device 650 to win a ball. Set a display instruction command to cause the display.

  Then, when the V switch 650e3 detects a ball in a state in which the emphasized guidance display mode is displayed, as shown in FIG. 16B, a display achievement for displaying the achievement display mode for blessing the player. Set the command. That is, in the present embodiment, if the small hitting game is executed and the opening operation of the V winning device 650 is executed, the ball is surely won to the V winning device 650 by performing the right-handed game. In addition, the ball that has won the V prize device 650 during the small hit game flows down to the special discharge channel 650e2 provided with the V switch 650e3. In spite of this configuration, if the V switch 650e3 determines that the ball has not been detected at the fifth opening timing of the opening / closing door 650f1, the third symbol is displayed when the small hitting game is started. The left-handed game is executed without noticing the right-handed guidance in the guidance display area Dm2 (see FIG. 10A) of the display device 81. Alternatively, the game may be stopped.

  In such a case, by changing the display for guiding right-handing displayed in the guidance display area Dm2 to a more emphasized display, it is possible to make it easier for the player to perform a right-handed game. Further, as a timing for displaying the emphasized guidance display mode (see FIG. 16A), when a right-handed game is performed after the emphasized guidance display mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the right-handed game is performed. The timing at which the shot ball reaches the V winning device 650 during the small hit game is set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player who has executed the right-handed game in accordance with the display of the emphasized guide display mode cannot make the ball flow down to the special discharge channel 650e2 during the small hit game.

  Here, the jackpot end processing (S2408), which is one of the win-related processing (S2212), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot end processing (S2408).

  In the big hit end processing (S2408 in FIG. 59), first, the information stored in the gaming state storage area 223f is read (S2501). Next, it is determined whether the information read in the process of S2501 is in the time saving state (S2502). When it is determined that the read information is in the time saving state (S2502: Yes), all the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is read (S2503). On the other hand, in the process of S2502, if it is determined that the read information is not in the time saving state (S2502: No), the process ends as it is.

  After executing the process of S2503, next, in the process of S2503, it is determined whether or not the read information has hit information (S2504). If it is determined that the hit information is present (S2504: Yes), a display continuous command is set (S2505). Next, the temporary hit determination flag 223h is set to ON (S2506), a display status display command is set (S2507), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2504 that there is no hit information in the read state (S2504: No), a display winning information command corresponding to the read state is set (S2508), and this processing ends.

  Returning to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2211 that no hit-related command has been received (S2211: No), it is next determined whether a stop command has been received (S2213). If it is determined that the stop command has been received (S2213: Yes), a stop display of the third symbol is set (S2214), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S2213: No), it is determined whether a command related to the reduction of time has been received (S2215). If it is determined that the command related to the time saving has been received (S2215: Yes), the time saving updating process (S2216) is executed, and this process ends. The details of the time saving update process (S2216) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2215 that the command related to the time reduction has not been received (S2215: No), the process according to the other command is executed (S2217), and this process ends.

  Next, the content of the time saving update process (S2216), which is one of the command determination processes (S2113), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving update process (S2216).

  In the time saving update process (S2216), first, the time saving related information received this time is analyzed (S2601). Next, in the processing of S2601, it is determined whether the analyzed time saving related information is time saving setting information (S2602). When it is determined that the time saving related information is the time saving setting information (S2602: Yes), the time saving information is set in the time saving information updating area 223g and the provisional time saving information updating area 223i (S2603), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2602, when it is determined that the time saving related information is not the time saving setting information (S2602: No), it is determined whether the time saving related information is the fluctuation information (S2604). When it is determined that the time saving related information is the fluctuation information (S2604: Yes), the information of the time saving information updating area 223g is updated (S2605). Next, the updated information is analyzed (S2606), and it is determined whether the time reduction lower limit flag 223k provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2607). If it is determined that the time reduction lower limit flag 223k is off (S2607: No), it is determined whether the number of remaining working hours is less than 30 (S2608). If it is determined that the number of remaining working hours is less than 30 (S2608: Yes), the time saving lower limit flag 223k is set to ON (S2609). On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2608 that the number of remaining working hours is greater than 30 (S2608: No), the present processing is terminated. If it is determined in the processing of S2607 that the time reduction lower limit flag 223k is ON (S2607: Yes), the processing of S2608 to S2609 is skipped, and the processing shifts to S2610 described later.

  Next, it is determined whether the number of remaining working hours is one (S2610). When it is determined that the number of remaining working hours is one (S2610: Yes), the before-hours saving end fluctuation flag 223n is set to ON (S2611), and the present process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2610, when it is determined that the number of remaining working hours is not one (S2610: No), it is determined whether the number of remaining working hours is 0 (S2612). If it is determined that the number of remaining working hours is 0 (S2612: Yes), the working hours lower limit flag 223k is set to off (S2613), and the working hours before end change flag 223n is set to off (S2614). Next, the provisional time reduction end flag 223j is set to off (S2615), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2612, when it is determined that the number of remaining working hours is not zero (S2612: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2604 that the time-saving related information is not the fluctuation information (S2604: No), it is determined whether the time-saving related information is the small hit information (S2616). When it is determined that the time saving related information is the small hit information (S2616: Yes), the small hit related information is updated (S2617), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2616, when it is determined that the time-saving related information is not the small hit information (S2616: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  Here, the small hit-related update processing (S2617) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the content of the small hit related update processing (S2617).

  In the small hit related update processing (S2617 in FIG. 61), first, the information in the time saving information update area 223g is updated (S2701). Next, the updated information is analyzed (S2702), and it is determined whether the quasi-end condition flag 223m is on (S2703). If it is determined that the quasi-end condition flag 223m is off (S2703: No), it is determined whether the quasi-end condition is satisfied (S2704). If it is determined that the end condition is satisfied (S2704: Yes), the quasi-end condition flag 223m is set to ON (S2705), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2703, when it is determined that the quasi-end condition flag 223m is ON (S2703: Yes), or when it is determined that the quasi-end condition is not satisfied in the process of S2704 (S2704: No), it is determined whether the termination condition is satisfied (S2706). If it is determined that the end condition is satisfied (S2706: Yes), the quasi-end condition flag 223m is set to off (S2707), and then the time reduction lower limit flag 223k is set to off (S2708). Next, the pre-hour reduction end variation flag 223n is set to off (S2709), the provisional time reduction end flag 223j is set to off (S2710), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2706 that the termination condition is not satisfied (S2706: No), the processing is terminated as it is.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S2114). The variable display setting process (S2114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. In order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variable effect, A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process (S2114 in FIG. 62), first, it is determined whether the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2801). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S2801: No), it is in a state where the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S2807. I do. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is on (S2801: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is set to off (S2802), and then, in the process of S2203 of the command determination process (see FIG. 56), The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the pattern command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S2803).

  Then, an effect setting process for setting an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the obtained change pattern type (S2804), and thereafter, a display change for notifying the display control device 114 is performed. A pattern command is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type and the state display mode set in the effect setting process, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2805). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started. When the processing in S2805 ends, the data in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S2806), and the flow shifts to the processing in S2807.

  Here, the contents of the effect setting process (S2804) executed in the process of S2804 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect setting process (S2804). This effect setting process (S2804) includes a prize information-related process (see S2210 in FIG. 57), and a fluctuation pattern set in the current fluctuation display setting process (S2114 in FIG. 62) when a provisional hit effect is set. This is a process for setting a temporary hit effect.

  When the effect setting processing (S2804) is executed, first, the information stored in the gaming state storage area 223f is read (S2901). Next, in the process of S2901, it is determined whether the read information is in a time saving state (S2902). If it is determined that the read information is not in the time saving state (S2902: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the read information is in the time saving state (S2902: Yes), it is determined whether the temporary contact determination flag 223h is on (S2903). If it is determined that the provisional collision determination flag 223h is ON (S2903: Yes), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of Z2903, when it is determined that the temporary hit determination flag 223h is not on (that is, it is off) (S2903: No), the information of the time saving information update area 223g is read (S2904). . Next, it is determined whether the before-hours-end change flag 223n is on (S2905). If it is determined that the pre-hour reduction end variation flag 223n is OFF (S2905: No), the ROM 222 is set based on the setting of the hour reduction lower limit flag 223k, the quasi-end condition flag 223m, the result of the hit / fail determination, and the value of the state effect counter 223o. The status display mode is selected using the status display selection table 222b provided in (2290). Next, a display command indicating the selected state display mode is set (S2908), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2905, when it is determined that the before-hours-end change flag 223n is ON (S2905: Yes), the finalization provided in the ROM 222 is performed based on the result of the success / failure determination and the value of the state effect counter 223o. The status display mode is selected using the status display selection table (S2907). Next, the processing of S2908 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

  Returning to FIG. 62, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2801, if it is determined that the change start flag 223c is off (S2801: No), or after the processing of S2806 described above, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S2807). . If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S2807: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is set to off (S2808), and the extracted stop type command is acquired (S2809). Next, a display stop type command is set based on the extracted stop type (S2810), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2807, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is off (S2807: No), the process ends.

<Control processing executed by display control device in first control processing example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, a boot process executed by a boot program is executed (S4001), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start

  Here, the boot process (S4001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S4001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when random access is performed. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program or fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, after the system reset is released, the second program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. Of the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S4101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S4102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S4101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S4102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S4102, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data among the control programs being transferred are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S4103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S4104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S4001 in FIG. 64). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization processing to be performed (see S4002 in FIG. 64) (S4105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot processing ends.

  By executing the boot process (S4001) in this manner, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complex effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effector.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND-type flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 65, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S4101 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although the configuration is not limited thereto, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S4101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S4102. May be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S4103 to S4105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred by the process of S4101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently transfers the part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the beginning of the boot program. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S4101. After repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S4102 and S4102, the processing of S4103 to S4105 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S4103 to S4105 without performing the processes of S4101 and S4102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S4002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S4003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S4003, then the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to the image data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S4004). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  Upon completion of the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b based on the transmission instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S4004, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S4005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 79A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is executed (see S6302 in FIG. 79A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 66 (b)), a simple image such as a power-on main image or a power-on fluctuation image (not shown) which is a power-on image is drawn. Command determination processing (see S4308 in FIG. 66B) and simple display setting processing (see S4309 in FIG. 66B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the main control device 110 instructs the start of the variation effect by controlling the sound lamp. When the display 113 is received, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a variation image at power-on (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation rendering period to perform a simple variation rendering. be able to. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S4005, interruption permission is set (S4006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S4006, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, a command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S4201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. A list (see FIG. 36) is created, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image when the image drawing process or the display process has not been completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 66B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S4301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so it is not a power-on image (not shown) but a normal effect. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S4302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S4303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S4302), the contents of the command from the sound ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command interruption process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S4303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S4302) and the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Specify the contents of Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is executed (S4304). In this task processing, the image is formed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S4303) or the simple display setting processing (S4309). The type of sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S4305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, when receiving a continuous notice command or a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S4306). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S4305) determined in the task processing (S4304). 38 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S4307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S4307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop types (big hit A to D, reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and rear out, reach out completely, out of chance) indicated by the display stop type command are detected. ) Is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4301 that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S4301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (see FIG. 32) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S4308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S4309) is executed. Move on to processing.

  Next, details of the above-described command determination processing (S4302), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 67, it is first determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S4401). If there is no unprocessed new command (S4401: No), The command determination process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S4401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S4303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S4402). The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S4403).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S4404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S4404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S4405), and returns to the process of S4401.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S4405) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 68A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S4501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S4501, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S4501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4502). Then, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4501, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S4503), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S4504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S4505), the variation pattern command ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing the variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S4504, the processing of the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4501 is performed. , Extract the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, specify the content of the image of one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, execute the transfer data table buffer 233e by the processing of S4502. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the variable data display table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S4503, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S4404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S4404: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S4406). If there is a display variation type command (S4406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S4407), and the process returns to S4401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S4407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any of jackpot A, jackpot B, reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and rear out, complete out, and chance) indicated by the display stop type command. Is determined (S4601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 66 (b)) is executed. A stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed at 81 is finally set (S4602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S4602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned off. (S4603), terminates the stop type command processing, and returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S4602. In the above-described task processing (S4304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S4602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S4603, and the specified stop is determined. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. However, before the drawing on the third symbol display device 81 is performed, the normal video is read from the character ROM 234. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, the drawing responsiveness in the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of step S4601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the stop type is assumed to be completely out of order and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete departure is set by the processing of S4602.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment, in actuality, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops completely detachment. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S4406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S4406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S4408). If there is an image change command (S4408: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S4409), and the process returns to S4401.

  Here, the details of the back image change command processing (S4409) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the rear image change command process, first, a rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S6303) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S4701). . Then, among the rear image determination flags provided for each of the rear image types (back A and B), the rear image determination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is turned on, and the other rear image The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S4702), the back image change command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, upon detecting that the rear image change flag set in the process of S4701 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image determination flag set in the process of S4702. . If the specified back image type is back B, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to the back image is not resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Then, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  In the task processing, if it is specified that either the back A or B is to be displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S4702 is used to determine The type of the rear image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) which stores the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is specified. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S4702, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S4408, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S4408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S4410). If it is (S4410: Yes), an error command process is executed (S4411), and the process returns to S4401.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S4411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4801). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S4802). The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S4801, the type of error generated from the error determination flag set in the process of S4802 is determined, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S4802, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S4410, if it is determined that there is no error command (S4410: No), then, it is determined whether or not there is a hit-related command among the unprocessed commands (S4412). If it is (S4412: Yes), the hit related command processing is executed (S4413), and the process returns to S4401.

  Here, the details of the hit-related command processing (S4413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the hit-related command processing. The hit-related command process executes a process corresponding to the display opening command, the display round number command, and the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the hit-related command processing (FIG. 70, S4413), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display big hit start command (S4901). If it is determined in the process of S4901 that there is a display hit start command (S4901: Yes), a big hit start command process is executed (S4902), and the flow shifts to the process of S4903.

  Here, the details of the jackpot start command process (S4902) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71A is a flowchart showing the jackpot start command processing (S4902). The jackpot start command process (S4902) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit-related command process (FIG. 70) that there is a display jackpot start command. This is a process for displaying on the symbol display device 81.

  In the jackpot start command processing (S4902), first, a jackpot start display data table corresponding to the command (for example, corresponding to the jackpot type) is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5001). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5002). Thereafter, the time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the big hit start display data table (S5003), the pointer 233f is initialized (S5004), and the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S5005). This processing ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 70, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4901 that there is no display jackpot start command (S4901: No), the process proceeds to S4903. When the processing of S4901 or S4902 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command (S4903). If it is determined in the processing of S4903 that there is a display round number command, round number command processing is executed (S4904), and the flow shifts to the processing of S4905.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S4904) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing (S4904). This round number command process (S4904) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit-related command process (FIG. 70) that a display round number command has been received, and the number of rounds during the jackpot game is updated. This is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the effect when the game is performed.

  In the round number command processing (S4904), first, a round number display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5101). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5102), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the round number display data table (S5103). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5104), the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S5105), and the process ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 70, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S4903 that there is no display round number command (S4903: No), the flow shifts to the processing of S4905. When the processing of S4903 or S4904 is completed, it is determined whether or not a display jackpot end command has been received (S4905). If it is determined in the process of S4905 that there is a display jackpot end command (S4905: Yes), a jackpot end command process is executed (S4906), and the flow shifts to the process of S4907.

  Here, the big hit end command processing (S4906) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 72A is a flowchart showing the jackpot end command processing (S4906). The jackpot end command process (S4906) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit-related command determination process (FIG. 70) that a jackpot end command has been received. This is a process for displaying on the symbol display device 81.

  In the jackpot end command processing (S4906), first, a jackpot end display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5201). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5202), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the big hit end display data table (S5203). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5204), the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S5205), and the process ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 70, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S4905 that there is no display jackpot end command (S4905: No), the flow shifts to the processing of S4907. When the processing of S4905 or S4906 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display small hit start command (S4907). In the process of S4907, when it is determined that there is the small hit start command for display (S4907: Yes), the small hit start command process is executed (S4908), and the process shifts to S4909.

  Here, the small hit start command processing (S4908) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This small hit start command process (S4908) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit related command determination process (see FIG. 70) that a small hit start command has been received, and indicates the start of a small hit game. This is a process for displaying the effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the small hit start command processing (S4908), first, a small hit start display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5301). Next, the transfer data table buffer corresponding to the small hit start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5302). Thereafter, the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the small hit start display data table (S5303), the pointer 233f is initialized (S5304), and the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S5305). Then, the present process ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 70, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4907 that there is no small hit start command for display (S4907: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4909. When the processing of S4907 or S4908 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display small hit end command (S4909). If it is determined in the processing of S4909 that there is a small hit end command (S4909: Yes), the small hit end command processing is executed (S4910), and the flow shifts to the processing of S4911.

  Here, the small hit end command processing (S4910) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The small hit end command process (S4910) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit related command determination process (see FIG. 70) that a small hit end command has been received, and indicates the end of the small hit game. This is a process for displaying the effect to be performed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the small hit end command processing (S4910), first, a small hit end display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5401). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5402), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the small hit end display data table (S5403). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5404), the demonstration display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S5405), and this process is terminated.

  Referring back to FIG. 70, the description will be continued. In the process of S4909, if it is determined that there is no small hitting end command for display (S4909: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4911. When the processing in S4909 or S4910 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display V entrance passage command (S4911). If it is determined in the processing of S4911 that there is a V entrance passage command (S4911: Yes), the V entrance passage command processing is executed (S4912), and the flow shifts to the processing of S4913.

  Here, the details of the V entrance passage command processing (S4912) will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (b). The V entrance passage command process (S4912) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit-related command determination process (see FIG. 70) that a V entrance passage command has been received. This is a process for displaying an effect indicating that the game ball has passed through the switch (V switch) 650e3 on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the V entrance passage command processing (S4912), first, a V entrance passage display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5501). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5502), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the V entrance passage display data table (S5503). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5504), the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S5505), and the process ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 70, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S4911 that there is no display V entrance passage command (S4911: No), the flow shifts to step S4913. After the processing of S4911 or S4912, it is determined whether or not there is a display V effect command (S4913). If it is determined in the process of S4913 that there is a V effect command (S4913: Yes), the V effect command process is executed (S4914), and the flow shifts to the process of S4915.

  Here, the details of the V effect command processing (S4914) will be described with reference to FIG. The V effect command process (S4914) is a process executed when it is determined that the V effect command has been received in the hit-related command determination process (see FIG. 70), and the probability that a big hit game is given is high. This is a process for displaying an effect suggesting that this is the case on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the V effect command processing (S4914), first, a V effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5601). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5602), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the V effect display data table (S5603). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5604), the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S5605), and the process ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 70, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S4913 that there is no display V effect command (S4913: No), the processing shifts to S4915. When the processing of S4913 or S4914 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display instruction command (S4915). If it is determined in step S4915 that there is an instruction command (S4915: Yes), instruction command processing is executed (S4916), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4915, when it is determined that there is no display instruction command (S4915: No), this process ends.

  Here, the instruction command processing (S4916) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The instruction command process (S4916) is a process executed when it is determined that the instruction command has been received in the hit-related command determination process (see FIG. 70), and it is determined that the probability that the jackpot game is given is high. This is a process for displaying a suggested effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the instruction command process (S4916), first, an instruction effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5651). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5652), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the instruction effect display data table (S5653). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5654), the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S5655), and the process ends.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S4412 that there is no hit-related command (S4412: No), then it is determined whether or not there are various effect-related commands corresponding to the depression of the frame button 22 among the unprocessed commands. Then, if there are various effect-related commands (S4414: Yes), effect-related command processing is executed (S4415), and the process returns to S4401.

  Here, the effect-related command processing (S4415) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the effect-related command processing. The effect-related command processing is to execute processing corresponding to various effect-related commands received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the effect-related command processing (S4415), first, an effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5701). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5702), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the effect display data table (S5703). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5704), the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5705), and this process is terminated.

  Referring back to FIG. 67, the description will be continued. In the processing of S4414, when it is determined that there is no various effect-related commands (S4414: No), processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S4416), and the processing returns to S4401.

  In the processing of S4401 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S4401: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S4402 to S4416 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S4401 to S4416 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined in the processing of S4401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is performed. The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S4309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 66B) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, a command necessary for displaying the power-on image (see FIG. 32), that is, a display variation pattern command and a display variation pattern command, from unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Only the stop type commands are extracted, and a variation pattern command process (see FIG. 68A) and a stop type command process (see FIG. 68B), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed. With respect to this command, a process of discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 68A) executed in this case, in the processing of S4501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image which are set and necessary in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the processing of S4502, processing of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting process (S4303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 76, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S6001). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S6001: No), In the previously executed command determination process, it is determined that the new command has not been processed, and the process of S6002 to S6004 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S6005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S6001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, the new command flag is set to off (S6002), and then S6003 to S6004. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S6003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S6003). If the error occurrence flag is on (S6003: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S6004).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are set. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S6101).

  In task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Various parameters are determined.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S6101, the error occurrence flag is turned off (S6102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S6004) or in the process of S6003, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S6003: No), the process proceeds to S6005.

  In S6005, a pointer update process is performed (S6005). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S6201). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S6201, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information or not. Is determined (S6202). As a result, if it is End information (S6202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S6203). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S6203: Yes), the display data table is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S6204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S6205), and the process ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6203, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S6203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S6206), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S6202, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S6202: No), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6006). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the process of S6006 together with the previously expanded warning image and the like, and the display coordinate position is set for each sprite. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a magnification, a magnification, and a rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S6007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S6008). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S6008: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S6008: Yes), it means that the presentation time of the presentation corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S6009).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is OFF (S6009: No), the effect of the confirmed display has not yet been performed, and it is the timing to perform the effect of the confirmed display. First, the confirmed display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S6010), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6011). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the confirmed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S6012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6013). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S6014), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S6015), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previously stopped symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S6015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task process (S4304), a stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S6015 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6009, if the confirmed display flag is on (S6009: Yes), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S6016). If the demonstration display flag is off (S6016: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect, so that the demonstration display data table is displayed in the display data table. The contents are set in the buffer 233d (S6017), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6018). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S6019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6020), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S6021), and the present process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thus, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set.

  In the process of S6016, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S6016: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and this means that the demonstration effect has been completed. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S4309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 66B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, the power-on variation image corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time (Fig. (Not shown) is set in the display data table buffer 233d, which is a display data table that stipulates that display is stopped.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 79 and FIG. 80, details of the above-described transfer setting processing (S4305), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 79A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), since all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting is performed. The processing is executed (S6302), the transfer setting processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S6301, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S6301: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S6303), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S6302), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S4305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S6302).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 has been instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S6401). If the transfer instruction has been transmitted (S6401: Yes) ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S6402). In the process of S6402, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, when receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S6402 (S6402: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S6402: Yes), the process proceeds to S6403. Also, as a result of the process of S6401, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S6401: No), the process proceeds to S6403.

  In the process of S6403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S6403). If there is any untransferred resident target image data (S6403: No), the process proceeds to S6403. A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the resident target image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S6404), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S6403, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S6403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S6405), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 66 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination processing (see S4308 in FIG. 66 (b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S4309 in FIG. 66 (b)). Since the determination processing (see FIGS. 67 to 75) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 76 to 78) are executed, the drawing of the image in the normal state is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 80) (see S6301: No in FIG. 79A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S6303), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S4305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S6303).

  In the normal image transfer setting process, first, the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e is updated with the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S6005) of the previously executed display setting process (S4303). The information described at the indicated address is obtained (S6501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S6502). If the obtained information is the transfer data information (S6502: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data is determined based on the transfer data information. (The storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and store them in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S6503) Further, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S6504), and the flow shifts to the processing of S6505.

  In the process of S6502, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data (S6502: No), the process of S6503 and S6504 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S6505. In the process of S6505, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S6505), and the transfer instruction is set. If it has been (S6505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S6506).

  In the process of S6506, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 and receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S6506 (S6506: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S6506: Yes), the process proceeds to S6507. Also, as a result of the processing in S6505, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer processing has been completed (S6505: No), the processing shifts to S6507.

  In the process of S6507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is ON (S6507). If the transfer start flag is ON (S6507: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is set. Is turned off (S6508), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various types of information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S6503 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the flow shifts to the processing of S6513. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S6507: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S6509). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S6509: No), there is no image data to start the transfer, and the normal image transfer setting process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S6509: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after setting the back image change flag to off (S6510), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Of the determination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S6511). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal) The start address of the video RAM 236) is obtained (S6512), and the flow shifts to the processing of S6513.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S6511, if the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear surface A, the normal image transfer process ends.

  In the processing of S6513, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6513). The determination in the process of S6513 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j and the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  As a result of the processing in S6513, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6513: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S6513, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6513: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S6514). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in S6514, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S6515), and the normal image transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the rear image is changed. The image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 81, details of the above-described drawing processing (S4306), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing processing, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S4304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information The drawing list shown in FIG. 36 is generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S4305) (S6601). That is, in the process of S6601, the type of storage RAM and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S4304). The parameters necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S4305), the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S6602). In this case, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including the information to instruct to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S6602, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S6603). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 66B) is executed, the process is performed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, a jackpot is won as a time-saving ending condition for ending the time-saving state, which is a game state that is advantageous for the player. Time saving end condition (special prize ending condition) set when the special symbol change reaches a predetermined number of times, the time saving end condition (variation number ending condition) set when the special symbol change reaches a predetermined number of times, Since it is configured to be able to set a time saving end condition (winning number end condition) that is set when the number of winning times reaches a predetermined number, a period (time saving time) in which the time saving state is continuously set. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to easily predict the timing at which the state ends).

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the winning number ending condition described above is configured to be satisfied when winning a small number of times a plurality of times, the player is required to be given to the player every time the player wins the small number during the time saving state. Is the time-saving state going to end? You can make me think. In addition, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won, a plurality of small hit types can be set, and as a plurality of small hit types, a small hit type for setting a winning count end condition, and a winning count end condition There is a small hit type that does not set. This makes it difficult to predict the timing at which the time reduction state ends based on the small hitting game executed during the time reduction state.

  As described above, in the case of setting the small hit type in which the winning number end condition is set and the small hit type in which the winning number end condition is not set, the small hitting game (opening operation of the V winning device 650) is performed. For the same content (same concept including an error that is indistinguishable by the player), a small hit type for setting the winning number end condition and a small hit type for which the winning number end condition is not set are set. It is good to configure. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the timing at which the time saving state ends.

  In addition, in the first embodiment, a plurality of small hit types for setting the winning number end condition can be set, and the number set as the winning number end condition differs for each small hit type. are doing. With this configuration, it is possible to predict the timing at which the time reduction state ends by determining the content of the small hitting game executed during the time reduction state.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the second special symbol (special figure 2), which is easily executed when the time saving state is set, is configured to win a small hit, and the small hit is selected. When the ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game (when the V switch 650e3 detects that the ball has flowed down the special discharge channel 650e2 in the V winning device 650 opened by the small hit game) A big hit (two hits) is set after the small hit game is over.

  In the first embodiment described above, the setting of two types of hits is a big hit game based on a big hit type (big hit game content) set when a small hit is won by a special symbol lottery. It is configured to execute on condition that the ball has passed the specific area during the game, but is not limited to this, and on the condition that the ball has passed the specific area during the small hit game, The big hit type corresponding to the small hit game type (small hit type) may be read (lottery selected), and the big hit game corresponding to the read (selected as a result of the lottery) big hit type may be executed. The big hit is set on condition that the ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game, and the big hit game corresponding to the big hit type selected based on the result of the predetermined lottery is executed. It may be configured.

  In the first embodiment in which the two types of hits can be set as described above, a small hit game having a different degree of expectation in which the two types of hits are set is set according to the type of the winning small hit, and each small hit type is set. , A time saving end condition (winning number end condition) is set. Furthermore, it is configured that the smaller the number of wins (the number of wins), the smaller the number of wins (the number of wins), the smaller the win game (small hit type) in which the two types of wins are easily set.

  With such a configuration, when a small hit is won in the time saving state, the small hitting game is performed while assuming both the possibility of winning two kinds and the possibility of the time saving state being ended. Since the game is executed, it is possible to enhance the playability in the time saving state. In addition, the shorter the win, the easier it is to win the two types of wins, and the easier the time saving state is to be ended. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically perform the game during the small hits game.

  In the first embodiment, among the small hit types, if the right-handed game is continuously performed, the winning number ending condition is one for the small hit A in which the two hits can be obtained. (There are some exceptions). With such a configuration, a large penalty can be given only to a player who does not continuously play a right-handed game (a player who does not play an appropriate game), and the player can save time. A right-handed game can be performed continuously.

  Further, in the first embodiment described above, the timing at which the time-saving state ends is made different according to the type of the time-saving end condition that is satisfied, and the time-saving state is set to be shorter during the period in which the small hitting game is executed. It is configured to be able to set the case where it is continuing and the case where the time-saving state is finished. Thereby, since the game result can be varied depending on which time-saving end condition is satisfied, the player is caused to pay attention to the type of the reduced time-saving end condition in addition to whether or not the time-saving end condition is satisfied. be able to.

  Specifically, when the small symbol is won in the special symbol variation in which the variation number ending condition is satisfied, the timing at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped (the timing at which the symbol indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed). When the time-saving state ends, and during the small hitting game that is executed thereafter, the normal state is set. On the other hand, when the win number ending condition is satisfied, the time-saving state is set at the timing when the small hitting game is executed. Is terminated.

  In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the V winning device 650 that is opened during the small hitting game is fired upstream (through a right-handed game) of the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a. (The upstream side of the flow path along which the dropped ball flows down), so that the ball is unlikely to flow down to the through gate 67 or the electric accessory 640a during the small hitting game. Thereby, even if the timing at which the time-saving state ends according to the established time-saving end condition is different, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to be noticed, and it is possible to suppress a sense of discomfort given to the player.

  Further, in the first embodiment, if the time-saving state is set at the time when the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set, the time-saving state is set during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. , The opening operation during the time saving state is continuously executed. Therefore, even if the timing at which the time-saving state ends according to the established time-saving ending condition is different, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice, and it is possible to suppress a sense of incongruity given to the player.

  In addition, as in the first embodiment described above, it is not difficult to understand that the timing at which the time-saving state ends according to the established time-saving end condition is different. In the case of giving a peculiar gaming ability to make the end timing greatly different, for example, when the change number end condition is satisfied, the time reduction state is ended at the timing when the change of the special symbol starts, and the winning is completed. When the number-of-times ending condition is satisfied, the time saving state may be ended at the timing when the small hitting game is ended. With this configuration, it is possible to greatly vary the period in which the time saving state is set depending on the type of the time saving end condition that is satisfied.

  In this case, unlike the above-described first embodiment, the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a are arranged upstream of the V winning device 650, and the time-saving state is set during the small hitting game. Is configured such that many balls are guided by the electric accessory 640a and enter a ball entrance (for example, a general ball entrance 63, a second ball entrance 640), and further, are opened by a small hitting game. It is preferable that the ball entrance that is guided by the operation of the electric accessory 640a pays out more balls than the player wins the V winning device 650.

  In addition, as the time saving end condition, the change number end condition is set to two times, and the winning number end condition is set to one, and only when the small symbol is won in the first special symbol change after the time saving state is set, It is preferable that a large number of balls can be entered into the entrance that is guided by the electric accessory 640a during the small hit game. With this configuration, when the time-saving state is set, it is possible to play a game while expecting a specific time-saving end condition to be satisfied, and to provide a new game property.

  In the first embodiment described above, as shown with reference to FIG. 2, the V winning device 650 that is opened when a small hit is won is arranged in the right area, and a right-handed game is performed during the small hit game. By doing so, the ball is won by the V-prize device 650, and when the ball that has won the V-prize device 650 passes through a specific area (the V switch 650e3 detects the ball), two types are set. ing. Furthermore, the content of the jackpot set as two types of hits (the content of the jackpot game, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game, and the like) is configured to be set according to the type of the small hit which is a lottery result of the special symbol. are doing.

  In such playability, for example, when a small hit is won, the lottery result is identified by a stop display mode of a first symbol stopped and displayed on the first display device 37, and the lottery result is determined to correspond to the current small hit. By determining the content of the jackpot that has been set as the jackpot, for example, the content of the jackpot that is least advantageous to the player (for example, the number of prize balls (the number of round games) that can be obtained by the jackpot game) is reduced to other jackpot games If the player wins a small jackpot in which a less favorable gaming state (for example, a normal state) is set after the big jackpot game is completed, the act of intentionally acquiring two kinds of winnings is not performed, and the next small jackpot is not performed. There was a risk that the game would be played so as to aim for a winning.

  Therefore, as a configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 2, the first display device 37 has a special period during which the ball that has been played and fired on the right side reaches the V winning device 650. The right side area is set to be longer than the period from when the stop symbol indicating the symbol lottery result is stopped and displayed until the small hitting game is executed (until the two kinds of wins can be obtained during the small hitting game). Among them, it is preferable to provide a delay flow path for delaying the flow of the ball on the upstream side of the V winning device 650.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to obtain two kinds in a case where a right-handed game is performed after the lottery result of the special symbol stopped and displayed on the first display device 37 is determined. Therefore, in order to obtain two kinds of wins, it is possible to continuously execute the right-handed game before the special symbol lottery result is stopped and displayed (during the display of the special symbol fluctuation), as described above. It is possible to suppress the execution of a malicious game.

  In this case, for all the small hits, the period until the ball fired by performing the right game and reaching the V winning device 650 is a stop symbol showing the lottery result of the special symbol on the first display device 37. Does not need to be longer than the period from the stop display until the small hit game is executed (until the two types of wins can be obtained during the small hit game), and some of the small hit games ( In particular, it is only necessary that the execution is performed so that the small hit type in which the big hit content advantageous to the player is set satisfies the condition.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the expectation per two kinds during the small hit game (the possibility that the ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game when the right-handed game is continuously performed) It is configured to vary depending on the type of small hit, and specifically, as described above, the operation pattern of the flow path solenoid 650k is configured to be different according to the type of the winning small, Without being limited to this, for example, by changing the opening timing of the V winning opening 650a that is rotated in the small hit game according to the type of the small hit that has been won, the degree of expectation per two kinds during the small hit game (continuation When a right-handed game is being performed, the possibility that the ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game may be changed.

  In this case, for example, the operation pattern of the flow path solenoid 650k during the small hitting game is set to a constant operation regardless of the small hitting type, and the flow path through which the ball winning the V winning device 650 during the small hitting game flows down is specified. An operation pattern is set in which a first period communicating with a flow path (special discharge flow path 650e2) passing through the region and a second period communicating with another flow path (normal discharge flow path 650e1) are alternately established. The opening timing of the V winning opening 650a may be set to be different from the timing at which the first period and the second period are established.

  Furthermore, even when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the right-handed game can be continued by executing the same effect as the small hit game. In this case, when a special symbol is drawn out by lottery, the special symbol fixed display time, that is, the period for stopping and displaying the special symbol lottery result is changed depending on the type of the special symbol, so that special In a part of the case where the symbol lottery result is out of order, the special symbol confirmation display time can be lengthened (the period until the next special symbol change is executed can be lengthened).

  Therefore, a game in which two kinds of hits are aimed at can be performed other than when the small hit game is won. In addition, by applying the effect at the time of departure (pseudo small hit game effect) to the pachinko machine 10 having the game board 13 using the above-described delay member, a right-handed game can be performed more continuously.

  Further, it is possible to set a small hitting type in which an opening operation (small hitting game) in which a ball cannot be won in the V winning device 650a is performed, and when a small hit (sorry small hitting) of the small hitting type is won, that is, The above-mentioned (pseudo small hit game effect) may be configured to be executed even when a small hit game having no degree of expectation per type is executed.

  In addition, the number of times a special symbol lottery result in which the above-mentioned pseudo small hitting game effect can be executed (a specific hit, sorry small hit) is counted, and the time reduction termination condition is established based on the measurement result. You may comprise. Thereby, since the time-saving state can be terminated based on the number of times the pseudo small hit game production has been executed, in order to grasp whether or not the current small hit game production is pseudo, In order to grasp whether or not a ball wins in the V winning device 650 during the small hitting game effect, it is possible to make it easy to continuously perform a right-handed game.

Second Embodiment
Next, a second embodiment of the present pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that it is configured to be able to win a small win even in the lottery of the first special symbol, and the content set as an end condition of the time saving state is different. This is different from the above in that the contents of the effect display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are different.

  In the above-described first embodiment, as the time-saving ending conditions for ending the time-saving state, the number-of-times-of-change ending condition that is established based on the number of times of the change of the special symbol and the number of winning times that are established based on the number of winnings of the small hit An end condition and an end condition can be set, and if any one of a plurality of time reduction end conditions is satisfied, the time reduction state is ended. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the period in which the time saving state is continuously set, makes it possible to perform a game with a sense of tension during the time saving state, and provide a game that does not get tired. there were.

  Furthermore, since different conditions can be set according to the set small hit type as the number-of-wins end condition, the end timing of the time-saving state is made more difficult to understand. In addition, since different time-saving termination conditions can be set according to the jackpot type of the jackpot in which the time-saving state is set, the timing at which the time-saving state ends can be made more difficult to understand.

  However, in the above-described first embodiment, it is only difficult for the player to grasp a plurality of time saving termination conditions set according to the result of the game and the time saving information updated during the time saving state. There is a problem that it is up to the result of the special symbol lottery to determine what the time saving end condition is satisfied, and it is difficult to make the player think that he has won the jackpot by himself.

  In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment allows the player to arbitrarily select whether to perform a right-handed game or a left-handed game in a state in which the time saving state is set, In addition, according to the selected game content (right-handed game, left-handed game), the time saving end condition that is likely to be established is made different.

  In the second embodiment configured as described above, the player can select the game content during the time saving state. Therefore, in the game in the time saving state executed according to the game content selected by the player, whether the time saving end condition is satisfied early or the time saving state can be continued for a long time, Can be thought to be the result of playing the game.

  Further, the second embodiment is configured to be able to obtain two kinds of hits in the same manner as the first embodiment described above, and a case where the first game (left-handed game) is performed during the time reduction state and a case where the second game is performed In the case where (right-handed game) is performed, the expected value of the period in which the time saving state is continuously set and the expected value of winning two types (the expected value per two types in one special symbol change) and , Are configured to be different.

  Specifically, when the first game is performed, a period in which the time-saving state can be continued is likely to be short, and a time-saving game in which it is easy to obtain two hits during the time-saving state is executed. Is performed, the period in which the time reduction state can continue is likely to be long (longer than the first game), and it is difficult to obtain two hits during the time reduction state (compared to the first game). (It is difficult to obtain) It is configured to execute a time saving game.

  With this configuration, it is possible to select the game content during the time saving state according to the player's own convenience, so that even a player who wants to play a game for a long time can play the game only for a short time It is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows even a player who does not have any dissatisfaction to play a game. In addition, the details of the content for causing the player to play a game having different gaming properties during the time saving state will be described later.

<About production contents in the second embodiment>
Here, with reference to FIG. 82 to FIG. 84, the contents of the effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 82 (a), the contents of the effect during the ending period of the jackpot game in which the time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 82 (a) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a display screen displayed during the ending period during a jackpot game. Note that among the elements displayed on the display screen, the same elements as those in the above-described first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (a), during the ending period of the jackpot game, a "preference after the jackpot" is displayed at the center of the main display area Dm to guide the game method during the time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game. Please enjoy the game "and a comment" End of the jackpot "for notifying that the jackpot game has ended.

  In the sub display area Ds, a first guidance display area Dm4 indicating the content of the first game that can be executed during the time reduction state, and a second guidance display area indicating the content of the second game that can be executed during the time reduction state Dm5 and an acquired content display area Dm9 for indicating a privilege acquired during the jackpot game are formed. In the second embodiment, “left-handed” indicating a left-handed game as the first game that can be executed during the time-saving state, and “short-handed” indicating the characteristic playability when the left-handed game is performed during the time-saving state "Time game" is displayed in the first guidance display area Dm4.

  In addition, the second guidance display area Dm5 includes “right-handed” indicating a right-handed game as a second game executable during the time-saving state, and characteristic playability when a right-handed game is performed during the time-saving state. Is displayed in the second guidance display area Dm5. That is, in the second embodiment, a left-handed game in which the time-saving state is completed in a short period of time and a right-handed game in which the time-saving state can be enjoyed for a long time can be selected as the game method during the time-saving state. Can be displayed immediately before the time saving state is set (during the ending period of the jackpot game). Therefore, at the timing when the time saving state is set, the player can be caused to play a game by an arbitrary game method.

  In the present embodiment, only a major difference between the first game and the second game is displayed in characters in the first guidance display area Dm4 and the second guidance display area Dm5, and the game method during the time saving state is changed by the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, all the differences between the first game and the second game may be displayed, or the differences may be displayed by pictures instead of characters. May be configured. Further, as shown in FIG. 82 (a), only a major difference is displayed in the first guidance display area Dm4 and the second guidance display area Dm5, and the first guidance display area is displayed during the display period. By selecting Dm4 or the second guidance display area Dm5, a configuration may be adopted in which detailed contents are displayed.

  With such a configuration, even for a player who thinks that it is only necessary to roughly understand the different game contents depending on the game method, for a player who wants to grasp the details of the different game contents depending on the game method, Can also provide an appropriate display mode.

  Next, the display content immediately after the time saving state is set will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82B is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed immediately after the time saving state is set. As shown in FIG. 82 (b), the second embodiment has a function of holding the lottery of the second special symbol up to a predetermined number (four) as compared with the first embodiment described above. In the second display area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the number of reserved symbols (number of reserved balls) of the second special symbol is indicated. The design is configured such that four symbols of a first reserved symbol Dsf to a fourth reserved symbol Dsi are displayed with "triangle" marks.

  Like the above-mentioned reserved symbols of the first special symbol (the first reserved symbol Dsb to the fourth reserved symbol Dse), the reserved symbols are in the same order as the reserved symbols are stored (the second symbol that triggers the execution of the lottery of the second special symbol). The first reserved symbol Dsf to the fourth reserved symbol Dsi, that is, from the left side to the right side of the second display area Ds2, are sequentially displayed in the order in which the ball enters the entrance 640). That is, the reserved symbols (Dsb to Dse) of the first special symbol and the reserved symbols (Dsf to Dsi) of the second special symbol are both displayed so as to gradually shift toward the running symbol Dsa. The player can easily grasp the reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol to be executed next from the display content of each special symbol displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (b), immediately after the time saving state is set, a character “?” Is displayed in the game guidance display area Dm2. This is a display indicating that the player has not determined whether to execute the current time saving state in the first game (left-handed game) or in the second game (right-handed game). A display mode other than the display mode shown in FIG. 82 (b) may be displayed in the game guidance display area Dm2 to indicate that the game method during the time saving state has not been determined. , "Left or right" may be displayed to indicate that it is a period during which any of the right-handed games may be played.

  Although details will be described later, in the second embodiment, whether the ball entry port where the ball first entered after the time saving state is set is the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640. Is determined, and a game method arbitrarily selected by the player is determined based on the determination result. Therefore, the character “?” Is displayed in the game guidance display area Dm2 during a period from when the time saving state is set to when the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640.

  Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the display content of FIG. 82B is configured to continue for a predetermined period (4 seconds) after the time reduction state is set, and the time reduction state is set during that period. Is set so that the special symbol change corresponding to the winning information that has been held and stored at the time when is set is completed. By configuring in this way, if the winning information for winning a jackpot is included in the special design holding ball, before the first game or the second game is determined and displayed (in the game guidance display area Dm2). The special symbol change corresponding to the jackpot can be ended (before the display mode for guiding the game method is displayed).

  Therefore, even in a case where a jackpot is won due to a special symbol change on a side different from the game method selected by the player, it is possible to suppress a sense of discomfort given to the player.

  In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), the game method during the period in which the time saving state is set is displayed in the guidance display area Dm2, but other display areas are used. May be configured to display the currently set game method. In other words, during the jackpot game, it is necessary to provide a display for guiding (instructing) a game method that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is necessary to display the display method in the guide display area Dm2. Is set so that the same game result can be obtained regardless of which game method (right-handed game, left-handed game) the player selects. Instead of the guidance display area Dm2 for guiding (instructing) a game method that is advantageous to the player, the game method may be displayed in another area for displaying the current game method. In addition, when displaying in the guidance display area Dm2, the display mode (for example, the color and shape of the character) is changed to guide (instruct) the player to the game method, and the current game method ( It may be configured to be able to distinguish between a situation in which a game method selected by the player) is displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 83 (a), a description will be given of the effect contents when the first game (left-handed game) is executed in a state where the time saving state is set. FIG. 83A is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the first game (left-handed game) is being executed. As shown in FIG. 83 (a), when the first game is executed, a game result display 810 imitating a “lottery box” is displayed at the center of the main display area Dm, and the lower left of the main display area Dm is displayed. On the side, a game content display 811 for guiding the game content of the first game to the player is displayed. Further, a remaining short time display area Dm10 for indicating the number of time saving end times in the first game is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm.

  That is, in the first game (left-handed game in the time saving state) of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the lottery is executed in accordance with the change (lottery) of the special symbol, and as a result (1st to out). Is displayed as the game result display 810, an effect display is performed to notify the lottery result of the special symbol. Also, when the first game (left-handed game) is executed (set) as a game method during the time reduction, characters of “left-handed” indicating the game method of the first game are displayed in the game guidance display area Dm2. .

  When a specific game method (game direction) such as “left strike” or “right strike” is displayed in the game guidance display area Dm2, a game different from the displayed game method (game direction) is displayed. When a game is played in a method (game direction), an error notification for correcting the game method (game direction) is executed. That is, after it is determined that the first game (left-handed game) is performed during the time-saving state, an error notification is performed when the right-handed game is performed, and the second game (right-handed game) is performed during the time-saving state. After it is determined that the game is performed, an error notification is executed when a left-handed game is performed. Further, during a period in which no game method is determined during the time saving state, an error notification is not executed even if any of the left-handed game and the right-handed game is performed. I have.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 83 (a), the special figure 1 reserved number display area Dm6 for displaying the reserved number of the first special symbol (the number of reserved symbols) on the right side of the main display area Dm, and the second special symbol A special figure 2 holding number display area Dm7 for displaying the number of holdings (number of holding symbols) is formed, and a special symbol corresponding to the game method (left-handed game) currently selected in the sub-display area Ds ( Only the reserved symbol of the first special symbol is displayed (the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Ds1). With such a configuration, it is possible to emphasize only the number of reserved symbols (the number of reserved balls) of special symbols corresponding to the game method selected by the player (effect display).

  In addition, the actual number of reserved symbols (number of reserved balls) corresponding to each special symbol is configured to be displayed in a dedicated special figure 1 reserved number display area Dm6 and a special figure 2 reserved number display area Dm7. Therefore, the correct number of reserved symbols (the number of reserved balls) for each special symbol can be notified to the player. In the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 83 (a), the special figure 1 reserved number display area Dm6 and the special figure 2 reserved number display area Dm7 are such that the player can easily identify the current reserved number “0”. Although it is configured to be displayed in the size of the special symbol, the number of holdings of each special symbol is displayed in a size that can not be identified unless the player is aware of it, or the number of holdings is displayed with identifiers other than numbers It is good to be constituted so that.

  Then, when the effect display corresponding to the left-handed game shown in FIG. 83A is executed, the result of the lottery is displayed in the main display area Dm as the effect result according to the lottery result of the first special symbol. On the basis of the progress of each value (the number of times the special symbol is changed or the number of small hits) with respect to the time saving end condition, the remaining time saving number for indicating the number of time saving end times is updated and displayed in the time saving number display area Dm10. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game during the time saving state by grasping the result of the lottery and the display content of the time saving number display area Dm10.

  On the other hand, when the right-handed game is selected as the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), an effect is executed in which the character 812 imitating a boy searches for a treasure chest 813 for informing the result of the lottery of the special symbol. At the same time, the number of reserved symbols (the number of reserved balls) of the special symbol (second special symbol) corresponding to the selected game method (right-handed game) is displayed in the second display region Ds2 in the sub display region Ds. In addition, the character “Right-handed” is displayed in the guidance display area Dm2. In addition, the content of the effect performed when this right-handed game is selected is different from the effect content of the first embodiment described above only in the effect using the reserved symbol of the second special symbol. The other parts are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 84, among the effects performed when the right-handed game is selected during the time saving state in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the effects are different from the effects of the above-described first embodiment. The contents are explained. FIG. 84 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the game screen when the right-handed game is selected during the time saving state.

  As shown in FIG. 84, in the second embodiment, it is configured to display whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied, or the degree of expectation of acquiring a jackpot, with respect to the reserved symbol displayed in the sub display area Ds. In FIG. 84, the notice display mode 820 showing the character “CHANCE” for the first reserved symbol Dsf corresponding to the next special symbol change is the third reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol change after three changes. A preview display mode 821 in which the character “End” is displayed for the symbol Dsh is displayed.

  The notice display mode set for each of the reserved symbols is selectively displayed using a later-described reserved display selection table 222aa.

  In this way, by displaying the notice display mode for the reserved symbols, the player is willing to acquire a jackpot by the time the special symbol change is executed while predicting the special symbol change in which the time saving state ends. Will play the game. Further, based on the content of the notice display mode, it is possible to grasp the period in which the time reduction state is not ended, and to execute the special symbol change with ease.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 85, a description will be given of the game content during the time saving state in the second embodiment. FIG. 85 is a diagram schematically illustrating the game content in the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game in which the jackpot B is set as the jackpot type among the game contents in the time saving state in the second embodiment. is there. As shown in FIG. 85, the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the first special symbol can be won by small lottery in the first special symbol lottery, and the first special symbol is better. It is configured such that it is easy to win a small hit game (small hit game executed in response to the small hit A) in which it is easier to obtain two kinds of hits than in the second special symbol.

  In the second embodiment, the same configuration of the game board 13 as in the first embodiment is used. When the time saving state is set, a ball is inserted into the second entrance 640 compared to the normal state. The opening operation control of the electric accessory 640a is changed so as to make it easier to enter the ball. In other words, when the second game (right-handed game) is executed during the time saving state, more balls are made to enter the second entrance 640 than in the normal state, and lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed. be able to. On the other hand, even if the time saving state is set, the ease with which a ball enters the first entrance 64 is not changed from the normal state.

  Here, the first game (left-handed game) and the second game (right-handed game), which are the game contents during the time saving state, will be described with reference to FIG. First, a description will be given of the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player during the time saving state (the number of prize balls obtainable by inserting a ball into the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640). The number of prize balls in this time saving state is configured to be larger in the second game than in the first game. Then, when the first game is performed during the time reduction state, only the same number of prize balls as in the case where the normal state is set can be obtained, and the number of balls (holding balls) decreases during the time reduction state. Game is executed. On the other hand, when the second game is performed, a large number of balls can be made to enter the second entrance 640, so that many prize balls can be obtained. A game in which a ball (holding ball) is kept (maintained) is executed.

  Then, the period in which the time saving state can be continuously set is configured to be shorter in the case of performing the first game than in the case of performing the second game. Specifically, among the plurality of time saving end conditions, the change number end condition that is satisfied when the change number of the first special symbol is 30 is the change number end condition that is satisfied based on the change number of the special symbol. And at least a change number termination condition that is satisfied when the number of changes in the second special symbol becomes 80, and when executing the first game, up to 30 special symbol changes. Only the time saving state is configured to be continuously set.

  Furthermore, the degree of expectation to obtain a jackpot (including one per type and two per type) per one special symbol change (lottery) executed during the time reduction state is higher when the first game is performed. It is configured to be higher (greater) than when two games are played. Explaining the degree of expectation of acquiring the jackpot, in the present embodiment, a lottery of a first special symbol (a lottery of a special symbol executed when executing the first game) and a lottery of a second special symbol (the The probability of winning a jackpot (probability of winning per type) is the same (1/200) between the special symbol lottery executed when two games are executed. In other words, the first game and the second game are configured so that the degree of expectation of obtaining two types is different.

  To explain this point in detail, in the first special symbol lottery executed during the first game, the probability of winning a small hit is set to 1/10, and the probability is set during the second game. In the lottery of the second special symbol, the probability of winning a small hit is set to be １ ／. Then, when the small hit type is set when the small hit is won, when the small hit is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, the small hit A: the small hit B is set to 9: 1. Have been. That is, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed by the first game, the small hit A is executed with a probability of 1/11.

  On the other hand, when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the small hit A is executed with a probability of 1/200. In this way, by making the probability of winning a small hit and the distribution of the small hit type set at the time of the small hit winning different, the first game is changed by one special symbol than the second game. On the basis of (lottery), the expectation of obtaining a jackpot (including one type and two types) is increased.

  Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the time-saving end condition that is easily established when the first game is executed is set to be different from the time-saving end condition that is easily established when the second game is executed. Specifically, when the first game is executed, the time saving end condition that is satisfied when the small hit A is won once is most easily satisfied, and then the number of times the first special symbol changes becomes 30 times. It is set so that it is difficult to fulfill in the order of the time saving end condition that is satisfied in the case where it is satisfied, and the time saving end condition that is satisfied when the small hit B is won three times.

  When the second game is executed, the time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the small hit D is won 20 times is most easily satisfied, and then is satisfied when the number of times the second special symbol changes becomes 80 times. It is set so that it is difficult to be satisfied in the order of the time reduction end condition and the time reduction end condition that is satisfied when the small hit A is won once.

  As described above, according to the second embodiment, the player selects a game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) during the time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game, thereby providing different game characteristics. Game can be executed.

  Further, as different game properties, a game property (first game) aiming at a big hit in a short period and a game property (second game) aiming at a big hit in a long term can be selected. In addition, as a technique for differentiating the game method, a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state are set, and the case where the first game is performed and the case where the second game is performed are different. It is configured such that the time saving end condition is easily satisfied. Thereby, the period in which the time saving state is continuously set can be different between the first game and the second game.

<Electric Configuration in Second Embodiment>
Next, the contents of the electrical configuration according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed, and the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 are changed. It is different in that it is. Since the other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 86A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 86 (a), in the ROM 202 of the second embodiment, the first random number 2 table 202aa is replaced by the first random number table 202a, and the first random number table 202b is replaced by the first random number selection table 202b. The per-type selection 2 table 202ab is replaced with the variation pattern table 202d, the variation pattern 2 table 202ad is replaced with the time reduction grant table 202e, the time reduction grant 2 table 202ae is replaced with the small hit type selection table 202f, and the small hits are reduced. The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that an open scenario 2 table 202ag is provided instead of the type selection 2 table 202af instead of the open scenario table 202g.

  The first random number 2 table 202aa differs from the first random number table 202a of the above-described first embodiment in that a value (first random number counter value C1) for determining a small win is changed. I have. Here, the first random number 2 table 202aa according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 87A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 2 table 202aa in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 87 (a), the first random number 2 table 202aa includes a special symbol 1 random number 2 table 202aa1 corresponding to the first special symbol, a special symbol 2 random number 2 table 202aa2 corresponding to the second special symbol, and ,have.

  Next, the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 2 table 202aa1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 2 table 202aa1. This special symbol 1 random number 2 table 202aa1 is different from the above-described special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 of the first embodiment in that a value determined as a small hit is added, and other elements are the same. The description of the same elements is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 87B, in the special symbol 1 random number 2 table 202aa, “10 to 109” among the values of the first random number counter C1 is defined as the small hit determination value. That is, when a special symbol lottery is determined (executed) using the special symbol 1 random number 2 table 202aa1 (when executing the first special symbol lottery), it is determined to be a big hit at a rate of 1/200. , 1/10 is determined as a small hit.

  Next, the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 2 table 202aa2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 2 table 202aa2. As shown in FIG. 87 (c), in the special symbol 2 random number 2 table 202aa2, among the values of the first random number counter C1, “0 to 4” is defined as the big hit determination value, and “5 to 499” is the small hit value. It is defined as a judgment value. That is, when the special symbol lottery result is determined (executed) using the special symbol 2 random number 2 table 202aa2 (when executing the second special symbol lottery), it is determined to be a big hit at a rate of 1/200. However, it is configured to determine a small hit at a rate of 1/2.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in each of the case where the lottery of the first special symbol is executed and the case where the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, it is possible to win the small hit. Make up. Thereby, even if the first game (left-handed game) in which the lottery of the first special symbol is executed during the time saving state, the second game (right-handed game) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed is executed. However, it is possible to satisfy the winning number termination condition that is satisfied based on the number of winnings in the small hit.

  In addition, since the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol and the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol can be set to be different, the first game and the second game can be set. Thus, it is possible to make it easier to establish the winning number end condition. Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of games in which the ease of completing the time saving state is different between the case where the first game is executed and the case where the second game is executed.

  Returning to FIG. 86 (a), the description will be continued. The first hit type selection 2 table 202ab is different from the first hit type selection table 202b of the above-described first embodiment in that the presence or absence of the time saving state given to some of the big hit types is changed. The other elements are the same. The description of the same elements is omitted.

  Here, the contents of the first hit type selection 2 table 202ab will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 (a) to 88 (c). FIG. 88 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection 2 table 202ab, and FIG. 88 (b) is the contents defined in the special figure 1 big hit type selection 2 table 202ab1. FIG. 88 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 2 big hit type selection 2 table 202ab2.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (a), the first hit type selection 2 table 202ab is a special figure 1 big hit type selection 2 table 202ab1 corresponding to the first special symbol, and a special figure 2 big hit type corresponding to the second special symbol. And a selection 2 table 202ab2, and various tables are selectively used according to the corresponding special symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (b), the special figure 1 big hit type selection 2 table 202ab1 is a special figure 1 big hit type selection 2 table 202ab1 in which the acquired first hit type counter value C2 is "0-9". In the range, "big hit A" is defined as a big hit type, in a range of "10 to 49", "big hit B" is specified as a big hit type, and in a range of "50 to 99", "big hit C" as a big hit type. Is stipulated.

  The "big hit A" defined here is a big hit type in which a round game executes a 15 round big hit game, and a time reduction state is set after the end of the big hit game regardless of the game state at the time of winning. "Big hit B" is a type of big hit of five rounds, and the time reduction state is set after the end of the big hit game regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. The "big hit C" is a type of big hit in which the round game is 5 rounds, and when the gaming state at the time of winning (at the time of setting) is the normal state, the normal state is set after the end of the big hit game, and at the time of winning (at the time of setting) If the gaming state of ()) is the time reduction state, the time reduction state is set after the end of the big hit game.

  As described above, the second embodiment has the jackpot type (small jackpot C) that is defined so that the game state set after the jackpot game ends differs according to the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning. ing. This makes it possible for the player to be aware of whether or not a jackpot has been won and the type of jackpot to be set, as well as the gaming state at the time of winning, so that the game can be made more complicated and the player can get tired of the game early. Can be suppressed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (c), the special figure 2 big hit type selection 2 table 202ab2 indicates that the acquired first hit type counter value C2 is in the range of “0 to 99” and the big hit type is “big hit”. D "is defined.

  Returning to FIG. 86, the description will be continued. The variation pattern 2 table 202ad is different from the variation pattern table 202d of the above-described first embodiment in that the regulation pattern of the variation pattern selected during the period in which the time saving state is set is different. . The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the contents of the fluctuation pattern 2 table 202ad will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern 2 table 202ad, and FIG. 89 (b) is defined in the time reduction fluctuation pattern 2 table 202ad2 of the fluctuation pattern 2 table 202ad. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content typically. As shown in FIG. 89 (a), the fluctuation pattern 2 table 202ad is referred to when the normal state is set as the game state, and is referred to when the time reduction state is set. And a time-saving variation pattern 2 table 202ad2, which is used for setting a variation pattern of a special symbol (when executing a special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39)). The configuration is such that a variation pattern (variation time) is set with reference to a table.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 89 (b), the contents specified in the time-saving variation pattern 2 table 202ad2 will be described. The time-saving variation pattern 2 table 202ad2 is different from the time-saving variation pattern table 202d of the above-described first embodiment in that a special figure variation (special symbol variation) for a predetermined number of times after the end of the big hit (after the big hit game). On the other hand, the difference is that a variation pattern (variation time) in which a specific time is defined is set.

  Specifically, in a case where the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot, the total time of the special symbol changes 1 to 4 times after the end of the jackpot is constant (3 Seconds). Further, in the present embodiment, a selection display for allowing the player to select a game method set during the time saving state until a predetermined period (4 seconds) elapses after the jackpot game ends (FIG. 82 (b) ) Is displayed.

  With such a configuration, the special symbol change corresponding to the reserved ball (reserved symbol) already acquired when the vehicle enters the time-saving state during the period in which the selection display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since it can be easily executed, a special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) that is different from a special symbol variation (for example, the first special symbol) mainly executed by the game method (for example, left-handed game) selected during the time saving state Even if the change of (2 special symbols) is executed, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) set when a hit (big hit, small hit) is won during 1 to 4 rotations after the end of the big hit is changed to a special pattern from the end of the big hit. The timing of stopping and displaying the lottery result of the special symbol of the fourth rotation after the end of the big hit, the timing of stopping and displaying that the lottery result of the special symbol of the third rotation is a hit, The timing for stopping and displaying that the lottery result of the special symbol in the second rotation is a hit and the timing for stopping and displaying that the lottery result of the special symbol in the first rotation are a hit are all constant. are doing.

  With this configuration, the selection display screen (see FIG. 82 (b)) displayed when the time saving state is set is displayed for a predetermined period (at least 3 seconds) regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery. It is possible to use the period during which the selection display screen is displayed, and to use the special symbol lottery (change) corresponding to many reserved balls.

  Further, when a win (small hit, big hit) is won immediately after the time saving state is set, a specific change pattern is executed according to the number of special symbol changes after the time saving state is set. Therefore, when a winning is made within a predetermined period (within a predetermined number of fluctuations of the special symbol (within 1 to 4 rotations)) after the end of the jackpot, the timing of notifying the player of the winning result (the winning (The timing of stopping and displaying the special symbol (third symbol) indicating).

  In the second embodiment, a variation pattern table for selecting a special variation pattern for a variation pattern set in a period from when the time saving state is set to when the special symbol is changed four times is used. However, for a period in which a special fluctuation pattern is selected after the time saving state is set, other periods may be used. For example, the maximum number of reserved balls (4) of the first special symbol, A special variation pattern may be selectable for the number of special symbol variations (8) corresponding to the number (8) obtained by adding the maximum number of reserved balls (4) of the second special symbol. Then, the period from when the time saving state is set to when the change of the special symbol is executed twice may be targeted. Furthermore, in the second embodiment, when a winning is won, a winning-only variation pattern is set. However, whether or not a winning-only variation pattern is set based on the content of the winning is determined. May be determined, and a variation pattern may be set based on the determination result.

  Specifically, of the cases where the winning is won, the case where the big hit is won and the small hit where the small hit A is set (that is, the small hit type in which it is easier to obtain two hits than other small hit types are Only when winning is set (small winning), a variation pattern dedicated to winning may be set. As a result, a great expectation can be given to the player who has noticed that the special symbol variation based on the variation pattern (variation time) different from the normal is being executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 89 (b), the first special change is set as a change pattern (change time) for the special symbol change after the fifth rotation (including the fifth rotation) after the time saving state is set. The design is such that a variation pattern of a variation time shorter in the symbol than in the second special symbol is set. Accordingly, if the special symbol can be continuously changed during the time reduction state, the game in which the first special symbol is changed (the first game, the left-handed game) is the special symbol lottery (change). ) Can be performed many times in a short period of time.

  In FIG. 89 (b), as the contents defined in the time-saving variation pattern 2 table 202ad2 which is referred to when the time-saving state is set, the special figure variation count (special symbol variation count) ) Shows only one type of variation pattern with respect to the special symbol lottery result after the fifth rotation (including the fifth rotation). However, in actuality, a counter (not shown) according to the control process of the main controller 110 The configuration is such that one is selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times according to the value acquired from the loop counter (the value of which is updated), but detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, even in the variation pattern table configured to select one variation pattern from a plurality of variation patterns, a variation pattern having a variation time shorter in the first special symbol than in the second special symbol is set. It is configured to be easily performed. Therefore, if the special symbol can be continuously changed during the time reduction state, the game in which the first special symbol is changed (the first game, the left-handed game) is the special symbol lottery (change). Can be performed in a short period of time. It should be noted that the above-described variation pattern of a short variation time is easy to be set, in all selectable variation patterns, in addition to the case where the variation time of the first special symbol is set shorter than that of the second special symbol, Average fluctuation time per fluctuation when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern that is easy to select is set so that the first special symbol is shorter than the second special symbol, or when all the fluctuation patterns are set as designed. Is set so that the first special symbol is shorter than the second special symbol, or the shortest variation time that can be set according to the variation of the first special symbol is set according to the variation of the second special symbol. A configuration in which the time is set to be shorter than the shortest obtainable fluctuation time is also included. That is, when the player actually plays the pachinko machine 10 in the time saving state, the number of times of change per unit time is the second special symbol for the first game (left-handed game) that executes the variation of the first special symbol. What is necessary is just to be set so that it may become more than.

  The time-saving provision table 202ae differs from the time-saving provision table 202e of the first embodiment in that the time-saving termination conditions (values set in various counters) set for each jackpot type are different from each other. The difference is that the type of the counter for setting the value serving as the end condition is changed (increased). The other elements are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the contents specified in the time saving provision 2 table 202ae will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the time saving provision 2 table 202ae. This time savings grant 2 table 202ae is different from the above-described time savings granting table 202e in that the special figure 1 counter 203ad is replaced with the medium time saving counter 203k, and the special figure 2 counter 203ae is replaced with the small hit C counter 203p. The difference is that the counter 203ac is provided and that the values set (given) to the various counters are different.

  In the second embodiment, as described above, a first game (left-handed game) and a second game (right-handed game) are selected as a plurality of games having different playability during the time reduction state. The first game is executed and the second game is executed, and among the plurality of end conditions (time saving end conditions) for terminating the time saving state, it is easy to be satisfied. The end conditions are configured to be different.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 88 (d), when the jackpot type is “big hit A”, the value of the special figure 1 counter 203ad is “100”, the value of the special figure 2 counter 203ae is “100”, It is defined that the value of the small hit A counter 203m is set to "2", the value of the small hit B counter 203n is set to "100", and the value of the small hit D counter 203ac is set to "100", and the big hit type is "big hit B". In the case of, the value of the special figure 1 counter 203ad is “30”, the value of the special figure 2 counter 203ae is “80”, the value of the small hit A counter 203m is “1”, and the value of the small hit B counter 203n is “3”. ", And the value of the small hit D counter 203ac is set to" 20 ".

  When the jackpot type is “big hit C”, the value of the special figure 1 counter 203ad is “40”, the value of the special figure 2 counter 203ae is “70”, the value of the small hit A counter 203m is “2”, and the small hit is It is defined that the value of the B counter 203n is set to "5" and the value of the small hit D counter 203ac is set to "40". When the big hit type is "big hit D", the value of the special figure 1 counter 203ad is set to "30". "80" for the value of the special figure 2 counter 203ae, "1" for the value of the small hit A counter 203m, "3" for the value of the small hit B counter 203n, and "20" for the value of the small hit D counter 203ac. It is specified to be set.

  That is, when the time saving state (hour saving end condition) corresponding to “big hit A” is set, when the first game is executed, the small hit A is won twice (by the small hit A counter 203m). The time saving end condition that is satisfied (when the value becomes 0) is the time saving end condition that is most easily satisfied, and when the second game is executed, the number of times the second special symbol changes reaches 100 times ( The time reduction termination condition that is satisfied (when the value of the counter 203ae becomes 0 in FIG. 2) is the most easily satisfied time reduction termination condition.

  In addition, when the time saving state (hour saving end condition) corresponding to “big hit B” is set, when the first game is executed, the small hit A is won once (the small hit A counter 203m). The time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the value is 0 is the time-saving end condition that is most easily satisfied. When the second game is executed, the small hit D is won 20 times (the value of the small hit counter 203ac). Is reduced to 0), the time reduction termination condition that is satisfied is the most easily satisfied time reduction termination condition.

  When the time saving state (hour saving end condition) corresponding to “big hit C” is set, when the first game is executed, the small hit A is won twice (the value of the small hit A counter 203m is reduced). When the second game is executed, the number of times the second special symbol fluctuates reaches 70 times (the special figure 2). When the time-saving termination condition that is satisfied (when the value of the counter 203ae becomes 0) is the most easily satisfied time-saving termination condition, and when the time-saving state (time-saving termination condition) corresponding to “big hit D” is set, the above-described “ The same time-saving state (time-saving termination condition) as “big hit B” is set.

  That is, in the state where the time saving state is set, the game method to be executed (selected) is made different (by the first game (left-handed game) and the second game (right-handed game)) to be established. The time-saving termination conditions that are easy to perform can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to perform a different game as a game during the time reduction state.

  Furthermore, according to the jackpot type of the winning jackpot, the time-saving end conditions (values set in various counters) are configured to be different, and the same game (for example, a right-handed game) is established during the time-saving. It is configured to make it easier to reduce the time-saving termination conditions. This makes it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the time saving state ends. In addition, it is possible to give an interest to the jackpot type of the jackpot won this time.

  In the present embodiment, four jackpot types are provided as jackpot types set when a jackpot is won. However, the number of jackpot types is not limited to this, and five or more jackpot types are provided. May be. In this case, a plurality of jackpot types having the same game content (opening period, number of round games, inter-round interval period, ending period) of the jackpot game to be executed when the jackpot is won are provided, and the time-saving termination condition is set for each jackpot type. Should be different. Thereby, based on the content of the jackpot game to be executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the content of the time-saving state (the content of the time-saving termination condition) set after the end of the jackpot game.

  Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88 (d), the time reduction end condition is more easily established in a shorter period when the first game is executed than when the second game is executed. Make up. Thereby, in the first game, the period in which the time reduction state is continuously set (time reduction period) can be shortened.

  In addition, in the second embodiment, a small hit (“small hit A” is set as the small hit type) in which the first game is executed is more likely to obtain two kinds of hits than the second game is executed. It is configured to be easy to win. With such a configuration, the first game is a game that provides a player with a game property of aiming at two types in a short time period, and the second game is a game aiming at one type in a long time period. It can be a game that provides the player with sex.

  Therefore, when the player selects the game method (first game, second game) to be executed during the reduced working hours, it is possible to execute a game having different playability, and to provide the player with a tireless game. be able to. Further, in the second embodiment, since the game period during the time saving state is different between the first game and the second game, the player can select the game method according to the period in which the game can be performed, and Suitable players can be provided with suitable games.

  Furthermore, in the second embodiment, regardless of which game method is selected during the time saving state, the jackpot probability during the time saving state (the probability of winning a jackpot by a special symbol lottery, Since the sum of the probabilities that the ball passes through the specific area and wins the jackpot) is substantially the same (including an error that the player does not notice (including an error of 10% or less, for example)), It is also possible to let the player play the game with peace of mind.

  In the second embodiment, regardless of which jackpot type is set, the time-saving ending condition is set in the first game and the second game so that no advantage or disadvantage can occur to the player. As another configuration, for example, when a predetermined jackpot type is set, a time-saving ending condition is set so that the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and other than the above-described predetermined jackpot type If the specific jackpot type is set, the time saving end condition may be set so that the second game is more advantageous to the player than the first game.

  With this configuration, a game method that is advantageous to the player can be set according to the set jackpot type (executed jackpot game), so that the interest of the game can be improved. In this case, when the game method (first game, second game) advantageous to the player is made different according to the jackpot type, all the jackpot types are considered in consideration of a predetermined distribution rate. When the setting is made as described above, it is preferable that the configuration is such that no advantage and disadvantage can occur to the player when the first game is executed and when the second game is executed. Thereby, when the time saving state is set, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player always selects only one game method.

  In addition, a storage unit is provided for storing a jackpot type (time saving state) set during a predetermined period (for example, a period after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on), and the contents stored in the storage unit ( Notification means for notifying (displaying) the time saving history) to the player may be provided. Thereby, based on the time saving state set in the past, the time saving state set in the future can be predicted, and the game method can be selected. In addition, by using the effect display (big hit effect display) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the big hit game, it is configured to notify the player of a suggestion mode suggesting a game method that is advantageous to the player. May be.

  Returning to FIG. 86, the description will be continued. The small hitting type selection 2 table 202af is different from the small hitting type selection table 202f of the first embodiment in that it is possible to win a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). And that the probability of winning a small hit is changed in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the contents of the small hit type selection 2 table 202af will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 2 table 202af, and FIG. 90 (b) is the contents defined in the special figure 1 small hit type selection 2 table 202af1. FIG. 90 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 2 small hit type selection 2 table af2.

  As shown in FIG. 90A, the small hit type selection 2 table 202af includes a special figure 1 small hit type selection 2 table 202af1, which is referred to when executing the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). It has a special figure 2 small hit type selection 2 table 202af2 which is referred to when executing a lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2).

  As shown in FIG. 90 (b), the special map 1 small hit type selection 2 table 202af1 indicates that the range of the acquired small hit type counter value C5 is “0 to 89” and the small hit type is “small hit A”. And "90-99", and "small hit B" as the small hit type.

  Here, the small hitting type “small hitting A” is the same as the “small hitting A” of the first embodiment described above, and when passing through V (when the ball passes through the specific area during the small hitting game, 2 The "big hit A" is set as the big hit type of the big hit that is set (executed) when the hit is obtained. The “small hit B” is the same as the “small hit B” in the first embodiment described above, and is determined when the ball passes through V (when the ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game, when two kinds of hits are obtained ) Is set to “big hit B” as the big hit type of big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 90 (c), the special symbol 2 small hit type selection 2 table 202af2 indicates that the acquired small hit type counter value C5 is "0" and the small hit type is "small hit A". , “1 to 99”, “small hit D” is defined as the small hit type.

  Here, the small hit type “small hit D” is a small hit type in which a small hit game in which a small hit expectation degree is the lowest (about 5%) among a plurality of small hit types is executed, and V passing “Big hit B” is set as the big hit type of the big hit that is set (executed) at the time (when the ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game and when two kinds of hits are obtained). That is, it is the most disadvantageous small hit for the player.

  The open scenario 2 table 202ag differs from the open scenario table 202g of the above-described first embodiment in that an open scenario corresponding to a small hit D is specified in place of the open scenario corresponding to the small hit C. Other than that, it is the same. In the open scenario corresponding to the small hit D, in the open scenario corresponding to the small hit C, the ON period of the flow path solenoid 650k is shortened, and the V passage (the passage of the ball to the specific area) becomes more difficult. The point is different from the point that the opening scenario set at the time of passing V (when two types are acquired) is changed to 15 rounds and is changed to 5 rounds, so that detailed illustration is omitted.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 86 (b), in the RAM 203 of the second embodiment, a small hit D counter 203ac is provided instead of the small hit C counter 203p, a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203aa, and a special symbol. The present embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that a 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab, a special figure 1 counter 203ad, and a special figure 2 counter 203ae are added.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab have the same configuration as the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b of the first embodiment described above. Since it is provided for the second special symbol, detailed description is omitted. However, when a ball enters the second entrance 640 which is a trigger for a lottery (change) of the second special symbol, the second It is variably set when a special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is executed.

  The small hit D counter 203ac is a counter for measuring the number of wins of the small hit in which the small hit D is set as the small hit type until one of the time saving end conditions set during the time saving state is satisfied, In the jackpot control process 2 (S1554 in FIG. 98), when it is determined that the ending effect is the end timing (the jackpot end timing) (S1612 in FIG. 98: Yes), it is defined in the time-saving provision 2 table 202ae. The value is set (S1653 in FIG. 98).

  Then, in the small hitting time saving update process (S405 in FIG. 41) executed in the small hit start setting process (S221 in FIG. 94) of the special symbol variation process 2 (S154 in FIG. 94), the small hit that has been won this time. When it is determined that the small hit type is small hit D, the counter value is decremented by 1 (not shown). When it is determined that the value of the small hit D counter 203ac after the subtraction is 0, the time saving end condition is satisfied, so that the normal state is set as the gaming state. In the second embodiment, a plurality of time saving end conditions for terminating the time saving state are set, and even if any of the time saving end conditions is satisfied (for example, a time saving time based on the number of special symbol changes). Even if the end condition is satisfied), the value of the counter is set to 0 (reset). As described above, even when a time-saving termination condition other than the time-saving termination condition (fifth time-saving termination condition) referring to the value of the small-hit D counter 203ac among a plurality of time-saving termination conditions is satisfied, the small-hit D counter Since the value of 203ac is set to 0 (reset), it is possible to suppress a situation in which the process of subtracting the value of the small hit D counter 203ac is continued despite the end of the time saving state. Also, no matter which of the plurality of time-saving termination conditions is satisfied, the value of various counters used to determine whether the time-saving termination condition is satisfied when terminating the time-saving state is set to an initial value (0). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the processing after the time-saving state is ended from becoming complicated.

  The special figure 1 counter 203ad is a counter for measuring the number of changes of the first special symbol executed during the period in which the time reduction state is set, and ends the time reduction state when the time reduction state is set. A value corresponding to the number of changes of the first special symbol set as an ending condition for making the first special symbol change is set, and the value set every time the first special symbol changes during the time saving state is decremented by one. Then, it is referred to when determining whether or not to end the time reduction state, and when the value of the counter is 0, processing for ending the time reduction state is executed.

  The special figure 2 counter 203ae is a counter for measuring the number of changes of the second special symbol executed during the period in which the time reduction state is set, and ends the time reduction state when the time reduction state is set. A value corresponding to the number of times of change of the second special symbol set as an end condition for causing the change is set, and the value set every time the second special symbol changes during the time saving state is decremented by one. Then, it is referred to when determining whether or not to end the time reduction state, and when the value of the counter is 0, processing for ending the time reduction state is executed.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the end condition (time saving end condition) for ending the time saving state is established based on the number of times of the change of the first special symbol and the number of times of the change of the second special symbol. A time-saving termination condition is provided. Thereby, when the first game (game in which only the first special symbol fluctuates) or the second game (game in which only the second special symbol fluctuates) is executed, dedicated time-saving termination conditions can be satisfied. Can be

  In the second embodiment, a special figure 1 counter 203ad and a special figure 2 counter 202ae are provided to measure the number of times of change of the first special symbol and the number of times of change of the second special symbol. However, other configurations may be used. For example, the number of times the special symbol is changed during the time saving state (the total change obtained by adding the number of changes of the first special symbol and the number of changes of the second special symbol) Means (equivalent to the counter 203k during the working hours of the first embodiment), and means for measuring either the number of times the first special symbol fluctuates or the number of times the second special symbol fluctuates (for example, a special figure). 1 counter 203ae), and performing a process of subtracting the special figure 1 change number from the total change number to calculate the change number of the special figure 2 (second special symbol). good.

  With this configuration, among the time-saving end conditions, as the change number end condition that is satisfied based on the change number of the special symbol, the end condition that is satisfied based on the change number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol The end condition that is satisfied based on the number of times of change of the special symbol and the end condition that is satisfied based on the total number of times of change of the special symbol can be managed using two counters. In order to achieve the same effect, the value measured by the special figure 1 counter 203ae (subtracted value) of the second embodiment and the value measured by the special figure 2 counter 203af (subtracted value) are added. May be configured to calculate the total number of changes.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 91A, the ROM 222 according to the second embodiment is different from the ROM 222 according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 26A) in that a state display selection table 222b and a final state display The difference is that a suspended display selection table 222aa is provided instead of the table 222c.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 91B, the RAM 223 of the second embodiment is different from the RAM 223 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 26B) in that the provisional contact determination flag 223h and the provisional The flag 223j, the time reduction lower limit flag 223k, the quasi-end condition flag 223m, and the fluctuation flag before the time reduction end 223n are deleted, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223aa, the right-handed flag 223ab, the left-handed flag 223ac, and the time-saving start flag 223ad. , And a time reduction counter 223ae is provided. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment.

  The hold display selection table 222aa is a winning symbol for the hold symbol (see FIG. 84 (a)) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the hold symbol of the special symbol acquired during the time saving state. It is referred to when selecting a display mode (see FIG. 84 (a)) for notifying the player of the information preliminary determination result. In addition, a result of determining whether or not the special symbol is accepted is indicated (notified) to the player in advance.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 92, the contents specified in the hold display selection table 222aa will be described. FIG. 92 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hold display selection table 222aa. In the second embodiment, a holding mode effect for setting a holding mode design for the holding pattern, which is the same as the state display mode set for the special symbol change being executed in the above-described first embodiment, is executed. (See FIG. 84).

  The hold display selection table 222aa is a table that is referred to when selecting the display mode of the hold mode effect, and is temporarily stored based on the temporary time information stored in the temporary time information update area 223i. Various hold display modes are defined based on the obtained time saving information and the acquired value of the state effect counter 223o. The value indicating the hold display mode described in the hold display selection table 222aa is the same as the status display mode of the above-described first embodiment, and the display mode shown with reference to FIG. Since it is defined correspondingly, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The contents defined in the hold display selection table 222aa will be specifically described. The result of the current success / failure determination stored in the temporary time reduction information update area 223i, that is, the special information included in the winning information corresponding to the current process. The symbol lottery result is "big hit", and information indicating the big hit (already hit information) is not stored in the temporary time reduction information update area 223i at a stage before the current processing is executed (the hit hit). If the pre-end information indicating that the pre-hour saving end condition is satisfied is stored (the pre-end information is "present"), the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is set to "0". The hold display mode “3” is defined in the range “69”, and the hold display mode “9” is defined in the range “70 to 99”.

  In addition, the result of the success / failure determination this time is “big hit”, the hit information is “none”, and the information before ending is “none”, and the value of the state effect counter 223o is in the range of “0 to 49”. The hold display mode “3” defines the hold display mode “1” in the range of “50 to 69”, and the range “70 to 99” defines “9”.

  Further, when the hit information is “present”, “−” indicating that the hold display mode is not set in the range of the value of the state effect counter 223o in the range of “0 to 69” regardless of the presence / absence of the information of the change before the end is displayed. , "70 to 99", a hold display mode "9" is defined.

  As described above, the winning information corresponding to the pending symbol for which the present suspension display mode is to be set and the winning information already stored in the temporary time reduction information update area 223i (the winning information obtained before the current winning information are acquired). Prize information) and the result of the determination of the success or failure of the special symbol included in the information, and the state of the hold display is variably set according to the progress of the time saving state. It can be suggested in advance whether or not the time-saving state ends.

  Therefore, when a hold display mode in which the time-saving state is likely to end is displayed, it is possible to motivate the player to win a jackpot before the hold display mode is displayed. In addition, it is possible to set a plurality of time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state, thereby suppressing a sudden reduction of the time-saving state in a gaming machine in which the period in which the time-saving state is continuously set is difficult to understand. It is possible to suppress the execution of a game that gives the player a dissatisfaction.

  Next, this is a case where the result of the success / failure determination is “small hit A”, the hit information is “none”, and the information before the end is “present”, and the value of the state effect counter 223o is “0 to 49”. , The pending display mode “5” is defined in the range of “50 to 69”, the pending display mode “5” is defined in the range of “70 to 99”, and the information before end is “none”. When the value of the state effect counter 223o is in the range of “0 to 49”, the hold display mode “7” is in the range of “50 to 69”, and the hold display mode “7” is in the range of “70 to 99”. "9" is defined in the range.

  Further, when the hit information is “present”, “−” indicating that the hold display mode is not set in the range of the value of the state effect counter 223o in the range of “0 to 69” regardless of the presence / absence of the information of the change before the end is displayed. , "70 to 99", a hold display mode "9" is defined.

  On the other hand, this is a case where the result of the success / failure determination is “small hit B, D”, the hit information is “none”, and the information before the end is “present”, and the value of the state effect counter 223o is “0 to 49”. "," 5 "is defined in the range of" 50-69 "," 6 "is defined in the range of" 70-99 ", and" 9 "is defined in the range of" 70-99 ". And the hold display mode “2” is in the range of “0 to 49” and the hold display mode “4” is in the range of “50 to 69”, and “70 to 99”. "9" is defined in the range.

  Further, when the hit information is “present”, “−” indicating that the hold display mode is not set in the range of the value of the state effect counter 223o in the range of “0 to 69” regardless of the presence / absence of the information of the change before the end is displayed. , "70 to 99", a hold display mode "9" is defined.

  This is the case where the result of this pass / fail judgment is "out", the hit information is "none", and the information before ending is "present", and the value of the state effect counter 223o is held and displayed in the range of "0 to 49". The mode “1” is a case where the hold display mode “4” is defined in a range of “50 to 69”, the mode “9” is defined in a range of “70 to 99”, and the pre-end information is “none”. The hold display mode "1" is defined in the range of the state effect counter 223o of "0 to 69", and "9" is defined in the range of "70 to 99".

  Further, when the hit information is “present”, “−” indicating that the hold display mode is not set in the range of the value of the state effect counter 223o in the range of “0 to 69” regardless of the presence / absence of the information of the change before the end is displayed. , "70 to 99", a hold display mode "9" is defined.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the hold display selection table 222aa is described so that the same display mode is selected for the same condition as the situation display mode of the first embodiment. I have. If the winning information previously obtained includes information for winning a jackpot (winning / failure determination result), the display modes that can be set (selected) for the subsequent symbols are limited (holding display). Only the mode “9” (see FIG. 15) is selected). Therefore, in the case where the holding display mode is selected and displayed for each of the plurality of holding symbols, it is possible to provide an effect without a sense of incongruity.

  As shown in FIG. 92, in the second embodiment, the display mode is configured to be changed with a high probability with respect to the acquired prize information (reserved symbols). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, determining means for determining whether or not to actually display the hold display mode selected in the hold display selection table 222aa, and changing the display mode of the hold symbol according to the determination result of the determiner. Alternatively, when the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is within a predetermined range (for example, “0 to 39”), the hold display mode may not be selected. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress easily grasping the future game contents (whether the completion of the time-saving state or the presence or absence of the jackpot) only by the display mode of the reserved symbols.

  Furthermore, since the hold display mode “9” is selected at a predetermined probability regardless of the information included in the acquired winning information (holding symbol), future games are performed only by the display mode of the hold symbol. It is possible to further suppress the contents (whether the completion of the time-saving state or whether the jackpot has been won) is easily grasped.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment.

  When a command related to the second special symbol is received among the reserved ball number commands transmitted from the main control device 110, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223aa is set to a second special ball number according to the content of the command. This is a counter for updating the number of reserved balls of the symbol. Note that the detailed configuration is the same as that of the above-described special symbol 1 pending ball counter 223a except that the target command is changed, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The right-handed flag 223ab is a flag indicating that it is a period during which the player executes the right-handed game (second game), and is set to on to indicate that the right-handed game (second game) (Game). The right-hitting flag 223ab indicates that the winning information received in the gaming state setting process (S2351 in FIG. 101A) executed in the winning information-related process 2 (see S2251 in FIG. 100) is a special figure 1 If it is determined that the winning information is not the special winning information related to (1 special symbol) (that is, the winning information is related to special figure 2 (second special symbol)) (S3002 in FIG. 101A: No), it is set to ON. You.

  It is referred to in the game content determination processing (S2352 in FIG. 101 (b)) and the hold display setting processing (S2353 in FIG. 102), and is set to off when the time reduction state ends.

  The left-hitting flag 223ac is a flag indicating that it is a period in which the player is allowed to execute a right-handed game (second game). (Game). The left-hitting flag 223ac indicates that the winning information received in the gaming state setting process (S2351 in FIG. 101 (a)) executed in the winning information related process 2 (see S2251 in FIG. 100) is a special figure 1 If it is determined that the winning information is related to (one special symbol), the winning information is set to ON (S3002 in FIG. 101A: Yes).

  It is referred to in the game content determination processing (S2352 in FIG. 101 (b)) and the hold display setting processing (S2353 in FIG. 102), and is set to off when the time reduction state ends.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the game method (first game or second game) when the time saving state is set can be selected by adjusting the direction in which the player actually fires the ball. It is configured as follows. Then, the game method selected by the player is determined as an appropriate game method during the time reduction state, and the game method not selected by the player is determined as an inappropriate game method during the time reduction state. .

  In the second embodiment, the entrance where the ball first enters after the time saving state is set is in the left hitting area (the area where the ball can flow down (pass) when performing a left hitting game). The first ball entrance 64 provided (see FIG. 2) or the second ball entrance provided in a right-handed area (an area where a ball can flow down (pass) when performing a right-handed game). 640 is determined by analyzing the winning command transmitted from the main control device 110, and an appropriate game method during the time reduction state is determined based on the determination result. In the set state, it is sufficient if it is configured to determine whether or not an appropriate game is being played, and to execute an error notification if the appropriate game is not being played. A configuration other than the configuration of the embodiment may be used.

  For example, a game method in which a player is provided with operating means that is operable to perform a jackpot game or a jackpot game is completed, and a time-saving state is set, and a game method during a time-saving state for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) The selection may be made by operating the operation means, and an appropriate game method may be set when the ball passes through a game area corresponding to the game method selected by the operation means. This makes it possible to more reliably set a game method desired by the player as an appropriate game method.

  Further, a configuration may be made so that the player can variably set an appropriate game method while the time saving state is set. With this configuration, the game method is varied while predicting the update status of the time saving end condition, so that the player can actively select the game (to set the game method) so as to be in a more advantageous time saving state. Game). In this case, the fact that the game method is to be changed is set by operating the operating means, and even if any game (the first game or the second game) is executed during the game method variable period, it is inappropriate. It is good to configure so as not to be discriminated as a game. Thereby, the change operation of the game method performed during the time saving state can be smoothly performed.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when one ball enters a specific entrance, an appropriate game method is set according to the type of the entrance into which the ball entered. However, for example, an appropriate game method may be set according to the type of the entrance into which a predetermined number (for example, two) of balls have entered after the time saving state has been set. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a ball from being shot in a game area corresponding to an undesired game method due to an erroneous operation, and to set an incorrect game method.

  The time reduction start flag 223ad is a flag for indicating that the time reduction state has been set as the gaming state, and indicates that the time reduction state has been set by being set to ON. The time-saving start flag 223ad determines that a time-saving related command has been received (S2215 in FIG. 99: Yes) in a command determination process 2 (see S2163 in FIG. 99), which will be described later. When it is determined that the information is time saving setting information (information indicating that the time saving state has been set) (S2252 in FIG. 99: Yes), it is set to ON (S2253 in FIG. 99).

  Then, it is referred to in the effect setting process 2 (see S2851 in FIG. 104) (S3301 in FIG. 104), and when it is determined that the switch is on, 4000 is set to the value of a time-saving time counter 223ae described later (S3302 in FIG. 104). ), And the flag is set to off (S3303 in FIG. 104). In other words, the time-saving start flag 223ad is used to determine that the time-saving state has been set on the sound lamp control device 113 side, and is only used when the time-saving state is set to ON (the time-saving state). Is performed only when is set).

  The time-saving clock counter 223ae is a counter for continuing an elapsed time (elapsed time) after the time-saving state is set. When the time-saving state is set, a predetermined value is set, and the value is subtracted. Thus, the elapsed time from when the time reduction state is set is determined. If it is determined in the effect setting process 2 (see S2851 in FIG. 104) that the time-saving start flag 223ad is set to ON (S3301: Yes in FIG. 104), the time-saving time counter 223ae has a value of 4000. Is set (S3302).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 93, a flow of a game in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 93 is a schematic diagram of FIG. 28 schematically showing a game flow of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 28, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, during the normal gaming state (during the normal state), as described above, the left hitting game is performed and the special 1 game aiming at the first entrance 64 is executed. Is done. Here, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won, the game state changes to a different game state after the end of the jackpot, depending on the type of the won jackpot.

  Specifically, if the jackpot type of the winning jackpot is the jackpot C (50% of the whole), the normal state is set again after the jackpot ends, and if the jackpot type is the jackpot A or the jackpot B, the jackpot ends. It is configured to shift to a time-saving game state (time-saving state) which is a game state more advantageous to the player than the normal state later.

  During the normal state, a ball is inserted into the second entrance 640 to perform a lottery of the second special symbol, and when a big hit is won, the normal state is set as a game state after the end of the big hit. Is configured. This is because, as described above with reference to FIG. 3, even if the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment performs a right-handed game during a normal state (during a normal game), the ball does not enter the second entrance 640. (It is difficult to perform), so that the act of executing the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state is regarded as an illegal act, and the player who has committed the illegal act is not allowed to perform an advantageous game. It is a measure for. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, it is configured such that the lottery (game) of the second special symbol can be performed more advantageously by the player than the lottery of the first special symbol during the time saving state. Therefore, there is a possibility that a lottery of the second special symbol may be performed by performing wrongdoing. Therefore, by performing the above-described countermeasures, it is possible to prevent the second special symbol from being drawn by fraud.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since there is no configuration for holding the winning information of the second special symbol (winning information acquired when the ball enters the second entrance 640), for example, The winning information of the second special symbol is held and stored during the state (while the electric accessory 640a is easily moved to the protruding position), and the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state is performed based on the held winning information. (Fluctuation) is not executed. This makes it possible to reliably prevent the lottery (change) of the second special symbol from being executed in a state where the normal state is set as the game state when a normal game is being played.

  When the time-saving game state (time-saving state) is set as the gaming state, the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640 by the opening operation (projection operation) of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640. As a result, a right-handed game is performed, and a special 2 game aiming at the second entrance 640 is executed.

  Here, when a small hit is won by lottery of the second special symbol, the V winning device 650 is opened as a small hit game, and the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 detects a ball (ball). (By passing through the specific area), the big hit game is started. In the present embodiment, when the big hit game is set (executed) via the small hit game, the time reduction state is set as the gaming state after the big hit game ends. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player who has won the jackpot via the small hit game from giving discomfort.

  In the present embodiment, the ball can pass through the specific area during the small hit game depending on the small hit type (small hit A to C) set when the small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol. It is configured to execute a small hit game having different characteristics (the possibility that the V switch 650e3 detects a ball).

  In addition, in the present embodiment, a special symbol (a first special symbol or a special symbol) is set as an end condition (time saving end condition) for ending a time-saving state that is a gaming state advantageous to the player (a gaming state more advantageous than the normal state). (2 special symbols) the number of times of change (number of lotteries) reaches the specified number of times of change (100 times). As a result, the number-of-operations termination condition (second time-saving termination condition) that is satisfied when the number of wins of the small win (the number of operations of the V winning device 650 operated based on the small win) reaches the specified number of operations. , Is set.

  Although details will be described later, the second time-saving end condition is further configured to be set according to the small hit type (small hit game to be executed) set when the small hit is won. I have.

  Then, in a state (situation) in which the time reduction state is set, before the first time reduction end condition or the second time reduction end condition described above is satisfied, the special symbol jackpot lottery is won (per kind). Win), or win a small hit by a special pattern lottery, and during the small hit game (small hit game according to the small hit type) according to the winning small hit, pass the ball to the specific area and win the big hit In the case of acquiring (winning two types), the time saving state is repeatedly set.

  On the other hand, in the state (situation) in which the time saving state is set, the first time saving end condition (the end condition according to the number of times of the special symbol change) or the second time saving condition before acquiring one or two types. When any of the time reduction end conditions (end conditions according to the small hit win (operation of the V winning device 650)) is satisfied, the gaming state is shifted (set) from the time reduction state to the normal state.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment configured as described above has a possibility of terminating the time reduction state when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery executed when the time reduction state is set ( Both the possibility that the second time-saving end condition is satisfied) and the possibility of winning two types can be provided to the player. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game (lottery of the second special symbol) executed during the time saving state, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, when a time-saving state is set and a jackpot is won by lottery of the first special symbol, the time-saving state is set as a gaming state after the end of the jackpot game. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, the normal state is set as the game state, that is, the state in which the left-handed game is being performed, and the number of balls to be retained (the number of stored memories) of the first special symbol is the upper limit. In the case of a number (4), a jackpot is won, and in the “first special symbol change (lottery) during the time saving state” which can be executed when the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is over, the jackpot is won. Also, it is possible to suppress providing a result that is disadvantageous to the player to the player.

<Control Processing Executed by Main Control Device 110 in Second Embodiment>
In the control processing in the second embodiment, the contents of the control processing in the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 are changed with respect to the first embodiment. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second embodiment, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) is changed to the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 94) in the first embodiment described above, and is executed in the special symbol variation process. The time saving number updating process 2 (see FIG. 95) is executed instead of the time saving number updating process (see FIG. 42), and the starting winning process (see FIG. 43) is changed to the starting winning process 2 (see FIG. 96). The difference is that the prefetching process 2 (see FIG. 97) is executed instead of the prefetching process (see FIG. 44) executed in the start winning process. Furthermore, the difference is that the jackpot control process (see FIG. 52) is changed to the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 98), and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the details of the special symbol variation process 2 (S154) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 2 (S154). In the special symbol variation process 2, the point for acquiring the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab and the time saving number update process are different from the special symbol variation process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38). In that a time saving update process 2 (see FIG. 95) is executed instead of.

  When the special symbol variation process 2 (S154) is executed, the processes of S201 and S202 are executed in the same manner as the above-described special symbol variation process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38). In the process of S202, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is changing (S202). If the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is not changing (S202). : No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab (S251), and the acquired value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab It is determined whether (N2) is greater than 0 (S252).

  If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is not 0 (S252: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is subtracted by 1 (S253) and changed by the calculation. A special symbol 2 reserved ball count command indicating the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 203ab is set (S254). After the special symbol 2 reserved ball count command is set by the process of S254, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa is shifted (S255). After that, the process of S210 described above is executed, and this process ends.

  In the process of S252, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is 0 (S252: No), the special symbol variation process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38). Similarly, the processing of S206 to S210 is performed, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is changing (S202: Yes), the processes from S211 to S213 are performed in the same manner as the special symbol variation process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38). Is performed. In the process of S213, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a big hit (S213: Yes), the processes of S214 to S218 are executed in the same manner as the above-described special symbol change process (see FIG. 38). To end.

  In the process of S213, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S213: No), the process goes to the time saving number update process (see FIG. 42) of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) in the first embodiment. Instead, the time saving number update process 2 is executed (S271). This time saving number update process 2 (S271) is a process for updating the time saving number and setting the gaming state to the normal state, similarly to the time saving number updating process (see FIG. 42). The details of the time saving update process 2 (S271) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the time saving number updating process 2 (S271) is completed, the processes in S220, S221, and S218 are performed in the same manner as the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment, and then this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 95, a description will be given of the time saving number update process 2 (S271) executed in the special symbol change process 2 (S154 of FIG. 94). FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving number update process 2 (S271). This time savings frequency update process 2 (S271) subtracts the time savings frequency for the variation of the first special symbol from the time savings frequency updating process of the above-described first embodiment (see FIG. 42), and sets the time saving ending condition. Is different in that it is determined whether or not is established, and the other processes are the same. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the time saving number updating process 2 (S271) is executed, the processes of S601 and S602 are executed in the same manner as the time saving number updating process (see FIG. 42) of the first embodiment described above. After the processing of S602 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the current fluctuation is the fluctuation of the special figure 2 (S651). When it is determined that the current fluctuation is the fluctuation of the special figure 2 (S651: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 counter 203ae is decremented by 1 (S652), and the processing shifts to S653. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S651 that the current fluctuation is not the fluctuation of the special figure 2 (that is, the fluctuation of the special figure 1) (S651: No), the value of the special figure 1 counter 203ad is set to 1 It subtracts (S654), and it transfers to the process of S653.

  In the process of S653, a remaining time reduction command indicating the value of various counters is set (S653), and then, whether any of the value of the time reduction medium counter 203k, the special figure 1 counter 203ad, and the special figure 2 counter 203ae is zero. It is determined (S655). If it is determined that none of the values of the time reduction counter 203k, the special figure 1 counter 203ad, and the special figure 2 counter 203ae are not 0 (S655: No), this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S655, when it is determined that any of the time-saving medium time counter 203k, the special figure 1 counter 203ad, and the special figure 2 counter 203ae is 0 (S651: Yes), the first embodiment described above. The processing from S605 to S607 is executed in the same manner as the time saving number update processing (see FIG. 42), and this processing ends.

  Next, the contents of the start winning processing 2 (S155) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the content of the start winning process 2 (S155). In this start winning process 2 (S155), in addition to the above-described start winning process (see FIG. 43) of the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not there is a win (start win) in the second ball entrance 640, and the second process is performed. When there is a start winning prize at the entrance 640, a process for holding the values indicated by the various random number counters and a process for prefetching the lottery result in the special symbol from the values indicated by the held various random counters. Is added, and a prefetch process 2 is executed instead of the prefetch process (see FIG. 44).

  When the start winning process 2 (S155) is started, first, the process of S701 is executed similarly to the above-described start winning process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 43). In the processing of S701, when it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S701: Yes), the processing of S702 and S703 described above is executed.

  Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S701: No), or even if there is a prize in the first entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is 4 If not less than (S703: No), the process proceeds to S753. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S701: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203b is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the above-mentioned S704 is performed. The processing of S706 is executed.

  When the processing of S706 is completed, it is next determined whether the present time is during a time reduction or a special symbol jackpot (S751). If it is determined that the present time is during a time reduction or a special symbol jackpot (S751: Yes), the present process is terminated. In the process of S751, if it is determined that the present time is not during the working hours reduction or the special symbol jackpot (S751: No), the pre-reading process 2 (S752) is executed, and the process proceeds to S753.

  In the processing of S701, when the ball entrance to the first entrance 64 is not detected (S701: No), there is a prize to the first entrance 64, and the special symbol 1 pending ball counter 203b In the case where the value (N1) is 4, which is the maximum value (S703: No), and in the process of S753 which is executed when the process of S752 ends, the ball has entered the second entrance 640. It is determined whether or not it is (S753). In the process of S753, similarly to the process of S701, the incoming ball to the second entrance 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. When it is determined that the ball has entered the second entrance 640 (S753: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is acquired (S754), and the special symbol 2 reserved ball is obtained. It is determined whether the value (N2) of the number counter 203ab is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S755).

  Then, whether there is no ball entering the second entrance 640 (S753: No), or even if there is a prize in the second entrance 640, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is changed. If it is not less than 4 (S755: No), the process proceeds to the prefetching process 2 (S752). On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second entrance 640 (S753: Yes) and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is less than 4 (S755: Yes), the special symbol 2 is reserved. The value (N2) of the ball counter 203ab is incremented by 1 (S756). Then, a special figure 2 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab changed by the calculation is set (S757).

  The special figure 2 reserved ball count command set here is also stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 and executed by the MPU 201, similarly to the special figure 1 reserved ball number command set in the processing of S705. In the external output process (S1501) of the main process described above (see FIG. 51), it is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the special figure 2 reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab from the special figure 2 reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 2 stored in the RAM 223. It is stored in the reserved ball number counter 223aa.

  After the special figure 2 pending ball count command is set by the processing of S757, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above. Is stored in the first area of the free symbol reserve area (special figure 2 reserve first area to special figure 2 reserve fourth area) of the special symbol 2 reserve ball storage area 203aa of the RAM 203 (S758). In the process of S758, similarly to the process of S706, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 203ab is referred to, and if the value is 0, the special figure 2 reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the special figure 2 reserved second area is used. If the value is 2, the special figure 2 reserved third area is used. If the value is 3, the special figure 2 reserved fourth area is used. , Respectively, as the first area.

  Next, when the processing of S758 is completed, the process proceeds to the pre-reading processing 2 (S752), and this processing ends.

  Next, the contents of the prefetching process 2 (S752) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the content of the prefetching process 2 (S752). The pre-reading process 2 (S752) in the second embodiment is different from the pre-reading process (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment described above in that the pre-reading process is referred to when there is a new prize in the first entrance 64. Instead of the random number per hit table 202a, the special figure 1 big hit type selection table 202b1, and the fluctuation pattern table 202d (the normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 or the time reduction fluctuation pattern table 202d2), the first random number 2 table 202aa and the special figure 1 Point referring to the big hit type selection 2 table 202ab1, the special figure 1 small hit type selection 2 table 202af1, and the variation pattern 2 table 202ad (normal variation pattern table 202ad1 or time-saving variation pattern table 202ad2), lottery in the second special symbol Add look-ahead for results It differs in a point, but is otherwise identical. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the prefetch process 2 (S752) is executed, first, the same process of S801 as the prefetch process (see FIG. 44) in the above-described first embodiment is executed. In the processing of S801, when there is no new winning in the first entrance 64 (S851: No), the processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new prize in the first entrance 64 (S851: Yes), the special symbol 1 random number 2 table aa1, the special figure 1 big hit type selection 2 table 202ab1, and the special figure 1 small hit type selection 2 table Based on the 202af1 and the fluctuation pattern 2 table 202ad (normal fluctuation pattern table 202ad1 or time reduction fluctuation pattern table 202ad2), a lottery result, a big hit type, a small hit type, and a fluctuation pattern are acquired in advance (S852).

  Next, the winning information command including the big hit determination result, the big hit type, the small hit type, and the variation pattern acquired in the process of S852 is set (S853), and the process shifts to S854. On the other hand, in the processing of S851, even when there is no new winning in the first entrance 64 (S851: No), the processing shifts to the processing of S854.

  In the process of S854, it is determined whether or not there is a new prize in the second entrance 640 (S854). If the result of the determination is that there is no new winning in the second entrance 640 (S854: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new prize in the second entrance 640 (S854: Yes), the special symbol 2 random number 2 table aa2, the special figure 2 big hit type selection 2 table 202ab2, and the special figure 2 small hit type selection 2 table Based on the 202af2 and the fluctuation pattern 2 table 202ad (normal fluctuation pattern table 202ad1 or time reduction fluctuation pattern table 202ad2), the lottery result, the big hit type, the small hit type, and the fluctuation pattern are acquired in advance (S855).

  Next, the winning information command including the big hit determination result, the big hit type, the small hit type, and the fluctuation pattern acquired in the processing of S855 is set (S856), and this processing ends.

  Next, the content of the jackpot control process 2 (S1554) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot control process 2 (S1554). The jackpot control process 2 (S1554) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113, instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment. This is different from the above-described jackpot control process (see FIG. 52) in that the time saving content (time saving end condition) set at the end of the jackpot control (end timing of the ending effect) is changed. .

  When the jackpot control process 2 (S1554) is started, first, the same processes as those in S1601 to S1612 of the above-described jackpot control process (see FIG. 52) are executed, and in the process of S1612, it is the end timing of the ending effect. If it is determined (S1612: Yes), then it is determined whether the time of winning the jackpot is being reduced (S1651). When it is determined that the time of winning the jackpot is being reduced (S1651: Yes), the process proceeds to S1653. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot winning time is not during the time reduction (that is, in the normal game state) (S1651: No), it is determined whether or not the special game being executed is the big hit C (5R short time no big hit). It is determined (S1652).

  If it is determined that the jackpot winning time is the normal gaming state (S1651: No), and if it is determined in the process of S1652 that it is not the big hit C (5R short or no big hit) (S1613: No), or in the process of S1651 When it is determined that the time of winning the jackpot is during the time saving (S1651: Yes), the time saving ending condition corresponding to each jackpot type is set based on the time saving giving 2 table 202ae (see FIG. 88 (d)) (S1653). ).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the time of winning the jackpot is the normal gaming state (S1651: No), and in the processing of S1652, it is determined that the jackpot is the big hit C (5R short shorts) (S1652: Yes), or S1653. Is completed, the same processing as S1617 to S1620 of the above-described jackpot control processing (see FIG. 52) is executed, and this processing ends.

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Second Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 99 to FIG. 105, control processing contents of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the command determination processing (see FIG. 56) is replaced with the command determination processing 2 (see FIG. 99), and the winning information-related processing (see FIG. 57). The point changed to winning information related processing 2 (see FIG. 100), the point that variable display setting processing (see FIG. 62) is changed to variable display setting processing 2 (see FIG. 103), and the effect setting processing (see FIG. 63) Was replaced with effect setting process 2 (FIG. 104), detailed description of various counter updating processes (see FIG. 105 (a)) was added, and effect updating process (see FIG. 105 (b)) was detailed. This point is different from the point where a simple description is added, and the other points are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the command determination process 2 (S2163 in FIG. 99) executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 2 (S2163). This command determination process 2 (S2163) is different from the command determination process of the above-described first embodiment (S2113 in FIG. 56) in that a process executed when a winning information command is received from the main control device 110 is winning information. The difference is that the related process (see FIG. 57) is changed to the winning information related process 2 (see FIG. 100), and that the content of the process to be executed when a time-saving related command is received is changed. Are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the command determination process 2 (S2163 in FIG. 99) is executed, the processes in S2201 to S2209 that are the same as the above-described command determination process in the first embodiment (S2113 in FIG. 56) are executed. In the processing of S2209, if it is determined that the command received this time is a winning information command (S2209: Yes), the winning information related processing 2 is executed (S2251), and thereafter, the process proceeds to S2217. The details of the winning information related processing 2 executed in the processing of S2251 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2209, when it is determined that the command received this time is not a winning information command (S2209: No), the same process as the command determination process of the above-described first embodiment (S2113 of FIG. 56) is performed. The processing of S2211 to S2215 is executed. If it is determined in the processing of S2215 that the command received this time is a command related to the time saving (S2215: Yes), the content of the command related to the time saving is set next. It is determined whether the information, that is, the information transmitted from main controller 110 when the time saving state is newly set (S2252).

  In the process of S2252, when it is determined that the information received this time is the time saving setting information (S2252: Yes), the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON (S2253), and the time saving stored in the time saving information update area 223g. The information is updated (S2254), and the process moves to S2217. In the process of S2254, a value serving as a time saving termination condition is set in various counters based on the information included in the command received in this time that is related to the time saving. Specifically, for example, a command including the time saving setting information transmitted at the timing of the end of the jackpot game in which the jackpot type is the jackpot B (the time saving corresponding to the content set in S1614 of the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 98)) Command), the value of the special figure 1 counter 203ad is "30", the value of the special figure 2 counter 203ae is "80", and the small hitting A counter is referred to with reference to the time saving addition 2 table 202ae. The value of 203m is set to "1", the value of the small hit B counter 203n is set to "3", and the value of the small hit D counter 203ac is set to "20" (see FIG. 88 (d)).

  Returning to FIG. 99, the description will be continued. When the process of S2254 is completed, the process of S2217 is executed, and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2252, when it is determined that the information included in the currently received time saving related command is not the time saving setting information (S2252: No), that is, the information included in the currently received time saving related command is not included. If the time saving information (the number of fluctuations and the number of small hits) corresponding to the time saving ending condition is information (time saving update information) that updates (closes to the time saving ending condition), information about the time saving ending condition is already set. Since the time-saving game has been started, the process of S2253 for setting the time-saving start flag to ON is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2254.

  In the process of S2254 in this case, a process for reading the time saving update information from a plurality of pieces of information included in the currently received time saving related command and updating the target time saving information is executed. If the content indicated by the updated time saving information indicates that the remaining time until the time saving ending condition is satisfied is shorter than the predetermined time, this fact is stored in the time saving information updating area.

  Next, the contents of the winning information related processing 2 (S2251) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information related processing 2 (S2251). This prize information related processing 2 (S2251) is for setting a display mode indicating the update content of the time saving information based on the prize information with respect to the above described prize information related processing of the first embodiment (see S2210 in FIG. 57). Is different from that of the first embodiment in that the processing for setting the game method (left-handed game (first game) or right-handed game (second game)) in the time-saving state is added. ing. Since the other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the winning information-related processing 2 (S2251) is executed, first, information (information for indicating the currently set game state) stored in the game state storage area 223f is read (S2301), and the read information is read. It is determined whether the game state indicated by is the game state indicating the time reduction state (whether the time reduction is being performed) (S2302). If it is determined by the processing of S2302 that the current time is not shorter (S2302: No), after executing the same processing as S2312 of the winning information related processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 57), the processing proceeds to S2311. Move to the processing of.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2302, when it is determined that the currently set gaming state is the time reduction state (time reduction is in progress) (S2302: Yes), the game state setting processing is executed next (S2351). This game state setting processing (S2351) determines whether the game method selected by the player in the current time saving state is the first game (left-handed game) or the second game (right-handed game). The processing for setting an appropriate game in the time saving state is executed, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the processing of S2351, the game content determination processing is executed next (S2352). This game content determination processing (S2352) is for executing processing for determining whether or not an appropriate game is being executed during the time saving state. For details, see FIG. 101 (b). It will be described later. When the process of S2352 is completed, a hold display setting process is subsequently performed (S2353), and thereafter, the process proceeds to S2311, and the process ends.

  The hold display setting process (S2353) executes a process for setting the display mode of the hold symbol displayed in response to the prize information command received this time based on the prize information included in the prize information command received this time. The details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the contents of the game state setting process (S2351) executed in the winning information related process 2 (S2251 in FIG. 100) will be described with reference to FIG. 101 (a). FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the content of the game state setting process (S2351). In this game state setting process (S2351), a game method (game direction) to be executed during the current time saving state is set based on winning information included in the winning information command received first after the time saving state is set. Execute the processing for performing.

  When the game state setting process (S2351 in FIG. 101A) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the time reduction start flag 223ad is set to ON (S3001). The time-saving start flag 223ad is used when it is determined in the command determination process 2 (S2163 in FIG. 99) that time-saving setting information has been received (S2252 in FIG. 99: Yes), that is, when a time-saving state is newly set. This is set to ON (S2253 in FIG. 99). That is, in the process of S3001, it is determined whether the state is immediately after the time saving state is set.

  If it is determined in the processing of S3001 that the time reduction start flag 223ad is set to ON (S3001: No), then the winning information received this time is related to the special figure 1 (lottery (change) of the first special symbol). (S3002), and if it is determined that it is related to Toku-zu (S3002: Yes), it is arranged in the left-handed area in a state where the time saving state is set. Since it indicates that the ball has entered the first entrance opening 64 provided, the left hitting flag 223ac is set to ON (S3003), and the time reduction start flag 223ad is set to OFF (S3004). This processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3002 that the winning information received this time is not related to the special figure 1 (related to the special figure 2 (second special symbol)) (S3002: No), the time saving state is set. In this state, since it indicates that the ball has entered the second entrance 640 provided in the right-handed area, the right-handed flag 223ab is set to ON (S3005), and the process proceeds to S3004. Then, the present process ends. If it is determined in the process of S3001 that the time-saving start flag 223ad is not set to ON (is set to OFF) (S3001: No), the process ends as it is.

  That is, in the second embodiment, the time-saving start flag 223ad is set to ON from the time-saving state is set to the time when the first winning information command is received, and the time-saving start flag 223ad is set to ON. In the case where a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, a region where the entrance of the ball is disposed (right-handed region, left-handed region) Is set so that the game in which the ball is fired is an appropriate game during the time reduction state, and the time reduction start flag 223ad is set to off.

  This makes it possible to limit the timing of setting the game method during the time reduction state to the time period in which the time reduction start flag 223ad is set to ON.

  Next, referring to FIG. 101 (b), the contents of the game content determination process (S2352) executed in the winning information related process 2 (S2251 in FIG. 100) of the command determination process 2 (S2163 in FIG. 99). Give an explanation. FIG. 101 (b) is a flowchart showing the content of the game content determination processing (S2352). In the game content determination process (S2352), the winning information included in the winning information command received this time is the winning information based on the appropriate gaming method for the gaming method set as the appropriate gaming method during the time saving state. Is determined, and processing for setting an error command is executed based on the determination result.

  When the game content determination processing (S2352) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the prize information received this time is related to the special figure 1 (prize information for indicating a lottery (change) result of the first special symbol) ( In S3101), when it is determined that the left map is related to the special figure 1 (S3101: Yes), it is determined whether the left-handed flag 223ac is set to ON (S3102). In the process of S3102, when it is determined that the left-handed flag 223ac is set to ON (S3102: Yes), it is determined that the left-handed game (first game) in the time-saving state is an appropriate game. In the state where the ball is hit (while the left-hitting flag 223ac is on), a winning command indicating that the ball fired by the left-handed game enters the first entrance 64 where the ball can enter is received. Since this is the case, the present process is terminated without discrimination as abnormal.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3102, when it is determined that the left-handed flag 223ac is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S3102: No), the right-handed game (second game) during the time reduction state Is set as an appropriate game (while the right-hitting flag 223ab is on), the ball enters the first entrance 64 where the ball fired by the left-handed game can enter. Since it is a case where a winning command indicating a ball has been received, it is determined that an appropriate game has not been played, a display error command is set (S3104), and this processing ends.

  In the process of S3101, the winning information received this time is not related to the special figure 1 (winning information for indicating the result of the lottery (change) of the first special symbol), that is, the winning information received this time is related to the special figure 2. If it is determined that it is (winning information for indicating the result of the lottery (change) of the second special symbol) (S3101: No), then it is determined whether the right-handed flag 223ab is set to ON (S3103). If it is determined that the right-handed flag 223ab is set to ON, this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3103 that the right-handed flag 223ab is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S3103: No), the left-handed game (first game) in the time-saving state ) Is set as an appropriate game (while the left-hitting flag 223ac is on), the ball to the second entrance 640 into which the ball fired by the right-handed game can enter. Since it is a case where a winning command indicating the entry of a ball is received, it is determined that an appropriate game is not being performed, a display error command is set (S3104), and the process is terminated.

  As described above, when a winning command is received after an appropriate game method is set in the current time saving state by the game state setting process (S2351) shown in FIG. By the game content determination process (S2352) shown in b), it is possible to determine whether or not the game method during the time saving state is appropriate. With this configuration, even if the player can select the game method (the direction in which the ball is fired) by himself / herself, the game method selected by the player is set as an appropriate game method. Since an error command indicating an abnormality can be set when a game method other than the above is executed, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  Further, in the second embodiment, in the winning information related processing 2 (see FIG. 100), after executing the game state setting processing (see FIG. 101 (a)), the game content discriminating processing (see FIG. 101 (b)). Is executed, so that the game content determination process is not executed in a state where neither the right hitting flag 223ab nor the left hitting flag 223ac is set to ON. I have. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), when one flag (one of the right-handed flag 223ab and the left-handed flag 223ac) is not set to ON, the other flag (right-handed flag 223ab) is not set. Since it is possible to determine that the middle flag 223ab and the left hitting flag 223ac are set to ON, the control process of the sound lamp control device 113 can be simplified.

  In the second embodiment, in the gaming state setting process (see FIG. 101 (a)), an appropriate gaming method in the time saving state is set based on winning information included in one winning information command. Therefore, when the game content determination process (see FIG. 101B) is executed, an appropriate game method has already been set (one of the right strike flag 223ab and the left strike flag 223ac is on). Is set to).

  On the other hand, for example, as a gaming state setting process (see FIG. 101 (a)), a plurality of winning information commands are received, and an appropriate time-saving state is determined based on the winning information included in the received winning information commands. When executing the process of setting the game method, an appropriate game method in the time reduction state is set until a predetermined period elapses after the time reduction state is set (until a winning information command is received a predetermined number of times). You will not be able to do that. In such a case, a flag (unset flag) is provided to indicate a state in which the game method has not been set, and if the unset flag is on, that is, if the game method has not been set, the game content determination processing is performed. (See FIG. 101B). As a result, it is possible to prevent an error command from being set based on a game (shooting a ball) executed during the determination of the game method.

  In the second embodiment, the game method (the left-handed game (the first game) or the right-handed game (the second game)) during the time saving state is included in the winning information command received from the main control device 110. Since the discrimination is made based on the winning information, there is no need to collect dedicated information for discriminating the game method, and the control process of the audio lamp control device 113 can be simplified. However, without being limited to this, for example, means for detecting a ball passing in an area where a ball flowing down a left-hitting area reliably passes, and detecting a ball passing in an area where a ball flowing down a right-hitting area reliably passes Means may be provided to collect the detection result of the ball passing by each means, and to set an appropriate game method during the time saving state. With this configuration, it is necessary to add a dedicated configuration, which complicates the control process.However, since the game method selected by the player can be reliably detected, the setting accuracy of the game method can be reduced. Can be enhanced.

  Further, in order to determine a game method selected by the player, a detection result of a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance is used. May be configured.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the content of the hold display setting process (S2353) executed in the winning information related process 2 (S2251 in FIG. 100) of the command determination process 2 (S2163 in FIG. 99) will be described. . FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hold display setting process (S2353). In the hold display setting process (S2353), when an appropriate winning information command is received during the time saving state, the update status of the time saving state and the jackpot game are displayed on the holding symbol displayed in response to the winning information command. A process of setting an effect mode of a hold suggestion effect indicating a possibility of being executed is executed.

  When the hold display setting process (S2353) is executed, first, the prize information command received this time includes a prize information related to the special figure 1 (a prize information for indicating a lottery (fluctuation) result of the first special symbol). Is determined (S3201), and when it is determined that it is related to the special figure 1 (S3201: Yes), it is determined whether the left hitting flag 223ac is set to ON (S3202). In the process of S3202, if it is determined that the left hit flag 223ac is set to ON (S3202: Yes), the winning information command received this time is a winning information command corresponding to an appropriate game, and will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to S3203 to S3206, and a process for executing a hold suggestion effect using the hold symbol corresponding to the received winning information command is executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3202, when it is determined that the left-hitting flag 223ac is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S3202: No), the winning information command received this time is changed to an appropriate game. (S3203 to S3206) because it is a winning information command that does not correspond to the above (because the winning information command of the first special symbol is received while the right-handed game (second game) is determined to be an appropriate game). Is skipped and the present process ends.

  Similarly, if it is determined in the processing of S3201 that the winning information command received this time is not the winning information related to the special figure 1 (S3201: No), that is, the winning information related to the special figure 2 (second special symbol). Then, if it is determined that the right-handed flag 223ab is set to ON (S3207), if it is determined that the flag 223ab is set to ON (S3207: Yes), the winning received this time is determined. Since the information command is a winning information command corresponding to an appropriate game, the process shifts to the processing of S3203 to S3206 described later, and executes a process for executing a hold suggestion effect using the holding symbol for the received winning information command. I do.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3207, when it is determined that the right-handed flag 223ab is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S3207: No), the winning information command received this time is changed to an appropriate game. Since the winning information command does not correspond to the above (because the winning information command of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is received while the left-handed game (first game) is determined to be an appropriate game), The process of S3203 to S3206 is skipped and the process ends.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, when the winning information command is received, the winning information included in the received winning information command is the winning information corresponding to the game method selected by the player. Is determined, and only when the winning information corresponds to the game method selected by the player, an effect (hold display effect) using the winning information included in the winning information command is executed. ing. This prohibits execution of the hold display effect for a game that the player does not intend (for example, a game in which the operation of the operation handle 51 is mistaken and the ball is fired in a direction different from the intended direction). can do.

  Therefore, by continuing the game method selected by the player himself / herself, it is possible to obtain information advantageous to the player (information provided to the player by the hold display effect), and thus the player is eager to The game can be played. In the second embodiment, when the player plays a game that the player does not intend (a game method different from the game method selected by himself / herself), the hold display effect is not executed. May be configured so that the information that the player can obtain is disadvantageous compared to the case where the player has performed the game method selected by himself, for example, to reduce the frequency of occurrence of the hold display effect, The content of the information indicated by the displayed display mode may be poor, or a display mode indicating information having a content different from the fact may be displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 102, the description will be continued. In the process of S3203, the information of the temporary time reduction information update area 223i is updated based on the winning information received this time (S3203), and the hold display mode is selected using the hold display selection table 222aa based on the contents of the temporary time reduction information update area 223i. Is selected (S3204), the selected hold display mode is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S3205), and a display hold display command corresponding to the selected hold display mode is set (S3206). This processing ends.

  Next, the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (S2134) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the content of the variable display setting process 2 (S2134). This variation display setting process 2 (S2134) is the same as the variation display setting process of the first embodiment (see S2114 in FIG. 62), but the effect setting process (S2804 in FIG. 63) is the effect setting process 2 (FIG. 103). In this case, and the other steps are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Here, the effect setting process 2 (S2851) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect setting process 2 (S2851). This effect setting process 2 (S2851) is different from the effect setting process (S2804) of the first embodiment in that the process executed when the time reduction state is set as the gaming state is different. are doing. Other elements are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, when the effect setting process 2 (S2851) is executed, the same processes of S2901 and S2902 as in the above-described effect setting process (see FIG. 63) are executed, and the information read in the process of S2902 indicates the time-saving state. If not (S2902: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the information read in the processing of S2902 is information indicating the time saving information (S2902: Yes), it is next determined whether the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON (S3301). Here, when it is determined that the time reduction start flag 223ad is set to ON, that is, when it is determined that it is the timing to set the fluctuation display corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation after the time reduction state is set, ( S3301: Yes), and the process proceeds to S3302.

  In the processing of S3302, 4000 is set to the value of the time reduction counter 223ae, then the time reduction start flag 223ad is set to off, a game selection command for display is set, and the processing is terminated. The display game selection command set in the process of S3304 is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S2102 in FIG. 55) of the main process (see FIG. 55) of the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the game selection command for display, the display control device 114 displays a game selection screen on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to allow the player to select a game method in the time saving state (see FIG. 82 (b)). ) Is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3301 that the time-saving start flag 223ad is not set to ON (is set to OFF) (S3301: No), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving clock counter 223ae is greater than 0. It is determined (S3305).

  The time-saving clock counter 233ae counts a predetermined period (4 seconds in the present embodiment) from the timing of setting the fluctuation display corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation after the time reduction state is set. In the process of S3305, It is determined whether or not the current timing has passed the above-described predetermined period (4 seconds in the present embodiment).

  In the process of S3305, when it is determined that the value of the time saving time counter 223ae is greater than 0, that is, four seconds have elapsed since the time when the variation display corresponding to the first special symbol variation has been set since the time saving state was set. If it is determined that the game has not been performed (S3305: Yes), it is during the period of continuously displaying the selection screen (see FIG. 82 (b)) for selecting the game method on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the processing of steps S3306 to S3308 is skipped, and the processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3305, when it is determined that the value of the time-saving clock counter 223ae is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S3305; No), the hold included in the winning information storage area corresponding to the current fluctuation is performed. The mode information is read (S3306), an effect mode corresponding to the read hold mode information is set (S3307), a display effect command indicating the selected effect mode is set (S3308), and the process ends.

  As described above, when setting the variable display corresponding to the lottery (variation) of the special symbol, the effect mode corresponding to the variable display is set based on the hold mode information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. Therefore, it is possible to execute the variation display of the presentation mode associated with the pending presentation display already displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the suspension mode information. Therefore, it is possible to perform the effect with the relevance for a long period of time (a period during which a plurality of special symbol changes are executed), and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

  In addition, as described above in the hold display setting process (see FIG. 102), the winning information corresponding to the game method (first game (left-handed game) or second game (right-handed game)) selected by the player is displayed. Since the hold mode information is set only for the player, the special symbol change that is the target when the effect setting process (S2851 in FIG. 104) is executed corresponds to the game method selected by the player. In the case of a special symbol change that has not been performed, the holding mode information is not set in the winning information storage area 223a, and therefore the effect mode is not set for the variable display. Therefore, it is possible to execute the effect display (see FIGS. 83 (a) and (b)) using the predetermined effect mode only for the special symbol variation corresponding to the game method selected by the player, and the effect is easy for the player to understand. Can be provided.

  Next, various counter update processing 2 (S2161) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 55) of the sound ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 105 (a). FIG. 105 (a) is a flowchart showing the contents of the various counter update processing 2 (S2161). The various counter updating process 2 (S2161) is different from the above-described various counter updating process (S2111) of the first embodiment in that a process of updating (subtracting) the value of the time reduction counter 223ae is added. Other elements are the same. Detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

  When the various counter updating process 2 (S2161) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 223ae is greater than 0 (S3401). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S3401: Yes), The value of the time reduction clock counter 223ae is decremented by 1 (S3402), and then the values of other various counters are decremented (updated) by 1 (S3403), and this processing ends. Note that the details of the various counters updated in the process of S3403 are the same as the various counter update processes of the first embodiment described above, and thus detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3401, if it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 223ae is not larger than 0 (it is 0) (S3401: No), the process of S3402 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3403. This processing ends. That is, the value of the time-saving clock counter 223ae is decremented (updated) by one every time the various counter update processing 2 (S2161) executed at 1 millisecond intervals is performed. The value of 4000 set in S2851 in FIG. 104) is a value for measuring a period of 4 seconds.

  Next, the contents of the effect update process 2 (S2162) executed in the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 (b) is a flowchart showing the contents of effect update processing 2 (S2162). This effect update process 2 (S2162) differs from the effect update process (S2112) of the first embodiment in that a process for setting the display mode of the guidance display area Dm2 during the time saving state is added. Others are the same. Detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

  When the effect update process 2 (S2162) is executed, first, it is determined whether the time reduction state is set (S3501). If it is determined that the time reduction state is set (S3501: Yes), then, the time reduction is performed. It is determined whether the value of the clock counter 223ae is larger than 0 (S3502). That is, it is determined whether or not a predetermined period (4 seconds) has elapsed since the execution of the special symbol change during the time saving state.

  In the process of S3502, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 223ae is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S3502: No), it is next determined whether the right-handed flag 223ab is set to ON. Then (S3503), if it is determined that it is set to ON (S3503: Yes), a right-handed display command is set (S3504), and the flow shifts to the processing of S3508. When this display right-handed command is set, it is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S2102 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process of the sound lamp control device 113. When the display control device 114 receives the right-handed display command, the display control device 114 displays the character “right-handed” in the guide display region Dm2 formed in the main display region Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and displays the right-handed character for the player. A guide to execute a beating game is displayed.

  In the process of S3503, if it is determined that the right-handed flag 223ab is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S3503: No), then the left-handed flag 223ac is set to ON. It is determined (S3504) whether or not it is set to ON (S3505: Yes), a left-handed display command is set (S3506), and the flow shifts to S3508.

  When the display left-handed command is set in the process of S3506, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S2102 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process of the sound lamp control device 113. When the display control device 114 receives the display left-hand command, the display control device 114 displays the character “left-hand” in the guide display area Dm2 formed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and displays a left-handed character for the player. A guide to execute a beating game is displayed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3505, when it is determined that the left-handed flag 223ac is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S3505; No), that is, the time-saving state is set and then held and stored. If the change of the special symbol has been executed, but four seconds have elapsed without a new ball entering the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, a display standby command is set. Then (S3507), and the process proceeds to S3508. The display standby command set in the process of S3507 is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S2102 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process of the sound lamp control device 113. When the display control device 114 receives the display standby command, the display control device 114 continuously displays the character “?” In the guide display region Dm2 formed in the main display region Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and displays the character to the player. A screen for selecting a game method (see FIG. 82 (b)) is continuously displayed.

  With such a configuration, after the big hit game is over, even if the game is temporarily interrupted by a rest break or the like, the game can be easily restarted.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) set different time-saving end conditions, and the player It is configured to be able to select a game for executing the drawing of Toku-zu 1 (left-handed game) and a game for executing the drawing of Toku-zu 2 (right-handed game).

  Accordingly, a plurality of types of games can be played in a state where the time saving state is set, so that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when a game for executing the drawing of the special figure 1 (left-handed game) during the time reduction state is executed, a game for executing the drawing of the special figure 2 (right-handed game) is executed. It is configured such that the time-saving termination condition is more easily satisfied than in the case in which it is performed, and it is easier to win a small hit in which it is easy to obtain two kinds of hits.

  With this configuration, it is possible for the player to select between a game that is likely to be a big hit but the time-saving state is easy to end and a game that is hard to be a big hit and the time-saving state is hard to end. A game according to circumstances can be arbitrarily selected.

  In the second embodiment, the state in which the time saving state is set is set as an advantageous state, and in the advantageous state, the player is allowed to select a plurality of types of games. For example, a gaming state in which a probable change state is set may be set as an advantageous state, and a case in which a probable change state and a time saving state are set may be set as an advantageous state.

  Further, in the second embodiment, in a state where an advantageous state (for example, a time-saving state) is set, if an end condition (for example, a time-saving end condition) for ending the advantageous state is satisfied, the player is disadvantaged. The game state (for example, the normal state) is set to be set, but is not limited to this. For example, when the advantageous state end condition for ending the advantageous state is satisfied, You may comprise so that it may shift to the super-advantageous state which becomes more advantageous. In the case of such a configuration, the player can be motivated to play a game so as to quickly transition from the advantageous state to the super-advantaged state.

  Furthermore, as an advantageous state end condition for terminating the advantageous state, a disadvantageous end condition in which a disadvantageous state (for example, a normal state) that is established is more disadvantageous than the advantageous state (for example, a normal state), and a super advantageous state that is more advantageous than the advantageous state For example, an advantageous end condition in which the latent state is set may be set, and depending on the game method to be selected, the advantageous end condition may be easily established, and the disadvantageous end may be set. It is preferable that the condition and the advantageous end condition are different in ease of establishment.

  With this configuration, it is possible to greatly vary the subsequent game result in accordance with the game method selected during the advantageous state for the player, and thus the player feels that he / she played the game by himself. Can be given.

  In the second embodiment, an example is described in which the player selects two types of game methods (left-handed game, right-handed game). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more game methods can be selected. You may comprise so that a game method may be selected.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the present pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. The third embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that a second variable prize device 1650 is provided instead of the V prize device 650 and a game content based on a lottery result of a second special symbol. Differences.

  Specifically, in the first embodiment described above, when a small hit is won as a result of the lottery of the second special symbol, a small hit game that opens the V winning device 650 is executed, and during the small hit game, When the ball that has won the V prize device 650 passes through a specific area, there are two types of wins that execute (set) the big hit game after the small hit game ends. In this case, only a small hitting game in which the second variable winning device 1650 is opened is executed, and a specific area is not provided in the second variable winning device 1650. That is, the third embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that a pachinko machine 10 that does not have two types of pachinko machines is used.

  First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a front view showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that a second variable prize device 1650 is provided instead of the V prize device 650, and the configuration of the electric accessory 640a. Are changed, and the other configurations are the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, a ball flowing down the right area (right-handed area) of the variable display device unit 80 passes through the through gate 67, and an electric accessory is provided downstream thereof. A second entrance 640 with 640a is provided. A plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided on the downstream side. In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, the ball flows down to the left area (left hit area) of the variable display device unit 80 while the normal state is set as the gaming state, as in the first embodiment described above. A game aiming at the first entrance 64 by the left-handed game to be played, that is, a game in which the lottery of the first special symbol is mainly performed, and the variable display device unit 80 is set while the time saving state is set as the gaming state. A game aiming at the second entrance 640 by a right-handed game in which a ball flows down to a right-handed area (right-handed area), that is, a game in which lottery of a second special symbol is mainly performed is performed.

  Details are omitted because they have been described in the first embodiment, but also in the second embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. Therefore, the right-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the left-handed game.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 106, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is located in the left area where the ball fired by the left-handed game can flow down (to the left of the lower end position of the variable display unit 80). A second variable winning device 1650 is provided. The second variable winning device 1650 performs an opening operation in a small hitting game that is executed when a small hit is won by lottery of a second special symbol.

  Although details will be described later, in the small hitting game according to the third embodiment, an opening operation (opening period of 0.09 seconds to 0.11 seconds) in which the ball is unlikely to win the second variable winning device 1650 is executed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 106, the second variable winning device 1650 is configured to be disposed at a position where the ball is difficult to reach.

  In other words, the ball can flow down when a right-handed game is performed to execute the lottery of the second special symbol only when the second special symbol among the plurality of special symbols is won and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. The second variable prize winning device 1650 is provided in a left-handed area where no left-handed area exists. With such a configuration, when the small hitting game is executed, the ball is unlikely to be won in the second variable winning device 1650.

  In the third embodiment configured as described above, the small hit winning of the second special symbol can be used only to satisfy the end condition of the time saving state. Therefore, a bonus (prize ball) is not given to the player by the small hitting game executed by the small hitting winning, and even if the winning probability is set so as to win the small hitting with a high probability, the player is not given to the player. It is possible to suppress a situation where a privilege is excessively given.

  Further, since the period during which the second variable winning device 1650 is opened is set to a short period (0.09 seconds to 0.11 seconds) in which a ball does not easily enter the second variable winning device 1650, a small hit with a high probability is achieved. Even if the winning probability is set so as to win, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the privilege is excessively given to the player.

  In the third embodiment, the second variable winning device 1650 is provided in a left area different from a game area (right area) in which a ball fired in a right-handed game for performing a lottery of a second special symbol flows. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player who is playing the right-handed game to notice that the second variable prize device 1650 is performing the opening operation (performing the small hitting game). A small hit game can be executed without giving a strange feeling to the player.

  In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, the second variable prize device 1650 is configured so that the player can visually recognize the second variable prize device. However, for example, the glass unit 16 and the second variable prize device may be used. A decorative member may be provided between the first variable winning device 1650 and the first variable winning device 1650 so as to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the second variable winning device 1650. This makes it harder for the player playing the right-handed game to notice that the second variable prize device 1650 is performing the opening operation (performing the small hitting game). The small hit game can be executed without giving a strange feeling to the player.

  In addition, a light emitting member (for example, an LED) for allowing a player to visually recognize the light emitting state is provided on a decorative member provided in the vicinity of the second variable winning device 1650, and in a case where the small hitting game is executed, It is preferable that the light emitting member is configured to operate (emit light). Specifically, a small hit determining means for determining that a condition for executing the small hit game is established, and a predetermined lottery is executed when the small hit determining means determines that the small hit game is executed. It is preferable to provide a lottery means for performing the operation and a light emission control means for executing control for operating the light emitting member when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined lottery result.

  With this configuration, it is possible to provide a difference between the number of small hit games that are actually executed and the number of small hit games that are visually recognized by the player (activate the light emitting member), and the actual number of small hit games is reduced. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to know the number of executions. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to predict when the time saving end condition that is established based on the number of times the small hitting game has been executed (the number of times the small hitting has been won) is established (when the time saving state ends). Can be.

  Further, it is preferable that the light-emitting control means executes the control for causing the light-emitting member to emit light even when the light-emitting member has not been won for a small hit. Thereby, the number of times the light emitting member emits light can be made larger than the number of times the small hit is actually won, so that the time reduction established based on the number of times the small hit game is executed (the number of times the small hit is won) is achieved. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict when the end condition is satisfied (when the end timing of the time saving state is reached).

  In this case, the light emitting member is operated when there is a lottery result of a special symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed or a lottery result of a special symbol corresponding to the winning information stored and stored as a lottery result. It is good to constitute so that it may become easy. In other words, it is preferable that the light-emitting operation performed to notify the user of the winning of the small hit game be performed based on the result of the lottery of the special symbol.

  Thereby, when the light emitting member emits light, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the small hit game has been executed, whether the special jackpot has been won, or whether it is just a decorative effect. . Furthermore, a state disadvantageous to the player (execution of the small hit game), that is, a state in which a factor for ending the advantageous state (time saving state) advantageous to the player is satisfied, and a state advantageous to the player ( Since the light emitting member emits light at the time of the "winning win", the player can be interested in the game result after the light emitting member is emitted.

  In the case where the above-described configuration is used, the timing at which the light emission control means causes the light emitting member to emit light is determined by the timing of winning a small hit (the timing at which the special symbol is stopped and displayed), the timing of starting the small hit game, Various timings may be set, such as a timing during the small hit game, a timing after the end of the small hit game, a timing at which a special symbol is changed, or a predetermined predetermined timing. May be set.

  Furthermore, the light emission control means may be configured to change the condition under which the light emission member emits light based on the operation result of the operation means (frame button 22) operable by the player. In this case, for example, when a predetermined operation condition (for example, an operation of pressing the frame button 22 ten or more times in two seconds (continuous hitting operation)) is satisfied, the number of times of operation of the light emitting member and the number of small hits are determined. It is preferable that the light emission control is performed so as to be approximated (to be more approximated than when the predetermined operation condition is not satisfied). This allows the player to actively operate the operation means, and allows the player to actively participate.

  Further, by using the light emitting operation of the light emitting member described above, for example, the situation until the time saving end condition is satisfied (the remaining number of small hits won) and the small hit type of the small hit that has been won this time are notified to the player (suggestion). ) May be configured. This allows the player to be interested in the content of the light emitting operation of the light emitting member.

  In the third embodiment, by making it difficult for the player to recognize the presence or absence of the small win, it is difficult to understand the end timing of the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, and to give a sense of tension. The game is made to be played by the player, but without being limited to this, the fact that the small hit is won is notified to the player, but the small hit type set for the winning small hit is given to the player. It may be configured not to notify, or configured to notify the player up to the small hit type. In this case, a specific display mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in order to notify the player that the small hit has been won (for example, a display mode in which the player can identify that the small hit has been won). It is preferable that the third symbol is stopped and displayed), or the second variable winning device 1650 is provided in the right hitting area. This allows the player to easily grasp the number of wins in the small hit state during the time reduction state, and thus allows the player to play the game while predicting the end timing of the time reduction state.

<Production contents in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 107 to FIG. 110, an effect that is performed in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment during a time-saving state will be described. FIGS. 107 to 110 are schematic diagrams schematically showing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment described above. , The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The third embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the winning information of the second special symbol is also configured to be able to be stored on hold. Therefore, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is different. Is different in that the effect using the reserved memory information of the second special symbol is executed as the effect of suggesting the remaining working hours (the effect for suggesting the remaining period of the working hours to the player). Hereinafter, the contents of the remaining time suggesting effect in the third embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the effect contents used in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 107A is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display screen displayed when the time saving state is set. As shown in FIG. 107 (a), when the time reduction state is set, an effect start screen for explaining the contents of the effect executed during the time reduction state is displayed. In the third embodiment, when the time saving state is set, a first situation display mode Dm11a, a second situation display mode Dm11b, a third situation display mode Dm11c, and a fourth situation are displayed as a plurality of situation display modes in the small display area Dm11. The display mode Dm11d is displayed.

  In each of the plurality of status display modes, each display mode corresponds to the degree of fulfillment of a plurality of time-saving end conditions (the degree of progress until the time-saving end condition is satisfied). The display mode is configured to be changed correspondingly. More specifically, a bomb having a squib of a predetermined length is displayed as each status display mode, and when the first variation is performed after the time saving state is set, the squib is lit.

  Then, among the respective time saving end conditions, the status display mode corresponding to the time saving end condition in which the condition is easily satisfied is changed such that the length of the squib is shorter than other status display modes. By changing the display mode of the situation display mode in this way, the timing at which the time saving state ends can be predicted by the player by the effect (remaining short time suggestion effect) performed by the third symbol display device 81. In this way, it is possible to cause the player to pay attention to the effect, and to enhance the effect.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 107 (a), in the effect start screen (time reduction start screen), "at least one explosion" is provided at the center of the main display area Dm in order to inform the player of the content of the remaining time reduction suggestion effect. Then, the words "time saving end" and "big hit at completion of digestion" are displayed. With this, if at least one of the bombs displayed in the small display area Dm11 explodes, the time saving state ends, and if the fire of the plurality of bombs displayed in the small display area Dm11 can be extinguished. It can be easily grasped that a jackpot will occur.

  The state shown in FIG. 107 (a) is a state where the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is variably displayed in the special symbol 2 variation display area Dm1b, that is, the variation of the special symbol is executed during the time saving state. In this state, a plurality of bombs displayed in the small display area Dm11 are lit. In addition, if it is determined that the special jackpot game has ended and the special symbol does not start changing in a state where the time-saving state is set (the state where the special symbol does not start changing after the jackpot game ends), the time-saving state standby is performed. The screen may be configured to display a screen indicating that a remaining hours suggestion effect for starting the change of the special symbol is to be executed.

  The game is advanced with the time reduction state set, and when the time reduction end condition is approaching, the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number or the number of small wins during the time reduction state reaches a predetermined number Then, as shown in FIG. 107 (b), a combined status display mode Dm11z for indicating (notifying) the fact is displayed in the small display area Dm11. FIG. 107 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display screen during a remaining working hours suggestion effect in the working hours reduction state.

  The united state display mode Dm11z indicates that the progress status of the plurality of time saving end conditions is a pre-end condition (for example, when the number of times of change of the special symbol 50 is set as the end condition of the number of changes, the number of times of change of the special symbol is 30). When the number of small wins reaches 5 when the number of small hits A has been set as the win number end condition, the condition that is satisfied when the number of small hits A has reached 3) is displayed. is there. Therefore, by displaying the united state display mode Dm11z in the small display area Dm11, it is possible to let the player know that the time-saving state is about to end.

  In addition, by displaying the united situation display mode Dm11z in a state where the progress status of the plurality of time-saving end conditions satisfies the pre-end condition, the time-saving state is ended (in the set plurality of time-saving end conditions, It is possible to make it difficult for the player to know which time-saving end condition has been satisfied and the time-saving state has ended when any of the time-saving end conditions is satisfied). In other words, as shown in FIG. 107 (a), while a plurality of status display modes (Dm11a to Dm11d) in which the display mode changes in accordance with the progress status of each time-saving end condition are displayed in the small display area Dm11, When the time saving state ends, it is necessary to execute an effect in which one of the status display modes explodes, so that the player can easily determine which of the plurality of time saving ending conditions is satisfied this time saving ending condition. There was a problem that would be grasped.

  As described above, the player easily knows which of the plurality of time-saving end conditions is satisfied this time-saving end condition, so that the plurality of time-saving end conditions set when shifting to the time-saving state is achieved. There is a possibility that the condition is easily predicted, and the timing until the time saving state ends is easily predicted. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, when a pre-end condition is satisfied for a plurality of time-saving end conditions, it is prevented that the progress of each time-saving end condition of the transition is grasped by the player. In this case, it is configured to display the united state display mode Dm11z. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know which time-saving end condition is satisfied and the time-saving state ends.

  In the third embodiment, the united state display mode Dm11z is displayed only when the pre-end condition is satisfied for a plurality of time-saving end conditions. The united situation display mode Dm11z may be displayed when the previous condition is satisfied, or the united situation display mode when a value corresponding to a specific time saving end condition among a plurality of time saving end conditions satisfies the pre-end condition. Dm11z may be displayed.

  When the time saving state ends, the screen shown in FIG. 108A is displayed. FIG. 108A is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the time saving state. FIG. 108 (a) shows a display screen when the time saving end condition is satisfied with respect to one of the winning number end conditions, and the special figure 2 variable display area Dm1b corresponds to the second special symbol. In addition to the stop display of the combination of "341" indicating that the third symbol has won the small hit, the small display area Dm11 displays a display mode indicating that the bomb has exploded, and the main display area Dm In the center portion, the word "end" for notifying the player that the time reduction state has ended is displayed.

  Next, the effect content of the effect of suggesting a remaining time reduction for a special situation when the time saving state is set will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen when the special figure 1 change is executed immediately after the time saving state is set. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment has means for storing the winning information of the first special symbol, the lottery of the first special symbol is performed in the normal state (during left-handed game). When a time-saving state is set after a jackpot is won and the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot is completed, a special figure change corresponding to the first special symbol stored and stored may be executed.

  And among them, there is also a case where the winning information of the first special symbol stored on the hold includes the winning information of winning the jackpot (so-called on-line villa). In this way, despite the time saving state being set, the next jackpot based on the winning information already acquired before the time saving state is set, not the winning information of the special symbol acquired during the time saving state, When a game is executed, if an effect (reduced time remaining suggestion effect) executed during the time reduction state is executed, inconsistency occurs between the effect content and the game result, and the effect of the effect is reduced. There was a problem that it would.

  Therefore, in the third embodiment, when the time saving state is set, it is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the first special symbol stored on the hold includes the winning information of the jackpot, and the winning winning of the jackpot is determined. If it is determined that there is information, a special effect (on-hours on-time reduction effect) is executed instead of starting (executing) the normal remaining hours suggestion effect (see FIG. 107 (a)). ing. Thereby, if the effect (reduced time reduction suggestion effect) executed during the time reduction state is executed, it is possible to suppress inconsistency between the effect content and the game result and to reduce the effect of the effect, By performing a special effect in an unusual situation in which the jackpot is won again in the hold memory after the jackpot, a superior feeling can be given to the player.

  When the on-hold production during the working hours is executed, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), the united state display mode Dm11z is displayed in the small display area Dm11, and the character “!?” Is displayed in the united state display mode Dm11z. The main display area Dm is displayed with a character "Somehow strange" to indicate to the player that an effect different from the normal remaining time suggestion effect is being performed. . By performing such display, it is possible to make the player easily understand that an unusual effect is being performed.

  In FIG. 108 (b), since the first special symbol is being changed as described above, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is changed in the special figure 1 change display area Dm1a. The third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol 2 change display area Dm1b.

  Note that the display screen shown in FIG. 108B is also executed, for example, when it is determined that any of the time reduction end conditions is satisfied based on winning information already acquired before the time reduction state is set. You may comprise so that it may be. With this configuration, the screen shown in FIG. 108 (b) is displayed after the end of the jackpot, and the jackpot is immediately (until all the special symbol changes corresponding to the winning information stored and stored) are ended. , Or that the time-saving state ends, it is possible to inform the player of the fact that the time-saving state is over, so that the player can be interested in the contents of the effect to be executed next.

  When the time-saving state ends from the state shown in FIG. 108 (b), a display screen similar to the display screen shown in FIG. 108 (a) is displayed, and the player is notified that the time-saving state ends. I do. On the other hand, when a jackpot is won from the state shown in FIG. 108B, the display screen shown in FIG. 109A is displayed. FIG. 109 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed at the timing when the time has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 108 (b) and the jackpot of the first special symbol has been won.

  As shown in FIG. 109 (a), when a special jackpot is won in the special figure change corresponding to the winning information of the first special symbol which has already been stored in the state where the time saving state is set, the special figure 1 change display area At Dm1a, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode of "777" indicating a big hit, and the fired-out union status display mode Dm11z is displayed in the small display area Dm11. Then, in the center of the main display area Dm, the characters "fire extinguishing completed" and "big hit" are displayed to indicate that the big hit has been won.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, when the time-saving state is set after the end of the big hit (the timing at which the special symbol change of the first rotation after the end of the big hit is performed), the time is held and stored. The content of the winning information is determined, and as a result of the determination, if it is determined that there is winning information to win the jackpot, a special effect (hour saving Medium pending production).

  With such a configuration, a jackpot is won immediately after the remaining time reduction suggestion effect is executed, and a state in which the effect content of the remaining time reduction suggestion effect does not match the game result occurs, or the game result corresponds. For this reason, it is possible to suppress the forcible change of the effect content of the remaining time suggestion effect, and to suppress a decrease in the effect of the effect on the remaining time suggestion effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 109 (b), the effect contents of the remaining time saving suggestion effect when the number of times of the special symbol change until the time saving state ends is determined. FIG. 109 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when the number of remaining working hours is determined in the time saving state. In the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, as the time-saving ending conditions for ending the time-saving state, the number-of-times-of-variation ending condition that is satisfied when a special symbol change is executed, and the special symbol lottery And a plurality of winning time termination conditions that are satisfied when a small hit is won, is set, and the time-saving state ends when any one of the plurality of time-saving ending conditions is satisfied. With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to predict a period in which the time reduction state is continuously set (timing at which the time reduction state ends), and the interest of the game during the time reduction state is improved. .

  Even when a plurality of time saving end conditions are set in this way, a period until the time saving state ends may be determined. For example, the game progresses during the time saving state, the number of times the special symbol fluctuates until the condition for changing the number of times is satisfied is three, and the number of wins per small hit is five for the condition for finishing the number of times of winning is satisfied. In such a case, only one small hit is won at most for one change of the special symbol. Therefore, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, if the special symbol lottery is executed three times, the time saving state is reduced. Will end.

  In the third embodiment, when the period until the end of the time saving state (the number of times the special symbol changes) is determined, as shown in FIG. 109 (b), the remaining special symbol change times are displayed in the small display area Dm11. (“3 times” in the example of FIG. 109 (b)) is displayed. With such a configuration, in a gaming machine in which the timing for ending the time-saving state can be set in a complicated manner by setting a plurality of time-saving ending conditions, when the timing for ending the time-saving state is determined in advance, Since the timing can be clearly notified to the player, it is possible to play a game conscious of the remaining period of the time saving state.

  Further, in the third embodiment, when the period until the time-saving state ends (the number of times the special symbol fluctuates) is determined, the remaining number of times the special symbol fluctuates in the small display area Dm11 (in the example of FIG. 109B). Since “3 times” is displayed, the period in which this display is displayed is a period in which the time-saving state is not terminated based on the number of wins of the small hit, even if the small hit is won many times. Therefore, the player can be motivated to play a game to win many small wins while the remaining special symbol change count is displayed in the small display area Dm11.

  In addition, when such an effect display is used in the above-described first and second embodiments, there is a possibility that two kinds of winnings may be obtained by winning a small hit, so that it is more ambitious. A game can be played. That is, in the above-described first and second embodiments, when a small hit is won during the time reduction state, a chance to win two kinds of hits and a pinch where the time reduction state ends come to visit. As shown in FIG. 109 (b), it is assumed that the time reduction state is a period in which the termination is not completed based on the small hit winning (a period in which the termination is determined based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol). By performing the effect to be notified (remaining period fixed notification effect), while the remaining period fixed notification effect is being executed, if the small hit is won, only the chance to win two kinds of games is reached. Can be notified to the player, so that the player can be motivated to play the game in order to win many small hits.

  In the third embodiment, different time-saving termination conditions are set based on the jackpot type set for the winning jackpot, and in some of them, a predetermined time-saving state is set after the time-saving state is set. During the period, each time reduction termination condition may be set so that the time reduction termination condition is not satisfied.

  In the third embodiment, an effect for notifying the player that the time saving end condition cannot be satisfied after the time saving state described above is set is executable. FIG. 110 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen at the time of entering a reduced working hours after the end of the jackpot game in which the jackpot type D is set as the jackpot type.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 113 (a), in the third embodiment, when the time saving state is set based on the jackpot D, the time saving state is at least until the special symbol change is executed 20 times. Is set so as not to end. In other words, the period from when the time reduction state is set to when the special symbol change is executed 20 times is a period in which the time reduction state continues regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery.

  Therefore, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110A, the current time is a specific period (a period in which the time reduction state continues regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery) after the time reduction state is set. An effect (invincible effect) for notifying the player of the fact is executed. During the invincible production, a bomb without a fire is displayed in the small display area Dm11, and the player is notified that the bomb does not explode (a period in which the time reduction state does not end). I have.

  Then, a remaining period mode 820 for notifying the remaining period of the invincible effect is displayed at the center of the main display area Dm. In the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 110 (a), the characters “Till the squib is lit ...” and “20” as the remaining period mode 820 are displayed. As described above, by performing an effect (invincible effect) for indicating to the player a period in which the time reduction state does not end, it is possible to provide a period in which the player can play the game with peace of mind during the time reduction state. .

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The third embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 are changed. . The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 111 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, instead of the first random number table 202a, the first random number 3 table 202ba is replaced with the small hit type selection table in the ROM 202 (see FIG. 19A) in the first embodiment. The difference is that a small hit type selection 3 table 202bb is provided in place of 202f, a time saving grant 3 table 202bc is provided in place of the time saving grant table 202e, and an open scenario 3 table 202bd is provided in place of the open scenario table 202g. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the contents of the first random number 3 table 202ba will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 112A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first random number 3 table 202ba. As shown in FIG. 112 (a), in the first random number 3 table 202ba, a special symbol 1 random number 3 table 202ba1 and a special symbol 2 random number 3 table 202ba2 are defined.

  Next, the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 3 table 202ba1 will be described with reference to FIG. 112 (b). FIG. 112B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number 3 table 202ba1. The special symbol 1 random number 3 table 202ba1 defines the same contents as the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 20B), and detailed description thereof is omitted. I do.

  FIG. 112 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number table 202ba2. This special symbol 2 random number table 202ba2 is different from the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 20C) in that the range of the value determined to be a small hit is different. Different, otherwise identical. Specifically, in the special symbol 2 random number table 202ba2, the acquired first random number counter value C1 defines a small hit determination value in a range of “5 to 499”.

  That is, in the third embodiment using the special symbol 2 random number 3 table 202ba2, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit with a probability (ratio) of 5/1000 (1/200). It is determined to be a small hit with a probability (ratio) of 495/1000. That is, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, a big win or a small hit is won with a probability of 1/2.

  Note that the range determined to be a big hit or a small hit is not limited to the content described above, and may be defined so that the probability of being determined to be a small hit is lower than the probability of being determined to be a big hit. The range determined to be a small hit may not only be defined by a continuous value, but may be defined with an interval. Further, in the third embodiment, the configuration is such that the determination of a big hit or a small hit is performed using the same table regardless of the set gaming state, but, for example, according to the set gaming state. You may be comprised so that a big hit or a small hit determination may be performed using a different table.

  Specifically, the table used when the time saving state is set as the gaming state has a wider range in which the small hit is determined than the table used when the normal state is set as the gaming state. It is good to configure as follows. With this configuration, even if the small hits used for ending the time saving state are configured to occur frequently during the time saving state, it is possible to suppress a situation that frequently occurs in the normal state. it can.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 112 (a) and 112 (b), in the third embodiment, a small hit is not won by the lottery of the first special symbol, and the small hit is only obtained by the lottery of the second special symbol. Although it is configured to win, a lottery may also be configured by lottery of the first special symbol.

  With such a configuration, for example, when the time saving state is set and the winning information of the first special symbol stored and stored includes the winning information to win a small hit, the time saving state is immediately ended. be able to. In the case of using such a configuration, for example, it is preferable to use a gaming machine that can provide a gaming state advantageous to the player when the time reduction state ends immediately.

  Specifically, as a gaming state, in addition to the normal state and the time reduction state, as a result of a special symbol lottery, the probability of winning a jackpot is a low probability state (normal state: low probability state of special symbol, ordinary symbol) Low-probability state, time-saving state: high-probability state of special symbol that is higher than low-probability state of special symbol, high-probability state of ordinary symbol (probable state: high-probability state of special symbol, high-probability state of ordinary symbol, Latent state: a special symbol high-probability state, a normal symbol low-probability state) can be set, and if the time saving end condition is satisfied during the period in which the probable change state is set, the latent state is set. It is good to constitute so that a latent state becomes a game state most advantageous to a player.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible for the player to be advantageous in that the time saving end condition is satisfied in the state where the probable change state is set. Therefore, a gaming machine with a lot of interest can be provided. Also, in such a gaming machine, if the winning information of the first special symbol stored on hold when the probability changing state is set includes winning information to win a small hit, the probability changing state is immediately terminated. By using the configuration for shifting to the latent state, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game to store the winning information of the first special symbol up to the upper limit number (4) until the probability change state is set. .

  Next, the contents of the small hit type selection 3 table 202bb will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 113A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit type selection 3 table 202bb. As shown in FIG. 113 (a), the small hit type selection 3 table 202bb differs from the small hit type selection table 202f (see FIG. 22) of the above-described first embodiment in the content of each small hit type. In other respects, for example, the small hitting type defined for the range of the small hitting type counter value C5 is the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The third embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that the game does not include the V winning device 650 and passes a ball through a specific area during a small hit game to obtain a big hit (two kinds). The difference is that each small hitting type defined in the small hitting type 3 table 202bb is not associated with the content of the big hit game set at the time of winning two hits.

  FIG. 113 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time saving provision 3 table 202bc in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 113 (b), the time-saving giving 3 table 202bc is set in the time-saving giving table 202e of the first embodiment (see FIG. 21 (d)) corresponding to each big hit type. The difference is that the prescribed contents of the time reduction termination conditions are different.

  Specifically, when the jackpot type is the jackpot A, among the time saving end conditions, “100” is set as the value of the counter 203k during the time saving as a change number end condition that is satisfied based on the number of changes of the special symbol. As the winning number ending condition established based on the number of winnings, the value of the small hitting A counter 203m is “1”, the value of the small hitting B counter 203n is “10”, and the value of the small hitting C counter 203ac is “50”. It is defined to be set. That is, after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A is completed, “the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 100”, “wins once in the small jackpot A (small jackpot in which is set)”, “small jackpot” The end condition is satisfied when one of the conditions of "winning a win B (small win set)" 10 times and "winning a small win C (small win set) 50 times" is satisfied. A time-saving state (hereinafter, referred to as a time-saving state a) is set.

  When the jackpot type is the jackpot B, among the time saving end conditions, as the change number end condition that is satisfied based on the number of times of the change of the special symbol, “50” is set as the value of the counter 203k during the time saving, Are set as the win number end condition based on the small hit A counter 203m, “5” is set as the small hit B counter 203n, and “25” is set as the small hit C counter 203ac. It is stipulated as follows. That is, after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot B is completed, “the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 50 times”, “wins 5 times in the small hit A (small hit in which the small hit is set)”, “small hit” The end condition is satisfied when one of the following conditions is satisfied: "Win 5 times for the small hits for which the win B is set" or "Win 25 times for the small hits for which the small hit C is set". A time-saving state (hereinafter, referred to as a time-saving state b) is set.

  When the jackpot type is the jackpot D, among the time saving end conditions, as the change number end condition that is satisfied based on the number of times of the change of the special symbol, “100” is set to the value of the counter 203k during the time save and the number of small hits is determined. It is defined that the value of the small hitting A counter 203m is set to “20” and the value of the small hitting C counter 203ac is set to “80” as the winning number end condition that is satisfied. That is, after the jackpot game corresponding to jackpot A is completed, “the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 100 times”, “wins 20 times for small hit A (small jackpot for which is set)”, “small hit” When one of the conditions of “winning win C (small win in which is set) is satisfied” is satisfied, a time-saving state (hereinafter, referred to as a time-saving state c) in which the end condition is satisfied is set.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, as in the above-described embodiments, a plurality of different time-saving termination conditions are set in accordance with the jackpot type set at the time of winning a jackpot, and a plurality of the set time-saving termination conditions are set. Since the time saving state is configured to end when either of the conditions is satisfied, the timing at which the time saving state ends can be diversified.

  In addition, since the time saving termination condition that is likely to be established and the establishment are different depending on the time saving state (ac) set according to the jackpot type, the time saving state is determined based on the number of times the special symbol changes during the time saving state. Is completed and the case where the time-saving state ends based on the number of small hits in the time-saving state can be mixed and generated, so that the pattern in which the time-saving state ends can be diversified.

  In the third embodiment, the number of items set as the time saving end condition varies depending on the set time saving state. Specifically, in the time-saving states a and b, the time-saving end condition that can be satisfied when the small hit B is won is set, but in the time-saving state c, the time saving end condition that can be satisfied when the small hit B is won. Is configured not to be set.

  With this configuration, even if the player knows the type of the small hit game to be executed during the time saving state, the first symbol corresponding to the small hit type set to the winning small hit is stopped and displayed. Even if the player knows the type of the small hit game by grasping the first symbol that is stopped and displayed in the gaming machine that stops, it is determined whether the type of the small hit game is set as the time saving end condition. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the time saving state ends.

  In the third embodiment, when a small hit is won in a lottery of a special symbol, a time-saving end condition is set for all possible small hit types (small hits A to C). However, as another configuration, for example, a small hit type that is set when a small hit is won is added (for example, small hit X to Z), and the added small hit type is shortened in time. The end condition may not be set.

  With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether or not the end of the time reduction state is approaching (in the time reduction end condition) when the small hit is won during the time reduction state, It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the time saving state ends.

  Further, in this case, the small hitting game (for example, small hitting A) for which the time saving ending condition is set and the small hitting type (for example, small hitting X) for which the time saving ending condition is not set are set in the small hitting game to be executed. It is preferable that the operation content is the same (including an error that cannot be identified by the player). This makes it possible to prevent the player from discriminating the current small hit type based on the operation content during the small hit game.

  Next, the contents of the release scenario 3 table 202bd in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 114 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the release scenario 3 table 202bd. As shown in FIG. 114, the open scenario 3 table 202bd is different from the above-described open scenario table 202g in that the contents of the open scenario defined corresponding to the small hits A to C are different. , The contents of the open scenario defined corresponding to the jackpot D are different, and the other elements are the same.

  Here, among the contents of the release scenario 3 table 202bd, the differences described above will be described. The detailed description of the same elements will be omitted. As described above, in the third embodiment, as a small hit game executed when a small win is won, a small hit game in which the second variable winning device 1650 is opened (a small hit game in which the second variable winning opening is opened). Is configured to be executed. Further, in the third embodiment, even if a ball wins in the second variable winning device 1650 during the small hitting game, it is configured such that two kinds of hits cannot be obtained.

  Therefore, in the open scenario defined corresponding to the small hits A to C in the open scenario 3 table 202bd, only the operation content for one round (1R) corresponding to the small hit game is specified. In addition, as shown in FIG. 114, in the third embodiment, an open scenario in which an error is provided to the extent that it is difficult for a player to identify the small hits A to C is defined.

  Specifically, in the opening scenario corresponding to the small win A, an opening operation in which the opening time of the second variable winning opening of the second variable winning device 1650 is 0.1 second is executed, and the opening corresponding to the small winning B is performed. In the scenario, an opening operation is performed in which the opening time of the second variable winning opening of the second variable winning device 1650 is 0.11 second. In the opening scenario corresponding to the small hit C, the second variable winning device 1650 has the second opening operation. Each opening scenario is defined so that an opening operation in which the opening time of the variable winning opening is 0.09 seconds is executed.

  By configuring in this way, it is difficult to grasp the small hit type corresponding to the current small hit game from the content of the small hit game actually executed, while defining a different opening scenario for each small hit type. Can be.

  In the third embodiment, in order to make it difficult to grasp the small hit type corresponding to the current small hit game from the content of the small hit game to be executed, the second variable prize is made to correspond to each small hit type. Although the opening scenario in which the opening time of the second variable winning opening of the device 1650 is made different to the extent that it is difficult for the player to identify is defined, other than this, the period of the start interval of the small hitting game (0.5 seconds) ) And the end interval (0.5 seconds) may be made different to the extent that it is difficult for the player to discriminate. Further, each time may be different so that the period of the open scenario defined corresponding to each small hit type is the same.

  In addition, by configuring a specific small hit type among a plurality of small hit types, an opening scenario different from other small hit types (different to a degree that a player can easily identify) is defined. The player may be configured to identify that a specific small hit type has been set, in which case it is different from the other small hit types (different to the extent that the player can easily identify). It is preferable to set a time-saving termination condition for a small hit type in which an open scenario is defined. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a pleasure for the player to predict the timing at which the time saving state ends by grasping the content of the small hit game to be executed.

  Further, the same open scenario may be defined for a plurality of small hit types, and in this case, based on a predetermined condition being satisfied while the small hit game is being executed, the open scenario is determined according to the small hit type. It is good to constitute so that different effects may be performed. Here, as the predetermined condition set during the execution of the small hitting game, for example, a ball wins in the second variable winning opening of the second variable winning device 1650 during the small hitting game, or during the small hitting game. It is preferable to set a condition that is satisfied when the player operates the frame button 22 or the like. With this configuration, the player can be motivated to play the game such that the predetermined condition is satisfied during the period in which the small hitting game is being executed (during the predetermined period).

  Examples of the effect performed when the predetermined condition is satisfied during the small hit game include, for example, an effect in which the type of sound generated when a ball passes (enters) a predetermined area or a frame button. A different effect may be executed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, in addition to the effect of changing the sound or light based on the operation of the 22.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, the state display selection table 222b and the final state display selection table 222c are deleted from the ROM 222 (see FIG. 26A) in the first embodiment, and a time reduction remaining period determination table 222ba is added. Is different. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 116, the contents of the time reduction remaining period determination table 222ba will be described. FIG. 116 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the time reduction remaining period determination table 222ba. The time-saving remaining period determination table 222ba indicates, for various time-saving end conditions set in the set time-saving state, game information corresponding to the various time-saving end conditions (the number of times a special symbol has changed and the number of small hits). The information included in the time saving information update area 223g updated based on the time saving related command indicating the value of the time saving medium time counter 203k, the value of the small hitting A counter 203m, the value of the small hitting B counter 203n, and the value of the small hitting C counter. Based on this, it is to determine that the time reduction state has passed for a certain period.

  By referring to the remaining time saving time period determination table 222ba, the current time saving state can be largely classified. Then, by varying the presentation mode according to the classification, it is possible to roughly inform the player of the progress of the time reduction state. In the third embodiment, the progress of the time saving state is determined in two stages. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the progress may be determined in three or more stages. . In this case, for example, a plurality of thresholds may be defined in the time reduction remaining period determination table 222ba, and the current progress may be determined based on the thresholds.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the third embodiment, a remaining time shortage number decision flag 223ba and a decision change flag 223bb are added to the above-described second embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the second embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The remaining time reduction number confirmation flag 223ba is a flag for indicating that the number of special symbol changes until the time reduction state ends is determined, and is turned on when the number of changes in the special symbol until the time reduction state ends is determined. It is set. That is, in the third embodiment, as the time-saving ending condition for ending the time-saving state, the variation number ending condition that is satisfied when the number of times of the change of the special symbol becomes a predetermined number, and the small hit is won during the time-saving state. Since the number-of-wins termination condition that is satisfied when the number of times performed has reached the predetermined number is set, it is possible to determine the remaining period until the time reduction state ends in the entire period in which the time reduction state is set. It is configured so that it cannot be done.

  That is, for example, when a value of “100” is set as the change number end condition and a value of “2” is set as the win number end condition, the special symbol changes 100 times, or 2 per small hit. If the winning is completed, the time reduction state ends, so that the remaining period of the time reduction state cannot be determined unless the period until two wins per small hit is determined. On the other hand, even when the above-described time-saving end condition is set, when the game in the time-saving state progresses, the special symbols are changed 98 times, and the state is not won once in the small hit, the time-saving state is set. It is determined that the number of times of the special symbol change until the end of is 2 times.

  In this way, when the remaining period (the number of remaining special symbol changes) until the time-saving state ends is determined, the effect of notifying the player to that effect is executed, whereby the time-saving state ends suddenly. The situation can be suppressed. Further, as in the third embodiment, when the time saving end condition includes a change number end condition and a winning number end condition, when the remaining period until the end (special symbol remaining change number) is determined. By executing an effect of notifying the player to that effect, it is possible to expect to win a small hit without giving a sense of danger that the time-saving state ends.

  This remaining time reduction number determination flag 223ba is set to ON when it is determined in the time reduction remaining period determination process (see S3358 in FIG. 123) that the number of remaining time reductions has been determined, and the effect setting process 3 (see S2871 in FIG. 122). (S3356 in FIG. 122). Then, when it is determined that the remaining time reduction number confirmation flag 223ba is set to ON (S3356: Yes in FIG. 122), a display time reduction command indicating the remaining time reduction number (special symbol change frequency) is set (FIG. 122). S3357). Thereby, the number of special symbol changes until the time saving state of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 ends is displayed (see FIG. 109 (b)).

  In the third embodiment, when the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol until the time saving state ends is determined, the remaining time reduction number determination flag 223ba is provided as a flag to indicate the determination. For example, the remaining time period of the time saving state may be notified, and for example, the special figure 1 remaining time saving number for indicating that the number of remaining fluctuations of the first special symbol until the time saving state ends is determined. A decision flag and a special figure 2 remaining time reduction number determination flag for indicating that the number of remaining fluctuations of the second special symbol until the time saving state ends are provided, and the special figure 1 remaining time reduction number determination flag is turned on. Is set to display the number of remaining fluctuations of the first special symbol, and if the special figure 2 remaining time reduction flag is set to ON, the number of remaining fluctuations of the second special symbol is displayed. You may.

  With this configuration, for example, a game in which only the first special symbol is changed (lottery) during a time saving state and a game in which only the second special symbol is changed (lottery) are set separately. In the machine, it is possible to display the remaining number of times of the special symbol according to the game content actually executed (the type of the special symbol in which the lottery is actually performed).

  The fixed fluctuation flag 223bb is a flag indicating that a period from when the time saving state is set to when the time saving ending condition is satisfied at the shortest is equal to or longer than a predetermined period, and is a special flag until the time saving ending condition is satisfied. This is set to ON when the number of symbol changes is 15 or more. The determined fluctuation flag 223bb is a value corresponding to the value of each counter indicating the time reduction end condition in the determined fluctuation determination processing (see S3063 in FIG. 124) executed in the remaining time reduction determination processing (see S3358 in FIG. 123). When it is determined that the minimum value is 15 or more (S3653 in FIG. 124: Yes), a display time reduction command corresponding to the minimum value is set (S3654 in FIG. 124) and set to ON (FIG. 124). S3655).

  Then, when it is determined that the minimum value of the values of the various counters indicating the time saving termination conditions is not equal to or greater than 15 (S3653 in FIG. 124: No), a display time reduction command that does not indicate the minimum value is set (FIG. 124). In S3656 of 124), when a plurality of pre-end conditions are satisfied (S3602 in FIG. 124) in the time reduction remaining period determination process (see S3358 in FIG. 123), it is set to OFF (see S3608 in FIG. 123).

  This allows the player to be notified of a period in which the time reduction end condition cannot be satisfied after the time reduction state is set. This can prevent the player from having anxiety that the time-saving state ends immediately after the time-saving state is set. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game with peace of mind during the time reduction state (without worrying about the end of the time reduction state).

  In the third embodiment, it is determined whether or not the fixed fluctuation flag 223bb is set to ON by referring to the values of all counters set in response to all the time saving end conditions set during the time saving state. Is configured to be able to determine the period in which the player can play the game in the time reduction state with peace of mind, and may be established in the current time reduction state, for example. A time-saving state discriminating means for discriminating the time-saving end condition is provided, and it is judged whether or not the fixed variation flag 223bb is set to ON by referring only to the value of the counter corresponding to the time-saving condition discriminated by the time-saving state discriminating means. Or a determining means for determining a time saving end condition that cannot be satisfied in the current time saving state, and a cowl corresponding to the time saving end condition determined by the determining means. Other values only may be configured to perform the determination of whether to set on the confirmation variation flag 223bb with exclusion.

<Regarding Control Process in Main Controller 110 of Third Embodiment>
In the control processing according to the third embodiment, the contents of the control processing in the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 are changed from those in the first embodiment. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the third embodiment, the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) is changed to the timer interrupt process 3 (see FIG. 118) in the first embodiment described above, and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) is performed. ) In place of the special symbol change process (see FIG. 38) and the start winning process (see FIG. 43), and the special symbol change process 3 (see FIG. 119) and the start prize executed in the second embodiment described above. The difference is that processing 2 (see FIG. 96) is executed, and the small hit control processing is changed to small hit control processing 3 (see FIG. 120), and the other points are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, a detailed description of the content of the start winning process 2 (see FIG. 96) executed in the above-described second embodiment will be omitted.

  First, the contents of the timer interrupt processing 3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the contents of the timer interrupt processing 3. In this timer interruption process 3, instead of the special symbol change process (see FIG. 38) and the start winning process (see FIG. 43), the timer interruption process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 37) is replaced by The special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 119) and the start winning process 2 (see FIG. 96) executed in the above-described second embodiment are executed, and the V entrance passage process (see FIG. 47) and the V passage process (See FIG. 48).

  When the timer interrupt process 3 is executed, the processes of S101 to S103 are executed in the same manner as the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 37). Then, when the processing of S103 ends, a special symbol variation process 3 is executed instead of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) (S174). Details of the special symbol change process 3 will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, instead of the start winning process (see FIG. 43), the start winning process 2 (see FIG. 96) executed in the above-described second embodiment is executed (S155). The details of the start winning process 2 are the same as in the above-described second embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the processes of S106 and S107 are executed in the same manner as the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 37), and thereafter, the process of S110 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) of the first embodiment is performed. The same processing as in S110 is performed, and this processing ends.

  Next, the contents of the special symbol variation process 3 (S174) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 3 (S174). In the special symbol variation process 3, the point for acquiring the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab and the small hit start setting are different from the special symbol variation process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38). The difference is that the start of the small hit is set instead of the process.

  When the special symbol variation process 3 (S174) is executed, the processes of S201 and S202 are executed similarly to the above-described special symbol variation process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38). In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is not changing (S202: No), S251 to S251 which are the same as the special symbol variation process 2 of the second embodiment described above (see FIG. 94). The process of S255 is performed. The details of the processing of S251 to S255 are the same as in the above-described second embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. After that, the process of S210 described above is executed, and this process ends.

  In the process of S252, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is 0 (S252: No), the special symbol variation process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 38). The processing of S206 to S210, which is the same as the processing of S206 to S210, is executed, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is changing (S202: Yes), S211 to S220 are performed in the same manner as the special symbol change process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38). Is performed. In the process of S220, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit (S220: Yes), the small hit opening scenario corresponding to the small hit type set in correspondence with the winning small hit is set as: The setting is made with reference to the release scenario 3 table 202bd (S271). Next, the start of the small hit is set (S272), and the small hit start flag 203f and the small hit flag 203g are set to ON (S273). Thereafter, the small hitting time saving update process is executed (S274), and this process ends. The small hitting time saving update process (S274) is a small hitting start setting process (FIG. 40, S221) executed in the special symbol changing process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment described above. This is the same process as the hit time reduction update process (S405 in FIG. 41), and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the content of the small hit control process 3 (S1555) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the content of the small hit control process 3 (S1555). The small hit control process 3 (S1555) is replaced with the small hit control process (see FIG. 53) in the first embodiment in the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113. This processing is executed. The processing related to the V flag 203i and the V passing flag 203j is deleted from the small hit control processing described above (see FIG. 53), and the target to be operated during the small hit game is a V winning device. 650 is replaced by a second variable winning device 1650.

  When the small hit control process 3 (S1555) is started, first, the same processes as S1701 to S1705 of the above-described small hit control process (see FIG. 53) are executed, and in the process of S1705, the second variable winning opening is opened. If it is determined that it is the timing (timing to open the winning opening of the second variable winning device 1650) (S1705: Yes), the process of S1706 is the same as the process of S1706 of the small hit control process (see FIG. 53) described above. The process is executed, and then the process ends. Note that the processing of S1701 to S1706 executed in the small hit control processing 3 is for executing an operation of opening the second variable winning opening of the second variable winning device 1650, and the small hit in the first embodiment described above. Although the operation target is different from the control processing (see FIG. 53), the control contents are the same, so the same reference numerals are assigned and the description is omitted.

  Further, in the processing of S1705, if it is not the second variable winning opening opening timing (S1705: No), the same processing as S1711 to S1715 of the small hit control processing (see FIG. 53) described above is executed. In the processing of S1715, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1715: Yes), the processing of S1720 that is the same as the processing of S1720 of the above-described small hit control processing (see FIG. 53) is executed. This processing ends.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment configured as described above is configured to be able to set a normal state and a time saving state as a game state, and a period in which the normal state is set is provided in the left area. Perform a left-hitting game in which a ball is thrown into the 1 entrance 64 and a lottery of the first special symbol is executed, a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and the time reduction state is set after the jackpot game is executed. In this case, a right-handed game is performed to execute a second special symbol lottery which is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery.

  The time-saving state, which is a gaming state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed, is a time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state; Alternatively, it is continuously set until one of the winning number ending conditions, which is established based on the number of winnings in the small win by the lottery of the second special symbol, is satisfied.

  Then, by making the content of the time saving end condition different according to the type of the winning jackpot, it is difficult for the player to grasp the timing at which the time saving state ends (the period in which the time saving state is continuously set). are doing. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while expecting the advantageous gaming state to continue for a long time.

  In addition, even if the time-saving state in which the time-saving state is difficult to end is set, the time-saving state is ended early according to the result of the lottery of the special symbol, or the time-saving state in which the time-saving state is easily ended is set. Also, since the special time lottery result can continue the time saving state for a long time, the gaming state advantageous to the player is longer than the gaming machine in which the time saving state is set for a predetermined period. The game can be performed while expecting to continue.

<Regarding Control Processing in Audio Lamp Control Device 113 of Third Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 121 to FIG. 124, control processing contents of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. The third embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the command determination process (see FIG. 56) is replaced with the command determination process 3 (see FIG. 121), and the effect setting process (see FIG. 63) is effected. The difference is that the setting process 3 (see FIG. 122) is replaced, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the command determination process 3 (S2183 in FIG. 121) executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the content of the command determination process 3 (S2183). This command determination process 3 (S2183) is the same as the command determination process 2 of the second embodiment (see S2163 of FIG. 99), in contrast to the command determination process of the first embodiment (S2113 of FIG. 56). Is different from the first embodiment in that the winning information-related processing (see S2251 in FIG. 100) is executed and the content of the processing executed when a time-saving-related command is received is changed, and the other points are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the command determination process 3 (S2183 in FIG. 121) is executed, the command determination process of the above-described first embodiment (S2113 of FIG. 56) or the command determination process 2 of the second embodiment (S2163 of FIG. 99) After that, if it is determined in the process of S2215 that the command received this time is a command related to time saving (S2215: Yes), the contents of the time saving information update area 223g are then updated. After the update, the process proceeds to S2217. That is, in the third embodiment, when a command related to time reduction is received, the received command is stored as it is, instead of performing the process of changing the corresponding flag or counter as in the first embodiment described above. Processing is executed.

  Then, using the information stored in the time saving information update area 223g, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to grasp the time saving state. In the third embodiment as well, when a time-saving related command is received as in the above-described first embodiment, processing for changing the corresponding flag or counter is performed as in the above-described first embodiment. May be configured.

  Next, the processing of effect setting processing 3 (S2871) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the contents of effect setting process 3 (S2871). In this effect setting process 3 (S2871), the time-saving state is set based on the progress of the time-saving state (the situation until the time-saving termination condition is satisfied (the number of remaining fluctuations) and the number of fluctuations after the time-saving state is set). An effect mode of the effect for indicating the remaining period is set.

  When the effect setting process 3 (S2871) is executed, first, the information stored in the gaming state storage area 223f is read (S2901), and then it is determined whether the read information is in a time saving state (S2902). . When it is determined that it is not the time saving state (S2902: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving state is set (S2902: Yes), the time saving information stored in the time saving information update area 223g is read (S3351), and the special symbol type of the current variation (main variation) (Special Figure 1) Alternatively, the special drawing 2), the lottery result is extracted from the fluctuation pattern (S3352), and it is determined whether or not the time reduction end condition is satisfied by the main fluctuation (S3353).

  As a result of the determination in S3353, if it is determined that the time saving end condition is satisfied (yes) (S3353: Yes), a display time saving command indicating the end of the time saving is set (S3355), and this processing ends. In the process of S3354, when it is determined that the time reduction termination condition is not satisfied (not performed) (S3354: No), it is next determined whether the remaining time reduction frequency determination flag 223ba is set to ON (S3356). If it is determined that it is set to ON (S3356: Yes), a display time-saving command indicating the number of remaining working hours is set (S3357), and this processing ends.

  Then, in the process of S3356, when it is determined that the remaining time reduction number determination flag 223ba is not set to ON (S3356: No), a time reduction remaining period determination process described later with reference to FIG. 123 is executed (S3358). Then, the present process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the contents of the time reduction remaining period determination processing (S3358) will be described. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the contents of the remaining working hours determination process (S3358). In this time saving remaining period determination processing (S3358), the current time saving time is stored according to the time saving information stored in the time saving information update area 223g, that is, the time saving information updated based on the command transmitted from the main control device 110. A process for determining the situation and setting an effect mode based on the determination result is executed.

  When the time reduction remaining time determination processing (S3358) is executed, first, the time reduction remaining time is determined based on the time reduction remaining time determination table 222ba using the time reduction information stored in the time reduction information update area 223g (S3601). . Then, based on the determination result, it is determined whether or not a plurality of remaining periods have reached the pre-end condition (S3602). If not (S3602: No), a fixed fluctuation determination process is executed (S3063). Then, the present process ends. The content of the fixed fluctuation determination processing (S3063) will be described later with reference to FIG. 124. In a state where the time reduction state is set, the currently set time reduction end condition (values of various counters) is determined. When a special symbol change (lottery) is executed, a process for determining a period (special symbol change count) in which the time reduction state is not always terminated is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that a plurality of remaining periods have reached the pre-end condition (S3602: Yes), it is determined whether the fixed variation flag 223bb is set to ON (S3604), and the fixed variation flag 223bb is set to ON. If it is determined that it has not been set (it has been set to off) (S3604: No), it is next determined whether the number of remaining working hours has been determined. The display time saving command indicating the mode is set (S3605), and the process ends. When the display time-saving command indicating the union mode is set in the process of S3605, the union status display mode Dm11z as shown in FIG. 107B is displayed.

  Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which time-saving end condition is likely to be satisfied, and to indicate that a plurality of time-saving end conditions have reached just before the realization (that is, the time-saving state is longer). (Continuation).

  In the process of S3604, when it is determined that the fixed fluctuation flag 223bb is set to ON (S3604: Yes), the fixed fluctuation flag 223bb is set to OFF (S3608), and whether the above-mentioned remaining working hours is fixed is determined. The process proceeds to a process of determining If it is determined in the processing of S3604 that the number of remaining working hours has been determined, then information indicating the number of remaining working hours is stored in the time saving information update area 223g (S3606), and the time saving display time indicating the remaining working hours is displayed. The command is set (S3607), the remaining short-time count change flag 223bb is set to ON (S3608), and the process ends.

  Here, the contents of the fixed change determination processing (S3063) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the contents of the confirmed fluctuation determination processing (S3063). In the final variation determination process (S3063), as described above, a period during which the set time-saving state cannot be ended is determined, and a command for displaying that period on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is issued. The process for setting is executed. As a result, in a gaming machine having a game characteristic in which it is difficult to understand when the time reduction state ends (a game characteristic having a plurality of time reduction end conditions), the player can use the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 110). ), It is possible to know the period during which the game can be performed with peace of mind.

  When the fixed fluctuation determination process (S3063) is executed, it is first determined whether the fixed fluctuation flag 223bb is set to ON (S3651), and if it is determined that the fixed fluctuation flag 223bb is not set to ON (S3651: No), the time saving Values corresponding to the medium counter 203k, the small hit A counter 203m, the small hit B counter 203n, and the small hit C counter 203p are read from the time saving information update area 223g, and the minimum value is extracted (S3652).

  In the present embodiment, in the process of S3652, the values of the various counters included in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 are determined based on the information stored in the time saving information update area 223g. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a counter that varies in synchronization with various counters of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 described above, and is configured to determine based on the value of the counter. Is also good.

  It is determined whether the minimum value extracted in the process of S3652 is a condition value (15 or more in the present embodiment) that can be reported as a definite variation (S3653). If it is determined that the minimum value is more than the condition value (15) (S3653) : Yes), a display time-saving command indicating the minimum value is set (S3654), the fixed fluctuation flag 223bb is set to ON (S3655), and this processing ends.

  With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player only when the period in which the time reduction state cannot be completed (the number of special symbol changes) is equal to or more than a predetermined number. The effect mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 only when the flag 223bb is set to ON can be set as an effect mode for allowing the player to play a game with peace of mind. That is, for example, when the period during which the time reduction state cannot be completed (the number of special symbol changes) is one, the fact is notified to the player, and the player is prevented from feeling uneasy. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, when the period in which the time reduction state cannot be completed (the number of special symbol changes) is equal to or more than a predetermined number, the effect mode for notifying the player of the fact is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the content to be notified to the player may be made different based on the operation content of the operation means operable by the player, for example, when the player performs a specific operation. In a case where the period in which the time reduction state cannot be completed (the number of special symbol changes) is less than a predetermined number, the configuration may be such that the fact is notified, or the player performs a special operation. In such a case, it may be configured to notify the user only when the period during which the time saving state cannot be ended (the number of special symbol changes) is a special number larger than a predetermined number.

  In the processing of S3653, if it is determined that the minimum value is less than the condition value (15) (S3653: No), a display time reduction command corresponding to the updated time reduction information is set (S3656), and this processing ends. I do. If it is determined in the process of S3651 that the fixed fluctuation flag 223bb is set to ON (S3651: Yes), the process skips the processes of S3652 and S3653 and proceeds to the process of S3654.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fourth embodiment, a plurality of special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) can be selected (changed) simultaneously (in parallel) with respect to the first embodiment described above. The difference is in the configuration.

  Then, as the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is more likely to be selected than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. A time-saving state) and a time-saving state in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is longer than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (that is, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is more frequently performed). ) And a game state having a different degree of advantage to the player is provided in the time-saving state.

  Further, the present embodiment is different in that different effects (display of the number of time savings) are executed corresponding to the plurality of time saving states described above.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 125, the configuration of the game board 13 used in the fourth embodiment will be described, focusing on differences from the first embodiment described above. FIG. 125 is a front view of the game board 13 used in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 125, the game board 13 of the present embodiment is different from the game board 13 of the above-described first embodiment in that the configuration of the right-handed area is different. In this figure, a ball shot by performing a left-handed game flows down a left-handed (left) area along an arrow PA1 shown on the game board 13, and a ball shot by performing a right-handed game is a game board. It is configured to flow down the right-handed (right) area along the arrow PA2 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 125, in the present embodiment, a first starting port 64 (hereinafter referred to as a left first starting port 64) is provided below the variable display unit 80. The left first start-up port 64 has an opening formed on the upper surface having a size that allows one game ball to enter therein, and a nail slightly smaller than the diameter of the two game balls at a position facing the opening. They are arranged at wide intervals. By adjusting the inclination of the nail, the winning rate of game play to the left first starting port 64 (for example, when 250 game balls are fired, the number of game balls winning to the left first starting port 64) ) Can be varied.

  In the right area of the variable display unit 80, a second starting port 640 and a first starting port 64 (hereinafter, referred to as a right first starting port 64) are vertically arranged in parallel. The second starting port 640 has an opening on one side of the decorative member attached to the game board 60, in which one game ball can enter. On the front side (opposing surface) of the opening, an ordinary electric accessory 640a attached to the second starting port 640 is arranged. The ordinary electric accessory 640a has a length of about three game balls, and is rotatably supported at one end. Then, based on the fact that the second symbol is a hit, the game ball is played for a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, once or twice) and for a predetermined number of seconds (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds or 1 second). Is rotated at a predetermined angle (45 degrees in the present embodiment) in a direction in which can be guided to the second starting port 640 (a direction away from the opening). Ordinary electric accessory 640a is rotated by a solenoid. In a normal state (other than at the time of hitting the second symbol), the state where the opening of the second starting port 640a is closed (the state where the second starting port 640a stands upright) is maintained.

  Further, the right first starting port 64 is arranged below the second starting port 640. When the ordinary electric accessory 640a is in an open state (in a state of being inclined in the horizontal direction), the ordinary electric accessory 640a is arranged at a position facing the opening of the right first starting port 64. With such a configuration, when the ordinary electric accessory 640a is in the open state, it is possible to configure a state in which a game ball is unlikely to enter the right first starting port 64.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the high probability state (probable change state) or the time saving gaming state, the probability that the second symbol is determined to be a hit is increased. When the game state is the low-probability game state, the player fires the game ball so that the game ball passes on the left side of the variable display unit 80, and wins the game ball in the first start port 64 on the left side. Perform the game to make it play. When the third symbol is a hit and the game shifts to a probable change game or a time saving game, the probability that the second symbol is determined to be a hit increases, so that when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol is easily hit. Have been. Accordingly, the player executes the game by firing (right-handed game) the game ball so as to pass on the right side of the variable display unit 80. In this case, the probability that the ordinary electric accessory 640a will be in the open state increases, so that it is easy to win the second starting port 640, while winning in the right first starting port 64 decreases.

  Here, in the present embodiment, in the probable change game state, it is configured such that a player who wins in the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than in the first special symbol. Specifically, in the first special symbol, 50% of the jackpots are jackpots to which a probability change is likely to be given after the jackpot game, and the remaining 50% are likely to be given a time-saving game (low-probability gaming state) after the jackpot game ( It is configured such that a jackpot is given (it is difficult to give a probable change game).

  On the other hand, the second special symbol is configured such that, when a big hit occurs, a big hit that is easy to be given to the certain variation game after the big hit game is given at 100%. That is, it is configured that the winning in the second special symbol is more likely to give the probable change game state.

  In addition, in the flow path on the right side of the variable display unit 80, when the ordinary electric accessory 640a is in an open state, the distance between the tip of the ordinary electric accessory 640a and the variable display unit 80 is one ball or more and less than two balls. Is the interval. The through balls 67 are arranged so that the game balls flowing down the gap easily pass through the through gate 67 having the gate-shaped opening. The game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is configured such that it is difficult to win the right first starting port 64 by a nail arranged on the downstream side of the through gate 67. Specifically, on the exit side (downstream side) of the through gate 67, a game ball flows down to the opening side of the right first starting port 64 by a nail disposed above the opening of the right first starting port 64. It is configured to have an interval (less than one game ball) that does not flow, and to flow downward through a windmill as it is. In other words, when winning in the first starting opening 64 on the right side, it is configured such that it is limited to the case where the ordinary electric accessory 640a is maintained in the closed state (the state of standing up in the vertical direction).

  In the present embodiment, in the open state of the ordinary electric accessory 640a, the right first starting port 64 is not won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball flowing down from the exit of the through gate 67 may cause the right first starting port. The opening at the opening 64 may be configured so as to be able to win, and the ratio may be reduced so that the opening at the right first starting opening 64 can be realized.

  Next, in the fourth embodiment, the contents of the effect mode (effect display mode displayed on the third symbol display device) during the time saving state will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127. First, with reference to FIG. 126, a display screen at the time of entering a time reduction state, which is displayed corresponding to the set type of the time reduction state, will be described.

  In the fourth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are allowed to fluctuate (lottery) at the same time (in parallel with each other), which will be described in detail later. By changing the variation pattern (fluctuation time) of each special symbol, the first special symbol during which the variation of the first special symbol is more likely to be executed than the variation of the second special symbol during the time saving state, and the first special symbol The second time-saving state in which the change of the second special symbol is more likely to be executed than the change of the second special symbol can be set.

  Then, only the lottery of the second special symbol is set so as to win the small hit, and when the small hit is won, two kinds of wins can be obtained as in the first embodiment described above. In addition, a plurality of special symbols are changed (lottery) at the same time (in parallel), so that a lottery result advantageous to the player does not occur at the same time, a specific lottery result in one special symbol lottery. When a winning is achieved (for example, a winning), the other special symbol that is changing is forcibly stopped and displayed with a stop symbol that indicates a deviation.

  Further, when a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of the time-saving state, which is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, is set, the time-saving state is set corresponding to the change start timing of each special symbol that is executed simultaneously (in line). The number of times that the state is set (the number of time savings) is configured to be subtracted.

  In other words, when the first time-saving state in which the first special symbol mainly fluctuates is set, the time-saving game is easily performed according to the number of times of the special symbol set as the time-saving end condition, but the second special symbol is used. If the second time reduction state in which fluctuates mainly is set, the fluctuating first special symbol is forcibly stopped based on the small win as described above, so that it is set as the time reduction end condition. There is a problem that a large difference occurs between the number of times the special symbol fluctuates and the number of games actually executed.

  More specifically, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set as the time saving end condition that the total number of changes reaches 100, if the first special symbol is set, the first special symbol is changed to the first special symbol. If it is configured so that only the fluctuation (lottery) is executed (so that a long time (a time longer than the first special symbol fluctuates 100 times) is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol), the first time reduction is achieved. It is possible to execute about 100 special symbol changes during the state (the second special symbol is not forcibly stopped due to the lottery result of the first special symbol).

  On the other hand, when the time saving end condition is that the total number of changes of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches 100 times, the second special symbol is set when the second time reduction state is set. (A long time (a time longer than the second special symbol fluctuates 100 times) is set as the variation time of the first special symbol), and In the lottery of the second special symbol, if the small hit is won with a probability of approximately 1/1 (the probability excluding only the probability of winning the big hit), the small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol. Each time, the forcible stop is performed outside the fluctuation of the first special symbol, so that the number of fluctuations actually executed is about 50 times.

  As described above, even when the same condition is set as the time saving end condition, the number of times the special symbol is changed while the time saving state is set (forcibly stopped) in the type of the time saving game to be executed. (The number of fluctuations without) is different. In such a case, regardless of the type of the time saving state set, if the actually set number of time savings (for example, 100 times) is displayed to the player, the time saving state that gives the player a sense of discomfort. There was a problem that would provide.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the number of time savings (remaining time savings) to be notified to the player is displayed on the display screen (time saving state entry screen) when the time saving state is set according to the type of the time saving state to be set. Are configured to be different. Thus, it is possible to suppress the provision of the time-saving state that gives the player a sense of discomfort. Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the configuration in which the number of time savings to be notified to the player (remaining number of times reduced) is displayed differently according to the type of the set time saving state, the remaining time savings to be notified to the player is also provided. When the number of times differs from the actual number of remaining working hours, processing for correcting the number of remaining working hours to be notified to the player is executed.

  With such a configuration, for example, in a state in which the first time reduction state is set, the game is temporarily interrupted during the game, so that the second special symbol is executed a plurality of times, or the second time reduction state is set. Even if the player wins a win other than a jackpot or a small hit in the result of the lottery of the second special symbol and cannot forcibly stop the fluctuating first special symbol, the player may feel uncomfortable. , The notified remaining working hours can be synchronized with the actual remaining working hours.

  Specifically, when the above-described second time-saving state (time-saving A) is set, as shown in FIG. 126 (a), the total number of times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol actually changes. Even if reaching 100 times is set as the time saving end condition, "50" is displayed in the remaining time saving number display area Dm10 in consideration of the number of times the special symbol change is forcibly stopped by the small hit winning, and the first time is displayed. When the time saving state (hour saving B) is set, “100” is displayed in the remaining time saving number display area Dm10 as shown in FIG. 126 (b).

  Thus, when the second time reduction state is set, it is possible to make the player think that the time reduction end condition in which the number of times of the special symbol changes is 50 is set. Then, even if the number of times of the change of the special symbol is updated (subtracted) due to the forcible stop of the special symbol, the number of remaining hours reduced displayed in the remaining short time display area Dm10 is updated (subtracted) in accordance with the update (subtraction). However, since the remaining working hours displayed in the remaining working hours display area Dm10 are updated (subtracted) in accordance with the number of times the second special symbol changes, the working hours are continuously set. The period (the number of special symbol changes) can be updated (subtracted) without giving the player an uncomfortable feeling.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 126 (a) and (b), when the time-saving state is set, the reserved symbols corresponding to each special symbol are not displayed in the sub display area Ds. are doing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from perceiving the number of times the special symbol is actually changed while the time saving state is being set, by the manner in which the reserved symbol is consumed. In the fourth embodiment, instead of displaying the reserved symbols corresponding to each special symbol in the sub display area Ds, the special figure 1 reserved ball number display in which the number of reserved balls of each special symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm. Although the area Dm6 and the special figure 2 reserved ball count display area Dm7 are formed, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is not the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 but the decorative member provided on the game board 13. A notification means may be provided for notifying the number of reserved balls of each special symbol in a light emitting manner by using a part thereof. Further, this notification means may be used in the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 127, a description will be given of the content of the correction effect for correcting the number of remaining working hours displayed in the remaining working hours display area Dm10 described above. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the number of remaining time reductions to be displayed on the display screen (time reduction state setting screen) when the time reduction state is set is made different according to the type of the set game state. (See FIG. 126). In this case, for example, the game is temporarily interrupted in a state where the first time reduction state is set, and the second special symbol is executed a plurality of times, or in a state where the second time reduction state is set, the second special symbol is played. When the variation of the special symbol is executed under unusual conditions, such as when the lottery result is lost and the first special symbol is not forcibly stopped, etc., the number of remaining time reductions reported and the actual remaining time reduction There was a possibility that the number of times would be different.

  In such a case, for example, during the time saving game in which the time saving A is set and the second special symbol mainly fluctuates, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order and the first special symbol is not forcibly stopped, That is, when the actual number of remaining working hours becomes larger than the number corresponding to the notified remaining working hours, first, as shown in FIG. 127 (a), the third symbol is provisionally displayed during the variable display. At the same time, the same display mode (a concept including an error that the player is hardly noticed) is displayed in the main display area Dm when the lottery result of the special symbol is notified to the player. In other words, during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, a pseudo stop effect that makes the player think that the fluctuation of the special symbol has stopped is executed, and the display mode of the remaining short-time display area Dm10 is made to correspond to the pseudo stop effect. (Notification remaining working hours) is updated (subtracted), and a correction effect is executed so that the state shown in FIG. 127 (b) is obtained.

  With this configuration, it is possible to synchronize the reported remaining working hours with the actual remaining working hours without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, although a detailed description will be given later, this correction effect is executed only when the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special symbol (second special symbol) is longer than a predetermined time (30 seconds or longer). It is configured to be. Therefore, even if the pseudo stop effect is executed during one special symbol fluctuation period, the player does not feel uncomfortable. Although the detailed description is omitted, when the actual number of remaining working hours is less than the number corresponding to the notified remaining working hours, the remaining working hours display area Dm10 is displayed across a plurality of special symbol variations. It is only necessary to execute an effect (multiple-variation fusion effect) that updates (subtracts) the mode (remaining working hours for notification).

<Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The fourth embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 are changed. Different.

  FIG. 128A is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment. The ROM 202 includes at least a first random number 4 table 202ca, a first type selection 4 table 202cb, a second random number table 202c, a variation pattern 4 table 202cd, and a small type selection 4 table 202ce. Has been.

  First, the first random number 4 table 202ca will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 4 table 202ca. In this first random number 4 table 202ca, a random number table corresponding to the first special symbol and a random number table corresponding to the second special symbol are defined as in the first embodiment. It differs from the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 20 (a)) in that the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 corresponding to the second special symbol is replaced with a special symbol 2 random number 4 table 202ca2. Are identical. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 4 table 202ca2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number 4 table 202ca2. As shown in FIG. 129 (b), the special symbol 2 random number 4 table 202ca2 is different from the above-described special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in a range where the small hit is determined from “5-989” to “5-998”. "And the other points are the same. That is, in the second special symbol lottery in the fourth embodiment, a small hit is won with a probability of 994/1000.

  Next, the first hit type selection 4 table 202cb will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection 4 table 202cb. The first hit type selection 4 table 202cb is different from the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 21A) in that the special figure 1 big hit type selection table 202b1 is used instead of the special figure 1 big hit type selection table 202b1. The table 202cb1 is different in that a special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202cb2 is provided instead of the special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202b2, and the other points are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Here, the contents of the special figure 1 big hit type selection 4 table 202cb1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 big hit type selection 4 table 202cb1. The special figure 1 big hit type selection 4 table 202cb1 is different from the special figure 1 big hit type selection table 202b1 (see FIG. 21 (b)) in the content of the big hit game corresponding to each big hit type and after the big hit game ends. The game state to be set is different.

  Specifically, when the jackpot A is selected as the jackpot type, a jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed as the jackpot game, and thereafter, the time saving state (hour saving A) is set, and when the jackpot B is selected. In the game, five rounds of a jackpot game are executed as a jackpot game, and thereafter, a time saving state (hour saving A) is set. Then, when the big hit C is selected, a big hit game of five rounds is executed as the big hit game, and thereafter, the normal state is set. That is, the jackpot types A and B are jackpots in which the time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and jackpot C is a jackpot in which the time-saving state is not set after the end of the jackpot game. In the fourth embodiment, a plurality of time-saving states (time-saving A, time-saving B) are set as the time-saving state that can be set after the end of the big hit game.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, when the time reduction A is set as the time reduction state, the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed as the game during the time reduction state, and when the time reduction B is set, the time reduction state is set. The first special symbol lottery is mainly executed as a game. In this way, by changing the variation (lottery) of the special symbol mainly executed during the time reduction state according to the set time reduction state, it is possible to set different game specifications during the time reduction state. Become. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having gaming specifications that are equal to or more than the types of gaming states that can be set, so that the interest of the gaming can be improved.

  Next, the contents of the special figure 2 big hit type selection 4 table 202cb2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 big hit type selection 4 table 202cb2. The special figure 2 big hit type selection 4 table 202cb2 is defined corresponding to the possible value of the first hit type counter value C2 with respect to the above special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202b2 (see FIG. 21C). The difference is that the types of the jackpot types are increased, the content of the jackpot game corresponding to each jackpot type, and the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game are different.

  Specifically, as the jackpot type, the jackpot type D defines the jackpot D in the range of “0 to 69” and the jackpot E in the range of “70 to 99”. When the jackpot D is selected as the jackpot type, a 15-round jackpot game is executed as the jackpot game, and thereafter, the time saving state (hour saving A) is set. A big hit game of 15 rounds is executed as a game, and thereafter, a time saving state (time saving B) is set.

  In other words, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the time saving state is always set after the jackpot game is completed, and the time saving A is set to 30% and the time saving B is set to 70% of them. . Here, when the time reduction A is set as the time reduction state, the time reduction game mainly including the lottery (change) of the second special symbol is executed again. On the other hand, when the time saving B is set, the time saving game mainly executed by the lottery (change) of the first special symbol is executed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the player hits the left in the normal state or the probable change state, and has a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, a 58% ratio (big hit B, D) has an advantageous latent state. It is configured to transition to. Then, when the player hits the right in the latent state and wins in the lottery of the second special symbol, the advantageous latent state is looped at a rate of 100% (big hits E to G). Therefore, once the latent state (probably changed state of the special symbol and normal state of the ordinary symbol) is set, by making a right hit to the second entrance 1640, the lottery of the second special symbol is performed. It is easy to execute and the state where the jackpot probability is high and the jackpot of the second special symbol are easily repeated. For this reason, the player can be caused to play the game for one purpose of shifting to the latent state, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, the details of the fluctuation pattern 4 table 202cd will be described with reference to FIGS. In the variation pattern 4 table 202cd, as described above, the random value for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the variation display from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is defined.

  As shown in FIG. 131, the fluctuation pattern 4 table 202cd includes a normal fluctuation pattern table 202cd1 for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) in the normal state, and a time reduction A for determining the fluctuation pattern in the time reduction state. At least a variation pattern table 202cd2 and a variation pattern table 202cd3 for time saving B are defined. Next, the specific contents of each of these tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. In each of the tables shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the fluctuation time is expressed in milliseconds, but in the following description, the fluctuation time is expressed in seconds for ease of understanding.

  First, the normal fluctuation pattern table 202cd1 will be described with reference to FIG. The normal fluctuation pattern table 202cd1 is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is the normal state. FIG. 132 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal fluctuation pattern table 202cd1. As shown in FIG. 132, the normal fluctuation pattern table 202cd1 includes a random number value (variation time) for determining the type of the fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation time) for each of the special symbol type and the special symbol stop type (win / fail determination result). The counter value of the variation type counter value CS1) is defined.

  Specifically, as a fluctuation pattern determined when a win (big hit) is made in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 falls within the range of “0 to 50” and the normal reach ( 20 seconds) and super reach (30 seconds) corresponding to the range of “51 to 198”.

  On the other hand, when the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is lost, a variation pattern of a short deviation (8 seconds) is associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of “0 to 70”, and “ The range of 71 to 120 ”is associated with a variation pattern of a long deviation (12 seconds), and the range of“ 121 to 170 ”is associated with a normal reach (20 seconds). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a super reach (30 seconds) outside the range of “171 to 198”.

  Further, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, 600 seconds (10 minutes) is set as the fluctuation time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the hit long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the small hit long change A (600 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the value that the change type counter CS1 can take, When the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order, the outlier long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the entire range (0 to 198) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Thus, in the normal state, when right-handed is performed and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the fluctuation time of 600 seconds is set each time, so that the game efficiency is extremely deteriorated as compared with left-handed. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which the player makes a right-handed hit in a normal state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 133A, the details of the time-saving A variation pattern table 202cd2 will be described. FIG. 133A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the time-saving A variation pattern table 202cd2. The variation pattern table 202cd2 for the time saving A is referred to in order to select a variation pattern corresponding to the lottery result when a special symbol lottery is executed in a state where the time saving A is set among the time saving states. It is a table.

  As shown in FIG. 133 (a), the jackpot of the first special symbol (special figure 1) has a jackpot super short variation (1 second) for the entire range of possible values (0 to 198) of the variation type counter CS1. ) Are defined in association with each other. In addition, the extra long variation (60 seconds) is defined in association with the departure of the first special symbol (special figure 1) with respect to the entire range (0 to 198) of the value that can be taken by the variation type counter CS1. I have.

  On the other hand, the jackpot of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is defined in association with the jackpot short variation (5 seconds) with respect to the entire range (0 to 198) of the value that can be taken by the variation type counter CS1. For the small hit of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the small hit short variation (5 seconds) is defined in association with the entire range (0 to 198) of the value that the variation type counter CS1 can take. The deviation of the special symbol (special figure 2) is defined in such a manner that the deviation short-circuit fluctuation (5 seconds) is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of the value that can be taken by the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 133 (b), the details of the variation pattern table 202cd3 for time saving B will be described. FIG. 133 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time-saving B fluctuation pattern table 202cd3. The variation pattern table 202cd3 for time saving B is referred to in order to select a variation pattern corresponding to the lottery result when a special symbol lottery is executed in a state where the time saving B is set among the time saving states. It is a table.

  As shown in FIG. 133 (b), in the big hit of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the big hit short fluctuation (5 seconds) with respect to the entire range (0 to 198) of the value that can be taken by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Are defined in association with each other. In addition, the extra long variation (5 seconds) is defined in association with the departure of the first special symbol (special figure 1) with respect to the entire range (0 to 198) of the value that can be taken by the variation type counter CS1. I have.

  On the other hand, the jackpot of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is defined in such a manner that the jackpot super short variation (1 second) is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of the value that can be taken by the variation type counter CS1. The small hit of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is defined in association with the small hit long change (60 seconds) with respect to the entire range (0 to 198) of the value that can be taken by the change type counter CS1. For the deviation of the second special symbol (special figure 2), a deviation long fluctuation (60 seconds) is defined in association with the entire range (0 to 198) of the value that can be taken by the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  Next, details of the small hit type selection 4 table 202ce will be described with reference to FIG. The small hit type selection 4 table 202ce is a data table that is referred to in order to determine the type of the small hit when a small hit is determined by the lottery of the second special symbol. In the small hit type selection 4 table 202ce, a corresponding small hit type is defined for each range of the value of the small hit type counter C5.

  As shown in FIG. 134, “small hit A” is defined in association with the value of the small hit type counter C5 in the range of “0 to 69”. The “small hit A” is a small hit type in which a small hit game of the same open pattern as the small hit A of the first embodiment is executed. Of the 100 random numbers that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the random number value of "small hit A" is 70, so if a small hit is won by lottery of the second special symbol, "small hit A" Is 70% (70/100).

  In addition, “small hit B” is associated with the value of the small hit type counter C5 in the range of “70 to 99”. The “small hit B” is a small hit type in which the open / close plate 65f1 is set to the open state for 0.06 seconds × 6 times during the small hit game. Of the 100 random numbers that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, there are 30 random numbers that are "small hits B". Therefore, when a small hit occurs in the second special symbol lottery, "small hits B" Is 30% (30/100).

<Control Process of Main Control Device 110 in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, control processing of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The fourth embodiment is largely different from the above-described embodiments in that a lottery (variation) of a plurality of special symbols (a first special symbol and a second special symbol) can be repeatedly executed. Are different.

  In the state where the time saving state is set, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed more frequently than the lottery of the second special symbol, and the lottery of the first special symbol is performed. The difference is that the time saving state (second time saving state) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed more frequently can be set than that.

  In the fourth embodiment, the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state that is more advantageous than the first time-saving state can be set as the time-saving state that is a gaming state advantageous to the player. A plurality of game states having different advantageous stages can be provided to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  First, with reference to FIG. 137, a special symbol variation process 4 (S194), which is one of the timer interrupt processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 4 (S194). The special symbol variation process 4 (FIG. 137, S194) performs various determinations and determinations based on each counter value obtained based on the entry into the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, In the variable display mode determined by the predetermined control, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 simultaneously control the variable display to be possible or stop display in the display mode indicating the determination result. Control is executed. Hereinafter, the special symbol change process 4 (FIG. 137, S194) will be described.

  In the special symbol variation process 4 (FIG. 137, S194), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is being played (whether or not the big hit flag 203d is on) (S7001), and the big hit is being made (during the big hit). If it is determined that the flag 203d is ON (S7001: Yes), there is no need to set a special symbol lottery or stop changing display, and the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit is not in progress (the big hit flag 203d is off) (S7001: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit is being played (whether the small hit flag 203g is on). Is determined (S7002). In the process of S7002, when it is determined that the small hit is occurring (the small hit flag 203g is ON) (S7002: Yes), the process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit is not occurring (the small hitting flag 203g is off) (S7002: No), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is being changed and displayed (S7003).

  In the process of S7003, when it is determined that the first special symbol is being changed and displayed (S7003: Yes), the first special symbol change stop process is executed (S7005), and the process proceeds to S7006. Here, in the first special symbol variation stop process (S7005), when the variation time of the first special symbol during the variation display has elapsed, a process for stopping and displaying the stop symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol. When the lottery result of the first special symbol becomes a big hit and the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is stopped and displayed, the process of forcibly stopping and displaying the second special symbol in the variable display with the stop symbol corresponding to the departure is performed. Be executed. Details of the first special symbol change stop processing (S7005) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7003, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S7003: No), at least one piece of reserved data (various counter values) is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. The first special symbol change start process for executing the jackpot determination and the change pattern selection process based on the hold data is executed on condition that the data is held (S7004), and the process proceeds to S7006. Details of the first special symbol change start process (S7004) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139.

  In the process of S7006 executed after the first special symbol change start process (S7004) or the first special symbol change stop process (S7005) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is in the variable display. If the second special symbol change display is being performed (S7006: Yes), the second special symbol change stop process is executed (S7008), and this process ends. The second special symbol change stop process (S7008) is, like the first special symbol change stop process (S7005), performed when the specified change time of the second special symbol during the change display has elapsed. This is a process for setting a stop display of a stop symbol indicating the lottery result. Details of the second special symbol change stop processing (S7008) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 148 and 149.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S7006 that the second special symbol is not being displayed in a fluctuating manner (S7006: No), the second special symbol for the second entrance 640 is detected on the condition that a new starting prize is detected. A second special symbol change start process for executing a special symbol lottery to set the start of a new variable display is executed (S7007), and the process ends. Details of the second special symbol change start process (S7007) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 143 to 147.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the control of the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol and the control of the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol are executed independently. . With this configuration, the change (lottery) of the second special symbol can be executed regardless of whether the change (lottery) of the first special symbol is executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to execute the special symbol lottery a plurality of times in a short time, and it is possible to improve the game efficiency.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, a big hit or a small hit is won by lottery of a special symbol, and while a hit game (big hit game, small hit game) based on the winning is being executed, a new special symbol is won. The change (lottery) is configured not to start. With this configuration, it is not necessary to perform a complicated action of predicting a special symbol lottery result while performing a winning game, and it is possible to make a player pay attention to the winning game during the winning game. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  In addition, as will be described in detail later, in the fourth embodiment, the stop display is performed in a display mode indicating that one of the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) has won the jackpot. In such a case, the other special symbol that is being changed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode that indicates a deviation. As a result, a state in which the special symbol fluctuates during the jackpot game, or a state in which one special symbol has won the jackpot while the other special symbol has won the jackpot (during the jackpot game) may occur. Since the game can be eliminated, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  In the fourth embodiment, the change start process of the special symbol and the change stop process of the special symbol are not executed during the big hit game or the small hit game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Without, for example, it is also possible to configure so as not to execute the special symbol change start process only during the big hit game, and the special symbol change stop process, and also to make the special symbol change start process during the big hit game and the small hit game And a special symbol change stop process may be executed. With such a configuration, the variation (lottery) of the special symbol can be executed more frequently, so that the player can enjoy the game in a short period of time.

  Next, the first special symbol change start process (S7004), which is one of the special symbol change processes 4 (FIG. 137, S194), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start process (S7004).

  In the first special symbol change start process (FIG. 138, S7004), first, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is acquired (S7101), and the acquired value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b ( It is determined whether (N1) is a value larger than 0 (S7102). In the process of S7102, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is greater than 0 (S7102: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is decremented by 1. Then, a reserved ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b after the subtraction is set (S7104).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S1501) of the main processing (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201 in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223. Store. As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223c in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the number counter 203b.

  When the processing in S7104 is completed, the data in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is shifted to the immediately preceding data (S7105). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of the reserved area 1 → the execution area, the reserved area 2 → the reserved area 1, the reserved area 3 → the reserved area 2, the reserved area 4 → the reserved area 3.

  When the process of S7105 ends, next, a first special symbol big hit determination process is executed (S7106). The first special symbol big hit determination processing (FIG. 138, S7106) will be described in detail later, but is set based on the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. This is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not a jackpot is based on the game state being played.

  When the process of S7106 ends, next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (FIG. 138, S7107). Although the details will be described later, this first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S7107) is a variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the first special symbol determination result. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of.

  When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7107) ends, a game state update process is executed (S7108). This game state update processing (FIG. 138, S7108) will be described later in detail, but the state of the pachinko machine 10 is updated by updating the value of various counters (medium time counter 203k) indicating the state of the pachinko machine 10. This is the process to perform. When the process of S7108 ends, this process ends. It should be noted that a detailed description of this game state update processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7102, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is 0 (S7102: No), the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the first special symbol big hit determination process (S7106), which is one process of the first special symbol change start process (FIG. 138, S7004), will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol big hit determination process (S7106).

  In the first special symbol big hit determination process (FIG. 139, S7106), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is acquired (S7201). Next, it is determined whether or not the range of the random number value of the big hit or the small hit specified in the first random number table 202a matches the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained from the counter buffer. A determination result (lottery result) is obtained (S7202).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the lottery result obtained in S7202 is a big hit (S7203). If it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S7203: Yes), the big hit flag 203ca is turned on for the first special symbol. It is set (S7204), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a big hit (S7205). Then, based on the obtained value of the hit type counter, the big hit symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S7206), and the value according to the current gaming state (for example, in the normal state) If there is, if it is 0, and if it is a time saving state, 1) is stored (set) in the winning state storage area 203cf (S7207), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7203, when it is determined that the lottery result is out of order (S7203: No), the out-of-spec symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S7208). Then, the present process ends. In this embodiment, the lottery result of the first special symbol is configured not to win a small hit, so if it is determined in the processing of S7203 that the winning is not a big hit (S7203: No), the lottery result will be out of order. Although it is determined that there is, the process of S7208 is executed. For example, when the configuration is such that the small hit is won as the lottery result of the first special symbol, it is determined that the process of S7203 is not a big hit. If it is determined (S7203: No), it may be configured to determine whether or not a small hit has been won and to execute a process according to the determination result. In this case, a process different from the special figure 2 deviation changing process (refer to S7708 in FIG. 145) described later with reference to FIG. 145, which is different from the second special symbol only in that the first special symbol is targeted, is executed. Just do it.

  Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7107), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 138, S7004), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7107).

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 140, S7107), first, in the first special symbol big hit determination process (FIG. 139, S7106), it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit, It is determined whether or not one special symbol jackpot is set (S7301). Here, whether or not a big hit is determined is based on whether or not the big hit flag 203ca is turned on for the first special symbol. The big hit flag 203ca is set on in the process of S7204 in the first special symbol big hit determination process (see FIG. 139).

  In the process of S7301, when it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is set (S7301: Yes), the first special symbol big hit determination process (see FIG. 139) obtained in the process of S7201 in the first special symbol big hit determination process described above. Based on the value of the one hit type counter C2, the big hit type is determined (selected) from the first hit type selection 4 table 202cb (see FIG. 130) (S7302), and the process shifts to S7303.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7301 that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of place (that is, the jackpot flag 203ca for the first special symbol is off) (S7301: No), the process of S7302 is performed. The processing skips to step S7303.

  In the process of S7303, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S7303). Next, a variation pattern 4 table 202cd (see FIGS. 131 to 133) corresponding to the current gaming state is read (S7304), and the flow shifts to the processing of S7305. Here, in the fourth embodiment, the time saving state that can be set as the gaming state is a time saving A (first time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and the time saving B (second time saving) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving A State) can be set, so that the game state that can be set is three types of normal state, time reduction A, time reduction B, the value of the counter 203k during the time reduction, and the time reduction The present game state is determined based on information stored in the state storage area 203cd.

  Specifically, when the value of the time reduction counter 203k is 0, the current gaming state is determined to be the normal state, and when the value of the time reduction counter 203k is 1 or more (not 0), the current game state is determined. The state is determined to be the time saving state. When information indicating the time saving A (for example, information indicating the jackpot type in which the time saving state is set) is stored in the time saving state storage area 203cd, the current gaming state is the time saving A (first time saving state). If it is determined that there is, and the information indicating the time saving B (for example, information indicating the jackpot type in which the time saving state is set) is stored in the time saving state storage area 203cd, the current gaming state is the time saving B (second time saving B). State).

  Note that the configuration for determining the current game state is not limited to the configuration used in the fourth embodiment, and other configurations may be used. For example, a game state storage area for temporarily storing a currently set game state while constantly updating the game state is provided, and the current game state is determined using information stored in the game state storage area. You may. With this configuration, the capacity of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is increased, but the current game state can be reliably determined. Furthermore, even when the types of game states that can be set are increased (for example, four types), it is possible to easily determine the current game state.

  In the process of S7305, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern table (variation pattern table corresponding to the current game state) (7305), and thereafter, based on the selected variation pattern. Then, a special figure 1 variation pattern command is set (S7306).

  When the process of S7306 is completed, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S7307). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of the change of the first special symbol (S7308), and ends this processing.

  Next, a game state update process (S7108), which is one of the first special symbol change start processes (see FIG. 138), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the gaming state update processing (S7108). In this game state update processing (see S7108 in FIG. 141), processing for subtracting the number of special symbol fluctuations that is continuously set in the time saving state is executed.

  That is, in each of the above-described embodiments, the update of the time saving termination condition that is established based on the number of times the special symbol changes is executed at the timing when the change of the special symbol is stopped. In the fourth embodiment, the time saving end condition that is satisfied based on the number of times the special symbol changes is updated at the timing when the change of the special symbol starts. With such a configuration, even when a process (a lottery) that can independently execute the change (lottery) of a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is used (the change of the special symbol starts) Even if the order and the change stop order of the special symbol are interchanged), it is possible to appropriately set the time saving state in accordance with the predetermined number of times of the change of the special symbol.

  When the game state updating process (see FIG. 141) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 203k during time reduction is greater than 0, that is, whether or not the current game state is the time reduction state (S7401). If it is determined that the value of the counter 203k during time reduction is 0 (S7401: No), that is, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the time reduction state, the processes of S7402 and S7403 are skipped, and The process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203k is greater than 0 (S7401: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the time reduction state, the value of the time reduction counter 203k is set to 1 After subtraction (S7402), and setting a remaining time reduction command indicating the value of the time reduction counter 203k (S7403), the present process ends.

  The command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201 in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the remaining time reduction command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the medium time reduction counter 203k from the remaining time reduction command and stores the extracted value in the time reduction information update area 223g of the RAM 223. As described above, the sound ramp control device 113 updates the value of the time saving information update area 223g in accordance with the pending ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the value is synchronized with the value of the time saving counter 203k of the main control device 110. While updating the value.

  Next, the first special symbol change stop process (S7005), which is one of the special symbol change processes 4 (FIG. 137, S194), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change stop processing (S7005). In the first special symbol change stop process (S7005), when the first special symbol is stopped by a combination of the process of stopping the first special symbol when the change time elapses and the symbol showing the big hit, the first special symbol is changed. A process of forcibly stopping and displaying the second special symbol with a combination of symbols indicating the departure is executed.

  In the first special symbol change stop processing (FIG. 142, S7005), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the change display of the first special symbol (S7501). (S7501: Yes), it is determined whether the big hit flag 203ca is set to ON for the first special symbol (Tokuzu 1) (S7502). If it is determined that the big hit flag 203ca is set to ON for the first special symbol (S7502: Yes), the special figure 2 change stop flag 203cc is set to ON (S7503), and the special figure 2 change stop. A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the flag 203cc has been turned on is set (S7504). Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is displayed in a stopped state with the symbol removed (S7505).

  When the process of S7505 is completed, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S7506), and the jackpot flag 203ca and the mid-career counter 203k are reset (S7507). Next, the big hit start flag 203c is set to ON (S7508), the big hit flag 203d is set to ON (S7509), and the process shifts to S7510.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7502, if the big hit flag 203ca is set to OFF for the first special symbol (S7502: No), the process of S7503 to S7509 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S7510.

  In the processing of S7510, a special figure 1 determination command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the first special symbol is to be fixed and stopped (stop display) is set (S7510). After that, a process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol which is variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 37 is executed (S7511), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S7501 that it is not the end timing of the variable display of the first special symbol being executed (S7501: No), the display of the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is updated ( S7512), this process ends. While the process of S7512 is being executed, a special symbol is variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37.

  As described above, in the first special symbol change stop process (S7005), when the specified change time of the first special symbol during the change display has elapsed (S7501: Yes), the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is given. Then, the processing (S7503 to S7511) for stopping the variable display is executed. Further, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit (S7502: Yes), a process (S7503, S7504) of forcibly stopping the second special symbol during the variable display is executed.

  In the fourth embodiment, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, the second special symbol during the variable display is forcibly stopped and displayed with the off symbol. It is not limited to. For example, the variable display of the second special symbol may be interrupted (temporarily stopped) at the time when the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, after the jackpot of the first special symbol ends (after the jackpot game ends), the variation display of the second special symbol may be restarted. This makes it possible to provide a more natural effect as compared to a case where the player is forcedly stopped due to a deviation.

  In the fourth embodiment, the first special symbol change stop process (see FIG. 142) is performed based on the gaming state stored in the winning state storage area 203cf in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 139). The jackpot scenario is set in the process of S7506). For example, the jackpot scenario is stored in the winning state storage area 203cf in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 139) using the opening period of the jackpot game. A jackpot scenario may be set in the process of S7506 based on the gaming state.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol (one) is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, the second special symbol (the other) is forcibly stopped and displayed with the removed symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the stop symbol of the one symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is stopped and displayed with the small hit symbol, that is, the stop symbol of the combination indicating that the small hit has been won, On the other hand, it may be configured such that a symbol (for example, the second special symbol) is forcibly stopped at a detached symbol, or at the time when the small hit symbol of the symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is stopped and displayed. The variable display of the symbol (for example, the second special symbol) may be interrupted (temporarily stopped). Then, after the big hit of one symbol (for example, the first special symbol) ends (after the big hit game ends), the variable display of the other symbol (for example, the second special symbol) may be restarted.

  In the fourth embodiment and the above-described example, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed at a specific stop symbol (big hit symbol, small hit symbol) indicating a hit, the change of the other special symbol is stopped or temporarily stopped. Although the configuration for stopping has been described, other configurations may be used as long as the configuration is such that the two types of winning games are not executed at the same time. For example, one of the special symbols indicates a winning symbol (for example, a big hit). Even if the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the change of the other special symbol is stopped and continued without being temporarily stopped, and the other special symbol is executed during the execution of the hit game (for example, the big hit game) based on the one special symbol. When a stop symbol (for example, a big hit symbol) indicating a hit is stopped and displayed, the execution of a hit game (for example, a big hit game) based on the other special symbol is performed for one of the hit symbols. Ri game may also be configured to wait (postponed) until the end.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably inform the player of the lottery results of a plurality of special symbols, and to provide a plurality of hit games that occur at the same time and provide difficult-to-understand games. Can be suppressed. Further, after one winning game is completed, another winning game can be continuously started, so that a privilege (hit game) advantageous to the player can be continuously provided, and the interest of the game is improved. Can be done.

  In the case where such a configuration is used, it is determined that one of the special symbols has been won (the big hit symbol has been stopped and displayed) by using the effect (hit effect) performed during one of the special games. It is good to be configured to notify the person. Thereby, the player can grasp the lottery result of the other special symbol while concentrating on the winning game, so that an easy-to-understand game can be provided. Furthermore, if the lottery result of the other special symbol executed during one of the winning games is not a winning (is a miss), it is configured not to notify the miss using the hit effect being executed. good. As a result, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a lottery result that does not newly give a privilege to the player, the effect for the currently granted privilege is provided to the player with priority. It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to a player.

  In addition, in the fourth embodiment, a lottery is performed independently (in parallel) for a plurality of special symbols, and as a result of the lottery, one special symbol is stopped and displayed with a stop symbol indicating a hit (small hit, big hit). At that time, the control for forcibly removing the change (lottery) of the other special symbol is executed. However, as another configuration, for example, the lottery result of one special symbol wins (small hit). , Jackpot) (when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose winning result is a lottery is started), in the other special symbol lottery executed thereafter, the forced lottery excluding the winning lottery result (Determination using a special table in which deviations are defined for the entire range of the acquired first random number counter value C1) may be performed.

  With this configuration, even if the lottery of a plurality of special symbols is executed independently, it is possible to suppress a plurality of hit games from being executed at the same time. In addition, not the timing at which the stop symbol indicating the hit is stopped and displayed, but the timing at which the special symbol is drawn (start timing of the fluctuation at which the stop symbol indicating the hit is stopped and displayed) gives the other special symbol. Since it is possible to perform forcible detachment control on the other hand, it is possible to suppress a situation in which inconsistency occurs between the effect content executed during the fluctuation display of the other special symbol and the lottery result of the other special symbol. it can.

  Next, the second special symbol change start process (S7007), which is one of the special symbol change processes 4 (FIG. 137, S194), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change start process (S7007).

  In the second special symbol change start process (FIG. 143, S7007), first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 change stop flag 203cc is set to ON (S7601). If it is determined that the special figure 2 change stop flag 203cc is set to ON (S7601: Yes), the special figure 2 change stop flag 203cc is set to OFF (S7607), and the process ends. As described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is stopped and displayed at the stop symbol (big hit symbol) indicating that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit when the large hit change of the first special symbol ends. In this case, the second special symbol is a flag that is stopped and displayed with a stop symbol corresponding to the departure and is set to ON. That is, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is on, it means that the big hit is started, and therefore, the fluctuation start of the second special symbol should not be set.

  For this reason, when the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is ON in the processing of S7601, this processing is terminated without executing each processing of S7602 to S7606 for setting the fluctuation start. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the second special symbol forcibly stopped when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol from starting to change again in the same process. it can. In the fourth embodiment, as described with reference to the special symbol variation process 4 (S194) in FIG. 137, after performing the variation process on the first special symbol, the variation process on the second special symbol is performed. Since the configuration is such that the special symbol variation stop flag 203cc is used, for example, in the special symbol variation process 4 (S194) in FIG. 137, after performing the variation process related to the second special symbol, In the case where the fluctuation processing relating to the first special symbol is executed, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag (the target is changed from the second special symbol to the first special symbol) instead of the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc. May be used.

  Further, as in the fourth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be able to execute the variation (lottery) independently (in parallel), and the lottery result of one of the special symbols is hit. In this case, the special symbol variation process (special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 137)) may be defined so that the variation process for the special symbol that is advantageous to the player is executed first. Thereby, for example, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided with a holding storage function (holding storage means), and the special symbol is changed simultaneously (within the same processing) after the jackpot game, the player It is possible to preferentially handle the result of the lottery of the special symbol that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to suppress the disadvantageous game from being provided to the player.

  Specifically, for example, a first special symbol lottery in which a privilege (for example, per 16 rounds) advantageous to the player is easily provided, and a second special symbol lottery in which a benefit more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery is less likely to be provided. In a gaming machine capable of independently executing a special symbol lottery, a storage means capable of storing a plurality of (for example, four) rights for executing a lottery of each special symbol is provided, and after a big hit game is over. If the lottery of each special symbol is performed at the same time (the same processing), and the lottery result of each special symbol is the same (for example, 30 seconds) and the lottery result indicates a hit, By giving priority to the processing relating to the first special symbol, a win game (a privilege advantageous to the player) of the first special symbol is given regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol. Can be.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S7601 that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is set to be off (that is, not set to be on) (S7601: No), the processing for the second entrance 640 is performed. It is determined whether or not a winning (entering a ball) is detected (S7602). If a winning (ball entry) to the second entrance 640 has been detected (S7602: Yes), then the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the variation type counter CS1, and the small type counter C1. Each value of the hit type counter C5 is acquired and stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area (S7603), and the second special symbol big hit determination for executing the second special symbol big hit determination based on the stored counter values is performed. The processing is executed (S7604). The details of the second special symbol jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S7604 is completed, a second special symbol variation pattern selection process for selecting a variation pattern is performed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S7603. It is executed (S7605). Details of the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S7605) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of S7605 ends, the above-described gaming state update processing (see FIG. 141) is executed (S7606), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7602 that a winning for the second entrance 1640 has not been detected (S7602: No), the process ends.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so as to be able to execute (lottery) independently (in parallel) and change (lottery), and to change the special symbol. At the time when (lottery) is executed, a process of updating the gaming state (a process of subtracting the number of times saved) is executed. In other words, in the state where the time saving state is set, when executing the process of changing (lottery) the first special symbol and the second special symbol simultaneously (within the same process), the number of times of saving is reduced by two. Will be.

  Here, in the fourth embodiment, a configuration in which a plurality of special symbols are changed (lottery) independently (in parallel) and varied (lottery) is used. However, in the third symbol display device 81, one of the special symbols is changed according to a game state. Is used as a main special symbol, and an effect that makes it appear as if a game is being played using only the main special symbol is executed (see FIG. 126), thereby providing an effect that is easy for the player to understand. However, even when the variable display in which only the main special symbol is emphasized is executed by the third symbol display device 81, a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, Since the number of time savings is subtracted in accordance with the change (lottery) of the special symbol, the display mode of the number of time savings and the update state of the game state (internal time savings) are inconsistent. Alternatively, there has been a problem in that the updated content of the display mode of the number of hours reduced contradicts the effect content of the variable display in which only the main special symbol is emphasized.

  The details of such a problem will be described later, but in the fourth embodiment, the number of time savings for display (remaining time savings) is updated according to the number of times of variation (lottery) of the main special symbol. When display control is performed and a difference occurs between the number of times saved on the display and the actual number of times saved, it is checked whether the variation pattern of the main special symbol satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, the variation time is 30 seconds or more). In the case where it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, a process of correcting the number of times of saving for display so as to fill a difference between the number of times of saving on display and the actual number of times of saving is configured to be executed. .

  With this configuration, the player only plays a game while paying attention to the effect executed in response to the main special symbol executed on the third symbol display device 81, and can appropriately set the time reduction condition (remaining time reduction). The number of times can be grasped, and an easy-to-understand game can be performed.

  Next, the second special symbol big hit determination process (S7604), which is one process of the second special symbol change start process (FIG. 143, S7007), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S7604).

  In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 144, S7604), the same process as the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 139) is executed, so the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 139) The following description focuses on the differences.

  When the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S7604) is executed, each counter value stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area (second special symbol holding ball execution area) is acquired (S7701). Then, based on each of the acquired counter values and the first random number 4 table 202ca, a process of S7702 for acquiring a lottery result as to whether or not a big hit is executed. In each of these processes, the only difference is that the counter value used for the lottery (determination) is obtained from the special symbol holding ball execution area (the second special symbol holding ball execution area). The same control as the processing (see FIG. 137) is executed.

  When the processing of S7702 is completed, it is determined whether or not the obtained lottery result is a big hit (S7703). If it is determined that it is a big hit (S7703: Yes), the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to the big hit. The processing of S7704 to S7707 is performed, and this processing ends. In these processes of S7704 to S7707, the same processes as those of S7204 to S7207 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol to the big hit in the first special symbol big hit determination process (see FIG. 137) are executed. Is done.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7703, if it is determined that the acquired lottery result of the second special symbol is not a big hit (S7703: No), a stop symbol corresponding to a small hit or a departure of the second special symbol is set. The special figure 2 deviation variation processing is executed (S7708), and this processing ends. Next, details of the special figure 2 deviation variation processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S7708).

  In the special figure 2 deviation change processing (S7708), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result acquired in the processing of S7702 in FIG. 144 is a small hit of the second special symbol (S7801). (S7801: Yes), the small hit flag 203cb is set to ON (S7802), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to small hit (S7803). Then, a small hit symbol indicating the small hit type corresponding to the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5 is set as a stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S7804), and the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S7801 that the lottery result is out of order (S7801: No), the out-of-spec symbol of the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S7805). This processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 146, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7605), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 145, S7007), will be described. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S7605).

  In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 146, S7605), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the special symbol holding ball execution area (second special symbol execution area) (S7901). Next, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 144, S7604), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is determined to be a big hit, that is, whether or not the second special symbol big hit is set. (S7902). Here, whether or not a big hit is determined is based on whether or not the big hit flag 203ca is turned on for the second special symbol. The big hit flag 203ca is set on in the process of S7704 in the above-described second special symbol big hit determination process (see FIG. 144).

  If it is determined in the processing of S7902 that the jackpot of the second special symbol has been set (S7902: Yes), the fluctuation pattern 4 table 202cd (see FIGS. 131 to 133) corresponding to the current game state is displayed. It is read (S7903). Then, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S7701 in the second special symbol big hit determination process (see FIG. 144), the first hit type selection 4 table 202cb (see FIG. 131 (a)) )) To determine the jackpot type (S7904).

  Upon completion of the process in S7904, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S7905), and then a special figure 2 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern. (S7906). Then, the flow shifts to the process of S7908.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S7902 that the jackpot of the second special symbol has not been set (S7902: No), the special figure 2 out-of-variation pattern selection processing (S7907) is executed, and the processing proceeds to S7908. Transition.

  In the process of S7908, a special figure 2 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S7908). Next, the start of change of the second special symbol is set by the first symbol display device 37 (S7909), and thereafter, the present process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 147, this special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing (S7907) will be described. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the details of the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing (S7907).

  In the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (FIG. 147, S7907), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S8001). Here, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203cb is set to ON (S8001). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203cb is on (S8001: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is obtained from the second special symbol execution area (S8002). The small hit type is selected based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type selection 4 table 202ce (see FIG. 134) (S8003).

  Next, the fluctuation pattern 4 table 202cd (see FIGS. 131 to 133) corresponding to the current game state is read (S8004), and the small hit fluctuation corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is read from the read fluctuation pattern selection table. A pattern is selected (S8005). After that, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command indicating the selected small hit fluctuation pattern is set (S8006), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S8001, if it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is out of place) (S8001: No), the variation pattern 4 table 202cd (corresponding to the current gaming state) 131 to 133 are read out (S8007), and an outlier variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S8008). After that, a special figure 2 variation pattern command is set based on the selected out-of-order variation pattern (S8009), and this processing ends.

  Next, the second special symbol change stop process (S7008), which is one of the special symbol change processes 4 (FIG. 137, S194), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change stop processing (S7008).

  In the second special symbol change stop process (S7008), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the change based on the second special symbol being executed (S8101). In the process of S8101, if it is determined that the end timing of the change based on the second special symbol being executed (S8101: Yes), the big hit flag 203ca is turned on for the second special symbol (Special Figure 2). It is determined whether is set to (S8103). When it is determined that the big hit flag 203ca is set to ON for the second special symbol (S8103: Yes), a special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating a fluctuation stop of the special figure 1 is set (S8105). The process moves to the process of S8106.

  Next, the processing after S8106 is different from the above-described processing after S7505 of the first special symbol change stop processing (FIG. 140, S7005) in the following points. In the processing of S8106 and S8102 corresponding to the processing of S7505 and S7512, the first special symbol is changed to the second special symbol, and in the processing of S8112 corresponding to the processing of S7511, the special figure 1 determination command is changed to the special figure. 2 in that the command is changed to a two-confirmation command. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8101 that the timing is not the end timing of the change based on the second special symbol being executed (S8101: No), the display of the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is updated ( S8102), and terminates this processing. Also, in the process of S8103, if the big hit flag 203ca is set off for the second special symbol (S8103: No), the special figure 2 departure stop process is executed (S8104), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 149, the special figure 2 departure stop processing (S8104), which is one processing of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 148, S7008), will be described. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing this special figure 2 departure stop processing (S8104).

  In the special figure 2 departure stop processing (FIG. 149, S8104), first, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203cb is set to ON (S8201). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203cb is set to ON (S8201: Yes), a special figure 1 change stop command indicating a change stop of the special figure 1 is set (S8202). Next, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is displayed in a disengaged state (S8203).

  After finishing the process of S8203, a small hit scenario based on the selected small hit type is set (S8204). Thereafter, the small hit flag 203cb is set to off (S8205), and the small hit flag 203g is set to on (S8207).

  When the process of S8207 ends, a special figure 2 determination command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to determine and stop the second special symbol is set (S8208). After that, the second special symbol, which is variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 37, stops changing with the small hit symbol (S8209), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S8201, when it is determined that the small hit flag 203cb is off (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order) (S8201: No), the second special symbol is fixed and stopped. A special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to do so is set (S8210). After that, the second special symbol, which is variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 37, is deviated and stopped at the symbol (S8211), and the present process ends.

  Next, the content of the jackpot control process 4 (S1594) in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot control process 4 (S1594). The jackpot control process 4 (S1594) is a process executed at the end timing of the ending effect, that is, at the end timing of the jackpot game, with respect to the jackpot control process of the above-described first embodiment (see S1504 in FIG. 52) ( This is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the process of setting the game state after the end of the big hit game are different. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that the first embodiment described above and the fourth embodiment have different parts in the configuration of the game board 13 and the main control contents, and thus the detailed operation contents may be different during a big hit. In such a case, the processing contents are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, when the jackpot control process 4 (S1594) is executed, the processes of S1601 to S1612, which are the same as the jackpot control process of the first embodiment (see S1504 of FIG. 52), are executed. That is, during the period from the start of the jackpot to the end of the jackpot, the same processing as the jackpot control processing (see S1504 in FIG. 52) is executed. Then, in the process of S1612, when it is determined that the present time is the end timing of the ending effect (S1612: Yes), it is determined whether the current big hit type is the big hit C (S1691).

  In the process of S1691, the current jackpot type is determined based on the information stored in the V-pass jackpot type storage area 203h and the information stored in the memory area for temporarily storing the currently executed jackpot type. Is determined.

  In the process of S1691, if it is determined that the current jackpot type is not the jackpot C (any of jackpots A, B, and D) (S1691: No), that is, after the current jackpot ends (after the jackpot game ends) ), It is determined whether the current jackpot type is the jackpot D (S1692). As described above, the fourth embodiment is configured such that the time-saving state in which the degree of advantage to the player differs depending on whether the jackpot type is the jackpot A or B or the jackpot D, The processing of S1692 is processing for determining whether to set a time-saving state (first time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player or to set a time-saving state (second time-saving state) that is more disadvantageous than the first time-saving state. .

  In the process of S1692, when it is determined that the current jackpot type is not the jackpot D (S1692: No), information indicating the time saving A state is stored in the time saving state storage area 223cb (S1693), and the process proceeds to S1694. . On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1692 that the current jackpot type is the jackpot D (S1692: Yes), information indicating the time saving B state is stored in the time saving state storage area 223cb (S1695), and the process proceeds to S1694. Transition.

  Here, when the time saving A state is set, that is, when the current jackpot types are the big hits A and B, when a variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) during the time saving state is selected. In addition, with reference to the variation pattern table 202cd2 for the time saving A (see FIG. 133 (a)), the time saving game in which the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol is more easily executed than the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol. When the time saving B state is set, that is, when the current big hit type is the big hit D, when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) during the time saving state The variation pattern table 202cd3 for time saving B (see FIG. 134 (b)) is referred to, and the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol is more easily executed than the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol. It is.

  That is, in the fourth embodiment, a variation pattern table to be referred to when selecting a variation pattern in the time reduction state is provided according to the jackpot type in which the time reduction state is set, and the first special symbol executed during the time reduction state The variation pattern (fluctuation time) of the second special symbol and the variation pattern (fluctuation time) of the second special symbol are made different depending on the jackpot type for which the time reduction condition is set, so that the second special symbol becomes the main special symbol (time reduction A). ) And a time saving state (time saving B) in which the first special symbol is the main special symbol can be set. Then, the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be more easily provided with an advantageous privilege to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol.

  With such a configuration, in the fourth embodiment, as the time-saving state set as the gaming state, the time-saving state that is disadvantageous to the player (time-saving B) and the time-saving state that is advantageous to the player (time-saving A) ) Can be set. Therefore, a plurality of game states having different degrees of advantage for the player can be set, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, as described above, a game state having a different degree of advantage can be set only by changing the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of each special symbol. Therefore, it is necessary to use a special configuration for making the degree of advantage different. Therefore, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 150, the description will be continued. When the process of S1693 or S1695 is completed, next, the value of the counter 203k during time saving is set to 100 (S1694), and a status command for notifying the set gaming status to the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S1696). ). Thereafter, the same processes as those of the above-described jackpot control process (see S1504 in FIG. 52) of S1617 and S1618 are executed, and this process ends.

  In the fourth embodiment, a plurality of time reduction states (time reduction A and time reduction B) can be set, and 100 is set to the value of the counter 203k during the time reduction regardless of which time reduction state is set. It is configured to In other words, as the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state in the fourth embodiment, only the change frequency end condition that is satisfied when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 100 is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as in the above-described embodiments, a configuration may be employed in which a time-saving state in which a plurality of time-saving termination conditions are set is set.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, the same time saving end condition (100 is set to the value of the time saving medium counter 203k) is set irrespective of the type of the time saving state set (time saving A, time saving B). However, different time-saving termination conditions may be set according to the type of the time-saving state that has been set, and when a time-saving state in which a time-saving game advantageous to the player is performed is set, disadvantageous for the advantage You may be comprised so that the time-saving ending condition which is hard to be satisfied is set rather than the case where the time-saving state in which the time-saving game is performed is set.

  Next, the content of the small hit control process 4 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the content of the small hit control process 4 (S1595). The small hit control process 4 (see S1595 in FIG. 151) is a part of the small hit control process (see S1505 in FIG. 53) of the first embodiment that is executed at the timing of opening the V winning opening. Are deleted, and the same processing is executed otherwise. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the small hit control process 4 (S1595 of FIG. 151) is executed, first, the same processes of S1701 to S1706 as the small hit control process described above (see S1505 of FIG. 53) are executed, and the process of S1706 ends. , S1707 and S1708 are skipped, and the processes of S1709 and S1710 are executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S1705, when it is determined that the present time is not the V winning opening opening timing (S1705: No), the processing of S1711 to S1721 that is the same as the processing of the above-described small hit control processing (S1505 in FIG. 53) is performed. Execute and end this process.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the lottery (fluctuation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol can be executed independently (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous fluctuation configuration). ) And one type of winning a jackpot by a special symbol lottery, and two types of winning a small jackpot by a special symbol lottery and win a jackpot if the ball passes a specific area during the small hit game (A so-called one-type and two-type mixed configuration).

  Then, in the gaming state in which the time reduction state is set, a time reduction state (time reduction B) in which the change of the first special symbol is mainly executed, and a time reduction state (time reduction A) in which the change of the second special symbol is mainly executed. ) Can be set by changing the variation pattern (variation time) of each special symbol set in the simultaneous variation.

  Further, the second special symbol is configured to be easier to win in the small hit than the first special symbol, and the time saving state in which the time saving A is set is more effective than the time saving state in which the time saving B is set. It is configured to be in a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Further, the time saving state in which the time saving B is set is configured such that the number of fluctuations (lottery) of the first special symbol is larger than that in the normal state.

  That is, the above-described simultaneous variation configuration is applied to the pachinko machine 10 having the above-described one-type and two-type mixed configuration, and the variation pattern (variation time) of each special symbol during the time saving state is made different according to the type of big hit. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a time-saving game in which a large number of changes (lottery) of the second special symbol are executed and a time-saving game in which a large number of changes (lottery) of the first special symbol are executed.

  In addition, by configuring the second special symbol to be more likely to win a small hit than the first special symbol (including a configuration in which the first special symbol does not perform a small hit lottery), a time-saving game during the time-saving state , A time-saving state that is advantageous to the player by aiming for both one type and two types (a time-saving game in which a lot of changes (lottery) of the second special symbol are executed) and a disadvantageous time-saving aiming only for one type A state (a time-saving game in which a number of changes (lottery) of the first special symbol are executed) can be set. Further, even when the disadvantageous time reduction state is set, the change (lottery) of the first special symbol can be more easily performed than in the normal state.

  Therefore, as compared to a gaming machine having a conventional one-type and two-type mixing configuration in which only a gaming state (time saving state) in which it is easier to acquire two types than a normal state can be set as a gaming state advantageous to the player. By setting a plurality of game states at different stages, it is possible to provide various games to the player, and provide a game with a lot of interest.

  As described above, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously changed. Can be displayed. Therefore, a lottery game of more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined time, and the probability that a big hit is given to the player within the predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

  In the present embodiment, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to stop display of a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the other special symbol may be variably displayed while being temporarily stopped or the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted. In such a case, since the temporarily stopped special symbol is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode in which the player can know that the temporary stop is being performed, the player loses the lottery game in the middle of the variable display. Can be grasped that it is not, you can play a jackpot game with confidence.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 152 and 153, a control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, a lottery (fluctuation) of a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) can be repeatedly performed (so-called simultaneous variation configuration) with respect to each of the above-described embodiments. ).

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, as the time reduction state, a time reduction state (hour reduction B) in which mainly the change (lottery) of the first special symbol is mainly executed, and a time reduction mainly in which the fluctuation (lottery) of the second special symbol is executed. The state (time saving A) can be set, and the number of time savings (the number of time savings on the display) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is changed according to the set time saving state. It is composed. With such a configuration, it is possible to display the number of time savings corresponding to the number of times of the fluctuation effect (the number of fluctuations of the main special symbol) executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  Specifically, the fourth embodiment is configured to win a small hit in a lottery of a second special symbol (see FIG. 129 (b)), and to win a small hit in a lottery of a second special symbol. In this case (when the stop is displayed with the small hit symbol indicating the small hit), the fluctuation of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with the off symbol indicating the departure.

  Since the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to win the small hit at a rate of 994/1000 (see FIG. 129 (b)), in the gaming state in which the time saving A is set, the number of times of saving time is reduced. Even if 100 times are set, the variation (lottery) of the main special symbol (second special symbol) can be executed only about 50 times.

  Therefore, when the time saving A is set, 50 times are displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 as the number of time savings for display, and the variation of the main special symbol (the second special symbol) is changed (lottery). ) Is updated (subtracted) every time () is executed. As a result, the number of time savings is actually set to 100 times, and the time savings is reduced without corresponding to the fluctuation of the first special symbol that is forcibly stopped. It can be assumed that 50 times have been set, and an easy-to-understand game can be provided.

  In addition, when the above-mentioned time savings number display is performed, for example, when a lottery is won by lottery of the second special symbol, or when the holding of the first special symbol is lost, a new change of the first special symbol is started. No, when the first special symbol does not change at the time of winning the small hit of the second special symbol (when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed), that is, at the timing of stopping the change of the second special symbol. If a situation in which the change of the first special symbol cannot be stopped occurs, the number of times of the change of the second special symbol (main special symbol) that can be executed during the time saving state becomes larger than the number of times of the display time reduction. When the change of the first special symbol is stopped while the change of the second special symbol or the change of the second special symbol is not performed and the new change of the first special symbol is started, the second change is performed. Regarding the fluctuation of special symbols Since the variation of the first special symbol is performed the number of times of the change in the second special symbol executable (mainly special symbol) there is a problem that becomes smaller than the time-reduction number for display during time reduction state.

  On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, when a predetermined error occurs between the number of times for display and the actual number of times for reduction, a configuration for performing a time reduction correction for correcting the error is performed. (See FIG. 127). As a result, the time-saving state ends with an error occurring between the number of times the main special symbol is changed during the time-saving state set this time (the remaining number of times executed during the time-saving state) and the number of time savings for display. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that gives a sense of incongruity to the player.

  In addition, in order to update the number of display time savings according to the change of the main special symbol executed during the time saving state, the player pays attention to the variable display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the number of time savings. It is possible to play the game during the reduced working hours with just peace of mind.

  In addition, as the above-described correction effect of the number of time savings, the subtraction correction effect that is executed when the number of time savings for display is larger than the actual number of time savings is such that the variation pattern of the selected main special symbol is changed for a predetermined time (for example, , 30 seconds) or more, and if the fluctuation pattern is longer than a predetermined time, a pseudo fluctuation effect (a pseudo fluctuation stop and a pseudo fluctuation stop) in which one special symbol fluctuation appears as a plurality of special symbol fluctuations. At the time when the fluctuation is stopped (temporarily stopped) or when the fluctuation is restarted from the state of the temporary stop, the display time saving frequency is updated (subtracted). Is done. Thereby, the number of display time savings can be subtracted without discomfort during one special symbol change.

  On the other hand, the addition correction effect that is executed when the number of display time reductions is smaller than the actual number of time reductions, is that the variation pattern of the selected main special symbol is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). If the variation pattern is longer than a predetermined time, an addition display is performed on the display screen to indicate that the display time savings are added, and the display time savings is added. good. This makes it possible for the player to think that the number of time savings has been added on the way.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the same number of time savings is set, the displayed number of time savings is set differently according to the set time saving state, so that the player It is possible to cause the player to play a game during the reduced working hours without giving a sense of incongruity. In addition, since the number of time savings to be displayed in advance is made different according to the set time savings state, it is possible to reduce the frequency of executing the effect of correcting the number of time savings for display during the time savings state. Easy games can be provided.

  It should be noted that the effect form of the correction effect for correcting the number of display time reductions during the time reduction state is not limited to the above-described one. By displaying an item on the display screen, a plurality of display time reduction times may be subtracted in one main special symbol change, or a number less than 50 may be displayed in advance as a display time reduction number. Alternatively, the execution frequency of the subtraction correction effect may be extremely reduced.

  In addition, the effect mode of the addition correction effect is not limited to the above-described one. For example, after the number of display time savings becomes “1”, “?” Is displayed, and how long the time saving state continues. May be configured so as not to be recognized by the player, or when it is determined in advance that winning has been consecutively performed in the lottery of the main special symbol fluctuation, a plurality of main special symbol fluctuations are set to one main special symbol fluctuation. It is configured to perform a pseudo variation to make it look like a special symbol variation, and is configured so that, despite the fact that the main special symbol variation has been executed twice, the display time savings count is reduced only once. May be.

  Further, even when an error does not occur between the number of times saved for display and the actual number of times saved, the subtraction correction effect and the addition correction effect may be intentionally executed. Thus, various effects can be executed during the time saving state, and a game that does not get tired for the player can be provided.

  With respect to the contents of the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment, differences from the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 of the above-described first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 and 153. do. First, the contents of effect setting processing 4 (S2891) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the contents of effect setting processing 4 (S2891).

  In the effect setting process 4 (S2891), part of the effect setting process of the first embodiment (see S2804 of FIG. 63) is effect setting process 2 of the second embodiment (FIG. 104). ), The point that different display commands are set according to the type of the time saving state to be set (time saving A, the time saving B), and the display according to the actual number of time savings (the number of remaining time savings). The difference is that processing for correcting the number of working hours is added.

  When the effect setting process 4 (see S2891 in FIG. 152) is executed, first, the same processes in S2901 and S2902 as the above-described effect setting process (see S2804 in FIG. 63) are executed, and then the above-described effect setting process 2 (see S2851 in FIG. 104). In the processing of S3301, if it is determined that the time reduction start flag 223ad is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S3301: No), that is, in the state where the time reduction state is set, the first special If the symbol change has been completed, the same processing as S3306 to S3308 in the effect setting processing 2 (see S2851 in FIG. 104) is executed, and then the display time reduction correction processing is executed (S3376). To end.

  In the display time saving number correction process (S3376), the display time saving number displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the time saving state and the actual time saving number are determined, and a predetermined error occurs in the determination result. In such a case, a process for correcting the value of the number of times saved for display is executed. The details of the display time saving correction process (S3376) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3301 that the time reduction start flag 223ad is set to ON (S3301: Yes), it is determined whether the type of the currently set time reduction state is the time reduction A (S3371). If it is determined that the time saving is not the time saving A (S3371: No), a display time saving B start command is set (S3372), and the flow shifts to the processing of S3374. The display time saving B start command set here is output to the display control device 114 by the command output process in the same manner as the other display commands described above, and the display screen shown in FIG. 126 (b) is displayed. Will be referred to.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3371 that the time saving is A (S3371: Yes), a display time saving A start command is set (S3373), and the flow shifts to S3374. When the display time saving A start command is set, the display screen shown in FIG. 126A is displayed.

  In the processing of S3374, the corresponding time saving state (time saving type) is stored in the time saving state storage area 223cb (S3374), the time saving start flag 223ad is set to off (S3375), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 153, the contents of the display time reduction correction process (S3376) will be described. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the contents of the display time saving correction process (S3376). In this display time reduction correction process (S3376), it is determined whether or not to execute the above-described lower correction effect process with reference to FIG. 127.

  When the display time-saving number correction process (S3376) is executed, first, the value of the display time-saving number counter Ca, that is, the remaining time-saving number displayed in the remaining time-saving number display area Dm10 of the display screen is read (S3701). . When the time saving A is set, that is, when the time saving state in which the change (lottery) of the second special symbol is mainly performed is set, the display time saving counter Ca is set to the second special symbol. The first special symbol is updated each time the change is executed, and when the time saving B is set, that is, when the time saving state in which the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol is mainly performed is set. Is updated each time the fluctuation of the data is executed.

  Next, the actual number of remaining hours saved in the time saving information update area 223g is read (S3702), and the difference between the value read in the process of S3701 and the value read in the process of S3702 is calculated (S3703). It is determined whether there is a difference between the values compared in the process of S3703 (S3704), and if it is determined that there is a difference (S3704: Yes), the variation time set in the current variation pattern is read (S3705). It is determined whether the read fluctuation time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (30 seconds) (S3706).

  If it is determined in the processing of S3706 that the time is 30 seconds or longer (S3706: Yes), then, the number of pseudo stops corresponding to the difference value calculated in the processing of S3703 (special symbol (third symbol in the pseudo stop effect)) Is set (S3707), and a correction fluctuation pattern corresponding to the set pseudo fluctuation number (pseudo stop number) is determined (S3708). Then, the value of the display time saving counter Ca is corrected to the value of the time saving information update area, and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3704 that there is no difference (S3704: No), or if it is determined in the processing of S3706 that the fluctuation time is not longer than 30 seconds (S3706: No), the present processing is performed as it is. finish.

<Regarding First Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed by executing the left-handed game, and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by executing the right-handed game. As described above, a configuration is used in which the first entrance 64 is provided in the left region and the second entrance 640 is provided in the right region. Then, when the small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, a plurality of small hit types (small hits A to C) can be set, and the number of times the small hit is won in the state where the time saving state is set is set. Based on this, in detail, when the set number of the small hit types set in the difference won in the small hit reaches a predetermined number, the time saving end condition for terminating the time saving state is satisfied. .

  On the other hand, the present modification is significantly different in that the right special game is executed so that the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed. In this way, in the right-handed game executed during the time reduction state, by configuring so that the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed, the time reduction end for ending the time reduction state As conditions, it is possible to set a special figure 1 end condition based on a first special symbol lottery and a special figure 2 end condition based on a second special symbol lottery.

  Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the timing at which the time saving state ends, so that the game content is easily predicted, so that the game becomes a monotonous game, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early. it can.

  Here, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the same components as those of the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 154, the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification is different from the above-described pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment in the configuration of the right region. First, the distribution member 700 is provided on the upstream side of the right region, and the ball fired by the right-handed game is alternately distributed to the left channel 701 formed on the left side of the distribution member and the right channel 702.

  On the upstream side of the left flow path, there is provided a movable lid 1500 forming the flow lower surface, and when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10, a certain opening / closing operation is performed by a movable control unit (not shown). And is located in an open state in which a ball can enter the right first ball entry port 64b disposed below the movable lid 1500, and a closed state in which ball entry is difficult (impossible). The opening / closing operation is performed.

  Specifically, a movable lid opening / closing process is provided as a process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (refer to FIG. 51) of main controller 110, and a movable lid opening / closing process provides an opening period of 0.1 second. , A closing period of 2 to 3 seconds is repeated according to a predetermined scenario. The right first ball entrance 64b controlled to be opened and closed in this manner is configured such that a ball is less likely to enter than the first ball entrance 64.

  Then, the sphere that flows down the left channel 701 and flows over the movable lid 1500 flows down the bent portion of the left channel 701, passes through the through gate 67 provided at the lower end of the left channel 701, and flows rightward. Outflow into the lower area of the area. Further, the electric accessory 640a is configured to be able to enter above the through gate 67 of the left channel 701, and when the electric accessory 640a performs an opening operation, a ball flowing down the left channel 701 is moved to the second position. It is configured to be guided to the 2 entrance 640.

  On the other hand, the sphere distributed to the right flow path 702 by the distribution device 700 flows into the inlet 704a of the warp path 704b provided on the inner side of the left flow path 701 (far side in the viewpoint of FIG. 154). It flows out to the lower area of the right area. Here, the ball outflow position of the left channel 701 and the ball outflow position of the right channel 702 will be described with reference to FIG.

  Here, the operation of the constantly movable member 1500 will be described in detail. The constantly movable valve 1500 is configured to be variable between an open position (open state) and a closed position (closed state) at a predetermined timing based on the power being supplied to the pachinko machine 10. Yes. Specifically, in a movable member driving process (not shown) executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 53) of the main controller 110, operation control is performed based on the movable scenario stored in the ROM 203. Has been. In this movable scenario, an operation of constantly opening the movable member 1500 for 0.1 second and thereafter closing it for 0.8 second is repeatedly executed.

  That is, in the game board 13 of the first modification, the ball fired in the right-handed game flows into the first flow path 701 at intervals of 1.2 seconds, and the rolling member in which the movable member 1500 is always provided is provided. It flows down in the downstream direction while rolling on the surface. When the timing at which the ball flows into the first flow path 701 and rolls on the constantly movable member 1500 (or falls on the constantly movable member) coincides with the timing at which the constantly movable valve 1500 is opened. The ball passes through the constantly movable member 1500 in the open state and enters the first left ball entrance 64b.

  The timing of rolling on the constantly movable member 1500 (or falling on the constantly movable member) is an interval of 1.2 seconds, and the timing of constantly opening the movable valve 1500 is 0 seconds in 0.9 seconds. .1 second, the timing at which both match is about once every 15.6 seconds. That is, when the right-hitting game is continuously executed, about four balls per minute enter the first left ball entrance 64b.

  In other words, in a gaming state in which a right-handed game is continuously executed, such as during a jackpot game or a time-saving game, a ball periodically enters the left first entrance 64b. When the process ends and shifts to the time saving state, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a state where the special figure 1 is not suspended. In addition, since the period during which the movable valve 1500 is always opened at one time is set to a period (0.1 seconds) in which it is difficult for the player to aim, the first left entry in the game state is normal. A right-handed game can be more disadvantageous to the player than a left-handed game aiming at the mouth 64a.

  More specifically, when a left-handed game is performed when the gaming state is the normal state, about 15 shots enter the left first entrance 64a out of the 250 shots launched. It is designed and when a ball enters, 5 prize balls are paid out. In addition, it is designed so that approximately 5 shots enter the general entrance 63, and when the ball enters, 5 prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the left-handed game, it is possible to allow about 20 balls to enter the left first entrance 64a in consideration of launching the prize ball to be paid out again when 250 balls are fired. It becomes.

  On the other hand, when the game state is a normal state and a right-handed game is performed, about 9 shots are designed to enter the right first entrance 64b out of the 250 balls that have been fired. If a ball is entered, two prize balls will be paid out. Further, the general entrance 63 is not provided in the right region. Therefore, in the right-handed game, about 250 balls are allowed to enter the right first entrance 64b even if it is considered that the prize ball to be paid out is fired again when 250 balls are fired. I can only do that. Therefore, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is possible to suppress the player from playing a right-handed game.

  In the present embodiment, the general winning opening 63 is not provided in the game area (the right area) through which the ball fired by the right-handed game passes, but in the normal game state, the right-handed game is performed more than the left-handed game. The general winning opening 63 may be provided based on a design concept that does not make the player more advantageous. Thereby, in the right-handed game during the short-time state or the big hit state, it is possible to increase the number of balls paid out as a prize ball.

  Next, among the configurations arranged in the right region of the game board 13 in the first modification, the through gate 67 and the second entrance 640 are different from the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above. The explanation will focus on the points.

  In the first modification, the through gate 67 is disposed downstream of the first flow path 701 having the bent portion 701a, and the second inlet is provided downstream of the second flow path 702 (the lower end of the fifth flow path 704b). A ball port 640 is provided. With this configuration, the ball flowing into the second flow path 702 at intervals of 1.2 seconds can flow down toward the second entrance 640 without decreasing the flow down speed. Therefore, since the flow interval of the spheres flowing down the second flow path 702 can be made constant, the spheres are connected in the second flow path 702 and a plurality of spheres enter the second entrance 640 at the same time. Can be suppressed. In addition, when it is not noticed that the electric accessory 640a has been opened and the third symbol display device 81 reports that the electric accessory 640a is open (see FIG. 23B), it is promptly performed. The ball can enter the second entrance 640.

  Also, different flow paths (first flow paths 701, 701) that are distributed by the sorting member 700 between the through gate 67, which is a trigger for executing the normal symbol lottery, and the electric accessory 640a whose operation is controlled by winning the normal symbol. When the sorting member 700 is broken so that the ball flows down to only one of the flow paths (when the sorting function is disabled) because it is disposed in the second flow path 702), the second entrance port It is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter 640. That is, when the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a are disposed in one flow path distributed by the distribution member 700, the distribution member 700 is destroyed, and a state in which a sphere flows down only in one flow path is created. This makes it possible to create a state in which a ball can easily enter the second entrance 640, but by using the configuration of this modification, the ball is illegally entered into the second entrance 640. It is possible to suppress the creation of a state that is easy to cause.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery when performing a right-handed game in a state where the time saving state is set. Further, even if the player shoots a ball at the second entrance 640 in order to execute a lottery of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player, the flow path of the ball that can enter the second entrance 640 Because the left channel 701 is provided with the right first ball entry port 64b for executing the first special symbol lottery which is disadvantageous to the player, only the second special symbol lottery is executed. Can be suppressed.

  In this modification, a ball entry opening (left first entry opening 64b) serving as a trigger for the first special symbol lottery and a ball entry opening serving as a trigger for the second special symbol lottery are provided in the right area of the game board 13. A mouth (second ball entrance 640) is provided so that a ball fired by a right-handed game can enter any one of the entrances, but other configurations include, for example, a game. In the right area of the board 13, a distribution device may be provided that alternately distributes the ball to a first guideway that guides the ball to the left first entrance port 64 b and a second guideway that guides the ball to the second entrance port 640.

  With this configuration, by executing the right-handed game, the lottery condition of the first special symbol and the lottery condition of the second special symbol can be alternately established. (That is, the lottery of the second special symbol is only performed in a biased manner during the time-saving state), and a gaming state that is excessively disadvantageous for the player is provided ( That is, during the time-saving state, only the first special symbol lottery is biased and executed).

<About the first modification of the second embodiment>
Next, a first modified example of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156. In the above-described second embodiment, a time-saving ending condition (special-figure 1 ending condition) that can be satisfied based on the lottery of the first special symbol and a time-saving ending condition (special figure 1) that can be satisfied based on the lottery of the second special symbol 2 end condition), and the degree of expectation to obtain two kinds per unit based on the lottery of the first special symbol, and the degree of expectation to obtain two kinds per unit based on the lottery of the second special symbol, Were configured to be different.

  Specifically, in the lottery of the first special symbol, the time saving state is more easily completed than in the lottery of the second special symbol (the time saving end condition is more easily satisfied), and two types of wins are easily obtained. Was. Then, as shown in FIG. 82, when the time reduction state is set, a left-handed game (a game in which a lottery of the first special symbol is performed) and a right-handed game (a game in which a lottery of the second special symbol is performed). An effect screen for selecting one of them is displayed so that the player can play a desired game.

  On the other hand, in the first modified example, an effect for performing one game (right-handed game) is performed in a state where the time-saving state is set, and immediately before the time-saving end condition is satisfied in the one game. (The condition before the end of the working hours is satisfied), an effect for executing the other game (left-handed game) is executed. With such a configuration, by playing a game in accordance with the effect to be executed (by changing the game method), it is possible to maximize the game during the time reduction state.

  Next, a display screen in this modification in a state where the time saving state is set will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156. FIG. 155 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an ending screen of a big hit (big hits A, B, D in the above-described second embodiment) in which the time saving state is set after the big hit game is over. ) Is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when the condition before the end of the time-saving game regarding the right-handed game is satisfied during the period in which the time-saving state is set. FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen after a condition before the end of working hours related to a right-handed game has been satisfied during a period in which the game is performed. In each of the display screens, the same reference numerals are given to elements that display the same effect as in the second embodiment described above, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 155 (a), on the ending screen of the jackpot game, in addition to displaying “right-handed” in the guide display area Dm2, a display mode in which “right-handed” is also displayed in the game direction instruction display mode Dm20. Is displayed. Here, in the present modified example, unlike the above-described second embodiment, an effect display for prompting the player to play a game is displayed in the guidance display area Dm2, and the game state is displayed in the game direction instruction display mode Dm20. The display mode corresponding to the instruction command for notifying the corresponding game direction is configured to be displayed.

  In other words, during the big hit game and during the time reduction state, the game direction instruction display mode Dm20 is configured to always display the display mode indicating “right-handed”. In addition, on the ending screen of the jackpot game, a comment of “Please make a pounding rush and right-click after the jackpot” is displayed in order to perform a right-handed game after the end of the jackpot game.

  Then, the right-handed game is executed during the time saving state, and immediately before the time saving end condition that can be established based on the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is satisfied (the special condition before the special figure 2 time saving end). 155), a comment of “end of pounding rush, retreat zone entry” indicating that the right-handed game in the time-saving state has been completed is displayed, and “left” in the guidance display area Dm2, as shown in FIG. 155 (b). The character "Uchi" is displayed.

  Thereby, the player ends the right-handed game and performs the left-handed game. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the time saving state has ended and the normal state has been set. Note that, in practice, since the time reduction state has not ended, “right-handed” is continuously displayed in the game direction instruction display mode Dm20. Then, in the first display area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds, reserved symbol displays Dsb to Dse of the first special symbol that can be obtained by the left-handed game are displayed.

  Then, when the player starts the left-handed game, the effect in the pullback zone is executed as shown in FIG. 156 (a). The effect in the pullback zone is the same as that in the above-described second embodiment in the case where the left-handed game is performed during the time saving state, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 156 (b), in the state where the time saving state is set, the satisfaction (progress) of the plurality of time saving termination conditions is determined, and the right-handed driving is performed. It is configured to execute an effect of causing a game to be performed or a left-handed game to be performed. Thus, there is an effect that the player can play various games during the time saving state.

  Further, in the present modified example, the game direction is displayed in the guidance display area Dm2 so that the right-handed game is performed in the first half of the time saving state and the left-handed game is performed in the second half. As a result, a right-handed game can be continuously executed from the big hit game, and a left-handed game can be continuously executed when the time saving state ends and the normal state is set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the operation of changing the game direction from becoming complicated.

  Further, when the right-handed game is in a state immediately before the end of the time-saving state, that is, the time-saving end condition that is established based on information updated by the fluctuation (lottery) of the second special symbol is immediately before the establishment. When it is determined that there is a game, an effect for guiding a left-handed game is performed, and therefore, it is possible to guide the player to a game in which the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state according to the current situation is difficult to be satisfied. . Therefore, an advantageous game method can be guided to the player.

  Further, in the second embodiment to which the present modification is applied, as shown in FIG. 2, both the case where the normal state is set as the game state and the case where the time reduction state is set, the first game is performed by the left-handed game. The configuration is such that the proportion of balls entering the entrance 64 is the same. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether the time reduction state is set or the normal state is set in the "pull-back zone" in which the left-handed game is performed in the latter half of the time reduction state.

  Note that, in the second embodiment to which the present modification is applied, as described above, the time saving state is configured to be easier to obtain two hits based on the lottery of the first special symbol than in the normal state. Therefore, during the “pull-back zone” in which the time saving state is set, the ease of the lottery (change) of the first special symbol is the same as that in the case where the normal state is set, Since it is easy to obtain two types based on the game state, the gaming state is more advantageous than the normal state.

  Therefore, it is possible to produce a gaming state in which a big hit is more likely to be actually set than in the normal state (easily obtaining two kinds of winnings) as a “pull-back zone”, so that the production effect can be enhanced. Furthermore, since the timing at which the pre-saving time pre-condition is satisfied based on the right-handed game is different depending on the lottery result of the right-handed game (lottery result of the second special symbol), the period during which the “pull-back zone” is executed is indefinite. Become something. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game while expecting the “pull-back zone” to continue for a long time.

  In this modification, the display mode of the game direction instruction display mode Dm20 is set in accordance with the game state, and the guidance display is performed in accordance with the game state and the progress of the time reduction end condition (whether or not the time reduction is completed before the end of the time reduction). The display mode of the area Dm2 is configured to be set, and the display mode of the guide display area Dm2 is displayed larger than the display mode of the game direction instruction display mode Dm20, so that the player is actively guided on the game method. However, without being limited to this, the display mode of the game direction instruction display mode Dm20 is configured to be variable according to the game state and the progress of the time reduction end condition (whether or not the time reduction is completed). May be. In this case, if the pre-hour reduction end condition is satisfied by a right-handed game (a game for executing the lottery (change) of the second special symbol) during the time reduction state, the pre-hour reduction end condition is satisfied. It is better to change the display mode of the game direction instruction display mode Dm20 so that it is less noticeable than when it is not.

  In this manner, in the state where the time reduction state is set, the display mode of the game direction instruction display mode Dm20 is changed from the first notification mode to the second notification mode in accordance with the progress of the time reduction end condition (whether or not the time reduction end is satisfied). By changing to the notification mode, it becomes possible for the player to visually determine the degree of advantage when the game is executed in accordance with the game direction (for example, right-handed) notified by the game direction instruction display mode Dm20. .

<About Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 168. This fifth embodiment is the same as the above-described second embodiment in that the player is allowed to select a game method when a time-saving state in which a game state advantageous to the player is set is set. In the second embodiment described above, when the time-saving state is set, a game (first game) in which a lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is performed and a lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are performed. (The second game) to be selected by the player (see FIG. 82). When the first game is selected, the lottery of the special figure 1 is performed by aiming at the first entrance 64 by the left-handed game, and when the second game is selected, the second ball is entered by the right-handed game. The lottery of the special figure 2 was performed by aiming at the mouth 640 (see FIG. 2).

  Then, as a time-saving ending condition for terminating the time-saving state, a condition that can be satisfied by the lottery of the special figure 1 and a condition that can be satisfied by the lottery of the special figure 2 are different, and the time-saving ending condition is easily satisfied (the time-saving state ends). It is configured such that the player can select a game (easy to play) and a game in which the time saving end condition is hard to be satisfied (from the game).

  Furthermore, in the second embodiment described above, the game (first game) in which the time-saving end condition is easy to be satisfied is more likely to be satisfied in one special symbol lottery than the game (second game) in which the time-saving end condition is hard to be satisfied. The probability of winning a jackpot, that is, the probability of winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery, and the winning of a small jackpot in a special symbol lottery, and obtaining a big jackpot (two types) during the small jackpot (during the small jackpot game) It is configured so that the probability of adding the probability of performing the calculation is high.

  In the second embodiment configured as described above, various games can be executed by causing the player to select a game method when the time saving state is set, so that the player can get tired of the game early. Can be suppressed. Further, according to the game method selected by the player, the ease of ending the time-saving state (easiness of establishing the time-saving end condition) and the degree of expectation of the jackpot for one special drawing lottery may be different. Therefore, the player himself / herself can select a game suitable for him / herself, and can provide a game suitable for various players.

  However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described second embodiment, one of the game methods (second game) selected by the player during the time saving state is more likely to enter the second ball than the normal state. Although it is a game aiming at the mouth 640, the other game (first game) is a game aiming at the first entrance opening 64 in which the ease of entering the ball is the same as that in the normal state. There is a problem that it is difficult to provide an advantage due to the setting of the time saving state.

  Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 168. This fifth embodiment is the same as the above-described second embodiment in that the player is allowed to select a game method when a time-saving state in which a game state advantageous to the player is set is set. In the second embodiment described above, when the time-saving state is set, a game (first game) in which a lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is performed and a lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are performed. (The second game) to be selected by the player (see FIG. 82). When the first game is selected, the lottery of the special figure 1 is performed by aiming at the first entrance 64 by the left-handed game, and when the second game is selected, the second ball is entered by the right-handed game. The lottery of the special figure 2 was performed by aiming at the mouth 640 (see FIG. 2).

  Then, as a time-saving ending condition for terminating the time-saving state, a condition that can be satisfied by the lottery of the special figure 1 and a condition that can be satisfied by the lottery of the special figure 2 are different, and the time-saving ending condition is easily satisfied (the time-saving state ends). It is configured such that the player can select a game (easy to play) and a game in which the time saving end condition is hard to be satisfied (from the game).

  Furthermore, in the second embodiment described above, the game (first game) in which the time-saving end condition is easy to be satisfied is more likely to be satisfied in one special symbol lottery than the game (second game) in which the time-saving end condition is hard to be satisfied. The probability of winning a jackpot, that is, the probability of winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery, and the winning of a small jackpot in a special symbol lottery, and obtaining a big jackpot (two types) during the small jackpot (during the small jackpot game) It is configured so that the probability of adding the probability of performing the calculation is high.

  In the second embodiment configured as described above, various games can be executed by causing the player to select a game method when the time saving state is set, so that the player can get tired of the game early. Can be suppressed. Further, according to the game method selected by the player, the ease of ending the time-saving state (easiness of establishing the time-saving end condition) and the degree of expectation of the jackpot for one special drawing lottery may be different. Therefore, the player himself / herself can select a game suitable for him / herself, and can provide a game suitable for various players.

  However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described second embodiment, one of the game methods (second game) selected by the player during the time reduction state is set to the time reduction state, so that the normal state is set. The game is aimed at the second ball entrance 640 that makes it easier to enter the ball, but the other game (the first game) is a game that aims at the first ball entrance 64 that has the same ease of entering the ball as in the normal state. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to give the player an advantage due to the setting of the time saving state. In other words, by setting the time reduction state, the special symbols can be changed (lottery) more efficiently than in the normal state, and in this state, different game characteristics (e.g., easy termination of the time reduction state, It was not possible to provide the jackpot expectation in the special drawing lottery).

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, as in the above-described fourth embodiment, the lottery (change) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) are simultaneously executed. By having a possible configuration (so-called simultaneous variation configuration) and varying the variation pattern (variation time) of each special symbol that can be set according to the game state, the player can select different game characteristics in the time reduction state. It is configured as follows.

  Thus, by setting the time saving state, it is possible to provide a game in which a special symbol can be changed (lottery) more efficiently than in the normal state, and the player can select different playability. It is configured as follows.

  Next, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 157 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 157, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment has a configuration of a right area of the game board 13 (a game area on the right side of the variable display unit 80) and a game area below the variable display unit 80. Is different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment described above (same as the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment) (see FIG. 2). The other components are the same, and the same components are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 157, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is formed so that the right side area is largely divided into two, and the momentum of the ball fired by the right-handed game, that is, the operation handle 51 The ball flows down different flow paths in accordance with the magnitude of the resistance value (firing intensity) detected by a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the device by a change in electrical resistance. It is configured as follows.

  Specifically, when the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 exceeds the reference amount, the shot sphere is configured to flow down the right side region. When the rotation operation amount (rotation position) is larger than the reference amount and smaller than the limit amount (weak right-handed game), the right and left regions are divided into right and left by a restriction wall (restriction member) 900 provided at the center. In the case where the ball is fired toward the first right area 901a on the left side of the area, and the amount of turning operation (turning position) of the operation handle 51 is equal to or more than the limit amount and equal to or less than the limit amount (strong right-handed game), The ball is fired toward the right second right region 901b of the region divided into right and left by the regulating wall (regulating member) 900. In the fifth embodiment, the emission intensity is increased according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. However, the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 reaches a predetermined amount of rotation. Then, the operation handle 51 can be rotated even after the emission intensity becomes maximum. With this configuration, it is not necessary to operate the operation handle 51 up to the limit of the rotation operation range of the operation handle 51 (up to the upper limit) when performing a strong right-handed game, so that the operation handle 51 is hardly broken. be able to.

  Hereinafter, in the right-handed game, a game aiming at the first right area 901a is referred to as a weak right-handed game, and a game aiming at the second right area 901b is referred to as a strong right-handed game. In the fifth embodiment, the right-handed game is divided into a plurality of games according to the magnitude of the firing strength of the right-handed game. However, the right-handed game is divided into a plurality of games by other configurations. For example, it may be configured to repeatedly set a plurality of different games alternately with respect to the magnitude of the firing intensity, or even if the sphere is fired at the same firing intensity, A different game may be set in accordance with the firing timing and the number of balls, and a right region may be formed so that the ball flows down a different region for each different game.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, the right-handed game is divided into a plurality of games according to the firing strength of the ball. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, a plurality of games may be set.

  Returning to FIG. 157, the description will be continued. The ball fired by the weak right-handed game is placed in an opening formed between the plurality of nails implanted above the game board 13 (above the variable display unit 80) and the variable display unit 80. And flows down the first right region 901a. On the other hand, the ball fired by the strong right-handed game enters the opening formed above the plurality of nails implanted above the game board 13 (above the variable display device unit 80), It flows down the right area 901b.

  As shown in FIG. 157, the game board 13 according to the fifth embodiment has an identifier for indicating that the right area is divided into a plurality of right areas (a first right area 901a and a second right area 901b). A mark imitating a fish (displayed in a first right area) 910 and a mark imitating a turtle (displayed in a second right area) 911 are located near the entrance of each area in a manner that can be visually recognized by a player (game board). 13). With this configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the game desired by the player (strong right-handed game, weak right-handed game) is actually performed by identifying the mark attached to the trajectory of the shot ball. Can be easily determined.

  In the fifth embodiment, a configuration is used in which the first right area display 910 and the second right area display 911 described above are pasted one by one near the entrance of each area. However, the present invention is not limited to this. , A plurality of them may be attached. Instead of being attached to the surface of the game board 13, the surface of the game board 13 is formed of a transparent member (for example, acrylic resin), and each mark is attached so as to be buried in the transparent member. May be configured. With this configuration, since the shot sphere does not contact each mark (the first right area display 910 and the second right area display 911), each mark is peeled off by contact with the sphere. Problem can be suppressed.

  In the area defined by the regulating wall 900, a second entrance 640 is provided in the first right area 901a, and almost (about 95%) of the spheres that have entered the first right area 901a are second entrances. It is configured to enter the mouth 640. Although described in detail later, in the fifth embodiment, a variation time of 10 minutes is set for the lottery of the special figure 2 executed in the state where the normal state is set as the game state. are doing. The number of balls to be paid out (the number of prize balls) when a ball enters the second entrance 640 is set to one.

  With this configuration, even if the weak right-handed game is executed in the normal state, the number of balls does not increase (the number of balls to be paid out is smaller than the number of shot balls) and the second incoming ball Even if the ball entry rate to the mouth 640 is increased, it is possible to suppress the execution of the special figure 2 lottery efficiently.

  Next, a through gate 67 and a right first ball entrance 964 are provided in the second right region 901b of the region partitioned by the regulating wall 900. The right first entrance 964 is provided with an electric accessory 964a. The electric accessory 964a operates according to the same operating principle as the electric accessory 640a of the above-described second embodiment, and a lottery result of a general drawing lottery executed when a ball passes through the through gate 67. In response to the change in the open state, in which the ball easily enters the first ball entrance 964, and the closed state, in which it is difficult to enter (cannot enter). Note that the detailed contents are the same as in the above-described second embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  By arranging different entrances for each of the divided areas in this manner, different special drawing lotteries are executed according to the game content during the time saving state. In addition, although the details will be described later, in the fifth embodiment, a short time (5 to 60 seconds) fluctuation time for the lottery of the special figure 2 executed in a state where the time saving state is set as the gaming state. It is configured to be set.

  Therefore, during the time saving state, both the lottery of the special figure 1 and the lottery of the special figure 2 can be executed, so that the player can select any game and play the game. In the fifth embodiment, different lottery results are given to the player depending on whether the special figure 1 lottery is performed or the special figure 2 lottery is performed during the time saving state. I have.

  More specifically, the special figure 1 lottery is more likely to end the time saving state than the special figure 2 lottery, and the bonus (number of prize balls) given when a big hit is won is increased. It is configured as follows. In other words, during the time-saving state, a player who performs the special drawing 1 lottery can execute a game with a high risk and a higher return than performing a special figure 2 lottery (can execute a game with different game characteristics). . As described above, in the case where the player can select a game method, by executing different playability in accordance with the game state to be selected, the player can enthusiastically select a game method.

  In addition, depending on the game method to be selected, the period in which the time reduction state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, continues (period that continues on average) is made different. Can be selected by the player. Therefore, it is possible to play a game according to the convenience of the player himself.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, when a game method for terminating the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, in a short period (shorter than other game methods) is selected, the jackpot in the time-saving state is selected. , A greater benefit is provided to the player than when another game method is selected. Thereby, even if a game method in which the time saving state ends in a short period of time is selected, the privilege can be imparted to the player fairly, so that the player can easily select a desired game method.

  In addition, the fifth embodiment is configured to be able to determine whether the executed right-handed game is a weak right-handed game or a strong right-handed game. Specifically, a first passage sensor 905a is provided in a first right region 901a partitioned by the regulating wall 900, and a second passage sensor 905b is provided in a second right region 901b.

  The first passage sensor 905a and the second passage sensor 905b are detecting means for detecting a ball flowing down the surface of the game board 13 (the lower surface of the ball flow), and can detect the ball flowing down (passing) in a non-contact state. It is composed of a simple proximity sensor. The first pass sensor 905a and the second pass sensor 905b detect a sphere passing through each area with certainty. In each area, the passage width is equal to or more than one sphere and less than two spheres (for example, 15 mm). Is provided at the site. In this way, by limiting the width of a sphere flowing down each area, the detection accuracy of the sphere can be increased. Further, the number of detecting means required for detecting a sphere can be reduced.

  In the fifth embodiment, the first pass sensor 905a and the second pass sensor 905b are buried in the game board 13 such that the detection area is the surface of the game board 13 (the lower surface of the ball flow). A proximity sensor of a type that detects a change in capacitance caused by a sphere flowing down on the surface (the lower surface of the sphere) of the surface is provided. However, a proximity sensor of another type may be provided, and a limit switch or the like may be provided. May be provided.

  In the fifth embodiment, in order to prevent a proximity sensor corresponding to one area from detecting a sphere flowing down the other area, a predetermined thickness ( Although it is configured to have a width of, for example, 5 mm, the invention is not limited to this. For example, various displacements (capacitance displacement, magnetic field displacement) detected by the proximity sensor are prevented from affecting the regulation wall 900. The restriction wall 900 may be configured by a material.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, a dedicated detecting means is used to determine which of the regions (the first right region 901a and the second right region 901b) the ball fired by the right-handed game has passed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, information (signal) indicating that a ball has entered a ball entry opening provided in each of the first right region 901a and the second right region 901b. The determination may be made based on this. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which an adjustment amount of the operation handle 51 is detected, and a weak right-handing game and a strong right-handing game are determined based on the adjustment amount.

  In the fifth embodiment, as described above, the structure and processing for determining whether the currently executed right-handed game is a weak right-handed game or a strong right-handed game are provided. , The current game method can be notified.

  Next, a detailed configuration of the game board 13 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 158, a configuration of an upper portion of the game board 13, that is, a portion where the ball fired by the right-handed game is sorted into the first right region 901a and the second right region 901b will be described. FIG. 158 is a partially enlarged view showing the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. 158, the ball fired by the right-handed game passes through the vertex portion of the game board 13 (in the front view of FIG. 157, the top portion of the circular game area of the game board 13). , An opening 902b formed between the tip nail K1a and the rail 62, and an opening 902a formed below the opening 902b and between the tip nail K1a and the variable display device unit 80. It is configured to be distributed to. Further, an opening 902b formed above the game board 13 has an entrance width (a distance between the tip nail K1a and the rail 62 when a straight line passing through the center point of the circular game area and the tip nail K1a extends to the rail 62). The opening 902a has an entrance width (the distance between the outer wall of the variable display device unit 80 and the tip nail K1a of the straight line passing through the center point of the circular game area and the tip nail K1a) of 4 cm. It is configured to be centimeters.

  This is because when a strong right-handed game is performed out of right-handed games, the shot ball advances stably along the rail 62, whereas a weak right-handed game stabilizes the trajectory of the ball. Is difficult, the opening width of the opening 902a, into which the ball fired by the weak right-handed game enters, is made wider than the opening 902b into which the ball fired by the strong right-handed game enters, so that the weak right-handed game This is for making it easier to perform.

  That is, by forming the entrance width of the opening 902a wide, the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 corresponding to the weak right-handed game can be widened. It can be easier.

  In the first right area 901a, a fish mark (displayed as a first right area) 910 is attached near the opening 902a, and in the second right area 901b, a turtle mark (the second mark) is displayed near the opening 902b. Right area display) 911 is attached. In this way, by attaching each mark to the area where the sphere immediately after passing through each opening (the sphere immediately after being sorted into the divided area) passes, the area in which the shot sphere is given to the player is Can be easily grasped.

  In the present embodiment, marks for indicating each area (first right area display, second right area display) are pasted in the first right area 901a and the second right area 901b, but are not limited thereto. For example, the first right area display is performed in an area where the sphere that has passed through the area has been determined to be which opening among the areas where the sphere before passing through each opening (902a, 902b) passes. 910 and the second right area display 911 may be attached. As described above, the mark (the first right area display, the second right area) is used to indicate each area not only in the divided area but also in an area through which a sphere determined to invade the specific section is passed. With the configuration in which the (area display) is attached, it is possible to easily attach the mark at a position where the player can easily recognize the space within the limited space of the game board 13.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 159, the configuration of the right area of the game board 13 will be described in detail. FIG. 159 (a) is an enlarged view of the right region when the variable winning device 9650a is open, and FIG. 159 (b) is an enlarged diagram of the right region when the variable winning device 9650a is closed. is there.

  In the fifth embodiment, as described above, as a game method during a right-handed game, the player selects a weak right-handed game aiming at the first right area 901a and a strong right-handed game aiming at the second right area 901b. It is configured to be able to provide a game with different playability to a player according to a selected game method.

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, it is necessary for the player to select a desired game method from the weak right-handed game and the strong right-handed game, and to adjust the operation handle 51 according to the game method. there were. As described above with reference to FIG. 158, in the fifth embodiment, the opening 902a of the weak, right-handed game is set so that the adjustment range of the operation handle 51 for the weak right-handed game, which is difficult for the player to adjust, is increased. It is configured to be wider than the opening 902b of the strong right-handed game, so that the player can easily select a game method.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 159 (a), in the fifth embodiment, when any of the games (weak right-handed game and strong right-handed game) is performed in the state where the time saving state is set. Even if there is, the variable winning device 9650a that is opened in the jackpot game is provided so that the jackpot game can be executed while the game is continued.

  Thereby, even if the jackpot is won during the time-saving state, the game method selected during the time-saving state can be continued, so that it is troublesome for the player in the state where the time-saving state and the jackpot game state are repeatedly set. The game can be performed without feeling the feeling.

  Further, the variable winning device 9650a is provided upstream of the second ball entrance 640 provided in the first right region 901a and the first ball entrance 964 provided in the second right region 901b. Therefore, during the jackpot game, the ball fired in the right-handed game does not enter each of the entrances before winning in the variable prize device 9650, and the jackpot game can be performed smoothly.

  Also, the variable prize winning device 9650a operates as a part of the regulating wall 900 as shown in FIG. 159 (b) except during the jackpot game (when the opening operation is not performed) as a part of the regulating wall 900. Is closed so as to divide the sphere, so that it is possible to prevent a sphere flowing down each area from entering a different area during the time saving state.

  In the fifth embodiment, any area (the first right area 901a, the second right area 901a, and the second right area) can be executed while maintaining the game method selected by the player during the time saving state. The variable prize device 9650 is provided so that the ball flowing down the ball 901b) can also win a prize. However, without being limited to this, the ball fired by the right-handed game is placed in each region (the first right region 901a and the second right region 901a). The variable prize winning device 9650 may be arranged in an area where the variable prize device 9650 passes before being sorted into the right area 901b).

  Further, a variable winning device corresponding to each area may be provided. Specifically, the variable for the special figure 2 that is opened when the large right is won by the lottery of the special figure 2 in the first right area 901a where the ball of the weak right-handed game in which the lottery of the special figure 2 is executed flows down. A special prize device is provided, and a special drawing 1 that is opened when a large hit is won by the special drawing 1 lottery in the second right area 901b where a ball of a strong right-handed game in which the special drawing 1 lottery is executed flows down. A variable prize winning device is provided.

  With such a configuration, when one of the games (a weak right-handed game or a strong right-handed game) is performed in a state in which the time saving state is set, and a jackpot is won, the player is left as it is. Jackpot game can be executed while the game method of (1) is continued. In addition, since a different variable prize device is opened when a jackpot is won according to a game method to be executed, by changing the game method while the time saving state is set for the player, It can be easily understood that different games are executed.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, in the state where the time saving state is set, the number of times the special symbol changes (lottery) reaches a predetermined number (if the change frequency end condition is satisfied), or When the number of wins of the small hits by the lottery reaches a predetermined number (when the number-of-wins termination condition is satisfied), from the time-saving state to the normal state (from a gaming state advantageous to the player to a disadvantageous gaming state) It is configured to migrate. It should be noted that this configuration is different from the above-described second embodiment only in the values set as the respective end conditions. The process for shifting the game state executed when the condition is established is the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In addition, the lottery of the first special symbol can be won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and the lottery of the second special symbol is configured not to be won in the lottery, thereby executing the lottery of the first special symbol. The easiness of ending the time-saving state is made different between a game (strong right-handed game) and a game for executing the second special symbol lottery (weakly right-handed game). Furthermore, in the case of winning the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol, the bonus amount (award ball amount) given to the player in one jackpot than in the case of winning the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol. Is increased so that the player can enthusiastically select a game method during the time saving state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 160, the content of the jackpot effect performed in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 160 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen at the time when the big hit (big hit game) is started, and FIG. 160 (b) is a diagram of the display screen during the big hit (big hit game). It is the schematic diagram which showed an example typically.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, a weak right-handed game and a strong right-handed game can be selected (by operating the operation handle 51) and executed in a state where the time saving state is set. In addition, during a jackpot game in which a right-handed game is performed in the same manner as during the time saving state, the player is provided with an effect to indicate whether a game method corresponding to the time saving game desired by the player is being performed. It is configured to be able to.

  In other words, as shown in FIG. 157, in the fifth embodiment, the weak right-handed game and the strong right-handed game can be executed as the game method during the time-saving state (time-saving game method). It is configured so that a jackpot game can be executed regardless of which game method is executed. With this configuration, the game method corresponding to the game method in the time-saving state desired by the player is executed in advance by using the period in which the jackpot game, which is the stage before the time-saving state is set, is executed. be able to.

  Therefore, when a different time-saving game method is executed based on the operation of the operation handle 51 as in the fifth embodiment, it is possible to reliably execute the time-saving game method desired by the player. Further, in the fifth embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game content actually executed during the big hit game (the same as the execution game storage area) matches the game state desired by the player during the time saving state. Then, the effect is executed based on the determination result. This allows the player to easily understand the current game method (game method during the jackpot game).

  When the jackpot game starts (when the jackpot opening period starts), a comment of “right-handed” is displayed in the guidance display area Dm2. Then, in the main display area Dm, a selection screen for selecting a game method desired by the player in a time saving state set after the end of the current big hit game is displayed. Specifically, a state in which the relief mode display mode 851 and the challenge mode display mode 852 are displayed in the main display area Dm, and an arrow that repeatedly indicates each display mode indicates one of the display modes. By operating the frame button 22, a desired game method is selected.

  This relief mode display mode 851 is selected when a weak right-handed game in a time reduction state, that is, a game in which a lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed is desired. Is selected when a strong right-handed game in a time-saving state, that is, a game in which the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed is desired. FIG. 160 (a) shows a state in which an arrow 853 indicating the safe mode display mode 851 is displayed. By operating (pressing) the operation button 22 in this state, the player desires. The game method can be selected as the safe mode. On the other hand, in FIG. 160A, the challenge mode can be selected by operating (pressing) the frame button 22 while the arrow 854 shown by a dotted line is displayed by a solid line.

  In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a character "Please select a desired game" is displayed as a comment for allowing the player to select a desired mode, and a frame button 22 for guiding a selection operation is displayed. A simulated figure is displayed. Based on the display content displayed in the sub display area Ds, the player grasps the content to be selected at the start of the big hit and selects a desired game method during the time saving state. Here, the game method selected during the jackpot game is determined for the selected game method.

  During the jackpot game, the diagram shown in FIG. 160 (b) is displayed. On the screen during the jackpot game, “right-handed” is continuously displayed in the guidance display area Dm2, and the current number of round games is displayed in the round number display area 858. In the example of FIG. 160 (b), “ROUND5” indicating that the round game is the fifth round is displayed.

  Further, on the right side of the main display area Dm, the current game method is displayed in the current game display area 860, and the desired game method selected at the start of the big hit game is displayed in the desired game display area 861. In the diagram shown in FIG. 160 (b), a display mode indicating “safety mode” is displayed in the current game display area 860, and a display mode indicating “challenge mode” is displayed in the desired game display area 861. . That is, the display content when the actually executed game method is different from the game method desired by the player is displayed, and in order to change the game method to the game guide area 859 of the sub display area Ds. The comment "Right-strike right" is displayed.

  By configuring the display mode in this manner, the adjustment for matching the actual game method with the game method desired by the player (the game method to be executed during the time reduction state) is performed before the time reduction state is set. It can be performed during the period when the jackpot game is being executed. Furthermore, if the game method being executed during the jackpot game is different from the desired game method, a guide display for changing the game method can be displayed during the jackpot game, so that the jackpot game is executed. It is possible to easily execute a desired game method during a certain period.

  Returning to FIG. 160 (b), the description will be continued. The display screen during the jackpot game further includes an executing jackpot history 855 indicating a game method when the executing jackpot is won, a safe mode jackpot history 856 indicating the number of jackpots won in the safe mode, and a challenge. A challenge mode jackpot history 857 indicating the number of jackpot winnings during the mode is displayed. FIG. 160 (b) shows a state in which the normal state is set as the game state, and the lottery of the first special symbol executed when a ball enters the first entrance 64 is performed. The character “V” indicating that the big hit has been won is displayed as the running big hit history 855.

  In addition, when the jackpot currently being executed is the jackpot that has been won by the lottery of the second special symbol executed when a ball enters the second entrance 640 in a state where the time saving state is set. The character “V with a fish mark” is displayed in the hit history 855 during the execution, and the first special symbol lottery executed when the ball enters the right first entrance 964 opens a jackpot. Is displayed, the character “V with a turtle mark” is displayed in the running history 855. This makes it possible to easily understand the trigger of the winning jackpot regardless of the gaming state in which the jackpot is won.

  In addition, by providing the safety mode big hit history 856 and the challenge mode big hit history 857, when playing a game with the pachinko machine 10, in particular, when playing a game in a time-saving state, what kind of game is played in the past. Game history can be referred to. As a result, it is possible for the player to predict an advantageous game method, and the player can be motivated to play the game.

  In the fifth embodiment, as a past game history, a configuration is used in which the gaming method set in the case of winning a jackpot is cumulatively displayed, but in addition to the above, regardless of whether the jackpot has been won, You may be comprised so that the value which accumulated the game method selected in the past may be displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 161, a description will be given of the game content during the time saving state in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 161 is a schematic diagram showing the time-saving game contents in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 161, in the fifth embodiment, different games are executed according to the game method executed during the time saving state. Specifically, in the state where the time saving state is set, when a weak right-handed game, that is, a game aiming at the first right region 901a is executed, most of the shot balls are in the second entrance 640. And one prize ball is paid out.

  Further, in the second special symbol lottery executed when a ball enters the second entrance 640, the lottery is set so as not to win a small hit. Is set so that a jackpot game of 10 rounds is executed. In the gaming state in which the time saving state is set, the fluctuation pattern set in accordance with the lottery of the first special symbol and the fluctuation pattern set in accordance with the lottery of the second special symbol have substantially the same fluctuation. The time is set.

  On the other hand, in the state where the time saving state is set, when a strong right-handed game, that is, a game aiming at the second right area 901b is executed, the electric accessory 964a is generated based on the fact that the ball passes through the through gate 67. Opens. When a ball enters the right first entrance 964 while the electric accessory 964a is performing the opening operation, three award balls are paid out. Here, it is configured that about 1/3 of the sphere launched into the second right region 901b enters the right first entrance 964 with the time saving state set. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, when a right-handed game is performed during a time-saving state, a weak right-handed game or a strong right-handed game is performed. A prize ball can be obtained (prize ball = medium).

  Furthermore, unlike the lottery of the second special symbol described above, the lottery of the first special symbol executed by the strong right-handed game is configured to be able to win a small hit (the winning probability is 1/60). ). Here, in the fifth embodiment, as the time-saving end condition which is a condition for ending the time-saving state, the number-of-times-of-variation termination condition that is satisfied when the number of times of the change of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100). In addition to the above, the system is configured so that the time saving end condition is satisfied even when a small win is won. That is, when the time saving state is set, the strong right-handed game in which the lottery of the first special symbol is executed has a shorter time-saving state than the weak right-handed game in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. It is configured so that a game that is easy to finish is performed.

  Then, in the case of winning the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol, the bonus amount (number of prize balls) given to the player is larger than in the case of winning the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol. The game is configured to be executed.

  With this configuration, during the time reduction state, the time reduction state is set until the special symbol change is executed 100 times. However, it is difficult to perform the lottery of the second special symbol which has few benefits in the case of winning a big hit. A right-handed game (safety mode) is performed, a special symbol change is executed 100 times, or a time-saving state is set until a small hit is won. That is, the time-saving end condition is set more than a weak right-handed game. Then, although the time-saving state is likely to end, there are many benefits when a jackpot is won (12 rounds jackpot). Depending on whether or not a strong right-handed game (challenge mode) in which a lottery of the first special symbol is executed, a different playability is provided. Since the game can be provided to the player, the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

  In the fifth embodiment, it is configured not to win the small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, and to satisfy the time saving end condition when the small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol. However, other than that, the time saving end condition described in each of the above embodiments may be set. For example, in the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol, the small hit is won, and the small hit type set for the won small hit is a specific small hit type (for example, small hit A). Is configured so that the time saving end condition is satisfied only in the case of, and the above-described specific small hit type (small hit A) is set only when the small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery. You may. As a result, it is not possible to determine whether or not the time-saving state ends only by winning a small hit, so that a thrilling feeling can be provided to the player.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, when the small hit is won, that is, when one small hit is won, the time-saving end condition is satisfied. You may comprise so that the value of 1 or more may be set as a winning number. Further, when a small hit is won, a plurality of small hit types may be set, and different time-saving termination conditions may be set for each small hit type.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10 in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163. In the fifth embodiment, similarly to the above-described fourth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to fluctuate (lottery) at the same time, and the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 is as follows. The values set in each table are different from those in the fourth embodiment described above, but the other values are the same. A detailed description of the same portion or a portion whose value is simply changed will be omitted.

  First, referring to FIG. 162 (a), of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment, a variation pattern 5 table different from the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment described above. The content of 202dd will be described. FIG. 162 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern 5 table 202dd. The variation pattern 5 table 202dd differs from the variation pattern 4 table 202cd in that the specified contents of the variation pattern table referred to during the time saving state are different.

  As shown in FIG. 162 (a), in the above-described fourth embodiment, different variation pattern tables are configured to be referred to according to the set time saving state (according to the winning jackpot type). In contrast to the first embodiment, which is capable of setting a time-saving state in which the special symbol easily fluctuates and a time-saving state in which the second special symbol easily fluctuates, in the fifth embodiment, the fluctuation pattern referred to during the time-saving state The difference lies in that a time-saving simultaneous variation pattern table 202dd2 is defined as a table.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 162 (b), the contents specified in the time-saving simultaneous variation pattern table 202dd2 will be described. FIG. 162 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time-saving simultaneous variation pattern table 202dd2. As shown in FIG. 162 (b), the simultaneous variation pattern table 202dd2 for time saving is compared with the variation pattern table referred to during the time saving state of the above-described fourth embodiment by a first special symbol (special figure 1). And the variation pattern defined corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2) is that there is no significant difference in the variation time set in any of the variation patterns.

  That is, in the above-described fourth embodiment, in the right-handed game executed when the time-saving state is set, both the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) are selected by lottery. The game board 13 is configured to be executed, and the lottery is mainly executed by changing the length of the fluctuation time set for each special symbol according to the type of the time saving state set as the game state. The special symbol type is configured to be variable.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, in the variation pattern table referred to when the time saving state is set, the variation time set for each special symbol is set to the same length, and the player Is different in that the type of the special symbol in which the lottery is executed is mainly varied by changing the game area in which the is fired.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 162 (b), the lottery result (the hit / fail judgment) in either the special map 1 or the special map 2 is included in the time-saving simultaneous variation pattern table 202dd2 used in the fifth embodiment. The fluctuation pattern (small jackpot fluctuations 1 to 3) in which the fluctuation time is 10 seconds to 60 seconds is defined for the big hit, and the fluctuation time is 10 seconds for the lottery result (win / fail judgment result) to be out. A fluctuation pattern of up to 30 seconds (out-of-range fluctuations 1 to 3) is defined. In addition, although it is configured so that only the lottery of the first special symbol can be determined to be a small hit as a result of the success / failure determination, the small success is determined in the same manner as in the case where the result of the success / failure determination described above is out of 10 seconds to A fluctuation pattern of 30 seconds (small hit fluctuations 1 to 3) is defined. As a result, the same fluctuation time can be set for the fluctuation that has been won for the small hit and the fluctuation that has been won for the small hit.

  Therefore, the effect suggesting that the time saving is ended by winning the small hit can be applied as it is even when the lottery result (win / fail judgment result) is out of order. In the fifth embodiment, an effect indicating that the time savings are to be ended (an effect for indicating that the small hit has been won) is executed depending on whether the result of the determination is incorrect or small. In addition, for example, in addition to the above, for example, a fluctuating time defined for a case where the lottery result (win / fail judgment result) is a small hit, a fluctuating time specified for a case of a big hit, May be the same, and an effect indicating that the player has won either the big hit or the small hit may be executed. This makes it difficult to understand to the end which of a situation in which a player can win a jackpot and obtain a privilege or a situation in which the player wins a small jackpot and ends a time-saving state advantageous to the player is completed. .

  Next, contents specified in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 163 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, the first passage counter 223da, the second passage counter 223db, the selected game storage area 223dc, the execution game storage area 223dd, and the big hit information storage area 223de are different from the second embodiment described above. And in that they have been added.

  The first passage counter 223da is a counter for counting the number of balls detected by the first passage sensor 905a (see FIG. 157) during the big hit game, that is, the number of balls that have passed through the first right region 901a during the big hit game. is there. In the signal input process (see S2151 in FIG. 166) executed in the main process 5 (see FIG. 164) of the sound ramp control device 113, the first pass sensor 905a turns on during the big hit. If it is determined that there is, the value is incremented by 1 (see S3803). Further, the value added when determining the game method being executed is referred to (see S3806 to S3809). Then, when it is determined that the jackpot has ended (when the time saving state is set), the value is cleared (reset) to 0 (see S3811).

  The second pass counter 223db is a counter similar to the above-described first pass counter 223da, and is the number of balls detected by the second pass sensor 905b (see FIG. 157) during the big hit game, that is, the second pass counter during the big hit game. This is a counter for counting the number of balls that have passed through the right area 901b. The processing using the second passage counter 223db differs only in that the target of the first passage counter 223da is changed from the first passage sensor 905a to the second passage sensor 905b. Is omitted.

  The selected game storage area 223dc is an area for temporarily storing a game method desired by the player during the time saving state. In the selected game storage area 223dc, a game method selected during a game selection period set in a predetermined period (10 seconds) after the jackpot game is started (after the opening period of the jackpot game is set). If the pressing of the frame button 22 is determined to be in the game selection period in the frame button input monitoring / producing process 5 (see S2157 of FIG. 167) (S3852: Yes), the button is pressed. The corresponding game method is stored (S3853).

  Based on the information stored in the selected game storage area 223dc, a game method desired by the player as a game method during the time saving state is determined, and a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 160 (b)). Is configured to set the display mode of the current game method. The information stored in the selected game storage area 223dc is configured to be retained until the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and a selection screen displayed at the start of the big hit game (FIG. 160 (a)) (See Reference), the selection display mode may be formed such that the arrow points first to the information stored in the selected game storage area 223dc.

  Furthermore, the player did not select any of the game methods during the period (during the game selection period) during which the selection screen (see FIG. 160 (a)) displayed at the start of the jackpot game was started (during the game selection period). If the user does not press the frame button 22), a game method based on information stored in the selected game storage area 223dc (information stored during a past game selection period) is automatically selected. It is good to configure.

  In this case, at the start time and end time of the game selection period in which the selection screen is displayed, the game selection is performed such that the arrow indicates the display mode indicating the game method corresponding to the information stored in the selected game storage area 223dc. It is good to set the production mode during the period. With this configuration, even when the player does not select a game method, any game method is automatically selected without changing the information stored in the selected game storage area 223dc. It is possible to execute an effect that makes it seem as if it was done.

  The executed game storage area 223dd is an area for temporarily storing the actually executed game method. The execution game storage area 223dd stores information indicating a current game method determined based on an area in which a ball shot during a big hit (during a big hit) flows down. In the signal input process (see S2151 in FIG. 166) that is periodically (every millisecond) executed in the main process 5 (see FIG. 164) in 113, the first right area 901a during the big hit (during the big hit game) Information indicating a game method based on the number of balls flowing down the second right area 901b is stored (S3809, S3810 in FIG. 166). With this configuration, it is possible to determine the area where the shot ball actually flows down, and to determine the current game method based on the determination result, thereby improving the determination accuracy.

  The information stored in the execution game storage area 223dd is used to determine the currently executed game method, and is displayed in the desired game display area 861 of the display screen (FIG. 160 (b)) during the jackpot game. It is referred to when setting the mode (S3554 in FIG. 168).

  The jackpot information storage area 223de is an area for storing information related to the jackpot. The jackpot information storage area 223de stores information on the jackpot that has been won, and indicates information such as the type of the jackpot that has been won, the game state at the time of the jackpot, and a game method when the jackpot has been won (for example, the jackpot). Is stored, and the command transmitted from the main control device 110 is determined to be a hit-related command in the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 165). In this case (S2211: Yes in FIG. 165), information included in the received command is stored (S2291 in FIG. 165).

<Control Process in Main Control Device 110 of Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the contents of the control processing of the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, a control process similar to the control process of the main controller 110 of the above-described fourth embodiment is performed, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are independently (in parallel) ) To allow for fluctuations. If one of the special symbols is won in the lottery (if the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the win), the other special symbol variation being executed is displayed to indicate the deviation. It is configured to forcibly stop and display in a manner.

  In the above-described fourth embodiment, the ball passes through the specific area during the small hitting game that is executed when the small hit is won in the special symbol lottery (provided in the special discharge channel 650e2 that is the specific area). The V switch 650e3 has a control process to obtain a jackpot (per two types) by detecting a ball, whereas in the fifth embodiment, the above-described per-type per two types is obtained. In that it does not have the control process of

  In the fourth embodiment described above, the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of ordinary symbol) and the time reduction state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of ordinary symbol) are set as the game state. In the fifth embodiment, in addition to the above-described two game states, a probable change state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) is set in the fifth embodiment. ) And a latent state (a high probability state of a special symbol and a low probability state of a normal symbol) can be set.

<Regarding Control Process in Voice Lamp Control Device 113 of Fifth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 164 to 168, a control process of the audio lamp control device 1113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the player can select a game method when the time saving state is set, and the operation handle 51 is operated by the player, and a weak right-handed game, or One of the strong right-handed games is executed.

  In either the weak right-handed game or the strong right-handed game executed during the time-saving state, the ball is fired to the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (right side in front view in FIG. 157) by operating the operation handle 51 greatly. The game method of the right-handed game to be performed is classified in detail, and a predetermined adjustment accuracy is required to execute each game method. Therefore, in order for the player to execute a desired game method, a slight adjustment period and adjustment firing (firing a ball while adjusting the operation amount) are required.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment described above with reference to FIG. 157, at least when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is maximized (when the operation handle 51 is turned to the rightmost). Since it is configured so that the operation amount corresponds to the strong right-handed game, the player can easily execute the strong right-handed game. While operating 51 to the right-handed game (to the extent that the fired ball reaches the right area of the variable display unit 80), it does not become a strong right-handed game (the shot ball is the second right-handed game). In such a case, it is necessary to adjust the temperature to such an extent that the area 901b does not flow down), which requires an adjustment period and an adjustment firing.

  Therefore, as in the effect display (see FIG. 82 (a)) performed in the second embodiment described above, at the timing when the ending screen of the jackpot game is displayed, that is, at the timing immediately before the time saving state is set. When the effect display for causing the player to select the game method is executed, the time-saving state is set at a stage where the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is adjusted toward the game method desired by the player. As a result, there is a problem that the game during the time-saving state is easily executed by a game method not intended by the player.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, at the timing when the opening screen of the jackpot game is displayed, that is, at the timing when the jackpot game is started, the time saving set for the player after the end of the jackpot game is given. An effect display for selecting a game method in the state is executed. Thereby, since the game method can be adjusted using the period in which the big hit game is executed, it is possible to suppress the execution of the game in the time-saving state by the game method not intended by the player.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, even if any one of a plurality of selectable game methods is executed as a game method during the time saving state, the same privilege can be obtained during the jackpot game. Therefore, the period during which the jackpot game is executed can be used as a period for adjusting the operation amount of the operation handle 51 toward the game method during the time-saving state without giving a disadvantageous situation to the player.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, the player is allowed to select a desired game method during the time saving state, and the game method selected by the player and the game method actually executed during the jackpot game are described. Are displayed, and a display for guiding the operation amount of the operation handle 51 to the player is performed based on the comparison result. Thereby, the operation amount of the operation handle 51 can be easily adjusted toward a game method desired by the player.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, the amount of privilege (award ball amount) given when a jackpot is won differs depending on the game (weak right-handed game, strong right-handed game) executed during the time reduction state. It is composed. Then, during a period in which the time-saving state (including the probable change state) and the jackpot game repeatedly continue, that is, a period in which the normal state (except during the jackpot) is not set as the game state (continuous chan period, valid period), the jackpot The number of times of winning (the number of consecutive chans) is displayed separately for each game that was executed when the big hit was won.

  As a result, the relationship between the game method selected by the player and the jackpot winning situation (the number of wins) can be visually confirmed, so that the game method when the next time saving state is set is determined by the past result. Can be selected based on the Therefore, a capture element can be given to the game, and the interest can be improved.

  As shown with reference to FIGS. 164 to 168, the control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 of the fifth embodiment differs from the control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 of the second embodiment in the main processing ( The main process 5 (see FIG. 164) is replaced with the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 165) instead of the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 99), and the production update process 2 (see FIG. 105 (b)). (See FIG. 168) instead of the effect update process 5 (see FIG. 168).

  The fifth embodiment is different from the second embodiment in that the control processing of the main control device 110 is replaced with the control processing of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment. ing. Therefore, the control process of the audio ramp control device 113 based on the change of the control process of the main control device 110 is the same as that of the fourth embodiment, and the other control processes of the audio ramp control device 113 are the second embodiment. And the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 164, the contents of the main processing 5 executed by the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main processing 5. As shown in FIG. 164, in the main processing 5, a frame button input monitoring and effect processing 5 (S 2197) is provided in place of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S 2107) in the main processing 2 (see FIG. 55). The difference is that a command determination process 5 (S2193) is executed instead of the command determination process 2 (S2163), and a signal input process (S2151) is further added.

  Here, the content of the command determination processing 5 (S2193) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination processing 5 (S2193). This command determination process 5 (S2193) is different from the command determination process 2 (see S2163 in FIG. 99) in that when a hit-related command is received, the information indicated by the received command is stored in the big hit information storage area 223de. In that they are stored in

  When the command determination process 5 (S2193 in FIG. 165) is executed, first, the same processes in S2201 to S2209 as the above-described command determination process 2 (see S2163 in FIG. 99) are executed. Then, when it is determined in the processing of S2209 that the winning information command has been received (S2209: Yes), the same winning information related processing 2 (S2251) as in the above-described second embodiment is executed, and then the processing of S2217 is performed. Is executed, and this processing ends.

  In the above-described second embodiment, in the above-described winning information-related processing 2 (S2251), it is determined whether the game method in the time reduction state is a right-handed game or a left-handed game, and the determination is made. The effect contents (the effect for guidance information and the effect for error notification) are configured to be set based on the result. However, in the fifth embodiment, such processing is not executed. Although they are different in the point, the detailed description is omitted.

  Next, in the processing of S2209, when it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S2209 in FIG. 165: No), it is next determined whether a win-related command has been received (S2211 in FIG. 165). If it is determined that the hit-related command has been received (S2211: FIG. 165: Yes), the information stored in the big-hit information storage area 223de is updated according to the received content (content indicated by the hit-related command). (S2291), and thereafter, the same processes in S2212 and S2217 as the command determination process 2 (see S2163 in FIG. 99) are executed, and this process ends.

  The information stored in the jackpot information storage area 223de updated in the process of S2291 described above includes, for example, the number of jackpots won, the chance of the lottery winning (the chance of the lottery being won). Game method). By configuring the content of the jackpot information storage area 223de immediately after winning the jackpot as described above, there is an effect that it is possible to study the past jackpot during the jackpot game.

  Returning to FIG. 165, the description will be continued. In the process of S2211, if it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S2211: No), the same processes of S2213 to S2217 as the command determination process 2 (see S2163 of FIG. 99) are executed, This processing ends.

  Next, the content of the signal input processing (S2151) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the signal input processing (S2151). In this signal input processing (S2151), when the first passage sensor 905a and the second passage sensor 905b provided on the game board 13 detect the passage of a ball, processing based on the detection result is executed. Specifically, the number of balls passing (falling) through each area (first right area 901a, second right area 901b) provided on the game board 13 is counted, and the difference value is a predetermined number (for example, 5 balls). ), A process of determining a game method corresponding to an area where a large number of balls have been detected, that is, an area where many balls have flowed down, as an actual game method is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 166, when the signal input process (S2151) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the present is a big hit (S3801), and if it is determined that the big hit is being made (S3801: Yes), Next, it is determined whether the first passage sensor 905a detects a ball (S3802). In the processing of S3802, if it is determined that the first passage sensor 905a is detecting a ball (S3802: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the first passage counter 223da (S3803), and then the processing of S3804 Move to. On the other hand, in the process of S3802, when it is determined that the first passage sensor 905a has not detected a ball (S3802: No), the process of S3803 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3804.

  In the processing of S3804, it is determined whether the second passage sensor 905b has detected a ball (S3804). If it is determined that the second passage sensor 905b is detecting a ball (S3804: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the second passage counter 223db (S3805), and the process of S3806 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S3804, if it is determined that the second passage sensor 905b has not detected a ball (S3804: No), the process of S3805 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3806.

  Then, in the process of S3806, a difference between the value of the first passage counter 223da and the value of the second passage counter 223db is calculated. That is, the difference between the number of balls passing through the first right area 901a during the big hit game (the value of the first passage counter 223da) and the number of balls passing through the second right area 901b (the value of the second passage counter 223db). Is calculated.

  After the processing of S3806, it is determined whether the difference between the value of the first passage counter 223da and the value of the second passage counter 223db is 5 or more (S3807), and it is determined that the difference is 5 or more. In this case (S3807: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the first passage counter 223da is larger than the value of the first passage counter 223da and the value of the second passage counter 223db (S3808).

  In the process of S3808, if it is determined that the value of the first passage counter 223da is larger (S3808: Yes), a weak right-handed game is set in the execution game storage area 223dd (S3809), and the process ends. In the process of S3808, when it is determined that the value of the first passage counter 223da is not larger than the value of the second passage counter 223db (the value of the second passage counter 223db is larger) (S3808: No), A strong right-handed game is set in the execution game storage area 223dd (S3810), and this processing ends.

  In other words, in the fifth embodiment, the number of balls shot down during the jackpot game is counted as the number of balls flowing down the first right side area 901a and the number of balls flowing down the second right side area 901b in the right side area. Based on the measurement result, it is possible to determine whether the current game method is a weak right-handed game in which a ball flows down to the first right area 901a or a strong right-handed game in which a ball flows down to the second right area 901b. Make up.

  Then, the information (game method) set in the execution game storage area 223dd by the processing of S3809 or the processing of S3810 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game as shown in FIG. 160 (b). By displaying the current game display area 860 on the screen, the player can easily understand.

  In the fifth embodiment, if the difference between the value of the first passage counter 223da and the value of the second passage counter 223db is equal to or more than a predetermined amount (five balls), the current game method is set. It is composed. That is, immediately after the jackpot game is executed (a period in which five or more balls are not shot by the right-handed game during the jackpot game), the current game method is executed regardless of which region the ball is shot. Since it is not set in the game storage area 223dd, the current game display area 860 is configured so that the game method is not displayed.

  With this configuration, the current game method on the display screen is displayed immediately after the jackpot game is started and the game method in the right-handed game of the player is not fixed (unsteady state). The display can be suppressed.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, the current game method is not specified until the difference between the value of the first passage counter 223da and the value of the second passage counter 223db reaches a predetermined amount (five balls). It is composed. With such a configuration, the display mode (the display mode displayed in the current game display area 860) for indicating the current game method displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is frequently switched. Can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 166, the description will be continued. In the process of S3811, it is determined whether the present time is the end timing of the jackpot (S3811). In the fifth embodiment, when it is determined that the command for indicating that the time saving state is set (the command including the content indicating that the current gaming state is the time saving state) is output, or during the big hit game When it is determined that the command indicating that is no longer output, it is determined that the jackpot has ended.

  If it is determined in the processing of S3811 that it is the timing to end the big hit (S3811: Yes), the value of the first pass counter 223da and the value of the second pass counter 223db added during the big hit game are cleared to 0. (S3812), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current timing is not the timing of the jackpot end (S3811: No), that is, if the gaming state is neither the jackpot nor the jackpot end timing, other signal input processing is executed (S3813). Then, the present process ends.

  In addition, as the process of S3813 described above, for example, when the game state is the normal state (when the game state in which the left-handed game aiming at the left area is an appropriate game is set), the first pass sensor 905a Alternatively, when the second passage sensor 905b detects a ball, that is, when it is determined that a right-handed game is being performed, a guidance display for guiding a player to a game method is executed. The first pass sensor 905a or the second pass sensor 905b detects a ball in a game state (for example, a time saving state) in which a different game is executed according to the processing of the game or a game method executed by the player. Based on this, the game method being executed is determined, and processing for displaying the game method in the current game display area 860 is executed.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, at the timing when the big hit game is started (during the opening period of the big hit game), the player selects a desired game method during the time saving state and uses the period during which the big hit game is executed. Thus, the configuration is such that the player can change the game method, but any period during which the jackpot game is executed can be used as a period for changing the game method. May be configured to execute an effect (see FIG. 160 (a)) for selecting a game method in the middle of the execution of the game.

  Next, the contents of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 5 (S2157) executed in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / production process 5 (S2157). In the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 5 (S2157), in addition to the processing performed in the pachinko machine 10 of each embodiment described above, a game selection period in which the player selects a desired game method (FIG. 160 (a)) The difference is that an operation process of the frame button 22 is added.

  When the processing of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 5 (S2157 in FIG. 167) is executed, first, it is determined whether the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected (S3851), and the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected. If it is determined that there is no (S3851: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3851 that the press of the frame button 22 has been detected (S3851: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the current time is the game selection period (S3852).

  Here, although detailed description is omitted, in the fifth embodiment, in the command determination processing 5 (see S2193 in FIG. 165), the hit-related command executed when a hit-related command is received (S2211: Yes). In the process (S2212), the game selection period is set to 10 seconds after the start of the big hit (after the start timing of the big hit is determined). In this game selection period, a value corresponding to 10 seconds is set to the value of a period counter (not shown), and the value of the counter is updated in various counter updating processes (see S2111 in FIG. 164) executed every millisecond. Thus, it is configured to measure for 10 seconds.

  In the processing of S3852, when it is determined that the current time is the game selection period (the value of the period counter is not 0) (S3852: Yes), the game method corresponding to the button press on the frame button 22 is selected as the selected game storage area 223dc. Is set (S3853), a display press command indicating the game method set in S3853, that is, a game method corresponding to the button press is set (S3855), and this processing ends.

  The display press command set here is output to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the sound lamp control device 113 (see S2102 in FIG. 164), and is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 is controlled so that the game method selected by the player (the game method to be executed during the time saving state) is displayed. With such a configuration, the player himself / herself can easily grasp a desired game method during the jackpot game (see FIG. 160 (b)).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 160 (b), in the fifth embodiment, during the jackpot game, both the game method desired by the player himself and the game method executed during the jackpot game are displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the game method needs to be adjusted based on the display content displayed on the display screen.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, during the jackpot game, if the game method desired by the player himself does not match the game method being executed during the jackpot game, the game method actually executed However, the operation method of the operation handle 51 is displayed as a guide (instruction) in the game guide area 859 of the sub display area Ds so that the player himself / herself can obtain a desired game method. Thereby, since a specific adjustment method can be guided to the player, the player can easily execute a desired game method.

  Returning to FIG. 167, the description will be continued. In the process of S3852, when it is determined that the current time is not the game selection period (S3852: No), it is next determined whether another operation period is being performed (S3854), and it is determined that another operation period is being performed. If this is done (S3854: Yes), a display press command corresponding to the button press corresponding to the operation period is set (S3855), and this processing ends.

  In addition, although detailed description is omitted, as the other operation period, for example, a part of a special symbol change period for indicating a result of a special symbol lottery, or a period in which a game is not executed (the change of the special symbol is executed) In the special symbol change period, when the frame button 22 is operated (when the press of the frame button 22 is detected), the lottery result of the changing special symbol is displayed. It is configured to perform an effect to indicate that it is a jackpot.

  In addition, when the game is not executed, that is, during a so-called demonstration period, when the frame button 22 is operated (when the press of the frame button 22 is detected), a screen for explaining the game content of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed. , The game history of today is selectively displayed. In this manner, by providing different privileges (operations to be performed) for the operation according to the game state and the game state when operating the frame button 22, various effects can be provided to the player. , Can enhance the effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 168, the contents of the effect update processing 5 executed in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the contents of effect update processing 5. The effect update process 5 is different from the effect update process of each of the above-described embodiments in that a process of updating the display content of the display screen displayed during the jackpot game is executed.

  When the effect update process 5 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the present is a jackpot (S3551). If it is determined that the present is a jackpot (S3551: Yes), the result is stored in the selected game storage area 223dc. The information stored in the execution game storage area 223dd is read out (S3552).

  Then, a display game method command corresponding to the selected game method and the game method being executed is set (S3554). The display command set here is output to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the sound lamp control device 113 (see S2102 in FIG. 164), and each content is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed in the display mode indicating the game method corresponding to the game.

  Returning to FIG. 168, the description will be continued. In the process of S3555, it is determined whether or not the contents of the information (selected game method) read in the process of S3552 and the information (executable game method) read in the process of S3553 match (S3555). If it is determined that they match (S3555: Yes), since the desired game method matches the current game method, a display instruction command for maintaining the current game method is maintained. Is set, and this processing ends.

  In the process of S3556, when a display instruction command for maintaining the current game method is set, for example, “keep as it is” is displayed in the game guidance area 859 on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Comments are displayed. This allows the player to enter an advantageous state advantageous to the player by maintaining the current play technique assistant.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3555 that the selected game and the executed game do not match (S3555: No), a display instruction command for indicating a comment for changing the current game method is set (S3557). reference). Here, for example, if the selected game is the challenge mode (strong right-handed game) and the execution game is the safe mode (weak right-handed game), the "more hard right-handed game" is used to change the game method. Characters are displayed in the game guidance area 859. Thereby, when changing the game method from the currently executed game method to the desired game method, it is possible to easily grasp the details of the adjustment that must be specifically executed.

  Then, in the process of S3551, when it is determined that the present is not a big hit (S3551: No), when the process of S3556 or the process of S3557 is finished, other effect update process is executed (S3558). The process ends. In the process of S3558, a corresponding process is executed among various effect update processes that can be executed in each of the above-described embodiments.

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, in the advantageous state (probable change state, time saving state) in which the player is in an advantageous gaming state, the first advantageous game (strong right) in which the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. The player can select any one of a beating game) and a second advantageous advantage (weak right-handed game) for executing a lottery of the second special symbol. Then, both the first advantageous game and the second advantageous game described above are configured so that the lottery of the special symbol is more easily executed than when the normal state is set as the gaming state.

  With this configuration, during the advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the player can select one advantageous game from among a plurality of advantageous games as a game in which it is easier to execute a special symbol lottery than in the normal state. , It is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, no matter which game the player selects, it is possible to make it easier to execute a special symbol lottery than in the normal state, so that it is possible to provide a pleasure for the player to select a game method. .

  In the fifth embodiment, the player can select a game method in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and different conditions for terminating the advantageous state for a plurality of game methods that can be selected by the player. It is composed. Specifically, the time saving state (high probability state of the ordinary symbol) is set as an advantageous state, and the number of times of change that is satisfied when the special symbol change reaches a predetermined number of times (100 times) is set as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state. In addition to the ending condition, a winning number ending condition that is satisfied when the number of wins (small hit games executed) in the special symbol lottery reaches a predetermined number (one time) is set, and the first special The lottery of the symbol is configured to have a higher probability of winning a small hit than the lottery of the second special symbol.

  With this configuration, the probability that the advantageous state ends in the first advantageous game in which the first special symbol lottery is executed and the second advantageous game in which the second special symbol lottery is executed, that is, The probability (continuation rate) of winning a jackpot during the advantageous state can be varied.

  Further, when a jackpot is won in the first advantageous game in which the advantageous state is unlikely to continue from among the plurality of advantageous games selectable by the player, the second advantageous game in which the advantageous state is more likely to continue than the first advantageous game The content of the jackpot game is set so that the number of prize balls awarded during the jackpot game is larger than the case where the jackpot is won in the game. Specifically, the jackpot is won during the first advantageous game. In the case (when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol), the jackpot game for 12 rounds is executed, and when the jackpot is won during the second advantageous game (the jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol). In the case of winning, a jackpot game for 10 rounds is executed.

  Thereby, the player can easily end the advantageous state but have a large bonus at the time of the jackpot winning, and the second advantageous game is less likely to end the bonus state than the first advantageous game, but has a small number of the bonuses at the time of the jackpot winning. Any of the advantageous games can be selected. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to select a desired game method according to the time that can be spent in the game and the circumstances of the player himself such as the current condition, and to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early. Can be.

  In the fifth embodiment, the time saving state is used as the advantageous state. In other words, a variable number end condition and a winning number end condition can be set as the variable end condition for ending the variable state, and the variable end condition is determined by the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. May be configured so as to differ in the ease with which the formula is satisfied. Even in the case of such a configuration, the same effect as in the case where the above-mentioned time saving state is set to the advantageous state can be obtained.

  When the probability change state is used as the advantageous state, when the probability change end condition is satisfied, the first probability change end condition for setting the normal state and the second probability change end condition for setting the time saving state are set in advance. It is preferable that the setting is made in advance and the destination of the transition of the gaming state is made different depending on the end condition that is established earlier. In this case, for example, when the first probability change end condition is satisfied, a game state that is more disadvantageous than the probability change state is set, and when the second probability change end condition is satisfied, a game that is more advantageous than the probability change state is set. It is preferable to configure the gaming performance in each gaming state so that the state is set.

  Specifically, the first probable change end condition is satisfied when the change number end condition is satisfied, and the second certain change end condition is satisfied when the winning number end condition is satisfied. A special figure 1 change frequency end condition that is satisfied when the change of the first special symbol reaches 50 times, and a special figure 2 change frequency end condition that is satisfied when the change of the second special symbol reaches 80 times. It is preferable to set a total variation frequency termination condition that is satisfied when the variation frequency of the first special symbol or the second special symbol reaches 100 in total.

  With such a configuration, the first advantageous game in which the first special symbol lottery is executed and the second advantageous game in which the second special symbol lottery is executed can have different game specifications. The meaning of allowing the player to select a game method can be strengthened. In addition, since the total variation count end condition is set, it is possible to prevent the game in the advantageous state from being excessively executed by the player alternately executing the plurality of advantageous games.

  Further, as for the winning number ending condition, the special figure 1 winning number ending condition that is satisfied when the first advantageous game is executed, and the special figure 2 winning number ending condition that is satisfied when the second advantageous game is executed. Are set to be different from each other, so that the game specifications can be further changed.

  In the fifth embodiment, the end condition of the advantageous state (time saving state) is made different depending on the type of the special symbol, and the game method in the advantageous state (the special symbol for executing the lottery in the advantageous state) is given to the player. By selecting (type), various games are provided to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the end condition of the time-saving state according to the type of jackpot when the jackpot is won. Is preferably varied. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of games in the advantageous state, so that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

  Further, in the above-described fifth embodiment, regardless of which game method is selected during the advantageous state, the expected value of the privilege amount to be given to the player during the period in which the advantageous state is set (that is, (The value obtained by dividing the privilege amount (the number of prize balls) in the case of winning one big hit by the average number of special symbol fluctuations in which the advantageous state is continuously set when the advantageous state is set once) However, as described above, in addition to the special symbol type, in the case of using a configuration in which the termination condition of the advantageous state is changed based on the jackpot type, according to the selected jackpot type, It is preferable that the selection of the first advantageous game is larger than the selection of the second advantageous game so that the expected value of the privilege amount given to the player is larger. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the subsequent game results greatly different depending on the game method selected by the player.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, as a gaming state, a normal state (a special symbol low probability state, a normal symbol low probability state), a time reduction state (a special symbol low probability state, a normal symbol high probability state), a probable change state ( Four states of a special symbol high probability state, a normal symbol high probability state) and a latent state (a special symbol high probability state, a normal symbol low probability state) can be set, and the degree of advantage for the player is different. A plurality of probable change states and a plurality of time saving states having different degrees of advantage can be set.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, as compared with the lottery of the first special symbol, a lottery win by the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be more easily given to the player. I have. More specifically, in the event of a jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, more prize balls can be obtained than in the case of a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery. It is configured such that the rate of transition to the special symbol probable change state is increased (a jackpot type that can pass through the probable change switch 65e3 described later is easily selected).

  Then, as the probability change state, the lottery of the first special symbol is easily performed (that is, relatively disadvantageous), and the lottery of the second special symbol is more easily performed than the probability change state 1 (that is, the lottery of the first special symbol is relatively easy). Probably changed state 2 is provided. In addition, as the time saving state, the lottery of the first special symbol is easily executed (that is, relatively disadvantageous), and the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed as compared with the time saving state 1 (ie, , Relatively advantageous) time saving state 2 is provided.

  As described above, even when the same game state is set, the type of the special symbol in which the lottery is easily performed is configured to be switchable, and the prize balls that can be obtained according to the details of the set game state are set. By varying the amount and the rate of transition to the probable change state, a game can be played aiming at a more advantageous state. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved. The probable change state 1 is a state in which the special symbol high probability state and the ordinary symbol high probability state 1 (time saving state 1) are combined, and the probable variation state 2 is the special symbol high probability state and the ordinary symbol high state. This is a state where probability state 2 (time saving state 2) is combined.

  Further, as will be described in detail later, in the sixth embodiment, a plurality of operation (opening) patterns of the electric accessory 701 (see FIG. 170) in the time saving state are prepared, and the operation (opening) of the electric accessory 701 is set. It is configured such that a special symbol in which a lottery is easily executed during the time saving state can be changed based on the pattern. Then, the operation (opening) pattern of the electric accessory 701 (see FIG. 170) is configured to be variably set based on the winning jackpot type.

  With this configuration, it is possible to change a special symbol in which a lottery (fluctuation) is easily performed during the time saving state based on the winning jackpot type, so that it is possible to provide the player with various game characteristics. it can. Further, in the sixth embodiment, similarly to the above-described embodiments, a plurality of time reduction states for terminating the time reduction state based on the special symbol lottery are established.

  Specifically, based on the special figure 1 change number end condition established based on the change number of the first special symbol and the change number of change times of the second special symbol as the change number end condition satisfied based on the change number of the special symbol Special condition 2 change frequency end condition, which is satisfied, and the total change frequency end condition that is established based on the number of times the first special symbol change frequency and the second special symbol change frequency are added, are set. The number of times of change of the first special symbol is 30 as the condition for ending one change, the number of times of change of the second special symbol is 100 as the condition for ending the change of special figure 2, and the number of changes is 100 for the condition of ending the total number of changes Is set.

  Further, as a winning number terminating condition that is established when a small hit is won in the special symbol lottery, a special figure 1 that is established based on the special figure 1 small hit (small hit A) that is won by the first special symbol lottery. The conditions for ending the number of wins, the conditions for ending the number of special figures 2 that are established based on the special figure 2 small win (small win B) to be won by lottery of the second special symbol, and the conditions for ending the number of special figures 1 The winning number is set to 2 times, and the winning number of times is set to 20 as the special figure 2 winning number end condition.

  With such a configuration, a game in which the time reduction state is likely to end (a lottery time in which the first special symbol lottery (change) is easily performed) in accordance with the type of the special symbol for which the lottery (change) is performed during the time reduction state (Game) and a game in which the time reduction state is difficult to end (a time reduction game in which the lottery (change) of the second special symbol is easily performed) can be set.

  In the sixth embodiment, the time saving end condition set for each special symbol may be such that the end of the time saving state is easily changed depending on the type of the special symbol. Any of the specific examples (shown) used in the above may be adopted, and the small hit probability during the time saving state may be different depending on the special symbol type, or a plurality of types may be selected for the small hit which can be won in the special symbol lottery. In the configuration in which the winning number end condition is set for each small hit type, the probability that any winning number end condition is satisfied may be made different for each special symbol type.

  In other words, in the sixth embodiment, a plurality of advantageous state end conditions (time saving end conditions) for terminating the advantageous state (time saving state), which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, can be set and set. It is configured such that the ease in which the advantageous condition end condition is satisfied differs depending on the type of the state. Then, a plurality of advantageous states having different eases of establishing the advantageous state end condition are shifted based on the winning jackpot type.

  This allows the player to play a game in various advantageous states via a plurality of jackpots. Further, in the sixth embodiment, since the special state in which the normal state can be set only when the jackpot is won a plurality of times from the state in which the normal state is set is provided, a plurality of jackpot winnings can be given to the player. It is possible to enthusiastically play a game so as to shift to the special advantageous state.

  In addition, the sixth embodiment is configured to set a gaming state (for example, a normal state and an advantageous state) in which the degree of expectation for shifting to the special advantageous state that is most advantageous to the player is different. Therefore, when a gaming state (advantageous state) having a high degree of expectation of shifting to the special advantageous state is set, it is possible to easily continue the game, and to enhance the operation of the game.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed. In the first embodiment, the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 is partially changed, and a part of the processing performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and a part of the processing performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are the first embodiment. This is a point that has been changed from the pachinko machine 10 in FIG. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 169, the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 169 is a front view of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 169, in the sixth embodiment, the configuration of the lower area and the right area of the variable display device unit 80 is different from the gaming board 13 (see FIG. 2) of the first embodiment described above. are doing. Specifically, as the entrances that trigger the execution of the special symbol lottery, two first entrances (the first entrance 64a1 and the first right entrance) that trigger the lottery of the first special symbol are executed. In the point that the entrance 64a0) and the second entrance 64b that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol are provided, that is, three entrances that trigger the lottery of the special symbol are provided. Are different.

  As shown in FIG. 169, in the present embodiment, the first entrance 64a1 is located below the variable display device unit 80 in front view, and the second entrance ball is located on the right side in front view of the variable display device unit 80. The opening 64b is provided with a right first entrance 64a2 on the right side in front view of the right second entrance 64b.

  In each of the first entrance 64a1 and the right first entrance 64a2, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed when the ball enters. That is, the first entrance 64a1 and the right first entrance 64a2 are entrances having the same function. On the other hand, the right second entrance 64b has a function different from the above-described two types of entrances because the lottery of the second special symbol is executed when the ball enters. It is.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 169, a first actuation accessory 645a is provided at the right first entrance opening 64a2. The first operating role 645a is in an open state in which a ball can enter (easily) enter the right first entrance 64a2, and cannot enter the right first entrance 64a2 ( It is formed of a pair of blade-shaped members so as to be changed to a closed state which is difficult. The first actor 645a switches to an open state when a ball enters a first actuation port 704 provided inside the sorting prize winning device 700 described later. On the other hand, the first operating accessory 645a that has been switched to the open state is switched to the closed state when one ball enters the ball.

  Similarly, the right second entrance 64b is provided with a second operating accessory 645b. The second actor 645b is also in an open state in which a ball can enter (easily) enter the right second entrance 64b, and cannot enter the right second entrance 64b ( It is formed of a pair of blade-shaped members so as to be changed to a closed state which is difficult. The second actor 645b switches to the open state when a ball enters the second actuation port 707 provided inside the sorting winning device 700. On the other hand, the second actor 645b switched to the open state is switched to the closed state when one ball enters the right second entrance.

  In the sixth embodiment, a first actuating member formed of a pair of blade-shaped members as a regulating member for regulating a ball from entering the right first ball entrance 64a2 and the right second ball entrance 64b. Although the object 645a and the second actor 645b are provided, any object may be used as long as it can change the ease of entry of the ball into each entrance. By doing so, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the ball entry into the entrance is regulated, and the ball is allowed to enter the entrance by being buried in the game board 13. Further, in the sixth embodiment, when the operating accessory is in the closed state, the ball cannot enter the entrance (corresponding to the operating accessory) corresponding to the closed state. Instead of closing the ball until it cannot enter the ball, the ball may be changed so that the ball is harder to enter than in the open state.

  In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the operating accessory 645 is configured to be able to be positioned in two states of an open state and a closed state, but is configured to be variable to three or more states. Is also good. In the sixth embodiment, a configuration is used in which an actor is attached to each of the right first ball entry port 64a2 and the right second ball entry port 64b, but other configurations are used. For example, by changing one actor into the first state, the ball can easily enter one entrance (easier to enter than the other entrance) and the other entrance By making it difficult for the ball to enter the mouth (it is difficult to enter the ball from one of the entrance ports) and changing the state to the second state different from the first state, one of the entrance states is opposite to the above-described first state. It is difficult for the ball to enter the ball entrance (it is difficult to enter the ball from the other entrance), and the ball is easy to enter the other entrance (it is easy to enter the ball from one entrance). May be configured. Thereby, it is possible to change the degree of the ball entering the plurality of entrances in accordance with the operation content of one operating accessory.

  A sorting prize device 700 is provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in a front view. The sorting prize winning device 700 is a device for sorting (entering) a ball that has entered the inside to either the first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707. As described above, when the ball is distributed to the first operating port 704 (enters the ball), the first operating accessory 645a attached to the right first input port 64a2 is switched to the open state, and the right first input ball is entered. The ball can enter the mouth 64a2. On the other hand, if the ball is distributed to the second operating port 707 (enters the ball), the second operating role 645b attached to the right second input port is switched to the open state, and then to the right second input port 64b. And the ball is ready to enter.

  Here, the details of the distribution winning device 700 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 170 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the distribution prize device 700 provided in the right area of the game board 13 of the sixth embodiment. The upper side of the sorting prize winning device 700 is configured so that a ball can flow down. As shown in FIG. 81, since the upper surface side of the sorting prize winning device 700 is inclined to the lower left direction when viewed from the front, the sphere reaching the upper surface of the sorting prize winning device 700 basically flows down to the lower left direction. I do. An electric accessory 701 is provided on the upper right side of the sorting prize winning device 700. The electric accessory 701 has an open state (immersion state) in which a ball can enter (easily) into the sorting prize winning device 700 and a closed state (projection state) in which the ball cannot enter (difficult). ) And are switchable. The electric accessory 701 is set to an open state when a win is made by a normal symbol lottery.

  The downstream side of the electric accessory 701 is branched into two flow paths, a first flow path 703 and a second flow path 706. Since the first working port 704 is provided on the downstream side of the first flow path 703, the sphere flowing down the first flow path 703 enters the first working port 704. On the other hand, since the second working port 707 is provided on the downstream side of the second flow path 706, the sphere flowing down the second flow path 706 enters the second working port 707. At a position where the first flow path 703 and the second flow path 706 are branched, a flow path through which a ball that has entered the inside of the sorting prize device 700 via the electric accessory 701 flows down is switched. A variable flow path 702 is provided. The switching valve (variable flow path) 702 switches between a first switching state in which the ball flows down to the first flow path 703 and a second switching state in which the ball flows down to the second flow path 706 (sliding displacement). )be able to. In the first switching state, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 slides to the left in front view to close the upstream side of the second flow path and open the first flow path only. Proceeds to the first flow path. On the other hand, the second switching state is a state in which the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 slides to the right in front view to close the upstream side of the first flow path and open only the first flow path. , The sphere proceeds to the second flow path.

  The switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is basically set to the first switching state, and a predetermined period (eg, 1.5 seconds after the normal symbol hit state) after the normal symbol hit ) Is switched from the first switching state to the second switching state based on the lapse of ()). Further, when a specific period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after switching to the second switching state, switching to the first switching state is performed again.

  If the ball can enter the distribution prize device 700 during the second switching state, the ball can flow down to the second operating port 707. When the ball enters the second operation port 707, the second operation accessory 645b is set to the open state as described above, and the ball can enter the right second ball entry port 64b. That is, it is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol having a high probability of giving the special symbol probable change state in the case of the jackpot, which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, the player can pay attention to the flowing direction (whether flowing down the first flow path 703 or flowing down the second flow path 707) of the ball that has entered the sorting prize winning device 700. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 170, a first operation mechanism 705 is provided inside the first operation port 704. The first operating port 704 is formed of a known non-motorized accessory, that is, switching the first operating accessory 645a to the open state based on the weight of the ball that has entered the first operating port 704. Can be. Further, when the first operating accessory 645a is in the open state, the first operating accessory 645a can be switched to the closed state based on the weight of the ball that has entered the right first entrance opening 64a2.

  On the other hand, a second operation mechanism 708 is provided inside the second operation port 707. The second operation mechanism 708 has the same configuration as the first operation mechanism 705. That is, it is possible to switch the second operating accessory 645b to the open state based on the weight of the ball that has entered the second operating port 707. In addition, when the second actor 645b is in the open state, the second actor 645b can be switched to the closed state based on the weight of the ball that has entered the right second entrance 64b.

  As described above, by causing the ball to enter the sorting prize winning device 700, the ball is allowed to enter the first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707, and the first operating agent 645a or the second operating port The second actor 645b can be switched to the open state. As described above, if the big win in the special symbol 2 lottery is more advantageous than the special symbol 1 lottery, the ball enters the first operation port 704 or the second operation port 707. Can be noticed. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 171, the correspondence between the operation (opening pattern) of the motorized accessory 701 and the switching operation of the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 in the distribution winning device 700 will be described. As shown in FIG. 171, two types (open pattern A and open pattern B) are provided for the operation of the electric accessory 701 (open pattern). When the opening pattern A is set, the electric accessory 701 is set in the open state for a relatively long time (ie, for one second) immediately after the start of the normal symbol hit, and then is set in the closed state for 1.4 seconds. Is done. Then, after the open state for 0.1 second is set, the hit state ends. In the one second opening period, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the first switching state, so that the balls that have entered the distribution winning device 700 during this period are distributed to the first operating port 704. . On the other hand, during the opening period of 0.1 second, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the second switching state. It is distributed to. However, since it is difficult to make the ball enter during the opening period of 0.1 second, in many cases, the ball entering the distribution device 700 while the opening pattern A is set is: The ball is distributed to the first operation port 704, and the right first ball entry port 64a1 is opened. Therefore, when the opening pattern A is set, it is relatively disadvantageous for the player.

  On the other hand, when the open pattern B is set, the electric accessory 701 is set to the open state for a very short time (ie, 0.1 second) immediately after the start of the normal symbol, and then closed for 1.4 seconds. Set to state. Then, the hit state ends after the open state for a relatively long time (that is, one second) is set. During the opening period of 0.1 second, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the first switching state, so that the ball that has entered the sorting prize winning device 700 during this time passes to the first operating port 704. Can be sorted. However, as described above, it is difficult to make a ball enter during an extremely short opening period of 0.1 second. On the other hand, in the opening period of one second, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the second switching state, so that the ball that has entered the sorting prize device 700 during this time passes to the second operating port 707. Can be sorted. Therefore, in many cases, the ball that has entered the sorting device 700 while the opening pattern B is set is sorted to the second operating port 707, and the right second ball entry port 64b is opened. Therefore, when the opening pattern B is set, it is relatively advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the degree of advantage for the player can be made different depending on the set opening pattern, so that the player can be interested in the opening pattern every time a normal symbol is hit. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved. In the present embodiment, the opening pattern to be set is determined according to the game state. That is, in the normal state (non-probable variable non-time saving state), the time saving state 1, and the probable variable state 1, when a normal symbol is hit, the opening pattern A is set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701. On the other hand, in the time saving state 2 and the probable change state 2, the open pattern B is set when a normal drawing is hit. Therefore, in the time saving state 2 and the probability change state 2, the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed, which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, in the time saving state 2 and the probability change state 2, it is difficult for the player to execute the second special symbol lottery, which is disadvantageous for the player. As described above, the type of the special symbol that is easily executed according to the game state can be made different, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 169, the description will be continued. At the lower right of the game board 13, a variable winning device 65 is provided, and a specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of a horizontally long rectangular shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won by a jackpot lottery performed due to a ball entry (winning) into the first entrance 64a1, the right first entrance 64a2, or the right second entrance 64b, After a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to become a big hit stop symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed to show the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The structure of the variable winning device 65 is the same as that of the V winning device 650 (see FIGS. 4 to 6) in the first embodiment described above, and is the same as that described in the first embodiment, but for convenience of explanation. In the sixth embodiment, description will be made by attaching a numerical value of “65” to a code with a numerical value of “650” in FIGS. Although not described in detail, a game ball that has entered the variable ball-entering device 65 during the jackpot is a probable change switch 65e3 (a switch used in place of the V switch 650e3 of the first embodiment described above). ), A probable change state is given after the end of the big hit, and in this respect, the V winning device 650 of the first embodiment described above is different in function. The other configurations and functions are the same, and a description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 173 is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 174 (a) is included in the first hit type selection table 202b according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 174 (b) shows the contents of the special figure 1 selection table 202b2 included in the first hit type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment. FIG. It should be noted that the special figure 1 selection table 202b1 is referred to for determining a jackpot type when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 is selected for the second special symbol lottery. Is referred to in order to determine a jackpot type when a jackpot is hit.

  First, the special figure 1 selection table 202b1 included in the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 174 (a) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the special figure 1 selection table 202b1. As shown in FIG. 174 (a), in the special figure 1 selection table 202b1, the selected big hit type is defined for each value of the first hit type counter C2. Specifically, the jackpot A is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “0 to 9”. This jackpot A is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is four rounds, the probability variable solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that can pass through the probability variable switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and the time-saving state 1 is given after the jackpot. . The pattern that can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is, for example, that the probability change solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is set to ON for 5 seconds based on the start of four rounds (the provision of the probability change switch 65e3 in the variable winning device 65). (Opened flow path is opened). Since the player continuously hits the ball toward the variable winning device 65 at the big hit, one or more balls can be caused to flow down to the certainty change switch 65e3 in 5 seconds. When the ball passes the probability change switch 65e3 at the jackpot, a probability change state is given after the jackpot.

  In other words, after the jackpot, a probable change state 1 (a gaming state in which the special symbol high probability state and the normal symbol high probability state 1 (time saving state 1) are combined) is given. On the other hand, when the jackpot ends without the ball passing through the probable change switch 65e3 during the jackpot because the player did not hit the ball during the jackpot, the time saving state 1 (special symbol low probability state, ordinary symbol) High probability state 1) is assigned. The jackpot A is likely to be in the probability change state, but the probability change state to be given is the probability change state 1 and the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed during the probability change state, so the jackpot type to which the probability change state 2 is likely to be given ( It is disadvantageous compared to the jackpot B and the jackpot F).

  The big hit B is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “10 to 49”. The jackpot B has four rounds, and the probability variable solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and the time saving state 2 (normal symbol high probability state 2) after the jackpot. Is the jackpot type to which is given. When the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 at the jackpot, a special symbol probability change state 2 (special symbol high probability state, ordinary symbol high probability state 2) is given after the jackpot.

  That is, after the big hit, the probable change state 2 in which the probable change state of the special symbol and the time saving state 2 are combined is given. On the other hand, if the jackpot ends without the ball passing through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot because the player did not hit the ball during the jackpot, only the time saving state 2 is given after the jackpot B ends. The jackpot B is one of the most advantageous jackpot types in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot, because the jackpot B easily transitions to the probable change state 2 which is the most advantageous for the player. On the other hand, on the surface of the prize ball, it is disadvantageous in the sphere of a prize because it is less than the case where the jackpot has been won by the lottery of the second special symbol.

  The big hit C is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “50 to 94”. This jackpot C is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is four rounds, the probability variable solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that cannot pass through the probability variable switch 65e during the jackpot, and the time-saving state 1 is given after the jackpot. is there. The pattern that cannot pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is, for example, that the probability change solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is set to ON for 0.5 seconds based on the start of four rounds (the probability change switch in the variable winning device 65). 65e3 is opened). Even if four rounds are started and the ball is entered at the same time that the specific winning opening 65a is opened, the ball cannot reach the flow path provided with the positive variable solenoid 65k within 0.5 seconds, The flow path is closed before the ball reaches the variable solenoid 65k. Therefore, in the big hit C, the special symbol change state is not given after the big hit. In other words, the jackpot C is a jackpot type in which the special symbol probable state is not given, and the time-saving state 1 in which the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to execute is given, and the number of prize balls is also the second special symbol. Since the number of hits is smaller than that in the case of a jackpot in a lottery, the jackpot type is the most disadvantageous for the player.

  The big hit D is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “95 to 94”. This jackpot D is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is four rounds, the probability variable solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that cannot pass through the probability variable switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and the time-saving state 2 is given after the jackpot. is there. The probability change state is not given, and the prize ball is also smaller than in the case of winning in the second special symbol lottery. However, since the time reduction state 2 in which the second special symbol lottery is easily executed is given, the big hit D Is more advantageous than the jackpot C.

  Next, the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 will be described with reference to FIG. 174 (b). FIG. 174 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the special figure 2 selection table 202b2. As shown in FIG. 174 (b), the special jackpot type to be selected is also specified in the selection table 202b2 for special figure 2 for each value of the first hit type counter C2, similarly to the selection table 202b1 for special figure 1. ing. Specifically, the big hit E is associated with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 from “0 to 19”. This jackpot E is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds, the probability variable solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that can pass through the probability variable switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and the time-saving state 1 is given after the jackpot. . Although the jackpot E is likely to be in the probability change state, the probability change state to be given is the probability change state 1 and the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed during the probability change state, so the jackpot type to which the probability change state 2 is likely to be given ( The state after the end of the jackpot is disadvantageous compared to the jackpot B and the jackpot F).

  The big hit F is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “20 to 79”. This jackpot F is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is fifteen rounds, the probability variable solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that can pass through the probability variable switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and the time-saving state 2 is given after the jackpot. . The jackpot F is easily one of the most advantageous jackpot types in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot, because the jackpot F easily transitions to the probable change state 2 which is the most advantageous for the player. Also, on the prize ball side, it is possible to obtain a larger amount of prize balls than in the case where the lottery is won by the lottery of the first special symbol. Therefore, the jackpot F is a jackpot that is most advantageous for the player.

  The big hit G is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “80 to 84”. The jackpot G has a round number of fifteen rounds. The jackpot G is a jackpot type in which a jackpot solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that cannot pass through the jackpot switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and the time-saving state 1 is given after the jackpot. is there. Thus, the jackpot G is a jackpot type in which the special symbol probable state is not given and the time saving state 1 in which the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed is given, so that the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is the most disadvantageous. On the other hand, on the prize ball side, it is more advantageous than a jackpot due to the lottery of the first special symbol.

  The jackpot H is associated with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of “85 to 94”. This jackpot H is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is fifteen rounds, the probability variable solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that cannot pass the probability variable switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and the time-saving state 2 is given after the jackpot. is there. Although the probability change state is not given, the time saving state 2 in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed is given. Therefore, the big hit H is more advantageous than the big hit C and the big hit G. In addition, even with a prize sphere, it is more advantageous than a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, various jackpot types are provided. Each jackpot type differs in the number of rounds and the game state after the jackpot, so that when a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery, the player can pay attention to which jackpot type it is. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved. Depending on whether the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery wins, the number of award balls that can be obtained and the ratio of the jackpot type that becomes an operation pattern that can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 are determined. Is different. In other words, a player who wins the lottery in the second special symbol lottery can obtain more prize balls, which is advantageous for the player. In the case of a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, the ratio of the big hit types (big hits E and F), which are the operation patterns that can pass through the probability change switch 65e3, is 80%. In the special symbol lottery, the ratio of the jackpot types (jackpots A and B) that are operation patterns that can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is 50%. Therefore, it is easy to be in a probable change state when a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol. Therefore, since it is possible to expect the player to win a big win in the second special symbol lottery, it is determined whether the lottery to be executed is the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery. Pay attention to the game. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the type of the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is configured to be variable according to the type of the winning jackpot. More specifically, a normal symbol high probability state 1 and a normal symbol high probability state 2 can be set. Then, in addition to the normal state as the game state, a probable state 1 in which the ordinary symbol high probability state 1 is set for the special symbol high probability state, a probable state 2 in which the ordinary symbol high probability state 2 is set, and a special state It is possible to set a total of five types of gaming states, namely, the time reduction state 1 in which the normal symbol high probability state 1 is set for the symbol low probability state and the time reduction state 2 in which the normal symbol high probability state 2 is set. Make up.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 172, a method of shifting the gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 172, in the sixth embodiment, five game states are provided, and as described above, each time a big hit occurs, a new game state is set after the end of the big hit. As shown in FIG. 172, when the jackpot A is reached in the normal state (non-probable non-time saving state), basically (unless the launch of the ball is stopped during the jackpot), the state shifts to the probable state 1 and the jackpot B is reached. Then, the state shifts to the probable change state 2. Further, when the jackpot C is reached, the state shifts to the time saving state 1, and when the jackpot D is reached, the state shifts to the time reduction state 2.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 172, when the gaming state is the time reduction state 1 (the time reduction state in which the second special symbol lottery is difficult to be executed) and the probable change state 1 (the probability change state in which the second special symbol lottery is hard to execute). Performs the same state transition as the normal state (non-probability variable non-time saving state). Although illustration is omitted, in the time saving state 1 or the probable change state 1, when a lottery of a special symbol for the number of time savings is executed without a jackpot, the state shifts to a normal state.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 172, when the gaming state is the time saving state 2 (the time saving state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed), when the big hit E occurs, the state shifts to the positive change state 1 and when the big hit F occurs. Then, the state shifts to the most advantageous probabilistic change state 2. When the jackpot G is reached, the state shifts to the time reduction state 1, and when the jackpot H is reached, the state shifts to the time reduction state 2 (loops the time reduction state 2). Also, as shown in FIG. 172, the same state transition as the time saving state 2 is performed in the probability change state 2 (the probability change state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed). Although illustration is omitted, in the time saving state 2 or the probable change state 2, if a lottery of a special symbol for the number of time savings is executed without a jackpot, the state shifts to a normal state.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 173, the RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203za, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b, and a special symbol 2 reserved ball. Number counter 203ab, ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203zb, probability change counter 203zg, probability change setting flag 203zs, probability change pass counter 203zt1, winning number counter 203zt2, operation counter 203zt3, counter buffer 203zh, remaining ball timer flag 203zt4, remaining ball timer 203zt5. , A variable probability validity flag 203zt6, a variable probability validity timer 203zt7, a discharge number counter 203zt8, a time saving medium time counter 203zu, a time saving identification flag 203zx, a big hit flag 203zi, and the other memory area 203. At least it has.

  Among these, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab are the same as those in the first embodiment described above. Since they are the same, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203za has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 (through gate), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (first holding area to first holding area). Among the vacant areas (four areas), the areas are stored in ascending order of the area numbers (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203za is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the winnings stored in other reserved areas are the same as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Is shifted to a reserved area with a smaller area number. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203zb sets the maximum number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67. This is a counter that counts up to four times. The initial value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball counter 203zb is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal entrance 67 and the number of retaining balls in the variable display increases, one is added to the maximum value of four. Is done. On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203zb is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed.

  If the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 and the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203zb (the number of times M of the variable display in the normal symbol is held) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 will be changed. Obtained, the obtained data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203za. On the other hand, when the ball passes the normal entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203zb is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203za.

  The probability change counter 203zg is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability change state (special symbol high probability state). If the value of the probability variation counter 203zg is greater than 0, the pachinko machine 10 Indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol normal state (special symbol low probability state) if the value of the probability variable counter 203zg is 0. The initial value of the probability change counter 203zg is set to zero, and the main controller 110 closes the specific entrance (large opening) 65a or the second specific entrance 650a in the final round of the jackpot ( In other words, when the probability change flag 203r, which will be described later, is turned on at the end of the jackpot, that is, when a game ball enters the probability change mouth 900a and a game ball is detected by a probability change switch (not shown), 100 is set. Is done.

  In the sixth embodiment, the ball flows down in a specific area (the area where the probability change switch 65e3 detects the ball) during the jackpot game, so that the probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot game (probability change). The predetermined value is set in the counter 203zg), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the probable change state is automatically set after the end of the jackpot game according to the type of the hit jackpot. You may.

  When the special symbol 1 change start process or the special symbol 2 change start process is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol 1 change start process or the special symbol 2 change start process, the value of the probability change counter 203zg is referred to, and if the value is greater than 0, the special change counter 203zg is set based on the first random number table for high probability. If the value of the probability change counter 203zg is 0 while the symbol lottery is performed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table for low probability.

  As described above, the counter buffer 203zh is a buffer area used for counting each counter value.

  The jackpot flag 203zi is a flag indicating whether a jackpot has occurred. When the big hit flag 203zi is on, a big hit game in which the distribution prize device 650 or the variable prize device 165 is set to the open state by the big hit control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is executed.

  The probability change setting flag 203zs is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability change state after the jackpot game. In the present pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probability change state is determined by whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game (the probability change switch 65e3 detects the game ball during the jackpot game). Or not). Here, when a game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change setting flag 203zs is set to ON. On the other hand, it is set to off based on the fact that the probability change flag 203r is set to on. The probability change setting flag 203zs is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to a state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is turned on (when the power is turned on). In the initialized state, it is set to off.

  The probability change passage counter 203zt1 is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the probability change switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (13 rounds in the jackpot B in the present embodiment). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have won the first variable winning opening 65 have been ejected, based on the sum of the probable variable passage counter 203zt1 and the ejection number counter 203zt8 described later. The probable variable passage counter 203zt1 is updated by being incremented by one when passing through the probable variable switch 65e3. In addition, after performing a process of determining whether the number of game balls that have won the first variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected balls match, the initial value is reset to “0”. Note that the probability change passage counter 203zt1 is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The winning number counter 203zt2 is a counter for counting the number of gaming balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 provided in the first variable winning device 65, the value is incremented by one and updated. On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winnings in the first variable prize device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203zt2) and the number of discharged (the total value of the discharging number counter 203zt8 and the positive variable passing counter 203zt1) are displayed. Are determined to match, and then reset to the initial value “0”. The value of the winning number counter 203zt2 is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The operation counter 203zt3 is a counter for counting (counting) the time during which the flow path solenoid (positive-change solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In the present pachinko machine 10, at the big hit B, the flow path solenoid 65k is set on for 5 seconds based on the start of the 13th round, and at the big hit C, the flow path solenoid 65k is turned on for 0.5 seconds based on the start of the 13th round. Is set. In the operation counter 203zt3, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as the start data of the 13th round in the big hit B, and a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the big hit C. On the other hand, in the prize-winning process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is updated by being subtracted by one. In addition, based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203zt3 is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off. The operation counter 203zt3 is backed up when the power is turned off, and in an initialized state, the initial value 0 is set. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203zt3 and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, it is possible to control the winning of the probability change switch 65e3 according to the type of big hit.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203zt4 is a flag indicating that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 has been closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203zt4 is set to ON, it indicates that the open / close door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 has been set from the open state to the closed state in the first round. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203zt4 to ON, the remaining ball timer 203zt5 described later is added and updated one by one. The remaining ball timer 203zt5 is a counter for determining the time since the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and determines whether the time required for the game balls in the first variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. This is a counter to perform.

  The remaining ball timer 203zt5 determines that when the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable prize device 65 is closed after one preset round is completed, the game ball that has won the first variable prize device 65 is discharged. Is a counter for determining whether the time necessary for the operation has elapsed. In the present embodiment, the time required until the game ball that has won the first variable winning device 65 is discharged is 2 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in advance by the remaining ball timer 203zt5. It is set as the upper limit. Based on the upper limit value (3 seconds in this embodiment) of the remaining ball timer 203zt5, it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the first variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged coins match. You. If they do not match, an error command is set and a notification to that effect is given. Therefore, it can be notified at an early stage that game balls are jammed in the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, the game ball is illegally left in the first variable winning device 65, a shock or the like is given at the start timing of the 13th round, and the game ball reaches the switching member 65h earlier than it actually is. Even if there is, it is possible to suppress the illegality of passing the game ball through the probable change switch 65e3.

  When the winning number and the discharge number do not match, the dedicated flag is set to ON, and when the flag is ON, the certain change setting flag 203zs is set even if the game ball passes through the certain change switch 65e3. It may be configured not to be set to ON. By comprising in this way, it can suppress that a probability variation | change game state is provided illegally.

  The probability change enable flag 203zt6 is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off. When the probability change valid flag 203zt6 is set to ON, it is necessary for the game ball flowing into the special discharge flow path 65e2 to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 based on the fact that the flow path solenoid 65k is ON. It is less than an hour. In other words, this indicates that the game ball passes through the certainty changing switch 65e3 during a normal period.

  The probable change valid timer 203zt7 is a counter for counting the time since the above-described probable change valid flag 203zt6 was set to ON. After the probable change valid timer 203zt7 turns off the flow path solenoid 65k, it is possible to determine a period required to normally pass the probable change switch 65e3. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball that has entered the special discharge channel 65e2 to pass through the positive change switch 65e3 is one second. The upper limit value of the probability change valid timer 203zt7 is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds. After that, even if the signal passes through the probability change switch 65e3, it is determined to be illegal and not to be passed.

  Thereby, in a state where the switching member 65h is not illegally guided to the special discharge channel 65e2, the switching member 65h is caused to enter the special discharge channel 65e2 to allow the game ball to pass through the probable change switch 65e3, or a piano wire or the like from below the probable change switch 65e3. , It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud such as pushing up the game ball and causing the magnetic sensor to be mistakenly detected as passing by a radio wave or the like.

  The discharge number counter 203zt8 is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 in one round. The number-of-discharges counter 203zt8 is reset to 0, which is the initial value, after the number of game balls that have won the first variable winning device 65 and the number of discharges are determined.

  The time reduction counter 203zu is a counter for counting the number of times the remaining special symbols change in the time reduction gaming state. If the probability change setting flag is off at the end of the big hit game, 100 is set in the time reduction counter 203zu. That is, in the present embodiment, if the probability change state is not set after the jackpot game, the game shifts to the time saving state of 100 times.

  The time saving identification flag 203zx is a flag for identifying the type of the time saving state. If the time saving identification flag 203zx is set to 0, it means that the time saving state is 1 (probable change state 1). Note that, similarly to the time saving state 1, the time saving identification flag 203zx is set to 0 even in the normal state where the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed. On the other hand, when 1 is set in the time-saving identification flag 203zx, it means that it is in the time-saving state 2 (probable change state 2). When a normal symbol is hit, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701 is set with reference to the time saving identification flag 203zx. Specifically, when the time saving identification flag 203zx is 0 and a normal symbol hits, the opening pattern A is set, so that the ball enters the sorting and winning prize device 700 during the opening period of the electric accessory 701. By doing so, the ball enters the first operating port 704, and the ball enters the left first entry port 64a2.

  On the other hand, when the time-saving identification flag 203zx is 1, when a normal symbol is hit, the opening pattern B is set. Therefore, the ball is inserted into the sorting and winning prize device 700 during the opening period of the electric accessory 701. The ball enters the second operation port 707, and the ball enters the left second entry port 64b. At the time saving identification flag 203zx, a value corresponding to the time saving state given after the big hit at the end of the big hit is set. In addition, 0 is set when the time reduction period of the ordinary symbol ends (that is, when the counter 203zu during the time reduction becomes 0).

  It should be noted that the reason why the time saving identification flag 203zx is set to 0 in the normal state (non-probable variable non-working time state) is that an irregular game in which a ball is hit to the right side of the game board 13 in a non-working time state (so-called right-handed). This is to suppress the method. That is, if the time saving identification flag 203zx is set to 1 in the normal state, the player may always make a right-handed attempt to execute the advantageous second special symbol lottery. In the normal state, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is low, so it is difficult to make the ball enter the right second entrance 64b. Since it is in a probable change state, the merit in the case of a jackpot increases. Therefore, there is a possibility that an irregular game method is induced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the time saving identification flag 203zx is set to 0 in the normal state, so that the probability of hitting the symbol is low and the open pattern A is set even if the hit occurs, Can be in a state where there is no merit of performing right-handed by the player. Therefore, in the normal state, the player can be caused to perform a left-hand hit, so that an irregular playing method can be prevented (suppressed).

<Control Process of Main Control Device in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The sixth embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol store the holding ball, and the height of the special symbol after the big hit is over. The difference is that the probability state can be set.

  First, with reference to FIG. 175, the special symbol variation process 6 (Z104 in FIG. 175) executed in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation processing 6 (Z104 in FIG. 175).

  In the special symbol variation process 6 (Z104 in FIG. 175), first, it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (Z201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (Z201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (Z201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changed. If it is not fluctuating (Z202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of times N1 of the variable display is retained in the special symbol 1) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab (the variation in the special symbol 2) The number of display suspensions N2) is acquired (Z203).

  Next, it is determined whether or not there is a sphere of change display in the special symbol. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is greater than 0 (Z204). If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is 0, it is determined. If it is determined (Z204: No), it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is greater than 0 (Z209), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is determined. ) Is determined to be 0 (Z209: No), it is determined that there is no change-display-holding ball in the special symbol, and the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is greater than 0 (Z204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is subtracted by 1 (Z205). ), A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab changed by the calculation is set (Z206). The set number-of-balls command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1101) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. Is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball count command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 203ab from the reserved ball count command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter of the RAM 223. I do.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of Z206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa is shifted (Z207). In the process of Z207, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol 2 change start process for starting the change display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed. The detailed description of the special symbol 2 change start process is omitted.

  When the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is determined to be 0 (Z204: No), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is determined to be greater than 0 (Z209: Yes), the same process as the above-described process for the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is performed on the reserved ball of the special symbol 1. Note that the detailed description of the special symbol 1 change start process is omitted.

  In the process of Z202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (Z214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and the fluctuation time is determined. If has not elapsed (Z214: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (Z215), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of Z214, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (Z214: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (Z216). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol 2 change start process (Z208) or a special symbol 1 change start process (Z213). When the special symbol 2 change start process or the special symbol 1 change start process is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa or the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Then, the stop symbol of the special symbol 2 or the special symbol 1 is set.

  After the processing of Z216 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the display of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process (the current lottery result) is displayed. It is determined whether it is a symbol jackpot (Z217). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (Z217: Yes), the jackpot flag 203zi is set on (Z218), a jackpot start command is set (Z220), the time reduction counter 203zu, and the variable counter 203zg. Is reset (Z271), and the process proceeds to Z222.

  According to the jackpot flag 203zi set to ON in the process of Z218, the process in the jackpot game is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 52) of the main process (see FIG. 51). The specific description is the same as that of the above-described first embodiment, and thus the description is omitted.

  The jackpot start command set in the process of Z220 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. Is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the jackpot start command, it transmits the display jackpot start command to the display control device 114. As a result, a display indicating the start of the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player can be made aware of the transition to the special game state.

  On the other hand, in the process of Z217, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (Z217: No), the same time saving number update process (see S219 in FIG. 38) as in the first embodiment described above is executed, and the special The information is updated with respect to the change frequency end condition that is satisfied based on the symbol change frequency. After the process of S219, it is next determined whether or not the value of the probability change counter 203zg is greater than 0 (Z223). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203zg is greater than 0 (Z223: Yes), the probability variation is determined. The value of the counter 203zg is decremented by 1 (Z224), and the same processes in S220 and S221 as in the first embodiment are executed, and the process proceeds to Z222. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203zg is 0 (Z223: No), the process of Z224 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S220.

  In the process of Z222, a stop command is set to synchronize the lighting of the LED, which is the display mode of the first symbol display device 37, corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of Z216, and the fluctuation stop of the third symbol display device 81. Is performed (Z222). When the process of Z222 is completed, the present process ends.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in the special symbol variation process 6 of the sixth embodiment, it is determined whether or not a small hit has been won as in the first embodiment described above. In the small win, the small hit use time saving update process (see FIG. 41) corresponding to the winning small win is executed. With such a configuration, as in the above-described embodiments, the time-saving state that is satisfied when the number of times of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times is a condition for ending the time-saving state (the high probability state of the ordinary symbol). In addition to the condition (variation number end condition), it is possible to set a time reduction end condition (win number end condition) which is satisfied when the number of small hits in the special symbol lottery reaches a predetermined number.

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the timing at which the time saving state ends. In the sixth embodiment, as the game state set after the end of the big hit, a special symbol high probability state other than the normal symbol high probability state can be set. Then, the high probability state of the special symbol is set such that the predetermined number of times of change of the special symbol (the value set in the probability change counter zg) is set to the upper limit. As described above, when a game state (probable change state) other than the time saving state (normal symbol high probability state) is set as the game state advantageous to the player, the game state (probable change state) ends. You may comprise so that conditions may be set.

  In this case, as a condition for terminating the probable change state, a probable change end condition different from the above-described time reduction end condition for terminating the time-saving state may be set. It is preferable to set the number of wins as a condition for ending the change.

  Note that it is preferable that the requirement that causes the probable change termination condition to be satisfied and the requirement that causes the time reduction termination condition be satisfied be different from each other. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to know which of the probability-change ending conditions and the time-saving ending conditions is satisfied first. Therefore, for example, when the time saving termination condition is satisfied (when shifting from a state in which the special symbol lottery is easily executed to a state in which it is difficult to perform the lottery), it is determined whether or not the probable change termination condition has already been satisfied (in the special symbol lottery). It can be assumed that the state has shifted from a state where the symbol is likely to win a jackpot to a state where it is difficult to win).

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the game state that is advantageous to the player as the game state includes a time-saving state (a normal symbol high-probability state) and a probable change state (a special symbol high-probability state). , And can be set, and as the end condition of each game state, a change number end condition (a time saving state change number end condition, a probable change state change number end condition) that is satisfied when the number of changes of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number. ), In addition to the above, the number-of-winning-terms ending condition (the time-saving-state ending number ending condition, the probable-change-state ending number ending condition) that is established when the number of winnings in the predetermined small hit reaches the predetermined number is set. Therefore, unlike the gambling ability that merely determines whether the game state shifts from a gaming state advantageous to the player to an unfavorable gaming state, the end of the time saving state (establishment of the time saving end condition) and the end of the probable change state (probable change end condition) Holds) and It can transition to various gaming state by.

  Therefore, for the player, one end condition (for example, a time-saving end condition) is satisfied before the other end condition (for example, a probable change end condition), and after one end condition is satisfied, the other end condition is satisfied. A period until the condition is satisfied (for example, a latent period) may be configured to be a game period most advantageous to the player. Thereby, it is possible to provide a new game property in which a player plays a game while expecting that an end condition for ending a game state more advantageous to the player than a normal state which is one of the game states is satisfied. .

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, as described above, in accordance with the set time saving state (normal symbol high probability state), a time saving state (probable change state) in which the lottery of the first special symbol is mainly executed, A time-saving state (probable change state) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed can be set. The lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. Then, from the normal state, it is easy to shift to the time reduction state (probable change state) in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed, and from the time reduction state (probable change state) in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed. It is configured such that it is easy to shift to the time-saving state (probable change state) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed.

  With such a configuration, by shifting a plurality of game states through a jackpot or the like, a more advantageous game state can be set by the player, and thus the most advantageous game state for the player Expectations can be given to playing games in the state. Further, in this case, in the state where the probability change state (probability change state 2) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed is set, only when the time saving end condition is satisfied before the probability change end condition, It is preferable that the game state is shifted to the most advantageous game state for the player.

  As a result, a gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set based on the winning of the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, and further, in a state where the gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set, the gaming state is set. When a specific end condition for terminating the game is satisfied, the game state shifts to a more advantageous game state, and when a condition other than the specific end condition is satisfied, the game state can shift to an unfavorable game state. . Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to always play a game with a sense of tension.

  Note that specific end conditions for ending a game state advantageous to a player and end conditions other than the specific end conditions used in the sixth embodiment are described in each of the above-described embodiments. The various termination conditions described above may be applied, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the jackpot control process 6 (Z1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 6 (Z1105). The jackpot control process 6 (Z1105) is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.

  In the big hit control process 6 (Z1105), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 203zi is turned on (Z1301). In the process of Z1301, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203zi is off (Z1301: No), the big hit control does not need to be performed, and thus this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z1301 that the big hit flag 203zi is on (Z1301: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is a big hit start timing (Z1371). If it is determined in the processing of Z1371 that it is the start timing of the jackpot (Z1371: Yes), an opening command is set (Z1372), and this processing ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of Z1371 that the timing is not the jackpot start timing (Z1371: No), it is then determined whether or not it is the start timing of a new round (Z1374). If it is determined in the process of Z1374 that it is the start timing of a new round (Z1374: Yes), the setting of the opening / closing operation of the first specific winning opening 64a and the setting of the switching operation of the positive change solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k. Is performed (Z1375), and this process ends.

  Here, when the jackpot operation setting process 6 (Z1375) is executed, first, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the set opening scenario, and based on the read opening scenario (data). The switching operation of the flow path solenoid (positive change solenoid) 65k is set. Then, an opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set.

  In this way, each operation of the first variable prize winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power interruption occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle Such problems can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z1374 that it is not the start timing of a new round (Z1374: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the timing of the switching operation of the positive-variable solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k (Z1376). ).

  In the process of Z1376, if it is determined that it is the timing of the switching operation of the probable variable solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k (Z1376: Yes), the state of the probabilistic solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is switched (Z1377), and The process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of Z1376, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the switching operation of the probable variable solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k (Z1376: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing of starting the ending effect (Z1378). ).

  In the process of Z1378, if it is determined that it is the ending effect start timing (Z1378: Yes), the ending process 6 is executed (Z1379), and this process ends. The details of the ending process 6 (Z1379) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of Z1378, when it is determined that it is not the timing to start the ending effect (Z1378: No), the winning process 6 is executed (Z1380), the abnormal process 6 is executed (Z1381), and this process is ended.

  When the prize-winning process 6 (Z1380) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a round is valid. The round valid period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the open / close door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that the current time is outside the round validity period, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current time is within the round validity period, it is determined whether the vehicle has passed the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a. When it is determined that the signal has passed the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a, the winning number counter 203zt2 is updated by adding 1 to determine whether the value of the winning number counter 203zt2 is 10 or more.

  When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203zt2 is 10 or more, the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a is set because the end condition in the current round game is satisfied, and the remaining time is set. The ball timer flag 203zt4 is set to ON. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203zt4 to ON, it can be determined that the ball has been thrown since the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed.

  As described above, in the winning process 6, during one round game in the jackpot game, a process of determining whether or not the round game end condition is satisfied is executed. Further, a process of appropriately determining whether or not a ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit game is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation counter 203zt3 is greater than 0. If it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203zt3 is greater than 0, the value of the operation counter 203zt3 is updated by −1. Then, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the probability changing switch 65e3.

  When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the certainty changing switch 65e3, the value is updated by adding 1 to the value of the certainty changing passage counter 203zt1. The probable change setting flag 203zs is set to ON. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the operation counter 203zt3 is 0. If it is determined that the operation counter 203zt3 is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off, the probability change valid flag 203zt6 is turned on, and this processing ends. Here, by setting the probable change valid flag 203zt6 to ON, when the game ball remaining in the special discharge channel 65e2 passes the probable change switch 65e3 even after the switching member 65h is switched, the probable change is performed. It can be controlled so that a game is set.

  Thus, if the probability change valid timer 203zt7 is not at the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3, so that the probability change game state can be set in consideration of the ball elapse time. In addition, since there is an upper limit for the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to suppress the probability change gaming state from being granted by passing the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3 illegally.

  Next, as an abnormal process 6 (S1381), a process of monitoring whether a game ball is illegally passed through the probable change switch 65e3 is executed.

  Next, the ending process 6 (Z1379 in FIG. 177) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process 6 (Z1379). In the ending process 6 (Z1379), first, an ending command indicating the start of ending is set in the sound lamp control device 113 (Z4101). Next, the jackpot flag 203zi is set to off (Z4102), and it is determined whether the probability change setting flag 203zs is on (Z4103). If it is determined in the processing of Z4103 that the probability change setting flag 203zs is ON (Z4103: Yes), the probability change counter 203zg is set to 100 (Z4104). Although not shown, the probable change setting flag 203zs is configured to be turned off based on the probable change counter 203zg being set to 100. Thereafter, the flow shifts to the process of Z4105.

  On the other hand, in the process of Z4103, if it is determined that the probability change setting flag 203zs is not on (Z4103: No), the process of Z4104 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z4105.

  In the process of Z4105, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game being executed is a jackpot game based on any of the jackpots A, C, E, and G (Z4105). When it is determined in the process of Z4105 that the hit is one of the big hits A, C, E, and G (Z4105: Yes), the time saving identification flag 203zx is set to 0 (Z4106), and the process shifts to the process of Z4108.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z4105 that none of the jackpots A, C, E, and G are found (Z4105: No), 1 is set to the time saving identification flag 203zx (Z4107), and the processing shifts to the processing of Z4108. I do.

  By setting the time saving identification flag 203zx to 0 or 1 by the processing of Z4106 or Z4107, the opening pattern of the electric accessory set in the ordinary symbol variation processing is switched. When the processing of Z4106 or Z4107 is completed, 100 is set to the value of the counter 203zu during the time saving (Z4108), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the time saving state (probable change state) is given, the type of the time saving state set by the jackpot type is set to be different. Thus, in a time-saving state executed after the jackpot game, when a game ball enters the distribution prize device 700, the ball enters the first operation port 704 or the second operation port 707. It is possible to switch between setting the game ball into the right first ball entry port 64a2 and the game ball into the right second ball entry port 64b depending on the jackpot type.

  Therefore, it is possible to switch between the time when the lottery is executed with the first special symbol and the time when the lottery is executed with the second special symbol. Then, by setting different advantages to be given to the player in the lottery between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the size of the privilege given to the player can be changed according to the type of big hit. In the present embodiment, the number of rounds in the jackpot game is varied between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, the probability of change, the probability of jackpot determination, the number of working hours, the change time, and the like are set as the first special symbol. The privilege may be set differently by setting differently for the second special symbol. Further, by adopting the configuration as in the present embodiment, even in the probability-changing game state having the same jackpot probability, the type of the special symbol that fluctuates during the time-saving period (during the probability change) is switched according to the type of the time-saving state to be given. And the benefit that the player in the probable play state can receive can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to set a probable change game state in which a plurality of benefits are different. Also, in the present embodiment, the number of jackpot types guided to the probability change switch 65e3 is set to be greater in the hit type of the second special symbol than in the first special symbol, so that a plurality of probability change ratios can be set. Therefore, the probability of change can be changed depending on the time saving state, and a fresh game can be provided to the player.

  Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, the condition (terminating the end) when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed and when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed is determined. Ease). Therefore, the advantage of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed.

  In addition, in the second embodiment and the fifth embodiment described above, a game in which a player executes a lottery of a first special symbol and a game in which a lottery of a second special symbol is executed are configured to be selectable. The player can play a game corresponding to the game method selected by the player. That is, when a predetermined game state (time saving state) is set, any game (a game in which a lottery of the first special symbol is executed and a game in which a lottery of the second special symbol is executed) can be executed. On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, in a predetermined game state (for example, a time-saving state), a game state (for example, a game for executing a lottery of the first special symbol) in a predetermined game state (for example, a time-saving state). A game state in which the time-saving state 1) is set, and in the state where the time-saving state 1 is set, the other game (for example, a game for executing a lottery of the second special symbol) can be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. (Time saving state 2) can be set. With this configuration, it is possible to set and provide different game states to the player in a stepwise manner. Therefore, a game having a higher capture factor than the above-described second embodiment and the fifth embodiment is described. Machine can be provided.

  With such a configuration, for example, the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state in the lottery of the first special symbol executed when the time-saving state 1 is set is more satisfied than the lottery of the second special symbol. It is configured to be easy. Specifically, when the number of fluctuations (lottery) of the first special symbol is 30 times, the fluctuation number ending condition is satisfied, and when the first special symbol is won twice per small win by the lottery, the ending number of times condition is set. Is established.

  Then, during a period in which the time reduction state 1 is continuously set, when a special symbol jackpot is won, a part of the time reduction state 2 (after the jackpot game ends) after the jackpot is completed (part of the special symbol jackpot game). The time-saving state in which the lottery is executed is set. As described above, in the second special symbol lottery, the time saving end condition is configured to be less likely to be satisfied than in the first special symbol lottery. Specifically, the number of fluctuations (lottery) of the second special symbol is 100. When the number of times is reached, the variable number of times end condition is satisfied, and when 20 small hits are won by lottery of the second special symbol, the winning number of times end condition is satisfied.

  With this configuration, once the time reduction state 2 is reached, the time reduction state is more easily maintained than in the case of the time reduction state 1. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the time-saving state in which the playing degree is different. Note that, in the above-described example, the time saving state is shown as an example of an advantageous state advantageous to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be used for the probable change state. May be managed independently, for example, so that a special symbol high probability state and a normal symbol low probability state gaming state (latency state) can be set.

  In addition, as the end condition of the game state that can be set in the sixth embodiment, any of the end conditions set in the above-described embodiments or the assumed end conditions may be adopted, or a plurality of the end conditions may be combined. Is also good.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the degree of advantage is made different between a case in which the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol and a case in which the jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol. 2 It is configured such that the player who wins the jackpot in the special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player. In the present embodiment, two types of time-saving states, a time-saving state 1 and a time-saving state 2, are provided as the time-saving state provided after the end of the big hit. The time-saving state 1 is a time-saving state in which the lottery of the first special symbol is easily executed (a ball easily enters the right first entrance opening 64a2), and the time-saving state 2 is a lottery of the second special symbol. (The ball easily enters the right second entrance 64b). More specifically, in the time saving state 1, when a hit occurs, the electric motor is driven at a timing at which the ball easily enters the first operating port 704 in the sorting winning device 700 (the first operating accessory 645a is easily opened). The accessory 701 is opened. Therefore, by making a right hit in the time saving state 1, the ball easily enters the right first entrance opening 64a1, and the lottery of the first special symbol is easily executed. On the other hand, in the time saving state 2, when a win is made, the electric accessory 701 is timingd to easily enter the second operating port 707 in the sorting winning device 700 (the second operating accessory 645 b is easily opened). Is released. Therefore, by making a right hit in the time saving state 2, the ball easily enters the right second entrance opening 64b, and the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed.

  In this embodiment, the variable winning device 65 is provided with a probable change switch 65e3 inside, and by changing the internal flow path, the type of the big hit that allows the ball to pass (easily) through the probable change switch 65e3 during the big hit is: A jackpot type in which a ball cannot pass (is difficult) through the probability changing switch 65e3 is provided. Then, by changing the ratio of the jackpot type that can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 depending on whether the lottery of the first special symbol becomes a big hit or the lottery of the second special symbol, a special symbol is changed to a certain status. And the rate of transition is variable. In other words, a configuration in which a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is more likely to shift to the positive change state as compared with a case in which a large hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is obtained. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player want to execute the lottery of the second special symbol. More attention can be given to whether the ball enters the operating port 704 or the second operating port 707). Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as in the time saving state, two types of states having different degrees of advantage are provided in the probable change state. That is, a probable state 1 in which the lottery of the first special symbol is easily executed and a probable state 2 in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed are provided. A plurality of probable states in which the rate of transition to the probable state is different depending on whether the first special symbol is a lottery or a second special symbol is a lottery state, and the probabilistic state to be given also has a different degree of advantage. Is provided, it is possible to play a game aiming at a better state. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that only one of them fluctuates (lottery) in accordance with a predetermined regularity. As in the fourth embodiment, a gaming machine having a configuration in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are randomly executed may be used.

  In the sixth embodiment, a configuration is used in which the types of special symbols for which a lottery (variation) is performed during the time reduction state are completely separated according to the type of the time reduction state (time reduction state 1, time reduction state 2) that is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery (fluctuation) frequency of each special symbol may be made different according to the type of the time saving state to be set. For example, when the time saving state A is set, the ratio that the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol is performed twice for one lottery (fluctuation) of the first special symbol, and the time saving state B is In the case where the lottery (fluctuation) of the first special symbol is performed three times with respect to one lottery (fluctuation) of the first special symbol, the time saving state C is set. May be configured so that only the first special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is executed, and when the time saving state D is set, only the second special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is executed. With this configuration, various game characteristics can be provided to the player according to the time saving state set.

  Instead of the pachinko machine 10 used in the above-described sixth embodiment, the following pachinko machine 10 may be used. In a normal game state, a game aiming at the first ball opening 64a1 (hereinafter, referred to as a normal game) is performed. Be executed. As a result of the lottery executed based on the entry of a ball into the first entrance 64a1 (special figure 1 lottery), if a jackpot is won, a jackpot game in which the second variable winning device 65 is opened is executed. In addition, according to the type of the jackpot that has been won, the probability of a jackpot by a special figure lottery after the end of the jackpot game becomes a high probability, and furthermore, a probability fluctuating game state (hereinafter referred to as a probable state) in which the special figure lottery is easily received, or Although the probability of a jackpot does not change, a time-saving game state (hereinafter, time-saving state) in which special drawing lottery is easily received is provided.

  As will be described in detail later, the pachinko machine 10 is in a probable state 1 in which the lottery of FIG. 1 is substantially executed during the probable state, and in a probable state in which the lottery of FIG. 2 are provided. In addition, the jackpot based on the drawing of the special figure 2 is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot based on the drawing of the special figure 1 (the number of balls that can be acquired by one jackpot game, or 1 after the jackpot game ends). It is easy to shift to a gaming state where it is easy to win a jackpot where the number of balls that can be obtained by the jackpot game is large).

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a probable change state 1 for a probable change state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and a probable change state 2 that is more advantageous than the probable change state 1. Thereby, for example, the rate of transition from the normal game to the probable change state is increased (making it easy to enter the probable change state 1), and the player is easily made to experience a game state (probable change state) that is easier to hit than the normal game. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier to experience the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 during the performance during the jackpot game or the probable change state, to make the game entertainable, and to reduce the rate of shifting to the probable change state 2. However, it is possible to provide a player who has shifted to the probable change state 2 with a sense of superiority, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game for the player.

  The pachinko machine 10 is also configured to be able to set the time saving state 1 and the time saving state 2 in the time saving state, similarly to the above-described probable change state. Game state that is easy to receive special figure lottery (ball is easy to enter into the entrance where special figure lottery is executed, and the fluctuation time of special figure in special figure lottery is set shorter than the normal game state. Easy game state) is set. Further, the time reduction state 1 is configured such that the lottery of the special figure 1 is executed substantially, and the time reduction state 2 is configured such that the lottery of the special figure 2 is substantially executed. Is set as a gaming state advantageous to the player.

  When such a pachinko machine 10 is used, the configuration of the game board 13 may be as follows. That is, with reference to FIG. 169, when the gaming state shifts to the probable change state or the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game, the right region of the game board 13 (the right region of the variable display device unit 80) is changed. A game to be aimed at (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game) is executed. When the right-handed game is executed, the ball fired to the right area of the game board 13 collides with the return rubber 69, and is located near the through gate (normal entrance) 67 or the through gate (normal entrance) 67. It passes between the implanted nails and flows down to the sorting prize winning device 700. The distribution winning device 700 is provided with an electric accessory 710, and is configured such that a ball can enter the distribution winning device 700 when the electric accessory 710 is opened. The electric accessory 710 is opened when a result of a lottery of ordinary symbols (general-purpose lottery) executed based on a ball passing through a through gate (ordinary entrance) 67 is obtained. Note that the electric accessory 710 is provided with a plurality of open patterns, and it is preferable that the timing at which the ball enters the sorting winning device 700 is different.

  Although the detailed description is omitted, the configuration inside the distribution winning device 700 will be described. When the electric accessory 710 provided in the sorting prize winning device 700 is opened, a ball can enter the sorting prize winning device 700, and the ball that has entered the sorting prize winning device 700 falls on the switching valve 702. (It takes about 0.4 seconds for the ball entering the sorting prize device 700 to reach the switching valve 702). The switching valve 702 is configured to execute a predetermined operation based on winning (winning) in the drawing as a result of the drawing drawing, and the first operation is performed according to the operating position of the switching valve 702. Either the channel 703 or the second channel 706 is configured to communicate as a channel through which the sphere can flow. As described above with reference to FIG. 82, the second flow path 706 communicates between 1.5 seconds and 3.5 seconds (2 seconds) after the winning per ordinary drawing. Thus, the switching valve 702 may be operated in such a manner that the first flow path 703 may be operated so as to communicate with the other channels during the other periods.

  As described above, the mechanism that changes the accessory into the open state or the closed state by the movement of the ball without using an electrical configuration is a known technique called a non-motorized accessory. In the present embodiment, a detailed description of the configuration of the non-motorized accessory is omitted, but any technique that has already been disclosed may be appropriately adopted.

  On the other hand, the ball that has flowed down the second flow path 706 in the sorting prize winning device 700 and entered the second operation port 707 is operated by the second operation mechanism 708 in the same manner as in the configuration of the non-motorized accessory described above. The second actor 645b is opened. When the ball enters the right second entrance opening 64b, which can enter the ball when the second actor 645b is opened, the lottery of the special figure 2 set more advantageously than the special figure 1 can be performed. Be executed. In addition, regarding the configuration of the non-motorized accessory composed of the second operating port 707, the second operating mechanism 708, and the second operating accessory 645b, the first operating port 704, the first operating mechanism 705, and the first Since the configuration is the same as that of the non-motorized accessory composed of the operating accessory 645a, a detailed description is omitted.

  It should be noted that the second flow path 706 is set only for a predetermined period of time, that is, for a period of 1.5 seconds from the time when the switch valve 702 is won per ordinary drawing until 3.5 seconds (2 seconds). The first channel 703 is operated so as to communicate with each other during the other period (including a period in which no winning is performed per ordinary drawing). The first channel 703 is opened by flowing down the second channel 706. The special figure lottery (special figure 2 lottery) that is advantageous to the player is performed by the ball entering the second actor 645b, which prevents the special figure 2 lottery from being executed by an illegal game. That's why.

  The configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 is such that when the right first entrance 64a2 or the right second entrance 64b is in a state where the ball entered the distribution winning device 700 can enter the ball, the distribution is performed. The ball that has flowed down the right area of the game board 13 without entering the prize device 700 may be guided by a plurality of nails and enter any of the entrances in which the ball can enter.

  Further, a switching valve 702 for distributing the entered ball to the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706 is provided in the sorting prize winning device 700. , 1.5 seconds, and then operated to a position where the second flow path communicates for 3 seconds. The operation control of the switching valve 702 is configured to execute a certain operation regardless of which open pattern is set as the open pattern of the electric accessory 710.

  Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, the operation of the switching valve 702 is controlled such that the ball entering in the opening pattern B is surely guided to the first flow path 703 so that the ball entering in the opening pattern A is surely guided. The operation is performed at a timing delayed by a predetermined period or more (0.5 seconds or more) from the operation of the electric accessory 701 so as to be guided to the second flow path 706. This allows the ball that has entered the sorting prize device 700 to be guided to a desired flow path, and the ball is transferred from the sorting prize device 700 during the operation performed by the switching valve 702 to change the state. It can be prevented from flowing down.

  According to the other example described above, the opening pattern of the electric utility (electrically-powered character) can be set based on the jackpot type, and the special pattern is set based on the set opening pattern of the electric combination (electrically-powered character). A game state in which FIG. 1 substantially fluctuates and a game state in which the special figure 2 fluctuates substantially can be set. Furthermore, a special advantage (a larger number of balls that can be obtained by the jackpot game, which is substantially special) is more advantageous when the jackpot is won in the special figure 2 lottery than when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery. (The rate of transition to the gaming state in which the lottery in FIG. 2 is executed is high) is set.

  As a result, the time saving state and the probable change state are further changed to a game state advantageous to the player (time saving state 2, probable change state 2) and the player is more disadvantageous than the advantageous game state but more advantageous than the normal game state. It is possible to provide a game state (a time saving state 1, a probability change state 1) which is a game state. Therefore, it is possible to set various game states for the game executed by the pachinko machine 10, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  Specifically, by setting a high transition rate for transition from the normal game state to the time saving state 1 or the probability change state 1, the player can easily see the effect performed in the time reduction state or the probability change state. Or by setting a low transition rate for shifting to the probable state 2 which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player so as to give the player who has shifted to the probable state 2 a sense of superiority. By doing so, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved for the player.

  The open pattern A and the open pattern B can be set as the open patterns of the electric role (electrically driven accessory). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the open pattern can be set to three or more types. May be. Thereby, it is possible to set more various game states.

  In addition, an open pattern (opening pattern A) for guiding a sphere to the first flow path 703 and an open pattern (opening pattern B) for guiding a sphere to the second flow path 706 are provided as open patterns of the electric role (electrically powered accessory). However, for example, an opening pattern in which the electric accessory 701 opens at the timing when the ball is guided to either the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706 may be provided. This allows the player to enjoy which flow path (the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706) the ball entering the electric accessory 701 is guided to, and further enhances the interest of the game. It is possible to do.

  Further, the ball that has entered the sorting prize device 700 is configured to enter one of the operating ports (the first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707). A flow path is provided to be discharged again from the game board 13 to the game board 13, or a flow is made to flow into an out port communicating with a discharge port (not shown) provided on the back surface of the game board 13 without entering a ball into each operation port. A road may be provided. With this configuration, the player can be interested in the flow of the ball in the sorting prize device 700, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

  Further, the switching valve 702 is configured so that a predetermined constant operation is performed after the hit game is executed. For example, the constant operation is always performed after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. The configuration may be such that the number of balls that have entered the sorting prize winning device 700 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), thereby switching the communicating flow path.

  The operation of the switching valve 702 is controlled by an electric drive source (a motor (not shown)). For example, the switching valve 702 is activated when a ball comes into contact with the switching valve 702 serving as a switching member, and a predetermined condition (for example, passing 10 balls) is satisfied. It may be configured such that when it is filled, the communicating flow path is switched.

  Further, the sphere guided to one of the flow paths by the switching valve 702 flows down the flow path and enters one of the working ports. A distributing member for distributing the ball guided to the road to the plurality of flow paths may be provided, and the ball distributed to the specific flow path by the distributing member may be configured to enter the corresponding working port.

  In addition, the configuration is such that the ball that has entered the sorting prize winning device 700 reaches the switching valve 702 in a fixed time (0.4 seconds in the present embodiment). As means for varying (extending) the time that the entered ball reaches the switching valve 702, a plurality of paths having different periods until the ball entering the sorting prize device 700 reaches the switching valve 702 are used. A distribution means may be provided for distributing a ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 to any of the routes. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a player who can play a game while predicting a timing at which a ball that has entered the sorting prize winning device 700 reaches the switching valve 702 from getting tired of the game early. There is an effect that can be.

  Next, the transition of the gaming state of the above-described another example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. This pachinko machine 10 is based on the big hit type in which the normal game state, the probable change state 1 (unfavorable probable change), the probable change state 2 (advantage probable change), the time reduction state 1 (unfavorable time reduction), and the time reduction state 2 (advantageous time reduction) are won. It is configured to transition.

  First, in the normal gaming state, a game in which the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is executed is performed, and when a jackpot is won, 50% shifts to the probability change state 1, 30% shifts to the probability change state 2, and 15% shifts to the time reduction state 1 And 5% shift to the time saving state 2.

  Next, in the probable change state 1, since the opening pattern A is set as the electric role opening pattern, a game in which the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is executed is performed (the special figure 1 substantial fluctuation). In the probability change state 1, when the jackpot is won, the probability change state 1 is looped at 50%, 30% is shifted to the probability reduction state 2, 15% is shifted to the time reduction state 1, and 5% is shifted to the time reduction state 2. As described above, the probability change state 1 is a game state in which the special figure 1 substantially fluctuates similarly to the normal game state, and thus differs in that the jackpot probability is set higher than in the normal game state. The state transition destination and its distribution are the same.

  In the probable change state 2, since the opening pattern B is set as the electric hand opening pattern, a game in which the change of the special figure 2 is executed is performed (the special figure 2 substantial change). In the probability change state 2, when the jackpot is won, the probability change state 2 is looped at 80%, 15% is shifted to the time reduction state 2, and 5% is shifted to the time reduction state 1. As described above, the probable change state 2 is a game state in which the special figure 2 fluctuates substantially, and is a game state in which the jackpot probability is set higher than the normal game state. It becomes.

  Next, in the time-saving state 1, since the opening pattern A is set as the electric hand opening pattern, a game in which the variation of the special figure 1 is executed is performed (the special figure 1 substantial variation). In the time-saving state 1, when a jackpot is won, the state shifts to the probability changing state 1 at 50%, 30% shifts to the probability changing state 2, 15% loops through the time saving state 1, and 5% shifts to the time saving state 2. As described above, since the time reduction state 1 is a game state in which the special figure 1 substantially fluctuates similarly to the normal game state, the fluctuation time of the special figure and the general figure is reduced, and the electric accessory 701 at the time of the general figure is shortened. Although the opening pattern is different from the normal gaming state, the destination of the gaming state after the jackpot winning and the distribution thereof are the same.

  In the time-saving state 2, since the opening pattern B is set as the power-operating opening pattern, a game in which the variation of the special figure 2 is executed is performed (the substantial change of the special figure 2). In the time reduction state 2, if a jackpot is won, the state shifts to the probability change state 2 at 80%, 15% loops the time reduction state 2, and 5% shifts to the time reduction state 1. As described above, the time saving state 2 is a game state in which the special figure 2 fluctuates substantially, and the probability of shifting to the probable change state 2 which is most advantageous to the player when the jackpot is won is the normal game state. The game state is set to 2.5 times or more (a so-called pullback zone). By providing such a game state, it is possible to increase the possibility that the player shifts to the most advantageous game state (probable change state 2) than the normal game state, and to motivate the player to play the game. There is an effect that can be.

  Note that the game state transition destination and the transition distribution rate after the big hit in each game state may be appropriately set without being limited to this. For example, the time-saving state that shifts from the normal game state may be only the time-saving state 2. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness of the player who has not been able to shift to the probable change state despite winning the jackpot in the normal game state to decrease.

  In addition, the transfer destination and the distribution rate of the game state are unified according to the type of the special figure regardless of the game state, but the transfer destination and the transfer distribution rate of the game state are not limited to this. May be changed. As a result, it is possible to provide more complicated game characteristics, and it is possible to suppress an early tiredness of the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the probable change state is configured to continue until the next big hit, and 10 time savings are given as the time saving state regardless of the gaming state. The specification is continued until the number of times (for example, 100 times) is executed, or a lottery that shifts to the normal game state is executed each time the special figure changes, and by winning the lottery, the state is changed from the certain change state to the normal game state. It may be configured to shift. In this case, as the probable change state that is advantageous to the player and the probable change state that is disadvantageous, for example, a difference is provided in the number of times of the change of the special symbol in which the probable change state ends, or the lottery probability of shifting from the probable change state to the normal game state is changed. Or you may make it.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, as a time-saving ending condition for ending the time-saving state, the first time (for example, 100 times) special symbol variation display is executed without winning the jackpot. And a second ending condition (the number of wins) that is established based on winning a second number of times (for example, five times) with a small win without winning a large hit. End condition) is set at least, and when any one of a plurality of time reduction end conditions is satisfied, the time reduction state is ended. Furthermore, by configuring the number of wins to be different from each other for different types of small hits, it is possible to realize a gaming ability that makes it difficult to predict the timing at which the time saving state ends. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, a V winning is generated during the execution of the small hit game regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit (the game ball has passed the V winning switch 650e3). It was configured such that the jackpots started in the case had the same degree of advantage.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the player can select whether or not the time-saving state end condition is satisfied instead of using one type of the time-saving state end condition. Configured. More specifically, when a small hit is won, a game ball is thrown into a V winning device 6500 provided in place of the V winning device 650 to execute a big hit game, or the game ball is thrown. It is configured that the player can select whether to reduce the number of remaining working hours without having to do so. The advantage for the player is different between the case where the jackpot is won during the time saving state and the case where the jackpot is won after the time saving state ends. In other words, it is configured such that a person who wins in the normal state after the end of the time-saving state is more likely to win a jackpot of a type that is advantageous to the player (a type of jackpot in which the time-saving state is given after the end of the jackpot). This makes it possible to realize a playability in which the player selects whether or not to insert a game ball into the V winning device 6500 every time a small hit is won in the time-saving state. Interest can be improved.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the configuration in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is different. And that the configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, that the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and that the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 Is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the following. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 178, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 178 is a front view of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 178, the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment is different from the game board 13 in the first embodiment in the case where a small hit is won as in the V winning device 650 in the first embodiment. A V winning device 6500 that is set in a state in which a game ball can enter for a predetermined period is provided on the left side of the board. Note that the V prize device 6500 is arranged on the left side in the seventh embodiment because it is a game property that allows the player to select whether or not to generate a V prize during the execution of the small hit game in the time saving state. is there. That is, when the V prize device 6500 is provided in the direction in which the game ball is fired in the time saving state (that is, on the right side of the game board 13), the player intends to select not to generate the V prize at the time of the small hit. Even in such a case, there is a possibility that a game ball already fired by right-handing enters the V winning device 6500, and a V winning occurs against the player's will. Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, the V prize device 6500 is provided on the left side of the board. If the game method is not intentionally changed in the time saving state (that is, unless the right-handed game is switched to the left-handed game), the V prize winning is achieved. Is not generated (it becomes difficult to generate). Thereby, a small hit game can be surely ended without generating a V winning for a player who does not want to generate a V winning in the small hit game.

  The V winning device 6500 according to the seventh embodiment has a V switch 6500e3 provided therein. Like the V switch 650e3 in the first embodiment, the V switch 6500e3 is configured to start a big hit when a game ball passes. That is, in the small hit game in which the V winning device 6500 is set to be able to enter the ball, the big hit game is started based on the fact that the game ball has entered the V winning device 6500 and passed the V switch 6500e3. You. In the seventh embodiment, the internal mechanism of the V winning device 6500 is configured such that all game balls that have entered the V winning device 6500 pass through the V switch 6500e3. That is, the inside of the V prize device 6500 in the seventh embodiment is not provided with any configuration corresponding to the normal discharge channel 650e1, the switching member 650h, and the like in the V prize device 650 of the first embodiment. All the game balls that have flowed down the special discharge channel 6500e2, pass through the V winning switch 6500e3, and are then discharged to the outside. For this reason, in the small hit game, since the big hit is determined by at least one game ball entering the V winning device 6500, it is possible to make the playability of the small hit game simple and easy to understand. it can. Therefore, it is possible to realize a playability that is easy for the player to understand. Although details will be described later, in the seventh embodiment, when a small hit is won, the player simply fires a game ball toward the V winning device 6500 by continuously making a left hit. In this configuration, ten or more game balls enter the V winning opening 6500a. Therefore, when a small hit is won, a player who wants to start a big hit can easily pass the V winning switch 6500e3 to start a big hit. Even if a plurality of game balls pass through the V winning switch 6500e3 in one small hitting game, only one game ball that first passes through the V winning switch 6500e3 is used for the start determination of the big hit, and subsequent game balls are used. Has no effect on the jackpot execution. In other words, even if a plurality of game balls enter the V prize device 6500 and a plurality of game balls pass through the V prize switch 6500e3 in one small hitting game, only one big hit is executed (the big hit). Is not obtained for one small hit). For this reason, the ratio of the number of game balls that trigger the execution of the big hit to the number of game balls that enter the V winning device 6500 in the small hit game is substantially 1/10 or less.

  As shown in FIG. 178, in the gaming board 13 of the seventh embodiment, a second ball entry port 6400 is provided on the right side of the board in place of the second ball entry port 640 in the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 178, the second entrance 6400 is provided with an electric accessory 6400a, and the electric accessory 6400a normally closes the second entrance 6400, While it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance 6400, if a normal symbol is won by lottery, a predetermined period (for example, 0.2 seconds × 1 time, or 2 seconds × 2 times) ) The electric accessory 6400a is opened, and a state in which the electric accessory 6400a can enter the second entrance 6400 is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 178, in the seventh embodiment, the through gate 67 is provided (moved) on the upstream side on the right side of the board. Thus, when a right-handed hit is made, the distance required for the launched game ball to reach the through gate 67 is shortened, so that it becomes easier to execute the normal symbol lottery earlier.

  Here, the details of the V winning device 6500 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 179 is a top view of the V winning device 6500 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 179, the open / close door 6500f1 of the V winning device 6500 in the seventh embodiment is configured to be capable of forming a flow path through which a plurality of game balls can pass on its upper surface in a closed state. . More specifically, on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6500f1, a flow path through which the game ball can flow down from the left side to the right side when viewed from the front is formed, and the game flowing down the flow path is formed. Protrusions 6500fa to 6500fe for preventing the ball from flowing down are provided. Since the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the door 6500f1 is prevented from flowing down by the convex portions 6500fa to 6500fe, it flows down on the door 6500f1 along the outer periphery of the convex portions 6500fa to 6500fe. That is, on the opening / closing door 6500f1, a serpentine flow path is formed by the convex portions 6500fa to 6500fe. For this reason, compared with the case where each convex part 6500fa to 6500fe is not provided (that is, the case where a game ball can linearly flow down on the door 6500f1 from right to left in front view), the door can be opened and closed. The period required to completely flow down the upper surface of 6500f1 can be lengthened. In other words, when the game balls are continuously fired toward the V winning device 6500 by the left-handed game, a plurality of the game balls easily flow down to the door 6500f1 at the same time. ing. For this reason, when the opening and closing door 6500f1 is opened due to a small hit, a plurality of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening and closing door 6500f1 at the time of opening the inside of the V winning device 6500 immediately after the opening of the opening and closing door 6500f1. Can be dropped. As a result, it is possible to allow more game balls to enter in one small hit game, so that if a small hit is won, it is desired to start a big hit (enter the game ball to the V winning device 6500). A player who wants to pass the V winning switch 6500e3) can easily cause at least one game ball to enter the V winning device 6500. Therefore, the convenience for the player can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 180, an opening pattern of the open / close door 6500f1 set when a small hit is won in the seventh embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, only one type of opening pattern is defined as the opening pattern of the door 6500f1. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 180, the opening / closing door 6500f1 is maintained in a closed state for 3 seconds after the small hitting game is started, and the opening / closing door 6500f1 is opened at the time when 3 seconds have elapsed. By continuously left-handing during the closing period of 3 seconds, about 5 game balls can reach the upper surface of the door 6500f1, and the door 6500f1 is switched to the open state (variable). )) Immediately after that, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the opening and closing door 6500f1 can be made to enter the V winning device 6500.

  As shown in FIG. 180, the open state continues for 0.6 seconds, and at the elapse of 0.6 seconds (at the elapse of 3.6 seconds from the start of the small hit), the opening / closing door 6500f1 is closed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 180, a closed state for 3 seconds (a period in which a plurality of game balls can reach (store) the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6500f1 by left-handing) and an open state (opening / closing) for 0.6 seconds The period in which the game ball reaching the upper surface of the door 6500f1 is guided into the V-winning device 6500) is repeated up to two times, and the small hitting game is ended by ending the third open state in total. . In addition, when the entry of 10 or more game balls, which is the upper limit winning number in the small hit, is detected, the small hit game is ended at the time of the detection. If the game ball enters the V prize device 6500 before the small hitting game is finished, the big prize is started after the small hitting game ends, passing through the V winning switch 6500e3. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, by combining the upper surface structure of the opening / closing door 6500f1 of the V winning device 6500 and the small hit opening pattern, more game balls are entered in one small hit game. Is possible. More specifically, as in the seventh embodiment, the opening period is not divided into three times and set for 0.6 seconds each, but is merely set for 1.8 seconds (0.6 seconds × 0.6 seconds) immediately after the start of the small hitting game. In the configuration in which the open state is set in 3), since only about three game balls can be fired during the open period, there is a possibility that no game ball will enter the V winning device 6500. . In other words, it is impossible to start the big hit even though the player has left-handed during the small hit game in order to start the big hit, thereby reducing the player's motivation for the game. there is a possibility. On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, since a plurality of game balls can be easily entered into the V winning device 6500 in one small hitting game, it is desired to start a big hit. A player who has performed a right-hand during the small hit game as desired can easily enter the game ball into the V winning device 6500 and start a big hit. Therefore, since the player's motivation to play the game can be prevented from being reduced, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 181 and FIG. 182, a description will be given of an effect that is characteristic during the time saving state in the seventh embodiment. Here, in the time saving state in the seventh embodiment, similarly to the time saving state in the above-described first embodiment, every time a special symbol lottery is executed, a variable display effect for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is performed. As part of (fluctuation pattern production), a production in which the boy character 801 searches for a treasure box is executed. Then, if the lottery result is a small hit (or a big hit), an effect of finding a treasure box is executed. During the execution of the small hit game, the game ball enters the V winning device 6500 and after the small hit, the big hit ( When the start of the (two types) is determined, the effect of successfully opening the treasure box 802 is executed, and the V display 803 indicating that the big hit game is set from the treasure box 802 appears (FIG. 13). (Refer to (a)). On the other hand, the game ball did not enter the V winning device 6500 during the execution of the small hit game because the player did not make a left hit during the execution of the small hit game (the condition for starting the big hit is satisfied). In this case, an effect is performed in which the boy character 801 passes without opening the treasure box 802.

  In addition, in the seventh embodiment, in the time-saving state in which the electric accessory 6400a is easily opened (it is easy to enter the second entrance 6400), a right-handed game is performed to the second entrance 6400. Each time a ball enters and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases, an effect of acquiring a key is executed. Details of the effect of acquiring (storing) this key will be described with reference to FIGS. 181 (a) and 181 (b). Note that the display contents of the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are the same as in the first embodiment described above, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

  As shown in FIG. 181 (a), in the time reduction state according to the seventh embodiment, a display area HR6 for indicating the remaining number of time reductions is formed above the boy character 801. FIG. 181 (a) exemplifies a case where the number of remaining time savings is ten, and the character “remaining ten times” is displayed inside the display area HR6. In the seventh embodiment, when the time saving state is set after the end of the big hit, the number of times of saving time is set to ten times. That is, FIG. 181 (a) is a diagram showing the display contents immediately after the end of the time-saving big hit. In the seventh embodiment, when shifting to the time saving state after the end of the big hit, four display areas HR1 to HR4 are formed on the right side of the boy character 801. Each time a game ball enters the second entrance 6400 and the number of reserved balls increases, an image of a key corresponding to the reserved ball is displayed in these four display areas. In addition, as shown in FIG. 181 (a), a display area HR5 is displayed on the sub-display area Ds, in which the characters "Store keys by right-handing !!" According to these display modes, it is possible to easily understand that the key is accumulated in the display areas HR1 to HR4 by right-handing the player.

  FIG. 181 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when a game ball enters the second entrance 6400 in the time saving state. As shown in FIG. 181 (b), when a game ball enters the second entrance 6400, an image imitating a key is displayed in the display area HR4. This allows the player to easily understand that the entry to the second entrance 6400 and the display of the key are linked. The key image has a plurality of modes. Although details will be described later, in the seventh embodiment, the key mode suggests to the player the degree of advantage in a case where a V prize is generated (when a game ball is inserted into the V prize device 6500). It is configured to be possible. That is, when a V prize is generated, the degree of expectation that the time saving state is given after the end of the big win based on the V prize is suggested to the player by the display mode of the key image. More specifically, in addition to the key of the mode (normal mode) shown in FIG. 181 (b), as a mode with a high expectation, a key mode larger than the normal mode, and a sun with a low expectation, A tattered mode or the like is provided rather than a normal mode. In accordance with the display mode of these keys, it is possible to realize a game property that allows the player to select whether or not to generate a V winning.

  In addition, as described above, in the seventh embodiment, the V winning occurs in the small hit that is won in the normal state, rather than the big hit that is executed in the case where the V winning occurs in the small hit that is won during the time saving state. The big hit executed in such a case is configured such that the rate at which the time reduction state is given is higher. In the seventh embodiment, a small hit can be won only by the lottery of the second special symbol. In other words, the case of winning a small hit in the normal state is a case of being held during the time saving state and winning the small hit with the reserved ball of the second special symbol used for the lottery after the end of the time saving state. Therefore, in the time-saving state according to the seventh embodiment, even if a small hit is won during the time-saving state, by continuing to right-hand, it is possible to avoid the ball from entering the V prize device 6500 provided on the left side of the board. It is better to save the hold while saving, and to end the number of time savings in the state where more holds are accumulated (that is, to shift to the normal state) and to perform the game method of digesting the held ball of the second special symbol, the time saving state Expectations are higher. For this reason, during the time saving state, the type of the jackpot to be started when the V winning is generated from the key mode (whether or not the time saving state is given) is estimated, and the big hit to which the time saving state is given is assumed. Unless it is presumed that the game will be started, it is possible to realize a very different and novel gameplay property of avoiding the V winning, thereby further improving the interest of the player in the game. In addition, in the time reduction state, the player can be made to think that he wants to keep the number of reserved balls as much as possible (that is, the upper limit number is 4). Can be made. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 182 (a), a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in a case where a small win is won during the time saving state will be described. As shown in FIG. 182 (a), when a small hit is won in the time reduction state, an effect is performed in which the boy character 801 finds a tattered-looking treasure chest 802 in which the letters "DANGER" are described. During the time saving state, the appearance of the treasure chest is set to be tattered, so that it is possible to think that it is better not to open the treasure chest 802. That is, when a V prize is generated during the time reduction state and a jackpot is won, it is possible to indicate to the player that the rate at which the time reduction state is given is low.

  In addition, a display area HR7 having a horizontally-long and substantially rectangular shape in which the word “select” is displayed is formed below the main display area Dm, and “Use key!” Is displayed on the left half of the sub-display area Ds. And a display area HR8 in the form of a horizontally long rectangle in which characters "left-handed" are displayed, and characters "conserve key!" And "right-handed" for the right half. Is formed in a horizontally long display area HR9 having a substantially rectangular shape. Further, on the left side of the display area HR4, an arrow image YG simulating an arrow pointing right (that is, an arrow pointing in the direction of the display area HR4) is displayed. The arrow image YG allows the player to easily understand that the key that can be used for the currently displayed treasure box 802 is the key displayed in the display area HR4. According to these displayed contents, the treasure box 802 is opened to the player by using the key displayed in the display area HR4 by performing left-handing (that is, a big win can be started by generating a V winning). On the other hand, it is easy for the player to understand that the treasure chest 802 can be left without being opened (that is, the small hit game can be ended without generating the V winning) by continuing the right-handing. Therefore, according to the mode of the key, etc., there is a novel gameplay that allows the player to select whether to perform a left hit to start a big hit and aim for a time saving state or to continue a right hit and end the small hit game. The key that has not been used because the player has continued to make a right strike disappears at the end of the small hit.

  FIG. 182 (b) shows that when the time-saving state ends and the state shifts to the normal state in a state where the reserved ball of the second special symbol is present, the lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol wins a small hit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode in the case. As shown in FIG. 182 (b), when a small hit is won in the normal state after the time saving state ends, an effect of finding the treasure chest 802 in the appearance of the boy character 801 shining is executed. The player is told that the treasure chest 802 should be opened by setting the appearance to be more luxurious than when the small hit occurs during the time saving state (when the treasure chest 802 in the tattered manner is displayed). Can be easily understood. In other words, if a V prize is generated in the normal state after the time reduction state is exited (the time reduction state ends) and a jackpot is achieved, it is suggested to the player that the time reduction state is likely to be given after the end of the jackpot. be able to. In addition, as shown in FIG. 182 (b), a horizontally-long substantially rectangular display area HR5 in which a character "Use a stock key when left-handed!" Is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. . According to these display contents, if a small hit occurs after exiting from the time reduction state (the number of time reductions has elapsed and the state has shifted to the normal state), a left hand should be performed in order to generate a V winning. Can be easily understood by the player.

  As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the small win that is won in the normal state is performed more than in the case where the big win (two kinds) is started by generating the V winning during the execution of the small win game that is won in the time reduction state. When the two kinds of winning are started by generating the V winning during the execution of the winning game, the rate at which the time saving state is given after the end of the big hit is increased. Then, during the time reduction state, it is configured to be able to suggest the degree of expectation that the time reduction state is given when the V prize is generated, by the effect mode (key image display mode). Thereby, when a small hit is won in the time saving state, it is extremely special, and it is possible to select whether to end the small hit without generating a V winning or to start a big hit by generating a V winning. A novel playability can be realized.

  In the seventh embodiment, the effect mode is changed between the time reduction state and the normal state after the time reduction state ends (the state where the reserved ball of the second special symbol exists), and the time reduction state ends. In the normal state after this, when the small hit is won, the effect mode is set to prompt (suggest) to make a left-handed (that is, a V-prize), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the time-saving state has not ended, an effect may be implemented in which an effect of prompting left-handing (V winning) is executed as soon as the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol reaches a maximum. If the reserve ball is the maximum, even if the time-saving state is not given after the end of the jackpot (that is, even if the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the normal state), the second special in the normal state after the end of the jackpot The expectation of the small hit is increased by the holding ball of the symbol (that is, the expectation that the two kinds of big hits can be started in the normal state where the time saving state is given a high rate is increased), which is advantageous for the player. It becomes. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In the seventh embodiment, when a small hit is won during the time saving state, a gaming method (left-handed) for generating a V winning (using a key) and a V winning in the sub display area Ds are performed. A game method (right-handed) for avoiding (using no key) is configured to mainly suggest to the player mainly by characters (see FIG. 182 (a)), but is limited to this. is not. The image displayed in the main display area Dm may also be configured to suggest the respective game methods (game methods for generating and avoiding the V winning) to the player. More specifically, for example, the display areas HR1 to HR4 and the arrow image YG are moved to the left in the main display area Dm, and four horizontally long rectangular display areas (display areas HRR1) similar to the display areas HR1 to HR4 are displayed. To HRR4) and an image simulating an arrow similar to the arrow image YG (arrow image YG2). Then, as in the seventh embodiment, an image of a key for opening the treasure box 802 is displayed on the left display areas HR1 to HR4, and the right display areas HRR1 to HRR4 are displayed on the right display areas HR1 to HRR4. A configuration in which an image imitating a bomb for blasting the treasure chest 802 may be displayed. The arrow image YG is configured by a left-pointing arrow pointing toward the display area HR4, and the arrow image YG12 is directed toward the bomb image displayed in the lowermost display area HRR4 of the right display areas HRR1 to HRR4. Alternatively, the right arrow may be used. With this configuration, if the player strikes right in accordance with the instruction of the arrow image YG2 imitating the rightward arrow, the treasure chest 802 can be blown up by the bomb, thereby terminating the small hit (avoiding the V winning). That is, the player can easily understand that. On the other hand, if the player performs left-handing according to the instruction of the arrow image YG imitating a left-pointing arrow, it is possible to open the treasure box 802 (generate a V prize) using the key displayed in the display area HR4. People can easily understand. That is, as the roles of the arrow image YG and the arrow image YG2, a role for indicating an item (key and bomb) used in the small hitting effect being executed, and a game method of the player for using the item (game A plurality of different roles, that is, a role for indicating a shooting direction of a sphere) can be assigned. Therefore, a display mode that is easy for the player to understand can be realized, and the display elements can be used efficiently, so that a more suitable effect mode can be realized.

<Electrical Configuration in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 183 (a) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 202 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 183 (a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the seventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 19 (a)) in that a small hit type selection table 202f and an open The difference is that the scenario table 202g is deleted. Also, the difference is that the specified contents of the first random number table 202a, the first random type selection table 202b, the second random number table 202c, the variation pattern table 202d, and the time saving table 202e are partially changed. .

  First, the details of the first hit type selection table 202a in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 (a) and (b). Although illustration is omitted, the first random number table 202a according to the seventh embodiment is similar to the first random number table 202a according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 21A). , And a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 for use in the lottery of the second special symbol. First, with reference to FIG. 184 (a), the contents of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the seventh embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 184 (a) is a diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the seventh embodiment. Like the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the first embodiment, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 defines a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 184 (a), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the seventh embodiment stores the counter value (random number value) of the first random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit. “0 to 9” is defined in association with the range. Therefore, in the lottery of the first special symbol, when the value of the first random number counter C1 is any one of “0 to 9”, it is determined that the big hit is detected, while any value of “0 to 9” is determined. If not (ie, any value of “10-999”), it is determined to be out of range. Of the 1000 counter values (random value) of “0 to 999” that the first random number counter C1 can take, the counter value (random value) determined to be a big hit is 10 of “0 to 9”. The probability of being determined as a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery is 1/100 (10/1000). Note that the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the seventh embodiment does not specify a random number value (counter value) determined to be a small hit, similarly to the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the first embodiment. Therefore, the probability of being determined as a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol (winning the small hit) is 0.

  Next, the details of the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 184 (b). Like the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in the first embodiment, the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 defines random numbers (judgment values) determined to be a big hit and a small hit in a lottery of the second special symbol. ing. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 184 (b), the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in the seventh embodiment includes “0 to 9” as the range of the counter value (random value) determined to be a big hit. Are defined in association with each other, and "10-989" is defined in association with the range of the counter value (random number value) determined to be a small hit. Among 1000 counter values (random value) of “0 to 999” that the first random number counter C1 can take, ten counter values (random value) determined to be a big hit are “0 to 9”, Since the counter value (random number value) determined to be a small hit is 980 of "10-989", the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the second special symbol lottery is 1/100 (10/1000), The probability of being determined as a small hit is 98/100 (980/1000). That is, in the seventh embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, it is configured to win the small hit almost (with a probability of 98/100). Therefore, in the time-saving state, since the small hit is won by the lottery of the special symbol almost every time, it is possible to more enjoy the gaming ability for the player to select whether or not to generate the V winning. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 184 (c), a description will be given of the contents of the second random number table 202c in the seventh embodiment. Like the second random number table 202c in the first embodiment, the second random number table 202c is a data table in which the range of the value of the second random number counter C4 that is determined to be a normal symbol hit is defined. is there. When the normal symbol lottery is executed, the random number value (counter value) defined in the second random number table 202c is compared with the value of the second random number counter C4 to determine whether the normal symbol hits. A lottery is performed.

  FIG. 184 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the second random number counter C4 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 184 (c), the second random number table 202c according to the seventh embodiment has a random number value (counter value) determined to be a normal symbol hit in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol. And a random number value (counter value) determined to be a hit of the normal symbol in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 184 (c), as random number values (counter values) determined to be hits of the ordinary symbol in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, 200 random numbers of “5-204” (Counter value) is defined. Of the 240 random numbers “0 to 239” that can be taken by the second random number counter C4, the number of random numbers determined to be a hit of a normal symbol is 200, so it is normal in a high probability state (time saving state) of a normal symbol. The probability of winning the symbol is 1 / 1.2 (200/240).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 184 (c), only “0” is defined as a random number value (counter value) determined to be a hit of a normal symbol in a high probability state of the normal symbol. Of the 240 random numbers “0 to 239” that can be taken by the second random number counter C4, there is one random number value that is determined to be a normal symbol hit. The probability of winning the symbol is 1/240.

  As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the probability of hitting a normal symbol in a low probability state (normal state) of a normal symbol is set to an extremely low probability. Therefore, it is possible to expect the game ball to enter the second entrance 6400 as a normal symbol hit, and to suppress the irregular game method of right-handing in the normal state. In the seventh embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, even if a lottery of a normal symbol is won in a low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 6400a is kept in an extremely short time (0 (One time for 2 seconds). As a result, even if the player hits right during the normal state, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is low, and even if the player hits, the game ball is almost entered into the second entrance 6400 Because it is not possible to do so, it is better to play a game ball with the left hit to enter the first ball entrance 64 and aim at a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol (right It does not pay even if you hit the ball). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method of right-handing during the normal state.

  Next, details of the first hit type selection table 202b in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Like the first hit type selection table 202b in the first embodiment, the first hit type selection table 202b is a data table referred to for specifying (determining) the big hit type when the big hit is won. FIG. 185 (a) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the first hit type selection table 202b.

  As shown in FIG. 185 (a), the first hit type selection table 202b according to the seventh embodiment includes a big hit type when a special symbol lottery results in a big hit (a so-called “direct hit” occurs). Table 202be1 for specifying (determining) a jackpot and a V-winning table 202be2 for specifying (determining) a jackpot type in the event of a jackpot based on the occurrence of a V winning. ing. First, the details of the direct hit table 202be1 will be described with reference to FIG. 185 (b).

  FIG. 185 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the direct hit table 202be1. As shown in FIG. 185 (b), in the seventh embodiment, as the jackpot types that can be determined when a jackpot has been won (a direct hit has occurred) in a special symbol lottery, a jackpot A7 and a jackpot B7 "is provided. The "big hit A7" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is four, and when the winning is made in the normal state, the time saving number of 10 times is given after the end of the big hit. On the other hand, the "big hit B7" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is four, and the normal state is set after the end of the big hit when a win is made in the normal state. Therefore, in the normal state, “big hit A7” is more advantageous to the player than “big hit B7” because the gaming state after the end of the big hit is more advantageous. In addition, in the time saving state, it is configured such that, regardless of which jackpot is won, an advantageous time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot. This is because if a direct hit occurs at a relatively early stage after the shift to the time saving state, whether the V winning, which is a characteristic of the seventh embodiment, is generated in the time saving state, Since it is not possible to fully enjoy the playability of selecting whether or not to make it, it is ensured that the player can enjoy the game in the time-saving state by making a configuration that always shifts to the time-saving state after the direct hit. It is the purpose. In other words, in order to prevent the player from being able to enjoy the game in the time reduction state sufficiently and transitioning to the normal state and disappointing the player, after the direct hit during the time reduction state, the time reduction state must be set. It is configured so that

  In addition, when a direct hit occurs, it is irrelevant to the type of the special symbol that triggered the direct hit (whether it is a jackpot by a lottery of the first special symbol or a jackpot by a lottery of the second special symbol). Then, one of "big hit A7" and "big hit B7" is specified only in accordance with the value of the first hit type counter C2. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 185 (b), “big hit A7” is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “0 to 49”, and “50 to "Big hit B7" is defined in association with the range of "99". That is, "big hit A7" and "big hit B7" are respectively associated with 50 values of the first hit type counter C2. Therefore, when a direct hit occurs, the ratio at which “big hit A7” is specified and the ratio at which “big hit B7” is specified are 50 and 50 (both 50%).

  Next, details of the V hitting table 202be2 will be described with reference to FIG. 185 (b). As described above, the V hitting table 202be2 specifies (selects) a type of a big hit executed based on the fact that a V winning has occurred in the small hitting game (the game ball has passed the V winning switch 6500e3). Is a data table in which the data is defined. FIG. 185 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the V hitting table 202be2. As shown in FIG. 185 (b), in the V hitting table 202be2, four types of jackpots, "big hit C7", "big hit D7", "big hit E7", and "big hit F7", are defined.

  As shown in FIG. 185 (c), “big hit C7” is defined in association with the value “0” of the first hit type counter C2. The "big hit C7" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 15 rounds, and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to a time-saving state advantageous to the player regardless of the game state at the time of winning. The "big hit C7" is the most successful big hit type for the player because the number of rounds is the largest among all the big hit types and the game state after the end of the big hit is also advantageous. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) from “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit C7” is one, The probability (ratio) that “big hit C7” is determined (selected) as the type of big hit that is started when a V winning occurs during execution of the small hit game is 1/100 (1%).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 185 (c), the "big hit D7" is defined in association with the range of the hit of the first hit type counter C2 of "1 to 4". The “big hit D7” has eight rounds of big hits, and when the winning is performed in the normal state, the game state after the end of the big hit is set to a time saving state advantageous to the player, while the winning is performed in the time saving state. In this case, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is a jackpot type set to a normal state disadvantageous to the player. The "big hit D7" has the second largest number of rounds after the "big hit C7", and if the game is won in the normal state, the gaming state after the end of the big hit is advantageous. It is. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) from “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit D7” is four. The probability (ratio) that “big hit D7” is determined (selected) as the type of big hit that is started when a V winning occurs during execution of the small hit game is 4/100 (4%).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 185 (c), the "big hit E7" is defined in association with the hit of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 29". The "big hit E7" has four rounds of big hits, and when a winning is made in the normal state, the gaming state after the end of the big hit is set to a time saving state advantageous to the player, while the winning is made in the time saving state. In this case, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is a jackpot type set to a normal state disadvantageous to the player. That is, this is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous in terms of the number of rounds than “big hit C7” and “big hit D7”, and the game state after the end of the big hit is the same as “big hit D7”. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) from “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit E7” is 25, The probability (proportion) that “big hit E7” is determined (selected) as the type of big hit that is started when a V winning occurs during execution of the small hit game is 25/100 (25%).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 185 (c), the "big hit F7" is defined in association with the hit of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "30 to 99". The "big hit F7" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is four and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to a normal state disadvantageous to the player regardless of the game state at the time of winning. That is, since the number of rounds is the smallest and the game state is disadvantageous, the jackpot type is the most disadvantageous for the player. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit F7” is 70, The probability (ratio) that “big hit F7” is determined (selected) as the type of big hit to be started when a V winning occurs during execution of the small hit game is 70/100 (70%).

  As described above, in the seventh embodiment, if a V prize occurs during a time reduction and a jackpot is won, an advantageous time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot if the distribution does not win the "big hit C7" of 1%. Never. On the other hand, in the normal state after the time saving state ends, when the small hit is won with the holding ball of the second special symbol and a V prize is generated, "big hit C7" (sorting 1%), "big hit D7" (Distribution 4%) or "big hit E7" (distribution 25%), so that an advantageous time-saving state is set after the end of the big hit. That is, the time saving state is set at a rate of 30%. Therefore, it is more likely that a V-prize is generated in the normal state than in the time reduction state, so that it is more likely to be an advantageous time reduction state. Therefore, a small hit is required until the time reduction state ends (the number of time reductions elapses). It can be configured to increase the degree of advantage when a special game method of continuing right-handing so as not to generate a V prize even if the winning is performed is performed. It should be noted that, even when the state shifts to the normal state, the time saving state is set only at a rate of 30% of the jackpot based on the V winning (the majority is set to the normal state). Seems to be difficult. However, if right-handing is continued until the time saving state ends, in most cases, it is possible to shift to the normal state with four reserved balls of the second special symbol accumulated, and In the lottery of the second special symbol, it is almost (at a rate of 98%) that a small hit is won. In other words, the jackpot chance based on the V winning is almost given four times. The probability of winning 30% of the "big hit C7" to "big hit E7" within four times is about 76% (the probability of all four times being "big hit F7" is 70% x 70% x 70% x (70% = 24%), it is possible to shift to the time saving state again at a relatively high rate. Therefore, it is possible to make the player want to end the time-saving state in a state where the hold is accumulated to the maximum.

  In addition, as soon as the hold reaches the maximum, even if a V prize is generated, the normal state is set almost after the big hit (at a rate of 99%). In other words, in the same manner as in the case of avoiding the V prize until the number of time reductions reaches 0, four chances for shifting to the time reduction state are given, and the V prize is avoided until the number of time reductions reaches 0. Since one big hit is obtained, the range of options for the game method of the player can be expanded. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 186 (a), details of the time savings grant table 202e in the seventh embodiment will be described. This time savings grant table 202e is a data table referred to for setting the number of time savings after the end of the big hit according to the big hit type and the gaming state at the time of the big hit winning. At the end of the jackpot, the value of the during-hours saving counter 203k is set with reference to the hourly savings table 202e. The value of the counter 203k during the working hours is decremented by one each time a special symbol lottery is executed and the fluctuation is stopped. When the value of the counter 203k during the working hours is 1 or more, the working hours are reduced, and a favorable state in which the game ball easily enters the second entrance 6400 by right-handing is formed. Transition to a disadvantageous normal state.

  FIG. 186 (a) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of this time saving table 202e. As shown in FIG. 186 (a), for the "big hit A7" won in the normal state, "10 times" is defined as the number of time savings granted, and for the "big hit A7" won in the time saving state. Even so, “10 times” is associated and defined as the number of times for saving time. For this reason, when the "big hit A7" is won, a time saving state advantageous to the player is set after the big hit is completed regardless of the gaming state.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 186 (a), for the "big hit B7" which has been won in the normal state, "0" is defined as the number of times to save the time, while the time has been won. For "big hit B7", "10 times" is defined in association with the number of time savings granted. For this reason, when a direct hit occurs in the normal state and the “big hit B7” is determined, the game shifts to a normal state disadvantageous to the player, while a direct hit occurs in the time reduction state and the “big hit B7” is determined. Then, the state shifts to a time saving state advantageous to the player. In addition, as shown in FIG. 186 (a), for the "big hit C7" won in the normal state and the time saving state, "10 times" is defined as the number of time savings granted in each case. For this reason, when the V winning occurs in the small hit and the “big hit C7” is determined, the state shifts to the advantageous time saving state after the end of the big hit regardless of the gaming state.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 186 (a), for the "big hit D7" which is won in the normal state, "10 times" is defined as the number of times for saving time, while the time is awarded in the time saving state. For the "big hit E7", 0 times are associated and defined as the number of time savings granted. In addition, the same number of time savings is also associated with “big hit E7”. For this reason, in the normal state, if a V prize occurs in a small hit and either “big hit D7” or “big hit E7” is determined, the time saving state after the end of the big hit is set to be advantageous. On the other hand, if these jackpot types are determined in the time state, the normal state in which the end of the jackpot is disadvantageous is set. Further, as shown in FIG. 186 (a), “0” is associated with “big hit F7” as the number of time savings, regardless of the gaming state. Therefore, in both the normal state and the time saving state, if the "big hit F7" is won, a disadvantageous normal state is set, which is disadvantageous to the player.

  In the seventh embodiment, regardless of the type of the special symbol, the number of time savings (that is, the value of the counter 203k during the time saving) is decremented by one each time a special symbol lottery is executed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured to be able to set different time saving times. In this case, when shifting to the time saving state, the number of times of the first special symbol may be set to, for example, five, and the number of times of the second special symbol may be set to ten. With this configuration, the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed up to ten times during the time reduction state, regardless of the number of balls reserved for the first special symbol at the time of transition to the time reduction state. That is, for example, when a "big hit A7" is won in a state where the reserved ball of the first special symbol is present, the reserved ball of the first special symbol exists at the time of transition to the time saving state, and is retained immediately after the end of the big hit. Even when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the number of lotteries of the second special symbol that can be executed during the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more entertainable in the playability of selecting whether or not to generate the V prize at the small hit, so that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  Next, details of the variation pattern table 202d in the seventh embodiment will be described. The configuration of the variation pattern table 202d in the seventh embodiment is the same as the configuration of the variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 23A) in the first embodiment, and is different from the variation pattern table 202d in the first embodiment. On the other hand, the only difference is that the prescribed content of the normal variation pattern table 202d1 and the prescribed content of the time-saving variation pattern table 202d2 are partially changed. The normal variation pattern table 202d1 in the seventh embodiment is different from the normal variation pattern table 202d1 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 23B) in that the variation pattern of the first special symbol is the same as the variation pattern of the second special pattern. The variation pattern of the symbol is also shared, and is configured so as to be unified with the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the first embodiment (a long variation of 180 seconds is not set in the lottery of the second special symbol). Only the differences are shown, and illustration and detailed description are omitted. In the normal state according to the seventh embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the long fluctuation is not performed as described above. This is because the player can select a game method of executing a second special symbol lottery in the state. In other words, a long fluctuation time is set when the player wins the small win in the time reduction state, avoids the V winning, ends the time reduction state, and then executes the second special symbol lottery. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game will be delayed and the interest of the player will be spoiled.

  Next, details of the time-saving variation pattern table 202d2 will be described with reference to FIG. 186 (b). FIG. 186 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the time-saving variation pattern table 202d in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 186 (b), in the variation pattern table 202d for time saving according to the seventh embodiment, the symbol type, the lottery result, and the value range of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with the variation pattern and defined. Have been.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 186 (b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is “missing”, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0” When the lottery result is “big hit”, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 198”. That is, a normal reach having a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is defined in association with the entire range. Therefore, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed during the time reduction state, the fluctuation is completed in a very short time, and when the ball is shifted to the time reduction state with the reserved ball of the first special symbol remaining. , The lottery of the first special symbol which cannot be won in the small win (that is, the player cannot choose to generate or avoid the V prize in the small win cannot be played) and finish the lottery of the first special symbol in a short period of time. Can be.

  When the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the lottery result is “missing” or “small hit”, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 149”. "Short deviation" with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is associated and defined, and "Long deviation" with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "150 to 189". The value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in association with the range of "190 to 195", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "196 to 198". Is defined in association with “super reach” having a fluctuation time of 15 seconds. That is, the comparison is made when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in the normal state (when the variation pattern of the first special symbol is determined with reference to the normal variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 23B)). Then, the fluctuation time when the lottery result is not a big hit is shortened. As a result, the game during the time reduction state can be speedily performed (digested), so that the game in the time reduction state can be suppressed from becoming redundant.

  As shown in FIG. 186 (b), when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "big hit", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 49". In contrast, “normal reach” with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is associated and defined, and “super reach” with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds corresponds to the range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of “50 to 194”. A "special reach" with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined in association with the range of the variation type counter CS1 being "195 to 198". In other words, even when a big win is obtained in the second special symbol lottery during the time saving state, a shorter fluctuation time is set as compared with the case where the special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state. I have. This makes it possible to more reliably prevent the game in the time reduction state from becoming redundant.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 183 (b). FIG. 183 (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 203 according to the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 183 (b), the configuration of the RAM 203 in the seventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 19 (b)) in that a special symbol 2 holding sphere storage area 203a2 is provided. The difference is that a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203ea, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb, and a winning state storage area 203ec are added. Further, the difference is that the small hitting A counter 203m, the small hitting B counter 203n, the small hitting C counter 203p, and the ordinary figure short fluctuation flag 203q in the RAM 203 of the first embodiment are deleted.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2 is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol. More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the second entrance 6400, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area. Among the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area) constituting 203a2, the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2 is transferred to the execution area. It is shifted (moved), and based on each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made. Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for holding areas (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 is a counter that counts the reserved balls based on a game ball winning the second entrance 6400, and the other configuration is the same as the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b. Therefore, the detailed description is omitted.

  Note that the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2 and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 are added for mounting the reserved memory of the second special symbol which is not mounted in the first embodiment. .

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203ea has four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203a2. . In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored. More specifically, at the timing when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained, and the obtained data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In the vacant areas of the (areas), the areas are stored in ascending order of the area numbers (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a lottery for a normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203ea is changed to the normal symbol. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 stored (stored) in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is performed based on the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area. Done.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2, Of the winning prize stored in the reserved area of the area No. is shifted to the reserved area having the smaller area number. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203eb counts up to four times the number of holding balls (the number of standbys) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb (the number of times M of variable display is retained in the normal symbol) is set to zero, and the ball passes through the through gate 67 to increase the number of retained balls of variable display. Each time it is performed, 1 is added to the maximum value 4 (see S1013 in FIG. 191). On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203e is 4, which is the maximum value, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c (FIG. 191 S1012: No). Further, the counter value of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203eb is decremented by 1 each time a new variable display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S933 of FIG. 190).

  The winning state storage area 203ec is a storage area for storing information indicating a gaming state at the time of winning a jackpot. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (that is, if the value of the counter 203k during time-saving is 0), the information indicating the normal state is stored in the winning state storage area 203ec. “00H” is stored. On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time reduction state (that is, if the value of the during-time reduction counter 203k is 1 or more), the winning state storage area 203ec stores "01H" as information indicating the time reduction state. Is stored. The information stored in the winning state storage area 203ec is retained until the end of the jackpot, and is referred to when setting the gaming state (ie, the number of times of saving time) after the end of the jackpot (see S1621 in FIG. 192). ).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 187, a description will be given of a method of shifting each state in the seventh embodiment. Here, in the seventh embodiment, two game states are provided. That is, there are provided two types of game states, a normal game state (normal state) in which a normal state of a normal symbol is set, and a time reduction game state (time reduction state) in which a time reduction state of a normal symbol is set. In addition, in the normal gaming state, the degree of advantage greatly differs between the normal gaming state in which the reserved ball of the second special symbol exists immediately after the end of the time saving state and the normal gaming state in which the reserved ball of the second special symbol does not exist. Is configured. That is, if there is at least one reserved ball of the second special symbol, a small hit or a big hit is almost won (at a rate of 99%). Form an advantageous state. In the following description, for the sake of simplicity, the normal gaming state in which the reserved ball of the second special symbol does not exist is referred to as “normal mode”, and the normal gaming state in which the retaining ball of the second special symbol exists is described. This is referred to as "stock release mode" in the sense that the game is played using the reserved ball of the second special symbol stored (stocked) during the time reduction state, and the time reduction game state is represented by V during the time reduction state. Meaning that a game is performed by selecting (selecting) one of a game property in which a winning is generated and a big hit is executed, and a game property in which a V winning is avoided during a small hit and the game shifts to a “stock open mode”. Is referred to as “select mode”.

  First, with reference to the upper part of FIG. 187, a description will be given of a method of shifting from the normal mode (the normal game state in which the reserved ball of the second special symbol does not exist) to another state (mode). As shown in the upper part of FIG. 187, there is a possibility that the mode is shifted from the normal mode to another mode only when the special symbol lottery has a big hit (direct hit). More specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 187, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol and the "jackpot A7" is won at a rate of 50%, the mode after the end of the jackpot is advantageous. Select mode (time saving game state) is set. On the other hand, when the "big hit B7" is won at a rate of 50% when the first special symbol is a lottery, the mode after the end of the big hit is set to the normal mode again disadvantageous to the player. (Loop normal mode). For this reason, in the normal mode, it is possible to cause the player to play a game in expectation of winning the “big hit A7” in the lottery of the first special symbol.

  In the select mode (time saving game state), as shown in the middle part of FIG. 187, when a small hit is won and a V prize is generated, a big hit occurs, and when the number of time savings elapses (ends). May shift to another mode. More specifically, as shown in the middle section of FIG. 187, a small symbol is won by a lottery of a special symbol, and two kinds (per V) are won by generating a V prize. If any one of F7 is reached, the mode shifts to either the normal mode or the stock release mode after the end of the big hit. That is, if the number of retained balls of the second special symbol is 0 at the end of the jackpots D7 to F7, the mode shifts to the normal mode after the end of the jackpot, while the second special symbol is retained at the end of the jackpots D7 to F7. If the number of balls is one or more, the mode shifts to the stock release mode after the end of the big hit. Similarly, when the number of time savings has elapsed (finished), if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 when the number of time savings has elapsed, the mode shifts to the normal mode, while the number of time savings has elapsed. If the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is one or more at the time, the mode shifts to the stock release mode. For this reason, in the time reduction state, it is possible to play the game while paying attention so that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol does not become zero. In other words, it is possible to positively perform a right-handing so that more game balls enter the second entrance 6400, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In addition, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 187, when a direct hit occurs, or when a big hit C7 of 1% and a distribution of 1% is determined per two kinds, the gaming state after the end of the big hit is again set. Set to select mode.

  Further, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 187, in the stock release mode, when a big hit (direct hit or V hit) is won, there is a possibility that the mode is shifted to another mode. More specifically, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 187, when a direct hit occurs and the big hit A7 is determined, the mode shifts to the advantageous select mode after the big hit end. In addition, if it is a direct hit, the big hit B7 is determined, and if the reserved ball of the second special symbol is 0 at the end of the big hit, the mode shifts to the normal mode after the end of the big hit. Further, during the execution of the small hitting game, a V prize is generated and two kinds of winnings are performed (per V), and if any of the big hits C7 to E7 is determined, the mode after the big hit is set to the select mode. You. In addition, the jackpot F7 is determined as a winning type of two kinds (per V), and if there is no reserved ball of the second special symbol at the end of the jackpot F7, the game shifts to the disadvantageous normal mode after the end of the jackpot. I do. On the other hand, if the jackpot is the big hit B7 or the big hit F7, and at the end of the big hit there is one or more reserved balls of the second special symbol, the mode after the big hit ends becomes the stock release mode again.

  As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the three modes having different degrees of advantage for the player according to the jackpot type and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol at the end of the jackpot (or at the time when the number of time savings has elapsed). To shift to any one of the modes. Therefore, since various mode transitions can be realized, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

<Control Process of Main Control Device in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 188 to 192. In the seventh embodiment, the second special symbol holding function is added to the first embodiment, so that the content of the start winning process (see FIG. 43) is also changed. The same modification as in the start winning processing 2 (see FIG. 96) in the second embodiment (an embodiment having a second special symbol holding function as in the seventh embodiment) described above is performed. Here, detailed description of the start winning process in the seventh embodiment will be omitted. First, with reference to FIG. 188, the special symbol variation processing 7 (S121 in FIG. 188) according to the seventh embodiment will be described. This special symbol variation process 7 (S121) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38, S104) in the first embodiment, and is a special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) in the first embodiment. This is a process for setting the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b in the same manner as in ()).

  In the special symbol variation process 7 (S121) in the seventh embodiment, in each process of S201, S202, S206 to S218, and S220, S201 of the special symbol variation process (see FIGS. 38 and S104) in the first embodiment is respectively performed. , S202, S206 to S218, and S220.

  In the special symbol change process 7 (S121) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S202 that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S202: No), the special symbol 1 The value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203b (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol 1 is held) and the value of the special-design 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 (the number of times N2 of the variable display in the special symbol 2 are held) are acquired (S231).

  Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 is greater than 0 (S232), and it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 is 0. In this case (S232: No), the process proceeds to S206. On the other hand, in the process of S232, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 is larger than 0 (S232: Yes), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 ( N2) is decremented by 1 (S233), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 changed by the calculation is set (S234).

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S234, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2 is shifted (S235). In the process of S235, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2 to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S210.

  In the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 188) in the seventh embodiment, in the process of S213, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S213: No), then, the time-saving mid-counter 203k It is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (S236), and if it is determined that the value of the counter 203k during time reduction is greater than 0 (S236: Yes), the value of the counter 203k during time reduction is decremented by one ( S237), the process proceeds to S220. On the other hand, in the process of S236, when it is determined that the value of the during-hours counter 203k is 0 (S236: No), the process of S237 is skipped and the process proceeds to S220.

  In the process of S220, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small hit (S220). When it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit (S220: Yes), a small hit start setting process 7 is executed instead of the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment (S238). ), And the process proceeds to S218. The details of the small hit start setting process 7 will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S220, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S220: No), the process of S238 is skipped and the process proceeds to S218.

  Next, the small hit start setting processing 7 (S238 in FIG. 189) executed in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The small hit start setting process 7 (S238 in FIG. 189) is a process executed in place of the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 40, S221) in the first embodiment, and is a small hit start in the first embodiment. Similar to the setting process, this is a process for setting the start of the small hit game.

  In the small hit start setting process 7 (S238) in the seventh embodiment, the processes of S401 and S404 are respectively performed in S401 and S404 of the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 40, S221) in the first embodiment. The same processing as the processing is performed. In the small hit start setting process 7 (S238) of the seventh embodiment, when the process of S401 is completed, next, the V hitting table 202be2 of the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 185 (c)) Is stored in the V-passage jackpot type storage area 203h (S411), the start of small hits is set (S412), and the process proceeds to S404.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 190, the ordinary symbol variation process 7 (S122 in FIG. 190) executed in the seventh embodiment will be described. The ordinary symbol variation process 7 (S122 in FIG. 190) is a process executed in place of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 45, S106) in the first embodiment, and is the ordinary symbol variation process (see S106 in the first embodiment). Similarly to FIG. 45), the second symbol display device 83 controls the variable display and the variable time of the second symbol, the opening operation and the opening time of the electric accessory 6400a attached to the second entrance 6400, and the like. This is the process.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process 7 (S122) in the seventh embodiment, in the processes of S901, S902, S906 to S910 and S912 to 920, the ordinary symbol variation process in the first embodiment (see FIGS. 45 and S106), respectively. The same processes as those of S901, S902, S906 to S910 and S912 to 920 are executed. In the normal symbol change process 7 (S122) in the seventh embodiment, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not changing in the process of S902 (S902: No), the normal symbol holding ball number counter The value of 203eb (the number of times M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol is suspended) is acquired (S931). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203eb is greater than 0 (S932). If the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203eb is 0 (S932: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203eb is not 0 (S932: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203eb is decremented by 1 (S933).

  When the process of S933 is completed, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding sphere storage area 203ea is shifted (S934). In the process of S934, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203ea toward the execution area is performed. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203ea is acquired (S935).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in a time saving state (S936). In the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, if the value of the time reduction counter 203k is 1 or more, it is determined that the symbol is in the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol, while if the value of the time reduction counter 203k is 0. Is determined to be the normal state of the normal symbol.

  In the process of S936, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S936: Yes), the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S936 and the random number per normal symbol table for high probability time are stored. Based on the result, a lottery result of whether or not the symbol is a normal symbol is obtained (S937), and the process proceeds to S906. In the process of S937, specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal random number table per symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (see FIG. 184 (c)).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S936 that the time is not in the normal symbol time saving state (S936: No), then, the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the processing of S935 and the value of the normal symbol for low probability time Based on the random number table, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol is won is obtained (S938), and the process proceeds to S906. In the process of S938, specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the low random probability per-symbol random number table. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “0”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of “1 to 239”, it is out of the normal symbol. (See FIG. 184 (c)).

  Next, the through gate passage processing 7 (S123 in FIG. 191) in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This through gate passage process 7 (S123 in FIG. 191) is a process executed in place of the through gate passage process (see S107 in FIG. 46) in the first embodiment, and indicates whether or not a game ball passes through the through gate 67. This is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 and storing the value in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203ea when the game ball has passed.

  In the through-gate passage process 7 (S123) in the seventh embodiment, in the process of S1001, the same processes as those in S1001 of the through-gate passage process (see FIG. 46, S107) in the first embodiment are executed. You. In the through gate passage process 7 (S123) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1001 that the game ball has passed the normal entrance 67 (S1001: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter The value of 203eb (the number of times M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol is suspended) is acquired (S1011). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203eb is smaller than 4 (S1012), and the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203eb is 4 (that is, 4). If it is (upper limit value) (S1012: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203eb is smaller than 4 (S1012: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203eb is incremented by 1 (S1013). The value of the random number counter C4 per 2 is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203ea (S1014), and thereafter, the present process is terminated.

  Next, the big hit control process 7 (S1521 in FIG. 192) according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This jackpot control process 7 (S1521 in FIG. 192) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process (see S1504 in FIG. 52) in the first embodiment, and is a jackpot control process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment. This is a process for performing various settings during the execution of the jackpot game, as in the case of ()).

  In the big hit control process 7 (S1521) in the seventh embodiment, in each of the processes S1601 to S1612 and S1615 to S1618, S1601 to S1612 and S1615 of the big hit control process (see FIG. 52, S1504) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as the processing from S1618 to S1618 is executed. In the big hit control process 7 (S1521) according to the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1612 that the ending effect (ending period) is the end timing (S1612: Yes), the big hit type being executed is determined. The number of times saved corresponding to the data in the winning state storage area 203ec is read from the time saving table 202e (see FIG. 186 (a)) (S1621), and the read number of times saved is set as the counter value of the during-time counter 203k. (S1622), and proceeds to the process of S1615.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment>
Next, control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 1113 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 193 to 195. First, with reference to FIG. 193, the winning information related processing 7 (S2221 in FIG. 193) executed in the seventh embodiment will be described. The prize information related process 7 (S2221 in FIG. 193) is a process executed in place of the prize information related process (see S2210 in FIG. 57) in the first embodiment, and is a process executed in the first embodiment. Like FIG. 57), this is a process for performing control according to the winning information command received from the main control device 110.

  Of the winning information-related processing 7 (S2221) in the seventh embodiment, in the respective processing of S2301, S2302, S2311, and S2312, S2301 and S2302 of the winning information-related processing (see FIG. 57, S2210) in the first embodiment, respectively. , S2311 and S2312 are executed.

  In the winning information-related process 7 (S2221) in the seventh embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S2302 that the read gaming state is the time saving state (S2302: Yes), then the received winning information command is received. Is a command indicating winning information of the second special symbol (S2321). If it is determined in the process of S2321 that the command is a command indicating winning information of the second special symbol (S2321: Yes), a key mode corresponding to the lottery result notified by the winning information command is specified (S2322). The display of the key image in the specified mode is set (S2324), and the flow shifts to the process of 2311. On the other hand, in the processing of S2321, if it is determined that the winning information command received this time is not a command indicating the winning information of the second special symbol (S2321: No), the processing of S2322 and S2324 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S2311. Transition.

  Next, the hit-related process 7 (S2222 in FIG. 194) according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The hit-related process 7 (S2222 in FIG. 194) is a process executed in place of the hit-related process (see S2212 in FIG. 58) in the first embodiment, and is a hit-related process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 58). As in the case of ()), when a command related to a hit is received from the main control device 110, this is a process for executing control according to the type of the received command.

  Of the hit-related processes 7 (S2222) in the seventh embodiment, in the processes of S2401 to S2409 and S2411 to S2418, S2401 to S2409 and S2411 of the hit-related processes (see FIG. 58, S2212) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as the processing of steps S2418 to S2418 is executed. In the hit-related process 7 (S2222) of the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S2409 that the small hit start command is received (S2409: Yes), the small hit start command process is executed (S2421). ), And thereafter, this processing ends. Details of the small hit start command processing (S2421) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing the small hit start command processing (S2421) described above. In the small hit start command processing (S2421), first, the information stored in the gaming state storage area 223f is read (S3901), and then it is determined whether or not the read information is information indicating a time saving state. (S3902). In the process of S3902, when it is determined that the read information is the information indicating the time saving state (S3902: Yes), the start of the small hit effect for the select mode (see FIG. 182 (a)) is set (S3903). After that, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3902, when it is determined that the read information is not the information indicating the time saving state (determined as the information indicating the normal state) (S3902: No), the small hitting effect for the stock release mode ( The start of FIG. 182 (b) is set (S3904), and the process ends thereafter.

  By executing the small hit start command processing (see FIG. 195), the small hit effect can be made different depending on whether the small hit is a win in the normal state or the small hit in the time reduction state. It is possible to realize a playability in which a player can select whether or not to generate a V winning based on a presentation mode.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, it is more advantageous for a player to make a jackpot in a disadvantageous normal state than in a favorable time-saving state as a game state after the end of the jackpot. It is configured such that a short time-saving gaming state is easily set. That is, in the lottery of the second special symbol which is easily executed during the time saving state, the small hit is won with a high probability, and the time saving state is given when the big win is started by generating the V winning in the small hit. Is configured so that a small hit in the normal state is higher than a small hit in the time reduction state. In other words, knowing the risk that the possibility of being in the time reduction state is low, the first game method in which a small hit is won in the time reduction state and a V winning is generated by left-handing as soon as the small hit is won to execute the big hit, and the time reduction state ends. Aware of the risk of taking time and holding a ball before letting them go, end the time-saving state while keeping a lot of reserved balls of the second special symbol, and generate a V prize with a small hit after the end of the time-saving state And the second game method can be selected by the player.

  Here, in a general gaming machine, the advantage degree in the case of a big hit in an advantageous state (for example, a time saving state) is equal to or more than the advantage degree in the case of a big hit in an unfavorable state (for example, a normal state). Since the specification is normal, in the case of transition to the advantageous state, in most cases, the player plays a game with strong expectation of a big hit during the advantageous state. For this reason, when the advantageous state ends and shifts to the disadvantageous state, the player may be discouraged, and the motivation of the player for the game may be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, since the lottery of the second special symbol executed after the advantageous time-saving state is completed is configured to have a higher degree of expectation to shift to the time-saving state, It is possible to make the player want to win the jackpot with the reserved ball of the second special symbol after finishing the time saving state. That is, in the case of a small hit in the time reduction state, in addition to the option of making the player win a V toward the left to win the big hit, the player can intentionally return to the normal state by avoiding the V winning in the small hit during the time reduction. To the player. Therefore, a very special and novel game method of intentionally avoiding a big hit can be given as one of the options, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  In the seventh embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be almost a win (98/100), but the small hit probability may be arbitrarily determined. For example, you may comprise so that it may become a small hit in 1/4. In the case of such a configuration, even if an attempt is made to aim for a V prize with a small hit after shifting to the normal state, there is a high possibility that the second special symbol will not be won due to the holding of the special symbol. As soon as the small hit occurs, a larger number of players can select a game method of generating a V winning and executing a big hit. Instead of lowering the probability of small hits, the balance may be achieved by increasing the percentage of time savings given in the case of two hits in the normal state (for example, 80%). Further, instead of lowering the small hit probability (to 1/4), the rate of occurrence of the V prize when the left hit is performed in the small hit is reduced (for example, only about once in every four small hits). (To prevent winning) from occurring. This allows more players to select the game method of terminating the time saving state.

  In the seventh embodiment, when a V prize is generated during a time saving state and a prize is won per V, the game state after the end of the big hit is set to a disadvantageous normal state at a rate of 99% regardless of the number of time savings. Was configured to be. That is, during the period from when the time saving state is set to when the number of time savings elapses (specific conditions are satisfied), the degree of advantage when winning per V is lower than after the number of time savings has elapsed (after the specific conditions are satisfied). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even in the time reduction state, a configuration in which the rate of the reduction in the time reduction when the winning is achieved per V becomes high (for example, 30% similar to the case where the winning per V is obtained in the normal state) may occur. You may. More specifically, for example, when a small hit is won in the latter half (for example, the last three special symbol lotteries) in the time saving state, and a V prize is generated in the small hit and the V hit occurs, Alternatively, a configuration may be employed in which the time reduction state is provided at a relatively high rate as in the normal state. Conversely, when a small hit is won in the first half (for example, the first two special symbol lotteries) in the time saving state, and a V prize is generated in the small hit, and the V hit occurs, the normal state is set. Similarly to the above, a configuration in which the time saving state is given at a relatively high rate may be adopted.

  In the seventh embodiment, the configuration is such that the small hit can be won only by the lottery of the second special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to win a small hit. With this configuration, even when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, it is possible to expect that a small hit is won, so that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In the seventh embodiment, when shifting to the time-saving state, the time-saving state is ended when a total of ten special symbol lotteries are executed regardless of the type of the special symbol in which the lottery is executed. Although it was comprised, it is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a different number of time savings is set for each type of special symbol (for example, the first special symbol is five times and the second special symbol is ten times). That is, the number of lotteries of the second special symbol until the time saving state ends may be set to be the same regardless of the number of the reserved balls of the first special symbol at the time of shifting to the time saving state. With such a configuration, in the time saving state, it is possible to make the number of times of gaming to select whether to generate or not to win a V prize the same every time.

  In the seventh embodiment, the effect state is changed between the time reduction state and the normal state after the time reduction state ends (the state where the reserved ball of the second special symbol exists), and after the time reduction state ends. In the normal state, an effect mode is set to prompt (suggest) to perform a left-hand (that is, a V-prize) when a small hit is won, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the time-saving state has not ended, an effect may be implemented in which an effect of prompting left-handing (V winning) is executed as soon as the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol reaches a maximum. If the reserve ball is the maximum, even if the time-saving state is not given after the end of the jackpot (that is, even if the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the normal state), the second special in the normal state after the end of the jackpot The expectation of the small hit is increased by the holding ball of the symbol (that is, the expectation that the two kinds of big hits can be started in the normal state where the time saving state is given a high rate is increased), which is advantageous for the player. It becomes. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In the seventh embodiment, when a small hit is won during the time saving state, a gaming method (left-handed) for generating a V winning (using a key) and a V winning in the sub display area Ds are performed. A game method (right-handed) for avoiding (using no key) is configured to mainly suggest to the player mainly by characters (see FIG. 182 (a)), but is limited to this. is not. The image displayed in the main display area Dm may also be configured to suggest the respective game methods (game methods for generating and avoiding the V winning) to the player. More specifically, for example, the display areas HR1 to HR4 and the arrow image YG are moved to the left in the main display area Dm, and four horizontally long rectangular display areas (display areas HRR1) similar to the display areas HR1 to HR4 are displayed. To HRR4) and an image simulating an arrow similar to the arrow image YG (arrow image YG2). Then, as in the seventh embodiment, an image of a key for opening the treasure box 802 is displayed on the left display areas HR1 to HR4, and the right display areas HRR1 to HRR4 are displayed on the right display areas HR1 to HRR4. A configuration in which an image imitating a bomb for blasting the treasure chest 802 may be displayed. The arrow image YG is configured by a left-pointing arrow pointing toward the display area HR4, and the arrow image YG12 is directed toward the bomb image displayed in the lowermost display area HRR4 of the right display areas HRR1 to HRR4. Alternatively, the right arrow may be used. With this configuration, if the player strikes right in accordance with the instruction of the arrow image YG2 imitating the rightward arrow, the treasure chest 802 can be blown up by the bomb, thereby terminating the small hit (avoiding the V winning). That is, the player can easily understand that. On the other hand, if the player performs left-handing according to the instruction of the arrow image YG imitating a left-pointing arrow, it is possible to open the treasure box 802 (generate a V prize) using the key displayed in the display area HR4. People can easily understand. That is, as the roles of the arrow image YG and the arrow image YG2, a role for indicating an item (key and bomb) used in the small hitting effect being executed, and a game method of the player for using the item (game A plurality of different roles, that is, a role for indicating a shooting direction of a sphere) can be assigned. Therefore, a display mode that is easy for the player to understand can be realized, and the display elements can be used efficiently, so that a more suitable effect mode can be realized.

  In the seventh embodiment, only two types of gaming states, a normal state and a time reduction state, are provided. In the case of winning in the normal state, the player wins per V than in the time reduction state. Has been configured to increase the rate at which the advantageous time-saving state is provided, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to these two types of gaming states, a so-called probable state or a latent state is provided to increase the degree of advantage in the case where the latent state has a bigger hit than the probable state, or to provide a probable state. It may be possible to increase the degree of advantage in the case where the time saving state has a bigger hit than in the time saving state. With this configuration, it is possible to expect a big hit in a relatively disadvantageous state while realizing more various state transitions, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Eighth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described seventh embodiment is configured so that, in a time-saving state advantageous to the player, when a right-handed hit is performed, almost only the second special symbol lottery is executed.

  On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, in an advantageous time-saving state, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are configured to be executed. The time saving state is configured to end more easily when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed than when the lottery is executed. More specifically, the time-saving ending condition (the number of time savings of the second special symbol) based on the number of lotteries of the second special symbol is less than the time saving ending condition (the number of time savings of the first special symbol) based on the number of lotteries of the first special symbol. It was configured to reduce the number of times. On the other hand, the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to have a higher probability of a small hit than the lottery of the first special symbol. The total expectation degree) is configured to be higher in the second special symbol lottery. Thus, if the lottery of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, the jackpot expectation is increased, but the game shortens the time-saving state so that it is easy to finish early, while the lottery of the first special symbol is prioritized. , The jackpot expectation degree is reduced, but the gaming property is that the time saving state can be enjoyed for a longer time. Therefore, it is possible to select a game characteristic according to the preference of each player.

  In the eighth embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol is configured to be executed in preference to the lottery of the second special symbol. In the case of the first special symbol, it is difficult to satisfy the condition for ending the time saving state (the number of time savings is large), and after the lottery of the first special symbol having the low jackpot expectation is continuously executed, the second special having the high jackpot expectation is performed. A symbol lottery is executed. That is, in the latter half of the advantageous time-saving state (and at the time of holding the second special symbol after completion), an extremely novel gaming property in which the jackpot expectation degree is higher can be realized. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment in the configuration in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is different. Is partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. And the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the following. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the seventh embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 196, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 196, in the eighth embodiment, the V prize device 6500 is provided (moved) on the right side of the game board 13 (a position where a game ball fired by right hitting can enter the ball) on the game board 13. ). The structure, open pattern, and the like of the V winning device 6500 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment. That is, in the eighth embodiment, similarly to the seventh embodiment, during the execution of the small hitting game, by simply firing the game ball to the V winning device 6500, a V winning is almost generated and the winning per V is achieved. Configuration. In other words, the specification is such that winning a small hit and winning a big hit are almost equal. Also, the second entrance 6400 is deleted, and instead, the distribution winning award device 700, which is also provided on the game board 13 (see FIG. 169) in the sixth embodiment on the right side of the board of the game board 13, the right first The difference is that a ball entrance 64a2 and a right second ball entrance 64b are provided. The distribution winning device 700, the first right entrance 64a2, and the second right entrance 64b have been described with reference to FIG. 170 and the like in the sixth embodiment, and therefore, detailed description thereof will be given here. Is omitted.

  Although details will be described later, in the eighth embodiment, a period during which the game ball easily enters the first operation port 704 as a hit of a normal symbol (when the switching valve 702 is switched to the first switching state). During which the electric accessory 701 is opened (period A8), and a period during which the game ball easily enters the second operating height 704 (the switching valve 702 switches to the second switching state). (Period B8) during which the electric accessory 702 is opened. Then, when a normal symbol is hit in the time reduction state, 80% becomes A8 per ordinary figure and 20% becomes B8 per ordinary figure. That is, in the time saving state, the frequency (opportunity) of opening the right first entrance 64a2 is greater than that of the right second entrance 64b. With this configuration, when the player keeps right-handing continuously in the time saving state, the lottery of the first special symbol can be executed with higher priority. In other words, only by performing a relatively simple game method of continuing to make a right-handed hit, the lottery of the first special symbol having a low expectation is first performed intensively, and then the second special symbol having a high expectation is performed. A lottery can be executed. Therefore, after the shift to the time saving state, a relatively long period of time (until the special symbol lottery is executed 96 times) in a state in which the jackpot expectation degree is low first (only the direct hit can be won). After the game is played, the game can be played for a relatively short period of time in a state of high jackpot expectation (both direct hit and V hit can occur). Therefore, even if the lottery of the first special symbol does not win in 96 times, the player is allowed to play the game with a sense of security that the lottery of the second special symbol, which has a higher degree of expectation, is refraining later. A novel playability can be realized.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 197 and FIG. 198, a description will be given of a characteristic effect in the time-saving state according to the eighth embodiment. As described above, in the eighth embodiment, by making the small winning probability different between the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol, the occurrence rate of the big hit by the V prize (the probability of winning per V) ) Is changed, and the lottery of the second special symbol is substantially higher than the lottery of the first special symbol. Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment, the second special symbol is configured so that the number of times reduced is less than the first special symbol, and only the lottery of the second special symbol having a high degree of expectation is executed. The advantageous time-saving state is easily completed relatively early, and the lottery of the first special symbol is executed so that the time-saving state can be enjoyed for a relatively long time. In the eighth embodiment, the specification (the lottery of the first special symbol has a low jackpot expectation and the time saving state is difficult to end, while the lottery of the second special symbol has a high jackpot expectation, This is a configuration that suggests to the player by the effect that the time-saving state is likely to end.

  FIG. 197 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode during the time saving state in the eighth embodiment. Here, even in the time saving state in the eighth embodiment, mainly the same variation pattern effects as those in the first embodiment and the seventh embodiment described above are executed. That is, each time a special symbol lottery is executed, an effect in which the boy character 801 searches for a treasure box is executed as part of a variable display effect (variable pattern effect) for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery. Then, if the lottery result is a small hit (or a big hit), an effect of finding a treasure box is executed. During the execution of the small hit game, the game ball enters the V winning device 6500 and after the small hit, the big hit ( When the start of the (two types) is determined, the effect of successfully opening the treasure box 802 is executed, and the V display 803 indicating that the big hit game is set from the treasure box 802 appears (FIG. 13). (Refer to (a)).

  In addition, in the eighth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 197 (a), in the first display area Ds1 in the sub display area Ds, a reserved symbol of the first special symbol and a reserved symbol of the second special symbol are displayed. Are displayed up to four at a time. FIG. 197 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which three reserved balls of the first special symbol and zero reserved balls of the second special symbol are displayed. The reserved ball of the first special symbol is displayed in a substantially circular shape on the upper side in the first display area Ds1, and the reserved ball of the second special symbol is displayed in a substantially equilateral triangle on the lower side in the first display area Ds1. . Due to this difference in shape, the player can easily distinguish the reserved ball of the first special symbol from the reserved ball of the second special symbol. In addition, as shown in FIG. 197 (a), a running symbol Dsa for indicating the type of the special symbol in the running variable display is displayed in the center of the sub display area Ds. Note that in the example of FIG. 197 (a), a symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, which is a substantially circular shape and in which a character “N” is displayed (ie, the first symbol) is displayed. (A state in which a special symbol lottery is executed). Further, as shown in FIG. 197 (a), in the second display area Ds2 formed on the right side of the sub display area Ds, the character “Right-handed“ Normal ”reserved digestion” is displayed. According to these display contents, the right-handed hit in the time-saving state with respect to the player makes it easier to digest the reserved ball of the first special symbol (the lottery of the first special symbol is the second special symbol). Is configured to be executed prior to the lottery).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 197 (a), a display region HR10 having a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape is formed at the upper center of the main display region Dm. In the display area HR10, the remaining number of times of the first special symbol and the remaining number of times of the second special symbol are displayed. The example of FIG. 197 (a) illustrates a situation where the number of times of the first special symbol is 94 and the number of lotteries of the second special symbol is four. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 197 (a), above the display area HR10, a reserved symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (a symbol having a substantially circular shape, in which the character “N” is displayed inside) ) Are displayed on the right side of the image imitating ()). Also, in the center of the display area HR10, on the right side of the image simulating a reserved symbol (a symbol having the shape of a regular triangle and the character “Heat” displayed inside) corresponding to the second special symbol, “Remaining four times” Is displayed. Further, below the display area HR10, the characters "RUSH end when either becomes 0 !?" are displayed. These display contents allow the player to easily understand the number of time savings (time saving end conditions) for each special symbol.

  FIG. 197 (b) is a diagram illustrating a display mode in a case where a start winning prize for the right second entrance 64b is first detected in the time saving state. As shown in FIG. 197 (b), when a game ball enters the second entrance 64b and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases, the first display region Ds1 of the sub display region Ds A reserved symbol of a second special symbol (a symbol having a substantially equilateral triangle shape and the letters "heat") is displayed. In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the character "heat" is generally used as a type of character indicating that the jackpot is highly expected, so the character "medium" displayed on the reserved symbol of the first special symbol is displayed. By comparing the character "HEAT" displayed on the reserved symbol of the second special symbol with the player, it is intuitive to the player that the lottery of the second special symbol has a higher expectation of the jackpot. Can be understood.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 197 (b), when there is one or more reserve balls of the second special symbol, the left display “Determination of“ heat ”reserve digestion! ? Is additionally displayed. This allows the player to select whether to digest the reserved ball of the first special symbol or digest the reserved ball of the second special symbol depending on the firing direction. Therefore, it is possible to play a game by a game method that suits the preference of each player, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that suits the preferences of a wide range of players. Specifically, for example, for a player who wants to execute a lottery of a second special symbol having a high expectation rather than executing a lottery of a first special symbol having a low expectation, the right second entry A game method (a second special symbol of the second special symbol is performed) in which a start winning prize for the ball opening 64b is detected, and a left-handed (or firing stop) is performed every time the reserved symbol of the second special symbol is increased to execute a lottery of the second special symbol. (A game method in which the number of time savings elapses first) can be selected. In addition, for a player who wants to save the lottery of the second special symbol with high expectation later, the right-handed execution is continuously performed during the time saving state, so that the lottery of the first special symbol is preferentially performed. A game method in which the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is increased while being executed (a lottery with a high degree of expectation is executed for the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol after the number of time savings of the first special symbol has elapsed first). Can be selected. In addition, for example, until right before the number of time savings of the first special symbol ends (for example, until the number of time savings of the first special symbol becomes one), the lottery of the first special symbol is prioritized. After that, the lottery of the second special symbol in which the number of reserved balls is likely to be stored to the upper limit (ie, four) is executed four times, and the fourth variation display of the second special symbol is executed. During this time, it is possible to select a game method in which the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is increased as much as possible by right-handing, and a lottery based on the reserved balls is executed after the reduction of time. Further, immediately before the time reduction of the second special symbol ends (for example, until the number of time reductions of the first special symbol becomes one), the lottery of the second special symbol is performed every time a start winning prize of the second special symbol is generated. (That is, left-handed or fire-stopped), and right-handed so that the lottery of the first special symbol is preferentially executed when the number of time savings of the second special symbol becomes one. May be continuously executed to select a game method in which the number of time savings of the first special symbol elapses first. In this case, three lotteries of the second special symbol executed during the time saving state, and a period from the end of the three lotteries of the second special symbol to the end of the number of time savings of the first special symbol. With the reserved ball of the second special symbol accumulated in (2), the lottery of the second special symbol with high expectation can be executed at least seven times with the reserved ball of the second special symbol (the upper limit is almost 4), so the jackpot is won. Possibilities can be further increased. As described above, since various game properties with different jackpot expectation degrees and different period lengths can be realized according to the game method of the player, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In the eighth embodiment, by changing the display mode of the reserved symbol of the first special symbol and the display mode of the reserved symbol of the second special symbol, the lottery of the second special symbol is performed in the second lottery. (1) It has been configured so that the player can easily intuitively understand that the jackpot expectation is higher than the special symbol lottery (it is easy to win a small jackpot). According to the result of the pre-reading, the display mode of the reserved symbol is changed within a range in which the player can grasp the type of the special symbol (whether it is the reserved symbol of the first special symbol or the reserved symbol of the second special symbol). You may. More specifically, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the colors of the reserved symbols are made different according to the jackpot expectation degree. That is, according to the result of the pre-reading, the configuration may be such that the color can be changed to any one of white, blue, green, and red in order of the bigger jackpot expectation. With this, not only the type of the special symbol but also the color of the reserved symbol is taken into account, and a right-handed lottery based on the reserved ball of the first special symbol is executed, or a left-handed (or firing stop) is performed to the second special symbol. Can be selected by the player to execute the lottery based on the reserved ball, so that the range of playability can be further expanded. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved. In addition, in addition to this, when a special symbol lottery wins during the time reduction state (a direct hit occurs), the game state after the end of the big hit at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 20%). It is configured to be set to the normal state (the time-saving no-big-hit is determined), and the possibility of winning the no-time-saving big-hit as a reserved symbol increases (it becomes easy to select in the case of the no-time-saving big-hit, Or a special mode (for example, a hold symbol imitating a bomb) that is difficult to be selected in the case of a big win with a reduced working hours. With this configuration, when the reserved symbol of the first special symbol is changed to a special mode (a mode imitating a bomb), the second symbol is generated before the start winning prize corresponding to the reserved ball is generated. The player can think that it would have been good if he aimed to hit the jackpot by digesting the special design holding ball. Therefore, in particular, for a player who has selected a game method in which the player simply keeps right-handing continuously during the time reduction state, in the next time reduction state, a game method in which the reserved ball of the second special symbol is consumed first. You can also try to challenge. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved. In addition, when the game is changed to a special mode (a mode imitating a bomb) and the lottery result based on the holding ball is reported simply as a deviation, the game is performed even though no advantageous result is reported. It is possible to realize a novel gaming property that can reassure the player. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved. Further, when the reserved symbol of the second special symbol is changed to a special mode (a mode imitating a bomb), the lottery of the first special symbol (the first lottery) is performed so that the reserved ball corresponding to the special mode is not digested. (2) a lottery that is executed with priority over the special symbol can be executed to aim at winning the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game property in which the game method is changed according to the mode of the reserved symbol, and it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 198 (a), a display mode after any one of the time saving end conditions is satisfied (after the number of time savings of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has elapsed) will be described. FIG. 198 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode at the end of the time saving state. In the example of FIG. 198 (a), a case where the number of time savings of the second special symbol has elapsed and the time saving state has ended is illustrated. Also, a state in which four reserved balls of the first special symbol and one reserved ball of the second special symbol are reserved at the end of the working hours is shown. As shown in FIG. 198 (a), when the time-saving state ends, the character "1 time remaining" is displayed on the right side of the image simulating the reserved symbol corresponding to the first special symbol in the display area HR10. On the right side of the image imitating the reserved symbol corresponding to the second special symbol, the character “0 times remaining” is displayed. Further, characters “RUSH end ...” are displayed below the display area HR10. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that the time saving state (RUSH) has ended when the number of time savings of the second special symbol has become zero. Further, in the small display area Ds2, the character “right-handed” is erased. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing the right-handing even though the time-saving state ends and the starting winning is unlikely to occur even if the player makes a right-handing, thereby causing the player to lose money. .

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 198 (a), at the end of the time saving state, a number indicating the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol “ 4 "and" 1 ") indicating the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol are displayed in small size. In other words, the reserved symbols are displayed in a simple and inconspicuous manner as compared with the time saving state. Then, in the second display area Ds2 in the sub display area Ds, the characters "RUSH end ..." are displayed in a manner more prominent (greater) than the number of reserved balls. As a result, the impression that the time-saving state (RUSH) has ended can be given to the player more strongly. The time saving end screen indicating that the time saving state (RUSH) has ended is kept displayed until all the lotteries based on the held balls held at the time when the time saving state ends have been completed. If a big hit or a small hit is won with the reserved ball while the time saving end screen is being displayed, a special effect (resurrection effect) is executed. This resurrection effect will be described with reference to FIG. 198 (b).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 198 (b), a description will be given of a display mode in a case where a large hit or a small hit has been made after the end of the time reduction state in the lottery based on the reserved ball held at the time when the time reduction state ends. As shown in FIG. 198 (b), when a jackpot is won during the display of the time reduction end screen, three symbols imitating the number “7” penetrate the display area HR10 from the back side of the display area HR10. An effect (resurrection effect) that appears for a relatively short time (for example, 0.2 seconds) is executed. In addition, in the second display area Ds2, a character "BONUS determined !!" indicating that a big hit or a small hit has been won is displayed. By executing this resurrection effect, it is possible to give a greater surprise and joy to the player who assumed that the time saving state has ended, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. Can be. The symbol displayed in the resurrection effect and the characters "BONUS determined !!" are configured to be displayed until the start of the big hit or the small hit. For this reason, in the eighth embodiment, the fluctuation time is extremely short (0.1 seconds) regardless of the number of lotteries from the end of the time saving state until at least all the reserved balls are consumed. Is configured. This prevents the screen at the end of the resurrection effect (three “7” symbols and the character “BONUS confirmed !!”) from being displayed for a long period of time, thereby preventing the game from becoming redundant. can do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 199, a description will be given of a change over time in the effect mode when a large hit or a small hit exists in the retained balls retained at the end of the time saving state. First, with reference to FIG. 199 (a), a description will be given of a temporal change of the effect mode when the holding ball corresponding to the small hit is held within 5 seconds from the start of the last fluctuation display in the time saving state. Here, the period of 5 seconds is a period until the character 801 finds the treasure box 802 in the effect of searching for the treasure box 802. If the lottery result of the special symbol is off, the effect that the content of the found treasure box 802 is empty is executed, and if it is a hit (big hit or small hit), the V display 803 appears from the found treasure box 802. An effect is performed. That is, if it is within 5 seconds (before opening the treasure box 802), the effect is rewritten without discomfort according to the content of the holding ball (even if the effect that the contents of the treasure box 802 are empty at the start of the change is set) , An effect in which the V display 803 appears from the treasure box 802). In other words, FIG. 199 (a) shows that after the effect corresponding to the departure is started, the reserved ball corresponding to the small hit is detected within the period in which the effect of the effect can be rewritten (within 5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation). FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a temporal change of the effect mode when the effect is rewritten.

  As shown in FIG. 199 (a), when the last variation display in the time-saving state (in the example of FIG. 199 (a), variation display of the second special symbol) is started, the boy character is displayed for 5 seconds. An effect in which 801 searches for a treasure chest 802 is executed. Since the time-saving state continues until this last change ends, when the player makes a right-hand, the electric accessory 701 is opened and the game ball enters the first operation port 704 or the second operation port 702. In order to play the ball, a game ball can enter the right first ball entry port 64a2 or the right second ball entry port 64b. In the example of FIG. 199 (a), a case in which the start winning is detected three times before the elapse of 5 seconds, two misses and one small win is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 199 (a), when the last fluctuation display in the time reduction state is out of range and a start winning prize corresponding to a small hit is detected within 5 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the character 801 is displayed within 5 seconds. After the effect of searching for the treasure box 802 is executed, an effect in which the V display 803 appears from the treasure box 802 where the character 801 is found is executed from the lapse of 5 seconds to the lapse of 10 seconds. The state in which the V display 803 is displayed continues until the fluctuation display corresponding to the small hit ends, and when the small hit fluctuation (and the stop display period of the small hit symbol) elapses, the small hit opening is performed. The production starts. In addition, as described above, the fluctuation display based on the held ball after the end of the time saving state is set to an ultra short fluctuation of 0.1 second (the fluctuation time is 0.1 second and the stop display time is 0.1 second) regardless of the lottery result. Therefore, the period from the end of the last fluctuation display in the time saving state to the start of the small hit can be made extremely short (0.6 seconds in the example of FIG. 199 (a)). Therefore, even if the display period of the V display 803 is extended (the display is continued even after the last change of the time saving state ends), it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  FIG. 199 (b) is a diagram showing a temporal change of the effect mode when a holding ball having a small hit is detected after a lapse of 5 seconds from the start of the last fluctuation display in the time saving state. In the example of FIG. 199 (b), after the holding ball corresponding to the departure of the first special symbol is held within 5 seconds after the start of the change, the small hit of the second special symbol is corresponded after the elapse of 5 seconds. This illustrates a case in which a holding ball is held. As shown in FIG. 199 (b), when a small hit occurs after the elapse of 5 seconds, the character 801 performs an effect of searching for the treasure box 802 in 5 seconds during the change time of the deviation change of 10 seconds, and thereafter, The effect that the content of the treasure chest 802 found is empty is executed in 4 seconds, and the display mode is switched to the time saving end display (see FIG. 198 (a)) after 9 seconds from the start of the fluctuation. The time saving end display is continued for one second until 10 seconds elapse after the start of the change, which is the change end timing, and a resurrection effect (see FIG. 198 (b)) is executed after the change is stopped. When three symbols imitating the same number indicating a hit (big hit or small hit) are displayed by this resurrection effect, the symbol display is maintained until the start timing of the small hit. In this way, when the effect of confirming the contents of the treasure box 802 is started, when a winning ball (big hit or small hit) is detected, a winning effect is notified by a resurrection effect without forcibly rewriting the effect mode. By doing so, it is possible to give the player great joy at winning while suppressing the player from feeling uncomfortable with the production contents. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

<Electrical Configuration in Eighth Embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 200A is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 202 according to the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 200A, the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eighth embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the seventh embodiment in that a per-figure type selection table 202af is added. I have. In addition, the difference is that the specified contents of the first hit random number table 202a, the first hit type selection table 202b, and the time saving table 202e are partially changed.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 200 (b) and (c), the contents of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 and the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in the eighth embodiment will be described. Although illustration is omitted, the first random number table 202a in the eighth embodiment is similar to the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 21A) in the first and seventh embodiments. Two types, a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for use in 1 special symbol lottery and a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 for use in 2nd special symbol lottery, are defined. First, with reference to FIG. 200 (b), a description will be given of the contents of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the eighth embodiment.

  FIG. 200 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the eighth embodiment. This special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is the same as the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the seventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 184 (a)). Judgment value) is specified. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 200 (b), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the eighth embodiment stores the counter value (random number value) of the first random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit. “0 to 3” is defined in association with the range. Therefore, in the lottery of the first special symbol, when the value of the first random number counter C1 is any one of “0 to 3”, it is determined that the big hit is detected, while any value of “0 to 3” is determined. If not (ie, any value of “4 to 999”), it is determined to be out of range. Of the 1000 counter values (random values) of “0 to 999” that the first random number counter C1 can take, the four counter values (random values) determined to be big hits are “0 to 3”. The probability of being determined as a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery is 1/250 (4/1000). Further, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the eighth embodiment does not define a random number value (counter value) determined to be a small hit. Therefore, the probability of being determined as a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol (winning the small hit) is 0. Therefore, in the lottery of the first special symbol, since it is configured such that only a direct hit can occur (the V hit based on the small hit winning cannot be generated), the big hit expectation is set to the lottery of the second special symbol. It is lower than the comparison.

  Next, the details of the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is similar to the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 184 (b)), and is determined to be a big hit and a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. Numerical values (judgment values) are specified. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 200 (c), the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in the eighth embodiment includes “0 to 3” as a range of the counter value (random value) determined to be a big hit. Are defined in association with each other, and "4 to 230" is defined in association with the range of the counter value (random value) determined to be a small hit. Among the 1000 counter values (random value) of “0 to 999” that the first random number counter C1 can take, four counter values (random value) determined to be a big hit are “0 to 3”, Since the counter value (random number value) determined to be a small hit is 226 of “4 to 230”, the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is 1/250 (4/1000), The probability of being determined to be a small hit is 1 / 4.4 (226/1000). In the eighth embodiment, similarly to the seventh embodiment, when a small hit is won, about 10 game balls are continuously shot by aiming at the V prize device 6500 and the V prize device 6500 is obtained. Winning a small hit is almost the same as winning a big hit. Therefore, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, a direct hit occurs at a probability of 1/250, and a small hit is won at 1 / 4.4, and a V hit occurs almost certainly. The jackpot expectation greatly increases compared to the lottery of the first special symbol. Therefore, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, it is possible to make the player more strongly expect a big hit.

  Next, details of the first hit type selection table 202b in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Like the first hit type selection table 202b in the seventh embodiment, the first hit type selection table 202b is a data table referred to for specifying (determining) the big hit type when the big hit is won. FIG. 200A is a block diagram showing a configuration of the first hit type selection table 202b.

  As shown in FIG. 200 (a), in the first hit type selection table 202b in the eighth embodiment, a large hit has occurred in the first special symbol lottery (a direct hit of the first special symbol has occurred). The first jackpot table 202bf1 for specifying (determining) the jackpot type, and the jackpot type is specified when a jackpot has been won by the lottery of the second special symbol (the direct hit of the second special symbol has occurred) ( The second jackpot table 202bf2 for determining the jackpot, and specifying the jackpot type when a jackpot has occurred (the jackpot has occurred) based on the occurrence of the V winning during the execution of the small jackpot game (decision). And a V hitting table 202bf3. First, the details of the special direct hit table 202bf1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 201 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special direct hit table 202bf1. As shown in FIG. 201 (b), in the eighth embodiment, as a jackpot type that can be determined when a jackpot has been won in the lottery of the first special symbol (a direct hit of the first special symbol has occurred), There are two types of big hits, "big hit A8" and "big hit B8". The “big hit A8” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is four, and when a win is made in the normal state, the time reduction state is given after the end of the big hit. On the other hand, the "big hit B8" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is four and the normal state is set after the end of the big hit when a win is made in the normal state. Therefore, in the normal state, “big hit A8” is more advantageous to the player than “big hit B8” because the gaming state after the end of the big hit is more advantageous. In addition, in the time saving state, it is configured such that, regardless of which jackpot is won, an advantageous time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from being disappointed in the normal state and being disappointed even if the jackpot has been won in the lottery of the first special symbol having a low jackpot expectation in the time saving state. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 201 (c), the details of the special second direct hit table 202bf2 will be described. FIG. 201 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special second direct hit table 202bf2. As shown in FIG. 201 (c), in the eighth embodiment, as a jackpot type that can be determined when a jackpot has been won in the lottery of the second special symbol (a direct hit of the second special symbol has occurred), Only "big hit C8" is provided ("big hit C8" is associated with all the values of the first hit type counter C2). The "big hit C8" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 15 and the normal state is set after the end of the big hit when a win is made in the normal state. Therefore, in the case where the second special symbol lottery wins in the normal state, there is no possibility of transition to the advantageous time saving state, which is disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method aiming to execute the second special symbol lottery by right-handing at the normal time. In addition, when the "big hit C7" is won in the time saving state, an advantageous time saving state is set after the end of the big hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming disappointed in the normal state and disappointing the player even if the player wins with a low probability of winning in the time reduction state. Can be further improved.

  Next, the details of the V hitting table 202bf3 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the V hitting table 202bf3 is for specifying (selecting) the type of the big hit executed based on the occurrence of the V winning in the small hitting game (the game ball has passed the V winning switch 6500e3). Is a data table in which the data is defined. FIG. 201D is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the V hitting table 202bf3. As shown in FIG. 201 (d), in the V hitting table 202bf3, three types of big hits, "big hit D8", "big hit E8", and "big hit F8", are defined.

  As shown in FIG. 201 (d), the "big hit D8" is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 from "0 to 39". The "big hit D8" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 15 rounds, and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to a time saving state advantageous to the player regardless of the game state at the time of winning. This “big hit D8” is the most successful big hit type for the player because the number of rounds is the largest among all the big hit types and the game state after the end of the big hit is also advantageous. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit D8” is 40, The probability (ratio) that “big hit D8” is determined (selected) as the type of big hit that is started when a V winning occurs during execution of the small hit game is 40/100 (40%).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 201 (d), the "big hit E8" is defined in association with the range of the hit of the first hit type counter C2 of "40 to 59". The "big hit E8" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is eight, and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to a time-saving state advantageous to the player regardless of the game state at the time of winning. The "big hit E8" is the second most significant type after the "big hit D8" because the number of rounds is the second largest after the "big hit D8" and the gaming state after the end of the big hit is advantageous. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) from “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit E8” is 20, The probability (proportion) that “big hit E8” is determined (selected) as the type of big hit that is started when a V winning occurs during execution of the small hit game is 20/100 (20%).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 201 (d), the "big hit F8" is defined in association with the hit of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "60 to 99". The “big hit F8” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is four and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to a time-saving state advantageous to the player regardless of the game state at the time of winning. In other words, the jackpot type is less advantageous in terms of the number of rounds than “big hit D8” and “big hit E8”, but is equivalent in terms of the game state after the end of the big hit. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) from “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit F8” is 40, The probability (ratio) that “big hit F8” is determined (selected) as the type of big hit that is started when a V winning occurs during the execution of the small hit game is 40/100 (40%).

  As described above, in the eighth embodiment, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol and a V hit occurs, the time reduction state is always set after the end of the big hit, regardless of the gaming state at the time of the winning. And In addition, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, a small win (= V) is won with an extremely high probability compared to a direct hit of 1 / 4.4. Therefore, in the time-saving state (and while the reserve ball of the second special symbol stored during the time-saving state after the transition to the normal state is being digested), the time-saving state is set every time the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. Since the sense of expectation of being given again can be increased, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 202 (a), details of the time savings table 202e in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 202 (a) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of this time saving table 202e. As shown in FIG. 202 (a), for the "big hit A8" which is won in the normal state, the number of times of saving the first special symbol (a special time saving medium counter for indicating the number of times of saving the first special symbol). "96 times" as the value of 203k1) and "4 times" as the number of times of saving the second special symbol (the value of the special time saving medium counter 203k2 for indicating the number of times of saving the second special symbol 203k2). Have been. In addition, the same number of time savings granted is also defined in association with the "big hit A8" which was won in the time saving state. For this reason, when the "big hit A8" is won, a time saving state advantageous to the player is set after the end of the big hit regardless of the gaming state.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 202 (a), for the "big hit B8" won in the normal state, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are associated with "0 times" as the number of time savings. On the other hand, for the "big hit B8" won in the time saving state, "96 times" is given as the number of times for the first special symbol and "4 times" as the number of times for the second special symbol. It is stipulated. Therefore, when the direct hit of the first special symbol occurs in the normal state and the “big hit B8” is determined, the game shifts to the normal state which is disadvantageous to the player, while the direct hit of the first special symbol in the time-saving state is reduced. When the "big hit B8" is determined and generated, the game shifts to a time saving state advantageous to the player. Similarly, for the “big hit C8”, “0” is associated with the first special symbol and the second special symbol for the “big hit C8” which is won in the normal state. On the other hand, "96" as the number of time savings for the first special symbol and "4" as the number of time savings for the second special symbol are associated with the "big hit C8" which was won in the time saving state. It is stipulated. For this reason, when the direct hit of the first special symbol occurs in the normal state and the “big hit C8” is determined, the game shifts to the normal state disadvantageous to the player, while the direct hit of the first special symbol in the time-saving state is reduced. When the occurrence of the “big hit C8” is determined, the state shifts to a time saving state advantageous to the player.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 202 (a), for “big hit D8” to “big hit F8”, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, “96 times” is set as the number of times of saving the first special symbol, "4 times" is defined in association with the number of times of saving the special symbol. For this reason, if the player wins the small hit in the second special symbol lottery during the time saving state and the reserved digestion after the end of the time saving state, and a V hit occurs, the time saving state is always given after the end of the V hit. You. Therefore, when the lottery of the second special symbol having a high small hit probability (1 / 4.4) is executed, not only the expectation per V for the player can be increased, but also a time reduction state is achieved. Expectations can be increased. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 202 (b), the details of the ordinary figure hit type selection table 202fa will be described. The normal symbol hit type selection table 202fa is a data table that is referred to in order to specify (determine) the hit type when a normal symbol hits. FIG. 202 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the per-figure-per-type selection table 202fa. As shown in FIG. 202 (b), two types of general figure hit types are defined in the general style hit type selection table 202fa in the eighth embodiment. Specifically, two types of hits, “A8 per ordinary figure” and “B8 per ordinary figure” are defined. In the case of "A8 per ordinary figure", when an election is made in the normal state of the ordinary figure, an opening pattern in which the electric accessory 701 is opened only once for 0.2 seconds immediately after the start of the ordinary figure is set. When the symbol is won in the time reduction state of the symbol, the opening pattern A (see FIG. 171) is set as a general hitting type. As described above, the switching valve 702 is fixed in the first switching state in which the ball flows down to the first flow path 703 for 1.4 seconds after the start of the normal symbol, so that the normal symbol hits in the normal state. In the case of winning the "A per ordinary figure", it becomes difficult to make the game balls almost enter the sorting device 700 during the opening period of 0.2 seconds, and also to the sorting device 700. Even if the game ball enters, the entered game ball enters the first operating port 704 and the right first ball entry port 64a2 is opened. Therefore, even if the irregular game method of firing the game ball aiming at the sorting device 700 by right-handing at the normal time is performed, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the sorting device 700, and Can execute only the first special symbol lottery, so that the merit of the irregular game method can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method of right-handing during the normal state. On the other hand, as described above in the description of the sixth embodiment, when the opening pattern A is set, it becomes easier for game balls to enter the distribution device 700, and the entered game balls are substantially in the first operation. The ball enters the mouth 704.

  In the case of “B8 per ordinary figure”, when an election is made in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, an opening pattern in which the electric accessory 701 is opened only once for 0.2 seconds immediately after the start of the ordinary figure is set. When the winning is made in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, the opening pattern B (see FIG. 171) is set as the per-general-drawing type. For this reason, if "B8 per general figure" is won in the normal state, it is difficult to enter the distribution device 700 as in "A8 per general figure", and even if it does, almost the first working port At 704, an open pattern in which a game ball enters is set. On the other hand, if the player wins the "B8 per ordinary map" in the time saving state, the game balls easily enter the distribution device 700, and the entered game balls enter almost the second operation port 707. Since the ball is balled, the right second ball entrance 64b, which is a chance for a lottery of a second special symbol that is advantageous (ie, has a high jackpot expectation), is opened. Therefore, it can be said that “B8 per ordinary figure” is a more advantageous type per ordinary figure than “A8 per ordinary figure”.

  As shown in FIG. 202 (b), for the range of the value of the second hit type counter C6 for determining the type of the ordinary figure, the range of the value from "0 to 79" is "A8 Is associated and defined. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of “0 to 99” that can be taken by the second hit type counter C6, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “A8 per ordinary figure” is “0”. Since the number of hits is "80", the probability that "A8 per ordinary figure" is determined in the case of a normal symbol hit is 4/5 (80/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 202 (b), when the value of the second hitting type counter C6 is in the range of “80 to 99”, “General drawing hit B8” is defined in association with the general hitting type. ing. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the second hit type counter C6, the number of random numbers (counter values) corresponding to “B8 per ordinary figure” is 20 “80 to 99” Therefore, the probability of determining “B8 per common symbol” in the case of a normal symbol hit is 1/5 (20/100).

  As described above, in the eighth embodiment, when the lottery of the ordinary symbols is executed in the time saving state and the winning is achieved, the “right figure hitting A8” in which the right first entrance 64a2 is easily opened at a rate of 80% is determined. The configuration is such that “B8 per ordinary figure” is determined (selected) at which the right second entrance opening 64b is easily opened at a rate of 20%. With this configuration, the number of time savings is large, and the lottery of the first special symbol in which the lottery is executed with priority can be executed with higher priority. Although only the special symbol lottery has been executed, despite the fact that the player wishes to execute the first special symbol lottery first and then execute the second special symbol lottery in the second half, It is possible to prevent the time-saving state from ending in a relatively short period. Therefore, the convenience for the player can be further improved.

  Next, a method of shifting each state in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, in the eighth embodiment, as in the seventh embodiment, two game states are provided. That is, there are provided two types of game states, a normal game state (normal state) in which a normal state of a normal symbol is set, and a time reduction game state (time reduction state) in which a time reduction state of a normal symbol is set. In addition, in the normal gaming state, the degree of advantage greatly differs between the normal gaming state in which the reserved ball of the second special symbol exists immediately after the end of the time saving state and the normal gaming state in which the reserved ball of the second special symbol does not exist. Is configured. In other words, if there is at least one pending ball of the second special symbol, a small hit is won with a probability of 1 / 4.4 and a winning is achieved per V, and the time saving state is set again after the end of the V winning. A very advantageous state is formed as compared with the case where the retaining ball of the second special symbol does not exist. In the following description, for the sake of simplicity, the normal gaming state in which the reserved ball of the second special symbol does not exist is referred to as “normal mode”, and the time-saving gaming state in which a lottery of the second special symbol can be executed. The normal game state in which the reserved ball of the second special symbol exists is referred to as “chance mode A” or “chance mode B” in the sense that the jackpot is highly expected.

  First, with reference to the upper part of FIG. 203, a description will be given of a method of shifting from the normal mode (the normal game state in which the reserved ball of the second special symbol does not exist) to another state (mode). As shown in the upper part of FIG. 203, there is a possibility that the mode is shifted from the normal mode to another mode only when a large hit (direct hit) occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol. More specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 203, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol and the "jackpot A8" is won at a rate of 50%, the mode after the end of the jackpot is advantageous. The chance mode A (time saving game state) is set. On the other hand, when the "big hit B8" is won at a rate of 50% when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the mode after the end of the big hit is set to the normal mode again disadvantageous to the player. (Loop normal mode). For this reason, in the normal mode, it is possible to cause the player to play the game in expectation of winning the “big hit A8” in the lottery of the first special symbol.

  Next, with reference to the center part of FIG. 203, a method of shifting from the chance mode A (time saving game state) to another state (mode) will be described. As shown in the central part of FIG. 203, there is a possibility that the mode is shifted from the chance mode A to another mode only when the number of times saved has elapsed. More specifically, at the point in time when the number of time savings has elapsed (after the time saving game state, the lottery of the first special symbol ends 96 times or the lottery of the second special symbol ends 4 times), the second When there is a reserved ball with a special symbol, the mode shifts to chance mode B. On the other hand, if the reserved ball of the second special symbol does not exist at the time when the number of time savings has elapsed, the mode shifts to the normal mode which is disadvantageous for the player. In the chance mode A, when there are no reserved balls of the second special symbol at the time when the number of time savings has elapsed, for example, a left hit (or firing stop) when four reserved balls of the second special symbol are accumulated. Then, during execution of the fourth variation display of the second special symbol (that is, the last variation display in the time saving state), an attempt was made to accumulate the reserved balls of the second special symbol by right-handing, but "A8 per ordinary figure" This is a case where the winning is biased and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol does not increase. Further, as another case, for example, immediately after the shift to the chance mode A, the player wins the “B8 per ordinary symbol” continuously, and the lottery of the second special symbol is performed 4 times without executing the lottery of the first special symbol. This is the case, for example, when execution is performed consecutively.

  On the other hand, as shown in the center part of FIG. 203, when a direct hit or a V hit based on a small hit win occurs in the chance mode A, the mode after the end of the big hit is always given to the player regardless of the big hit type. An advantageous chance mode A is set. In this way, the player can be pleased when a direct or small hit is won in the special symbol lottery in the chance mode A.

  Next, with reference to the lower part of FIG. 203, a method of shifting from the chance mode B (the normal game state in which the reserved ball of the second special symbol exists) to another mode will be described. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 203, from the chance mode B to another state (mode), in addition to the case where the jackpot is won, the other state (mode) when all the reserved balls of the second special pattern are consumed. Move to. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 203, when a direct hit occurs and the hit type of the direct hit is “big hit A8” determined at a rate of 50% of the direct hit of the first special symbol. After the jackpot, the mode shifts to the chance mode A which is advantageous to the player. Also, in the case of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol and winning the V hit, the game shifts to the chance mode A which is advantageous to the player after the end of the big hit.

  On the other hand, the "big hit B8" is determined at a rate of 50% when a direct hit of the first special symbol occurs, and is determined at a rate of 100% when a direct hit of the second special symbol occurs. If one of the "big hit C8" is won and the reserved ball of the second special symbol at the time of the big hit end is 0, the state (mode) after the big hit end is set to the normal mode disadvantageous to the player. . Also, when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol have been consumed (all the lotteries of the second special symbol after shifting to the chance mode B have been lost), the mode shifts to the normal mode. On the other hand, when the reserved ball of the second special symbol is not 0 (one or more) at the end of the "big hit B8" or "big hit C8", the state (mode) after the end of the big hit is changed to the chance mode again. B.

  As described above, in the eighth embodiment, since it is configured to switch between the three types of states when a big hit or the like occurs, it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 204 is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of the RAM 223 according to the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 204, the RAM 223 in the eighth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 26B) in that the final change flag 223fa , A final effect set flag 223fb and a hit effect flag 223fc are added.

  The final fluctuation flag 223fa is a flag indicating whether or not the last fluctuation display in the time saving state is being performed. When the final fluctuation flag 223fa is on, it indicates that the last fluctuation display in the time reduction state is being performed, and when it is off, it indicates that the last fluctuation display in the time reduction state is not being performed. This final fluctuation flag 223fa is set to ON at the time when the last fluctuation in the time reduction state is started, and is turned OFF when the number of time reductions becomes 0 (that is, when the last fluctuation display in the time reduction state ends). This is set (see S2622 in FIG. 213).

  The final effect setting completed flag 223fb indicates whether or not the type of effect after the discovery of the treasure chest 802 (the effect mode after 5 seconds from the start of the change) has already been set in the last change display in the time saving state. It is a flag. If the final effect setting completed flag 223fb is on, it means that the effect type has been determined, and if it is off, it means that the effect type has not been determined. If a winning ball is detected during the execution of the final change (a big win or a small winning start winning is detected), the state of the final effect set flag 223fb and the state of the hit effect flag 223fc described later are determined. Then, it is determined whether or not the hit is notified by the resurrection effect (see FIG. 198 (b)).

  The hit effect flag 223fc is an effect mode indicating a win (that is, an effect mode in which the V display 803 appears from the treasure box 802) or a resurrection effect (see FIG. 198 (b)) as an effect mode of the last variable effect in the time saving state. Is a flag for indicating whether or not has been set. If the hit effect flag 223fc is on, it means that an effect mode indicating a hit or a resurrection effect is being executed, and if it is off, the effect mode indicating an off is being executed or the last in a time-saving state. This means that the variable display is not being executed. The hit effect flag 223fc is set to ON when the effect mode indicating the hit is set (see S3516 in FIG. 209) or when the start of the resurrection effect is set (see S2326 in FIG. 211), and the time reduction state (and It is set to off when the effect mode in “holding digestion” ends.

<Control Process of Main Controller in Eighth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 205 to 207. First, with reference to FIG. 205, the special symbol variation processing 8 (S131 in FIG. 205) in the eighth embodiment will be described. This special symbol variation process 8 (S131) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 188, S121) in the seventh embodiment, and is a special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 188) in the seventh embodiment. 188) is a process for setting the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

  In the different symbol variation process 8 (S131) in the eighth embodiment, the special symbol variation process 7 (FIG. 7) in the seventh embodiment is performed in each of S201, S202, S206 to S218, S220, S231 to S235, and S238. 188, S121) of S201, S202, S206-S218, S220, S231-S235 and S238.

  In the special symbol variation process 8 (S131) in the eighth embodiment, the order of the process of S206 and the process of S232 is reversed. That is, first, the value of the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter b is determined by the processing of S206, and the processing of S232 is executed only when the value is 0 (S206: No). I have. That is, when the number of the reserved balls of the first special symbol is one or more, the specification that the lottery of the second special symbol is not started (the lottery of the first special symbol is executed with priority over the lottery of the second special symbol) Specifications).

  In the special symbol change process 8 (see FIG. 205) in the eighth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S213 that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S213: No), the number of times for saving time is updated. The time saving update process 8 is executed (S241), and the process proceeds to S220. The details of the time saving update process 8 (S241) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing the time saving number update process 8 (S241).

  This time saving number update process 8 (see FIG. 206) is a process for updating the number of time saving times of a normal symbol, similarly to the time saving number updating process (see FIG. 42, S219) in the first embodiment. In the eighth embodiment, as the time reduction counter 203k, a special time reduction counter 203k1 for indicating the number of time reductions for the first special symbol, and a special time reduction counter for indicating the number of time reductions for the second special symbol 203k1. And a middle counter 203k2. In the time saving number update process 8 (see FIG. 206) in the eighth embodiment, the value of the corresponding time saving counter is updated according to the type of the special symbol.

  Of the time saving number update processing 8 (S241) in the eighth embodiment, in each of the processing of S601, S604, and S607, S601, S604, and S607 of the time saving number update processing (see FIG. 42, S219) of the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as the above processing is executed. When the number-of-times-savings update process 8 (S241) in the eighth embodiment is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current time is the stop timing of the change of the first special symbol (S611). In the processing of S611, when it is determined that the present is the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol (S611: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the value of the special special time saving medium time counter 203k1 is greater than zero. (S612). In the processing of S612, when it is determined that the value of the special-purpose time saving medium counter 203k1 is 0 (S612: No), the processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S612, if it is determined that the value of the special time saving medium time counter 203k1 is not 0 (S612: Yes), the value of the special special time saving medium counter 203k1 is subtracted by 1 (S613). Then, a command for the number of remaining working hours that indicates the value of the special purpose working hours counter 203k1 is set (S614), and the process proceeds to S604.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S611 that the current time is not the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol (S611: No), it means that the current fluctuation stop is the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol. Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the special time saving medium time counter 203k2 is greater than 0 (S615). In the processing of S615, when it is determined that the value of the special-purpose time saving medium counter 203k2 is 0 (S615: No), this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S615, if it is determined that the value of the special time saving medium time counter 203k2 is not 0 (S615: Yes), the value of the special 2 time saving medium time counter 203k is decremented by 1 (S616). Then, a remaining time reduction command indicating the value of the special-purpose time reduction medium counter 203k2 is set (S617), and the process proceeds to S604.

  In the time saving number update process 8 (see FIG. 206) in the eighth embodiment, the value of the time saving counter 203k becomes 0 in the process of S604 (that is, the value of the special time saving medium counter 203k1 or If it is determined that the value of the special time reduction medium time counter 203k2 has become 0 (S604: Yes), the game state is set to the normal state (S618), and the special time reduction medium time counter 203k1 and the special time reduction 2k The value of the middle counter 203k2 is set to 0 (S619), and the process shifts to S607.

  By executing the time saving number update process 8 (see FIG. 206), the number of time savings of the first special symbol and the number of time savings of the second special symbol are accurately updated according to the type of the special symbol stopped and fluctuated. can do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 207, a description is given of the ordinary symbol variation process 8 (S132) executed in the eighth embodiment. The ordinary symbol variation process 8 (S132) is a process executed in place of the ordinary symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 190, S122) in the seventh embodiment, and is an ordinary symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 190) in the seventh embodiment. Similarly to the process 190, the second symbol display device 83 controls the variable display and the variable time of the second symbol, the opening operation and the opening time of the electric accessory 701 in the distribution device 700, and the like.

  In the ordinary symbol variation processing 8 (see FIG. 207) in the eighth embodiment, the ordinary symbol variation in the seventh embodiment is performed in each of S901, S902, S906 to S910, S912 to 915, S920, and S931 to S938. The same processes as those of S901, S902, S906 to S910, S912 to 915, S920 and S931 to S938 of the process 7 (see S122 in FIG. 190) are executed. Further, in the ordinary symbol variation process 8 (see FIG. 207) in the eighth embodiment, in the process of S915, when it is determined that the current lottery result of the ordinary symbol is a hit (S915: Yes), With reference to the per-diagram type selection table 202fa (see FIG. 202 (b)), an open pattern corresponding to the current gaming state is specified (S941), and the process proceeds to S920.

  By executing the normal symbol variation process 8 (see FIG. 207), when a normal symbol is hit, A8 per ordinary symbol is determined at a rate of 80%, and B8 per ordinary symbol is determined at a rate of 20%. Since it can be determined, the right first entrance 64a2 can be configured to be more easily opened than the right second entrance 64b when right-handed in a time-saving state. Therefore, since the lottery of the first special symbol having a low substantial jackpot expectation can be executed with higher priority, the lottery of the second special symbol having a high expectation is easily executed in the latter half of the time saving state. Can be configured. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the eighth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. First, the main process 8 (FIG. 208) in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The main process 8 is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 55) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment).

  In the main process 8 (see FIG. 208) in the eighth embodiment, the effect update is performed in place of the effect update process (S2112) with respect to the main process (see FIG. 55) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment). Step 8 (S2121) is executed, command judgment processing 8 (S2122) is performed instead of the command judgment processing (S2113), and variable display setting processing 8 (S2123) is used instead of the variable display setting processing (S2114). The only difference is the execution of First, details of the above-described effect update processing 8 (S2121) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the effect update process 8 (S2121). The effect update process 8 (S2121) is a process executed in the main process 8 (see FIG. 208) in place of the effect update process (see S2112) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment). This is a process for updating the effect mode according to the progress of the fluctuation pattern effect (variable display effect).

  In the effect update processing 8 (S2121), first, it is determined whether or not the final variation flag 223fa is on (S3511). If it is determined that the final variation flag 223fa is off (S3511: No), the process is left as it is. This processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the last fluctuation flag 223fa is ON (S3511: Yes), it means that the last fluctuation display in the time saving state is being executed, and then the final effect setting completed flag 223fb is turned ON. Is determined (in the last fluctuation display in the time saving state, whether the type of effect after finding the treasure box 802 has been determined) or not (S3512). In the processing of S3512, when it is determined that the final effect setting flag 223fb is off (the last effect in the time-saving state has not been determined) (S3512: No), the current time is set to 5 from the start of the current fluctuation. It is determined whether or not the timing is after the lapse of seconds (S3513). In the process of S3513, if it is determined that the current time is 5 seconds after the start of the current fluctuation (S3513: Yes), then it is determined whether there is a big hit or a small hit in the hold (S3513: Yes). S3514). If it is determined that there is a big hit or a small hit in the hold (S3514: Yes), the start of an effect in which V appears from the treasure box is set (S3515), and the hit effect flag 223fc is set to ON (S3516). The process shifts to S3519.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3514, when it is determined that there is no big hit or small hit in the hold (S3514: No), the start of the effect of emptying the treasure box is set (S3517), and the hit effect flag 223fc is turned off. This is set (S3518), and the routine goes to the processing of S3519. In the processing of S3519, the final effect set flag 223fb is set to ON (S3519), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S3512, when it is determined that the final effect set flag 223fb is ON (S3512: Yes), and in the processing of S3513, the present time is not the timing at which 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the current fluctuation. If it is determined (S3513: No), it is not necessary to determine the effect mode in the last variable display in the time saving state, and thus this processing is ended as it is.

  By executing the effect update processing 8 (see FIG. 209), the time saving is performed in consideration of the result of the look-ahead of the reserved ball accumulated until 5 seconds have elapsed since the last fluctuation display in the time saving state is started. It is possible to set an effect mode to be executed in a variation time in the last variation display in the state (and the variation display based on the holding ball).

  Next, a command determination process 8 (S2122) executed in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This command determination process 8 (S2122) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 56) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is a command determination process (see FIG. 56) in the seventh embodiment. Similarly to FIG. 56), this is a process for performing control according to various commands received from the main control device 110.

  In the command determination process 8 (S2122) of the eighth embodiment, the command determination process (see FIG. 56) of the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) is replaced with a prize information-related process (S2210). In that a win command-related process 8 (S2231) is executed, a stop command process (S2322) is executed instead of the process of S2214 for setting a stop display of the third symbol, and a time saving is executed instead of the time saving update process (S2216). The only difference is that update processing 8 (S2233) is executed. First, with reference to FIG. 211, the above-described winning information related processing 8 (S2231) will be described. This prize information related processing 8 (S2231) is notified by a prize information command received from the main control device 110, similarly to the prize information related processing (see S2210 in FIG. 57) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment). This is a process for executing control in accordance with the performed prefetch result.

  Of the winning information-related processing 8 (S2231) in the eighth embodiment, in the processing of S2311 and S2312, the winning information-related processing (see S2210 in FIG. 57) of the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) is respectively performed. The same processes as those in S2311 and S2312 are executed. In the winning information-related processing 8 (S2231) in the eighth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the final effect set flag 223fb is on (S2321), and the final effect set flag 223fb is off. If it is determined (S2321: No), the process proceeds to S2312. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2321 that the final effect setting completed flag 223fb is on (S2321: Yes), then the hit effect flag 203fc is on (that is, the last fluctuation display in the time saving state). It is determined whether or not an effect mode indicating a win or a small hit is set as the effect mode (S2322). In the process of S2322, when it is determined that the hit effect flag 203fc is on (S2322: Yes), the process proceeds to S2312.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2322 that the winning effect flag 203fc is off (S2322: No), then the received winning information is determined based on the lottery result after the high-speed digestion period (that is, after the time-saving state ends). It is determined whether or not the winning information is consumed within a period in which a fluctuation time of 0.1 second is set (S2323). In the process of S2323, when it is determined that the received winning information is not the winning information to be consumed within the high-speed consumption period (S2323: No), the process proceeds to S2312. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received prize information is the prize information to be consumed within the high-speed consumption period (S2323: Yes), then it is determined whether the received prize information is the prize information corresponding to the big hit or the small hit. It is determined whether or not the received winning information is the winning information for the big hit or the small hit (S2324: No), and the process proceeds to S2312. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received winning information is the winning information corresponding to the big hit or the small hit (S2324: Yes), the execution of the resurrection effect (see FIG. 198 (b)) is set (S2325), and the hit effect is performed. The flag 223fc is set to ON (S2326), and the process shifts to S2311. In the process of S2325, if the final change in the time-saving state is being executed, the resurrection effect is set to be started based on the end of the final change, while if the final change in the time-saving state is completed, , Set to start the resurrection effect immediately.

  By executing the winning information-related processing 8 (see FIG. 211), if the winning information corresponding to the jackpot or the small hit is detected after setting the final effect to be out of order, the player is provided with a resurrection effect without discomfort to the player. The big hit or the small hit can be notified by using this, so that the production mode can be set more suitably.

  Next, the stop command processing (S2232) described above will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing this stop command processing (S2322). This stop command process (S2232) is one of the command determination processes 8 and is a process for performing control according to the stop command received from the main control device 110.

  In this stop command processing (see FIG. 212), first, it is determined whether or not the final effect set flag 223fb is on (S9001). If it is determined that the final effect set flag 223fb is off (S9001) : No), the process proceeds to S9007. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S9001 that the final effect setting completed flag 223fb is on (S9001: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the hit effect flag 223fc is on (S9002). In the process of S9002, when it is determined that the hit effect flag 223fc is on (S9002: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the stop command received this time is a stop command corresponding to a hit or small hit symbol. (S9004), if it is determined that the stop command is not a stop command corresponding to a winning or small hit symbol (it is a stop command corresponding to disconnection) (S9004: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop command corresponding to the winning or small winning symbol has been received (S9004: Yes), the process proceeds to S9005.

  In the processing of S9005, the end of the final effect is set (S9005), the final effect setting completed flag 223fb and the hit effect flag 223fc are turned off (S9006), and the process proceeds to S9007.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S9002, when it is determined that the hit effect flag 223fc is off (S9002: No), it is next determined whether or not the number of reserved balls is one or more (S9003). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is one or more (S9003: Yes), the present process is terminated. When it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 0 (S9003: No), each processing of S9005 and S9006 is executed, and the process proceeds to S9007. In the process of S9007, the stop display of the third symbol corresponding to the received stop command is set (S9007), and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 213, details of the time saving update process (S2233) in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the time saving update process 8 (S2233). The time saving update process 8 (S2233) is, as described above, a part of the command determination process 8 (see FIG. 210, S2122) that is included in the time saving update process (see FIG. 60) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment). This is a process that is executed instead, and similarly to the time saving update process (see FIG. 60) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment), the number of times saved by the sound ramp control device 113 is calculated by the actual number of times saved. This is a process for updating in synchronization with.

  In the time saving update process 8 (see FIG. 213), first, it is determined whether or not the received command is a command indicating that the number of time savings has become 0 (S2621). In the process of S2621, if it is determined that the received command is a command indicating that the number of time savings has become 0 (S2621: Yes), it means that it is the end timing of the last variable display in the time saving state. Therefore, the final variation flag 223fa is set to off (S2622), and the process shifts to S2623. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is not a command indicating that the number of time savings has become 0 (S2621: No), the process of S2622 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2623.

  In the processing of S2623, the data of the time saving information update area 223g and the display setting of the number of times of saving time are updated according to the notified time saving related information (S2623), and this processing ends. By executing the time saving update process 8 (see FIG. 213), the actual number of times saved and the number of times saved by the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched.

  Next, details of the effect setting process 8 (S2821) in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the effect setting process 8 is executed in the variable display setting process 8 (S2123) in the eighth embodiment in place of the effect setting process (see FIG. 63) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment). This is the process to be performed. The difference between the variable display setting process 8 (S2123) in the eighth embodiment and the variable display setting process (see FIG. 62) in the seventh embodiment is that the effect setting process 8 (S2821) is executed. Since only points are shown, illustration of the variable display setting process 8 (S2123) is omitted.

  FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process 8 (S2821). This effect setting process 8 (S2821) is performed in accordance with the variation pattern (variation time) notified by the variation pattern command, similarly to the effect setting process (see FIG. 63) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment). This is a process for determining (setting) a detailed variable display mode.

  In the effect setting process 8 (S2821), first, it is determined whether or not the final effect setting completed flag 223fb is on (S2911). In the processing of S2911, if it is determined that the final effect setting completed flag 223fb is off (S2911: No), the effect mode of the fluctuation pattern effect according to the lottery result is set (S2912), and the process is thereafter terminated. I do. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2911 that the final effect set flag 223fb is ON (S2911: Yes), it is then determined whether the hit effect flag 223fc is ON (S2913). In the process of S2913, when it is determined that the hit effect flag 223fc is on (S2913: Yes), the process proceeds to S2917.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2913, when it is determined that the hit effect flag 223fc is off (S2913: No), it is next determined whether or not the data of the winning information storage area 223a includes a hit or a small hit. (S2914) If it is determined that the data in the winning information storage area 223a does not include a hit or a small hit (S2914: No), the process proceeds to S2917. In the processing of S2917, the display continuation of the display mode at the time of starting the change is set (S2917), and then the present processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2914, when it is determined that the data of the winning information storage area 223a includes a hit or a small hit (S2914: Yes), the start of the resurrection effect (see FIG. 198 (b)) is set ( (S2915), the winning effect flag 223fc is set to ON (S2916), and the process ends.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, in a time-saving state advantageous to the player, the lottery condition (start winning) of the first special symbol and the lottery condition (start winning) of the second special symbol are determined. Is configured so that both can be established, and the lottery of the second special symbol tends to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol (the possibility of substantially winning the jackpot increases). ). Then, by selecting the first game method (a game method in which a right strike is continuously performed), the lottery of the first special symbol is easily performed, while the second game method different from the first game method is selected. By selecting a game method (a game method in which a left hit or a firing stop is performed each time a game ball enters the right second ball entrance 64b), a lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed. By doing so, it is configured such that the player can arbitrarily select the timing for executing the lottery of the second special symbol having a high jackpot expectation. As a result, it is possible to realize a playability that matches the taste of each player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment has a configuration in which a plurality of end conditions in the time-saving state (a state advantageous to the player) are provided, and the second special symbol is drawn more than when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. It is configured such that the time saving state is more easily completed when the symbol lottery is executed. More specifically, the number of lotteries in which the time saving state is ended (the number of time savings) is set to be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The second special symbol is configured so that the number of times (4 times) is reduced. With such a configuration, if the gaming method in which the advantageous (ie, high jackpot expectation) lottery of the second special symbol is executed preferentially is continued, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed preferentially. Since it is more likely that the time-saving state will end in a shorter period of time than in the case where it is made, the lottery of the first special symbol having a low jackpot expectation is performed to some extent within the number of times of the first special symbol (for example, 95%). The game method in which the lottery is executed and then the second special symbol lottery is executed can be one of the options of the player. Conversely, for a player who wants to know the result of the time saving state (whether a big hit or the time saving state ends) in a relatively short time, the number of times of the first special symbol is reduced. Knowing that, it is possible to select a game method in which the lottery of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. In this way, it is possible to realize a high degree of freedom in the playability of selecting the timing for executing the lottery of the second special symbol according to the taste for each player, thereby further improving the interest of the player in the game. Can be done.

  Further, in the eighth embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol is controlled so as to be executed with higher priority than the lottery of the second special symbol (the holding ball of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol). When there is a reserved ball, the reserved ball of the first special symbol is preferentially moved to the execution area and used for the lottery). With this configuration, it is possible to execute the lottery of the first special symbol for the number of times of the first special symbol only by practicing a relatively simple game method of continuously right-handing during the time saving state. Meanwhile, the reserve ball of the second special symbol can be stored. Then, when the number of time savings of the first special symbol becomes 0, almost the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is accumulated up to the upper limit of 4, and the number of retained balls of the second special symbol based on the maximum number of retained balls of the second special symbol is reduced. 2 A special symbol lottery (that is, a lottery with a high jackpot expectation) can be executed. That is, during the period from when the time saving state is started to when the first condition is satisfied (until the number of time savings of the first special symbol is exhausted), the jackpot expectation degree decreases, and after the first condition is satisfied, Until the second condition is satisfied (until the reserved ball of the second special symbol is exhausted), it is possible to realize the gaming ability in which the jackpot expectation is increased.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a specific jackpot (for example, a probable change jackpot) is won, after the end of the jackpot, first, a first gaming state (for example, a probable change state) advantageous to the player is determined by a predetermined number of lotteries. Is set as an upper limit, and a gaming machine in which a second gaming state (for example, a time reduction state) advantageous to a player is set when a jackpot is not won within the predetermined number of lotteries is known. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the first gaming state usually has a higher degree of advantage than the second gaming state. Therefore, when the first gaming state ends, the game of the player is terminated. There is a problem that there is a possibility that the motivation for is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the jackpot expectation degree is low (that is, for the player) from when the time saving state advantageous to the player is set until the first condition is satisfied. It is configured such that the lottery of the first special symbol (with a low degree of advantage) is easily executed, and the jackpot expectation degree is high (that is, for the player) after the first condition is satisfied until the second condition is satisfied. It is configured such that the lottery of the second special symbol (with a high degree of advantage) is easily executed. In other words, when the state shifts to the advantageous time-saving state, first, the state shifts to the state where the degree of advantage is high through the state where the degree of advantage is low. With this configuration, even if the jackpot is not won until the first condition is satisfied, the player can feel reassured that a state with a higher jackpot expectation will be held later. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation for the game when the first condition is satisfied. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  Further, in the eighth embodiment, after shifting to the time saving state advantageous to the player, immediately before the number of time savings of the second special symbol ends (until the lottery of the second special symbol is executed three times). After making the lottery of the second special symbol preferentially executed, the right-handedness is continuously executed to terminate the number of times of the first special symbol first, and thereafter, the number of times of the first special symbol is reduced. By executing the game method of digesting the reserved balls of the second special symbol accumulated until the game is performed, the time-saving state and the time until the time-saving state ends and the reserved balls accumulated during the time-saving state are all digested. It can be configured such that the number of lotteries of the second special symbol executed during that time is easily increased (to seven). In other words, from the shift to the time saving state to the time when the specific condition is satisfied (the number of time savings of the second special symbol becomes 1), left-handing (or firing) so that the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed. Stop), and after the specific conditions are satisfied, a very special and novel specification in which a game method of continuing right-handing is most advantageous for the player can be realized. Interest can be further improved.

  In the eighth embodiment, the number of times of the first special symbol is reduced to be greater than the number of times of the second special symbol, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of times of reduction of the first special symbol and the number of times of reduction of the second special symbol may be the same number (for example, both are four times). With this configuration, it is possible to shorten the period in which the lottery of the first special symbol having a low degree of expectation is executed, so that it is possible to prevent the game during the time reduction state from becoming redundant. Further, for example, the number of times of reduction of the first special symbol may be set to be smaller (for example, three times) than the number of times of reduction of the second special symbol. In the case of such a configuration, it is relatively likely that the number of time savings of the first special symbol elapses before the game balls are sufficiently entered (up to the maximum number of holds) into the right second entrance 64b. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game property in which a player can have joy simply by entering a game ball into the right second ball entrance 64b. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the eighth embodiment, if a normal symbol is hit, the player wins B8 at a rate of 20% at a rate of 20% (the ball can enter the right second entrance 64b). But it is not limited to this. For example, the probability of winning B per day may be reduced (for example, to 1/50). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the reserved balls of the second special symbol to be accumulated in the time saving state, so that the player can be pleased when the reserved balls of the second special symbol are accumulated. Can be realized. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<Ninth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described eighth embodiment, when a small hit occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol and a V hit occurs, during the time-saving state in which the small hit that triggered the V hit is advantageous. Regardless of whether the game has been won or the game has been won during an unfavorable normal state, the game state after the end of the V hit is set to an advantageous time-saving state.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the time saving state is set when the V hit occurs during the normal state, rather than when the V hit occurs during the time saving state. The ratio was configured to be high. With such a configuration, during the time saving state, the right-handed operation is continuously performed so that the lottery of the second special symbol is not executed, and the lottery of the first special symbol having a low jackpot expectation is executed. A game method in which the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is increased, and after the time saving state ends, a lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is aimed at a V-hit can be performed. In other words, when the time saving state is set, the novel gaming ability that shifts from the state with the low jackpot expectation to the state with the high jackpot expectation can be realized more reliably.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described eighth embodiment, when a normal symbol is hit during the time saving state, the right first ball entry port 64a2 is easily opened (the ball enters the first operation port 704). The opening pattern in which the right second ball entry port 64b is more easily opened (the ball easily enters the second working port 707) when the ratio of the type of the opening pattern per normal figure (A8 per general figure) in the opening pattern is higher. This is configured so that it is determined at a higher rate than the per-figure type (per-figure B8). Thereby, when the right-handed player is continuously executed in the time-saving state, the lottery condition (start winning) of the first special symbol is satisfied more.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, during the period from the transition to the time saving state to the elapse of the first time period (for example, 180 seconds), the first pachinko machine 10 does not receive the first symbol even if it hits the symbol. The first operation port 704 is also configured such that the game ball does not enter the operation port 704 only until the second period (for example, 360 seconds) elapses after the first period elapses. It was configured such that a game ball could enter the operating port 707. With this configuration, only the lottery of the first special symbol is executed and only the reserved ball of the first special symbol is increased until the first period elapses after the time saving state is started. Since the game ball continuously enters the second operation port 707 immediately after the start of the time saving state, the number of time savings of the second special symbol elapses in a relatively short time, and the time saving state is early. The termination can be more reliably prevented.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. The point is that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of 110 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the following. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the eighth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, a switching pattern of the switching valve 702 of the distribution device 700 (see FIG. 170) in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the switching valve 702 according to the above-described eighth embodiment has a first switching state in which the first flow path 703 can pass in a specific switching pattern, triggered by the start of a normal symbol hit, and a second switching state. The second switching state in which the two flow paths 706 can pass is configured to be switched (see FIG. 171). On the other hand, the switching valve 702 according to the ninth embodiment has a predetermined specific switching pattern based on the end of the big hit (or the initialization of the pachinko machine 10) irrespective of the hit period of the symbol. The switching operation is started. FIG. 215 is a diagram showing a switching pattern of the switching valve 702.

  As shown in FIG. 215, the switching valve 702 in the ninth embodiment is set to a switching mode (first switching mode) in which the switching mode is maintained in the first switching state for 180 seconds upon termination of the jackpot. . While this first switching mode is set, the electric accessory 701 is opened as a result of a normal symbol hit, and when a game ball enters the distribution device 700, the game ball moves to the first operation port 704. By being guided (falling down), the right first ball entrance 64a2 is opened. Therefore, if the player keeps hitting right while the time saving state is set and the first switching mode is set, the game ball enters only the right first entrance opening 64a2 and is biased toward the lottery of the first special symbol. As well as being executed, only the reserved balls of the first special symbol can be stored.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 215, when 180 seconds set in the first switching mode elapse, the switching mode in which the second switching state for 1 second and the first switching state for 3 seconds are periodically repeated ( The second switching mode) is set for 180 seconds (that is, 180 seconds after the start of the switching pattern until 360 seconds elapse). That is, while the second switching mode is set, the ratio of the period in which the switching valve 702 is set to the first switching state is 3/4, and the ratio of the period in which the switching valve 702 is set to the second switching state is 1/4. Become. If the player keeps right-handing while the second switching mode is set, about 1/4 of the game balls that have hit the symbol and entered the distribution device 700 as a normal symbol hit will be played. The ball enters the second operation port 707, and 3/4 of the game balls enter the first operation port 704. Therefore, if the right hit is continued while the second switching mode is set, the game ball enters the right first entrance 64a2 at a higher rate than the right second entrance 64b. . Therefore, while the second switching mode is set, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol can be increased while the lottery of the first special symbol is preferentially executed. During the 180 seconds in which the second switching mode is set, the state is switched to the second switching state at a rate of 1 second every 4 seconds (the second switching state is set 45 times), so that the right-handed operation is continuously performed. By continuing to perform, almost four or more game balls can enter the right second entrance 64b. In other words, only by continuously right-handing during the second switching state, the upper limit number (four) of reserved balls of the second special symbol can be easily stored.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 215, the switching mode (the third switching mode) in which the switching valve 702 is maintained in the first switching state after the lapse of 360 seconds after the start of the switching pattern and until the lapse of 3600 seconds. ) Is set. While the third switching mode is set, similarly to the setting of the first switching mode, since the game ball enters only the right first entrance opening 64a2, the special symbol lottery is executed. One special symbol can be weighted for lottery. The first switching mode, the second switching mode, and the third switching mode are the minimum units of the switching pattern of the switching valve 702, and thereafter, each time the switching pattern of the minimum unit ends, the switching pattern is repeatedly executed from the beginning. Is done.

  In addition, since the variation time of the departure in the time saving state is about 4 seconds on average, it takes about 384 seconds (4 seconds × 96 times) until the number of time savings of the first special symbol elapses. That is, since the number of time savings of the first special symbol elapses while the third switching mode is set, while the time saving state ends and the reserved ball of the second special symbol is consumed, the second special symbol is used. The possibility that the number of the reserved balls of the symbol increases can be set to zero. Therefore, in each time saving state, the number of lotteries of the second special symbol having a high jackpot expectation can be unified, so that the jackpot expectation in one time saving state can be made uniform.

  Here, similarly to the eighth embodiment, if the operating port through which the game ball entering the sorting device 700 is easily guided is changed in accordance with the type of per-drawing, the time-saving state is particularly reduced. If the electric accessory 701 is opened just before the game ends and the electric accessory 701 is opened, and the opening continues until at least one lottery using the holding ball of the second special symbol is started, There is a possibility that a game ball enters the distribution device 700 during the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases even after the time saving state ends. That is, there is a possibility that the possibility of winning a jackpot in one time-saving state may be significantly increased or decreased depending on the timing of the ordinary symbol hit and the type of the ordinary symbol hit.

  On the other hand, in the ninth embodiment, the third switching mode is configured to be easily set before and after the end of the time reduction state (that is, around 384 seconds after the end of the jackpot). Even if the player wins the normal symbol just before the end and the opening period of the electric accessory 701 based on the hit lasts until at least one of the second special symbol holding balls has been consumed, the second time after the end of the time reduction state, It is possible to suppress an increase in the number of reserved balls with special symbols. In other words, even if the game hits a regular symbol at a good timing, and even if the game ball can be made to enter the distribution device 700 at a good timing, it is only necessary to increase the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol with low expectation. It can be configured not to be possible. This makes it possible to equalize the expectation of the jackpot in the one time saving state.

<Electrical Configuration in Ninth Embodiment>
Next, a configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the ROM 202 according to the ninth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 according to the eighth embodiment (see FIG. 200A) in that the prescribed contents of the time saving provision table 202e are changed. . The difference is that the big hits A9 to F9 are specified as the big hit types defined in the first hit type selection table 202b instead of the big hits A8 to F8 in the eighth embodiment. Note that the jackpots A9 to F9 have exactly the same number of rounds and associated random numbers (the range of the counter value of the first hit type counter C2) as the jackpots A8 to F8. A detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 216, details of the time savings assignment table 202e in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 216 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the time saving provision table 202e in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 216, for the "big hit A9" won in the normal state, the number of times of saving the first special symbol (the value of the special-purpose time saving medium counter 203k1 for indicating the number of times of saving the first special symbol) ) Is associated with “96 times”, and “4 times” is associated with the number of times of saving the second special symbol (the value of the special time saving medium counter 203k2 for indicating the number of times of saving the second special symbol). . In addition, the same number of time savings granted is also defined in association with the "big hit A9" won in the time saving state. For this reason, when "big hit A9" is won, a time saving state advantageous to the player is set after the end of the big hit regardless of the gaming state.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 216, for the “big hit B9” won in the normal state, “0 times” is defined in association with both the first special symbol and the second special symbol as the number of time savings. On the other hand, the "big hit B9" won in the time saving state is associated with "96 times" as the number of times for saving the first special symbol and "4 times" as the number of times for saving the time for the second special symbol. Have been. For this reason, when the direct hit of the first special symbol occurs in the normal state and the “big hit B9” is determined, the game shifts to the normal state disadvantageous to the player, while the direct hit of the first special symbol in the time-saving state is reduced. When the "big hit B9" is determined and generated, the state shifts to a time saving state advantageous to the player.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 216, for the “big hit C9”, the number of times of saving the first special symbol is “96 times” regardless of whether the gaming state at the time of the big hit is the normal state or the time saving state. "And" 4 times "are defined in association with the number of times of saving the second special symbol. For this reason, when the direct hit of the second special symbol occurs and the “big hit C9” is determined, the state shifts to a time saving state advantageous to the player regardless of the game state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 202 (a), for the "big hit D9" to "big hit F9" won in the normal state, the number of times of saving the first special symbol is "96", and the number of times of the second special symbol is "96". While “4 times” is defined in association with the number of time savings provided, the time saving of the first special symbol and the second special symbol for “big hit D9” to “big hit F9” which are won in the time saving state are defined. “0 times” is associated and defined as both the number of times of application. For this reason, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the time reduction state, and if a small hit is won, if a V prize is generated and the V hit is won, a disadvantageous normal state is always set. Then, in the normal state, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, and if a small hit is won, a winning time is generated and the winning is made per V, so that an advantageous time saving state is always set. Therefore, during the time reduction state, the reserve balls of the second special symbol are accumulated up to the upper limit number while continuously performing the right-hand so that the lottery of the second special symbol is not executed. By implementing a game method of executing a lottery based on a reserved ball with 2 special symbols, it is possible to realize a novel game property that is advantageous to a player. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 217, a description will be given of a method of shifting each state in the ninth embodiment. Here, in the ninth embodiment, three modes (normal mode, chance mode A, and chance mode B) are provided as in the eighth embodiment. First, with reference to the upper part of FIG. 217, a description will be given of a method of shifting from the normal mode (the normal game state in which the reserved ball of the second special symbol does not exist) to another state (mode). As shown in the upper part of FIG. 217, there is a possibility that the mode is shifted from the normal mode to another mode only when a big hit (direct hit) occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol. More specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 217, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol and the “jackpot A9” is won at a rate of 50%, the mode after the end of the jackpot is advantageous. The chance mode A (time saving game state) is set. On the other hand, when the "big hit B9" is won at a rate of 50% when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the mode after the big hit is set again to the normal mode disadvantageous to the player. (Loop normal mode). For this reason, in the normal mode, a game can be performed in expectation of winning the “big hit A9” in the lottery of the first special symbol.

  Next, with reference to the center part of FIG. 217, a method of shifting from the chance mode A (time saving game state) to another state (mode) will be described. As shown in the center part of FIG. 217, there is a possibility that the mode will shift from the chance mode A to another mode not only when the jackpot is won but also when the number of times of working hours has elapsed. More specifically, in the chance mode A, if a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, and a V winning is won, a transition to a disadvantageous normal mode is made after the big hit ends. In addition, when the number of time savings has elapsed in the chance mode A (after the time saving game state, the lottery of the first special symbol ends 96 times or the lottery of the second special symbol ends 4 times), the second If there is a reserved ball with a special symbol, the process moves to chance mode B.

  On the other hand, as shown in the center part of FIG. 203, when a direct hit occurs in the chance mode A, the mode after the end of the big hit is always set to the chance mode A advantageous to the player, regardless of the big hit type. (The chance mode A is looped.) As a result, in the chance mode A, there is no possibility of winning a small hit (that is, a V hit occurs), and by executing a lottery of the first special symbol which has a possibility of winning a direct hit. It is possible to realize a game property that makes a player expect that a direct hit occurs. In other words, it is possible to realize a novel gaming property that makes it desirable to preferentially execute the lottery of the first special symbol having a low jackpot expectation, rather than the lottery of the second special symbol having a high jackpot expectation. Can be improved.

  Next, with reference to the lower part of FIG. 217, a method of shifting from the chance mode B (the normal gaming state in which the reserved ball of the second special symbol exists) to another mode will be described. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 217, from the chance mode B to another state (mode), in addition to the case where the jackpot is won, the other state (mode) when all the reserved balls of the second special pattern are consumed. Move to. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 217, when a direct hit occurs, and the type of the direct hit is a "big hit A9" determined by a ratio of 50% of the direct hit of the first special symbol. , And the “big hit C9” determined by the 100% of the direct hit of the second special symbol, the game shifts to the chance mode A which is advantageous to the player after the end of the big hit. Also, in the case of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol and winning the V hit, the game shifts to the chance mode A which is advantageous to the player after the end of the big hit.

  On the other hand, if a direct hit of the first special symbol occurs, the "big hit B8" determined at a rate of 50% is won, and further, if the reserved ball of the second special symbol at the end of the big hit is 0, , The state (mode) after the end of the jackpot is set to the normal mode disadvantageous to the player. Also, when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol have been consumed (all the lotteries of the second special symbol after shifting to the chance mode B have been lost), the mode shifts to the normal mode. On the other hand, when the reserved ball of the second special symbol is not 0 (one or more) at the end of the "big hit B8" or "big hit C8", the state (mode) after the end of the big hit is changed to the chance mode again. B. For this reason, in the chance mode B, it is possible to cause the player to play a game with the expectation that the lottery of the second special symbol will be a small hit (that is, a win per V) rather than a direct hit. Therefore, until the chance mode A ends, the right-handed execution is continuously performed so that the lottery of the second special symbol is not executed, the number of times of the first special symbol is reduced, and after shifting to the chance mode B, Since it is possible to realize a special and novel playability that can be expected to be a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player in the game. .

<Regarding Control Process of Main Control Device in Ninth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 218 and 219. First, with reference to FIG. 218, the startup process 9 in the ninth embodiment will be described. The start-up process 9 is a process executed in place of the start-up process (see FIG. 50) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is executed in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment). Similar to the raising process (see FIG. 50), this is a process that is executed to initialize the pachinko machine 10 based on turning on the power.

  In the start-up process 9 (see FIG. 218) in the ninth embodiment, the processes in S1401 to S1417 are the same as the respective processes in S1401 to S1417 in the start-up process (see FIG. 50) in the first embodiment. The processing is executed. In the start-up process 9 (see FIG. 218) in the ninth embodiment, when the process of S1417 ends, the start of the switching pattern (see FIG. 215) of the switching valve 702 is set (S1421), and the process of S1410 is started. Move on to processing.

  Next, the details of the jackpot control process 9 (S1521) in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot control process 9 (S1521) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process (see S1504 in FIG. 52) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment). Similar to the jackpot control process (see FIG. 52) in the embodiment, this is a process for performing various settings during execution of the jackpot game.

  Among the jackpot control processes 9 (S1521) in the ninth embodiment, in each of the processes of S1601 to S1612 and S1615 to S1618, the jackpot control processes in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 52, S1504). The same processes as those of S1601 to S1612 and S1615 to S1618 are performed.

  In the big hit control process 9 (S1521) of the ninth embodiment, when the process of S1617 ends, the start of the switching pattern (see FIG. 215) of the switching valve 702 is set (S1623), and the process proceeds to S1618. Transition.

  By executing the start-up process 9 (see FIG. 218) and the jackpot control process 9 (see FIG. 219), the switching pattern of the switching valve 702 is initialized when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized and when the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the time saving state, the opportunity to increase the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol can be limited to a period from the lapse of 180 seconds to the lapse of 360 seconds after the end of the big hit. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the distribution device 700 immediately after the end of the time-saving state, the right second entrance opening 64b is opened (a normal symbol hit is started just before the end of the time-saving state, Since the lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is started immediately after the time saving state ends, the game ball that has entered the sorting device 700 after being drawn is guided to the second operating port 707). In addition, the number of lotteries of the second special symbol in the normal state after the reduction of time can be fixed to a maximum of four times. Therefore, it is possible to equalize the degree of expectation of the jackpot in the one time saving state.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the lottery condition of the first special symbol (start winning) and the lottery condition of the second special symbol (start winning) in a time-saving state advantageous to the player. Is configured to be able to hold both, and the lottery of the second special symbol tends to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol (the possibility of substantially winning a big hit is increased) ). Then, in the time reduction state, when the second special symbol wins in the lottery, the possibility of transition to the normal state disadvantageous to the player increases (if a direct hit with a low probability occurs, the state transitions to the time reduction state, When a V hit based on a small hit with a high probability occurs, the state shifts to the normal state). On the other hand, when the second special symbol wins in the normal state, there is a possibility that the state shifts to a time saving state advantageous to the player. It was configured to be high. In other words, after shifting to the time saving state, until the specific condition is satisfied (the time saving state ends), the one with the big hit based on the fact that the lottery of the first special symbol is executed is the second special While it is easier for the player to be more advantageous than a jackpot based on the fact that the symbol lottery has been executed, after the specific condition is satisfied (after the time saving state ends), the lottery for the second special symbol is performed. It is configured such that a player who wins based on the jackpot is more advantageous to the player than a player who wins the jackpot based on the lottery of the first special symbol. With this configuration, before and after the specific condition is satisfied, it is possible to realize a novel playability in which the type of the special symbol that the player wants to execute the lottery can be different, so that the player can Interest in games can be improved. That is, until the specific condition is satisfied, the game method in which the lottery of the second special symbol is increased while the lottery of the first special symbol is executed without interruption (that is, right-handed continuously is continuously performed. A game method in which the lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is easily executed after the specific condition is satisfied (that is, a game method in which the shooting is stopped until the reserved ball of the second special symbol is exhausted). ) Can be executed. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the game becomes monotonous.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the period during which the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol may increase in the time-saving state is set within a specific period (from 180 seconds to 360 seconds after the end of the big hit). ). In other words, before and after the end of the time saving state, it is possible to form a state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the right second entrance 64b regardless of the occurrence of the hit of the ordinary symbol. With this configuration, the number of lotteries for the second special symbol in the normal state after the end of the time saving state can be fixed to a maximum of four times. Therefore, it is possible to equalize the degree of expectation of the jackpot in the one time saving state.

  In the ninth embodiment, the first special symbol is provided within the number of times of saving time by configuring so that the case of winning per V in the normal state is more advantageous than the result of winning per V during the time saving state. The lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the normal state after the number of hours saved has elapsed, but the game method of digesting the reserved ball of the second special symbol is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Conversely, it is more advantageous to win in the case of winning per V within the number of time savings, and to win in the case of winning in small hits and winning per V with the holding ball of the second special symbol after the time saving state ends. You may comprise. With this configuration, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed within the number of times reduced, it is possible to make the player think that a V prize is to be generated, thereby improving the degree of freedom of the game. Can be done.

  In the ninth embodiment, the switching valve 702 is operated in a fixed switching pattern triggered by the end of the big hit, and the period in which the reserved balls of the second special symbol can be stored is 180 seconds after the big hit ends and 360 seconds after the big hit ends Although the configuration is limited to this, the configuration is not limited to this. The period during which the reserved ball of the second special symbol can be stored may be arbitrarily determined. Further, the switching pattern of the switching valve 702 does not need to be fixed. For example, a different switching pattern may be set according to the type of jackpot. In other words, a switching pattern in which a reserved ball of the second special symbol can be stored during the time saving state is set, and a switching pattern in which it is impossible (difficult) to store the reserved ball of the second special symbol. May be set to provide a time saving big hit.

  In the ninth embodiment, the switching valve 702 is configured to perform the switching operation in the fixed switching pattern upon the end of the big hit, but this is not a limitation. For example, the control of the above-described eighth embodiment or the like may be adopted. In other words, a control may be employed in which the switching operation is performed in a fixed switching pattern upon the start of the normal symbol hitting, and the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701 is made different depending on the general symbol hitting type. Conversely, the switching control of the switching valve 702 in the ninth embodiment may be adopted in the above-described eighth embodiment.

  In the ninth embodiment, the switching operation is performed in a fixed switching pattern triggered by the end of the jackpot, so that the possibility that the switching valve 702 is set to the first switching state before and after the end of the working hours is increased. Immediately after the time saving ends, the game ball that has entered the sorting device 700 enters the second operating port 707, the right second entry port 64b is opened, and after transition to the normal state, the second special symbol Although it was configured to suppress an increase in the number of reserved balls, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the final display time of the last variable display in the time saving state, a period longer than the winning period per ordinary figure (2.5 seconds) set when a normal symbol hits during the time saving state (for example, (5 seconds), and the time-saving state may be ended at the end of the fluctuation time (control may be performed such that the time-saving state has already ended in the final display period of the variable display). With this configuration, even if a normal symbol hit is started immediately before the final display, the normal symbol hit can be ended during the final display period. After one or more lotteries have started (that is, after the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol has decreased), it is possible to reliably suppress the game balls from entering the right second entrance 64b.

  In the ninth embodiment, the switching mode (first to third switching modes) is configured to be variable according to the elapsed time after the end of the jackpot (and after the pachinko machine 10 is initialized). It is not limited. For example, the switching mode may be configured to be variable according to the number of times saved. More specifically, for example, the first switching mode (a switching mode in which it is difficult to allow a game ball to enter the right second entrance 64b) while the number of times saved is 80 or more. If the number of time savings is less than 80 and the remaining number is 20 or more, the second switching mode (the game ball is inserted into the right second entrance 64b). When the number of time savings is less than 20, it is difficult to allow the game ball to enter the third switching mode (right second entrance 64b). May be configured to be set. With such a configuration, only a short fluctuation time (for example, 3 seconds) is selected in the time saving state, and even if the time saving state ends in about 300 seconds, the second special symbol is obtained immediately after the time saving state ends. It is possible to more reliably prevent a game ball from entering the right second entrance port 64b when one or more of the reserved balls have been digested.

  In the ninth embodiment, the switching valve 702 is configured to perform a switching operation in a predetermined specific switching pattern (see FIG. 215) that is started when the jackpot ends (and the pachinko machine 10 is initialized). But was not limited to this. For example, a configuration in which a switching operation of a specific switching pattern is started when a jackpot is started may be used. With this configuration, the timing at which the second switching mode is set can be changed depending on the time required for the jackpot game, so that the second switching mode can be set in a relatively short time after the end of the jackpot. Also, an event such as the second switching mode continues even immediately before the end of the time saving state can be generated. Therefore, since the degree of advantage of the player can be changed according to the progress of the game during the big hit, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In the ninth embodiment, the switching valve 702 is set in a predetermined specific switching pattern (see FIG. 215) that is started when the jackpot ends (and the pachinko machine 10 is initialized) regardless of the jackpot type. Although the switching operation is performed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the switching pattern set after the end of the jackpot may be made different depending on the jackpot type. More specifically, for example, when the player wins directly, the state of the switching valve 702 is switched according to the switching pattern shown in FIG. It may be configured to set a switching pattern (second switching pattern) that is not set to the 2 switching state (or the setting period is short). By configuring in this way, the degree of advantage in the case where a direct hit is won during the time saving state can be increased, so that a game can be played with a stronger expectation that the direct hit will be won. In addition, for example, when a direct hit of the first special symbol is won, the switching valve 702 is configured to be switched according to the switching pattern shown in FIG. The configuration may be such that two switching patterns are set.

<Tenth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 220 to 248. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described seventh embodiment, two types of gaming states are provided as a gaming state: a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, and an advantageous time-saving state. The configuration was such that the degree of advantage in the normal state was greatly varied depending on the presence or absence.

  On the other hand, in the tenth embodiment, as the gaming state, in addition to the normal state which is disadvantageous to the player and the time reduction state which is relatively advantageous to the player, the latent state which is disadvantageous to the player, and the The most advantageous probabilistic state is provided. That is, in addition to the normal state and the time-saving state, the jackpot probability is higher than the normal state, but the electric jackpot 64ra is unlikely to be opened and the special pattern lottery is hardly executed, and the jackpot probability is high, and An advantageous positive change state in which the electric accessory 64ra is easily opened is provided. Further, in the tenth embodiment, when a jackpot is won, a high ratio (90% ratio) is set to a high probability state (a latent state or a probable change state) of a special symbol after the end of the jackpot. Instead, the upper limit number (for example, 11 times) is provided for the continuous number of the high probability state of the special symbol. This makes it difficult to predict the game state after the end of the big hit, so that it is possible to realize a deep game property.

  Further, in the tenth embodiment, when the right hand is performed in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the lottery condition of the first special symbol and the lottery condition of the second special symbol can be satisfied. Above, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel). (A so-called simultaneous fluctuation method is adopted). With this, even while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the other special symbol can be executed without waiting for the end of the variable display, so that the special symbol lottery can be executed more efficiently. it can. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously fluctuating, if one of them fluctuates and stops at the jackpot stop symbol, the other fluctuating display is related to the remaining fluctuating time and the lottery result. It is configured to be displayed with a stop symbol that has come off. Thereby, during execution of the big hit game, the other variable display is definitely displayed as the big hit, and it is possible to prevent a problem that the big hit is started repeatedly.

  Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, it is assumed that the jackpot is won in the normal state in which the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, and in the latent state, and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to the probability change state or the time saving state. In addition, these advantageous states are configured to end by executing a lottery of a special symbol a predetermined number of times (for example, eight times) after the end of the big hit, while the time reduction state of a normal symbol is set. If the jackpot is won in the probable change state or the time saving state, the probable change state that continues until the next jackpot or the time reduction state that continues until the 100 special symbol lottery ends after the end of the jackpot is set. . That is, in the normal state and the latent state, first, the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol is won by the jackpot given a predetermined number of times (eight times), and the jackpot is won by the lottery within the eight times. It is configured to be able to shift to a probable change state that continues until the next big hit or a time reduction state that continues until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times after the big hit ends. By shifting to the probable change state that continues until the next jackpot, the next jackpot can always be won in the state where the time saving state of ordinary symbols is set, so after the end of the next jackpot, continue until the next jackpot It is a probable change state, or a time-saving state that continues until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, the most advantageous state is formed for the player. In addition, even in a time-saving state in which the lottery of 100 special symbols is continued until the end of the special jackpot, if the jackpot can be won within 100 times, a probable change state that continues until the next big jackpot, or 100 special symbols after the end of the jackpot Since the lottery is completed until the lottery ends, a state in which the degree of expectation to be an advantageous state is relatively high is formed.

  Further, in the tenth embodiment, the state shifts to the probable change state which continues until the next big hit, and the probable state and the big hit are repeated while continuing to win the probable big hit which is won at a rate of 90%, and the special change state of the special symbol. When the maximum number of times (probability change limit number) is reached, regardless of whether the player wins the probability change jackpot or the normal jackpot, the time reduction number is 100 times (that is, it is relatively disadvantageous compared to the probability change state). If the jackpot is won within the number of working hours (so-called pullback occurs), the ratio of the advantageous jackpot type (jackpot with a large number of rounds) will be It is configured so that it is easier to get higher than when winning. More specifically, the jackpot of the second special symbol is configured so that the ratio of the jackpot type having a lower degree of advantage (the selection ratio of a small number of rounds) is higher than the jackpot of the first special symbol. In the time-saving state set by reaching the number of times of the probable change, the lottery frequency of the second special symbol is configured to be extremely low. That is, the fluctuation time of the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol becomes significantly longer than the fluctuation time of the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol (for example, 600 seconds uniformly regardless of the lottery result). This is set so that the lottery of the first special symbol can be executed a plurality of times while the variable display of the second special symbol is executed once. In other words, it is configured such that the rate of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery is increased. Thereby, when the number of times of the probability change has been reached, the game can be performed with a stronger expectation that the jackpot will be returned, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment in the configuration, in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the main controller 110 , The configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is different from that of the first embodiment. It is partially changed and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the following. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the seventh embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 220, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 220 is a diagram showing a board configuration of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 220, the gaming board 13 in the tenth embodiment differs from the board configuration of the gaming board 13 in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 178) in that the V winning device 6500 is deleted. At the position where the second entrance 6400 was provided, a right first entrance 64r is provided as a starting winning prize opening which is a chance for a lottery of the first special symbol, and a second special symbol is provided on the right side of the board. The difference is that a second ball entry port 6450 is provided as a start winning port to be a lottery trigger. It should be noted that the V winning device 6500 is deleted in the tenth embodiment, in which a special symbol lottery is used to win either the big hit or the big hit, and a small hit is provided. Because there is no.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 221, a characteristic effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth embodiment will be described. As described above, in the tenth embodiment, if a jackpot is won while the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol is set, the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol is always provided after the end of the jackpot. In other words, if you win a probability change jackpot, a probability change state that will continue until the next jackpot is set, and if you win the normal jackpot or if you reach the probability change limit number, 100 special symbol lottery will be executed It is configured to set a time saving state that is continued until it is completed. In the tenth embodiment, when a jackpot is won while the normal symbol time saving state is set, it is clearly determined whether the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot is the time saving state or the probable change state. It is configured not to inform, but to suggest by the presentation mode. An example of the suggestion based on the effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 221 (a) and (b).

  FIG. 221 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode indicating that the degree of expectation that the probability change state is set is relatively high. As shown in FIG. 221 (a), when the display mode indicating that the degree of expectation that the probability change state is set is high is set, in the main display area Dm, the character 801 moves in a forest where many trees are growing. The effect of searching for the treasure chest 802 is developed. In addition to this, the characters “forest area” are displayed in the second display area Ds2 in the sub display area Ds. The display mode corresponding to the forest area is configured so that the selection ratio is higher when the probable change state is set than when the time saving state is set.

  On the other hand, FIG. 221 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode indicating that the degree of expectation of the probable change state is relatively low (the possibility of the time saving state is high). As shown in FIG. 221 (b), when the display mode indicating that the degree of expectation of the probable change state is low is set, the effect of the character 801 searching for the treasure chest 802 in the desolate wilderness in the main display area Dm is developed. Is done. In addition to this, the characters "wilderness area" are displayed in the second display area Ds2 in the sub display area Ds. The display mode corresponding to this wilderness area is configured so that the selection ratio when the time saving state is set is higher than when the probability change state is set.

  In the tenth embodiment, in addition to the above-described effect in the forest area and the wilderness area, an effect in the sky area in which it is determined that the probable change state has been set at the time of execution (character 801 is a sea of clouds) A production that looks for a treasure chest 802 in the interior) is provided. Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, each time a new variation pattern effect (variation display) is started, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the display mode can be changed. Thereby, even if the effect mode of the wilderness area with a low degree of expectation is set, each time the variable display is executed, the game is performed with the expectation that the degree of expectation of the probable change state is changed to the effect mode that increases. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Electrical Configuration in Tenth Embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 222A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the ROM 202 according to the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 222A, the ROM 202 according to the tenth embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 according to the seventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 183A) in that a variation pattern scenario table 202ga is added. Are different. Further, the configuration is different in that the configurations of the first hit random number table 202a, the first hit type selection table 202b, and the time saving table 202e are partially changed.

  First, with reference to FIG. 223 (a), details of the first random number table 202a in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 223 (a) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the first random number table 202a in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 223 (a), the first random number table 202a in the tenth embodiment stores a random number value (first random number counter C1) determined to be a big hit in the high probability state (probable change state) of the special symbol. Counter value) and a random value (counter value of the first random number counter C1) determined to be a big hit in the special symbol low probability state.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 223 (a), as a random number value (counter value) determined to be a big hit in the special symbol high probability state (latent state, probable change state), 25 of "0 to 24" A number of random numbers (counter values) are defined. Of the 1000 random numbers (counter values) that the first random number counter C1 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) determined to be big hits in the special symbol high-probability state is 25 from "0 to 24" Therefore, when a special symbol lottery is executed in the probable state or the latent state, the probability of being determined to be a big hit is 1/40 (25/1000).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 223 (a), seven random numbers “0 to 6” are used as random numbers (counter values) determined to be a big hit in the low probability state (normal state, time saving state) of the special symbol. (Counter value) is defined. Among the 1,000 random numbers (counter values) that the first random number counter C1 can take, seven random number values (counter values) determined to be big hits in the low probability state of the special symbol are "0 to 6". Therefore, when a special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state or the time saving state, the probability of being determined as a big hit is about 1/143 (7/1000).

  As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery is greatly different between the high probability state of the special symbol and the low probability state of the special symbol. Therefore, the game can be sharpened, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, the details of the first hit type selection table 202b in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 223 (b). FIG. 223 (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the first hit type selection table 202b in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 223 (b), the first random number table 202b according to the tenth embodiment includes a special 1 for determining (selecting) a jackpot type when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol. At least a win table 202bf1 and a special win table 202bf2 for determining (selecting) a jackpot type when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery are defined. First, with reference to FIG. 224 (a), the details of the special hitting table 202bg1 will be described.

  FIG. 224 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special hit table 202bg1 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 224 (a), in the special hit table 202bg1 in the tenth embodiment, as the jackpot types of the first special symbol, eight jackpot types of “jackpot A10” to “jackpot H10” are provided. Stipulated. “Big hit A10” to “big hit C10” are the big hit types in which the number of rounds is 9 and the state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit is set to the special symbol high probability state. The "big hit D10" to "big hit F10" are the big hit types in which the number of rounds is three and the special symbol state after the big hit end is set to the special symbol high probability state. “Big hit G10” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is nine and the special symbol state after the big hit end is set to the low probability state of the special symbol. Further, the "big hit H10" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is three and the state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit is set to the low probability state of the special symbol. Note that whether or not the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is given is configured differently depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit and the big hit type.

  As shown in FIG. 224 (a), for the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of “0 to 5”, “big hit A10” (9 rounds probability changing big hit) is defined in association with the big hit type. ing. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) of “0 to 99” that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit A10” is “0 to 5”. ”, The rate at which“ big hit A10 ”is determined (selected) when a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol is 6% (6/100).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 224 (a), for the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of “6 to 46”, “big hit B10” (9 round probability change big hit) is associated with the big hit type. Stipulated. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit B10” is 41, “6 to 46”. When the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the rate of determining (selecting) the "big hit B10" is 41% (41/100).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 224 (a), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “47 to 66”, and “big hit C10” (9 round probability change big hit) is associated with the big hit type. Stipulated. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit C10” is 20, which is “47 to 66”. When a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the ratio of determining (selecting) the "big hit C10" is 20% (20/100).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 224 (a), the value "67" of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the big hit type "big hit D10" (three rounds probability change big hit). Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit D10” is one, so the first special symbol lottery When the jackpot is won, the rate at which the "big hit D10" is determined (selected) is 1% (1/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 224 (a), for the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of “68, 69”, “big hit E10” (three round probability change big hit) is associated with the big hit type. Stipulated. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit E10” is two, so the first special symbol lottery When the jackpot is won, the rate at which "big hit E10" is determined (selected) is 2% (2/100).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 224 (a), for the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of “70 to 89”, “big hit F10” (three round probability changing big hit) is associated with the big hit type. Stipulated. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit F10” is 20, which is “70 to 89”. When a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the ratio of determining (selecting) the "big hit F10" is 20% (20/100).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 224 (a), for the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “90 to 92”, “big hit G10” (9 round normal big hit) is associated with the big hit type. Stipulated. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit G10" is 3, so the first special symbol lottery When the jackpot is won, the rate at which the "big hit G10" is determined (selected) is 3% (3/100).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 224 (a), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “93 to 99”, and “big hit H10” (3 round normal big hit) is associated with the big hit type. Stipulated. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit H10” is 7, so the first special symbol lottery When the jackpot is won, the rate at which the "big hit H10" is determined (selected) is 7% (7/100).

  As described above, in the tenth embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, a probability of changing the jackpot at a rate of 90% (when the jackpot is one of “jackpot A10” to “jackpot F10”) is obtained. At a rate of 10% (in the case of one of "big hit G10" and "big hit H10"), a normal jackpot is won. The configuration is such that a jackpot of nine rounds is determined at a rate of 70%, and a jackpot of three rounds is determined at a rate of 30%.

  Next, with reference to FIG. As described above, this special two-win table 202g2 is a data table for determining a hit type when a large hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. As shown in FIG. 224 (b), in the tenth embodiment, four big hit types of "big hit I10" to "big hit L10" are provided as the hit types of the second special symbol. “Big hit A10” to “big hit C10” are the big hit types in which the number of rounds is 9 and the state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit is set to the special symbol high probability state. The "big hit D10" to "big hit F10" are the big hit types in which the number of rounds is three and the special symbol state after the big hit end is set to the special symbol high probability state. “Big hit I10” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 9 and the special symbol state after the big hit end is set to the special symbol high probability state. “Big hit J10” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is three and the state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit is set to the special symbol high probability state. “Big hit K10” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 9 and the special symbol state after the big hit end is set to the special symbol low probability state. Further, "big hit L10" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is three rounds and the state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit is set to the low probability state of the special symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 224 (a), if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 26”, “big hit I10” (9 rounds probability change big hit) is defined in association with the big hit type. ing. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit I10” is “0 to 26”. , 27% (27/100) when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the “big hit I10” is determined (selected).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 224 (a), for the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of “27 to 89”, “big hit J10” (three round probability change big hit) is associated with the big hit type. Stipulated. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) from “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit J10” is “27 to 89”. , 53% (53/100) when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol and the jackpot J10 is determined (selected).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 224 (a), for the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “90 to 92”, “big hit K10” (9 round normal big hit) is associated with the big hit type. Stipulated. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit K10” is “90 to 92”. ”, The rate at which“ big hit K10 ”is determined (selected) when a big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery is 3% (3/100).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 224 (a), for the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "93 to 99", "big hit L10" (3 round normal big hit) is associated with the big hit type. Stipulated. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of “0 to 99” that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit L10” is “93 to 99”. ”, The rate at which“ big hit L10 ”is determined (selected) when a big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery is 7% (7/100).

  As described above, in the tenth embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, a 90% ratio ("big hit I10", The jackpot is determined to be a positive jackpot at any one of "big hit J10" and a normal jackpot at a rate of 10% (at any of "big hit K10" and "big hit L10"). Further, the configuration is such that a jackpot of 9 rounds is determined at a rate of 30%, and a jackpot of 3 rounds is determined at a rate of 70%. In other words, in terms of the number of rounds, a case where a large hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol is more advantageous than a case where a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 225 (a), the details of the variation pattern table 202d in the tenth embodiment will be described. Like the variation pattern table 202d in the seventh embodiment, the variation pattern table 202d is data in which data for determining the variation time of the special symbol is defined according to the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1. It is a table. FIG. 225 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern table 202d according to the tenth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 225 (a), the fluctuation pattern table 202d in the tenth embodiment determines a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) in a game state (normal state, latent state) in which a normal state of a normal symbol is set. A normal time table 202dg1 for (selection) and a time reduction table 202dg2 for determining (selecting) a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) in a game state (time reduction state, probable change state) in which a normal symbol time reduction state is set. And a limit arrival time table 202dg3 for determining (selecting) a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) in a state where the number of times of the probability change has reached the limit. First, the details of the normal table 202dg1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 225 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the normal table 202dg1. As shown in FIG. 225 (b), in the normal table 202dg1 in the tenth embodiment, the symbol type, the lottery result, and the range of the value of the variation type counter CS1 are defined in association with the variation pattern. I have. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 225 (b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is “missing”, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0” “139” is defined in association with “short deviation” with a variation time of 7 seconds, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “140 to 149” with a variation time of 10 seconds. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in association with “normal reach” having a variation time of 30 seconds for the range of the variation type counter CS1 of “150 to 179”. Is defined in association with a range of “180 to 198” and “super reach” with a variation time of 60 seconds.

  As shown in FIG. 225 (b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is “big hit”, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 29”. In contrast, “normal reach” with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is associated and defined, and “super reach” with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds corresponds to the range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of “30 to 189”. A "special reach" with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is defined in association with the range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "190 to 198".

  On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is “missing”, the value of the variation type counter CS1 varies in the range of “0 to 198”, that is, in the entire range. When the lottery result is "big hit", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the variation time is 600 A super long hit per second is defined in association. Therefore, even if a player hits the ball into the second entrance 6450 by right-handing in the normal state or in the latent state, the special symbol lottery can be executed only every 600 seconds. In the game state where the normal state of the symbol is set, the game efficiency in the case of performing the irregular game method of right-handing can be remarkably deteriorated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method of right-handing in a normal state or a latent state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 226 (a), the details of the time saving table 202dg2, which is one of the data tables constituting the fluctuation pattern table 202d, will be described. As described above, the time saving table 202dg2 is a data table that is referred to for determining a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) when a special symbol lottery is executed in a game state in which a normal symbol time reduction state is set. It is. FIG. 226 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time saving table 202dg2.

  As shown in FIG. 226 (a), the time saving table 202dg2 defines the special symbol lottery result and the range of the value of the variation type counter CS1 in association with each other. That is, in the time saving state or the probable change state, basically (except when the probable change limit is reached), the fluctuation pattern is determined according to the result of the special symbol lottery regardless of the type of the special symbol. Make up. This is because, in the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol in the tenth embodiment, the game ball frequently enters both the right first entrance 64r and the second entrance 6450 by performing a right hit, This is to prevent one special symbol from being randomly executed.

  As shown in FIG. 226 (a), when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is “out of place”, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set in the range of “0 to 149”. "Short deviation" with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is defined in association with, and "Long deviation" with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is defined in association with a range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "150 to 189". The value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined as "normal reach" having a variation time of 10 seconds in the range of "190 to 195", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined as "196 to 198". Is defined in association with “super reach” having a fluctuation time of 15 seconds. That is, it is configured such that a short fluctuation time is more easily determined as compared with a case where a deviation fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the normal table 202dg1 (see FIG. 225 (b)). As a result, it is possible to efficiently perform a game in a probable change state or a time saving state in which the time saving state of a normal symbol is set.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 226 (a), when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is "big hit", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 49". Thus, “normal reach” having a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is associated and defined, and “super reach” having a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is associated with a value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in a range of “50 to 194”. A “special reach” having a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined in association with the range in which the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “195 to 198”. In other words, even when the lottery result is a win, the short fluctuation time is easily determined as compared to the case where the fluctuation pattern is determined using the normal table 202dg1 (see FIG. 225 (b)). are doing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 226 (b), details of the limit arrival time table 202dg3, which is one of the data tables constituting the fluctuation pattern table 202d, will be described. As described above, the limit arrival time table 202dg3 is a data in which data for determining a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of a special symbol is defined during a time-saving state set after the number of times of the probability change is reached. It is a table. FIG. 226 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the time saving table 202dg2.

  As shown in FIG. 226 (b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), each variation pattern is selected by the same distribution as the time saving table 202dg2 (see FIG. 226 (a)). . On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is “missing”, the value of the variation type counter CS1 varies in the range of “0 to 198”, that is, in the entire range. When the lottery result is "big hit", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the variation time is 600 A super long hit per second is defined in association. Therefore, if right-handed is performed in the time-saving state after the number of times of the probability change has been reached, the lottery of the first special symbol can be intensively executed while the super long variation of the second special symbol is being executed. . Here, as described above, the jackpot of the first special symbol is configured so that the jackpot type (the jackpot with a large number of rounds) that is more advantageous than the jackpot of the second special symbol is easily determined. It can be expected that a special symbol lottery will be a big hit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 227, details of the time savings assignment table 202e in the tenth embodiment will be described. The time savings grant table 202e is a data table referred to for setting the number of time savings after the end of the big hit according to the big hit type and the gaming state at the time of the big hit winning, similarly to the time saving giving table 202e in the seventh embodiment. is there. FIG. 227 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time-saving provision table 202e.

  As shown in FIG. 227, the jackpot A10 (9 round probability change jackpot) and the jackpot D10 (3 round probability change jackpot) won in the gaming state (normal state, latent state) in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set. If the probability change jackpot is a hit before reaching the probability change limit, the number of time savings to be continued until the next jackpot is given, while if the probability change number of hits is reached by the jackpot, eight time savings are set. . Therefore, if the jackpot A10 or the jackpot D10 is won before the probability change limit is reached, the probability change state (the most advantageous game state) which continues until the next jackpot is set, while the probability change limit is reached. , Only the low probability state of the special symbol and the eight time saving states are set, so that the degree of advantage of the player varies greatly depending on whether or not the number of times of the probability change has been reached. In addition, as the number of time savings to be continued until the next big hit, for example, a number sufficiently large to the big hit probability (the number of times that the big hit can be considered to be always won within the number of time savings), such as 65536 times, is set. .

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 227, the jackpot A10 (9 rounds, the variable jackpot) and the jackpot D10 (3 rounds, the variable jackpot), which are won in the gaming state (the time saving state, the probability change state) in which the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol is set. If the probability change jackpot is the hit before reaching the probability change limit, a time saving state that continues until the next jackpot is given, while if the probability change limit number is reached by the jackpot, 100 time reduction times are set. You. Therefore, even if the number of times of the probability change has been reached, the lottery of the special symbol can be executed 100 times without reducing the number of balls held, so that a sense of expectation for pulling back the big hit can be given. As described above, in the tenth embodiment, it is configured not to clearly notify the player whether or not the limit number of times has been reached (whether the state is the probable change state or the time saving state). For this reason, even if the time saving state has been set by actually reaching the probable change limit number, the probable change state can be expected from the player, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved. .

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 227, in the gaming state (normal state, latent state) in which the normal state of the ordinary symbol is set, the jackpot B10 (9 round probability variable jackpot), the jackpot E10 (3 round probability variable jackpot), and Regarding the jackpot I10 (9 round probability change jackpot), eight time saving times are given regardless of whether the hit is before reaching the probability change limit or the probability change limit number is reached. In other words, if the limit is not reached, the state is changed to a certain state until the lottery of the special symbol is completed eight times after the end of the big hit, and the latent state is set after the ninth time. On the other hand, if the number of times of the limit has been reached, the time is reduced until the special symbol lottery is completed eight times after the end of the big hit, and the normal state is set after the ninth time. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 227, the jackpots B10 (9 rounds, the variable jackpot), the jackpots E10 (3 rounds, the variable jackpot), and the jackpots, which are won in the game state (the time saving state, the probability change state) in which the time reduction state of the normal symbol is set (the time reduction state, the probability change state). The same number of time savings granted as the big hit A10 and the big hit D10 is associated with I10 (9 round probability change big hit). In other words, the hit before the arrival of the probability change limit is defined in association with the number of time savings to be continued until the next big hit, and the hit after the arrival of the probability change limit is defined in association with the number of time savings of 100. ing. Therefore, if the jackpots B10, E10, and I10 are won in the normal state or in the latent state without reaching the probable limit number of times, the jackpots B10, E10, and I10 are more disadvantageous than the jackpots A10 and D10 in the gaming state after the end of the jackpot. In the case of winning in other situations (when winning in the probable change state or the time saving state, or when the probable change limit is reached), the same gaming state as the jackpots A10 and D10 is set.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 227, the jackpot C10 (9 round probability change jackpot) and the jackpot F10 (3 round probability change jackpot), which have been won in the normal state, are defined in association with eight times as the number of time savings. . In the case of winning in the probability change jackpot in the normal state, the number of times of saving is not specified because the number of times of probability change is not reached. No need). Regarding the jackpots C10 and F10 which have been won in the latent state, even if the hit is before reaching the probability change limit or the number of times of the probability change has been reached, 0 times are defined as the number of time savings in association with each other. I have. That is, when the jackpots C10 and F10 are won in the latent state, the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol is not given even once, which is extremely disadvantageous for the player. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 227, the jackpot C10 (9 rounds with a large change) and the jackpot F10 (3 rounds with a large change) which are won in a game state (a time saving state, a probability change state) in which a time reduction state of a normal symbol is set. In this case, the same number of time savings as the jackpots A10, B10, D10, E10, and I10 are associated. In other words, the hit before the arrival of the probability change limit is defined in association with the number of time savings to be continued until the next big hit, and the hit after the arrival of the probability change limit is defined in association with the number of time savings of 100. ing.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 227, the jackpot G10 (9 round ordinary jackpot), the jackpot H10 (3 round ordinary jackpot), and the jackpot won in the gaming state (normal state, latent state) in which the normal state of the ordinary symbol is set. For K10 (9 rounds normal jackpot) and jackpot L10 (3 rounds normal jackpot), eight times are defined as the number of times saved. It should be noted that, when a jackpot is won, it is not possible to reach the probability-change limit number, and therefore the number of time savings granted when the probability-change limit number is reached is not specified (it is not necessary to specify). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 227, for the jackpots G10, H10, K10, and L10 that have been won in the gaming state (hour saving state, probability change state) in which the ordinary symbol time saving state is set, 100 times are provided as the number of time savings. Are associated. In other words, when the big hits G10, H10, K10, and L10 are won, it is disadvantageous compared to the big hits A10 to F10 and H10 to J10 because the number of time savings to be continued until the next big hit cannot be set.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 227, in the gaming state in which the normal state of the ordinary symbol is set (normal state, latent state), the jackpot J10 (three round probability variation jackpot) won in the gaming state has reached the probability limit number of times. Regardless of whether or not the number of times, the number of times saved is set to 0 in association with it. Therefore, the jackpot J10 has a small number of rounds and is not provided with a time saving state, so that when the player is won in the normal state or the latent state, the jackpot J10 is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 227, for the jackpot J10 which is won in the game state (time saving state, probability change state) in which the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol is set, if the probability change jackpot is a hit before reaching the probability change limit. While the time saving state that continues until the next big hit is given, if the probability change limit number is reached due to the big hit, 100 time saving times are set.

  As described above, in the tenth embodiment, according to the jackpot type, the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, and whether or not the number of times of the probability change has been reached, the number of time savings given after the end of the jackpot is made different. are doing. Thereby, the game state after the end of the big hit can be diversified, so that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  Next, the variation pattern scenario table 202ga will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The variation pattern scenario table 202ga is a data table that is referred to in order to select the correspondence (variation pattern scenario) between the number of special symbol lotteries after the end of the big hit and the type of the variation pattern table to be referred to. As shown in FIG. 228, the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ga according to the tenth embodiment stores the fluctuation pattern scenario set after the end of the jackpot, in association with the jackpot type, the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning, and the presence or absence of the limit. Is stipulated. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 228, in a situation where the jackpot types are the jackpots A10 and D10 and the probability variation limit number has not been reached, the time saving table 202dg2 is referred to regardless of the number of special symbol lotteries. A variation pattern scenario is defined in association with the scenario. Therefore, after the big hits A10 and D10 are completed, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined by referring to the time reduction table 202dg2 every time the special symbol lottery is executed until the next big hit. This is because when one of the jackpots A10 and D10 is won, a probable change state that is continued until the next jackpot is set is set.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 228, in the normal state or the latent state, when the jackpots B10, E10, and I10 are won before reaching the probability change limit number, eight lotteries are executed after the end of the jackpot. During this period, the time-saving table 202dg2 is referred to, and in the 9th and subsequent lotteries, a fluctuation pattern scenario in which the normal-use table 202dg1 is referred to is set. This is because, in the state in which the normal state of the ordinary symbol is set, if any of the jackpots B10, E10, and I10 is won within the probability change count, a probability change state in which the number of time savings is eight is set. . On the other hand, if the jackpots B10, E10, and I10 are won before reaching the probability change limit number in the time reduction state or the probability change state, the fluctuation pattern is referred to the time reduction table 202gd2 regardless of the number of lotteries after the end of the jackpot. Is set. This is because if one of the jackpots B10, E10, and I10 is won in the state where the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is set, a probable change state that is continued until the next jackpot is set.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 228, in the normal state, if any of the jackpots C10, F10, and J10 is won before the number of times of the probability change is reached, the time from the end of the jackpot until eight lotteries are executed. The time / hour reduction table 202dg2 is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern scenario in which the normal time table 202dg1 is referred to is set in the lottery after nine. This is because, in the normal state, when any of the jackpots C10, F10, and J10 is won within the probability change limit number, the probability change state in which the number of time savings is eight is set. Also, in the latent state, if any one of the jackpots C10, F10, and J10 is won before the probability change limit number is reached, the normal table 202dg1 is referred to regardless of the number of lotteries after the end of the jackpot. Is set. This is because in the latent state, if any of the jackpots C10, F10, and J10 is won within the number of times of the probability change limit, the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the latent state. On the other hand, if any of the jackpots C10, F10, and J10 is won before reaching the probability change limit number in the time saving state or the probability change state, the time saving table 202gd2 is referred to regardless of the number of lotteries after the jackpot. Thus, a fluctuation pattern scenario in which the fluctuation pattern is determined is set. This is because if one of the jackpots C10, F10, and J10 is won in the state where the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is set, a probable change state that continues until the next big jackpot is set.

  As shown in FIG. 228, in the normal state or the latent state, when one of the jackpots G10, H10, K10, and L10 is won, after the jackpot is completed, the time is reduced until eight lotteries are executed. The fluctuation pattern scenario in which the normal table 202dg1 is referred to is set by referring to the normal table 202dg2 and in the lottery after nine times. This is because, if one of the jackpots G10, H10, K10, and L10 is won while the normal state of the ordinary symbol is set, the time saving number of eight times is set. On the other hand, in the time saving state or the probable change state, when the jackpot G10, H10, K10, L10 is won before the probable change limit number is reached, the period from the end of the jackpot until the 100 special symbol lottery is executed. The time saving table 202dg2 is referred to, and in the 101st and subsequent lotteries, a fluctuation pattern scenario in which the normal table 202dg1 is referred to is set. This is because, when one of the jackpots G10, H10, K10, and L10 is won in a state where the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol is set, the time reduction state of 100 times is set.

  On the other hand, when the player wins one of the big hits C10, F10, and J10 in the latent state and reaches the certain number of times of the probability change in the big hit, the normal table 202dg1 is referred to regardless of the number of lotteries after the end of the big hit. A fluctuation pattern scenario is set. This is because, if any of the jackpots C10, F10 and J10 is won while the latent state is set, the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the normal state. In the case of winning one of the jackpots C10, F10, and J10 in the probability change state and reaching the limit number of times of the probability change in the jackpot, when the limit is reached until the lottery is executed 100 times after the end of the jackpot. The fluctuation pattern scenario in which the normal table 202dg1 is referred to is set in the lottery 101 and subsequent times by referring to the normal table 202dg3. This is because if one of the jackpots C10, F10, and J10 is won while the probable change state is set, the time saving state in which the number of time savings is 100 is set.

  On the other hand, in the latent state, if the winning jackpot other than the jackpots C10, F10, and J10 is won and the jackpot reaches the limit number of the jackpot, the time until the jackpot is completed and eight lotteries are executed. The time saving table 202dg2 is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern scenario in which the normal time table 202dg1 is referred to is set in the nine or more lotteries. This is because, if a probability change jackpot other than the big hits C10, F10, and J10 is won while the latent probability state is set, a time saving state in which the number of time savings is eight is set. In addition, in the probability change state, if a probability change jackpot other than the jackpots C10, F10, and J10 is won and the number of times of the probability change reaches the limit number of the jackpot, the limit is reached from the end of the jackpot until 100 lotteries are executed. The time table 202dg3 is referred to, and a fluctuation pattern scenario in which the normal table 202dg1 is referred to is set in the 101st and subsequent lotteries. This is because if a probability change jackpot other than the jackpots C10, F10, and J10 is won while the probability change state is being set, a time saving state of 100 times is set.

  As described above, in the tenth embodiment, in the probability variation state, when the probability variation jackpot is won and the probability variation limit number of times is reached in the probability variation, the limit reaching time table 202dg3 is set in the time-saving state set after the jackpot end. To determine the variation pattern. In other words, the configuration is such that a table that is more likely to be executed by being overweighted in the lottery of the first special symbol when a right-handed hit is performed is referred to. In other words, when the jackpot is won within the number of working hours, the rate of winning the advantageous jackpot type (jackpot with a large number of rounds) is increased. With such a configuration, a disadvantageous (lower advantage) time-saving state is set as compared with the probability change state even though the probability variation limit number of times has been reached and the probability variation jackpot has been won. Even so, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged, and to strongly expect that the player will win the jackpot within the number of times saved. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  Next, a state transition method according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, in the tenth embodiment, as described above, there are provided four game states: a normal state and a latent state that are disadvantageous to the advantage, a time saving state and a probability change state that are advantageous to the player. Further, in the tenth embodiment, there are provided two types of probable change states: a probable change state in which the number of time savings is eight and a probable change state that continues until the next jackpot win. In addition, there are provided two types of time reduction states, a time reduction state in which the number of time reductions is eight, and a time reduction state in which the number of time reductions is 100. In the following description, for the sake of simplicity, the normal state and the latent state that are disadvantageous to the player are referred to as a normal mode A and a normal mode B, respectively. Are referred to as chance mode A and chance mode B, respectively, and the time saving state in which the number of time savings is large (100 times) is referred to as a pullback mode, and a probable change state (a state in which the extended holiday is substantially determined until the next jackpot is reached) ) Is referred to as the extended-villa mode. First, a mode transition method in the normal mode A will be described with reference to the upper left side of FIG.

  As shown in the upper left part of FIG. 229, in the normal mode A, there is a possibility that the mode is shifted to another mode only when the jackpot is won. In other words, when one of the jackpots A10 and D10 determined at a rate of 7% is won when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the mode after the jackpot is advantageous to the player in the extended game mode. Is set to In addition, when one of the jackpots B10, C10, E10, and F10 determined at a rate of 83% when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the mode after the jackpot is changed to the chance mode B. Is set. Furthermore, when a jackpot G10 or H10 determined at a rate of 10% is won when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the mode after the end of the jackpot is set to the chance mode A. As described above, when the jackpot is won in the normal mode A, the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol is always given at least eight times. Can be expected. In addition, when the jackpot is won in the normal mode A, the player wins one of the jackpots B10, C10, E10, and F10 (at a high rate of 83%), and shifts to the chance mode B. That is, in most cases, it is possible to receive eight lotteries in the special symbol high probability state, so that it is possible to more strongly expect the shift to the extended play mode.

  Next, a mode transition method in the normal mode B will be described with reference to the upper right side of FIG. As shown on the upper right side of FIG. 229, in the normal mode, there is a possibility that the mode will shift to another mode only when a jackpot is won. Specifically, in the case where a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, if one of the jackpots A10 and D10 determined at a rate of 7% is won, the mode after the end of the jackpot is advantageous to the player. It is set to the extended mode. In addition, when the number of times of the probability change is reached by the jackpot, the mode after the end of the jackpot is set to the chance mode A. In addition, in the case where a jackpot has been won in the lottery of the first special symbol and one of the jackpots B10 and E10 determined at a rate of 43% has been won, the mode after the end of the jackpot is set to the chance mode B. In addition, when the number of times of the probability change is reached by the jackpot, the mode after the end of the jackpot is set to the chance mode A. Furthermore, when a jackpot G10 or H10 determined at a rate of 10% is won when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the mode after the end of the jackpot is set to the chance mode A. On the other hand, when a jackpot is won in either of the jackpots C10 or F10 determined at a rate of 40% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the mode after the jackpot is changed to the normal mode B again. Is set. That is, a disadvantageous state in which the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is not given is set. In addition, when the number of times of the probability change has reached the jackpot due to the jackpot, the mode after the end of the jackpot is set to the normal mode A. That is, regardless of whether the number of times of reaching the probability change limit has been reached or not, the time saving state is not provided. As described above, when the big hit is won in the normal mode B, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given only at a rate of 60%. Therefore, in the game state after the end of the big hit, the normal mode B is more than the normal mode A. Is disadvantageous. However, in the normal mode B, the jackpot probability is increased three times or more, so that the normal mode B is more advantageous in terms of the jackpot probability.

  Next, a mode transition method in the chance mode A will be described with reference to the center left side of FIG. As shown on the left side of the center in FIG. 229, in the chance mode A, there is a possibility that the state may shift to another state when the number of time savings ends, as well as when the jackpot is won. Specifically, as shown on the left side of the center of FIG. 229, when a special symbol lottery wins a jackpot, the winning is determined at a probability of 90% when the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot (jackpots A10 to F10, I10, J10). The mode after the end of the jackpot is set to the extended play mode most advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when a special symbol lottery wins a normal jackpot (big jackpot G10, H10, K10, L10) determined at a rate of 10%, the mode after the jackpot is set to the pullback mode. On the other hand, when the number of times saved in the chance mode A has elapsed (the lottery of the special symbol is lost eight times in a row), the mode shifts to the normal mode A which is disadvantageous to the player. For this reason, in the chance mode A, it is possible to play the game with a strong expectation that the jackpot will be won during the eight time savings.

  Next, a mode transition method in the chance mode B will be described with reference to the center right side of FIG. As shown on the left side of the center in FIG. 229, in the chance mode B, similarly to the chance mode A, there is a possibility that the state may shift to another state when the jackpot is won and when the number of times of saving time ends. Specifically, as shown on the right side of the center of FIG. 229, when a special symbol lottery wins a jackpot, the winning rate is determined by a probability of 90% when the jackpot is determined at a rate of 90% (jackpots A10 to F10, I10, J10). The mode after the end of the big hit is set to the extended play mode most advantageous to the player. In addition, when the number of times of the probability change reaches the jackpot, the mode after the end of the jackpot is set to the pull-back mode. On the other hand, when a special symbol lottery wins a normal jackpot (big jackpot G10, H10, K10, L10) determined at a rate of 10%, the mode after the jackpot is set to the pullback mode. On the other hand, when the number of times saved in the chance mode B has elapsed (the lottery of the special symbol is lost eight times in a row), the mode shifts to the normal mode B which is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, in the chance mode B, similarly to the chance mode A, it is possible to play a game with a strong expectation that a jackpot will be won during the eight times of saving time.

  Next, a mode transition method in the retraction mode will be described with reference to the lower left side of FIG. As shown in the lower left part of FIG. 229, in the pullback mode, as in the chance modes A and B, there is a possibility that the state will shift to another state when a jackpot is won and when the number of time savings is completed. Specifically, as shown in the lower left part of FIG. 229, when a special symbol lottery wins a jackpot, the winning rate is determined by a probability of 90% when the jackpot is determined as a jackpot (a jackpot A10 to F10, I10, J10). The mode after the end of the jackpot is set to the extended play mode most advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the number of time savings elapses in the pullback mode (the lottery of the special symbol is lost 100 times in a row), the mode shifts to the normal mode A which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, if a special jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery and a normal jackpot (jackpot G10, H10, K10, L10) is determined at a rate of 10%, the mode after the jackpot is changed to the pullback mode again. Set (loop through pullback mode).

  Next, with reference to the lower right side of FIG. As shown on the lower right side of FIG. 229, in the extended-villa mode, there is a possibility that the state will shift to another state only when a jackpot is won. Specifically, as shown in the lower right part of FIG. 229, when a special symbol lottery wins a regular jackpot (big hit G10, H10, K10, L10) determined at a rate of 10%, The mode after the end of the jackpot is set to the retraction mode. On the other hand, if a special design lottery wins a jackpot, and a winning is determined at a probability of being changed at a rate of 90% (jackpots A10 to F10, I10, J10), the mode after the jackpot ends is again set by the player. Is set to the most advantageous mode (the mode is looped). In addition, if the winning has been achieved in the probability change jackpot and the number of times of the probability change has been reached, the pullback mode is set after the end of the jackpot.

  As described above, in the tenth embodiment, in order to shift to the extended play mode which is advantageous for the player, basically, the mode is shifted to the chance modes A and B in which eight times are set. Therefore, it is necessary to win a jackpot within a relatively small number of time savings of eight times. However, once the mode is switched to the extended mode, a very advantageous state in which the extended mode and the jackpot are repeated at a high rate of 90% is formed. Therefore, when the mode is switched to the extended mode, the player is switched to the extended mode. You can have a great sense of satisfaction.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 222B is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 203 according to the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 222 (b), the RAM 222 in the tenth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 183 (b)) in that the probability change flag 203ga, limit counter 203gb, fluctuation pattern scenario A storage area 203gc, a special figure 1 big hit flag 203gd, a special figure 2 big hit flag 203ge, a special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203gf, a special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203gg, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203gh, and a limit reaching flag 203gi are added. Is different. In the tenth embodiment, since the small hit is not mounted, the small hit type storage area 203e, the small hit start flag 203f, the small hit middle flag 203g, the V passing big hit type storage area 203h, the V flag 203i, The difference is that the V passage flag 203j is deleted.

  The probability change flag 203ga is a flag indicating whether or not the special symbol high probability state is set. When the probability change flag 203ga is on, it indicates that the special symbol is set to the high probability state, and when it is off, it indicates that the special symbol is set to the low probability state. That is, when the probability change flag 203ga is set to ON, the game state is a probability change state (special symbol: high probability state, ordinary symbol: high probability state) or a latent probability state (special symbol: high probability state, Normal pattern: low probability state) is set. The probability change flag 203ga is set to OFF when the initial state is set to OFF, and is set to OFF when the special symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped (see S1877 in FIG. 239 and S1977 in FIG. 244). On the other hand, the probability change flag 203ga is set to ON at the end of the probability change jackpot when the probability change jackpot is won and the number of times of the probability change hit has not been reached (see S1676 in FIG. 246). Then, when the symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit is stopped and displayed, the symbol is turned off (see S806 in FIG. 38). In other words, in the tenth embodiment, once the probability change flag 203ga is set to ON, the probability change flag 203ga is not set to OFF until the next time a big hit is won. In the case, the high probability state of the special symbol set after the end of the jackpot is sure to win the next jackpot unless the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is initialized (unless the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch 122 turned on). It is configured to continue until it does.

  In the present embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol is configured to be continued until the next jackpot is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a special symbol high-accuracy termination condition for ending the special symbol high-probability state, the special symbol change count (special-figure change count) since the special symbol high-probability state (special figure high-accuracy state) is set. May be configured to end the special symbol high-probability state when the number reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). In this case, instead of the probability change flag 203ga, a probability change counter for counting the number of remaining lottery times from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol may be provided.

  Further, a plurality of special figure high-accuracy termination conditions are prepared, for example, a special figure 1 high-accuracy termination condition that can be established based only on the number of times of the first special symbol change in the special figure high-accuracy state, and a variation of the second special symbol. Various conditions such as a special figure 2 high-accuracy termination condition that can be satisfied only based on the number of times and a lottery termination condition that can be satisfied when the special symbol lottery result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a lottery result that wins a small hit) The special figure high-accuracy end condition may be facilitated, and the special symbol high-probability state may be ended when any of the special figure high-accuracy end conditions is satisfied.

  The limit counter 203gb is a counter for counting the number of times of the probability change limit. If the value of the limit counter 203gb is less than 11 at the end of the jackpot, the state after the jackpot is set to the special symbol high probability state to indicate that the number of times of the jackpot has not been reached. On the other hand, if the value of the limit counter 203gb is 11 at the end of the jackpot, the state after the jackpot is set to the low probability state of the special symbol to indicate that the number of times of the jackpot has been reached. The initial value of the limit counter 203gb is set to 0, and every time a winning in a jackpot is completed, the value is incremented by one at the end of the jackpot and updated (see S1674 in FIG. 246). The limit counter 203gb resets the value to 0 when it is determined that the probability change limit has been reached (the counter value has been updated to 11) at the end of the probability change jackpot and at the end of the normal jackpot (FIG. 246). S1672).

  The fluctuation pattern scenario storage area 203gc is a storage area for storing data indicating the fluctuation pattern scenario. At the start of the change of the special symbol, the change for determining the change pattern (change time) according to the change pattern scenario indicated by the data stored in the change pattern scenario storage area 203gc and the number of changes after the end of the jackpot. The pattern table is read. In the fluctuation pattern scenario storage area 203gc, data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern scenario determined with reference to the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ga at the end of the big hit is stored (see S1683 in FIG. 246).

  The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203gd is set to ON when a jackpot is won in a lottery of the first special symbol (a lottery based on a winning start to the first entrance 64 or the right first entrance 64r). This is a flag (see S1816 in FIG. 235). This special figure 1 big hit flag 203gd is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit (S1877 in FIG. 239). If the special display 1 big hit flag 203h is on and the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, when the variable time of the variable display of the first special symbol ends, the second special symbol is released and the symbol is removed. Processing for forcibly stopping is executed (see S1875 of FIG. 239). Thereby, when a lottery is won in both the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol, it is possible to prevent a problem that the big hit is started repeatedly.

  The special figure 2 big hit flag 203ge is a flag indicating that the big hit of the second special symbol is changing. The special figure 2 big hit flag 203ge is set to ON when a big hit is achieved in a lottery of the second special symbol (a lottery based on a start winning at the second entrance 6450) (see S1926 in FIG. 241). This special figure 2 big hit flag 203ge is turned off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit (see S1977 of FIG. 244). When the special figure 2 big hit flag 203ge is on and the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, when the variable time of the variable display of the second special symbol ends, the first special symbol is disengaged. The processing for forcibly stopping is executed (see S1974 in FIG. 244). Thereby, when a lottery is won in both the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol, it is possible to prevent a problem that the big hit is started repeatedly.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203gf and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203gg are counters for measuring the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol When a symbol variation pattern is selected, a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set. According to the counter values of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203gf and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203gg, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of each special symbol has ended.

  The special figure 2 change stop flag 203gh is a flag indicating a period from the time when the change of the first special symbol is stopped (fixed display) with the stop pattern of the big hit to the time when the big hit is started. While the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203gh is set to ON, the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided (see S1902: Yes in FIG. 240). This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203gh is set to ON when the second special symbol is deviated and forcedly stopped at the symbol (see S1873 in FIG. 239), and the processing for executing the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided. In this case, it is set to off (see S1902 in FIG. 240).

  The limit reaching flag 203gi is a flag indicating whether or not the number of times of the probable change limit has been reached. If the limit reaching flag 203gi is on, it means that the number of times of probability change has been reached (election has been won 11 times in a row). If it is off, it means that the number of times of probability change has not been reached. . This limit reaching flag 203gi is set to OFF in the initial state, and is set to ON based on the fact that the counter value of the limit counter 203gb has been updated to 11, which is the number of times of the probability change limit, at the end of the big hit (see FIG. 246). S1677). The limit reaching flag 203gi is set to off at the start of the big hit (when setting the stop display of the first symbol indicating the big hit) (see S1877 in FIG. 239 and S1977 in FIG. 244).

  Next, the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 230A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the ROM 222 according to the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 230A, the ROM 222 in the tenth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) in the final state display selection (see FIG. 26A). The difference is that the table 222c is deleted and the back mode lottery table 222ga is added. The back mode lottery table 222ga is data in which data for lottery in the back mode (effect mode) indicating the degree of expectation in which the probable change state (separate mode) is set in the extended mode and the retraction mode are defined. It is a table. The details of the back mode lottery table 222ga will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 231 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the back mode lottery table 222ga. As shown in FIG. 231, in the back mode lottery table 222ga, the value of the effect lottery counter determined to change the back mode is a combination of the current gaming state and the currently set back mode type. It is specified for each. Specifically, when the gaming state is the probability change state and the currently set rear mode is the wilderness area (the rear mode in which the degree of expectation of the probability change state is low), the effect counter 223e is set to “0 to 9”. A forest mode is defined in association with the range. Therefore, in the case of a probable change state and a wilderness area being set, each time a special symbol lottery is executed, a transition is made to a forest area having a high probability of probable change with a probability of 1/10 (10/100). Is determined. Since the value of the effect counter 223e is not associated with the back mode of the sky area, there is no possibility that the sky area will jump to the sky area from the wilderness area.

  Further, when the gaming state is the probable change state and the currently set back mode is the forest area (the back mode in which the degree of expectation of the probable change state is relatively high), the effect counter 223e is in the range of “0 to 2”. , A wilderness mode is defined in association with “5”, and a sky mode is defined in association with “5”. Therefore, in the probable change state and when the forest area is set, each time a special symbol lottery is executed, it is determined that the probability is shifted to a wilderness area with a low probability of probable change with a probability of 3/100. It is determined to shift to the sky area where the probability change state is determined with a probability of / 100. Further, as shown in FIG. 231, in the state where the sky area is set in the probable change state, the lottery for shifting to another back mode is not performed. Therefore, the sky area, which is the most pleasing back mode, can be continued for a longer time, so that the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, when the probable change state or the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot, the first back mode is always set to the wilderness area. In other words, in order to shift the rear mode to the sky area, first, after moving through the lottery to the forest area with a probability of 1/10 in the wilderness area, before falling into the wilderness area in the forest area, It is necessary to break through the lottery transfer to the sky area with a probability of 1/100. That is, it is relatively difficult to make a transition to the sky area even in the probable change state, so that the player can have a greater sense of satisfaction when making a transition to the sky area.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 231, in a time-saving state set based on the fact that a normal jackpot has been won, when a wilderness area (a back mode having a low degree of expectation of a probable change state) is set as a back mode, If the value of the effect counter 223e is in the range of “0 to 4”, the process is shifted to the forest area. In other words, the forest area is shifted to a forest area having a high probability of probability of change with a probability of 1/20 (5/100). On the other hand, when the forest area is set, if the value of the effect counter 223e is in the range of “0 to 14”, the state shifts (falls) to the wilderness area. In other words, the probability of transition from the wilderness area to the forest area is lower and the probability of transition (fall) from the forest area to the wilderness area is higher than when the probability change state is set. Have been. That is, the configuration is such that the ratio (staying ratio) in which the wilderness area is set is high, so that it is possible to realize the gaming ability of estimating the current gaming state from the back mode.

  As shown in FIG. 231, when the wilderness area is set as the back mode (the back mode in which the degree of expectation of the certain change state is low) in the time saving state set based on the fact that the number of times of the certain change has been reached, If the value of the effect counter 223e is in the range of “0 to 19”, the process is shifted to the forest area. That is, it is shifted to a forest area having a high probability of probability of change with a probability of 1/5 (20/100). On the other hand, when the forest area is set, if the value of the effect counter 223e is in the range of “0”, the state shifts (falls) to the wilderness area. That is, in the time saving state set after reaching the probability change limit number, it is configured that the possibility of being set in the forest area is the highest. Therefore, it is possible to make the player guess that the chance is shorter than the time saving state based on the normal jackpot.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the audio ramp control device 113 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 230B is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 223 according to the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 230 (b), the configuration of the RAM 223 in the tenth embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. The difference is that the determination flag 223h, the provisional time reduction information update area 223i, the time reduction lower limit flag 223j, the forward end condition flag 223k, the before-time reduction end change flag 223m, and the state effect counter 223n are deleted.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Control Device in Tenth Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 232 to 246. First, the timer interrupt processing 10 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The timer interrupt process 10 is a process executed in place of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is executed in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment). Is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds as in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

  In the timer interrupt processing 10 of the tenth embodiment, in each of the processing of S101, S102, S105 to S107, S110 and S111, the timer interrupt processing of the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) is performed (FIG. 37). The same processes as those of S101, S102, S105 to S107, S110, and S111 of FIG.

  In the timer interrupt process 10 (see FIG. 232) in the tenth embodiment, after executing the process of S102, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second type The random number counter C4 is updated (S141), and then a special symbol variation process 10 is executed instead of the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 188) in the seventh embodiment (S142), and S105 to S107, S110 and After performing the process of S111, the present process ends.

  Next, the details of the special symbol variation process 10 (S142) in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The special symbol variation process 10 (S142) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 188) in the seventh embodiment, and is a process for performing various settings relating to the variation display of the special symbol. is there. FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol change process 10 (S142). When the special symbol variation process 10 (S142) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the present is a big hit (S281). Since there is no possibility of performing this process, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S281 that the present is not a big hit (S281: No), then, the value of the special figure 1 change time counter 203gf is larger than 0 (that is, the special figure 1 is changing). Is determined (S282), and when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203gf is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S282: No), the first special symbol variation start process ( S283) is executed, and thereafter, the process shifts to the process of S287 in which the fluctuation process for the special figure 2 is executed. Details of the first special symbol change start process (S283) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S282 that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203gf is larger than 0 (the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is being performed) (S282: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation execution is performed. The middle process (S284) is executed. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 238, the first special symbol variation executing process (S284) is a process of executing the special figure 1 varying. When the first special symbol variation execution process (S284) ends, it is next determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variation time (whether the special figure 1 variation time counter 203gf is 0) (S285). When it is determined that it is the end timing (S285: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process (S286) is executed, and then the process proceeds to S287. Details of the first special symbol change stop processing (S286) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S285 that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation time (S285: No), the processing of S286 is skipped and the processing shifts to the processing of S287.

  In each process of S287 to S291, the same process as each process of S282 to S286 executed for Toku-zu 1 is executed. When the process of S287 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203gg is greater than 0 (ie, whether the special figure 2 is changing) (S287), and the special figure 2 fluctuation is determined. When it is determined that the value of the time counter 203gg is not larger than 0 (it is 0) (S287: No), the second special symbol change start process (S288) is executed, and then this process is ended. Details of the second special symbol change start process (S288) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S287 that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203gg is larger than 0 (S287: Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation execution processing (S289) is executed. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 243, the second special symbol variation executing process (S289) is a process of executing the special figure 2 varying.

  After the end of the second special symbol change execution process (S289), it is next determined whether or not it is the end timing of the change time (whether the special figure 2 change time counter 203gg is 0) (S290). If it is determined that it is the end timing (S290: Yes), the second special symbol change stop processing (S291) is executed, and this processing ends. Details of the second special symbol change stop processing (S291) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S292 that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation time (S290: No), the processing of S291 is skipped and the present processing ends.

  Next, a first special symbol change start process (S283), which is one of the special symbol change processes (S142 in FIG. 233), executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start process (S283).

  In the first special symbol change start process (S283), first, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is acquired (S1801), and the acquired value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is set. It is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (S1802). In the processing of S1802, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is greater than 0 (S1802: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is decremented by 1. Then, a reserved ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b after the subtraction is set (S1804).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S1501) of the main processing (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201 in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store. As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the number counter 203b.

  When the processing in S1804 is completed, the data in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is shifted to the immediately preceding data (S1805). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of the reserved area 1 → the execution area, the reserved area 2 → the reserved area 1, the reserved area 3 → the reserved area 2, the reserved area 4 → the reserved area 3.

  When the processing of S1805 ends, next, the first special symbol big hit determination processing is executed (S1806). The first special symbol big hit determination process (S1806) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 235. This is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not a jackpot is based on the set gaming state.

  When the process of S1806 ends, next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (see FIG. 236). Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 236, this first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S1807) stores the first special symbol hit / fail judgment result and the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of the variation type counter CS1.

  When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1807) ends, a game state update process is executed (S1808). The game state update processing (S1808) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 237. This is a process for updating the state of the device 10. When the processing in S1808 ends, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1802, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is 0 (S1802: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 235, a first special symbol jackpot determination process (S1806) which is a process of the first special symbol change start process (S283 in FIG. 234) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. explain. FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S1806).

  In the first special symbol big hit determination process (S1806), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is acquired (S1811). Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203ga is set to ON (S1812). That is, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the high probability state (probable state, latent state). When it is determined that the probable change flag 203ga is on (that is, the probable change state of the special symbol) (S1812: Yes), the first per-random number table 202a for the high probability state is displayed (see FIG. 223 (a)). It is determined whether or not the specified random number value of the jackpot matches the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained from the counter buffer, and the result of the determination (lottery result) is obtained (S1813). On the other hand, in the processing of S1812, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203ga is off (that is, the special symbol is in the low probability state) (S1812: No), the first random number table 202a for low probability is used. It is determined whether or not the random number value of the jackpot defined in FIG. 223 (a) matches the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained from the counter buffer, and the lottery result is obtained ( S1814).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the lottery result obtained in S1813 or S1814 is a big hit (S1815). If the lottery result is a big hit (S1815: Yes), the special figure 1 big hit flag 203gd is set to ON (S1816), The lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a jackpot (S1817). Then, based on the acquired value of the hit type counter, the big hit symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1818), and the data according to the current gaming state is stored in the winning state storage area. 203 ec (S1819), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1815, when it is determined that the lottery result is out of order (S1815: No), the out-of-spec symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1820), and thereafter Then, the present process ends.

  Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1807), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S283 in FIG. 234), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 236 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1807).

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1807 in FIG. 236), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S1806 in FIG. 235), it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit, It is determined whether or not one special symbol jackpot has been set (S1821). Here, whether or not a big hit is determined is determined by whether or not the special figure 1 big hit flag 203gd is turned on. The special figure 1 big hit flag 203gd is set to ON in the processing of S1816 in the first special symbol big hit determination processing (see FIG. 235).

  In the process of S1821, if it is determined that the first special symbol big hit is set (the special figure 1 big hit flag 203gd is set to ON) (S1821: Yes), the first special symbol big hit described above is performed. The big hit type is determined from the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 224 (a)) based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S1811 in the determination process (see FIG. 235) (S1822). , To S1823.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1821 that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of place (that is, the special figure 1 big hit flag 203gd is off) (S1821: No), the process of S1822 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S1823.

  In the processing of S1823, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is obtained from the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a (S1823). Next, a fluctuation pattern scenario (see FIG. 228) corresponding to the data stored in the fluctuation pattern scenario storage area 203203gc is specified, and is associated with the current number of fluctuations (lottery times) in the specified fluctuation pattern scenario. The fluctuation pattern table is read (S1824). When the process of S1824 is completed, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern table (S1825), and a special figure 1 variation pattern command is generated based on the selected variation pattern. It is set (S1826).

  When the processing in S1826 is completed, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S1827), and then the first symbol display device 37 is set to start changing the first special symbol (S1828), and the processing in S1825 is performed. The value indicating the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in is set in the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203gf (S1829), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 237, a description will be given of a game state update process (S1808), which is one process of the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 234) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing the gaming state update processing (S1808). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the state of the probable change flag 203ga, which is a condition for setting the gaming state, and the value of the counter 203k during the time saving, only the value of the counter 203k during the time saving is updated at the start of the change of the special symbol. In order to do so, in the game state update process (see FIG. 237), which is one process of the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 234), a process for updating the value of the counter 203k during the time reduction is executed. I have.

  Then, although the details will be described later, the probability change flag 203ga which is set to ON is set to OFF when the jackpot fluctuation is completed and the special symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed (when the jackpot game is executed). It is configured as follows.

  That is, of the two condition elements (the state of the probability change flag 203ga and the value of the counter 203k during time saving) referred to when setting the game state, one condition element is updated at the start of the change of the special symbol, and the other condition elements are updated. By enabling the elements to be updated when the special symbol stops changing, it is possible to easily diversify the gaming state set by combining the two condition elements.

  When the game state update process (see FIG. 237) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 203k during time saving is greater than 0 (S1831). When it is determined that the value of the counter 203k during time saving is 0 (S1831: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1831: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203k is decremented by 1 (S1832), and the number of remaining reductions indicating the value of the time reduction counter 203k. The command is set (S1833). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203k after the subtraction has become 0 (S1834). If it is determined that the value has become 0 (S1834: Yes), the probability change flag 203ga is set to ON. Is determined (S1835). Here, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203ga is set to ON (S1835: No), it indicates a probability variation state in which the time-saving game is not provided (that is, a latent probability state), and thus indicates a latent probability state. The status command is set (S1836), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S1835, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203ga is not set to ON (S1835: No), a state command indicating the normal state is set (S1837) because the normal state is set. To end. On the other hand, in the processing of S1834, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203k is not 0 (S1834: No), the processing is terminated as it is.

  In the present embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be continuously set until the next special symbol jackpot is won (until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the jackpot). In addition to this, for example, a probable change counter is provided in place of the probable change flag 203ga, and the value of the probable change counter is decremented every time a special symbol is changed, and the value of the probable change counter becomes 0. In such a case, the high probability state of the special symbol may be shifted to the low probability state.

  When such a configuration is used, the game state update processing (S1808) shown with reference to FIG. 237 is set as the special figure fluctuation start game state update processing, and separately from this, at the timing when the special symbol fluctuation display ends. By providing the special state fluctuation stop game state update processing for updating the value of the probability change counter, processing for determining whether or not to end the high probability state of the special symbol, and whether or not to end the high probability state of the ordinary symbol It is possible to execute the process of determining whether or not it is different timing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 238, the contents of the first special symbol change executing process (S284) executed in the special symbol change process (see S142 in FIG. 233) executed by MPU 201 in main control device 110 Give an explanation. FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol change execution process (S284). When the first special symbol change execution process (S284) is executed, first, the special figure 1 change time counter 203gf is decremented by 1 and updated (S1851), and then the display of the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. After updating (S1852), this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 239, the first special symbol change stop process (S286), which is one of the special symbol change processes (S142 in FIG. 233), will be described. FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change stop process (S286).

  In the first special symbol change stop processing (S286), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit flag 203gd is set to ON (that is, it is the timing to stop the first special symbol with the big hit symbol) (S1871). . If it is determined in the process of S1871 that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203gd is set to ON (S1871: Yes), then, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203gg is 1 or more ( That is, it is determined that the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed (S1872). In the process of S1872, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203gg is equal to or greater than 1 (the second special symbol is being displayed for fluctuation) (S1872: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop is performed. The flag 203gh is set to ON (S1873), and a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating stoppage of the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203gh is set (S1874). Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with a deviated symbol (S1875).

  When the processing of S1875 is completed, the start of the jackpot corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S1876), and the data in the winning state storage area 203ec is updated according to the current gaming state (S1878). Next, the special figure 1 big hit flag 203gd, the special figure 2 big hit flag 203ge, the probability change flag 203ga, the time reduction counter 203k, and the limit reaching flag 203gi are all reset (S1878), and the big hit flag 203d is turned on (S1879). , To S1880.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1871, the special figure 1 big hit flag 203gd is set to off for the first special symbol (S1871: Yes), and in the processing of S1872, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203gg is When it is determined that the value is 0 (S1872: No), the processing of S1873 to S1879 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1880.

  In the processing of S1880, a special figure 1 determination command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the first special symbol is to be fixed and stopped is set (S1880). After that, a process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol, which is being variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37, is executed (S1881), and this process ends.

  As described above, in the first special symbol change stop process (S288), the process (S1873 to S1879) of stopping the change display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is executed. In addition, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit (S1872: No), a process of forcibly removing the second special symbol during the variable display and stopping at the symbol (S1875) is executed.

  Note that, in the first embodiment, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, the second special symbol during the variable display is forcibly stopped and displayed with the off symbol. It is not limited to. For example, the variable display of the second special symbol may be interrupted (temporarily stopped) at the time when the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, the variable display of the second special symbol may be restarted after the jackpot of the first special symbol ends. This makes it possible to provide a more natural effect as compared to a case where the player is forcedly stopped due to a deviation. In the present embodiment, the start of the big hit is set in the processing of S1876 based on the gaming state stored in the winning state storing area 203ec in the first special symbol big hit determination processing (see FIG. 235). However, based on the gaming state stored in the winning state storage area 203ec in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 235) using the opening period of the jackpot game, for example, the start of the jackpot in the processing of S1876 May be set.

  Next, the contents of the second special symbol change start process (S288) executed in the special symbol change process (FIG. 233) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 240 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol change start process (S288). In the second special symbol change start process (S288), a process for starting the change of the special figure 2 is executed. It should be noted that, with respect to the processing related to the change of the first special symbol described above with reference to FIGS. 234 to 239, the target of the change is only changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. Detailed description of the elements is omitted.

  In the second special symbol change start process (S290), first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 change stop flag 203gh is set to ON (S1901). If it is determined that the special figure 2 change stop flag 203gh is set to ON (S1901: Yes), the special figure 2 change stop flag 203gh is set to OFF (S1902), and the process ends. As described above, the special figure 2 change stop flag 203gh is a flag that, when the big change of the first special symbol ends, causes the second special symbol to be stopped and displayed with the stop symbol corresponding to the departure and set to ON. . That is, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203gh is on, it means that the big hit is started, and the fluctuation start of the second special symbol should not be set. Therefore, when the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203gh is ON in the processing of S1901, this processing is terminated without executing each processing of S1903 to S1910 for setting the fluctuation start.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1901 that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203gh is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S1901: No), the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter The value (N2) of 203b2 is acquired (S1903), and it is determined whether the value (N2) of the acquired special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 is a value larger than 0 (S1904). In the processing of S1904, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 is greater than 0 (S1904: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 is decremented by one. Then, a reserved ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 after the subtraction is set (S1906).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S1501) of the main processing (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201 in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store. As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the number counter 203b2.

  When the processing in S1906 ends, the data in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203a2 is shifted to the immediately preceding data (S1907). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of the reserved area 1 → the execution area, the reserved area 2 → the reserved area 1, the reserved area 3 → the reserved area 2, the reserved area 4 → the reserved area 3.

  When the processing of S1907 ends, next, the second special symbol big hit determination processing is executed (S1908). Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 241, the second special symbol big hit determination process (S1908) is based on the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203a2. This is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not a jackpot is based on the set gaming state.

  When the process of S1908 ends, next, a second special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (see FIG. 242). Although the details will be described later, the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S1909) is a variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reservation sphere storage area 203a2 and the second special symbol determination result. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of.

  When the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1909) ends, the above-described gaming state update process is executed (S1910 (S1808)). When the process of S1910 ends, the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1904, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 is 0 (S1904: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  Next, referring to FIG. 241, a second special symbol jackpot determination process (S1908), which is a process of the second special symbol change start process (S290 in FIG. 240) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. explain. FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S1908).

  In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S1908), the same process as the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 235) is executed. 235) will be described.

  When the second special symbol big hit determination process (S1908) is executed, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area is acquired (S1921). Then, based on each of the acquired counter values and the state of the probability change flag 203ga, the process of S1922 to S1924 for acquiring the lottery result of the jackpot is performed. In each of these processes, the only difference is that the counter value used for the lottery (judgment) is obtained from the second special symbol execution area, and the other controls are the same as those in the first special symbol big hit determination process (see FIG. 235). Is executed.

  When the processing of S1923 or S1924 is completed, it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a jackpot (S1925). If it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S1925: Yes), the lottery result of the second special symbol is determined. The processing of S1926 to S1929 for setting the jackpot is executed, and this processing ends. In these processes of S1926 to S1929, the same processes as those of S1816 to S1819 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol to the big hit in the first special symbol big hit determination process (see FIG. 235) are executed. Is done.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1925 that the lottery result of the acquired second special symbol is not a big hit (S1925: No), a departure symbol of the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set ( S1820), this process ends.

  Next, referring to FIG. 242, a second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1909), which is one process of a second special symbol variation start process (see S288 of FIG. 240) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. ) Will be described. FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S1909).

  In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1909 in FIG. 242), the first variation of the first special symbol variation process (see FIG. 236) and the process related to the variation of the first special symbol are the first variation targets. Since only the target of the symbol is changed from the special symbol to the second special symbol, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, referring to FIG. 243, a second special symbol change execution process (S289), which is one of the special symbol change processes (see S142 in FIG. 233) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The contents are explained. FIG. 243 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol change executing process (S289). In the second special symbol change executing process (S289), a process of subtracting the change time is executed.

  When the second special symbol change executing process (S289) is executed, first, the special figure 2 variable time counter 203gg is updated by subtracting 1 (S1951), and the second special symbol is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. Is updated (S1952), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 244, the contents of the second special symbol change stop processing (S291) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol change stop processing (S291). The second special symbol change stop process (S291) executes a process when stopping the change of the special figure 2.

  In the second special symbol change stop process (S291), if the target of the change is different from the first special symbol to the second special symbol in the first special symbol change stop process (see FIG. 239). The detailed description is omitted.

  Next, the details of the jackpot control process 10 (S1531) in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot control process 10 (S1531) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 192) in the seventh embodiment. In the jackpot control process 10 (S1531) of the tenth embodiment, the processes of S1601 to S1612 are the same as the processes of S1601 to S1612 of the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 192) of the seventh embodiment. Is executed.

  In the big hit control process 10 (S1531) of the tenth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S1612 that the end timing of the ending period (ending effect) is determined (S1612), the end of the current big hit game is set. Then, a jackpot ending process is performed (S1631), and then this process ends. Details of the jackpot end processing (S1631) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing the content of the big hit end processing (S1631). The big hit end process (S1631) is a process for setting the gaming state after the big hit end, as described above. In the jackpot end process (S1631), first, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a probability variable jackpot (S1671). If it is determined that the current jackpot is a probability variable jackpot (S1671: Yes), the limit counter is determined. One is added to the value of 203 gb (S1674). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the limit counter 203gb after the addition in the processing of S1674 is 11 (S1675), and when it is determined that the value of the limit counter 203gb after the addition is 11 (S1675: Yes). Then, the limit reaching flag 203gi is set to ON (S1677), and the flow shifts to the process of S1672.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1675, when it is determined that the value of the limit counter 203gb after the addition is not 11 (a value of 10 or less) (S1675: No), the probability change flag 203ga is set to ON (S1676), The process moves to S1678.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of 1671 that the current jackpot is not a probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot) (S1671: No), the processes of S1674 to S1677 are skipped, and the process shifts to the process of S1672. In the process of S1672, the value of the limit counter 203gb is set to 0 (S1672), the probability change flag 203ga is set to off (S1673), and the flow shifts to the process of S1678.

  In the processing of S1678, the number of time savings corresponding to the type of the jackpot being executed, the data in the winning state storage area 203ec, and the state of the limit reaching flag 203gi is read from the time saving grant table 202e (see FIG. 225) (S1678). ), And sets the read number of time savings as the counter value of the medium time counter 203k (S1679). Next, a time-saving setting information command corresponding to the setting content is set (S1680), and a state command corresponding to the gaming state after the big hit is set (S1681).

  Next, a fluctuation pattern scenario corresponding to the currently running jackpot type, the data in the winning state storage area 203ec, and the state of the limit reaching flag 203gi is specified (S1682), and the data indicating the specified fluctuation pattern scenario is changed. It is stored in the pattern scenario storage area 203gc (S1683). Next, the end of the big hit is set (S1684), the big hit flag 203d is set to off (S1685), and this processing ends.

  By executing the jackpot ending processing, it is possible to appropriately set the gaming state according to the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning, the jackpot type, and whether or not the certainty limit number has been reached.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the tenth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 247 and 248. First, the variable display setting process 10 (S2141) in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This variable display setting process 10 (S2141) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process (see S2114 in FIG. 62) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment).

  In the variable display setting process 10 (S2141) in the tenth embodiment, the effect setting process (S8004) is different from the variable display setting process (see FIG. 62, S2114) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above. ) Is performed in place of the effect setting process 10 (S2831). Otherwise, the same process is performed, and thus the detailed description is omitted.

  Next, the effect setting processing 10 (S2831) executed in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process 10 (S2831). This effect setting process 10 (S2831) is a process executed in the variable display setting process 10 (see FIG. 247, S2141) executed in the tenth embodiment.

  In the effect setting process 10 (S2831), first, it is determined whether or not the currently displayed variation display is a variation pattern of a jackpot (S2921). In the process of S2921, if it is determined that the currently-displayed variable display is a jackpot variation pattern (S2921: Yes), the variable display mode for the jackpot is selected as the variable display mode (S2922). The process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the current fluctuation is not the jackpot fluctuation pattern (S2921: No), it is then determined whether the current gaming state is the probable change state or the time saving state (S2923). In the process of S2923, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the probability change state or the time saving state (S2923: No), the process proceeds to S2928. On the other hand, in the process of S2923, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the probable change state or the time saving state (S2923: Yes), the back mode lottery table 222ga (see FIG. 231) is read (S2924), The rear mode is randomly selected in accordance with the state and whether or not the limit has been reached (S2925). Next, it is determined whether or not the rear mode is changed when the rear mode is changed (S2926). If the back mode is not changed (S2926: No), the process proceeds to S2928.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the back mode is to be changed (S2926: Yes), a display back image change command corresponding to the back mode after the change is set (S2927), and the process proceeds to S2928.

  In the process of S2928, a variable display mode for departure is selected as the variable display mode (S2928), and then the process is terminated.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, the chance that the possibility of shifting to the normal modes A and B (normal state, latent state) which are disadvantageous to the player and the advantageous extended mode is increased. Modes A and B (a time saving state in which the number of time savings is eight, a probable change state), a connected game mode that is most advantageous to the player (a probable change state that continues until the next big hit), and a retraction mode (a time saving time) that is relatively advantageous for the player Six modes (time saving time of 100 times) are provided, and when the jackpot is won in the normal modes A and B, the transition to one of the chance modes A and B is almost made (direct connection). The possibility of shifting to the Zhuang mode is reduced). In other words, unless a jackpot is won in either of the chance modes A and B (that is, if the jackpot is not won by a special symbol lottery within eight times after shifting to the chance modes A and B), it is advantageous to the player. It is configured so that it is difficult to shift to the simple extended mode. This allows the player to have a sense of accomplishment just by shifting to the extended play mode, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game. In addition, in the tenth embodiment, when a jackpot is achieved in the extended game mode, the extended game mode is set again after the end of the jackpot at a high rate (in the case of a probability change jackpot winning at a rate of 90%). Even if the player wins a low rate (10% rate) normal jackpot or reaches the probable limit number of times, the system always shifts to the pullback mode without falling directly to a disadvantageous state. It was configured as follows. Then, when a jackpot is won in the retraction mode, the system is configured to shift (return) only to the retreat mode or the retraction mode, similarly to the case where the jackpot is won in the extended mode. In other words, as long as the jackpot is won within the number of times saved in the pullback mode, there is no possibility of shifting to an unfavorable gaming state, so that the degree of advantage in the case of shifting to the extended play mode can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player in playing the game when the mode is shifted to the extended play mode.

  Further, in the tenth embodiment, the mode is shifted to the extended play mode (probable change state that continues until the next big hit), and the continuous change mode and the big hit are repeated while the winning change is won at a rate of 90%. When the upper limit number of the probability change state of the special symbol (probability change limit number) has been reached, regardless of whether the win is the probability change jackpot or the normal jackpot, instead of the pullback mode being set, the number of time reductions (100 If a jackpot is won in the round), so-called pullback occurs, the ratio of advantageous jackpot types (jackets with a large number of rounds) is likely to be higher than if the jackpot was won during the probable change state. Configured. More specifically, the jackpot of the second special symbol is configured so that the ratio of the jackpot type having a lower degree of advantage (the selection ratio of a small number of rounds) is higher than the jackpot of the first special symbol. In the pullback mode set when the number of times of the probability change has been reached, the lottery frequency of the second special symbol is significantly reduced. That is, the fluctuation time of the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol becomes significantly longer than the fluctuation time of the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol (for example, 600 seconds uniformly regardless of the lottery result). This is set so that the lottery of the first special symbol can be executed a plurality of times while the variable display of the second special symbol is executed once. In other words, it is configured such that the rate of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery is increased. Thereby, when the number of times of the probability change has been reached, the game can be performed with a stronger expectation that the jackpot will be returned, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  Note that, in the tenth embodiment, only when the time limit (retraction mode) is reached after the number of times of the probability change has been reached, during the retraction mode, the lottery for the relatively advantageous first special symbol lottery is performed. Although the configuration is such that the execution state is formed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even when the pullback mode is set after the end of the jackpot by winning the normal jackpot in the extended-village mode, the lottery of the first special symbol is easily executed (the fluctuation pattern is referred to by referring to the limit arrival time table 202dg3). Is determined). With this configuration, it is possible to more strongly expect the pullback to occur in each pullback mode, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the tenth embodiment, when the mode is shifted to the extended-play mode, the extended-play mode is always continued until the next big hit is achieved, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, each time a special symbol lottery condition is satisfied in the extended-villa mode, a lottery (falling lottery) is performed to determine whether or not to shift (fall) to the low probability state (return mode or normal mode A) of the special symbol. May be adopted. In this case, if it is determined that the special symbol is to be dropped to the low-probability state within 100 times after the end of the jackpot, the pull-back mode is set until the lottery for a total of 100 times is completed, and after 100 times, If it is determined that the vehicle falls down, the normal mode A may be set. Further, in this case, in the case of falling down to the pull-back mode by the drop-down lottery, during the set pull-back mode, it may be configured such that the lottery of the advantageous first special symbol is executed in a concentrated manner. With this configuration, after falling into the pull-back mode, the player can play the game with a stronger expectation that the pull-back will occur, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Modification of Tenth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 249 to 252, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described tenth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described tenth embodiment, when the jackpot and the extended game mode are repeated in the extended game mode to reach the number of times of the probability change and the pullback mode is set, it is advantageous (that is, the jackpot is won). In such a case, an advantageous jackpot type is easily determined.) By configuring so that only the first special symbol lottery is easily executed, the player can be strongly conscious of wanting to win the jackpot during the pullback mode. Configured to be possible.

  On the other hand, in the present modified example, in the pull-back mode set based on the fact that the number of times of the probability change has been reached, it is not possible to win the jackpot within the number of time savings, and the mode shifts to the normal mode A (normal state) ( In the case where the vehicle has fallen, a special state is formed in which the rate of transition to the extended mode is higher than normal by winning the jackpot in the normal mode A. Thereby, even after shifting from the retraction mode to the normal mode A, it is possible to make the player think that the game is to be continued, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  First, the board configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 249 is a diagram showing a board configuration of the game board 13 in the present modification. As shown in FIG. 249, the board configuration of the game board 13 in this modification is different from the board configuration of the game board 13 (see FIG. 220) in the above-described tenth embodiment in place of the first entrance 64. In addition to the point that the distribution winning device 750 is provided, instead of the right first ball entrance 64r, a right second ball entrance 6400r is provided as a starting winning opening which is a chance for a lottery of a second special symbol. The difference is that the second ball entry port 6450 is deleted. The sorting prize winning device 750 uses the game ball that has flowed into the sorting winning prize device 750 through the upper opening 750a to form a central first prize port, which is a kind of start winning prize port, which is a chance for a lottery of the first special symbol. It is configured so that it can be distributed to either the entrance 64c or the central second entrance 6400c, which is one type of start winning opening that is a chance for a lottery of the second special symbol. That is, the game ball that has flowed into the sorting and winning device 750 through the opening 750a is received by the sorting member 750b provided immediately below the opening 750a, and the central first ball opening 64c, And the central second ball entry port 6400c. Note that the distribution member 750b is configured to be variable between a state inclined to the right in front view (see FIG. 249) and a state inclined to the left in front view. The game ball that has flowed in from the opening 750a is received by the left side portion of the sorting member 750b, and is rotated counterclockwise by the weight of the received game ball to switch to a state of being tilted to the left in front view. The game ball received by the member 750b is dropped toward the central first ball entrance 64c arranged on the lower left side in front view. On the other hand, in a state where the disadvantageous w3 opening member 750b is tilted to the left as viewed from the front, the game ball flowing from the opening 750a is received by the right portion of the distribution member 750b, and clockwise due to the weight of the received game ball. As a result of turning and switching to the state inclined rightward in front view, the game ball received by the sorting member 750b is dropped toward the central second ball entrance 6400c arranged on the lower right side in front view. . In other words, each time a game ball enters the opening 750a, the distribution member 750b receives the game ball and alternately flows down to the central first ball inlet 64c and the central second ball inlet 6400c. Have been. Thereby, the lottery of the special symbol can be executed more efficiently.

<Electrical Configuration in Modification of Tenth Embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, in the present modified example, the prescribed contents of the variation pattern table 202d, the time reduction giving table 202e, and the variation pattern scenario table 202ga are different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the above-described tenth embodiment (see FIG. 222A). Only some changes have been made. Therefore, illustration of the configuration of the ROM 202 is omitted.

  First, the details of the normal table 202dg1 constituting the variation pattern table 202d in the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. The normal table 202dg1 is in the game state (normal state, latent state) in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set, similarly to the normal table 202dg1 in the tenth embodiment described above (see FIG. 225 (b)). It is a data table in which, when a special symbol lottery is executed, data for determining (selecting) a fluctuation pattern (variation time) according to the lottery result of the lottery is defined. FIG. 250 (a) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the normal table 202dg1.

  As shown in FIG. 250 (a), the normal table 202dg1 in the present modification is the first special symbol distribution of the normal table 202dg1 (see FIG. 225 (b)) in the tenth embodiment regardless of the symbol type. With the same distribution as above, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern. That is, in the present modification, in the gaming state (normal state, latent state) in which the normal state of the ordinary symbol is set, when the random selection of the second special symbol is executed, the random selection of the first special symbol is executed. As in the case of the above, a relatively short fluctuation time is easily selected (an extremely long fluctuation of 600 seconds cannot be selected). This is, as described above with reference to FIG. 249, in the present modification example, at the position where the first entrance opening 64 (starting winning opening which becomes a lottery opportunity of the first special symbol) in the tenth embodiment is provided. , A sorting device 750 (a configuration in which game balls are alternately won at the center first ball entrance 64c and the center second ball entrance 6400c) is provided, and a normal game method (left This is because it is configured such that by performing the hitting, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are easily executed in parallel (simultaneously). That is, it is configured that the lottery of the second special symbol is executed without performing an irregular game method (a game method of right-handing in a normal state of a normal symbol), thereby improving the game efficiency. For the purpose, the variation time of the second special symbol is configured to be shorter than in the tenth embodiment.

  Next, the details of the limit reaching table 202dg3 in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. Like the limit reaching table 202dg3 of the tenth embodiment (see FIG. 226 (b)), the limit reaching table 202dg3 has reached the number of times of the probable change limit, and has been forced despite the fact that the player has won the probable big hit. This is a data table that may be referred to to determine (select) a change pattern (change time) of a special symbol when the special symbol is set to the low probability state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit.

  FIG. 250 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the limit reaching table 202dg3. As shown in FIG. 250 (b), the limit reaching table 202dg3 (see FIG. 250 (b)) in this modification is the limit reaching table 202dg3 (see FIG. 226 (b)) in the above-described tenth embodiment. ), The corresponding relationship between the range of the value of the variation type counter CS1 for each lottery result and the variation pattern (variation time) to be selected (determined) is opposite between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is different in drinking. That is, the correspondence in the first special symbol of the limit arrival time table 202dg3 (see FIG. 226 (b)) in the above-described tenth embodiment corresponds to the limit arrival time table 202dg3 (see FIG. 250 (b)) in this modification. ) Shows the correspondence relationship of the second special symbol. The correspondence between the limit reaching table 202dg3 (see FIG. 226 (b)) and the second special symbol in the above-described tenth embodiment is the limit reaching table 202dg3 (see FIG. 250 (b)) in this modification. ) Indicates the first special symbol correspondence. Therefore, in this modification, when the variation pattern is determined with reference to the limit arrival time table 202dg3 (see FIG. 250 (b)), the variation time of the first special symbol is as extremely long as 600 seconds regardless of the lottery result. While the fluctuation time is always set, a relatively short fluctuation time (3 seconds to 30 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. Thereby, in the period during which the limit arrival time table 202dg3 is referred to (the number of times the special symbol has been reached and the number of special symbol lotteries after the end of the jackpot is 101 or more), the distribution winning device 750 is left-handed. When the game ball is fired aiming, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed only every 600 seconds, while the lottery of the second special symbol can be performed relatively frequently. In other words, when the jackpot is won, the advantageous jackpot type (the jackpot type to which the probable change state to be continued until the next jackpot) is easily determined can be biased to the advantageous second special symbol lottery, so that the other It is possible to form a special normal state (special state) having a higher degree of advantage than the shifted normal state under the conditions (when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized or when the normal jackpot is won). Therefore, during the special state, the player can be made to think that he wants to continue the game, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 251, the details of the time saving provision table 202e in the present modification will be described. Like the time savings grant table 202e in the tenth embodiment, the time savings grant table 202e sets the number of time savings at the end of the jackpot according to the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning. This is a data table that is referred to when setting. FIG. 251 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the time saving table 202e in the present modification.

  As shown in FIG. 251, the time saving provision table 202e (see FIG. 251) in this modification is different from the prescribed content of the time saving provision table 202e in the tenth embodiment (see FIG. 227) in the second special symbol. The difference is that the number of time savings provided for a part of the jackpot (jackpot I10, J10) is changed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 251, for the jackpot I10 (9 round probability change jackpot) that was won in the normal state, the number of time savings (for example, 65536 times), and eight time savings are defined in association with the jackpot after reaching the probability change limit number. Regarding the jackpot I10 won in the latent state, eight times are associated with the number of time savings regardless of whether the hit is before the arrival of the certainty limit or the number of times of the certainty limit is reached. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 251, the jackpot I10 (9 round probability variable jackpot) won in the game state (time reduction state, probability variation state) in which the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol is set is the same as the other probability variation jackpots. The number of time savings is associated. In other words, the hit before the arrival of the probability change limit is defined in association with the number of time savings to be continued until the next big hit, and the hit after the arrival of the probability change limit is defined in association with the number of time savings of 100. ing.

  In addition, the number of time savings given to the jackpot J10 is defined in association with the same number of time savings as the jackpot C10 and the jackpot F10. In other words, for the jackpot J10 (three round probability change jackpot) won in the normal state, eight times are defined as the number of times saved. Also, with respect to the jackpot J10 won in the latent probability state, 0 is set as the number of time savings in association with the hit before reaching the probability change limit or even when the number of times of the probability change has been reached. In other words, when the jackpot J10 is won in the latent state, the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol is not given even once, which is extremely disadvantageous for the player. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 251, the jackpot J10 (three round probability variable jackpot) won in the gaming state (time reduction state, probability variation state) in which the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol is set is the same as other probability variation jackpots. The number of time savings is associated. In other words, the hit before the arrival of the probability change limit is defined in association with the number of time savings to be continued until the next big hit, and the hit after the arrival of the probability change limit is defined in association with the number of time savings of 100. ing.

  As described above, in the present modified example, in the normal state, the degree of advantage in the case of winning the probability variable jackpot (big hit I10, J10) in the lottery of the second special symbol is made higher than in the tenth embodiment. That is, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state, the number of time savings to be continued until the next big jackpot is substantially set at a rate of 27% (in the case of winning the jackpot I10) is set (ie, , Direct shift to the extended play mode), and eight time savings are set at a rate of 73% (when the jackpots J10 to L10 are won) (that is, shift to one of the chance modes A and B). It was configured as follows. In other words, in the normal state, when a jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, a ratio of directly shifting to the extended play mode after the end of the jackpot (7%, which is a ratio of winning one of the jackpots A10 and D10). It is configured so that the rate of transition to the extended play mode due to the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery is nearly four times higher than that. For this reason, in the normal state, it is possible to play the game with a strong expectation of winning the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery. In addition, when the transition to the special state in which the fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the limit arrival time table 202dg3 (see FIG. 250) is performed, the possibility of directly transitioning to the extended mode is further increased. In this case, the player's motivation to play the game can be improved. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 252, details of the variation pattern scenario table 202ga in the present modification will be described. The variation pattern scenario table 202ga according to the present modification is similar to the variation pattern scenario table 202ga (see FIG. 228) in the tenth embodiment, in which the number of lotteries of the special symbol after the end of the big hit and the type of the variation pattern table to be referred to. It is a data table referred to for selecting a correspondence (fluctuation pattern scenario). FIG. 252 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ga.

  As shown in FIG. 252, in the present variation, the variation pattern scenario set when the number of times of the probability variation limit has been reached is partially changed in the variation pattern scenario table 202ga (see FIG. 228) in the tenth embodiment. The only difference is that More specifically, in the probability change state, if the player wins the probability change jackpot and reaches the probability change limit number by the jackpot, the time reduction table 202dg2 is referred to until the lottery is executed 100 times after the end of the jackpot. Then, in the lottery after 101 times, a fluctuation pattern scenario in which the limit reaching table 202dg3 is referred to is set. In other words, the retreat mode is set by reaching the probable change limit number by repeating the extended state and the jackpot, and it is not possible to win the jackpot during the pullback mode (the time saving number is 100). In this case, in the subsequent normal state, each time a special symbol lottery is executed, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined with reference to the limit arrival time table 202dg3. Therefore, since it is possible to execute the comparatively advantageous lottery of the second special symbol (which is likely to directly shift to the consecutive play mode when the jackpot is won), even after the pull-back mode is completed. , It can make the player think that he wants to continue the game. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the modified example of the tenth embodiment, the repetition of the extended play mode and the jackpot reaches the number of times of the probability change, the pullback mode is set, and the jackpot is set during the pullback mode. In the case where the game mode is shifted to the normal mode A which is disadvantageous to the player without being able to be won, a special state is set in which the rate of shifting to the extended game mode by winning the jackpot is increased. In other words, the disadvantageous (the continuous play mode is hard to be set even if the jackpot is won in the normal state) is hardly executed in the lottery of the first special symbol. (The ratio of the lottery is high.) The state in which it is possible to execute the lottery by being biased to the lottery of the second special symbol is formed. This makes it possible to improve the player's motivation for playing the game when the state is shifted to the special state.

  Here, it is generally known that a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a gaming state that is advantageous to the player such as a probable change state or a time saving state. Among such conventional gaming machines, there are those in which the advantageous game state and the jackpot are repeated at a relatively high ratio once the state is shifted to the advantageous game state. The aim was to improve the interest of the players. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when an advantageous gaming state ends and an unfavorable gaming state (for example, a normal state) is set, it is made to think that a game in the unfavorable gaming state is to be continued. There is a problem that it becomes difficult.

  On the other hand, in the present modified example, when a special state (a state in which the fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the limit reaching table 202dg3) is set after the end of the retraction mode, the game in the disadvantageous normal state is performed. Since it is possible to make the player think that he / she wants to continue, the motivation of the player for the game can be maintained even after the advantageous game state ends. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Note that, in the present modification, the special state is set after the retraction mode is completed only when the retraction mode is set after reaching the probability change limit number, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even when the pullback mode is set after the end of the jackpot by winning the normal jackpot in the extended-villa mode, the normal mode A (normal state) after the end of the pullback mode may be set to the special state. With this configuration, a special state can always be set when the retraction mode ends, so that the player's motivation to play the game when the retraction mode ends is reduced. This can be more reliably prevented (suppressed).

  In the present modified example, in the normal mode A after the retraction mode based on reaching the probability change limit number, the limit arrival time table 202dg3 is referred to determine the fluctuation pattern until the jackpot is won. , But is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the limit arrival time table 202dg3 only after the retraction is completed and until the lottery of a specific number (100 times) is completed. By configuring in this way, after the pullback mode ends, if a so-called addiction occurs, it is possible to prevent the player from losing sight of the time when the lottery is completed for a specific number of times. You can let the player decide once to quit the game.

  In the present modified example, only when the retraction mode is ended and the mode shifts to the normal mode A, an advantageous state in which the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol can be biased is formed, but the present invention is limited to this. Not something. For example, even in the normal mode A or the normal mode B, even if the special symbols are successively removed over a specific number of times (for example, 200 times), the fluctuation time of the first special symbol becomes extremely long ( (600 seconds) An advantageous state may be formed. With such a configuration, even when so-called addiction occurs, the motivation for the game can be hardly reduced.

<Eleventh embodiment>
Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 253 to 272. In the above-described seventh embodiment, it is easier to set the time-saving gaming state advantageous to the player as the game state after the end of the big hit, when the big hit in the disadvantageous normal state is set than the big hit in the advantageous time-saving state. In the case where a small hit is won with a high probability in a lottery of a second special symbol which is likely to be executed during the time saving state in order to constitute a small hit, and a big win is generated by generating a V winning in the small hit. Is configured such that the small hit in the normal state is higher than the small hit in the short time state.

  On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, an advantageous period during which a reserved ball of the second special symbol (special figure 2 reserved ball) can be acquired during a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, and the advantage period is acquired more than the advantageous period. It is configured such that a difficult disadvantageous period can be set, and the disadvantageous period is set before the advantageous period. And when the jackpot game is executed during the advantageous period of the time-saving state, the game executed after the end of the jackpot game is more advantageous to the player than when the jackpot game is executed during the disadvantageous period of the time-saving state. It is constituted so that it becomes easy. That is, rather than executing the jackpot game between the time saving state that is advantageous to the player and the establishment of the specific condition (until the advantageous period is set), the specific condition is established (advantageous). Executing the jackpot game (after the period is set) is advantageous to the player (it is easy to execute the second special symbol lottery using the special figure 2 holding ball after the jackpot game is completed). I have.

  Also, the jackpot game during the time saving state is executed, and the case where the jackpot game is executed during the normal state and the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is better than the case where the time saving state is set after the jackpot game, By setting the time-saving state in which the end condition is hard to be satisfied, the jackpot game is executed during the normal state using the special figure 2 holding ball secured during the time-saving state, rather than when the jackpot game is executed during the time-saving state. It is configured so that the case where it is made to be advantageous to the player.

  With this configuration, the jackpot game is executed immediately (the jackpot game is executed in a state where the special figure 2 reserved ball is not secured or only a small amount of the special figure 2 reserved ball is secured). The second special symbol, knowing the game method of 1 (the game method of winning V in the small hit game executed during the disadvantageous period) and the risk of requiring time and possession ball before ending the time reduction state The player can select the second game method of terminating the time-saving state while maintaining a large number of reserved balls, and generating a V winning with a small hit after the end of the time-saving state.

  Further, in the above-described eighth embodiment, a plurality of time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state are provided, and a plurality of time-saving end conditions are provided according to the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) executed by the player. The time saving termination condition which is easily satisfied among the conditions (the termination condition of the special figure 1 and the termination condition of the special figure 2) is configured to be different. Then, it is determined whether or not each of the time reduction end conditions is in a state immediately before the respective time reduction end conditions are satisfied (a state in which the pre-hour reduction end condition is satisfied). In addition, an effect (game method guidance effect) for causing a game to be played in a game method in which another time reduction end condition is more easily satisfied than the one time reduction end condition in which the time reduction pre-condition is satisfied is executed.

  That is, in the above-described eighth embodiment, one of a plurality of time-saving end conditions is set in order to allow the player to enjoy the game in the time-saving state to the maximum (to lengthen the game period in the time-saving state). Only the element for satisfying the time saving end condition (for example, the number of times of change of the second special symbol) is updated, and the other element for satisfying the time saving end condition (for example, the number of times of change of the first special symbol) is completely updated. In such a state, the time saving state is prevented from being terminated.

  Further, in the above-described eighth embodiment, a maximum of four lottery rights for the second special symbol can be reserved and stored, and the time reduction state is ended with the lottery right for the second special symbol reserved and stored. Thereby, during the normal state set after the end of the time saving state, the lottery of the second special symbol which is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol can be executed. In other words, an effect capable of ending the time-saving state while maximizing the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the time-saving state and holding and storing more lottery rights for the second special symbol. Was configured to run.

  On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, similar to the above-described seventh embodiment, when the time reduction state is set, the game state other than the time reduction state (for example, the normal state) is set. Also, it is configured that the lottery of the second special symbol, which can make it easier to obtain the lottery right, is executed in preference to the lottery of the first special symbol. When the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the time reduction state reaches a predetermined number (10 times), the time reduction state is ended. In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol lottery right that is reserved when the second special symbol lottery is executed) and the time saving state The second special symbol executed during the time reduction state based on the remaining number of special symbol lotteries (remaining number of times reduced) until the end of the special symbol (until the number of lotteries of the special symbol during the time reduction state reaches 10). Is configured so that a different variation pattern (variation time) is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 at the end of the time reduction in accordance with the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol selected during the time reduction state. It is configured so that the degree of expectation of the number of reserved balls is made different. In other words, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls at the end of the time reduction state can be easily increased or decreased based on the timing of increasing / decreasing the number of special figure 2 reserved balls during the time reduction state. ing.

  More specifically, the special symbol change (special figure 2 fluctuation) executed in the last half period of the time saving state (for example, the ninth and tenth time reductions) is set as the special pattern change during the special figure 2 change. Extremely short fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 seconds) that makes it difficult to obtain the FIG. 2 reserved balls, and long fluctuation time (for example, 20 seconds) that makes it easy to obtain the number of reserved figures in FIG. 2 ) Is selected in accordance with the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2.

  Further, during the time saving state, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls at the end of the time saving state is larger when the right-handed game is temporarily interrupted than when the player continuously executes the right-handed game. It is configured to make it easier. Specifically, when the special figure 2 is changed to the upper limit (four) during the special figure 2 change at the specific number of time savings (for example, the eighth time saving), the special number corresponding to the remaining number of time savings is set. Each of the fluctuation times of the fluctuations in FIG. 2 is configured to be an extremely short fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 second).

  With such a configuration, the player who is playing a game during the time saving state is not merely continuously executing the right-handed game, but playing the game while making the player think about whether or not the right-handed game is executed. Can be done. That is, it is possible to provide a novel playability that it is more advantageous not to execute the game.

  In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, during the time saving state, a guidance effect capable of guiding the player to a game method that is advantageous to the player is configured to be executable. As a result, it is possible to cause the player to perform a game that requires the skill of the player to perform a game in accordance with the content of the guide effect being executed, thereby increasing the player's willingness to play the game. Can be. In addition, it is possible to prevent a player who is playing a game during the time reduction state from being excessively disadvantageously played.

  In the eleventh embodiment, a part of the configuration of the game board 13 and a part of the effect contents executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 are different from the seventh and eighth embodiments described above. The difference is that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 are changed. The other components are the same, and the same components are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 253 is a front view of the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 253, the gaming board 13 in the eleventh embodiment differs from the gaming board 13 in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 178) in that the position of the V winning device 6500 is changed from the left side of the board to the right side of the board. In that the position of the change, the position of the through gate 67 has been changed to a position below the V winning device 6500, and the position of the first variable winning device 65 has been changed from the position below the center of the board to the left side of the board. It is different and otherwise the same. About the same structure, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the eleventh embodiment, a game ball that has flowed down the left game area (left area) of the variable display unit 80 wins a prize than a game ball that has flowed down the right game area (right area) of the variable display unit 80. A first ball entrance 64 and a first variable prize winning device 65 are provided at easy positions, and the V prize is placed at a position where a game ball flowing down the right area is easier to win than a game ball flowing down the left area. A second entrance 6400 with a device 6500, a through gate 67, and an electric accessory 6400a is provided.

  That is, in the eleventh embodiment, when the normal state is set and when the big hit game is executed, the left-handed game in which the game ball is caused to flow mainly to the left area is an advantageous game method for the player. When the time saving state is set and when the small hitting game is executed, a right-handed game in which a game ball is caused to flow down mainly to the right region is a game method advantageous to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 253, a description will be given of a board configuration in the right side region of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, the V winning device 6500 is disposed above the right area, and almost all of the game balls fired by the right-handed game with the nails implanted in the game board 13. All are guided toward the left end of the V prize device 6500 so that all of them flow down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6400f1 of the V prize device 6500 from the upstream side to the downstream side (from left to right in the viewpoint of FIG. 253).

  In addition, as described in the above-described seventh embodiment, the opening and closing door 6500f1 of the V winning device 6500 is formed such that a flow path through which a plurality of game balls can pass is formed on the upper surface thereof in a closed state. (See FIG. 179). Therefore, by performing a right-handed game in a state where the small hitting game is being executed, it is possible to surely cause the V winning device 6500 to win the game ball during the small hitting game.

  In a state where the opening / closing door 6500f1 of the V winning device 6500 is closed (a state in which the small hitting game is not executed), the game ball flowing down the right area passes through the upper surface of the closed door 6500f1, and Similarly to the seventh embodiment described above, the flow path is divided into a flow path that passes through the through gate 67 and reaches the electric accessory 640a and a flow path that flows down to the out port 66 without passing through the through gate 67. It is configured as follows.

  In the eleventh embodiment, similarly to the above-described seventh embodiment, when the time-saving state is set as the gaming state, the electric accessory 6400a attached to the second entrance 6400 is easily opened, so that the right-handed driving is performed. In the game, a game is performed in which a game ball is inserted into the second entrance 6400, which is a chance to draw a second special symbol.

  As described above, the eleventh embodiment is configured such that the ball first reaches the V winning device 6500 in a right-handed game executed during the time saving state. Therefore, when the small hitting game is executed during the time saving state, it is possible to suppress the passage of the ball to the through gate 67 and the entering of the ball to the second ball entry port 6400 during the small hitting game period. This makes it possible to manage the increase in the number of stored second special symbols during the time saving state by changing the variation time of the second special symbol change during the time saving state.

  In the eleventh embodiment, by disposing the through gate 67 and the second entrance 6400 below the V winning device 6500, the game ball is moved to the second entrance 6400 during the small hitting game. Is suppressed, but is not limited to this. For example, the game ball is configured to be able to pass through the through gate 67 even during the small hitting game, and when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, May be configured such that even if a win is made in the ordinary symbol lottery executed, the game ball cannot reach the second entrance 6400 with the electric accessory 6400a to be opened. In this case, since it becomes possible to pass the game ball to the through gate 67 during the small hitting game period, the reserved memory of the ordinary symbols is exhausted during the small hitting game, and the game during the time reduction state is smoothly performed. It is possible to suppress a situation where execution cannot be performed.

  Alternatively, only the through gate 67 may be provided below the V winning device 6500, and the second entrance 6400 with the electric accessory 6400a may be provided above the V winning device 6500. In this case, since the second entrance 6400 can be disposed on the upstream side of the right region, a game ball can smoothly enter the second entrance 6400 during the time saving state, It is possible to smoothly execute the game during the time saving state.

  Here, the contents of the game in the state where the time saving state is set will be briefly described with respect to differences from the seventh embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) set (selected) for the second special symbol lottery executed during the time reduction state is determined by the number of special symbol lotteries (remaining time reduction) in the time reduction state, The second special symbol is configured to be different based on the number of reserved memories, and a variation pattern (a variation pattern with a short variation time) in which it is difficult to secure the reserved memory of the second special symbol, and a retention of the second special symbol A change pattern (a change pattern with a long change time) for which storage is easily ensured can be set (selected).

  And, by the variation pattern (fluctuation time) set (selected) for the second special symbol lottery executed during the time reduction state, it is possible to secure the holding storage of many second special symbols when the time reduction state ends. It is configured such that a normal state and a state that is difficult to secure can be made to appear. Further, the right-handed game is interrupted at a specific timing, rather than continuing to execute the right-handed game during the time-saving state, so that the number of stored second special symbols at the end of the time-saving state can be easily increased. It is configured to be able to. With such a configuration, the player can arbitrarily select a game method during the time saving state, thereby obtaining an advantage degree of the game executed after the time saving state ends (the number of times the second special symbol lottery stored and stored is executed). Can be varied, so that the player can be motivated to play the game during the time reduction state.

  In the eleventh embodiment, a predetermined period after the time saving state is set (for example, a period until the lottery of the special symbol (second special symbol) is executed six times during the time saving state) is the predetermined period. A disadvantageous period in which it is difficult to secure the reserved memory of the second special symbol, compared to a period after the period has elapsed (a period in which the 7th to 10th special symbol (second special symbol) lottery is executed during the time saving state). It is constituted so that it may become. In other words, it is configured such that a period after the predetermined period elapses is an advantageous period in which it is easier to secure the holding of the second special symbol than a predetermined period after the time reduction state is set.

  With this configuration, when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the time reduction state, the securing status of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol varies depending on the number of time reductions at the time of winning. Can be. Therefore, depending on the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol secured at the time of winning a small hit, the player selects whether or not to perform a game for generating a V winning during the small hit game. Can be done.

  In other words, when the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game (V jackpot) that is executed based on the fact that the small hit is won during the time saving state and the game ball is made to win the V during the small hit game, Since it is not possible to newly acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed only for the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol secured during the time saving state. . Therefore, it is an advantageous game for the player to make the V prize in a state where more reserved memories of the second special symbol are secured during the time saving state.

  However, in the eleventh embodiment, the first half period from when the time saving state is set is set as a disadvantageous period during which the holding of the second special symbol is difficult to secure, and the second half of the period is when the holding of the second special symbol is secured. Since it is an easy period (easy to secure rather than a disadvantageous period), if a small hit is won immediately after the time saving state is set, a big hit (V big hit) is immediately performed regardless of the number of retained special symbols in the second special symbol. While playing the target game, or taking the risk of not being able to make the game ball V-win during the time-saving state, the game ball is won until the advantageous period (second half period) is reached in order to secure the reserved memory of the second special symbol. The player can select whether or not to execute a game not to be performed. Therefore, the subsequent game result can be greatly different depending on the game method selected by the player.

  Furthermore, in the eleventh embodiment, in the latter half period (advantageous period) of the above-mentioned time saving state, the variation pattern of the selected second special symbol variation is made different according to the number of stored second special symbols. Make up. Then, it is configured such that the degree of expectation of acquiring the number of reserved specially-stored second special symbols at the end of the time saving state is varied depending on the variation pattern of the selected second special symbol variation. More specifically, if the number of stored second special symbols is at the upper limit (4) at the timing when the second special symbol change of the ninth rotation is performed after the time reduction state is set, the time reduction state is set. The number of reserved storages of the second special symbol at the end of the process is reduced, and the number of reserved storages of the second special symbol at the timing when the second special symbol change of the ninth rotation is performed after the time saving state is set is a specific number ( In the case of 3), the number of reserved special symbols in the second special symbol at the end of the time saving state is easily increased.

  In other words, the right-handed game is temporarily interrupted, and the number of stored second special symbols is adjusted to be a specific number other than the upper limit number, as compared to the case where the right-handed game is continuously executed during the time saving state. Thus, it is possible to easily increase the number of stored second special symbols at the end of the time saving state. By configuring in this way, the degree of advantage in the case where the time reduction state ends, that is, in the case where the time reduction state ends without executing the jackpot game, according to the game method executed by the player during the time reduction state Since the advantage of the game executed after the end of the time reduction state can be made different, the player can be motivated to play the game during the time reduction state.

  In addition, as will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, when the time-saving state is set again after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the V winning of the game ball during the time-saving state, the time-saving state is set. As a termination condition for terminating the (re-saving time state), a time-saving termination condition (special drawing 1 time-saving termination condition) that is satisfied when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed once is set. Then, as shown in FIG. 253, by the game method (left-handed game) executed during the jackpot game, the game ball can enter the first entrance 64, which is a lottery opportunity of the first special symbol. Is configured.

  With such a configuration, when a game ball is awarded with a V-prize in a state in which the hold of the second special symbol cannot be secured during the time-saving state, the time-saving state is set again after the end of the jackpot game. Even if it is done, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed before the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, and the time-saving state ends instantly because the special figure 1 time-saving end condition is satisfied. Will be.

  On the other hand, when the game ball is made to win the V in a state where the reserved memory of the second special symbol is secured during the time saving state, if the time saving state is set again after the end of the jackpot game, the lottery of the first special symbol is performed. The second special symbol lottery is executed with higher priority than the special special symbol 1 time reduction, compared to the case where the time reduction state (re-time reduction state) is set in a state where the holding of the first special symbol is not secured. The end condition can be hardly satisfied.

  In addition, the time saving state is ended in a state where the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol is secured to the upper limit without V winning in the time saving state, and the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state (during the time saving state). When the time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game (per V) which is executed based on the fact that the small hit is won by the lottery based on the reserved memory secured and the game ball is won during the small hit game. That is, when the time reduction state is set after the end of the jackpot game executed during the normal state, the special figure 1 time reduction end condition described above is not set.

  That is, in the eleventh embodiment, when the V hit is executed within a predetermined period after the time-saving state is set, it is more disadvantageous for the player than when the V hit is executed after a predetermined period elapses. In addition, it is better to end the time-saving state in a state in which the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol is secured to the upper limit than in the case where the V hit is executed within a predetermined period after the time-saving state is set. It is configured to be advantageous to the person.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to greatly differ the game results to be obtained later depending on the game method selected by the player during the time saving state, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

<About the production contents in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 254 to FIG. 258, among the effect contents executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, characteristic effect contents will be described. I do. Specifically, the effect contents of the time-saving effect executed when the time-saving state is set will be described. Note that, in the eleventh embodiment, the number of time savings (remaining time savings) and the number of retained storages of the second special symbol (for the time savings effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment) are described. The present embodiment is different in that an effect mode is set based on the (special figure 2 number of reserved balls) and the variation time of the second special symbol variation to be executed, and is otherwise the same. About the same production mode (display mode), the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the eleventh embodiment, as described above, the degree of advantage of a game to be executed later is greatly changed according to the content of the game to be executed during the time reduction state, It is possible to provide a pleasure for selecting what kind of game to play during the time saving state, and to improve the interest of the game. Further, in the present embodiment, a guidance effect for guiding a player to a game method for increasing the degree of advantage of a game executed later is configured to be executable. Thereby, it is possible to easily grasp a game aiming to execute a game that is advantageous to the player, depending on the effect mode of the guide effect to be executed. In addition, since the skill required to actually execute the game according to the grasped game contents is determined, the player can be motivated to play the game.

  In the eleventh embodiment, similarly to the above-described seventh embodiment, when the time reduction state is set, a time reduction effect in which the character 801 imitating a boy collects keys is executed. Although a detailed description will be given later, in the eleventh embodiment, a period in which the special symbol change (second special symbol change) from the first time to the sixth time after the time saving state is set is performed in the first half period of the time saving state. During (), an ultra-short variation pattern (variation time of 0.1 second) is selected in which the variation time is extremely short, so that it is difficult to increase the number of reserved special figure 2 balls. Although illustration is omitted, during this first half period, a display mode (a display mode displayed when the time reduction state is set) for explaining the effect contents in the time reduction state is continuously displayed. Then, when the first half period of the time reduction state elapses and the second half period (a period during which the special symbol change is executed for the seventh time or later) is performed, various display modes for guiding the player to a game method to be executed during the time reduction state are displayed. Is done.

  Here, a display mode (effect contents) that can be displayed during the latter half of the time saving state will be described in detail. FIG. 254 (a) is an example of a display mode displayed when the middle variation (10 second variation) is executed as the seventh special symbol variation (second special symbol variation) after the time saving state is set. FIG. As shown in FIG. 254 (a), in the eleventh embodiment, the time-saving effect (guidance) in which a part of the display mode is changed from the time-saving effect (see FIG. 181) executed in the seventh embodiment described above. Direction) is executed.

  The example shown in FIG. 254 (a) is a state in which the seventh second special symbol fluctuation is fluctuating for 10 seconds, and can be displayed in a state where one special figure 2 holding ball is secured. In the display area HR6, a character “3 times remaining” indicating that the number of remaining time savings is 3 is displayed. Then, four display areas HR1 to HR4 are formed on the right side of the boy character 801. Each time a game ball enters the second entrance 6400 and the number of reserved balls increases, an image of a key corresponding to the reserved ball is displayed in these four display areas. In addition, as shown in FIG. 181 (a), a display area HR5 is displayed on the sub-display area Ds, in which the characters "Store keys by right-handing !!" According to these display modes, it is possible to easily understand that the key is accumulated in the display areas HR1 to HR4 by right-handing the player.

  In the diagram shown in FIG. 254 (a), a special figure is displayed inside the display area HR4 as a display mode indicating that one reserved memory (special figure 2 reserved ball) of the second special symbol is secured. An icon of a “key”, which is a display mode displayed corresponding to the two reserved balls, is displayed. Thereafter, when the special figure 2 reserved balls are secured to the upper limit (four) during the middle change for 10 seconds, the display mode shown in FIG. 254 (b) is displayed. FIG. 254 (b) schematically shows an example of display contents displayed when the special figure 2 reserved balls are GET (secured) up to the upper limit number (four) during the seventh middle time change (10 second change) of the time saving. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 254 (b), when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls reaches the upper limit during the execution of the second special symbol change, even if the right-handed game is further executed, a new special figure 2 reserved ball is executed. Cannot be secured, a display area HR5 is displayed on the sub-display area Ds, in which characters "4 keys GET! Rest for a while" are displayed. In the display areas HR1 to HR4, a “key” icon is displayed in each area to indicate that the current special figure 2 reserved ball count is the upper limit (4). In addition, in FIG. 254 (a), the display mode of “right-handed” is variably displayed as the display mode of the guidance display area Dm2 in which “right-handed” is displayed, to a display mode that is difficult for the player to see. With these display modes, the player can easily understand that the special figure 2 reserved ball has been secured to the upper limit value, and can easily understand that it is not necessary to execute the right-handed game any more. it can.

  In the example shown in FIG. 254 (b), by making it difficult to see the "right-handed" display in the guidance display area Dm2, the player is notified that it is not necessary to perform a right-handed game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the size of the guidance display area Dm2 may be reduced, "right-handed" may be displayed in a display area different from the guidance display area Dm2, or the character display of "right-handed" may be displayed. You may be comprised so that "right-handed" may be alert | reported in the display mode (for example, mark display) which is difficult for a player to understand. As described above, during a time-saving state in which a right-handed game is mainly executed, a right-handed guidance display (see FIG. 254 (a)) that is easy for the player to understand, and a display mode that is harder for the player to understand than the right-handed guidance display By switching and displaying, the player is made to understand that the current time is in the time saving state, and then the player is made aware that it is not necessary to execute the right-handed game. be able to. Further, the display mode itself for guiding the right-handed game may not be displayed (is not displayed).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 255, the effect contents displayed during the execution of the second special symbol change for the eighth time saving time will be described. FIG. 255 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display mode when the middle figure (eight seconds change) of the eighth time saving is in effect and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is a specific number (three). FIG. 255 (b) shows a display mode in the case where the middle figure change (eight-second change) is the eighth time saving time and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is less than the specific number (three) (one). FIG.

  Although details will be described later, in the eleventh embodiment, if the number of special figure 2 reserved balls at the time when the second special symbol change of the eighth time reduction is stopped and displayed is a specific number (three), the tenth time reduction is performed. The long-term variation is easily selected as the second special symbol variation. Therefore, if the number of reserved special figure 2 balls reaches the upper limit during the seventh change in middle time, the break display (see FIG. 255 (a)) in which the break display shown in FIG. 254 (b) is continued is displayed. Is displayed. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 reserved ball cannot be acquired to the upper limit during the second special symbol change of the seventh time saving, as shown in FIG. 255 (b), the second special figure 2 reserved ball The display mode of the acquisition chance is displayed.

  In FIG. 254 (a), “Please wait” is displayed in the main display area Dm as a display mode for suppressing the acquisition of a new special figure 2 holding ball during the execution of the second special symbol change this time. As a result, a display area HR5 is formed in the sub-display area Ds, in which characters of "game break" are displayed. Then, in the guidance display area Dm2, the letters "STOP" for guiding the interruption of the game are displayed. With these display modes, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the current state is such that a new special figure 2 reserved ball must not be acquired.

  In addition, among the display areas HR1 to HR4 for indicating the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, a display area HR1 where a "key" icon corresponding to the fourth special figure 2 reserved ball can be displayed is hidden. Thus, it can be assumed that the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls (three) is the upper limit of the number of special figure 2 reserved balls that can be obtained, and it is not necessary to visually perform a right-handed game. It can make the player think that it is in good condition.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, a display area HR6 for indicating that the number of remaining working hours is "2" is formed smaller than the display area HR6 shown in FIG. 254 (b). Thus, when the display content of the third symbol display device 81 shifts from the display mode shown in FIG. 254 (b) to the display mode shown in FIG. It can be difficult for the player to understand. Note that, unlike the display example shown in FIG. 255 (a), the display area HR6 may be hidden or “remaining?” May be displayed in the display area HR6. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of remaining working hours, so that it is possible to make it easier for the player to watch only the contents of the effect being executed. In addition, in this case, the display mode indicating the number of special figure 2 reserved balls displayed in the display areas HR1 to HR4 is changed so that the display mode of the number corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved ball number is not displayed. May be. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the increase / decrease in the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, thereby making it easier to focus on the effect content being executed.

  FIG. 255 (b) is a display screen in a state in which a guidance effect for guiding a game ball to enter the second entrance 6400 until the number of reserved special figure 2 balls becomes three is performed. , A display area HR5 is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. The display area HR1 corresponding to the fourth special figure 2 reserved ball among the display areas HR1 to HR4 visually indicates that the fourth special figure 2 reserved ball must not be acquired. "DANGER" is displayed.

  Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the number of reserved special figure 2 balls reaches the upper limit during the execution of the second special symbol change for the seventh time reduction, or the execution of the second special symbol change for the eighth time reduction When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls becomes three, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls at the end of the time saving state is most likely to be the largest. On the other hand, if the number of special figure 2 reserved balls reaches the upper limit (four) during the execution of the second special symbol change for the eighth time saving time, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls at the end of the time saving state decreases. It is configured to be easy.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 255 (a) and (b), when the middle fluctuation (10-second fluctuation) is executed as the second special symbol fluctuation in the eighth time saving, the special figure 2 at the start of the fluctuation. By making the effect content different according to the number of reserved balls, a game method that is advantageous to the player can be guided. In addition, as shown in FIG. 254 (b), if the number of reserved special figure 2 balls reaches the upper limit during the execution of the second special symbol change for the seventh time reduction, the second special symbol change for the seventh time reduction is performed. Is configured to display a guidance mode for interrupting the right-handed game from the player, so that the guidance for interrupting the right-handed game is executed from the start timing of the second special symbol change in the eighth time saving time In comparison, the number of game balls existing in the right region can be reduced at the start timing of the second special symbol change in the eighth time reduction. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the number of special figure 2 reserved balls to reach the upper limit (four) during the execution of the second special symbol change for the eighth time saving time.

  Next, referring to FIG. 256, a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the effect contents displayed during the execution of the long fluctuation (20-second fluctuation) at the tenth time reduction (final fluctuation of the time reduction state). FIG. In the present embodiment, when the second special symbol change of the tenth time reduction is executed in a state where the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is two (the special figure 2 is changed at the time when the second special symbol change of the tenth time reduction is started). A long variation having a variation time of 20 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation. Then, during the long fluctuation, an effect for acquiring the special figure 2 reserved ball to the upper limit is executed. Furthermore, as a display mode of the guidance display area Dm2, a highlighted display mode (indicated by a double frame line in the figure) in which a right-handed game is emphasized and guided more than other timings during the time saving state is displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 256, the character "Last" indicating that it is the final change in the time saving state is displayed in the display area HR6, and "Collect treasure by right-handed" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. The display region HR5 is formed. Then, the special figure 2 reserved ball acquired during the fluctuation is determined to be used for the second special symbol lottery executed after the time saving state ends, that is, during the normal state. As a display mode for indicating the number of reserved balls, a “treasure” icon is displayed as a display mode different from the display mode (“key” icon) shown in FIG. 254 (a). In this way, by changing the display mode for indicating the number of the special figure 2 reserved balls, the player can understand that the advantage degree of the special figure 2 reserved balls stored and stored is different. .

  In the present embodiment, the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state. Specifically, the second special game executed during the normal state is performed rather than the case where the big hit game (per V) is executed based on the win of the small hit in the second special symbol lottery executed during the time reduction state. In the case where the big hit game (per V) is executed based on the winning of the small hit in the symbol lottery, the time saving end condition which is hard to be satisfied is set as the time saving end condition when the time saving state is set after the end of the big hit game. It is configured to be. Therefore, the display mode (treasure) showing the special figure 2 reserved ball used during the normal state is visually more valuable than the display mode (key) showing the special figure 2 reserved ball used during the time saving state. This is a display mode. In this way, by associating the actual degree of advantage with the value indicated by the display mode, it is possible to provide a game that is visually easy for the player to understand.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 257, a description will be given of display contents displayed when the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 during the time saving state becomes the number of reserved balls disadvantageous to the player. FIG. 257 (a) schematically shows an example of display contents displayed when the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit (four) during the middle change (10-second change) of the eighth time saving time. FIG. As described above with reference to FIG. 255 (b), an effect of storing three keys is performed during the eighth middle time change (10-second change) in the time saving. Here, in the case where the player has mistakenly performed the right-handed game operation and has accumulated four keys (the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 has become four), FIG. As shown, the icon 890 imitating a bomb is displayed in the center of the main control device 110, and the display area HR6 indicating the number of remaining hours is displayed as “Remaining? Is displayed. Then, in the sub display area Ds, the player enters the “DANGER zone”, which is an effect mode in which it is difficult for the player to know when the time saving state ends and the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls. A display area HR5 is displayed, indicating that "DANGER zone entry!"

  As shown in FIG. 257 (a), when the DANGER zone is set, the remaining short time count and the special figure 2 reserved ball count are not displayed on the display surface. Although the details will be described later, if the number of reserved special figure 2 balls becomes the upper limit during the special figure 2 fluctuation of the eighth time reduction, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol fluctuation of the ninth time reduction and the tenth time reduction will be The short variation pattern (variation time of 0.1 second) is selected, and a new special figure 2 reserved ball cannot be acquired (difficult) during the second special symbol variation of the tenth time reduction. Thus, once the DANGER zone is set, there is a disadvantage that the number of reserved special figure 2 balls at the end of the time saving state is reduced. By displaying such a display mode, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the executed game method is the wrong game method, thereby executing the game with the appropriate game method in the next game. They can be willing to play games.

  In the eleventh embodiment, in order to provide a disadvantageous state that is disadvantageous to the player in the latter half period of the time saving state, an ultra-short variation pattern (0.1 second) can be selected as the variation time of the second special symbol. Make up. Then, by executing the ultra-short variation pattern (0.1 second) as the variation time of the second special symbol, it is configured to make it difficult to acquire the special figure 2 reserved ball during the variation period of the second special symbol. I have. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult to acquire the special figure 2 reserved ball during the fluctuation period, but it is difficult to notify the player of the lottery result of the second special symbol using only the ultra short fluctuation time. There was a problem that.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the DANGER zone is set during the latter half of the time saving state, an icon 890 imitating a bomb is displayed as shown in FIG. If a situation in which it is not known is displayed in advance, for example, as shown in FIG. 257 (b), if a small hit is won in the second special symbol variation in which the ultra short variation pattern is set, the bomb is An imitation icon 890 is exploded, and a character 891 of “V” indicating a small win is displayed. With this configuration, the lottery result of the second special symbol can be displayed only by displaying the display mode in which the bomb is exploded from the state where the icon 890 imitating the bomb is already displayed. Therefore, even in the case of the second special symbol fluctuation in which the fluctuation time is set to be short, it is possible to inform the player of the lottery result easily.

  Although illustration is omitted, if the lottery result of the second special symbol variation in which the ultra-short variation pattern is set is out of order, even if the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the bomb will not be displayed. It is configured to continuously display the imitation icon 890. Accordingly, the display mode (bomb icon) displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is not variably displayed to indicate to the player that the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a troublesome effect from being executed. When the final change in the time saving state is stopped and displayed with the DANGER zone set, a display mode in which a bomb explodes is displayed and secured as shown in FIG. 257 (b). FIG. 2 is configured to display a display mode indicating the number of reserved balls. With this configuration, when the DANGER zone is set, a display mode in which the bomb explodes finally is displayed (when the small hit or the big hit is won or when the time saving state ends). Therefore, the player can be interested in which display mode (a display mode indicating a hit or a display mode indicating the end of the time saving state) is displayed when the bomb explodes. Up to the stage can be entertained.

  Note that the DANGER zone is set when it is difficult to secure many special figure 2 holding balls at the end of the time reduction state. In this state, it is easier for a player to make a V-prize game ball. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 257 (b), when a small hit is won in the DANGER zone, a guide display is provided as a display mode for allowing the player to perform a game aiming at a V prize (right-handed game). In the area Dm2, “right-handed” is highlighted, and in the sub-display area Ds, a display area HR5 in which “Aim for the small hit V” is displayed.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the special figure 2 number of reserved balls and the number of remaining hours are not displayed in the DANGER zone. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special figure 2 number of reserved balls and the number of remaining hours may be displayed in a display mode in which the player is more difficult to determine than in FIG. 254 (a). In addition, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (frame button 22), even in the DANGER zone, a display capable of specifically notifying the number of reserved balls and the number of remaining hours in the special figure 2 is displayed. You may comprise so that an aspect may be displayed.

  Finally, with reference to FIG. 258, a description will be given of display contents displayed when a small hit is won in a state where the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is 0 during the time saving state. FIG. 258 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed when a small hit is won in a state where the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is 0 during the time saving state. As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, when the time saving state is set, and when the special hitting 2 reserve ball count is 0 and the V hit (big hit game) is executed, the big hit game is executed. Even if the time saving state is set again after the end, the time saving state is immediately terminated by executing the first special symbol change. Therefore, when the time saving state is set and the special hit is held in a state where the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is 0, a game aiming at the V winning is executed or the V winning is achieved in the current small hitting game. , The player is allowed to select whether to execute a game aiming for the next small hit prize while acquiring the special figure 2 reserved ball during the remaining time reduction period.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 258, when the player wins a small hit in the state of reduced working hours and the number of reserved special figure 2 balls is 0, the word “select” is displayed at the bottom of the main display area Dm. A horizontally-long substantially rectangular display area HR7 is formed, and a horizontally-long roughly-rectangular display area in which characters “I want to store a key” and “STOP” are displayed on the left half of the sub-display region Ds. Is formed in the right half, and a horizontally long substantially rectangular display area in which a character “I want to make a big hit” and a character “Right-handed” are displayed is formed. In the guidance display area Dm2, the guidance display mode is not displayed in order to indicate a period for allowing the player to select a game method. Further, on the left side of the display area HR4, an arrow image YG simulating an arrow pointing right (that is, an arrow pointing in the direction of the display area HR4) is displayed. The arrow image YG allows the player to know that he is currently working in a reduced working time. According to these display contents, the game is interrupted (STOP) by the player to terminate the small hitting game without generating the V winning, or to perform the right-handed game to generate the V winning. A novel gaming property that allows the user to select whether to start a jackpot or not can be realized, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, “STOP” indicating that the firing of the game ball is interrupted is used as the guide of the game method for not performing the right-handed game, but any other game method may be guided. For example, it may be configured to guide “left-handed” as a game method in which a game ball cannot win a V during a small hit game. In the present embodiment, at the start of the small hit game, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is determined, and when the number is 0, the display mode shown in FIG. In addition to this, in addition, for example, whether the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has increased during the small hit game (whether a game ball has entered the second entrance 6400 during the small hit game) May be determined, and the display mode during the small hit game may be varied based on the determination result.

  In this case, for example, when the special figure 2 reserved ball number reaches the upper limit during the small hit game, it is the most advantageous situation for the player to start the big hit game by generating a V winning in that state. Therefore, a display mode in which a right-handed game is forcibly executed (for example, a display mode in which large "right-handed" characters are displayed as the most emphasized guidance display mode in the center of the main display area Dm) is displayed. In this case, the character "Super Chance" may be displayed in the sub display area Ds, indicating that the most advantageous game will be executed when the V prize is generated. In addition, when the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is increased in a range less than the upper limit value, based on the amount of increase and the number of remaining working hours, whether or not it is better to make a V prize during the small hitting game this time. , And the degree of emphasis of a display mode for guiding a right-handed game is variably displayed based on the prediction result (for example, a display area for guiding “STOP”, a display area for gradually guiding “right-handed”). (Variable display so as to increase the size of the area). With such a configuration, the display mode according to the change in the gaming state during the small hit game is executed during the small hit game, so that the player can pay attention to the game during the small hit game.

  Further, in this case, a plurality of types are set for the small hit game to be executed when the small hit is won, and according to the set small hit type, the period during which the opening / closing door 6500f1 is closed during the small hit game is set. You may comprise so that length may differ. With such a configuration, it is possible to vary the degree of expectation that a game ball will be allowed to enter the second entrance 6400 during the small hit game, according to the type of the small hit game to be executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 253, when the closing period of the opening / closing door 6500f1 is set to be long during the small hitting game executed in the time saving state, the game ball flowing down the right area by the right-handed game is passed through the through gate 67. Alternatively, since it is possible to easily reach the second entrance 6400, it is possible to easily acquire the number of special figure 2 reserved balls during the small hit game.

  Further, as a small hit game corresponding to a specific small hit type among a plurality of small hit types, an opening period of a first period (1 second) is set immediately after the small hit game is executed, and thereafter, for 10 seconds Is configured to execute a small hitting game in which an opening period of the second period (0.5 seconds) is set after the closing time of the small hitting game, and two game balls are set in the V winning device 6500 as an end condition of the small hitting game. It is preferable to set a condition for terminating the number of winnings in which the small hitting game ends when a winning is made. In this case, if the right-handed game is continuously executed during the small hit game, two or more game balls win the V prize device 6500 during the first period, and the small hit game ends. On the other hand, by interrupting the right-handed game during the first period, a closing period of 10 seconds is set. During the closing period, a special figure 2 holding ball is acquired, and during the second period, the V prize device is obtained. The game ball can be awarded to 6500. That is, even during the execution of the small hit game, the degree of advantage in the later game can be changed according to the game method selected by the player.

  In addition, when the above-described specific small hit type is provided, in order to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the small hit game executed this time is a small hit game corresponding to the specific small hit type, for example, An open period of one period (1 second) is set, and a small hit type in which the small hit game ends after a closed period of 0.2 seconds is preferably provided. With this configuration, it is determined whether the small hit game to be executed this time is a small hit game in which it is better to interrupt the right-handed game. Can be prevented from being easily grasped in accordance with the contents of the opening operation from when the predetermined period elapses.

  In addition, in this case, in order to guide a suggestion effect that can indicate to the player the type of the small hit game to be executed (small hit type) and a game method (right-hand continuation, right-hand interruption) during the small hit game May be configured to be executed during the small hit game.

<Electrical Configuration in Eleventh Embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the special symbol 2 random number table 202ha2 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 259 (a) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the special symbol 2 random number table 202ha2 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 259 (a), the special symbol 2 random number table 202ha2 in the eleventh embodiment is different from the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 (see FIG. 184 (b)) in the seventh embodiment in the small hit determination. The difference is that the range of the first random number counter C1 defined as a value is different, and the other is the same. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 259 (a), a range of “10-259” is defined as a determination value for winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, the range of values that can be taken by the first random number counter C1 is “0 to 999”. Therefore, in the eleventh embodiment, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, about 1/4 It is configured to win a small hit with a probability.

  FIG. 259 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time-saving giving table 202hb. This time savings grant table 202hb is different from the above-described time savings granting table 202e (see FIG. 186 (a)) in that the number of time savings given (time saving termination condition) set when the gaming state at the time of winning is the time savings state. And the point that the jackpot D11 is won during the time saving state and the point that the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends when the jackpot E11 is won, and the other points are the same. is there. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. The names of the jackpot types have been partially changed for the sake of convenience of explanation, but since they have substantially the same contents, detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 259 (b), when the "big hit A11" and the "big hit B11" are won, the same as the case where the "big hit A7" and the "big hit B7" of the above-described seventh embodiment are won. Since the number of time savings is set, the detailed description is omitted.

  Next, for the "big hit C11", when the gaming state when the big hit game is executed is the normal state, "10 times" is defined as the number of times of saving provided, and the big hit game is executed. When the game state at that time is the normal state, “10 times” or “one change of the special figure 1 (first special symbol)” is defined as the number of times for saving time. That is, when the "big hit C11" is determined, a time saving state advantageous to the player after the end of the big hit is set regardless of the gaming state. Then, when the "big hit C11" is won during the time saving state, the special symbol change is executed 10 times during the time saving state, or when the first special symbol change is executed once, the time saving end. It is defined that the condition is satisfied and the time saving state ends.

  With this configuration, if a V prize occurs during the time reduction state and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is 0 in a state where the “big hit C11” is set, the left hit game is executed. In order to acquire the reserved ball of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reserved ball) with high probability, the lottery of the first special symbol that is executed without priority over the lottery of the second special symbol after the jackpot game is over Will be executed. Therefore, the time-saving end condition defined as “one change of the special figure 1 (first special symbol)” is satisfied, and the time-saving state is immediately ended.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, similarly to the above-described seventh embodiment, it is configured to determine whether the time reduction end condition is satisfied at the time when the special symbol change is stopped (fixed display). However, since the ultra-short variation pattern (variation time: 0.1 second) is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation in the first rotation during the time reduction state, the V prize during the time reduction state Occurs and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is 0 in the state where the "big hit C11" is set, the game result is substantially the same as when the normal state is set after the big hit game ends.

  On the other hand, when the V winning occurs during the time reduction state and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is 4 in a state where the "big hit C11" is set, the lottery of the first special symbol is set after the time reduction state is set. The second special symbol lottery is also executed with priority, and a new special figure 2 reserved ball is acquired while the second special symbol lottery is executed four times. It is possible to make it easier to fulfill the time saving termination condition of “10 times” than “one change of one special symbol).

  In this way, by changing the time-saving end condition that is likely to be established in accordance with the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol (the number of special figure 2 reserved balls) at the time when the time-saving state is set, the gaming state at the time of winning is determined. Even if the set jackpot type is the same, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game can be made substantially different, and a surprising game can be provided to the player. .

  As for the "big hit D11" and the "big hit E11", the same number of time savings (time saving termination condition) as the above-mentioned "big hit C11" is set, and therefore detailed description is omitted. Also, regarding the "big hit F11", the presence or absence of time saving is made different depending on the game state when the big hit game is executed. Specifically, the game state when the big hit game is executed is in the normal state. In the case of, “10 times” is associated and defined as the number of time savings granted. On the other hand, when the gaming state at the time of executing the jackpot game is the time saving state, the number of time savings is “0”, that is, the time saving state is not set after the end of the jackpot game, and the normal state is set. Stipulated. In this manner, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game can be switched between the presence / absence of the time point state based on the result of the combination of the set jackpot type and the game state when the jackpot type is set. By doing so, it is possible to provide a variety of variations when setting the game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the same number of time savings (time saving termination condition) is set for each of "big hit C11", "big hit D11", and "big hit E11". However, the present invention is not limited to this. "Big hit D11" is defined as "10 times" or "3 variations of special figure 1 (first special symbol)", and a V prize occurs during the time saving state and "big hit D11" is set. When the number of reserved special figure 2 balls is 0, the time saving state may be configured to be more difficult to end than when the "big hit C11" is set. With such a configuration, when a small hit is won in a state where the number of reserved balls is 0 during the time saving state and the number of reserved balls is 0, a case where it is better to make a V prize depending on a set big hit type, The case where it is better not to win the V prize can be provided. Therefore, the importance of allowing the player to determine which game to select when a small hit is won in the state where the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is 0 during the time reduction state can be further increased.

  Also, in this case, it is preferable to execute an effect that results in suggesting the jackpot type set this time. This allows the player to closely watch the effect to be executed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 260 and 261, differences between the variation pattern table 202d of the eleventh embodiment and the variation pattern table of the seventh embodiment will be described. First, the contents defined in the normal fluctuation pattern table 202dh1 referred to during the normal state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 260 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the normal fluctuation pattern table 202dh1. As shown in FIG. 260, the normal variation pattern table 202dh1 is different from the configuration of the variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 23A) in the seventh embodiment (first embodiment) described above in the second special symbol. The difference is that the variation pattern selected as the variation pattern in (Special Figure 2) is different, and the other is the same. Specifically, in the second special symbol change executed during the normal state, the value of the change type counter CS1 is “0 to 179” and the change time is “10 seconds” regardless of the lottery result. "Short variation" is defined in association with the "middle variation" in which the variation type counter CS1 has a range of "180 to 198" for a variation time of 30 seconds.

  That is, when the second special symbol change is executed in the state where the normal state is set, the case where the normal state is set with the special figure 2 reserved ball secured is mainly used. In this state, as in each of the above-described embodiments, a dedicated effect (pull-back effect) is configured to be executed, so that the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the selected second special symbol is minimized. It is configured to be fixed. Thereby, the effect period of the pull-back effect using the special figure 2 reserved ball number (maximum of four) secured in the state where the normal state is set is specified in advance, and the fluctuation period of the plurality of second special symbols is determined. This makes it easy to execute (set) a pull-back effect as a series of effects straddling.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 261, the contents defined in the time-saving variation pattern table 202dh2 which is referred to when the time-saving state is set will be described. FIG. 261 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time-saving variation pattern table 202dh2. The time-saving variation pattern table 202dh2 is different from the time-saving variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 186 (b)) in the seventh embodiment in that it is selected for the first special symbol variation executed for the first time-saving time. This is different from the variation pattern to be performed in that the variation pattern selected for the second special symbol variation is changed, and the other is the same. Detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 261, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the number of time saving changes is “1”, that is, the special figure 1 variation Is executed, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 198”, that is, the variation time is as short as 0.1 second in the entire range, regardless of the number of reserved balls 1 and the lottery result. Fluctuations are defined in association with each other. Therefore, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in the first rotation in the time saving state, the fluctuation is completed in a very short time. Then, when “one change of special figure 1 (first special symbol)” is set as the end condition of the time saving state (time saving end condition) (see FIG. 259 (b)), The time saving state ends when the special figure 1 change ends. Thereby, even when the condition for setting the time saving state after the end of the big hit game is satisfied, it can be substantially set that the normal state is set.

  When the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the number of time saving changes is “2”, it is the same as the time saving changing pattern table 202d2 of the seventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 186 (b)). Since the variation pattern is defined to be selected, its detailed description is omitted.

  Next, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the number of time saving changes is “1 to 6”, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is changed regardless of the number of reserved balls 2 and the lottery result. An ultra-short variation with a variation time of 0.1 second is defined in a range of “0 to 198”, that is, the entire range. As a result, during the period until the number of time saving changes reaches six (the first half of the time saving state), the special figure 2 lottery is executed in a state where it is difficult to increase the number of special figure 2 reserved balls. Therefore, when the small hit is won in the first half period of the time saving state, the small hit game is easily executed in a state where the special figure 2 holding ball is not secured, and the display screen shown in FIG. In contrast, the player selects whether to aim for a V prize or to execute the second half period of the time-saving state without making a V prize in the small hit game (by puncturing the small hit game).

  Next, when the number of time saving changes is "7, 8" and the lottery result is out of the range, the value of the change type counter CS1 is set in the range of "0 to 49" regardless of the special figure 2 number of reserved balls. The “ultra-short variation” with a variation time of 0.1 second is defined in association with the “middle variation” with a variation time of 10 seconds for the range of the variation type counter CS1 of “50 to 198”. It is defined in association. In other words, when the seventh time change is the special figure 2 change, the middle change is selected with a probability of about 3/4, and the ultrashort change is selected with a probability of about 1/4. When the lottery result is “big hit or small hit”, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 198”, that is, the variation time is in the entire range, regardless of the number of special figure 2 reserved balls. A 10-second middle fluctuation is defined in association with each other.

  Here, when the middle variation is selected, as shown in FIG. 254 (a), an effect mode for acquiring the special figure 2 reserved ball count is displayed. On the other hand, when the super short fluctuation is selected, the fluctuation in the eighth time saving is executed without displaying the effect form shown in FIG. 254 (a).

  In addition, even when the variation of the eighth time reduction is the special figure 2 variation, the variation pattern is selected with the same probability as that of the seventh time reduction described above. , The lottery result is out of order, and the probability that the ultra-short variation is selected is about 3.5%. Therefore, when the time reduction state is set, at the rate of about 3.5%, the unfortunate time reduction state in which it is not possible to obtain a chance to acquire the special figure 2 number of reserved balls at the seventh and eighth time reductions is set. Will be.

  On the other hand, when the special figure 2 reserved ball number is acquired up to the upper limit during the special figure 2 change of the seventh time reduction, when the middle change is selected as the special figure 2 change of the eighth time reduction, FIG. Is displayed, and a game method for suppressing the acquisition of the new number of reserved special figure 2 balls is guided. In other words, if the special figure 2 reserved ball number is acquired up to the upper limit during the special time 2 change in the seventh time reduction, the case where the change in the special time 2 is the ultra-short change is incorrect during the change in the special figure 2 in the eighth time change. As a result, a situation in which a new number of reserved special figure 2 balls is acquired is less likely to occur, and the variation pattern is advantageous to the player.

  Also, when the special figure 2 reserve ball number could not be obtained to the upper limit during the special time 2 change (middle change) of the seventh time reduction, or the ultra-short change pattern was selected as the special time 2 change of the seventh time reduction. In this case, if the change in the special figure 2 at the eighth time saving time is a middle change, the effect mode shown in FIG. 255 (b) is displayed.

  Lastly, when the number of time saving changes is “9, 10” and the number of reserved special figure 2 balls is “0, 2, 3”, the value of the change type counter CS1 is “0 to 198” regardless of the lottery result. , That is, the entire range is defined by associating an ultra-short variation with a variation time of 0.1 second. If the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is “1”, the variation is The value of the type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 198”, that is, the entire range is defined in association with the long variation in which the variation time is 20 seconds. That is, only when the number of time saving changes is "10", that is, when the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 when selecting the variation pattern of the last changes in the time saving state is "1", the last changes in the time saving state is a long variation ( 20 seconds), and the time saving state can be easily ended in a state where the special figure 2 reserved ball has been acquired up to the upper limit.

  Also, when the number of time saving fluctuations is “9”, that is, when the special figure 2 reserved ball count is “1” when selecting a fluctuation pattern one time before the last fluctuation in the time saving state (pre-last fluctuation), It is configured to have a long variation (a 20 second variation). In this case, in the change before the last, the special figure 2 reserved ball is acquired up to the upper limit, and a game for ensuring that the number of the special figure 2 reserved ball becomes three at the end of the time saving state is performed, or By acquiring only one special figure 2 holding ball in the previous change, the player can select whether to perform a game aiming to execute the long change again in the last change.

  In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, if the right-handed game is continuously executed during the period in which the time-saving state is set, the special figure 2 holding ball that can be secured at the time when the time-saving state ends. The number is configured to be easily reduced. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game during the time saving state is executed without securing the special figure 2 holding ball. Therefore, when the special figure 2 fluctuation of the ninth time reduction is executed without securing the special figure 2 holding ball, the ultra short fluctuation is selected, and then the ultra short fluctuation is also selected in the special figure 2 fluctuation of the tenth time reduction. It is configured to be easily performed. Thereby, it can be suppressed that a game without intentionally securing the special figure 2 holding ball is executed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the second special symbol lottery is performed for a predetermined period after the time reduction state is set (while the second special symbol variation in which the number of time reductions is “1 to 6” is executed). , And the fluctuation time of 0.1 second is set (selected) irrespective of the number of reserved special figure 2 reserved balls, but is not limited to this. When the number of times of change is "1", that is, only the first special symbol change (second special symbol change) after the time saving state is set is changed more than the above-described ultra-short change pattern (change time 0.1 second). The configuration may be such that a very short variation pattern with a long time (variation time 3 seconds) is selected.

  With this configuration, for example, the jackpot game is executed during the time saving state, and the time saving state (re-time saving state) is set again after the jackpot game ends in a state where the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is secured. In other words, when “10 times” or “one change of special figure 1” is set as the number of times for saving time (time saving end condition), priority is given to the first special symbol change (special figure 1 change). The second special symbol fluctuation (special figure 2 fluctuation) corresponding to the number of acquired special figure 2 reserved balls that is executed by the game is instantaneously ended, and the time saving state ends by executing the special figure 1 fluctuation. Can be suppressed.

  In this case, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation (second special symbol fluctuation) after the time reduction state is set, that is, the fluctuation time defined as the minute fluctuation pattern, is during the time reduction state (the normal symbol height). (Variation time) longer than the variation pattern (variation time) of the ordinary symbol variation executed during the probability state), and while the second special symbol variation is being executed, the game per ordinary symbol during the time reduction state is performed. It is good to make it easy to execute. Thereby, it is possible to easily acquire a new special figure reservation within a period from when the time reduction state is set to when the time reduction state ends. Furthermore, the first special symbol change (second special symbol change) after the time saving state is set is set to a minute short change (for example, 3 second change), so that the special symbol change during the first time saving number change (special figure change) 2), there is a possibility that a plurality of special figure 2 reservations may be obtained. Even in the case of such a configuration, while the number of time savings is “2 to 6”, the second special symbol change is executed in an ultra-short change pattern. Even if a plurality of pending memories are acquired, the number of acquired special figure 2 reserved balls can be reduced (0) when the number of times saved reaches "7".

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 included in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 262 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the configuration of the RAM 223 included in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 262, the RAM 223 of the eleventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the above-described seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. The difference is that a number counter 223b2, an acquisition effect set flag 223ha, a second acquisition effect set flag 223hb, a third acquisition effect set flag 223hc, a MAX acquisition flag 223hd, a danger flag 223he, and a game waiting flag 223hf are added. Otherwise, they are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Note that the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 has the same content as the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223aa in the above-described second embodiment, and is included in the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. When receiving a command related to the second special symbol, the counter is a counter for updating the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol according to the content indicated by the command, and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The acquisition effect setting completed flag 223ha is a flag for indicating that the effect (first hold acquisition effect) shown in FIG. 254 (a) is being executed, and in the case where the first hold acquisition effect is being executed. Is set to on, and is set to off when the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit number (four) during the first hold acquisition effect and the first hold acquisition effect ends. Specifically, in the first effect setting process (see S2988 in FIG. 272) executed in the effect setting process 11 (see S2891 in FIG. 271), when it is determined that the seventh time change is a middle change (see FIG. 272). 272 (Yes in S9102) (see S9105 in FIG. 272), and in the special figure 2 prize processing (see S2396 in FIG. 266) executed in the prize information related processing 11 (see S2295 in FIG. 265). The setting status is referred to (see S8001 in FIG. 266).

  Then, when it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is four after winning (see S8002 in FIG. 266), the number is set to off. Furthermore, it is set to ON during the period in which the effect (final hold acquisition effect) shown in FIG. 256 is being executed (see S9208 in FIG. 273). Also, when the final change in the time reduction state is stopped and displayed (when the big hit game is executed during the time reduction state) with the acquisition effect setting completed flag 223ha being set to ON, it is set to OFF (FIG. 270). S8204). In other words, when the acquired effect set flag 223ha is set to ON, the special figure 2 reserved ball number increase until the number of special figure 2 reserved balls reaches the upper limit number is advantageous for the player during the period. It indicates that there is.

  The second acquisition effect setting completed flag 223hb is a flag for indicating that the effect (second reservation acquisition effect) shown in FIG. 255 (b) is being executed, and the second reservation acquisition effect has been executed. Is set to ON when the second holding acquisition effect ends and the number of special figure 2 holding balls reaches the upper limit number (4) during the second holding acquisition effect and the second holding acquisition effect ends. . Specifically, in the first effect setting process (refer to S2988 in FIG. 272) executed in the effect setting process 11 (refer to S2891 in FIG. 271), when it is determined that the special figure change in the eighth time saving time is a middle change. (S9107 in FIG. 272: Yes), and when it is determined that the MAX acquisition flag 223hd described later is not set to ON (S9108 in FIG. 272: Yes), that is, during the special figure change of the seventh time saving, When the number of reserved balls in FIG. 2 cannot be obtained up to the upper limit number (four), it is set to ON (see S9113 in FIG. 272) and executed in the winning information related process 11 (see S2295 in FIG. 265). In the special figure 2 winning process (see S2396 in FIG. 266), the setting status is referred to (see S8008 in FIG. 266).

  Then, various effect modes are set in accordance with the number of reserved special figure 2 balls after winning (see S8013 to S8016 in FIG. 266), and it is finally determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls after winning is four. In this case (S8009 of FIG. 266: Yes), it is turned off (see S8012 of FIG. 266). That is, when the second acquisition effect set flag 223hb is set to ON, the increase in the number of special figure 2 reserved balls until the number of special figure 2 reserved balls reaches three becomes advantageous to the player. This is a period, which is a period disadvantageous to the player when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls reaches four. In addition, when the final change in the time reduction state is stopped and displayed (when the big hit game is executed during the time reduction state) while the second acquisition effect setting completed flag 223hb is set to on, the flag is set to off ( (See S8204 in FIG. 270).

  The third acquisition effect set flag 223hc is a flag for indicating that an effect (third hold acquisition effect) that is executed when the ninth time-saving special figure change is a long change is executed, This is set to on when the third hold acquisition effect is being executed, and is set to off when the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 increases by one during the third hold acquisition effect. Specifically, when it is determined in the second effect setting process (see S2989 in FIG. 273) executed in the effect setting process 11 (see S2891 in FIG. 271) that the ninth time-saving special figure change is a long change. (S9202 in FIG. 273: Yes), it is set to ON (see S9204 in FIG. 273) and executed in the special figure 2 prize processing (see S2396 in FIG. 266) of the prize information related processing 11 (see S2295 in FIG. 265). During the pre-end period processing (see S8021 in FIG. 267), the setting status is referred to (see S8101 in FIG. 267). Then, when the third acquisition effect set flag 223hc is set to ON (S8101 in FIG. 267: Yes), that is, when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls increases by one during the third reserved acquisition effect, It is set to off (see S8104 in FIG. 267). Also, when the final change in the time saving state is stopped and displayed (when the big hit game is executed during the time saving state) while the third acquisition effect set flag 223hc is set to ON, the flag is set to OFF ( (See S8204 in FIG. 270).

  The MAX acquisition flag 223hd is a flag for indicating that the effect (MAX acquisition effect) shown in FIG. 254 (b) is being executed, and during the first hold acquisition effect shown in FIG. 254 (a). Is set to ON when the special figure 2 number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit and the display mode (see FIG. 254 (b)) indicating the game standby is displayed, and corresponds to the eighth special figure change for the time saving time. This is referred to when setting the effect mode, and is set to off after setting the effect mode corresponding to the special figure change in the eighth time reduction (see S9110 in FIG. 272).

  By providing the MAX acquisition flag 223hd, when the number of reserved special figure 2 balls reaches the upper limit number during the special figure change of the seventh time reduction and the guidance information for interrupting the right-handed game is executed, the guidance information is notified. The continuous display can be performed across the special figure change of the eighth time saving.

  The danger flag 223he is used to indicate that the number of reserved special figure 2 balls is excessively increased during the time reduction state, and that a large number of special figure 2 reserved balls cannot be secured at the end of the time reduction state. If it is determined that the number of reserved balls has reached four in the state where the second hold acquisition effect (see FIG. 255 (b)) is being executed (S8009: Yes in FIG. 266), It is set to ON when it is determined that a new special figure 2 holding ball has been acquired in a state where the game standby effect (see FIG. 255 (a)) is being executed (S8017 in FIG. 266: Yes).

  While the danger flag 223he is set to ON, a danger effect (see FIG. 257 (a)) is executed, and the remaining time-saving period until the time-saving state ends for the player, and the secured special time period. FIG. 2 An effect mode in which the number of pending balls is difficult to understand is displayed. As described above, in the period before the end of the time reduction in the time reduction state (the 9th time reduction and the 10th time reduction), when there is a special figure 2 reserved ball number other than the appropriate number of special figure 2 reserved balls (1), The time-saving variation pattern table 202dh2 is defined so that an ultra-short variation (0.1 seconds) is easily set as the variation time of the special figure 2 variation. Therefore, by executing the danger effect, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even if a plurality of changes in the special figure 2 corresponding to the period before the end of the working hours are completed in a short period.

  Further, the state in which the danger flag 223he is set to ON is a state in which it is difficult to secure a large number of special figure 2 reserved balls when the time saving state ends, so that when a small hit is won, It is configured such that a guidance effect (see FIG. 257 (b)) for guiding the player to a game to be awarded a V is executed. With this configuration, even if the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is small, even if the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is difficult to secure within the remaining time-saving period, Instead of a selection effect (see FIG. 258) for allowing the player to select whether or not to make a V prize, a guidance effect (see FIG. 257 (b)) for guiding the player to make a V prize can be executed. Selection of a game that is disadvantageous to the player can be suppressed.

  The game waiting flag 223hf is a flag for indicating that the effect shown in FIG. 255 (a) (the game waiting effect) is being executed, and is executed during the special figure change at the seventh time saving time. During the 1-hold acquisition effect (see FIG. 254 (a)), the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit (4), and the effect (MAX acquisition effect) shown in FIG. 254 (b) is executed. In this state, the ON state is set when the eighth special figure change of the time saving is executed by the middle change (10-second change) (see S9111 in FIG. 272). Then, the state is referred to in the special figure 2 winning process (see S2396 in FIG. 266) (see S8017 in FIG. 266), and the game standby flag 223hf is set to ON (S8017 in FIG. 266: Yes), that is, The display mode when a special figure 2 prize is generated in a state where the game standby effect is being executed is set (see S8018 in FIG. 266), and then set to off (see S8020 in FIG. 266).

  As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, in order to set various effect modes to be executed during the time reduction state, the special figure change frequency during the time reduction state (special symbol change frequency) and the special figure hold Various flags are set based on the number of balls (special figure 2 number of reserved balls) and the selected fluctuation pattern, and the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is increased based on the setting status of the various flags. It is configured to set a display mode for guiding the player whether the state is good or not. Furthermore, when it is in a state that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls can be increased, a display for guiding the player to a range (allowable range) of an increase amount of the special figure 2 reserved ball number which is advantageous to the player. It is configured to set the mode. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player of the optimal game method to be executed during the time-saving state in a manner that is easy for the player to understand.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 263, a description will be given of a change in the number of special figure 2 reserved balls during the time saving state in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 263 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the number of remaining hours reduced in the time reduction state, the number of special figure 2 reservations (the number of special figure 2 reservation balls), and the special figure 2 fluctuation time.

  As shown in FIG. 263, in this embodiment, the time reduction state is a normal time reduction period in which the number of remaining reductions is 10 to 5 (the 1st to 6th reduction), and the remaining reduction number is 4 or 3 (the 7th or 8th reduction). ) Is divided into three periods, and a period before the end of the time reduction when the number of remaining time reductions is 2 or 1 (the 9th or 10th time reduction), and the fluctuation of the second special symbol for each period The time-saving variation pattern table 202dh2 is defined so that a different variation time can be selected as the time (variation time of the special figure 2).

  In addition, when selecting the special figure 2 fluctuating time in each period, the special figure 2 fluctuating time is referred to and a different special figure 2 fluctuating time is selected according to the secured special figure 2 fluctuating ball number. It is configured as follows. Then, according to the length of the special figure 2 fluctuation time selected for each period in the time saving state, a state where it is easy to obtain a new special figure 2 holding ball during the special figure 2 fluctuation and a state where it is difficult to obtain a new special figure 2 holding ball And it can be made to appear.

  Further, when a state in which the special figure 2 reserved ball is easily acquired appears (for example, during the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation in which the long fluctuation time is selected), it is ultimately preferable to acquire the special figure 2 reserved ball. In this case, there are provided a case where the game is advantageous and a case where the game is disadvantageous. With this configuration, a special figure 2 reserved ball may be acquired for a player who is executing a game during the time reduction state, whether or not the state is such that the special figure 2 reserved ball is easily acquired. The game can be played while predicting whether or not the game is in the state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the pullback game (second special symbol lottery based on the secured special figure 2 reserved ball) executed after the time saving state is completed and the normal state is set is advantageous to the player. In other words, various guidance effects (see FIGS. 254 to 258) for guiding the game method during the time reduction state are executed so that the number of reserved special figure 2 balls at the time when the time reduction state ends is increased. It is configured to This makes it possible to inform the player of the game during the time saving state in an easy-to-understand manner.

  As shown in FIG. 263, during the normal working hours, the special figure 2 variation is executed in an ultra-short variation pattern in which a variation time of 0.1 second is set. This 0.1 second is a time shorter than the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol fluctuation executed during the time reduction state, and in the present embodiment, the game is transmitted to the second entrance 6400 in one game per ordinary figure. The game is configured so that the game per game ends when one game ball enters, and during this time saving normal period, the second special symbol is used without securing the number of special figure 2 reserved balls. A lottery is executed. In some cases, a plurality of game balls may be consecutively entered into the second entrance 6400 during a single game per game, but also in this case, a plurality of second special fluctuations are executed in a short time. Therefore, the game during the normal working hours is not executed while maintaining the state of securing the special figure 2 reserved ball count.

  Then, when the normal time saving period elapses and the period shifts to the time saving ending preparation period, the middle fluctuation (10 second fluctuation) is selected with a probability of about 3/4, and the ultra short fluctuation (0.1 second fluctuation) with a probability of about 1/4. Seconds) is selected. When the middle fluctuation is selected in the special figure 2 fluctuation in which the number of remaining working hours is 4 (7th time saving), the effect of storing the reserved balls shown in FIG. 254 (a) (storage effect) is executed. Then, when the special figure 2 reserved ball number is accumulated up to the upper limit (four) during the execution of the reserve figure effect (when the special figure 2 reserved MAX is reached), the special figure 2 change (the remaining When the number of time savings is 3 (8th time saving change), a stand-by effect is executed in which a new special figure 2 holding ball shown in FIG. 255 (a) is not acquired.

  In accordance with the production mode (guidance content) during this standby production, when the special figure change for the eighth time saving ends without acquiring a new special figure 2 holding ball, the period shifts to the period before the end of the time reduction, and the ninth time A 0.1 second fluctuation is executed, and a 20 second long fluctuation is executed at the tenth time reduction. During the tenth time-short time long fluctuation, an effect (see FIG. 258) for urging the player to acquire the special figure 2 reserved ball count up to the upper limit is executed. Therefore, the flow shown in FIG. 263 (a) is a flow in which it is easy to secure a large number of special figure 2 reserved balls at the end of the time saving state.

  On the other hand, in the case where the standby effect is being executed during the change of the special time map 2 of the eighth time reduction, the player accidentally acquires a new special figure 2 holding ball, When the special figure 2 reserve ball number cannot be obtained up to the upper limit during the storage effect performed during the change in FIG. 2 or when the ultra-short change pattern is selected as the special figure 2 change for the seventh time saving time Is a special effect that the special figure 2 reserved ball is accumulated until the number of the special figure 2 reserved balls shown in FIG. The second storage effect) is executed. In the case where the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is set to 3 during the second storage effect (when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls at the time of the 8th stoppage of the special figure fluctuation stop is 3), the above-mentioned figure is used. The effect of the period before the end of the working hours is executed in the same flow as in the step 263 (a).

  Also, if the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is increased to 4 during this second storage effect (when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls at the time of the 8th time saving stop of special figure fluctuation is 4), As shown in FIG. 263 (b), an ultra-short change of 0.1 second is executed for the ninth time shift and the tenth time shift, that is, for all the special figure 2 fluctuations executed during the period before the end of the time reduction. In other words, the special flow of the special figure 2 reserved ball at the end of the time saving state is low (the expected value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number at the time of the end of the time reduction is about 2).

  Further, when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls becomes two during the second storage effect (when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls at the time of stopping the special figure change for the eighth time is 2), the number of time saved is 9 The long fluctuation is executed as the second special figure 2 fluctuation. Then, when the special figure 2 reserved ball number is acquired up to the upper limit during the ninth time-saving long fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 263 (c), the special figure 2 fluctuation of the tenth time-saving exceeds 0.1 second. Since the short fluctuation is executed, the expectation of the special figure 2 reserved ball count at the end of the time reduction state becomes medium (the expected value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number at the end of the time reduction becomes about 3). It becomes a flow.

  Here, if only one special figure 2 holding ball is acquired during the ninth time-saving time change, the long fluctuation is executed also in the following tenth time-saving time special figure 2 change, so that FIG. ), It is easy to secure a large number of special figure 2 reserved balls at the end of the time saving state (FIG. 263 (d)).

  Also, in the time-saving state, a game in which the special figure 2 reserve ball count is not intentionally accumulated, specifically, a game in which a small number (one) of game balls are fired at the timing when the electric accessory 6400a is opened. 263), the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed with an ultra-short change of 0.1 second also in the time saving end preparation period and the period before the time saving end as shown in FIG. 263 (e). The special flow of the special figure 2 reserved ball at the end of the time saving state is the lowest (the number of reserved special figure 2 reserved balls at the end of the time reduction is about 0).

  As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, an unfavorable period (a period during which it is difficult to acquire the special figure 2 reserved balls) is set in the first half of the time saving state, and an advantageous period (the number of special figure 2 reserved balls) is set in the second half. (A period during which the user can easily obtain the). Therefore, when the big hit game is executed based on the small hits won in the second half period, the gaming situation more advantageous to the player is performed than when the big hit game is executed based on the small hits won in the first half period. Setting can be facilitated.

  In addition, even during the advantageous period, when the right-handed game is interrupted for a predetermined period (when the right-handed game is executed at a predetermined firing interval), it is better than when the right-handed game is continuously executed. It is configured to be advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel game in which a right-handed game is interrupted to a player who is playing in the time-saving state.

  Further, by obtaining a specific number of special figure 2 reserved balls corresponding to the number of remaining working hours (time saving times), a pulling-back game that is advantageous to the player as a pull-back game executed at the end of the working hours (at the end of the jackpot game) Can be executed, the player can be interested in the timing of acquiring the special figure 2 holding ball, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, even if the special figure 2 corresponding to the number of remaining time reductions (number of time savings) cannot be acquired, the special number of the special number corresponding to the number of remaining time reductions (number of time reductions) can be obtained again. Since it is configured to be able to provide an opportunity to acquire the number of 2 reserved balls, the player can continue to have an ambitious game until the time saving state ends.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Control Device in Eleventh Embodiment>
Next, the contents of the control processing of main controller 110 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. In the main control device 110 of the eleventh embodiment, the same control processing as that of the above-described seventh embodiment is executed, and the configuration of a data table (see FIGS. 259 to 261) referred to in various processes is changed. The operation content (opening operation pattern of the open / close door 6500f1) of the small hit game executed at the time of the small hit winning is different, and the other is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

  Here, an operation content (opening operation pattern of the opening and closing door 6500f1) at the time of the small hitting game in the present embodiment will be described. The opening pattern of the opening and closing door 6500f1 in the eleventh embodiment is configured such that the closing period during the small hit game is shorter than the opening pattern of the opening and closing door 6500f1 in the above-described seventh embodiment (see FIG. 180). This is so configured that it is difficult for the game balls to flow down downstream of the V winning device 6500 during the small hit game. Specifically, the small hitting game is executed in an opening pattern in which the opening operation in which the closing time of 0.1 second and the opening time of 0.6 second are set as one set from the start of the small hitting game is repeated three times. You.

  The 0.1 second set as the closing period is a period shorter than the period required for the game ball to pass through the ball flow path formed on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 6500f1 in the closed state. Even when the game ball reaches the opening / closing door 6500f1 during the closing period, the opening / closing door 6500f1 is opened before passing over the upper surface of the opening / closing door 6500f1, so that the V prize device 6500 can be won.

  A plurality of small hitting game opening patterns may be facilitated, and the small hitting type set for the winning small hit and the opening pattern executed in the game state at the time of the winning may be made different. Further, in the present embodiment, when a game ball wins to the V winning device 6500 during the small hit game, the winning game ball passes through the V winning switch 6500e3, and the big hit starts after the small hit game ends. In other words, the configuration is such that a large hit is started if at least one game ball is won to the V winning device 6500 during the small hit game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of routes are provided in the V winning device 6500, and a distribution member for distributing a game ball flowing down in the V winning device 6500 to one of the plurality of routes described above is provided. May pass through the V winning switch 6500e3 only when flowing down a specific route.

  Also, in this case, an opening pattern is set in which the opening and closing door 6500f1 is opened a plurality of times as a small hitting game, and a game ball can pass through the V winning switch 6500e3 only at a specific opening of the plurality of openings. You may. With this configuration, when the small hitting game is executed, the game winning ball is won by the V winning device 6500 and the game that acquires only the winning ball, and the game winning ball is won by the V winning device 6500, The game of winning the ball and the jackpot can be executed only by switching the timing at which the player wins the game ball to the V prize device 6500.

  Further, in the eleventh embodiment, during the small hitting game, the flow of the game ball to the downstream side of the V winning device 6500 is suppressed so that the number of reserved special figure 2 balls cannot increase during the small hitting game. Although the small hitting game is configured to be executed in the open pattern to be executed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a specific small hitting game is executed, the opening / closing door 6500f1 is closed during the small hitting game. The closed period may be configured to be longer than other small hit games. Thus, when a specific small hit game is executed, it is possible to easily increase the number of special figure 2 reserved balls during the small hit game. Therefore, even if the small hitting game is executed with the special figure 2 reserved ball number being 0, a chance to increase the special figure 2 reserved ball number can be left. It is possible to play a game while holding it.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 264 to 273, the contents of the control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. In the eleventh embodiment, a command determination process 11 (see S2195 in FIG. 264) is executed in place of the command determination process (see S2113 in FIG. 56) as compared with the seventh embodiment (first embodiment) described above. The winning information related processing 11 (see S2295 in FIG. 265) is replaced with the winning information related processing 11 (see S2295 in FIG. 265), and the winning related processing 11 (see S2296 in FIG. 264) is replaced with the winning related processing (see S2212 in FIG. 57). ) Is performed in place of the effect setting process (see S2804 in FIG. 63), and the effect setting process 11 (see S2891 in FIG. 271) is executed, and a stop command process 11 (see S2291 in FIG. 270) is added. Otherwise, it is the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the contents of the command determination processing 11 (S2195) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination processing 11 (S2195). The command determination process 11 (S2195) is a process executed instead of the command determination process of the first embodiment (see S2113 of FIG. 56), and is the command determination process of the first embodiment described above. When it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S2113 in FIG. 56) (S2209: Yes), the winning information related process 11 is executed (S2295), and it is determined that the winning related command has been received. In this case (S2211: Yes), the hit-related process 11 is executed (S2296), and when it is determined that the stop command is received (S2213: Yes), the stop command process is executed (S2297). In contrast to the above-described first embodiment, in the eleventh embodiment, since the lottery right of the second special symbol is configured to be held and memorized, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received ( S2207), included in the reserved ball number command received by the reserved ball number counter (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2) corresponding to the special symbol type indicated by the received reserved ball number command. The difference is that a process for storing information is performed. The other parts are the same, and a detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, the winning information-related processing 11 (S2295 in FIG. 265) executed in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The winning information-related processing 11 (S2295 in FIG. 265) is a processing executed in place of the winning information-related processing (see S2210 in FIG. 57) in the first embodiment, and the winning of the second special symbol during the time saving state. When the information command is received, the control for changing the effect mode of the various effects (see FIGS. 254 to 258) being executed is executed.

  When the winning information-related processing 11 (S2295) is executed, first, the same processing of S2301 and S2302 as the winning information-related processing in the first embodiment (see S2210 in FIG. 57) is executed. Then, if it is determined in the processing of S2302 that it is not during the time reduction state (medium time reduction) (S2302: No), the processing of S2312, which is the same as the winning information related processing (see FIG. 57, S2210) in the first embodiment, and , S2311, and terminates the present process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2302 that the vehicle is in the time saving state (medium time saving) (S2302: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the winning information command received this time includes the winning information of the second special symbol. (S2395), when it is determined that the winning information of the second special symbol is included (S2395: Yes), the special figure 2 winning process is executed (S2396), the process of S2311 is executed, and the present process is executed. finish. In the process of S2395, when it is determined that the winning information of the second special symbol is not included (only the winning information of the first special symbol is included) (S2395: No), the process of S2396 is skipped. , S2311, and terminates the present process.

  Next, the special figure 2 winning process (S2396 in FIG. 266) executed in the winning information related process 11 (S2295 in FIG. 265) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 winning process (S2396 in FIG. 266). The special figure 2 winning process (S2396 in FIG. 266) is a process executed when the winning information of the second special symbol is received during the time saving state, and various effects being executed (see FIGS. 254 to 258). ) Is performed to change the effect mode based on the newly acquired special figure 2 reserved ball.

  When the special figure 2 winning process (S2396 in FIG. 266) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the acquired effect setting completed flag 223ha is set to ON (S8001). (S8001: Yes), whether the special figure 2 number of reserved balls (the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol) has become 4 (upper limit number) by receiving the reserved number of balls command corresponding to the winning information command received this time. Is determined (S8002). In the processing of S8002, if it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is 4 (upper limit number) (S8002: Yes), a display mode indicating the reserved MAX is set (S8003), and a display mode indicating the game standby is set. The setting is performed (S8004), the MAX acquisition flag 223hd is set to ON, the acquisition effect setting completed flag 223ha is set to OFF (S8006), and the process proceeds to S8022 to be described later, followed by terminating the present process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S8002 that the number of reserved special figure 2 balls is not 4 (the upper limit number) (S8002: No), a display mode indicating an increase in the number of reserved balls is set (S8007), and the process proceeds to S8022. Transition.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S8001 that the acquired effect set flag 223ha is not set to ON (S8001: No), it is then determined whether the second acquired effect set flag 223hb is set to ON. If it is determined that the ball is set to ON (S8008) (S8008: Yes), the special figure 2 number of reserved balls (second number) is received by receiving the reserved ball number command corresponding to the winning information command received this time. It is determined whether or not the number of stored special symbols is 4 (the upper limit number) (S8009).

  If it is determined that the special figure 2 number of reserved balls (the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol) is 4 (the upper limit number) (S8009: Yes), a display mode indicating an excessive increase in the number of reserved balls is set (S8010). The danger flag 223he is set to ON (S8011), the second acquisition effect setting completed flag 223hb is set to OFF, and the process shifts to S8022. If it is determined in the processing of S8009 that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (the number of reserved storages of the second special symbol) is not 4 (the upper limit number), then the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (the number of reserved second special symbols) It is determined whether the (storage number) is 3 (specific number) (S8013), and if it is determined to be 3 (specific number) (S8013: Yes), a display mode indicating the appropriate number of reservations is set (S8014). Then, the display mode indicating the game standby is set (S8015), and the flow shifts to the processing of S8022.

  If it is determined in the processing of S8013 that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (the number of reserved special patterns 2) is not 3 (specific number), a display mode indicating an increase in the number of reserved figures is set (S8016). , To S8022. In the process of S8008, if it is determined that the second acquisition effect set flag 223hb is not set to ON (S8008: No), it is determined whether the game waiting flag 223hf is set to ON (S8017). If it is determined that it is set to ON (S8017: Yes), a display mode indicating an excessive increase in the number of holds is set (S8018), the danger flag 223he is set to ON (S8019), and the game waiting flag 223hf is set. It is set to off (S8020), and the process moves to S8022.

  In the process of S8017, if it is determined that the game waiting flag 223hf is not set to ON (S8017: No), then a pre-end period setting process is executed (S8021), and thereafter, the received winning information command is received. Is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S8022), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 267, the contents of the pre-end period processing (see S8021 in FIG. 267) executed in the special figure 2 winning process (see S2396 in FIG. 266) will be described. FIG. 267 is a flowchart showing the contents of the processing during the pre-end period (see S8021 in FIG. 267). When the processing during the pre-end period (see S8021 in FIG. 267) is executed, first, it is determined whether the third acquisition effect setting completed flag 223hc is set to ON (S8101), and if it is set to ON. When it is determined (S7101: Yes), the display mode indicating the number of pending corrections is set (S8102), the display mode indicating the game standby is set (S8103), and the third acquisition effect setting completed flag 223hc is set to off. Then, the present process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S8101, if it is determined that the third acquisition effect setting completed flag 223hc is not set to ON (S8101: No), the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 268, the content of the jackpot end processing 11 (S2498) will be described. FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing the content of the big hit end time process 11 (S2498). The big hit end time process 11 (S2498) is a control process executed in the hit related process 11 (S2296 in FIG. 264) of the command determination process 11 (see S2195 in FIG. 264), and is an effect at the end timing of the big hit game. Processing for setting the mode is executed.

  When the big hit end processing 11 (S2498) is executed, first. The information stored in the gaming state storage area (223f) is read (S2501), and it is determined whether or not the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game is a time saving state based on the read information (S2502). If it is determined that the time saving state is not set (S2502: No), the process ends.

  In the process of S2502, when it is determined that the time saving state is set (S2502: Yes), then, based on the counter value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2, the special figure 2 is reserved (the reserved storage of the second special symbol). ), That is, it is determined whether the special figure 2 reserved ball is secured (S2591). If it is determined that the special figure 2 reserved ball is secured (S2591; Yes) ), A display command is set to indicate that the time saving state is set after the end of the big hit game (S2592), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2591 that the special figure 2 reserved ball is not secured (S2591: Yes), the special figure 1 information (first special) of the next change stored in the winning information storage area 223a. The winning information stored in the symbol holding area 1 is read (S2593), and it is determined whether or not the read special figure 1 information includes winning information (information indicating that a big hit is won) (S2594). If it is determined that the hit information is not included (S2954: No), a display command for extending the display period of the big hit end screen by 0.1 second is set (S2595), and this processing ends. Further, in the processing of S2594, when it is determined that there is winning information, that is, when it is determined that the big hit is won due to the first special symbol change executed immediately after (S2594: Yes), the image for displaying the big hit villa image is displayed. The display command is set (S2596), and the process ends.

  Next, the content of the small hit start command processing 11 (S2491) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 269 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit start command processing 11 (S2491). The small hit start command process 11 (S2491) is a control process executed in the hit related process 11 (S2296 in FIG. 264) of the command determination process 11 (see S2195 in FIG. 264), and the start timing of the small hit game Is performed to set the effect mode.

  First, when the small hit start command processing 11 (S2491) is executed, first. Information stored in the gaming state storage area (223f) is read (S3901), and it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a time saving state based on the read information (S3902). Then, when it is determined that it is not the time saving state (S3902: No), the start of the small hit effect is set (S3977), and the present process ends.

  In the processing of S3902, if it is determined that the time saving state is set (S3902: Yes), it is determined whether the danger flag 223he is set to ON (S3991). (S3991: Yes), the display mode for causing the game ball to win V during the current small hit game (to aim for the small hit V) is set (S3994), the process of S3997 is executed, and the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3991 that the danger flag 223he is not set to ON (S3991: No), then the number of reserved balls stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 (special) is determined. The number of reserved balls in FIG. 2 is read out (S3992), and it is determined whether the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is 4 (upper limit number) (S3993). When it is determined in the processing of S3993 that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is 4 (upper limit number), that is, when a big hit game is generated in the present small hit game, four times after the end of the big hit game ( If it is determined that the second special symbol lottery of the upper limit number can be executed (S3993: Yes), a display mode for aiming at the small hit V is set (S3994), and the processing of S3997 is executed. Then, the present process ends.

  In the process of S3993, when it is determined that the number of reserved special figure 2 balls is not 4 (S3993: No), it is determined whether the number of reserved special figure 2 balls is 0 (S3995), and the value is 0. If it is determined (S3995: Yes), a display mode (see FIG. 258) for allowing the player to select a small hit game is set (S3996), the process of S3997 is executed, and this process ends. . If it is determined in the processing of S3995 that the number of reserved special figure 2 balls is not 0, that is, if the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is 1 to 3 (S3995: No), the processing of S3997 is executed, and this processing is performed. To end.

  Next, the contents of the stop command processing 11 (S2291) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 270 is a flowchart showing the contents of stop command processing 11 (S2291). The stop command processing 11 (S2291) is executed when a stop command for indicating that the special symbol change has been stopped and displayed is received from the main control device 110, and is based on the stop timing of the special symbol change. A process is performed for setting various effect modes to be set.

  When the stop command processing 11 (S2291) is executed, first, information stored in the gaming state storage area (223f) is read (S8201), and based on the read information, whether the current gaming state is the time saving state. Is determined (S8202). If it is determined that the vehicle is not in the time saving state (S8202: No), the stop display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the received stop command is set (S8211), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8202 that the vehicle is in the time saving state (S8202: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the current fluctuation stop is the final fluctuation in the time saving state (S8203). In the determination in S8203, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation stop is the final fluctuation in the time reduction state based on the update information (the number of times of reduction in time and the number of remaining reductions in time) stored in the time reduction information update area 223g.

  Here, if it is determined that it is the time-saving final change (S8203: Yes), it is the timing to end the time-saving state, and therefore, various flags (acquisition effect setting) set to execute various effects during the time-saving state 223ha, the second acquisition effect set flag 223hb, the third acquisition effect set flag 223hc, the MAX acquisition flag 223hd, the danger flag 223he, and the game waiting flag 223hf) are all turned off (S8204), and the process of S8205 is performed. Move to. On the other hand, in the process of S8203, when it is determined that it is not the time saving final variation (S8203), it is next determined whether the current variation is a large hit or a small hit variation (S8206). Alternatively, if it is determined that the change is not a small hit change (out-of-range change) (S8206: No), the process of S8211 is executed, and this process ends. In the process of S8206, if it is determined that the current variation is a large hit or a small hit variation (S8206: Yes), the process proceeds to S8205.

  In the processing of S8205, the number of reserved balls (number of reserved special figure 2 balls) stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 is read (S8205), and the number of reserved special figure 2 reserved balls is 4 (upper limit number). Is determined (S8207). If it is determined in the process of S8207 that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is 4 (upper limit number), that is, it is in a state in which four (upper limit) second special symbol lottery can be executed after the time saving state ends. If it is determined (S8207: Yes), a display mode for indicating that an advantageous game advantageous to the player is to be executed is set as a game after the time saving state (pull-back game) (S8208), and the process of S8211 is performed. Is executed, and this processing ends.

  In the process of S8207, if it is determined that the number of reserved special figure 2 balls is not 4 (S8207: No), then it is determined whether the number of reserved special figure 2 balls is 0 (S8209), and it is 0. Is determined (S8209: Yes), a display mode for indicating that a disadvantageous game disadvantageous to the player is executed (pull-back game is not executed) is set as the game after the end of the time-saving state (pull-back game). Then (S8210), the process of S8211 is executed, and this process ends. If it is determined in the processing of S8209 that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is not 0, that is, if the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is 1 to 3 (S8209: No), the processing of S8211 is executed, and this processing is performed. To end.

  Next, the contents of the effect setting processing 11 (S2891) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 271 is a flowchart showing the contents of effect setting processing 11 (S2891). This effect setting process 11 (S2891) is executed in place of the effect setting process of the first embodiment (see S2804 in FIG. 63). A process for setting a different presentation mode according to the execution is executed.

  When the effect setting process 11 (S2891) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the time reduction state (S2981). If it is determined that the current game state is not the time reduction state (S2981: No), the variable display mode is set. As a result, a variable display mode for the normal state corresponding to the lottery result is selected (S2982), and this processing ends. In the process of S2981, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the time saving state (S2981: Yes), it is determined whether the special symbol variation executed this time is the second special symbol variation (Special Figure 2 variation). (S2983), when it is determined that the change is not the special figure 2 change (the first special symbol change) (S2983: No), the change display mode for the special figure 1 time saving state corresponding to the lottery result is set as the change display mode. Is selected (S2984), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2983 that the figure is a special figure 2 change (S2983: yes), then the special symbol change of this time is the first to sixth time savings (the special figure 2 executed in the first half period of the time saving state). Is determined (S2985), and when it is determined that the time is the first to sixth time savings (S2985: Yes), the variable display mode for the special figure 2 time reduction state corresponding to the lottery result is set as the variable display mode. Is selected (S2986), and this process ends.

  In the processing of S2983, when it is determined that the change of the special figure 2 is not the first to sixth time reduction (S2983: No), the change of the special figure 2 this time is the seventh or eighth time reduction (the latter half of the time reduction state). In the period, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation executed during the time reduction end preparation period (S2987), and the current special figure 2 fluctuation is the seventh or eighth time reduction (in the latter half of the time reduction state, If it is determined that this is the special figure 2 fluctuation executed during the time reduction end preparation period (S2987: Yes), the first effect setting processing is executed (S2988), the processing of S2986 is executed, and this processing ends. .

  In the process of S2987, when it is determined that the current special figure 2 change is not the seventh or eighth time saving time change (special figure 2 change executed in the time saving end preparation period in the latter half period of the time saving state), If it is determined that the special figure 2 change this time is the ninth or tenth time saving (the special figure 2 change executed in the latter half period of the time saving state before the end of the time saving period) (S2987: No), (2) The effect setting process is executed (S2989), the process of S2986 is executed, and this process ends.

  Next, the contents of the first effect setting process (S2988) executed in the effect setting process 11 (see S2891 in FIG. 271) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first effect setting process (S2988). The first effect setting process (S2988) is a process for setting an effect mode for the variation of the special figure 2 executed in the seventh or eighth time saving (time saving end preparation period in the latter half period of the time saving state). To do.

  When the first effect setting process (S2988) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current special figure 2 change is a special figure change at the seventh rotation of the time saving (S9101). If it is determined that there is a variation (S9101: Yes), it is determined whether the selected variation pattern is a middle variation (S9102). If it is determined that the pattern is not a middle fluctuation (a very short fluctuation pattern) (S9102: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9102 that the variation is middle (S9102: Yes), it is then determined whether the number of reserved special figure 2 balls is 4 (upper limit) (S9103), 4 (upper limit) If not determined (S9103: No), an effect mode that prompts acquisition of Toku-zu 2 reservation is set (S9104), the acquired effect set flag 223ha is set to on (S9105), and the process ends. . Also, in the process of S9103, when it is determined that the number of reserved special figure 2 balls is not 4 (the upper limit number) (S9103: No), the process of S9104 is skipped and the process proceeds to S9105.

  If it is determined in the process of S9101 that the current special figure 2 fluctuation is not the special figure fluctuation at the seventh time saving rotation (S9101: No), then, the current special figure 2 fluctuation is the special figure fluctuation at the eighth time saving rotation. Is determined (S9106), and if it is determined that the current variation of the special figure 2 is the variation of the special figure of the eighth rotation in time saving (S9106: Yes), it is determined whether the selected variation pattern is a middle variation. It is determined (S9107). If it is determined that the pattern is not a middle variation (a very short variation pattern) (S9107: No), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of 9107 that the selected variation pattern is middle variation (S9107: Yes), it is determined whether the MAX acquisition flag 223hd is set to ON (S9108), and MAX If the group is determined that the acquisition flag 223hd is not set to ON (S9108: No), an effect mode for urging the special figure 2 to hold three balls is set (S9112), and the second acquisition effect setting is performed. The completion flag 223hb is set to ON (S9113), and this process ends.

  In the process of S9108, when the group is determined to have the MAX acquisition flag 223hd set to ON (S9108: Yes), an effect mode for indicating a game standby is set (S9109), and the MAX acquisition flag 223hd is turned off. The game standby flag 223hf is set to ON (S9111), and the process ends.

  Next, the contents of the second effect setting process (S2989) executed in the effect setting process 11 (see S2891 in FIG. 271) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second effect setting process (S21989). This second effect setting process (S2989) is a process for setting an effect mode for the special figure 2 fluctuation executed in the ninth or tenth time reduction (time period before the end of time reduction in the latter half period of the time reduction state). To do.

  When the second effect setting processing (S2989) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current special figure 2 change is a special figure change at the ninth rotation of the time saving time (S9201), and the special figure change at the ninth rotation of the time saving is determined. If it is determined that there is a variation (S9201: Yes), it is determined whether the selected variation pattern is a long variation (S9202). When it is determined that the pattern is not a long fluctuation (i.e., a very short fluctuation pattern) (S9202: No), the present process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9202 that the change is a long variation (S9202: Yes), then an effect mode for urging the user to increase only one special figure 2 suspension is set (S9203), and the second acquisition effect setting The completion flag 223hc is set to ON (S9204), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9201 that the current special figure 2 fluctuation is not the special figure fluctuation at the ninth rotation (S9201: No), then, the current special figure 2 fluctuation is the special figure fluctuation at the tenth rotation. It is determined whether it is a figure variation (last variation) (S9205), and if it is determined that the current special figure 2 variation is a special figure variation (last variation) at the tenth rotation of the time saving (S9205: Yes), it is selected. It is determined whether the changed pattern is a long change (S9206). If it is determined that the pattern is not a long variation (it is an ultra-short variation pattern) (S9206: No), the present process ends.

  In the process of S9206, when it is determined that the change is a long change (S9206: Yes), an effect mode for prompting acquisition of the special figure 2 reservation is set (S9207), and the acquired effect set flag 223ha is set to ON (S9208). ), End this processing.

  As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, at least a specific condition (acquisition of suspension of the special figure 2) is hardly satisfied as a period in which a gaming state (time saving state) advantageous to the player is set. The period is configured so as to be set earlier than the advantageous period in which the specific condition is easy to be satisfied, and the advantageous period is shorter than the case where the jackpot game is executed before the advantageous period in the time saving state is set. The configuration is such that the case where the jackpot game is executed after being set is more advantageous to the player.

  In addition, during the small hitting game which is executed when the small hitting is won by the lottery of the second special symbol which is mainly (prioritized) executed during the time reduction state, the big hitting game is executed by causing the game ball to win V during the small hitting game. It is configured to be able to do. In other words, it is configured so that the player can select at what timing during the time saving state the big hit game is executed and whether or not to make the game ball V-win during the small hit game.

  With this configuration, when the small hit game is executed during the disadvantageous period in the time reduction state, the small hit game is executed during the disadvantage period in order to make the player surely execute the big hit game in the time reduction state. Even if the small hit game is performed, the player selects whether to perform a game for causing the gaming ball to win the V or to perform a game without causing the gaming ball to win the V in order to execute the big hit after the advantageous period is set. It is possible to provide a new playability.

  In the present embodiment, when the time reduction state is set, the predetermined disadvantageous period and the advantageous period are configured to be always set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. According to the type of the jackpot type set for the jackpot game to be the trigger and the gaming state at the time of winning, it is possible to set a time reduction state where only the disadvantageous period is set or a time reduction state where only the advantage period is set Is also good.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the time saving state is formed by one disadvantageous period (first to sixth special figure fluctuation period of time reduction) and one advantageous period (7 to 10th special figure fluctuation period). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the disadvantageous period and the advantageous period may be set alternately. Further, when the time reduction state is set without being triggered by the jackpot winning, for example, as the game state, the probability state of the ordinary symbol and the probability state of the special symbol are both configured to be variable, and four types of games are provided. The state is a normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), a time reduction state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), and a probable state (high probability state of special symbol, The pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to set a normal symbol high-probability state) and a latent state (a special symbol high-probability state, a normal symbol low-probability state), and when a probable change state is set. The case where the time reduction state is set based on the falling condition that shifts (falls) the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state is established, and the case where the time reduction state is set upon winning of the jackpot And the disadvantage period The settings of the interest period may be configured to be variable.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a first state in which the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is easily obtained within the advantageous period of the time saving state, and a second state in which it is more difficult to obtain the number of special figure 2 reserved balls than the first state. , And a first state in which the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is easily obtained based on the number of special figure 2 reserved balls at the time when the special figure 2 change is performed during the advantageous period, and the first state thereof. The second state in which it is more difficult to obtain the number of reserved balls than the special figure 2 is variably set.

  Thereby, it is easy to obtain the number of special figure 2 reserved balls during the time reduction state based on the game result of how many special figure 2 reserved balls are acquired at which timing during the time reduction state (during the advantageous period). Since it is possible to change the value (the number of special figure 2 reserved balls at the end of the time reduction), a novel game including a new element of the special figure 2 reserved ball acquisition timing can be provided to the player.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the first state and the second state are configured to be set by a predetermined specific setting method. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the setting method (setting condition) of the first state and the second state is made different depending on the type of the jackpot type set for the jackpot game which triggers the setting of the time saving state and the gaming state at the time of winning. good. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at what timing a game based on which game method should be executed, so that the player can get tired of the game early. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first state, the first state, and the second state are determined based on the lottery result of one special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) and the selected special symbol fluctuation (special figure 2 fluctuation). The configuration is such that two states are set, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a special symbol executed (set) within a predetermined period (for example, within a period until five special symbol changes are executed). The first state and the second state may be set by judging the lottery result of the lottery and the variation pattern of the selected special symbol in a complex manner. Further, an operation means operable by the player may be provided, and the first state and the second state may be set based on the operation content of the player on the operation means.

  Furthermore, in the eleventh embodiment, a guide effect that is useful when a player in the time reduction state selects a game method is configured to be executable, and a time reduction game that is excessively disadvantageous to the player is executed. Can be suppressed. In the present embodiment, when it is time to cause the player to select a game method, the guide effect is performed using the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, but the present invention is not limited to this. A guidance effect may be executed to guide only the period during which the player selects a game method, or a plurality of options are displayed as a selectable selection by the player. May be configured to inform the player in a difficult manner whether the game method is advantageous to the player. In addition, the game may be configured to execute a suggestion effect to suggest whether or not the game method selected this time is a correct game method when the game is performed by the game method selected by the player. good.

  In the eleventh embodiment, at the timing of starting the change of the special symbol or at the timing of receiving the winning command of the second special symbol, the effect of the various guidance effects described above with reference to FIGS. 254 to 258 is varied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an effect mode of the guidance effect may be configured at the stop timing of the previous change. In other words, when a game is executed by a game method according to the effect mode of the guide effect after visually recognizing the guide effect displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the timing at which the game can be executed by the appropriate game method If so, the presentation mode of the guidance presentation may be changed at any timing.

  Further, a plurality of appropriate game methods set for various game patterns (a pattern obtained by combining the number of time savings and the number of reserved special figure 2 balls) that can occur during the time saving state are configured to be able to be displayed. After the player has determined the pattern, an appropriate game method may be selected and executed. In this case, a first notification mode (for example, a mode in which the number of time savings and the number of special figure 2 reserved balls are displayed by numerical values) capable of informing the player of the currently executed game pattern in an easy-to-understand manner, and the first notification A second notification mode that is harder for the player to understand than the mode (for example, a mode in which only one of the number of time savings and the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is displayed as a number, And a display mode (displaying a corresponding mark) can be displayed. Based on a display condition that is satisfied (for example, a condition that is satisfied according to the operation result of the player on the frame button 22 or a lottery result of a special symbol). It is preferable that the notification mode to be displayed is determined based on the condition that is satisfied). With this configuration, it is possible to provide a new pleasure of allowing the player to predict the current game pattern.

  In the above-described eleventh embodiment, when the time saving state is set and the special figure 2 reserved ball is acquired up to the upper limit during a period (advantageous period) in which the special figure 2 reserved ball can be easily acquired, a game is played. The first period, which tends to be advantageous to the player, and the second period, which tends to be advantageous to the player when the special figure 2 reserved ball number is acquired up to a specific number (for example, three), and only one special figure 2 reserved ball The third period, which is likely to be advantageous to the player when acquired, can be set. As a result, even during the period in which the advantageous period is set, the game for increasing the number of special figure 2 reserved balls to an arbitrary number is performed instead of increasing the number of special figure 2 reserved balls unnecessarily. Can be performed by the player, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the eleventh embodiment, since one data table is referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol during the time saving state, the first period, the second period, and the third period described above are used. The setting rule is fixed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of data tables which are referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the time saving state are provided, A configuration in which a plurality of setting rules for the two periods and the third period may be provided.

  In the present embodiment, the first period, the second period, and the third period are set for each execution period of the second special symbol change to be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first period, the second period, and the third period described above may be set over a plurality of special symbol changes, or may be configured based on the time elapsed since the time reduction state was set. The first, second, and third periods described above may be set.

  In the above-described eleventh embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the number of remaining time reductions is notified on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. The configuration may be such that the number of remaining working hours is displayed in an abstract manner. With this configuration, even if an ultra-short change pattern is set as the change pattern of the special figure 2 change during the time saving state, the display of the remaining short time count does not rapidly decrease, so that the player feels strange. It is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation of giving.

  In the above-described eleventh embodiment, when the special symbol change (special figure 2 change) is executed, the effect form of the guide effect is set based on the selected change pattern. Without being limited to this, for example, based on information (pre-reading information) included in the winning information command output from the main control device 110, a selected fluctuation pattern and a lottery result are determined in advance, and the preliminary determination result It may be configured to set an effect mode based on this. Thereby, for example, when the special symbol lottery in which the ultra-short variation pattern is selected has been won, in addition to the ultra-short variation (0.1 second) period, the special symbol variation (special figure 2 variation) Since the effect mode for indicating the winning to the player can be set using the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation (special figure 2 fluctuation) executed before, it is possible to execute the effect that is easy for the player to understand. it can.

  In the eleventh embodiment, as a pullback game (second special symbol lottery in the normal state) executed after the time reduction state ends, during the time reduction state for causing the player to execute an advantageous pullback game that is advantageous to the player. Various guidance effects for guiding the game method to the player are configured to be always executed during the time reduction state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a specific execution condition is satisfied during the time reduction state , The various guidance effects described above may be executed. In this case, for example, when the special figure change during the time saving preparation period corresponding to the seventh or eighth time reduction is executed, it is determined whether it is better to newly acquire the number of special figure 2 reserved balls. The player performs an initial effect that is difficult to determine, and is configured to vary the initial effect during execution to the above-described guide effect according to a game method that is executed while the initial effect is being executed. More specifically, if the length of the period from when the initial effect is performed to when the special figure 2 number of reserved balls is newly acquired is longer than a predetermined period, the guidance effect is performed. It is good to configure.

  With this configuration, it is possible to vary the ease of performing the guidance effect according to the game method during the time saving state (interval of firing game balls by right-handed game), so that the player The pleasure of selecting a game method during the time saving state can be further increased.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the game method during the time reduction state (the presence or absence of the right-handed game) is set for each special symbol change (special figure 2 change) executed during the time reduction state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be set for a plurality of special symbol fluctuations (special figure 2 fluctuations). The game method may be set so that a right-handed game is promoted during the period and a right-handed game is prohibited during the latter half of the period.

<About effect modification in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, a modification of the effect performed during the time saving state of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment will be described based on the flow shown in FIG. 263 described above. In the above-described eleventh embodiment, as an effect performed during the time saving state, a storage effect for newly acquiring a specific number of special figure 2 reserved balls based on the number of time saving changes and the number of special figure 2 reserved balls. (For example, see FIG. 254 (a)). If a special number of special figure 2 reserved balls are newly acquired during the storage effect, the special figure 2 reserved balls are kept for a predetermined period. (See, for example, FIG. 254 (b)).

  More specifically, in the above-mentioned accumulation effect, when the special symbol change (special figure 2 change) is executed, the change time of the special figure 2 change executed this time is a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) or more. Is configured to be executed when it is more advantageous for the player to increase the number of special figure 2 reserved balls than the number of currently acquired special figure 2 reserved balls. When a new special figure 2 reserved ball is acquired in the state where the filter effect is being executed, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 reserved ball number after acquisition is the special figure 2 reserved ball number which is advantageous to the player. Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved special figure 2 balls is advantageous to the player, a stand-by effect is performed so that a new special figure 2 reserved ball is not acquired until the final change in the time saving state is executed. Was configured as follows. Further, if a new special figure 2 reserved ball is acquired while the standby effect is being executed, it is determined that the special figure 2 reserved ball has been excessively acquired, and this time saving state is disadvantageous to the player. It was configured to execute a DANGER effect indicating that

  The standby effect or the DANGER effect described above is configured to be continuously executed until the end timing of the time-saving state, and the normal state based on the special figure 2 number of reserved balls obtained at the end of the time-saving state. It was configured to execute a pullback effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery executed during the game.

  On the other hand, in this effect modification, the winning information included in the special figure 2 reserved ball acquired in a state where the special figure 2 reserved ball is acquired is pre-read (preliminarily determined), and an effect based on the result of the preliminary determination is performed. Is configured to be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the lottery result (preliminary determination result) of the special figure 2 lottery executed during the standby effect.

  Next, the effect contents of the present effect modification will be described. First, the contents of the effect executed in accordance with the flow of FIG. 263 (a) will be described. As shown in FIG. 263 (a), when the middle fluctuation (10-second fluctuation) is set (selected) as the special figure 2 fluctuation at the seventh time reduction (four remaining time reductions), the above-described eleventh embodiment is used. A guide effect (storage effect) for storing the same special figure 2 reserved ball number up to the upper limit (four) is executed.

  Then, the guidance effect (storage effect) is executed until the seventh special figure 2 change in time saving is stopped and displayed, or until the number of reserved special figure 2 balls reaches the upper limit. Here, when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls reaches the upper limit, a standby effect for a predetermined period is executed. In the present modification, an effect in which the player actively releases his / her hand from the operation handle 51 is executed as a standby effect. More specifically, an effect (touch effect) of simultaneously touching a plurality of decorative members provided on the pachinko machine 10, specifically, a plurality of decorative members provided at positions separated by a distance larger than the size of a human palm. As a touch effect, a touch effect is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, in which characters of “Continue to touch the decorative member” and an icon imitating the decorative member to be touched by the player are displayed.

  The decorative member described above is provided with a detecting means (touch sensor) capable of detecting that the player is touching, and according to a detection result of the detecting means during a period in which the touch effect is being performed. An operation effect for changing the effect mode is configured to be executed. Specifically, an initial display mode is first displayed as the operation mode of the operation effect, and thereafter, the length of the period during which the detection unit detects the operation of the player, and the acquired special figure 2 reserved ball The effect form of the operation effect is configured to be variable based on the pre-read result.

  In this case, when it is determined that there is a specific look-ahead result (big hit) as the look-ahead result, and when it is determined that the player has touched a plurality of decorative members for a predetermined period or more, a feature corresponding to the look-ahead result is obtained. FIG. 2 is configured to notify the player before the change is executed. With such a configuration, the decorative member is positively assigned to the player in order to quickly grasp the result of the game to be executed later (the game result corresponding to the reserved special figure 2 held). Can be touched for more than a period. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to operate the operation handle 51 during the period in which the standby effect is being performed, and thus it is possible to prevent a situation in which the special figure 2 holding ball is excessively acquired during the standby effect. it can.

  Also, in the present modification, when the special figure 2 holding ball is acquired during the special figure 2 fluctuation of the seventh time saving, the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation to be executed next (the special figure 2 fluctuation of the eighth time saving) Whether the (variation time) is an ultra-short variation pattern (variation time of 0.1 seconds) or a middle variation (variation time of 10 seconds) is read in advance (preliminary judgment). If the time is 0.1 second, the standby effect for the first period (for example, 5 seconds) is executed after the number of special figure 2 reserved balls reaches the upper limit, and the fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the eighth time saving is 10 seconds. In some cases, the standby effect for the second period (for example, 15 seconds) is executed after the number of reserved special figure 2 balls reaches the upper limit. The period set as the execution period of the standby effect is the end timing of the standby effect that is executed when the special figure 2 reserved ball reaches the upper limit in the shortest time period during the seventh special figure 2 change of the time saving time. Any length may be used as long as it overlaps with the final fluctuation period of the time saving state.

  In this way, by pre-reading the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation executed later, and setting the effect period of the standby effect to be executed based on the pre-read result, the special symbol executed during the target period of the standby effect Since there is no need to set a standby effect each time a change (variation in Tokujin Figure 2) is executed, the processing load relating to effect settings can be reduced.

  In addition, by executing the standby effect for a predetermined period, for example, when the special figure 2 holding ball reaches the upper limit earlier during the special figure 2 fluctuation of the seventh time saving, the upper limit is reached earlier. , The end timing of the standby effect can be made earlier than in the case where it was not possible. Therefore, the execution timing of the accumulation effect (see FIG. 256) executed during the final change in the time-saving state can be advanced, and the game for acquiring the special figure 2 reserved ball to the upper limit number during the final change in the time-saving state can be performed. Can be executed with a margin.

  Further, for example, when the special figure 2 reserved ball is acquired up to the upper limit number during the special figure 2 change of the seventh time reduction, as a pre-reading result, the winning information corresponding to the last acquired special figure 2 reserved ball is hit (small information). When a preliminary determination is made that a special standby effect is included, a special standby effect different from a normal standby effect is executed. Specifically, as the result of the touch effect and the operation effect described above, an effect that notifies in advance that a game most advantageous to the player is to be executed after the end of the time reduction state is executed.

  In other words, when the special figure 2 reserved ball is acquired up to the upper limit number during the special time 2 change of the seventh time saving time, the special figure 2 reserved ball acquired last is the second executed ball when the time saving state ends. 2 special symbol lottery, that is, a special figure 2 reserved ball used for the second special symbol lottery executed first after shifting from the time saving state to the normal state. In other words, when the special standby effect is executed, the player can know in advance that the most advantageous game for the player who will win in the second special symbol lottery during the normal state is executed. . Therefore, the player willingly performs the touch effect while expecting the special standby effect to be performed, so that the player can actively participate in the game and participate in the touch effect. As a result, it is possible to easily release the hand from the operation handle 51, so that it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which a new special figure 2 reserved ball is acquired during the period in which the standby effect is being executed. .

  Note that, for example, a special figure 2 fluctuation during the execution of the standby effect, specifically, a small hit in the ninth time-saving special figure 2 fluctuation in the game flow shown in FIG. 263 (a). When it is determined in advance that the winning is made, a special selection effect is executed instead of the standby effect. In this special selection effect, an effect in which the player as shown in FIG. 258 selects between performing a game aiming at a V winning during the small hitting game or performing a game not aiming at the V winning during the small hitting game. Is executed. The production mode of this special selection production is configured such that different production modes are set based on the result of the preliminary determination for the special figure 2 reserved ball other than the special figure 2 reserved ball corresponding to the 9th time saving special figure 2 change. For example, in the case where the number of special figure 2 reserved balls reaches the upper limit during the special figure 2 change of the seventh time saving time, the preliminary determination result for the last acquired special figure 2 reserved ball is a hit (small hit). In the case of, a special selection effect mode is set that indicates that it is more advantageous not to aim for a V prize during the small hit game based on the small hit that is won by the ninth special figure 2 change of the time saving time. In the case where there is no pre-determination result indicating the winning in the pre-determination result for the 2 reserved balls, a special selection effect mode for allowing the player to arbitrarily select which game to execute is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from selecting an excessively disadvantageous game, and therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from selecting an unfavorable game and reducing the desire to play the game. Can be suppressed.

  In the eleventh embodiment described above, when the special figure 2 reserved ball is excessively acquired, as shown in FIG. 257, the DANGER effect is executed using the remaining time in the time reduction state (remaining short time period). Was configured. Then, the DANGER effect is terminated at the timing when the time saving state ends, the reserved special figure 2 reserved ball number is notified, and the pullback effect is executed.

  On the other hand, in this effect modification example, when the special figure 2 reserved ball is excessively acquired, the second special symbol change executed after the normal state is set (the special figure 2 acquired during the time saving state). The configuration is such that the DANGER effect using the fluctuation period of the second special symbol fluctuation using the reserved ball is also executed. That is, the end timing of the DANGER effect is different from that of the above-described eleventh embodiment. As a result, when the DANGER effect ends, a game for executing the first special symbol lottery in the normal state is executed. With this configuration, when the DANGER effect is executed, it is difficult to provide an opportunity to acquire a large number of special figure 2 holding balls during the time saving state, and the pullback effect is not executed. It is possible to notify the player of an unfavorable game situation. In addition, since the DANGER effect can be executed using the fluctuation time of the second special symbol change executed after the normal state is set, the time from the execution of the DANGER effect until the end timing of the time-saving state arrives. If the period is extremely short, for example, in the game flow shown in FIG. 263 (b), when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is set to the upper limit just before the end of the eighth special figure 2 change in time saving, It is possible to prevent the DANGER effect from ending in an instant and executing an effect that is difficult for the player to understand.

  In addition, the above-described effect period of the DANGER effect is the remaining period from the time when the DANGER effect is executed to the end of the time saving state, and the entire period of the execution period of the second special symbol change executed after the normal state is set. There is no need to use, for example, when the number of times of execution of the second special symbol change executed after the normal state is set is two or more, the first time of the first special symbol executed after the normal state is set (2) The DANGER effect is ended in accordance with the stop display timing of the special symbol change, a display mode indicating that the pull-back effect is to be executed is displayed as the effect of the DANGER effect, and then the pull-back effect is executed. May be.

  Note that, as in this effect modification, a configuration in which a series of effects is executed using the remaining period during the time saving state and the execution period of the second special symbol change executed after the normal state is set, You may use it for a standby effect. In this case, the effect of the standby effect (at least a part of the effect included in the standby effect) is configured to be variable in accordance with the length of the period during which the standby effect is being executed. It may be configured such that the longer the longer, the more advantageous the game result to the player.

<About a modification of the eleventh embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the above-described eleventh embodiment, specifically, an example in which the technical idea of the eleventh embodiment is applied to the technology described in the eleventh embodiment will be described. In the above-described eighth embodiment, a plurality of time-saving end conditions for terminating the time-saving state are provided, and a plurality of time-saving end conditions (left-handed game, right-handed game) are provided in accordance with the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) executed by the player. It is configured such that the time-saving end condition that is easily satisfied among the special figure 1 end condition and the special figure 2 end condition) is made different. Then, it is determined whether or not each of the time-saving end conditions is in a state immediately before the respective time-saving end conditions are satisfied (a state in which the pre-hour-saving time end condition is satisfied). In addition, it is configured to execute an effect (game method guidance effect) for causing the player to play a game using a game method in which another time reduction end condition is more easily satisfied than the one time reduction end condition in which the time reduction end condition is satisfied.

  That is, in the above-described eighth embodiment, one of a plurality of time-saving end conditions is set in order to allow the player to enjoy the game in the time-saving state to the maximum (to lengthen the game period in the time-saving state). Only the element for satisfying the time saving end condition (for example, the number of times of change of the second special symbol) is updated, and the other element for satisfying the time saving end condition (for example, the number of times of change of the first special symbol) is completely updated. In such a state, the time saving state is prevented from being terminated.

  Further, in the above-described eighth embodiment, a maximum of four lottery rights for the second special symbol can be reserved and stored, and the time reduction state is ended with the lottery right for the second special symbol reserved and stored. Thereby, during the normal state set after the end of the time saving state, the lottery of the second special symbol which is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol can be executed. In other words, an effect capable of ending the time-saving state while maximizing the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the time-saving state and holding and storing more lottery rights for the second special symbol. Was configured to run.

  On the other hand, in the modification of the eleventh embodiment, when the time reduction state is set, it is easier to obtain the lottery right than when the game state other than the time reduction state (for example, the normal state) is set. The time saving end condition (special figure 2 end condition) is set only for the second special symbol, and the number of lotteries (the number of times of change) of the second special symbol executed during the time saving state is a predetermined number (for example, 100 times). The special condition 2 end condition is satisfied and the time saving state ends when the time reaches the second special symbol lottery so as to be executed prior to the first special symbol lottery. It is different from the above-described eighth embodiment in the configuration. Note that the specific control contents for executing the second special symbol lottery with priority over the first special symbol lottery are the same as those in the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Further, in the present modification, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (the number of reserved memorized lottery rights of the second special symbol stored at the time of execution of the second special symbol lottery) and the end of the special figure 2 The variation time of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time reduction state is selectable based on the number of remaining special symbol lotteries until the condition is satisfied (remaining time reduction).

  Specifically, from the time reduction state is set to the time when the number of remaining time reductions reaches five, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to a short time based on the same variation pattern table as in the above-described eighth embodiment. Is selected so that the remaining number of times saved is 5 to 3 times and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 2 or more. When a fluctuation pattern (medium fluctuation pattern (for example, 10 to 20 seconds)) having a fluctuation time longer than the fluctuation time that can be selected as the fluctuation pattern A is selected, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is one, When the short variation pattern A described above is selected and the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol is 0, a variation pattern having a variation time shorter than the short variation pattern A described above (an ultra-short variation pattern (for example, 0. 1 second)) It is.

  If the number of remaining time reductions is two or one (final change in the time reduction state) and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0, 2, or 3, the above-described ultrashort change pattern ( 0.1 second), and when the number of the reserved balls of the second special symbol is one, a fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation pattern (for example, 30 seconds)) having a fluctuation time longer than the above-mentioned medium fluctuation pattern is set. It is configured to be selected. With this configuration, it is possible to make the number of reserved special symbols stored at the end of the time saving state different depending on the game method executed during the time saving state.

  Here, a description will be given of the game content during the time saving state in the present modified example. In the present modification, similarly to the above-described eighth embodiment, when the time saving state is set, a game method in which a right-handed game is performed and a lottery of the second special symbol is executed is most advantageous to the player. It is configured to be a method.

  While the right-handed game is continuously executed during the time saving state, the interval at which the second special symbol lottery right is acquired is shorter than the interval at which the second special symbol lottery is executed. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation executed during the time saving state (during the high probability state of the ordinary symbol), the execution period of the game per ordinary symbol, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation, and the game board 13 The arrangement intervals of various devices to be performed are set. Thereby, when the right-handed game is continuously executed during the time-saving state, the game is executed toward the final change of the time-saving state while the number of the reserved memories of the second special symbols is maintained at the upper limit (4). Will be done.

  Hereinafter, when explaining the flow of the game during the time reduction state, the period from when the time reduction state is set to when the number of remaining time reductions reaches 5 times is the normal time reduction time period, and the time period when the number of remaining time reductions is 5 to 3 times Is described as a pre-hour reduction end period, and a period in which the number of remaining reductions is two or one (final change in the time reduction state) is referred to as a pre-hour reduction end period.

  As described above, when the game in the time reduction state is executed while the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol maintains the upper limit value (4), the ultra-short fluctuation pattern (0.1 seconds) in the period before the time reduction ends Will be selected. Therefore, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol at the time when the time reduction state ends (when the special figure final change during the time reduction state is stopped and displayed) is likely to decrease. Specifically, in the state where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is the upper limit value (four), the second special symbol variation of which the number of remaining time reductions is “2” (99th rotation in the time reduction state) is an ultra-short variation pattern. In the state where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol has been reduced to three, the second special symbol change of which the remaining time savings is "1" (100th rotation in the time saving state) is executed in an ultra-short change pattern. You. Therefore, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol at the end of the working hours is two.

  As described above, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is a predetermined number (four) and enters the period before the end of the time reduction, the second special symbol executed twice during the period before the end of the time reduction is Since the ultra-short variation pattern is set, it is difficult to newly obtain a reserved ball of the second special symbol.

  On the other hand, if the right-handed game during the time reduction state is temporarily interrupted and the number of balls reserved for the second special symbol when entering the period before the end of the time reduction is set to a value other than 4, the reserved ball for the second special symbol The change time is set for the second special symbol change during the period before the end of the working hours, so that the number of reserved balls of the second special design at the end of the working hours decreases more easily than when the number is four.

  For example, when the number of balls reserved for the second special symbol when entering the period before the end of the time reduction is three, the second special symbol variation with the remaining number of times of reduction of “2” (99th rotation in the time reduction state) is extremely short. It is executed in the variation pattern, and the second special symbol variation in which the number of remaining balls in the second special symbol is reduced to 2 and the remaining number of times saved is "1" (100th rotation in the time reduction state) is executed in the long variation pattern. Is done. Therefore, since the final change in the time saving state can be executed for a long time, it is possible to easily obtain a new reserved ball of the second special symbol during the final change. In this modification, the variation time of 30 seconds is selected as the long variation pattern, and the right-handed game is executed for 30 seconds during the time saving state, so that the reserved ball of the second special symbol is released. Since it is configured so that three or more new symbols can be acquired, the number of balls reserved for the second special symbol at the end of the time reduction can be easily determined only by continuing the right-handed game during the time variation final variation in which the long variation pattern is selected. The upper limit (4) can be set.

  Next, when the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol when entering the period before the end of the time reduction is two, the fluctuation of the second special symbol whose remaining time reduction is “2” (the 99th rotation in the time reduction state) is long. When executed in the variation pattern, the right-handed game is continued during the variation of the second special symbol, so that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol can be once set to the upper limit (four). Then, with the number of retained balls of the second special symbol set to the upper limit value (four), the second special symbol variation with the remaining time reduction number of “1” (100th rotation in the time reduction state) is executed in an ultra-short variation pattern. Is done. Therefore, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol at the end of the working hours can be reduced to three. In other words, the number of balls reserved for the second special symbol at the end of the time reduction can be more easily increased than when the right-handed game is continuously executed during the time reduction state.

  In addition, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol when entering the period before the end of the working hours is one, that is, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is zero, a new second special symbol is reserved. When a ball is acquired and the second special symbol change with the remaining number of times saved is “2” (99th rotation in the time saving state) is executed, the ultra-short change pattern is selected as the change pattern of the second special symbol change. You. Similarly, when the second special symbol change is executed in a state where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is one and the number of remaining time reductions is “1” (100th rotation in the time reduction state), the second special symbol is changed. This is executed with an ultra-short variation pattern as the variation pattern of the variation. In other words, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is made smaller than the predetermined number (two) and the vehicle enters the period before the end of the working hours, there is an opportunity to newly acquire the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. The time saving state ends without giving.

  As described above, in the present modification, in accordance with the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol at the time of entering the period before the end of the time reduction in the time reduction state, it is expected to obtain the reserved ball of the second special symbol at the end of the time reduction. Since the values can be made different, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting a game method during a reduced working time.

  Further, in the present modified example, the right-handed game is temporarily interrupted, or a game other than the normal right-handed game (left-handed game), as compared with the case where the right-handed game is continuously executed during the time saving state. Execution is configured so that it is easy to provide a game that is advantageous to the player in a period after the time reduction state ends, so that a player playing the time reduction state can Can provide fun changing ways.

  Further, in the present modification, when the right-handed game executed during the time reduction state is interrupted more than necessary, the privilege provided to the player in the period after the time reduction state ends (second time during the normal state) (The execution of the special symbol lottery) is reduced as compared with the case where the right-handed game is continuously executed during the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to cause a player who is playing in the time saving state to play a game while not only changing the game method but also considering the length of the period in which the game method is changed. Therefore, the player can be more interested in the game during the time reduction state.

  In addition, in the present modification, the time-saving ending preparation period is a period during the time-saving state and is before the period before the time-saving ends (the period in which the number of remaining time-savings is two or one (the last change of the time-saving state)). Also, a variation pattern different from the normal time reduction period (a period until the number of remaining reductions becomes five) is selected for the (time reduction period of 5 to 3 times). According to the variation time of the second special symbol change executed during the period, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol when entering the period before the end of the working hours is arbitrarily changed by the player selecting a game method. It is configured to be able to.

  Specifically, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is “3 or 4” in the time reduction end preparation period, the fluctuation time is longer than the short fluctuation pattern selected during the normal time reduction period. The medium fluctuation pattern is configured to be easily selected, and when the right-handed game is continuously performed during the time reduction state, the number of balls reserved for the second special symbol when entering the period before the end of the time reduction is limited to an upper limit (4 pieces). ). Further, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is “1 or 2” in the time reduction end preparation period, the variation pattern is selected within a range that can be selected during the normal time reduction period. When the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol when entering the period before the end of the working hours is "0", an ultra-short variation pattern shorter than the short variation pattern is selected. ing.

  In other words, when the right-handed game is continuously executed by selecting the above-described medium fluctuation pattern, the number of retained balls of the second special symbol stored and retained at the time of the entry before the time saving end period is limited to the upper limit. Value (four). Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the entry into the period before the end of the working hours reduction without newly acquiring the reserved ball of the second special symbol, even though the right-handed game is continuously performed. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to give a privilege according to the content of the game method executed during the time reduction state.

  Further, in this modification, when the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol at the time of entering the time reduction end preparation period is 0, an ultra-short variation pattern (0.1 second) is used as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. Is configured to be selected. Therefore, in order to prevent the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol from entering the period before the end of the time reduction in the state of the upper limit value (4), the game in the time reduction state while interrupting the right-handed game more than necessary is performed. When executed, that is, the right-handed game is not performed while the second special symbol change is executed so that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is not increased during the time saving state, and the second special symbol change is stopped. After that, it is possible to prevent a game method of performing a right-handed game (a so-called stop-game) from being performed.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in this modification, the first time-saving effect mode executed during the normal time-saving period is the time-saving effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the time-saving state. And a second time-saving effect mode executed during the time-saving end preparation period and a third time-saving effect mode executed during the time period before the time-saving end period can be set. Here, an effect mode unique to the present modified example will be described.

  As described above, in the present modification, if the variation pattern (variation time) of the selected second special symbol variation is different based on the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol and the number of remaining time reductions in the time saving state. By changing the expected value of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol obtained at the end of the time reduction, the degree of advantage of the game executed after the transition from the time reduction state to the normal state is achieved. Are configured to be different. In other words, the configuration is such that the degree of advantage of the game executed later can be changed according to the game method selected by the player during the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game during the time saving state.

  Further, as described above, in the present modification, a period during which the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol can be easily increased (a period during which the second special symbol variation in which the long variation pattern is set) is performed. When set, the configuration is such that a case where it is better to increase the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol and a case where it is better not to increase the number occur in accordance with the number of remaining working hours in the time saving state. Therefore, when a period (easy period) in which the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol can be easily increased for the player comes, whether or not to increase the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is determined. Can provide fun.

  In this modification, as the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state, only the time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of times of the change of the special symbol reaches a specific number (100 times) is set. Not limited to, for example, may be configured such that the time saving end conditions are different according to the jackpot type set in the jackpot winning that triggered the time saving state, for example, the number of times the special symbol changes 50 A jackpot type that sets the time saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of times has been reached, a jackpot type that sets the time saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of times reaches 75, or a time saving end that is satisfied when the number of times has been reached A jackpot type for which a condition is set may be provided.

  In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the duration of the time reduction state, so that the player determines whether or not to increase the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol during the easy period based on the number of remaining time reductions. To make it difficult to determine.

  Further, in the present modification, as described above, only the time reduction termination condition that is satisfied based on the number of times the special symbol is changed is set as the time reduction termination condition. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. A time-saving end condition (lottery result end condition) that is satisfied when a specific lottery result (for example, a specific hit or a specific deviation) is provided, so that the time-saving state is forcibly ended regardless of the number of remaining time reductions. May be configured. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at what timing the time saving state ends, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol at the time when the time saving state ends for the player Can be executed while considering a game method for securing a large number of games.

  In addition, in the present modification, the variation pattern (fluctuation time) of the selected second special symbol variation is changed based on the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol and the number of remaining hours reduced in the time saving state, Although the expected value of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol obtained at the end of the time reduction is configured to be different, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of remaining time reductions in the time reduction state and the second special symbol The variation pattern of the second special symbol variation may be selected based on the result of the lottery, or the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, the number of remaining hours reduced in the time-saving state, and the second special symbol. The variation pattern of the second special symbol variation may be selected based on the lottery result. As described above, when selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol change, by referring to the lottery result of the second special symbol, for example, before the end of the time reduction, which is the period immediately before the end of the time reduction state During the period, the ultra-short fluctuation pattern is selected unless the result of the second special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result (for example, a small hit), and is excessive only when the result is a specific lottery result (for example, a small hit). A configuration may be adopted in which a long variation pattern in which a variation time longer than the short variation pattern is set is selected.

  With this configuration, based on the result of the second special symbol lottery in the specific period during the time reduction state (period before the end of the time reduction), the first advantageous period (the period during which the time reduction state is set) is advantageous to the player. ) Can be made different in the degree of advantage (the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol) of the second advantageous period (reservation digestion period of the second special symbol executed during the normal state). Therefore, the novel special play that the second special symbol lottery executed during the time reduction state can influence the advantage degree during the first advantage period and the advantage degree during the second advantage period is provided. be able to.

  Further, in this modification, as a period in the time reduction state, a normal time reduction period (1 to 95 times reduction), a preparation period for ending the time reduction (96 to 98 times reduction), and a period before the end of the reduction (99, 100 times reduction) are set. Then, the variation pattern to be selected is made different according to the number of special figure changes (the number of special figure changes in the time saving state) so that different change patterns are selected according to each set period. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the length (range) of each of the above-described periods may be changed according to the jackpot type set when the jackpot in which the time saving state is set is won. .

  Further, when the time reduction state is set, the entire period of the time reduction state is set as a normal time reduction period, and the second special symbol lottery executed during the time reduction state is set to a specific lottery result (for example, a small hit). In the case of winning, as a variation pattern selected in response to the second special symbol lottery executed after the end of the small hitting game, a special variation pattern is provided for a predetermined period (for example, during five special figure variations). It is configured to use a special variation pattern table that can be selected, and when a variation pattern is selected using the special variation pattern table, the above-described ultra-short variation pattern or long variation pattern can be selected. Is also good. With such a configuration, the first advantageous period (the time reduction state is advantageous to the player) in accordance with the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time reduction state and the timing at which the specific lottery result is obtained. The advantage degree (the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol) of the second advantageous period (reserved consumption period of the second special symbol executed during the normal state) arriving after the set period can be varied. . Therefore, the novel special play that the second special symbol lottery executed during the time reduction state can influence the advantage degree during the first advantage period and the advantage degree during the second advantage period is provided. be able to.

<About the effect contents in the modification of the eleventh embodiment>
Next, among a plurality of effects performed in the modification of the eleventh embodiment, the contents of a characteristic effect will be described. As described above, in this modification, when the time-saving state that is a gaming state advantageous to the player is set, the time-saving state (first period) ends according to the game method to be executed during the time-saving state. It is configured such that the degree of advantage of a game executed in a later predetermined period (second period) can be made different. Then, during the time reduction state (during the first period), an effect for guiding (suggesting) a game method for allowing the player to execute the game during the second period more advantageously is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to guide the game during the time saving state to the player in an easily understandable manner.

  Specifically, when the time saving state is set, the measuring means for measuring the number of remaining working hours until the time saving ending condition is satisfied, and based on the measurement result of the measuring means, the current time saving situation is normal. A period, a time reduction end preparation period, a period determination means for determining whether the period is before the time reduction end, and an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode corresponding to the determination result of the period determination means, By displaying the presentation mode set by the presentation mode setting means on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the player can grasp the situation during the time saving state.

  Furthermore, based on the measurement result of the measuring means and the storage content of the storing means for storing the number of reserved special second symbols, a predicting means for predicting in advance a fluctuation pattern that can be selected until the time saving end condition is satisfied is provided. Provide.

  Then, when the prediction unit predicts that only the ultra-short change pattern is selected until the time-saving end condition is satisfied, for example, the final change in the time-saving end preparation period (executed when the number of remaining working hours is three) If the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is four at the time when the (second special symbol change) is executed, regardless of whether a new reserved ball of the second special symbol is newly acquired during the final change. Since it is determined that the remaining time-saving fluctuations (two special symbol fluctuations executed during the time-saving state) are executed in the ultra-short-time fluctuation pattern, the third time fluctuation including the final fluctuation this time is performed. 2 Set a composite effect mode based on the lottery result (pre-read result) of the special symbol change. Then, a period until the time reduction termination condition is satisfied, that is, a period from the time when the final fluctuation of the time reduction termination preparation period is started to the time when the final fluctuation (the final fluctuation in the time reduction state) of the period before the time reduction ends is stopped and used. To execute the composite effect used in the composite effect mode.

  By executing the composite effect as described above, in a case where the ultra-short fluctuation pattern is configured to be able to be set to make it difficult to newly obtain the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, the ultra-short fluctuation pattern is Since the lottery result of the selected second special symbol change can be notified to the player using the plurality of second special symbol change fluctuation periods, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  When the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation executed this time is determined to be the long variation pattern by the variation pattern identification means for identifying the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation executed this time, It is advantageous for the player to increase the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol based on the stored number of retained balls of the second special symbol and the measurement result (remaining short time count) of the measuring means. It has a situation discriminating means for discriminating whether or not it is set to set an effect mode based on the discrimination result of the condition discriminating means, and to execute a guide effect for guiding the current situation to the player. I have.

  In this guidance effect, a first guidance mode for guiding the player that the second special symbol fluctuation in which a long fluctuation time is set (during the easy period) is provided to the player, On the other hand, at least a second guidance mode for guiding a game method of a continuous game in which a right-handed game is continued or a switching game in which a right-handed game is interrupted (a left-handed game is executed) is included. The effect is executed in the display mode.

  In place of this guide effect, a special guide effect that can display the first guide mode described above and a special guide mode in which the player executes either the continuous game or the switching game is executed, and the elapse of the easy period Later, based on the game content of the player during the easy period and the content of the above-described second guidance mode, a result mode indicating the game result may be displayed. In this case, it is better to increase the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol while notifying the player that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol can be easily increased during the easy period. An effect is executed to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not it is good. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game property in which a player can select a game method by grasping the effect contents.

  Further, as another technical configuration different from the above-described eleventh embodiment and the modification of the eleventh embodiment, for example, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed in an overlapping manner. When a small win is won by lottery of the first special symbol, and the special symbol indicating the small win is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol variation being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed with a deviation. The configured pachinko machine 10 is configured such that when a game state (time saving state) advantageous to a player is set, the time saving state ends when the number of times of change of the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number. In the pachinko machine 10 that has obtained the reserved ball of the first special symbol at the time when the time saving state is set, and has not acquired the reserved ball of the second special symbol, the reserved ball of the first special symbol is Until it becomes 0 (the first special symbol change is executed Kunar up) may be configured to perform the guiding effect that so as not to execute the game (time reduction game) for acquiring the hold balls of the second special symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the number of second special symbol fluctuations that are forcibly stopped and displayed on the basis of the result of the lottery of the first special symbol. Can be prevented from being updated uselessly. That is, when the advantageous state (time saving state) advantageous to the player is set, it is possible to provide a game advantageous to the player by interrupting the game for acquiring the reserved ball of the second special symbol.

  In the above-described eleventh embodiment and the modification of the eleventh embodiment, the example in which the time reduction state is used as the advantageous state that is advantageous to the player has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be set to an advantageous state. Further, in a gaming machine having a gaming property capable of acquiring a privilege through a plurality of stages, a state in which a particular stage is reached among a plurality of stages, that is, a state in which a privilege is more easily obtained than in an initial state, is set in an advantageous state. Good.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a plurality of time saving end conditions are set, and among the plurality of time saving end conditions, when the number of times of the change of the special symbol reaches a specific number of times, the time saving end condition is satisfied, The time-saving condition is satisfied at different timings when the number-of-times ending condition is satisfied and when the time-save ending condition is satisfied when a small symbol is won by lottery of a special symbol, that is, when the winning number-of-times ending condition is satisfied. It was configured so that it could be shifted to.

  Using this configuration, for example, when the change number end condition is satisfied, the game state is shifted from the time saving state to the normal state based on the start of the special symbol change, and the winning number end condition is satisfied. In this case, it is preferable to provide a gaming machine that is controlled to shift the gaming state from the time saving state to the normal state based on the end of the small hitting game.

  Thereby, even when the time saving state is ended based on the same special symbol change by the time saving end condition that is satisfied, the range in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the time in which the small hitting game is executed is added. The timing at which the time saving state ends can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of the time saving end condition that is satisfied. Further, depending on the time-saving termination conditions to be satisfied, even during the small hit game in which a small amount of privilege is given to the player, the electric accessory 640a is operated to make it easy for the ball to enter the entrance. It is possible to make the small hit game a more advantageous game state for the player.

  In addition, a plurality of small hit types with different periods in which the small hit game is executed are provided, and even if the winning number end condition is satisfied, the game is performed according to the small hit type for which the winning number end condition is satisfied. It is good to make the privilege given to the person different. As a result, the player can be interested in not only the type of the fulfilled time saving end condition but also more detailed contents of the time saving end condition.

  Also, in this case, even if the winning number ending condition is satisfied, the case where the time reduction state is ended at the timing when the small hitting game is started, and the case where the time reduction state is ended at the timing when the small hitting game is ended. Are preferably mixed. This makes it difficult for the player to know at what timing the time saving state ends. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the process of determining whether or not the time-saving termination condition is satisfied based on the number of times of the change of the special symbol, and the process of determining whether or not the time-saving termination condition is satisfied based on winning a small hit. The processing for discriminating and executing the processing separately is used. However, without being limited to this, the time saving information updated according to the lottery (variation) of the special symbol is integrally managed, and the time saving ending condition that is satisfied is established. May be used to set the timing for ending the time saving state based on

  In each of the above embodiments, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control device 110 (that is, when the value is increased or decreased, respectively), the reserved ball number command is issued. The case where the signal is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main control device 110 increases, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. Further, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. Accordingly, the number of times that main controller 110 transmits the number-of-holds command to voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times that voice lamp control device 113 receives the number-of-holds command can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control load of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In each of the above embodiments, the winning in the first entrance 64 and the passage through the through gate 67 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four times. Alternatively, the number may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of reserved balls of the variable display based on the winning in the first entrance port 64 may be changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81 or the area divided into four by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern). A light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. May be configured.

  Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbol as the identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The pattern may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be operated or changed and displayed in a variety of ways together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, different display means may be provided between the display means for displaying the main symbol highlighted in the player and the display means for displaying the subordinate symbols in the third symbol. Further, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used as the configuration of the display unit.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a right-handed game that aims at the right region of the game board 13 is executed in a game state (short-time state) advantageous to the player, and the left region of the game board 13 in a normal game state. The left-handed game is configured to be executed, but it is sufficient that the target area of the game board 13 is different depending on the gaming state. May execute a right-handed game. Moreover, you may comprise so that the game in a different game state can be performed aiming at the same area | region.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the frame buttons 22 and 23 that determine that the operating means has been operated by the player performing a pressing operation are used as the operating means that can be operated by the player. It is also possible to use an operating means configured in a lever shape that can determine that the player has operated by tilting the player left and right or back and forth, and that the player has been operated by touching or approaching It is also possible to use a touch sensor type operation unit that can be distinguished, a wireless type operation unit that can determine that an operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like. In addition, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (the first storage device 770, the second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c A part or all of the operation control may be executed by the sound lamp control device 113 instead of the main control device 110.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the sound lamp control device 113 performs a process for setting the display mode in the effect performed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is performed by the sound lamp. It is configured to be executed by the main control device 110 different from the control device 113. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a process for executing a game (lottery) and a result of the game (lottery) are displayed as effects. May be performed by the same control device. With this configuration, a single control device can execute a plurality of different processes.

  In the sixth, eighth, and ninth embodiments described above, the first operating port 704 for opening the right first ball entry port 64a2 and the right second ball entry port 64b are opened inside the distribution device 700. And a second operation port 707 for causing the operation to be provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be provided in which the right first ball entrance 64a2 and the right second ball entrance 64b are provided directly inside the distribution device 700. That is, the right first ball entry port 64a2 may be provided instead of the first operation port 704, and the right second ball entry port 64b may be provided instead of the second operation port 707. With this configuration, the first operation port 704, the second operation port 707, the first operation member 645a, and the second operation member 645b can be omitted, so that the board surface configuration can be simplified. it can. Therefore, since the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, the cost ratio can be reduced.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  Furthermore, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, a first special symbol and a second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types, but the types of special symbols are not limited to this, and three or more May be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the gaming property in which a plurality of special symbols are drawn (changed) according to a predetermined rule and the gaming property in which a drawing (change) is performed individually and independently are described. However, each of the gaming properties described in each embodiment may be replaced or combined.

  Further, a combination of probabilities related to the jackpot lottery (commonly referred to as setting) may be provided in a plurality of stages, and may be implemented as a pachinko machine configured so that the setting can be changed at the game store side. As a pachinko machine provided with a plurality of settings, a combination of a jackpot probability (a combination of a jackpot probability in a low-probability state and a jackpot probability in a probable change state) is selected from a plurality of stages (for example, six stages). Can be set as a typical example, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probability, for example, implemented as a pachinko machine that can change the ratio of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined in the event of a jackpot, according to the setting May be. That is, the rate at which the type of jackpot that is advantageous to the player is determined according to the setting, or the rate at which the type of jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player is determined may be changed. More specifically, for example, the rate at which the jackpot with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) is determined is changed according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, two rounds) is determined. By changing the ratio according to the setting, the degree of advantage for each setting may be changed. In addition, for example, the rate at which a large number of time savings (for example, 100 times) are given after the end of the big win is determined according to the setting, or a large number of time savings (for example, 0 times) is given. May be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, the rate at which the jackpot that shifts to (or is likely to shift to) an advantageous gaming state (eg, a probable change state) after the end of the jackpot is varied according to the setting, or a disadvantageous gaming state (eg, a normal state) ) May be varied according to the setting at which the jackpot determined to be (or easily shifted) is determined. In addition, a configuration in which a jackpot type in which the ratio determined only by a specific setting is significantly higher (which is hardly determined by other settings) may be provided. Specifically, for example, the setting is configured to be settable in six steps from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set as setting 6. In the setting 6, when the jackpot becomes a jackpot, the jackpot of six rounds is determined at a rate of 2%, while in other settings, the jackpot of six rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. It may be configured. With this configuration, when the jackpot ends in six rounds, the possibility of the most advantageous setting 6 becomes extremely high, so that the player pays attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot and plays the game. be able to. Alternatively or additionally, for example, in the setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type to which 66 time savings are given after the end of the jackpot may be configured to be higher than other settings. With this configuration, a game can be played while paying attention to the number of times the time-saving state ends. Instead of or in addition to the above, for example, during the execution of the jackpot game, the jackpot type in which the jackpot (or the inside of the jackpot, etc.) operates in a different operation pattern from the other jackpot types The configuration may be such that the jackpot type is easily determined by a specific setting (the determination ratio increases). In addition, in the case of changing the combination of the jackpot probability according to the setting, in the low probability state, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the setting is advantageous to the player, while in the positive change state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It is good also as a structure which makes a big hit probability high. In this configuration, particularly, in the probable change state, as the number of special symbol lotteries increases, the number of possessed balls tends to increase (the number of award balls to be paid out tends to increase more than the number of game balls fired). It is effective for gaming machines. More specifically, for example, a configuration in which the probable change state is continued until the next big win is won, and is applied to a gaming machine of a type that has a small probability of winning with a high probability in the probable change state, provides an advantage of a high setting. Sex can be further enhanced. In other words, if the probability of a big hit in the probability change state is low, the number of lotteries until the next big hit is likely to increase, so that the chance of winning a small hit and winning a prize ball increases. Therefore, in the probability change state, it becomes easier for the player to acquire more prize balls until the next big hit, which is advantageous for the player.

  In addition, the slot machine, for example, a symbol is fluctuated by operating the operating lever in a state where a coin is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button, and is known. Things. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  Each of the above embodiments may be configured by combining all or a part thereof.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Characteristic A group>
Discriminating means for executing a predetermined discrimination when a discriminating condition is satisfied; display means for displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discriminating means; and operation for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. Special display execution means, privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, and a first display on the display means. When the identification information indicating the second determination result different from the determination result is stopped and displayed, the small bonus game execution unit that executes the small bonus game different from the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution unit. After the end of the privilege game, the game state is set by a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and the game state setting means. Previous End condition setting means for setting an end condition of the second game state, the end condition setting means being established based on the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display executing means a predetermined number of times. A first ending condition, a second ending condition that can be satisfied based on the result of the determination by the determining means being the first result of the determination, and a second ending condition that is satisfied based on the result of the determination by the determining means being the second result of the determination. A gaming machine A1 characterized by being configured to be able to set at least a third end condition that can be satisfied by setting.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, a lottery of the game is determined by lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, the player An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a time-saving game in which a lottery is easily performed after execution of a privilege game is performed for a predetermined period (for example, JP-A-2012-217766). By the way, since the above-described gaming machine executes a time reduction game for a predetermined period (a predetermined number of times) predetermined according to the type of the privilege game to be executed, the player executes the time reduction game for a predetermined period. In such a case, it is difficult to make the player play the game while paying attention to whether or not the time-saving game is continued, and the game tends to be monotonous. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine further improved in the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine A1, a plurality of termination conditions for terminating the second gaming state advantageous to the player can be set, so that the period in which the second gaming state is continuously set for the player is set. There is an effect that it is difficult to make prediction, and it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous.

  In the gaming machine A1, when the number of times the determination result of the determination means reaches the second determination result reaches a predetermined number during the period in which the second game state is continuously set, the third end is performed. A gaming machine A2 characterized by satisfying the conditions.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second gaming state can be terminated by the number of times the small privilege game is executed during the second gaming state, so that the player can pay close attention to the determination result of the determining means in the second gaming state. Can be.

  In addition, it is possible to prevent the small privilege game from being excessively executed during the second game state.

  In the gaming machine A2, the discriminating means also discriminates a third discrimination result different from the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result, and the small privilege game execution means determines that the discrimination result of the discriminating means is The gaming machine A3, wherein the small privilege game is executed even in the case of the third determination result.

  According to the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A2. In other words, since it is possible to execute the small privilege game in which the third end condition cannot be satisfied, the second gaming state is changed only by grasping the number of the small privilege games executed during the second gaming state. Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the period that is set continuously, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the determination means includes, as the second determination result, a specific second determination result for causing the small privilege game execution means to execute the first small privilege game, and The special second determination result different from the specific second determination result for executing the second small bonus game different from the one small privilege game is at least determined, and the number of times determined as the specific second determination result is The third termination condition is satisfied when the first predetermined number of times is reached, or when the number of times determined as the special second determination result is a second predetermined number of times different from the first predetermined number of times. A gaming machine A4, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine A4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2 or A3. That is, since the termination condition of a different number of times can be set according to the type of the small privilege game, the second game state is continued only by grasping the number of the small privilege games executed during the second game state. It is possible to make it difficult to predict the period set. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress early getting tired of the game.

  In the gaming machine A4, when the small privilege game is executed, a variable ball-in means capable of changing from a first state in which a game ball is difficult to enter to a second state in which a game ball is easy to enter, and the variable ball-in means A special area through which a game ball that has entered the ball can pass, the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game even when a game ball passes through the specific area, and the small privilege When the first small privilege game is executed by the game execution means and when the second small privilege game is executed, the ease with which the game ball passes through the specific area is made different. A gaming machine A5 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine A5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A4. That is, depending on the type of the small privilege game executed by the gaming machine A, the possibility that the second gaming state ends and the possibility that the privilege game is executed can be made different. The player can be watched for the content of the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Feature B group> (Different time saving end conditions for special 1 game and special 2 game)
First ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, and a game ball entering the first ball entry means. When a predetermined first determination condition is satisfied, a predetermined first determination is performed, and a game ball enters the second ball input means, and a second determination condition different from the first determination condition is satisfied. Determination means for performing a predetermined second determination in the case, display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means, and dynamic display execution for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means Means, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game which is advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, and the privilege game executing means executed by the privilege game executing means. After the bonus game is over, the first game state and the first game state Game state setting means capable of setting a second game state advantageous to a player, and end condition setting means capable of setting a plurality of end conditions of the second game state set by the game state setting means. The end condition setting means may include, as the plurality of end conditions, a first end condition that is more likely to be satisfied when the second determination is performed than when the first determination is performed, and A gaming machine B1 characterized by at least setting a second end condition that is more likely to be satisfied when the first determination is performed than when the first determination is performed.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, a lottery of the game is determined by lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, the player An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a time-saving game in which a lottery is easily performed after execution of a privilege game is performed for a predetermined period (for example, JP-A-2012-217766). Further, the gaming machine described above executes a lottery of a special symbol as a lottery of a game, and is capable of executing a lottery of various games by providing two kinds of special symbols. However, since the gaming machine described above ends the time reduction state when the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the time reduction game reaches a predetermined number, the special symbol in which the lottery is executed during the time reduction state is executed. The time saving state ends under the same condition regardless of the type. Therefore, there is a problem that the game in the time reduction state tends to be monotonous. In addition, although the content of the lottery executed during the time reduction state is made different depending on the type of the special symbol to be drawn, the game result of whether or not the time reduction state is ended is determined by the special symbol that is selected. Is the same regardless of the type of the game, it is not possible to make a relationship between the period in which the time reduction state continues and the type of the special symbol in which the lottery is executed during the time reduction state, and the game tends to be monotonous. There was a defect. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine further improved in the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine B1, it is possible to make the ending condition for ending the second gaming state different between the case where the first determination is performed and the case where the second determination is performed. Therefore, since the player can watch which discrimination is performed during the second game state, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B1, a small privilege game executing means for executing a small privilege game different from the privilege game when the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means is the second discrimination result. A determination result termination condition that can be satisfied when the determination result of the determination means is the second determination result, and a dynamic display termination that can be satisfied based on the execution of the dynamic display by the dynamic display execution means. And setting a condition, wherein the determination means is easier to determine the second determination result when the second determination is performed than when the first determination is performed. Gaming machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1. That is, when the second determination is performed rather than when the first determination is performed, one of the end conditions for ending the second game state is more likely to be satisfied. The discrimination is executed, and the player cares what the discrimination result was. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine B2, the termination condition setting means sets the determination result termination condition as the first termination condition, and sets the dynamic display termination condition as the second termination condition. Gaming machine B3.

  According to the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B2. That is, when the first determination is performed, the determination result ending condition is more easily satisfied than when the second determination is performed. In other words, although the second determination is more likely to result in the second determination, it is difficult for the determination result termination condition to be satisfied. Therefore, since the player gazes at whether the second determination result is the first determination or the second determination, there is an effect that a game that does not get tired can be provided.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, when the determination result of the determination means is the second determination result, one second determination result type is determined from a plurality of second determination result types as the type of the second determination result. A second determination result type determination unit, wherein the termination condition setting unit sets a different termination condition for each second determination result type determined by the second determination result type determination unit as the determination result termination condition; A gaming machine B4, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine B4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B2 or B3. That is, since different end conditions can be set based on the second determination result type, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the timing at which the end condition is satisfied. Therefore, the pleasure of predicting a future game can be enhanced, and thus the effect of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B4, the second determination result type determining means determines that the first determination result is the second determination result and that the second determination result is the second determination result. A gaming machine B5 characterized in that a different second determination result type can be determined depending on the case.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B4, a different second determination result type can be determined between the first determination and the second determination, so that the first determination and the second determination determine the type. There is an effect that the ease of establishment of the result end condition can be easily changed.

  In any of the gaming machines B2 to B5, the end condition setting means may include a first dynamic display end condition that can be satisfied when the dynamic display based on the first determination is executed as the dynamic display end condition. And a second dynamic display end condition that can be satisfied when the dynamic display based on the second determination is performed.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B2 to B5, the following effect is achieved. That is, it is possible to vary the termination condition for terminating the second gaming state. Therefore, since it is possible to cause the player to gaze at which determination is performed during the second game state, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B6, the dynamic display end condition is such that the end condition is satisfied when the number of times of dynamic display in which the dynamic display is executed reaches a predetermined number, and the end condition setting means includes: A gaming machine B7 wherein the number of dynamic displays for satisfying the first dynamic display end condition and the number of dynamic displays for satisfying the second dynamic display end condition are set differently. .

  According to the gaming machine B7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B6. That is, since the number of dynamic displays for satisfying the first dynamic display end condition and the number of dynamic displays for satisfying the second dynamic display end condition can be different, the second game state is set. In such a case, the ease with which the second game state can be ended can be made different between the game in which the first determination is performed and the game in which the second determination is performed, so that various games are provided. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine B7, the ending condition setting means sums a first dynamic display count executed based on the first determination and a second dynamic display count executed based on the second determination. A gaming machine B8 for setting an upper limit dynamic display end condition that is satisfied when the total number of dynamic displays reaches the upper limit number.

  According to the gaming machine B8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B7. That is, even when the total number of dynamic displays obtained by adding the first number of dynamic displays and the second number of dynamic displays reaches the upper limit, the second game state is ended. In addition, it is possible to prevent the first determination and the second determination from being performed excessively. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine B8, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the gaming machine B8 has an advantageous state setting unit that sets an advantageous state in which the determination result of the determination unit is likely to be the first determination result for a specific period. A gaming machine B9, which can be established when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means.

  According to the gaming machine B9, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B8. That is, since the advantageous state can be set in accordance with the timing at which the second game state is set, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B9, when the first gaming state is set during the specific period in which the advantageous state is set, the gaming machine B9 has special state setting means for setting a special state advantageous to the player. A gaming machine B10 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine B10, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B9. That is, the special state is set when the second game state ends during the period in which the advantageous state is set. This makes it possible to set different game states according to the timing at which the second game state ends. In addition, since the special state is set by terminating the second game state within a predetermined period of a specific period, the novel game state advantageous to the player is positively ended. It is possible to make the game more enjoyable and to enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, as the specific period, a period from the timing when the second game state is set to the time when the predetermined end condition is satisfied may be set, or the specific period may be set in the state where the second game state is set. May be configured to set a period from when the condition for satisfying is satisfied to when a predetermined end condition is satisfied.

<Character C group>
Discriminating means for performing a predetermined discrimination when a discriminating condition is satisfied; display means for displaying identification information indicating a discrimination result by the discriminating means; and displaying the discrimination information indicating the first discrimination result on the display means A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means is completed, a first game state, and a first game state A game state setting means capable of setting a second game state more advantageous to the player than the above, and an end condition setting means capable of setting a plurality of end conditions of the second game state set by the game state setting means; An end condition judging unit for judging an end condition that is likely to be satisfied among the plurality of end conditions set by the end condition setting unit; and an indicator for indicating a period in which the second game state is continuously set. It has a suggestion effect execution means for executing a solicitation effect, and a suggestion effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode of the suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect execution unit. A gaming machine C1 for setting an effect mode of the suggested effect based on the end condition determined by condition determining means.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, a lottery of the game is determined by lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, the player An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a time-saving game in which a lottery is easily performed after execution of a privilege game is performed for a predetermined period (for example, JP-A-2012-217766). By the way, since the above-described gaming machine executes a time reduction game for a predetermined period (a predetermined number of times) predetermined according to the type of the privilege game to be executed, the player executes the time reduction game for a predetermined period. In such a case, it is difficult to make the player play the game while paying attention to whether or not the time-saving game is continued, and the game tends to be monotonous. Therefore, the present applicant has developed a gaming machine that provides a plurality of conditions for ending the time-saving game to make it difficult for the player to understand the period in which the time-saving game is continuously set. In this gaming machine, since there are a plurality of termination conditions for terminating the time-saving game, it is difficult to notify the player of the remaining period in which the time-saving game is performed, thereby providing a game that is difficult for the player to understand. there were. In the above-described gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine that is easy for a player to understand.

  According to the gaming machine C1, even when a plurality of ending conditions for ending the second gaming state are set, the suggested effect can be set based on the ending condition that is easily established among them. There is an effect that the player can easily grasp the period in which the second game state is continuously set.

  In the gaming machine C1, the termination condition determining means determines the easy-to-establish termination condition based on the execution content of the determining means in the second gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1. That is, since the termination condition that is likely to be satisfied is actually determined based on the execution content of the determination unit, there is an effect that the determination accuracy can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C2, there is provided updating means for updating predetermined game information based on the execution content of the determination means executed during a period in which the second gaming state is continuously set, and the ending condition setting means The first end condition that can be satisfied when the first game information is updated by the updating means as the plurality of end conditions, and the second game information different from the first game information is updated by the update means. A gaming machine C3 characterized by setting at least a second end condition that can be satisfied when the game is performed.

  According to the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C2. That is, since the termination condition is set for a plurality of game information that can be established by the execution of the determination unit, it is determined whether the second game state is to be completed based on the execution content of the determination unit. It can be difficult. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be gazed at the suggested effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine C3, the first end condition is satisfied when the number of updates of the first game information reaches the first number, and the second end condition is a number of updates of the second game information. Is satisfied when the second number of times is reached, and based on the game information updated by the updating means, a first remaining update number until the first end condition is satisfied, and a second end number A remaining update number discriminating means for discriminating between the second remaining update number until the condition is satisfied, and the end condition discriminating means, wherein the end condition that is easily satisfied according to the discrimination result of the remaining update number discriminating means A gaming machine C4 characterized in that it is determined that

  According to the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C3. That is, since the end condition that is likely to be satisfied is determined based on the remaining number of times until each end condition is satisfied, there is an effect that the accuracy of the effect mode of the suggested effect can be increased.

  The gaming machine C4 has a pre-end condition determination for determining whether the first remaining update number or the second remaining update number determined by the remaining update number determination means satisfies a predetermined pre-end condition. The gaming machine C5, wherein the suggested effect mode setting means sets an effect mode of the suggested effect based on a determination result of the pre-end condition determining device.

  According to the gaming machine C5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C4. That is, since the pre-end condition determining means can set the production mode of the suggested effect depending on whether or not the pre-end condition is satisfied, until the end condition is satisfied for the player according to the production mode of the suggested effect. This has an effect that the remaining number of times can be predicted.

  In the gaming machine C5, the suggestion effect mode setting means sets a specific suggestion effect mode when it is determined by the determination of the pre-end condition determination means that a plurality of the pre-end conditions are satisfied. A gaming machine C6, which is characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine C6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C5. That is, when the pre-end condition is satisfied, a specific suggested effect mode can be set, so that it is possible to make the player predict the remaining period of the time reduction state. Therefore, there is an effect that a fun to be predicted can be provided to the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the game state setting means includes first period setting means for setting a first period after the second game state is set by the game state setting means, and the suggestion effect mode setting means includes: When the end condition is satisfied in a state where the first period is set by the first period setting means, a special suggestion effect mode is set.

  According to the gaming machine C7, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines C1 to C6. That is, when the end condition is satisfied within a predetermined period after the second game state advantageous to the player is set, the special suggestion effect mode is set. Therefore, the effect mode according to the timing at which the end condition is satisfied is set. Can be set. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of rendering can be enhanced by making the player aware of the timing at which the end condition is satisfied.

  In the gaming machine C7, the first period setting means sets the first period until the number of times of the discrimination executed by the discriminating means reaches a predetermined number after the second gaming state is set. A gaming machine C8 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine C8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C7. That is, since the first period is set until the number of times of the determination performed by the determination unit reaches the predetermined number, the player can easily grasp the state in which the first period is set. Therefore, it is possible to make the player enjoy whether or not the end condition is satisfied while the first period is set, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine C7 or C8, the first period setting means sets the first period until a predetermined time has elapsed since the second gaming state was set. Machine C9.

  According to the gaming machine C9, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C7 or C8. That is, since the first period is set when the elapsed time from the setting of the second game state is within the predetermined time, the player is motivated to play the game in order to satisfy the end condition within the first period. There is an effect that can be.

<Characteristic D group>
First determining means for performing a determination when the first determination condition is satisfied; display means for displaying identification information indicating a result of the determination by the first determining means; and identifying means for displaying the first determination result on the display means When the information is displayed, the first discriminating condition is different from the first discriminating condition after the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player and the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means are completed. Specific game state setting means for setting a specific game state in which the second determination condition is easily satisfied; second determination means for performing determination when the second determination condition is satisfied; and a result of the determination by the second determination means When the identification information indicating the second determination result is displayed on the display means, a variable ball entry means capable of changing from a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to a second state in which the game ball is easy to enter; I entered the variable ball entry means A special area through which a game ball can pass, wherein the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game even when a game ball passes through the specific area, and the specific game state setting means comprises: The first specific game state in which the second determination condition is easily established and the second specific game state in which the second determination condition is less likely to be established than the first specific game state can be set at least. A gaming machine D1 characterized by the following.

  Here, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, whether or not the game is won is determined by lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, or if the result of the game is not a hit, There has been proposed a gaming machine in which a bonus game that is advantageous to a player is executed when a game ball passes a specific area during a predetermined game that can be executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). Further, there is a game machine in which a gaming state in which the above-mentioned privilege game is easily executed can be set as a gaming state of the gaming machine. The gaming machine described above sets two gaming states, a gaming state advantageous to the player and a gaming state other than the gaming state, and cannot set a plurality of gaming states advantageous to the player in a stepwise manner. However, there is a problem that the game tends to be monotonous. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a game from becoming monotonous and improve the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine D1, it is possible to set a gaming state in which the ease with which the second determination condition is satisfied during the specific gaming state can be set, so that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous. There is.

  In the gaming machine D1, display means capable of displaying first identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the first determination means and second identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the second determination means, and display thereof First dynamic display means for causing the means to dynamically display the first identification information for a predetermined first period, and second dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the second identification information for a predetermined second period. A first dynamic display period setting unit that sets a first dynamic display period of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display unit; and the first dynamic display period setting unit that is executed by the second dynamic display unit. And a second dynamic display period setting means for setting a second dynamic display period of the second identification information, while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. And dynamically displaying the second identification information by the second dynamic display means. The specific game state is set in response to the first identification information being stopped and displayed in the first display mode for indicating the first determination result on the display means, 2. The variable ball entry means is changed to the second state in response to the identification information being stopped and displayed in the second display mode for indicating the second determination result, and the specific game state setting is performed. The means varies the first dynamic display period set by the first dynamic display period setting means, or the second dynamic display period set by the second dynamic display period setting means, A gaming machine D2 for setting the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1. In other words, the first dynamic display period and the second dynamic display period in the specific game state are made different from each other, so that the first specific game state and the second specific game state can be set. In addition, there is an effect that it is possible to easily set a game state in which the ease with which the second determination condition is satisfied is changed.

  In the gaming machine D2, the second dynamic display period setting means is configured to perform the second dynamic display shorter when the first specific game state is set than when the second specific game state is set. A gaming machine D3 characterized in that a period is easily set.

  According to the gaming machine D3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D2. That is, since the determination by the second determination unit can be easily performed by shortening the dynamic display period, there is an effect that the gaming state can be easily set.

  In the gaming machine D2 or D3, the second determination unit is configured to be able to determine the first determination result, and the second dynamic display period setting unit is configured to perform the second determination unit during the second specific game state. When the determination result is the first determination result, a shorter second dynamic display period is set than when the determination result is a result other than the first determination result. .

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D2 or D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the determination result of the second determination means is the first determination result, a dynamic display period shorter than the other determination results is set, so that the advantage game can be easily performed. .

  In any of the gaming machines D2 to D4, the first dynamic display period setting means is shorter when the second specific gaming state is set than when the first specific gaming state is set. A gaming machine D5 for facilitating setting of a first dynamic display period.

  According to the gaming machine D5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines D2 to D4. That is, it is easier to set the first dynamic display period when the second specific game state is set than when the first specific game state is set, so that the game state can be easily set. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine D5, when the determination result of the first determination unit is the first determination result during the first specific state, the first dynamic display period setting unit may perform a determination other than the first determination result. A gaming machine D6 for setting a first dynamic display period shorter than the case of the determination result.

  According to the gaming machine D6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D5. That is, in the case where the first determination result is obtained during the first specific state, a first dynamic display period shorter than the case where the determination result is other than the first determination result is set. This allows the player to be immediately notified that the determination result is advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving a sense of anxiety to the player.

  In any of the gaming machines D2 to D6, when a predetermined first acquisition condition is satisfied, a first acquisition unit that acquires first entry information, and the first entry information acquired by the first acquisition unit. Until the first determination condition is satisfied, a first storage means capable of storing a plurality of pieces up to a first predetermined number, and obtain second ball entry information when a predetermined second acquisition condition is satisfied. And a second storage unit capable of storing a plurality of the second entry information acquired by the second acquisition unit up to a second predetermined number until the second determination condition is satisfied. The first specific game state is set when the first determination result of the second determination means executed in the state where the first specific game state is set is the second determination result. The result of the first determination performed by the first determination means in the state where Gaming machine D7, wherein the dynamic display period shorter than the first dynamic display period Sutame is intended to be set.

  According to the gaming machine D7, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines D2 to D6. That is, when the first determination result of the second determination means that is first executed in the state where the first specific game state is set is the second determination result, the first determination in the state where the first specific game state is set is performed. A dynamic display period shorter than the first dynamic display period for indicating the result of the first determination performed by the first determination means is set. Thereby, even if the first specific game state is set in a state where the first storage means and the second storage means both store the incoming ball information, the second determination means of the second determination means which is advantageous to the player. The determination result can be immediately notified to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving a sense of anxiety to the player.

<Feature E group> (Electric support control at the time of winning a small hit during working hours)
Discriminating means for executing discrimination when a discriminating condition is satisfied; display means for displaying identification information indicating a result of the discrimination by the discriminating means; and dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means And when the identification information indicating the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player, and the privilege game executing means executed by the privilege game executing means. After the bonus game is over, a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and the game state setting means setting the game state. End condition setting means capable of setting a plurality of end conditions of the second game state, wherein the game state setting means sets the first game state according to an end condition that is satisfied among the plurality of end conditions. Do Gaming machine E1, characterized in that in which varying the timing.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, a lottery of the game is determined by lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, the player An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a time-saving game in which a lottery is easily performed after execution of a privilege game is performed for a predetermined period (for example, JP-A-2012-217766). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the timing for ending the time-saving game is the same, the player can immediately know whether or not the time-saving game has ended, so that the game becomes monotonous, and the interest of the game is increased. There was a problem that it would decrease. In the above-described gaming machine, an object is to provide a game that enhances the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the timing for setting the first gaming state can be made different based on the type of the end condition that has been established, so that when the end condition is established, the player is also interested in the type. You can have. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress early getting tired of the game.

  In the gaming machine E1, when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result, the game machine E1 has a small privilege game execution means for executing a small privilege game different from the bonus game, The ending condition setting means includes at least a first ending condition that can be satisfied when the dynamic display is performed, and a second ending condition that can be satisfied when the determination result of the determination means is the second determination result. And the game state setting means, when it is determined that the first end condition is satisfied, the corresponding dynamic display ends, and the identification information is stopped and displayed. The first game state is set based on the fact that the second end condition is satisfied, and the first game state is set based on the execution of the corresponding small privilege game. Specially Game machine E2 to.

  According to the gaming machine E2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1. That is, since the first game state is set according to the content of the established termination condition, there is an effect that a game without a sense of incongruity can be provided.

  The gaming machine E2 includes end condition determining means for determining whether one of the first end condition and the second end condition is satisfied, and the end condition determining means includes: A gaming machine E3 characterized in that the first end condition is determined prior to the end condition.

  According to the gaming machine E3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E2. That is, when a plurality of end conditions are satisfied by one determination performed by the determination unit, the first end condition is determined with priority. Therefore, a situation in which the first game state is set based on the establishment of the second end condition can be made less likely to occur, and a special feeling can be provided to the player.

  When the configuration of the gaming machine E3 is used, when the first game state is set based on the second end condition being satisfied, the first game is performed based on the first end condition being satisfied. It is preferable to configure the game system so as to be more advantageous to the player than to set the state. This allows the player to pay attention not only to whether or not the end condition is satisfied, but also to the satisfied end condition, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine E3, the termination condition determination unit determines whether the first termination condition is satisfied when the determination unit performs determination 1 and determines that the first termination condition is not satisfied. In this case, it is determined whether or not the second end condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine E4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E3. That is, since the timing for determining whether or not each end condition is satisfied is made different, it is possible to determine whether the first end condition is satisfied more reliably than the second end condition. effective.

  In any of the gaming machines E2 to E4, when the discrimination result of the discriminating means is the second discrimination result, the gaming machine includes game type determining means for determining a type of the small privilege game to be executed. The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the means determines one of a plurality of types in which the period during which the small privilege game is executed is different.

  According to the gaming machine E5, it is possible to execute a small privilege game whose execution period is different. Therefore, the timing at which the second game state ends can be greatly different over the game period during the small privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E5, a variable ball-in means that can be changed into a first state in which a game ball easily enters and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter than the first state, and the state of the variable ball-in means is variable. And a variable control means for controlling, wherein the small privilege game executing means executes variable control by the variable control means so that the variable ball entry means is in the first state as the small privilege game. A gaming machine E6.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E5, the following effects are produced. That is, the degree of advantage to the player is greatly different between the case where the first end condition is satisfied and the first game state is set and the case where the second end condition is satisfied and the first game state is set. be able to. Therefore, it is possible for the player to watch both the type of the established end condition and the type of the small privilege game to be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine E7, wherein in the gaming machine E6, the type of the small privilege game is such that the length of the period in which the variable ball-taking means is in the second state during the small privilege game is different.

  According to the gaming machine E7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E6. That is, according to the type of the small privilege game to be set, the amount of the privilege given to the player as the small privilege game is also variable, so that the type of the small privilege game to be executed can be watched by the player. This has the effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E7, the type of the small privilege game has a plurality of types in which the length of the period during which the variable ball entry means is in the first state during the small privilege game is the same. Gaming machine E8.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E7, the execution period of the small privilege game is different for a plurality of small privilege games in which the amount of privilege that can be given to the player as the small privilege game is the same. This has the effect that the length of the period in which the second gaming state is set can be varied.

<Characteristic F group> (Multiple time-saving games are selected by the player)
First ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, and a game ball entered by the first ball entry means The first determination is performed based on the acquisition of the first acquisition information that can be acquired when the game ball is entered, and the second acquisition information that can be acquired when a game ball enters the second ball entry means is acquired. Determining means for performing a second determination based on the information, display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means, and dynamic display performing means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means When the identification information for indicating the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game which is advantageous to the player, and the privilege game executing means executes the privilege game. After the end of the privilege game, the first game state and the first A game state setting means capable of setting an advantageous game state which is more advantageous to the player than a game state, and for executing the first determination when the advantageous game state is set by the game state setting means. A first advantageous game and, unlike the first game, a second advantageous game for executing the second discrimination, and a selection means capable of selecting a player. Gaming machine F1.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, a lottery of the game is determined by lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, the player An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a time-saving game in which a lottery is easily performed after execution of a privilege game is performed for a predetermined period (for example, JP-A-2012-217766). Such a gaming machine is configured to allow a player to play a game in which a game ball is fired toward an unusual game area when the above-described time-saving game is executed. The above-described gaming machine can provide a special feeling by executing a game method different from the normal game during a time-saving game in a gaming state advantageous to the player, but a predetermined game method is provided. However, there is a problem that the game is monotonous and the interest of the game is reduced. In the above-described gaming machine, an object is to provide a game that enhances the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the timing for setting the first gaming state can be made different based on the type of the end condition that has been established, so that when the end condition is established, the player is also interested in the type. You can have. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress early getting tired of the game.

  According to the gaming machine F1, since the player can select a game method in an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player, it is possible to provide a variety of games to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine F1, the award game executed by the first advantageous game is more advantageous to the player than the award game executed by the second advantageous game, and the gaming machine F2 is characterized in that: .

  The gaming machine F3, wherein in the gaming machine F1 or F2, the second advantageous game is such that the advantageous gaming state continues more easily than the first advantageous game.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, a game area in which a game ball can flow down, and a launching means capable of varying the firing intensity and allowing the game ball to reach the game area, A first game area that can flow down, and a second game area that is different from the first game area where game balls fired at a predetermined firing intensity different from the one firing intensity can flow down, The first ball entry means is provided in one game area, the second ball entry means is provided in the second game area, and the selection means changes the firing intensity of the firing means. Gaming machine F4.

  In the gaming machine F4, the game machine F4 has a variable ball-in means for enabling the game ball fired by the firing means to enter when the privilege game is executed, and the variable ball-in means is provided in the first game area. A gaming machine F5 characterized in that both the game balls flowing down and the game balls flowing down the second game area are configured to be able to enter the ball.

  In the gaming machine F4 or F5, when the advantageous state is set, there is provided a third ball entry means which makes it easier to enter than the first ball entry means, and a game ball enters the third ball entry means. The ball is played, and the first determination is also performed when the first determination condition is satisfied. The first advantageous game is a game in which a game ball is made to enter the third ball entry means. A gaming machine F6 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  In the gaming machine F6, the first ball entry means is provided in a third gaming area different from the first gaming area and the second gaming area in the gaming area. Machine F7.

  In any of the gaming machines F5 to F7, first detection means for detecting a game ball flowing down the first game area, and second detection means for detecting a game ball flowing down the second game area. An execution game discriminating unit for discriminating a type of the currently selected advantageous game based on a detection result of the first detection unit and a detection result of the second detection unit; A notifying means for notifying a player of information for indicating a determination result, the gaming machine F8 comprising:

  In the gaming machine F8, the notifying unit performs notification while the privilege game is being executed.

<Characteristic group G>
A variable ball entry means that can be changed between an open state in which game balls can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult for the game balls to enter than the open state, and the variable ball entry means for establishing the open condition A variable control means for varying the closed state from the closed state to the open state, a first flow path and a second flow path different from the first flow path for a game ball having entered the variable ball-in means, A distributing means capable of distributing a game ball having entered the variable ball-in means to one of the first flow path and the second flow path; Distribution state setting means for setting a first distribution state that is easy to distribute to the flow path and a second distribution state that is easy to distribute to the second flow path, and that a game ball has entered the first flow path Based on the first ball entry means into which game balls can enter, and based on the fact that game balls have entered the second flow path, game balls can enter. A second ball entry means, a first discriminating means for performing a first discrimination based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means, and a game ball entering the second ball entry means A second determining means for performing a second determination, a first gaming state in which the variable ball-in means is easily changed to the open state by the variable control means, and a second gaming state which is more than the first gaming state. A game state setting unit that can set a second game state that is difficult to be changed to an open state; and wherein the game state setting unit executes the first determination by the first determination unit or the second determination state. The game state is set based on the execution of the second judgment by the judgment means. When the first game state is set, the execution of the first judgment executes the second judgment. The second game state is more easily set than Game machine G1, which is a shall.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, a lottery of the game is determined by lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, the player An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets, with a predetermined probability, a probable variation game state in which a lottery result is advantageous after execution of a privilege game (for example, JP-A-2003-265765). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is a problem that the game is likely to be monotonous because only the probability-changing gaming state is set with a certain probability. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine further improved in the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine G1, performing the first determination can make the second gaming state less likely to be set than performing the second determination, so that when the first gaming state is set, The game can be played while expecting that one discrimination will be executed, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G1, the first bonus game is executed when the first determination means has a specific first determination result, and the first privilege game is executed when the second determination means has a specific second determination result. A bonus game execution means for executing a second bonus game which is more advantageous to the player than the bonus game, and according to a game state when the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is obtained. A gaming machine G2 having ratio changing means for changing a setting ratio set by the distribution state setting means to the first distribution state and the second distribution state.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1, the first distribution state and the second distribution state are determined according to the gaming state when the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is obtained. Since the ratio set in any one of the states is variable, there is an effect that the game can be diversified depending on the game state as well as the determination result.

  In the gaming machine G2, a plurality of gaming states are set as the gaming state, and one of the plurality of gaming states is determined based on the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result. A game machine G3 having selection setting means for selecting and setting the game state of the game machine G3.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, one game state is selected and set by the selection setting means based on the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that interest can be raised not only in the discrimination result but also in the game state to be set and the interest can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, a second variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which game balls are more difficult to enter than the first state. And a specific area in which a game ball that has entered the second variable ball entry means can enter the ball, and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the specific area. A gaming machine G4 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of playing any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, there is an effect that a game that expects whether or not to enter a specific area can be performed and the game can be diversified.

  In the gaming machine G4, the benefit provided by the benefit providing means sets the probability of being determined as the specific first determination result or the probability of being determined as the specific second determination result high until a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine G5 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G4, the probability of being determined as a specific first determination result or a specific second determination result can be varied, so that the gaming interest can be further improved. .

  In any of the gaming machines G1 and G3, when the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is obtained, the specific first determination is performed until an end condition is satisfied based on the specific condition being satisfied. A gaming machine G6 comprising special state setting means for setting a determination result or a probability of being determined as the specific second determination result higher than usual.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the player can be concerned about whether or not the end condition is satisfied, and the effect of improving the interest of the game can be improved. is there.

<Characteristic H group> (after shifting to the advantageous state, it is more advantageous to win after the specific condition is satisfied than to win before the specific condition is satisfied)
Discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition; discrimination means for performing discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means; A bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result. First state setting means for setting a first state that is advantageous to the game machine, wherein the gaming machine uses all the determination information acquired during the first state after the first state is set. Until the end, the case where the bonus game is executed before the predetermined specific condition is satisfied, and the case where the bonus game is executed after the specific condition is satisfied, For the player Gaming machine H1, wherein the interest degree is configured differently.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a hit game when a result of a lottery performed based on a winning of a game ball to a starting winning port is a hit. Among such gaming machines, there are those in which a plurality of states having different degrees of advantage for the player can be set, and a game aimed at hitting the game in various states is performed to improve the interest of the player in the game. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).

  However, in such a conventional game machine, while the same state is set, the degree of advantage of the player is constant, so that the game during the same game state is set becomes monotonous, There is a possibility that it becomes difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, when the bonus game is executed, the game can be performed by paying attention to whether or not the execution is performed before the specific condition is satisfied. There is an effect that it is possible to improve interest in the game.

  In the gaming machine H1, when the privilege game is not executed between the time when the first state is set and the time when the discrimination by the discriminating means is completed for the first predetermined number of times, the first state is set. A second state setting means for setting a disadvantageous second state, and the determination of the specific condition by the determination means for the second number of times less than the first number after the first state is set ends. A gaming machine H2, which is established when the award game is not executed during the period up to this point.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1, the degree of advantage of the privilege game is varied according to the number of determinations executed in the first state, so that the player's interest in the game is further improved. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine H2, storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, up to a predetermined number of information, at least until the discrimination information is used for discrimination by the discrimination means, The second state is configured such that it is more difficult to obtain the determination information by the determination information obtaining means than the first state, and the specific condition is that the first state is set. A gaming machine H3, which is established when the bonus game is not executed until the first number of determinations by the determination means is completed.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H2, the discrimination executed until the first state ends, and the discrimination information stored in the storage means at the time when the second state is set. Since the degree of advantage when the bonus game is executed varies depending on the determination based on, the game is performed by paying attention to the number of pieces of determination information stored in the storage means at the time when the second state is set. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine H3, first ball entry means capable of entering game balls, second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and game balls can be entered into the second ball entry means. A first position, and a second position at which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. The second state is established based on that the game ball has entered at least one of the second ball entry means, and the second state is more variable from the second position than the first state. A gaming machine H4 characterized in that it is difficult to change to the first position.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H3, the player can easily enter the ball into a different ball entry means depending on whether the state is the first state or the second state. There is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, a third ball entry means in which a game ball can enter, a third position in which a game ball can enter the third ball entry means, and a third position. A second variable means that can be changed to a fourth position at which the game ball becomes difficult to enter the ball; and a second variable means based on a result of the determination by the determining means being the specific determination result. A variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is changed from the fourth position to the third position for a predetermined period, and a variable game execution means provided at a position where a game ball that has entered the third entry means can enter the ball. A special area, wherein the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game based on a game ball having entered the specific area.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H4, it is possible to perform a game by paying attention to whether or not a game ball enters a specific area during execution of the variable game. Since it is possible, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine H5, a launching means capable of launching a game ball in any one of a plurality of directions including at least a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction in accordance with an operation of a player. Wherein the predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied at least in the first state when a game ball is fired in the second direction rather than a game ball is fired in the first direction. The third ball entry means is configured such that a game ball fired in the first direction is more likely to enter than a game ball fired in the second direction. A gaming machine H6 provided at a position where it is easy to play.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H5, when the variable game is executed while the game ball is being fired in the first direction in the first state, the game is fired in the first direction. Since it is possible to suppress the game ball from entering the specific area of the third ball entry means as it is, in the first state, the firing direction is changed to the second direction to allow the game ball to enter the specific area. By changing the direction, or by continuously firing the game ball in the first direction, the player can select whether to end the variable game without entering the game ball into the specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the first state setting means sets the first state to a state until the determination using all the determination information obtained during the first state is completed. In the case where the bonus game is executed before the specific condition is satisfied, the first state is set at a first rate as a state after the bonus game is completed, and the specific condition is set. Is established, the first state is set at a second rate higher than the first rate as a state after the privilege game is terminated when the privilege game is executed. Gaming machine H7 characterized by:

  According to the gaming machine H7, in any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, when the privilege game is executed after the specific condition is satisfied, the ratio of setting the advantageous first state is higher. The game can be played in a stronger expectation that the bonus game will be executed after the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine H7, the first state setting means sets the state after the end of the privilege game when the privilege game is executed based on the specific determination result in the two states. The gaming machine H8, wherein the first state is set at a third ratio higher than the first ratio.

  According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H7, the disadvantageous second state has a higher ratio of setting the advantageous first state than the first state before the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an excessive disadvantage of the second state.

<Feature I Group> (During the time reduction, let the player select the timing to execute the special 2 lottery with high expectation)
Discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on establishment of a discriminating condition, and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a result of the discrimination of the discriminating means being a specific discrimination result; A first gaming state setting means for setting a first gaming state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, and a specific condition predetermined in the first gaming state. And a second game state setting means for setting a second game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state based on the fact that the first game state is established. By performing a game, it becomes difficult to execute the privilege game, and it becomes difficult to satisfy the specific condition. By performing a game with a second game method different from the first game method, the first game is performed. A place where you played games using the game method The easily award game is executed than, and gaming machine wherein the specific condition is configured to easily obtained I1.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a hit game when a result of a lottery performed based on a winning of a game ball to a starting winning port is a hit. Among such gaming machines, there are those in which a plurality of states having different degrees of advantage for the player can be set, and a game aimed at hitting the game in various states is performed to improve the interest of the player in the game. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, while the same gaming state is set, it may be disadvantageous for the player if the player does not play the game by the same gaming method. During the setting, the game method corresponding to the game state has to be continuously executed. Therefore, the game may be monotonous, and it may be difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, the playability can be made different depending on whether the game is played by the first game method or the second game method. There is an effect that it can be improved.

  In the gaming machine I1, the discriminating means performs first discriminating means based on establishment of a first discriminating condition, and discriminates based on establishment of a second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition. And the second discriminating means for executing the bonus game. The first discriminating means is more difficult to execute the privilege game when the discrimination is executed than the discrimination by the second discriminating means. In addition, the specific condition is hardly satisfied, and the first game method performs the determination by the first determination unit more easily than the determination by the second determination unit. And the second game method is configured to be more easily performed by the second determination means than by the first determination means. A gaming machine I2 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I1, the playability in the first gaming state can be made different depending on the type of the determination means for performing the determination. There is an effect that it can be improved.

  In the gaming machine I2, the specific condition is based on that a predetermined first number of determinations by the first determination unit have been performed without executing the privilege game after the first game state was set. It is established based on the fact that the bonus game is not executed after the second game state is set, and that the second discrimination means performs the second number of times less than the first number of times. A gaming machine I3 characterized by being configured as described above.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I2, there is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to the number of determinations by the first determination unit and the number of determinations by the second determination unit.

  In the gaming machine I2 or I3, a launching means capable of launching a game ball, and a first input provided at a position where a gaming ball fired in a specific direction predetermined by the launching means can enter the ball. A ball means, a game ball emitted in the specific direction is provided at a position where the ball can enter, a second ball means different from the first ball means, and a game ball to the first ball means. First discrimination information acquisition means capable of acquiring discrimination information to be used for discrimination by the discrimination means based on the incoming ball; and A second discrimination information acquisition unit capable of acquiring discrimination information, wherein the first discrimination unit executes discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition unit, The second determination means is provided in the second determination information obtaining means. Characterized in that it is intended to perform the discrimination using the discrimination information acquired What game machine I4.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I2 or I3, in the first gaming state, the game ball is fired in a specific direction to determine the first determining means and the second determining means. Since it is possible to execute both of the determination and the determination, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine I4, the first discriminating information acquired by the first discriminating information acquiring means can be stored up to a first predetermined number of information as an upper limit until it is used for discriminating by the first discriminating means. A second storage capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the storage means and the second discrimination information acquisition means until the discrimination information is used for the discrimination by the second discrimination means with a predetermined second number of information as an upper limit. Means, wherein the second determination means is configured to suppress execution of the determination when one or more of the determination information is stored in the first storage means. A gaming machine I5.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I4, in the first gaming state, it is possible to preferentially execute the determination by the first determination unit in which the specific condition is hardly satisfied even if the determination is performed. The first game state can be configured to be easily continued for a long time. Therefore, since the player can enjoy the first game state for a longer period of time, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine I5, in the second game method, when one or more pieces of the discrimination information are stored in the second storage means, the discrimination information stored in the second storage means is discriminated. A gaming machine I6 characterized in that it is a gaming method for performing a game such that firing of a gaming ball is suppressed until the game is used.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I5, by performing the second gaming method, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the determination by the first determination means, so that the bonus game is easily performed. Can be. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can have a higher sense of expectation for each discrimination.

  In any of the gaming machines I4 to I6, a first position at which a game ball can enter the first ball entry means, and a game ball enters the first ball entry means from the first position. A first variable means that can be changed to a difficult second position; a third position at which a game ball can enter the second entering means; and the second entering ball than the third position. A second variable means which can be changed to a fourth position at which the game ball is difficult to enter the means, a passing means provided at a position at which the game ball fired in the specific direction can pass, A third ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball having passed through the passage means can enter, and a third ball entry means provided at a position at which a game ball having passed the passage means can enter the ball; Is different from the fourth ball entry means, and the game ball that has passed through the passage means is divided into the third ball entry means and the fourth ball entry means. A distributing means for distributing the light to a certain direction, a fifth position at which the game ball fired in the specific direction can pass through the passing means, and the game ball becomes more difficult to pass through the passing means than the fifth position. A third variable means that can be changed to a sixth position, and a variable control that controls the variable means to change from the sixth position to the fifth position for a predetermined period based on satisfaction of a predetermined variable condition. Means, wherein the first variable means is configured to change from the second position to the first position based on a game ball having entered the third ball entry means. Wherein the second variable means is configured to change from the fourth position to the third position based on a game ball having entered the fourth ball input means. A gaming machine I7.

  According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I4 to I6, it is possible to cause a game to be played by paying attention to the type of the entering ball means by which the game balls passing through the passing means are sorted by the sorting means. Since it is possible, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine I7, the variable condition is configured such that the first gaming state is more easily established than the second gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I7, in the first gaming state, the gaming ball can easily pass through the passage means, so that the game can be played more efficiently.

  In the gaming machine I7 or I8, the first gaming state is configured such that gaming balls that have passed through the passing means are more easily distributed to the third entering means than to the fourth entering means. A gaming machine I9, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I7 or I8, when the game ball passes through the passing means, the possibility that the first ball entry means can enter the ball rather than the second ball entry means Since the height can be increased, there is an effect that the configuration can be configured so that the determination by the first determination unit is more easily performed.

  In any of the gaming machines I2 to I9, a predetermined execution condition that can be satisfied based on a determination result of the determination unit being a second determination result different from the specific determination result is established. A second privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game, wherein the second discriminating means has a higher probability that the discrimination result becomes the second discrimination result than the first discriminating means. A gaming machine I10, characterized in that it has been done.

  According to the gaming machine I10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I2 to I9, when the determination by the second determination unit is performed, not only the specific determination result but also the second determination result is obtained. Can be expected to play the game, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  The gaming machine I10 is configured to be variable between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. The variable ball entry means provided with the specific area, and based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being the second discrimination result, the variable ball entry means is switched from the second state to the A variable game execution means for executing a variable game changed to one state, wherein the execution condition is established based on a game ball entering the variable ball entry means entering the specific area. A gaming machine I11.

  According to the gaming machine I11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I10, when the variable game is executed, it is possible to cause the player to play the game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the specific area. There is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

<Feature J Group> (Games with higher jackpot expectation after the advantageous state ends than during the advantageous state)
A first determination unit that performs a first determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition; and a first determination unit that performs a first determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. A second discriminating means for executing a second discrimination having a high degree of advantage for the player, wherein the first discriminating condition is easily satisfied based on the satisfaction of a predetermined setting condition. A game state setting means for setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a game state and a second game state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state; In a case where the set condition is satisfied in the first game state and the second game state is set, if a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the second game state is more than the first game state. The first state is easily established for the determination condition. Gaming machine J1, wherein those which are.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a hit game when a result of a lottery performed based on a winning of a game ball to a starting winning port is a hit. Among such gaming machines, there are those in which a plurality of states having different degrees of advantage for the player can be set, and a game aimed at hitting the game in various states is performed to improve the interest of the player in the game. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that the player's motivation to play a game may be reduced when the game state shifts from an advantageous gaming state to an unfavorable gaming state.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, even if the disadvantageous second game state is set, the advantageous second determination condition is more likely to be satisfied while the first state is formed. There is an effect that the player's interest in the game when the state is formed can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J1, when the setting condition is satisfied in the first gaming state and the second gaming state is set, the predetermined specific condition is not satisfied in the first gaming state. A gaming machine J2 configured to form a second state in which the second determination condition is less likely to be satisfied than in the first state.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1, it is possible to cause the player to play a game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied at the time when the second gaming state is set. There is an effect that can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, based on the fact that one of the determination result of the first determination means and the determination result of the second determination means has reached a predetermined specific determination result, The game machine further includes a privilege game execution unit capable of executing an advantageous privilege game, wherein the first determination unit is configured to obtain the specific determination result at a predetermined first probability. The gaming machine J3, wherein the second determining means is configured to provide the specific determination result with a second probability higher than the first probability.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1 or J2, even after the advantageous first gaming state is completed, the probability of obtaining a specific determination result is high until the specific condition is satisfied. At least until the specific condition is satisfied, the game can be played while giving an expectation for the privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine J3, the gaming machine is configured to perform the second determination as compared with the first state without changing the gaming state based on a predetermined first condition being satisfied in the first state. A gaming machine J4 configured to form a second state in which a condition is difficult to be satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J3, a plurality of states having different degrees of advantage can be formed as the second gaming state, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. This has the effect.

  In any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and a game ball to the first ball entry means A first discriminating information acquiring means for acquiring first discriminating information for use in discriminating by the first discriminating means based on that the ball has entered, and a game ball having entered the second ball-in means. A second discrimination information acquisition unit for acquiring second discrimination information to be used for discrimination by the second discrimination unit based on the first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition unit; The first discriminator capable of storing until the discriminator is used for discrimination by the first discriminator, and the second discriminant information acquired by the second discriminator information acquirer is stored as predetermined information The number is used as an upper limit for the determination by the second determining means. And a second storage unit capable of storing the first determination unit, wherein the first determination unit performs the first determination using the first determination information stored in the first storage unit. Wherein the second determination means performs the second determination using the second determination information stored in the second storage means, and wherein the first determination is The first game state is such that a game ball enters both the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means. The second game state is configured such that at least a game ball is less likely to enter the second ball entry means than the first game state. A gaming machine J5, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the determination by the first determination means is executed with priority, so that the second storage at the end of the first gaming state. This has the effect that the second determination information can be stored in a state in which more means are stored.

  In the gaming machine J5, a first position at which game balls can enter the second ball entry means, and a second position at which game balls become more difficult to enter the first ball entry means than the first position. And a variable means that can be changed to a position, wherein the first game state is configured such that the variable means is more easily changed from the second position to the first position than the second game state. The first state is a state in which the second game state is set and at least one piece of the second determination information is stored in the second storage means. A gaming machine J6, which is characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine J5, more second determination information is stored in the second storage means while the determination by the second determination means is being executed with priority. Therefore, when the second game state is set, the first state can be more reliably formed.

  In the gaming machine J6, a third ball entry means capable of entering a game ball is provided, and the first discrimination information acquisition means is configured to play a game to at least one of the first ball entry means and the third ball entry means. The first discrimination information is obtained based on a ball having entered, and the second game state is such that a game ball enters the third ball entry unit rather than the first ball entry unit. A gaming machine J7, characterized in that the gaming machine J7 is configured to be easier to enter the third entering means than to the second entering means.

  According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J6, it is possible to vary the pitching means that can easily enter the ball according to the gaming state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. There is.

  In any of the gaming machines J1 to J7, a fourth ball entry means in which a game ball can enter, a third position in which a game ball can enter the fourth ball entry means, and a third position. A second variable means that can be changed to a fourth position at which the game ball becomes difficult to enter the ball; and a second variable means based on a result of the determination by the determining means being the specific determination result. A variable game execution means for executing a variable game which is changed from the fourth position to the third position for a predetermined period; and a game ball which has entered the fourth ball entry means is provided at a position where it can enter the ball. A gaming machine J8, characterized in that the bonus game execution means executes the bonus game based on a game ball having entered the specific area.

  According to the gaming machine J8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J7, when the variable game is executed, the game is performed with a strong expectation that the game ball will enter a specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic K group> (suppress the increase in suspension immediately after the end of the advantageous state)
A ball entry means into which game balls can enter, a first position at which game balls can enter the ball entry means, and a second position at which game balls are more difficult to enter than the first position; A variable means that can be changed to, a discriminating information acquiring means for acquiring discriminating information based on a game ball having entered the ball entering means, and using the discriminating information acquired by the discriminating information acquiring means. A gaming machine having: a discriminating means for executing discrimination; and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a result of the discrimination by the discriminating means being a specific discrimination result. A first game state setting means for setting a first game state based on establishment of a first set condition; and a first game state based on the second set condition being satisfied in the first game state. The variable means moves from the second position to the first position A second game state setting means for setting a second game state which is difficult to change; and a case where at least the variable means is changed to the first position over a period before and after the second setting condition is satisfied. A game machine K1 comprising: control means for controlling a game ball to be difficult to enter the ball entry means.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a bonus game when a result of a lottery performed based on a winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening is a predetermined result. In some of such gaming machines, a plurality of gaming states having different degrees of advantage for the player can be set, and when a gaming state advantageous for the player is set, a lottery can be easily executed (for example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2001-038007).

  However, depending on the timing of switching from the advantageous game state to the disadvantageous game state, a situation may occur in which the lottery can be executed in the same manner as the advantageous game state, even though the disadvantageous game state is set. As a result, there is a problem that the degree of expectation of the privilege game in the disadvantageous game state cannot be equalized.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the ball entry means immediately after the establishment of the second setting condition. There is an effect that the degree of expectation can be made uniform.

  In the gaming machine K1, the game machine K1 is provided with a second ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, and the control means moves to the first position at least when the variable means straddles before and after the second set condition is satisfied. A gaming machine K2 for controlling a game ball to enter the second ball entry means more easily than the ball entry means in a variable state.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K1, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably suppress a game ball from entering the ball entry means immediately after the second set condition is satisfied.

  In the gaming machine K2, the discrimination information acquisition means acquires the discrimination information based on a game ball having entered at least one of the ball entry means and the second ball entry means. The means is that the game ball has entered the ball entry means, rather than performing the discrimination using the discrimination information obtained based on the game ball having entered the second ball entry means. A gaming machine K3 characterized in that the probability of obtaining the specific determination result is higher when the determination is performed using the determination information acquired based on the determination information.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K2, it is possible to suppress that an advantageous determination that is likely to result in a specific determination result is frequently executed even after the second gaming state is set. This has the effect.

  In the gaming machine K2 or K3, when the variable means is located at the first position, the game ball can flow in, and when the variable means is located in the second position, it is difficult to flow. A specific flow path provided, and a distribution means for distributing a game ball flowing down the specific flow path to one of the ball entry means and the second ball entry means, and the control means comprises: And controlling the distributing means so that the distributing means makes it easier for the distributing means to distribute the game balls to the second entering ball means for at least a predetermined period after the second setting condition is satisfied. A gaming machine K4 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K2 or K3, the effect that the gaming ball can be reliably prevented from being distributed to the ball entry means after the second gaming state is set. is there.

  In the gaming machine K4, the control means includes a first distribution state in which game balls reaching the distribution means are distributed to the ball-in means, and a second distribution state in which game balls are distributed to the second ball-in means. Controls the distribution means so as to be switched in a predetermined specific switching pattern, and the specific switching pattern is used for a period set in the second distribution state in the predetermined period. The ratio is configured to be easily higher than the ratio of the period set in the first distribution state, and at least a part of the period from when the first game state is set to when the second set condition is satisfied. A gaming machine K5 characterized in that, in the period, the ratio of the period set in the first distribution state is higher than the predetermined period.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K4, in the first gaming state, the ease of entering the ball entry means can be varied according to the distribution state of the distribution means. There is an effect that a game can be played while paying attention to the state of the minute means.

  In the gaming machine K5, the control means controls the distribution means in the specific switching pattern based on the setting of the first gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine K5, when the first state is set, simple control of setting a specific switching pattern every time may be executed, thereby reducing the processing load. There is an effect that can be.

<Characteristic L group> (It is more advantageous to hit during pullback time than to hit during the probability change state)
Discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on the satisfaction of a discriminating condition, and a privilege for executing a privilege game which is advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means being a predetermined specific discrimination result. And a game execution means, based on establishment of a predetermined setting condition, a first game state, a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a second game state Game state setting means for setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a third game state that is more advantageous to the player than the state, and the gaming machine includes the third game state A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined element relating to the degree of advantage is more likely to have a higher degree of advantage when the predetermined first condition is satisfied in the second game state than in the second game state. L1.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a hit game when a result of a lottery performed based on a winning of a game ball to a starting winning port is a hit. Among such gaming machines, there are those in which a plurality of states having different degrees of advantage for the player can be set, and a game aimed at hitting the game in various states is performed to improve the interest of the player in the game. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when a transition from an advantageous gaming state to an unfavorable gaming state occurs, there is a possibility that the player's motivation to play a game may be reduced. Some of such conventional gaming machines do not directly transition from an advantageous first gaming state (for example, a probable change state) to a most disadvantageous second gaming state (for example, a normal state), but to a first gaming state. The state is shifted to a third gaming state (for example, a time saving state) having an intermediate degree of advantage between the state and the second gaming state, and the state is shifted to the first gaming state only when the third gaming state does not win. Some things make it happen.

  However, even in a gaming machine having such a specification, the degree of advantage is reduced at the time of transition to the second gaming state, so that it has been difficult to fundamentally suppress a decrease in motivation for a game. Therefore, there is a possibility that it may be difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, while the first condition is satisfied, the predetermined element has a higher degree of advantage in the second gaming state having a lower degree of advantage. There is an effect that it is possible to improve interest in the game.

  In the gaming machine L2, the gaming machine becomes the specific determination result while the first condition is satisfied in the second gaming state, rather than the specific determination result in the third gaming state. A gaming machine L2 characterized in that it is configured to be more advantageous in the case of the game machine L2.

  In the gaming machine L1 or L2, the gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state based on a predetermined condition established in the third gaming state. The predetermined determination result in the second game state set based on the establishment of the specific condition is more than the predetermined determination result in the third game state than the specific determination result in the third game state. A gaming machine L3 characterized in that the degree of advantage of the elements is easily increased.

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L1 or L2, in the third gaming state, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while expecting that the specific condition is not satisfied. When the two game states are set, the degree of advantage of the predetermined element is increased, so that there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine L3, the gaming state setting means determines whether the second condition is satisfied in the third gaming state or when the predetermined second condition is satisfied in the first gaming state. The gaming machine is configured to be able to set a gaming state, and in the gaming machine, the specific condition is satisfied more than the second gaming state set based on the satisfaction of the second condition. The gaming machine L4, wherein the second gaming state set based on the above is configured to easily increase the degree of advantage of the predetermined element.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L3, there is an effect that even in the same second gaming state, a novel gaming property that the degree of advantage can be varied can be realized.

  In the gaming machine L3 or L4, the specific condition includes at least a first specific condition and a second specific condition different from the first specific condition, and the gaming machine includes the third specific condition. The second game state, which is set based on the establishment of the first specific condition, is configured such that the degree of advantage of the predetermined element is more likely to be higher than the game state. Gaming machine L5.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L3 or L4, in the third gaming state, it can be more strongly expected that the first specific condition is satisfied than the second specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine L5, a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game as a type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution unit. The game state setting means includes a type determining means for determining a type of one privilege game from the middle, and the game state setting means determines the first privilege game by the type determining means as the specific determination result in the third game state. The gaming machine L6, characterized in that a game state after the end of the first privilege game is set to the second gaming state as a result of the second specific condition being satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine L5, when the first privilege game is determined in the third gaming state, the disadvantageous second gaming state is set and the degree of advantage of the predetermined element is also reduced. In the case where a specific determination result is obtained, there is an effect that a game can be performed in expectation that the first privilege game is not determined.

  In the gaming machine L6, the gaming state setting means terminates the second bonus game when the type determination means determines the second privilege game in the third gaming state as the specific determination result. It is configured such that a later gaming state can be set to the third gaming state. In the third gaming state, the specific determination result is obtained in the third gaming state, and the type determination unit When the second privilege game is determined, the control means controls the game state setting means to set the second game state if a predetermined specific setting condition is satisfied, The game state setting means sets the second game state by satisfying the first specific condition by controlling the control means to set the second game state. Game machine L7 which is characterized.

  According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L6, when the second privilege game is determined in the third gaming state, an advantageous third gaming state is set or the second gaming state is set. Even if the predetermined element has a higher degree of advantage, it is more strongly expected that the second privilege game is determined when a specific determination result is obtained in the third game state. There is an effect that a game can be performed.

  In the gaming machine L7, the specific setting condition is established based on the determination of the second privilege game continuously for a predetermined number of times. .

  According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L7, there is an effect that the game can be performed in expectation of the second privilege game being determined a specific number of times.

  In the gaming machine L5 or L6, in the third game state, the game machine L5 or L6 further includes a second determination unit that performs a second determination based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. A gaming machine L9, wherein the second gaming state is set with the result of a predetermined first determination being the satisfaction of the second specific condition.

  According to the gaming machine L9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L5 or L6, a player who has set a second gaming state having a low degree of advantage as a first determination result in the third gaming state has been set. This has the effect of reducing disappointment.

  In the gaming machine L9, before the determination of the first predetermined number of times is completed after the third gaming state is set, the determination result of the second determination means is the same as the third determination state. The second game state is set based on the result of the first judgment, and after the judgment of the first predetermined number of times after the third game state is set, the second judgment means is set. A gaming machine L10 for setting the first gaming state based on the result of the determination being the first determination result.

  According to the gaming machine L10, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L9, the effect of reducing the disappointment of the player when the first determination result is obtained with a small number of determinations in the third gaming state. There is.

<Characteristic M group> (Chance zone after the end of pullback time)
A determining means for performing a determination based on the satisfaction of a predetermined determination condition; and executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on a determination result of the determination means being a predetermined specific determination result. A plurality of at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game having a higher degree of advantage than the first privilege game as a type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means. A first type of game in which the second privilege game is determined at a first rate by the type determination means based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. Game state setting means for setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and the second game state Configuration The second privilege game is likely to be determined at a rate higher than the first rate until a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the fact that the matter has been established and another gaming state has been set. A state control means for controlling the game machine to be in a special state.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a hit game when a result of a lottery performed based on a winning of a game ball to a starting winning port is a hit. Among such gaming machines, there are those in which a plurality of states having different degrees of advantage for the player can be set, and a game aimed at hitting the game in various states is performed to improve the interest of the player in the game. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when a transition is made from an advantageous gaming state to an unfavorable gaming state, the player can be satisfied by being able to play in the advantageous gaming state and try to continue the game. There was a problem that it became hard to imagine.

  Some of such conventional gaming machines do not directly transition from an advantageous first gaming state (for example, a probable change state) to a most disadvantageous second gaming state (for example, a normal state), but to a first gaming state. The state is shifted to a third gaming state (for example, a time saving state) having an intermediate degree of advantage between the state and the second gaming state, and the state is shifted to the first gaming state only when the third gaming state does not win. Some things make it happen.

  However, even in a gaming machine having such a specification, there is a possibility that the player may be satisfied with the game at the time when the second gaming state ends, so the player's motivation after shifting from the second gaming state to the first gaming state. Has been difficult to maintain. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the operation rate of the gaming machine after the transition to the first gaming state.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, since the special state is set when the transition from the advantageous second game state to another game state is performed, it is possible to make the player intend to continue the game during the special state. . Therefore, there is an effect that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In the gaming machine M1, the state control unit determines that the special condition is satisfied until the specific condition is satisfied based on the setting of the setting condition and the setting of the first gaming state in the second state. A gaming machine M2 characterized in that it is controlled so that

  According to the gaming machine M2, when a transition is made from the advantageous second gaming state to the first gaming state where the degree of advantage is low, the special state is established. Therefore, when the second gaming state ends, the player quits the game. Can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In the gaming machine M1 or M2, the discriminating means performs a discrimination based on the first discrimination condition being satisfied, and a second discriminating condition which is different from the first discriminating condition. And a second determining means for performing the determination by the type determining means. The type determining means performs the second determining rather than the specific result of the first determining means. When the determination result of the means is the specific determination result, the second privilege game is more easily determined, and the state control means sets the first determination as the special state. The gaming machine M3, wherein the determination of the means is controlled so as to be more difficult to execute than the determination of the second determination means.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M1 or M2, during the special state, the determination by the second determination means is easily performed, so that a specific determination result is obtained during the special state. There is an effect that a game can be performed with a stronger expectation.

  In the gaming machine M3, a launching means capable of launching a game ball, a first ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball fired in a first direction by the launching means can enter the ball, and the first direction A game ball fired in is provided at a position where it can enter the ball, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and a game ball fired in the first direction becomes difficult to enter, and A third ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball fired in a second direction different from the first direction can enter, and a game ball can enter the third ball entry means; And a second position in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entry device. First discriminating information acquiring means capable of acquiring discriminating information to be used for discriminating by the discriminating means, And a third discriminating means, and a second discriminating information acquiring means capable of acquiring the discriminating information based on a game ball having entered at least one of the third discriminating means. Performing the determination using the determination information obtained by the first determination information obtaining means, wherein the second determination means uses the determination information obtained by the second determination information obtaining means. Performing the determination, wherein the variable means is configured to be more easily changed from the second position to the first position in the second game state than in the first game state. A gaming machine M4 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M3, the determination by the second determining means can be executed even in the second gaming state in which the special state is not set. There is an effect that a game can be played while strongly expecting a specific determination result in the determination.

  In the gaming machine M3 or M4, display means capable of displaying identification information, first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination means, and the second determination means And a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the result of the determination. A dynamic display means comprising at least dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information by the dynamic display means. Dynamic display period determining means for determining a display period, wherein the state control means determines that the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information by the first dynamic display means is the special state. The gaming machine M5, wherein the second dynamic display means controls the dynamic display period of the identification information to be longer than a dynamic display period.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M3 or M4, in a special state, a long dynamic display period is easily set when the first determination unit performs the determination. The determination by the second determination means can be executed a plurality of times during the target display period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the possibility that a specific determination result is obtained by the determination of the second determination unit.

  In the gaming machine M5, the dynamic display means overlaps the dynamic display of the identification information by the first dynamic display means with the dynamic display of the identification information by the second dynamic display means. A gaming machine M6 characterized in that the gaming machine M6 is capable of performing the game.

  According to the gaming machine M6, there is an effect that the determination by the first determination unit and the determination by the second determination unit can be executed more efficiently.

  In any of the gaming machines M1 to M6, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state, the second gaming state, and a third gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. One game state is set out of a plurality of game states including at least, and the second game state is set by the game state setting means based on a specific setting condition being satisfied in the third game state. A gaming machine M7 configured to be set.

  According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines M1 to M6, the advantageous third gaming state is completed, the second gaming state is set, and further, the second gaming state is terminated. In the case where the game has shifted to the first game state, the special state is formed, whereby there is an effect that the disappointment of the player can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines M1 to M7, the gaming state setting means terminates the predetermined number of times of determination by the determining means without executing the privilege game after the second gaming state is set. The game machine M8 is characterized in that another game state is set as the establishment of the set condition.

  According to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines M1 to M7, the player in the case where the bonus game is shifted to another gaming state without being executed in the advantageous second gaming state. There is an effect that disappointment can be alleviated.

<Characteristic N Group> (In the advantageous state, it is easier to fire the game balls at the second firing interval longer than the first firing interval than to fire the game balls at the first firing interval. Playability)
In a gaming machine having an operating means operable by a player and a firing means capable of firing a game ball in accordance with an operation performed on the operating means, a game is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. That can set one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state disadvantageous to the player and a second gaming state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state State setting means, wherein in the second gaming state, the game ball is easily fired at the first firing interval by the firing means while at least a predetermined condition is satisfied. A case where the operation means is operated with the second operation content in which the game ball is easily fired at a firing interval longer than the first firing interval, than the operation means is operated with the first operation content. Is advantageous Gaming machine N1, wherein those that are configured to easily Ri.

  According to the gaming machine N1, a novel gaming property in which a longer firing interval is more advantageous can be realized, and therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine N1, a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, and discrimination information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined discrimination information based on that a game ball has entered the ball entry means, A discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on the discrimination information obtained by the discrimination information obtaining means; A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game, wherein the gaming machine performs the second operation rather than operating the operation means with the first operation content while the specific condition is satisfied. When the operation means is operated with the content, the number of times the determination means determines the number of times until the determination using all the determination information acquired in the second game state is completed is easily increased. That Game machine N2 to butterflies.

  According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N1, a novel gaming property in which the longer the firing interval increases the number of determinations by the determining means can be realized, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. There is an effect that it can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine N2, the second ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, and the second discrimination information capable of acquiring the discrimination information based on that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. Acquisition means, and storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means, up to a predetermined number of information, until the discrimination information is used for discrimination by the discrimination means. A first discriminating unit that performs discrimination using the discrimination information obtained by the discrimination information obtaining unit, and a second discriminating unit that performs discrimination using the discrimination information obtained by the second discrimination information obtaining unit And a discriminating means, wherein the discriminating of the first discriminating means is liable to be an advantageous discriminating result more easily than the discriminating of the second discriminating means. Is While the condition is satisfied, the case where the operation means is operated with the second operation content is acquired in the second game state, rather than the operation of the operation means with the first operation content. A gaming machine N3 characterized in that the number of determinations by the first determination means is easily increased until the determination using all the determination information is completed.

  According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N2, the number of times of determination by the first determining means having a high degree of advantage can be changed according to the operation content while the specific condition is satisfied. Since it is possible to realize a great game performance, there is an effect that a player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine N3, the determination by the second determination means is configured to be executed with higher priority than the determination by the first determination means.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N3, the determination by the second determining means having a lower degree of advantage is preferentially executed, so that it is more desirable to increase the number of determinations by the second determining means. There is an effect that it can be desired.

  In the gaming machine N3 or N4, the gaming state setting means determines in the second gaming state that the first determination means has completed a predetermined first number of times without executing the privilege game. The game state setting means sets the first game state in the second game state, wherein the privilege game is not executed in the second game state, and the second discrimination of the second number is larger than the first number. A gaming machine N5 for setting the first gaming state based on completion of the means determination.

  According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N3 or N4, the condition under which the first gaming state is set is made different between the number of determinations by the first determination means and the number of determinations by the second determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Any one of the gaming machines N2 to N5, comprising: a display unit capable of displaying identification information; and a dynamic display unit dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating a determination result of the determination unit. The operation content is characterized in that the operation content is configured such that the game ball is easily fired so that the game ball enters the ball entry means in a state where the dynamic display of the identification information is not executed. Gaming machine N6.

  According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines N2 to N5, by performing the second operation content, a period in which the dynamic display is not executed is more likely to occur. The period set in the gaming state can be configured to be easily lengthened. Therefore, there is an effect that the second game state can be enjoyed for a longer period.

  In any of the gaming machines N1 to N6, the launching unit is configured to be able to launch a game ball at a launch interval equal to or longer than a predetermined specific launch interval in accordance with the operation content on the operating unit. The gaming machine N7, wherein the operation of the first operation content is configured to be an operation content in which a game ball is easily fired at the specific firing interval by the firing means.

  According to the gaming machine N7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines N1 to N6, the operation of the first operation content is configured by a relatively simple operation of firing a game ball at the shortest firing interval. Therefore, it can be easily performed regardless of the skill of the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be improved.

<Feature O Group> (After shifting to the advantageous state, it is more advantageous to win after the specific condition is satisfied than to win before the specific condition is satisfied)
Discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition; discrimination means for performing discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means; A bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the result of the specific determination. A game state setting means for setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least the game state, wherein the gaming machine acquires the first game state after the first game state has been set. Until the discrimination using all the discrimination information has been completed, the specific discrimination result is obtained before the predetermined specific condition is satisfied, and after the specific condition is satisfied. so Gaming machine O1 that in the case became serial specific determination result, characterized in that the advantageous degree for the player is configured differently.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a hit game when a result of a lottery performed based on a winning of a game ball to a starting winning port is a hit. Among such gaming machines, there are those in which a plurality of states having different degrees of advantage for the player can be set, and a game aimed at hitting the game in various states is performed to improve the interest of the player in the game. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).

  However, in such a conventional game machine, while the same state is set, the degree of advantage of the player is constant, so that the game during the same game state is set becomes monotonous, There is a possibility that it becomes difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine O1, when a specific determination result is obtained, it is possible to cause the player to play a game by paying attention to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied, so that the player can play the game. There is an effect that the interest can be improved.

  In the gaming machine O1, during the period from when the first gaming state is set to when the determination using all the determination information acquired during the first gaming state is completed, a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. It is configured that the case in which the specific determination result is satisfied after the specific condition is satisfied is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the case in which the specific determination result is satisfied before the result is satisfied. Gaming machine O2 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine O1, in the case of transition to the first gaming state, a game is performed in expectation of a specific determination result after specific conditions are satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine O1 or O2, the gaming state setting means continuously sets the specific determination result after the first gaming state has been set, for a predetermined specific number of times by the determination means. A gaming machine O3, which sets a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state based on a different second determination result.

  According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1 or O2, in the first gaming state, it is possible to expect that a specific determination result is obtained by the end of the specific number of determinations. There is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine O3, the specific condition is that the second determination result is continuously obtained over the second number of times less than the specific number of times by the determination unit after the first game state is set. A gaming machine O4 characterized by being established based on the following.

  According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine O3, the degree of advantage of the privilege game is varied according to the number of determinations performed in the first gaming state, so that the player's interest in the game is further improved. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine O4, storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, up to a predetermined number of information, at least until the discrimination information is used for discrimination by the discrimination means, The second game state is configured such that the determination information acquisition means is more difficult to obtain the determination information than the first game state, and the specific condition is the first game state. Is established based on the fact that the second discrimination result is obtained continuously over the discrimination by the discrimination means of the specified number of times after the setting of the game machine O5.

  According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine O4, the determination executed until the first gaming state is completed and the time when the second gaming state is set are stored in the storage means. The advantage based on the discrimination information based on the discrimination information is varied when the bonus game is executed, so that the game is focused on the number of discrimination information stored in the storage means at the time when the second game state is set. There is an effect that it can be performed.

<Feature P group> (During the time reduction, let the player select the timing to execute the special 2 lottery with high expectation)
First gaming state setting means for setting a first gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition; and the first gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition in the first gaming state. And second game state setting means for setting a second game state having a different degree of advantage from the first game state. The first game state makes it difficult for the specific condition to be satisfied by playing a game using the first game method. By playing a game with a second game method different from the first game method, the specific condition is more easily satisfied than playing a game with the first game method. A gaming machine P1 characterized by the following.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a hit game when a result of a lottery performed based on a winning of a game ball to a starting winning port is a hit. Among such gaming machines, there are those in which a plurality of states having different degrees of advantage for the player can be set, and a game aimed at hitting the game in various states is performed to improve the interest of the player in the game. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, while the same gaming state is set, it may be disadvantageous for the player if the player does not play the game by the same gaming method. During the setting, the game method corresponding to the game state has to be continuously executed. Therefore, the game may be monotonous, and it may be difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine P1, the playability can be made different depending on whether the player plays the game using the first game method or the player plays the game using the second game method. There is an effect that it can be improved.

  In the gaming machine P1, a discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the satisfaction of a discriminating condition, and a privilege for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means being a specific discrimination result. A game execution means, wherein the first game state is such that by playing a game by the first game method, the privilege game is hardly executed, and the specific condition is hardly satisfied, and the second game state is hardly satisfied. By playing a game with the above-mentioned game method, the bonus game is more easily executed and the specific condition is more easily satisfied than playing the game with the first game method. A gaming machine P2 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine P2, the playability can be made more different depending on whether the game is played by the first game method or the second game method, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine P2, the discriminating unit performs discrimination based on establishment of a first discriminating condition, and discriminates based on establishment of a second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition. And the second discriminating means for executing the bonus game. The first discriminating means is more difficult to execute the privilege game when the discrimination is executed than the discrimination by the second discriminating means. In addition, the specific condition is hardly satisfied, and the first game method performs the determination by the first determination unit more easily than the determination by the second determination unit. And the second game method is configured to be more easily performed by the second determination means than by the first determination means. A gaming machine P3 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine P2, the playability in the first gaming state can be made different depending on the type of the determination means for which the determination is performed. There is an effect that it can be improved.

  In the gaming machine P3, the specific condition is based on the fact that the first determination state has been executed a predetermined first number of times without executing the privilege game after the first gaming state is set. It is established based on the fact that the bonus game is not executed after the second game state is set, and that the second discrimination means performs the second number of times less than the first number of times. A gaming machine P4 characterized by being configured as described above.

  According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine P3, there is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to the number of determinations by the first determination unit and the number of determinations by the second determination unit.

  In the gaming machine P3 or P4, a launching means capable of launching a game ball and a first input provided at a position where a game ball fired in a predetermined direction predetermined by the firing means can enter the ball. A ball means, a game ball emitted in the specific direction is provided at a position where the ball can enter, a second ball means different from the first ball means, and a game ball to the first ball means. First discrimination information acquisition means capable of acquiring discrimination information to be used for discrimination by the discrimination means based on the incoming ball; and A second discrimination information acquisition unit capable of acquiring discrimination information, wherein the first discrimination unit executes discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition unit, The second determination means is provided in the second determination information obtaining means. Characterized in that it is intended to perform the discrimination using the discrimination information acquired What game machine P5.

  According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P3 or P4, in the first gaming state, the game ball is fired in a specific direction to determine the first determining means and the second determining means. Since it is possible to execute both of the determination and the determination, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be improved.

  In any of the above-described gaming machines, the gaming machine γ1 is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  In any of the above-described gaming machines, the gaming machine γ2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  In any of the above-described gaming machines, the gaming machine γ3 is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, , A predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
51 Operation handle (operation means)
83 third symbol display device (display means)
112 Launch control device (part of launch means)
6400 Second entrance (entrance means)
S210 determination means S215 privilege game execution means S574 determination information acquisition means S1622 game state setting means

Claims (5)

Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Launching means capable of launching a game ball in accordance with the operation content of the operating means,
Based on the establishment of the predetermined setting condition, one of a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state disadvantageous to the player and a second gaming state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. Game state setting means capable of setting the game state of
In the second gaming state, the gaming machine is configured to perform the first operation in which a gaming ball is easily fired at a first firing interval by the firing means while at least a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration in which it is easier to operate the operating means with the second operation content in which the game ball is easily fired at a firing interval longer than the first firing interval than to operate the operating means. A gaming machine characterized by being performed. Ball entry means that game balls can enter,
Discrimination information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined discrimination information based on that a game ball has entered the ball entry means,
Determining means for performing a determination based on the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means;
Bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means being a predetermined specific determination result,
The gaming machine operates the operating means with the second operation content, rather than operating the operating means with the first operation content, while the specific condition is satisfied. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the number of times of the discrimination by the discriminating means until the discrimination using all the discrimination information acquired in the second game state is completed is easily increased. . Second ball entry means into which game balls can enter;
A second discrimination information acquisition unit capable of acquiring the discrimination information based on that a game ball has entered the second ball entry unit;
Storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means, up to a predetermined number of information, until it is used for discrimination by the discrimination means,
The discrimination means performs first discrimination means for performing discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and executes discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means. And at least a second determining means,
The discrimination by the first discriminating means is configured to be more likely to result in a more advantageous discrimination result than the discrimination by the second discriminating means,
The gaming machine, when the specific condition is satisfied, when the operating means is operated with the second operation content, than when the operating means is operated with the first operation content, The number of discriminations of the first discrimination means until the discrimination using all the discrimination information acquired in the second game state is completed is easily increased. 2. The gaming machine according to 2.   4. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the determination by the second determination unit is configured to be performed prior to the determination by the first determination unit. In the second gaming state, the gaming state setting means changes the first gaming state based on the fact that the first discriminating means has completed a predetermined first number of times without executing the privilege game. To set,
In the second game state, the game state setting means is configured to execute the first game on the basis of completion of the discrimination of the second discrimination means, which is a second number greater than the first number, without executing the privilege game. The gaming machine according to claim 3 or 4, wherein the gaming state is set.

Images